—

R E L I O N ® 650 SERIES

Line differential protection RED650

Version 2.1
Technical manual
 Document ID: 1MRK 505 364-UEN
Issued: March 2019
Revision: B
Product version: 2.1

© Copyright 2016 ABB. All rights reserved

Copyright
This document and parts thereof must not be reproduced or copied without written
permission from ABB, and the contents thereof must not be imparted to a third party, nor
used for any unauthorized purpose.

The software and hardware described in this document is furnished under a license and may
be used or disclosed only in accordance with the terms of such license.

This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL
Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/) This product includes cryptographic software written/
developed by: Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) and Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).

Trademarks
ABB and Relion are registered trademarks of the ABB Group. All other brand or product names
mentioned in this document may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective
holders.

Warranty
Please inquire about the terms of warranty from your nearest ABB representative.
Disclaimer
The data, examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for the concept or product
description and are not to be deemed as a statement of guaranteed properties. All persons
responsible for applying the equipment addressed in this manual must satisfy themselves that
each intended application is suitable and acceptable, including that any applicable safety or
other operational requirements are complied with. In particular, any risks in applications where
a system failure and/or product failure would create a risk for harm to property or persons
(including but not limited to personal injuries or death) shall be the sole responsibility of the
person or entity applying the equipment, and those so responsible are hereby requested to
ensure that all measures are taken to exclude or mitigate such risks.

This document has been carefully checked by ABB but deviations cannot be completely ruled
out. In case any errors are detected, the reader is kindly requested to notify the manufacturer.
Other than under explicit contractual commitments, in no event shall ABB be responsible or
liable for any loss or damage resulting from the use of this manual or the application of the
equipment.
Conformity
This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the
approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility
(EMC Directive 2004/108/EC) and concerning electrical equipment for use within specified
voltage limits (Low-voltage directive 2006/95/EC). This conformity is the result of tests
conducted by ABB in accordance with the product standard EN 60255-26 for the EMC directive,
and with the product standards EN 60255-1 and EN 60255-27 for the low voltage directive. The
product is designed in accordance with the international standards of the IEC 60255 series.
 Table of contents

Table of contents

Section 1 Introduction.......................................................................................................33
1.1 This manual....................................................................................................................................... 33
1.2 Intended audience........................................................................................................................... 33
1.3 Product documentation................................................................................................................. 34
1.3.1 Product documentation set...................................................................................................... 34
1.3.2 Document revision history.........................................................................................................35
1.3.3 Related documents..................................................................................................................... 35
1.4 Document symbols and conventions...........................................................................................36
1.4.1 Symbols......................................................................................................................................... 36
1.4.2 Document conventions...............................................................................................................37
1.5 IEC 61850 edition 1 / edition 2 mapping..................................................................................... 39

Section 2 Available functions........................................................................................... 43

2.1 Main protection functions............................................................................................................. 43
2.2 Back-up protection functions....................................................................................................... 43
2.3 Control and monitoring functions............................................................................................... 44
2.4 Communication................................................................................................................................46
2.5 Basic IED functions..........................................................................................................................48

Section 3 Analog inputs.................................................................................................... 51

3.1 Introduction.......................................................................................................................................51
3.2 Function block...................................................................................................................................51
3.3 Signals................................................................................................................................................ 51
3.4 Settings..............................................................................................................................................53
3.5 Monitored data................................................................................................................................ 58
3.6 Operation principle......................................................................................................................... 58
3.7 Technical data.................................................................................................................................. 59

Section 4 Binary input and output modules................................................................... 61

4.1 Binary input....................................................................................................................................... 61
4.1.1 Binary input debounce filter...................................................................................................... 61
4.1.2 Oscillation filter............................................................................................................................61
4.1.3 Settings..........................................................................................................................................61
4.1.3.1 Setting parameters for binary input modules....................................................................61
4.1.3.2 Setting parameters for binary input/output module.......................................................62

Section 5 Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI .......................................................... 63

5.1 Local HMI screen behaviour........................................................................................................... 63
5.1.1 Identification................................................................................................................................ 63
5.1.2 Settings......................................................................................................................................... 63
5.2 Local HMI signals............................................................................................................................. 63
5.2.1 Identification................................................................................................................................ 63

1
Technical manual
Table of contents

5.2.2 Function block..............................................................................................................................63

5.2.3 Signals........................................................................................................................................... 64
5.3 Basic part for LED indication module..........................................................................................64
5.3.1 Identification................................................................................................................................64
5.3.2 Function block..............................................................................................................................64
5.3.3 Signals........................................................................................................................................... 65
5.3.4 Settings......................................................................................................................................... 65
5.4 LCD part for HMI function keys control module........................................................................66
5.4.1 Identification................................................................................................................................66
5.4.2 Function block..............................................................................................................................66
5.4.3 Signals........................................................................................................................................... 66
5.4.4 Settings......................................................................................................................................... 67
5.5 Operation principle......................................................................................................................... 68
5.5.1 Local HMI.......................................................................................................................................68
5.5.1.1 Keypad........................................................................................................................................69
5.5.1.2 Display.........................................................................................................................................71
5.5.1.3 LEDs............................................................................................................................................ 73
5.5.2 LED configuration alternatives.................................................................................................74
5.5.2.1 Functionality .............................................................................................................................74
5.5.2.2 Status LEDs............................................................................................................................... 74
5.5.2.3 Indication LEDs......................................................................................................................... 75
5.5.3 Function keys............................................................................................................................... 82
5.5.3.1 Functionality .............................................................................................................................82
5.5.3.2 Operation principle..................................................................................................................82

Section 6 Differential protection.....................................................................................85

6.1 High impedance differential protection, single phase HZPDIF .............................................85
6.1.1 Identification................................................................................................................................85
6.1.2 Functionality.................................................................................................................................85
6.1.3 Function block..............................................................................................................................85
6.1.4 Signals........................................................................................................................................... 86
6.1.5 Settings......................................................................................................................................... 86
6.1.6 Monitored data............................................................................................................................ 86
6.1.7 Operation principle..................................................................................................................... 86
6.1.7.1 Logic diagram...........................................................................................................................88
6.1.8 Technical data.............................................................................................................................. 89
6.2 Line differential protection........................................................................................................... 90
6.2.1 Identification................................................................................................................................90
6.2.2 Functionality................................................................................................................................ 90
6.2.2.1 Line differential protection, 3 sets with in-zone transformers LT3CPDIF................... 90
6.2.2.2 Analog signal transfer for line differential protection..................................................... 92
6.2.3 Function block..............................................................................................................................93
6.2.4 Signals........................................................................................................................................... 95
6.2.5 Settings........................................................................................................................................101
6.2.6 Monitored data...........................................................................................................................110
6.2.7 Operation principle.................................................................................................................... 111

2
Technical manual
 Table of contents

6.2.7.1 Algorithm and logic................................................................................................................ 111

6.2.7.2 Time synchronization.............................................................................................................118
6.2.7.3 Analog signal communication for line differential protection...................................... 119
6.2.7.4 Open CT detection feature................................................................................................... 121
6.2.7.5 Binary signal transfer.............................................................................................................123
6.2.7.6 Line differential coordination function LDLPSCH .......................................................... 123
6.2.8 Technical data............................................................................................................................ 125

Section 7 Impedance protection....................................................................................129

7.1 Distance protection ZMFPDIS..................................................................................................... 129
7.1.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 129
7.1.2 Functionality............................................................................................................................... 129
7.1.3 Function block............................................................................................................................130
7.1.4 Signals..........................................................................................................................................130
7.1.5 Settings........................................................................................................................................132
7.1.6 Monitored data.......................................................................................................................... 138
7.1.7 Operation principle................................................................................................................... 139
7.1.7.1 Filtering.................................................................................................................................... 139
7.1.7.2 Distance measuring zones................................................................................................... 139
7.1.7.3 Phase-selection element...................................................................................................... 140
7.1.7.4 Directional element................................................................................................................ 141
7.1.7.5 Fuse failure.............................................................................................................................. 142
7.1.7.6 Measuring principles............................................................................................................. 142
7.1.7.7 Load encroachment............................................................................................................... 153
7.1.7.8 Simplified logic schemes...................................................................................................... 154
7.1.7.9 Measurement.......................................................................................................................... 159
7.1.8 Technical data............................................................................................................................ 163
7.2 Automatic switch onto fault logic ZCVPSOF ...........................................................................163
7.2.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 164
7.2.2 Functionality...............................................................................................................................164
7.2.3 Function block............................................................................................................................164
7.2.4 Signals..........................................................................................................................................164
7.2.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 165
7.2.6 Monitored data.......................................................................................................................... 165
7.2.7 Operation principle................................................................................................................... 165
7.2.8 Technical data............................................................................................................................ 167

Section 8 Current protection......................................................................................... 169

8.1 Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection PHPIOC ..........................................................169
8.1.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 169
8.1.2 Functionality...............................................................................................................................169
8.1.3 Function block............................................................................................................................169
8.1.4 Signals..........................................................................................................................................169
8.1.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 170
8.1.6 Monitored data.......................................................................................................................... 170
8.1.7 Operation principle.................................................................................................................... 171
8.1.8 Technical data............................................................................................................................. 171

3
Technical manual
Table of contents

8.2 Four step phase overcurrent protection OC4PTOC................................................................ 171

8.2.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 172
8.2.2 Functionality............................................................................................................................... 172
8.2.3 Function block............................................................................................................................ 173
8.2.4 Signals.......................................................................................................................................... 173
8.2.5 Settings........................................................................................................................................175
8.2.6 Monitored data.......................................................................................................................... 180
8.2.7 Operation principle................................................................................................................... 180
8.2.8 Technical data............................................................................................................................ 185
8.3 Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection EFPIOC .......................................................186
8.3.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 186
8.3.2 Functionality...............................................................................................................................186
8.3.3 Function block............................................................................................................................186
8.3.4 Signals..........................................................................................................................................187
8.3.5 Settings........................................................................................................................................187
8.3.6 Monitored data.......................................................................................................................... 187
8.3.7 Operation principle................................................................................................................... 188
8.3.8 Technical data............................................................................................................................ 188
8.4 Four step residual overcurrent protection EF4PTOC ............................................................ 188
8.4.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 188
8.4.2 Functionality...............................................................................................................................189
8.4.3 Function block............................................................................................................................189
8.4.4 Signals..........................................................................................................................................189
8.4.5 Settings........................................................................................................................................191
8.4.6 Monitored data.......................................................................................................................... 196
8.4.7 Operation principle................................................................................................................... 197
8.4.7.1 Operating quantity within the function.............................................................................197
8.4.7.2 Internal polarizing.................................................................................................................. 198
8.4.7.3 External polarizing for earth-fault function......................................................................199
8.4.7.4 Directional detection for earth fault function..................................................................199
8.4.7.5 Base quantities within the protection............................................................................... 199
8.4.7.6 Internal earth-fault protection structure.......................................................................... 199
8.4.7.7 Four residual overcurrent steps.......................................................................................... 199
8.4.7.8 Directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison
function.................................................................................................................................... 201
8.4.7.9 Second harmonic blocking element................................................................................... 202
8.4.7.10 Switch on to fault feature.................................................................................................... 204
8.4.8 Technical data............................................................................................................................206
8.5 Four step directional negative phase sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC ....... 207
8.5.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................207
8.5.2 Functionality...............................................................................................................................207
8.5.3 Function block........................................................................................................................... 208
8.5.4 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 208
8.5.5 Settings.......................................................................................................................................209
8.5.6 Monitored data...........................................................................................................................213
8.5.7 Operation principle....................................................................................................................213

4
Technical manual
 Table of contents

8.5.7.1 Operating quantity within the function.............................................................................213

8.5.7.2 Internal polarizing facility of the function.........................................................................214
8.5.7.3 External polarizing for negative sequence function....................................................... 214
8.5.7.4 Internal negative sequence protection structure............................................................ 215
8.5.7.5 Four negative sequence overcurrent stages.................................................................... 215
8.5.7.6 Directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison
function.................................................................................................................................... 216
8.5.8 Technical data............................................................................................................................ 218
8.6 Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection SDEPSDE .................... 219
8.6.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 219
8.6.2 Functionality............................................................................................................................... 219
8.6.3 Function block............................................................................................................................ 221
8.6.4 Signals.......................................................................................................................................... 221
8.6.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 222
8.6.6 Monitored data.......................................................................................................................... 224
8.6.7 Operation principle................................................................................................................... 224
8.6.7.1 Function inputs...................................................................................................................... 224
8.6.8 Technical data............................................................................................................................ 230
8.7 Breaker failure protection CCRBRF.............................................................................................231
8.7.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 231
8.7.2 Functionality............................................................................................................................... 231
8.7.3 Function block............................................................................................................................ 231
8.7.4 Signals..........................................................................................................................................232
8.7.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 232
8.7.6 Monitored data.......................................................................................................................... 233
8.7.7 Operation principle................................................................................................................... 233
8.7.8 Technical data............................................................................................................................ 236
8.8 Stub protection STBPTOC ...........................................................................................................237
8.8.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 237
8.8.2 Functionality............................................................................................................................... 237
8.8.3 Function block............................................................................................................................ 237
8.8.4 Signals..........................................................................................................................................237
8.8.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 238
8.8.6 Monitored data.......................................................................................................................... 238
8.8.7 Operation principle................................................................................................................... 238
8.8.8 Technical data............................................................................................................................ 239
8.9 Pole discordance protection CCPDSC....................................................................................... 239
8.9.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................240
8.9.2 Functionality.............................................................................................................................. 240
8.9.3 Function block........................................................................................................................... 240
8.9.4 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 240
8.9.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 241
8.9.6 Monitored data.......................................................................................................................... 241
8.9.7 Operation principle................................................................................................................... 242
8.9.7.1 Pole discordance signaling from circuit breaker.............................................................244
8.9.7.2 Unsymmetrical current detection...................................................................................... 244

5
Technical manual
Table of contents

8.9.8 Technical data............................................................................................................................244

8.10 Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP........................................................................244
8.10.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................244
8.10.2 Functionality...............................................................................................................................245
8.10.3 Function block............................................................................................................................245
8.10.4 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 246
8.10.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 246
8.10.6 Monitored data..........................................................................................................................248
8.10.7 Operation principle...................................................................................................................248
8.10.7.1 Low pass filtering.................................................................................................................. 249
8.10.7.2 Calibration of analog inputs................................................................................................250
8.10.8 Technical data............................................................................................................................ 251
8.11 Directional overpower protection GOPPDOP ..........................................................................251
8.11.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 251
8.11.2 Functionality............................................................................................................................... 251
8.11.3 Function block............................................................................................................................252
8.11.4 Signals..........................................................................................................................................252
8.11.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 253
8.11.6 Monitored data.......................................................................................................................... 254
8.11.7 Operation principle................................................................................................................... 254
8.11.7.1 Low pass filtering.................................................................................................................. 256
8.11.7.2 Calibration of analog inputs................................................................................................ 256
8.11.8 Technical data............................................................................................................................ 257
8.12 Broken conductor check BRCPTOC ........................................................................................... 258
8.12.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................258
8.12.2 Functionality...............................................................................................................................258
8.12.3 Function block............................................................................................................................258
8.12.4 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 258
8.12.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 259
8.12.6 Monitored data.......................................................................................................................... 259
8.12.7 Operation principle................................................................................................................... 259
8.12.8 Technical data............................................................................................................................260

Section 9 Voltage protection......................................................................................... 261

9.1 Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV ..........................................................................261
9.1.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 261
9.1.2 Functionality............................................................................................................................... 261
9.1.3 Function block............................................................................................................................ 261
9.1.4 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 262
9.1.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 263
9.1.6 Monitored data.......................................................................................................................... 265
9.1.7 Operation principle................................................................................................................... 265
9.1.7.1 Measurement principle......................................................................................................... 266
9.1.7.2 Time delay............................................................................................................................... 266
9.1.7.3 Blocking.................................................................................................................................... 271
9.1.7.4 Design....................................................................................................................................... 272

6
Technical manual
 Table of contents

9.1.8 Technical data............................................................................................................................ 273

9.2 Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV ............................................................................273
9.2.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 273
9.2.2 Functionality OV2PTOV............................................................................................................ 273
9.2.3 Function block............................................................................................................................274
9.2.4 Signals..........................................................................................................................................274
9.2.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 275
9.2.6 Monitored data.......................................................................................................................... 277
9.2.7 Operation principle................................................................................................................... 277
9.2.7.1 Measurement principle......................................................................................................... 278
9.2.7.2 Time delay................................................................................................................................278
9.2.7.3 Blocking....................................................................................................................................283
9.2.7.4 Design.......................................................................................................................................283
9.2.8 Technical data............................................................................................................................284
9.3 Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV ......................................................... 285
9.3.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................285
9.3.2 Functionality...............................................................................................................................285
9.3.3 Function block............................................................................................................................285
9.3.4 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 286
9.3.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 286
9.3.6 Monitored data..........................................................................................................................288
9.3.7 Operation principle...................................................................................................................288
9.3.7.1 Measurement principle......................................................................................................... 288
9.3.7.2 Time delay............................................................................................................................... 288
9.3.7.3 Blocking....................................................................................................................................293
9.3.7.4 Design.......................................................................................................................................293
9.3.8 Technical data............................................................................................................................294
9.4 Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV ................................................................................................ 294
9.4.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................294
9.4.2 Functionality.............................................................................................................................. 294
9.4.3 Function block............................................................................................................................295
9.4.4 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 295
9.4.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 295
9.4.6 Operation principle................................................................................................................... 296
9.4.7 Technical data............................................................................................................................ 297

Section 10 Multipurpose protection............................................................................... 299

10.1 General current and voltage protection CVGAPC................................................................... 299
10.1.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................299
10.1.2 Functionality...............................................................................................................................299
10.1.3 Function block........................................................................................................................... 299
10.1.4 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 300
10.1.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 301
10.1.6 Monitored data..........................................................................................................................308
10.1.7 Operation principle...................................................................................................................308
10.1.7.1 Measured quantities within CVGAPC.................................................................................308

7
Technical manual
Table of contents

10.1.7.2 Base quantities for CVGAPC function................................................................................ 310

10.1.7.3 Built-in overcurrent protection steps................................................................................. 311
10.1.7.4 Built-in undercurrent protection steps.............................................................................. 315
10.1.7.5 Built-in overvoltage protection steps................................................................................ 315
10.1.7.6 Built-in undervoltage protection steps..............................................................................316
10.1.7.7 Logic diagram......................................................................................................................... 316
10.1.8 Technical data............................................................................................................................ 320

Section 11 Secondary system supervision..................................................................... 323

11.1 Current circuit supervision CCSSPVC........................................................................................ 323
11.1.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 323
11.1.2 Functionality...............................................................................................................................323
11.1.3 Function block............................................................................................................................323
11.1.4 Signals..........................................................................................................................................323
11.1.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 324
11.1.6 Operation principle................................................................................................................... 324
11.1.7 Technical data............................................................................................................................ 325
11.2 Fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC..............................................................................................326
11.2.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................326
11.2.2 Functionality...............................................................................................................................326
11.2.3 Function block............................................................................................................................326
11.2.4 Signals..........................................................................................................................................327
11.2.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 328
11.2.6 Monitored data.......................................................................................................................... 329
11.2.7 Operation principle................................................................................................................... 329
11.2.7.1 Zero and negative sequence detection............................................................................. 329
11.2.7.2 Delta current and delta voltage detection........................................................................ 331
11.2.7.3 Dead line detection................................................................................................................333
11.2.7.4 Main logic.................................................................................................................................334
11.2.8 Technical data............................................................................................................................ 337
11.3 Fuse failure supervision VDSPVC................................................................................................ 337
11.3.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 337
11.3.2 Functionality............................................................................................................................... 337
11.3.3 Function block............................................................................................................................338
11.3.4 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 338
11.3.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 339
11.3.6 Monitored data.......................................................................................................................... 339
11.3.7 Operation principle...................................................................................................................340
11.3.8 Technical data............................................................................................................................ 341

Section 12 Control............................................................................................................. 343

12.1 Synchrocheck, energizing check, and synchronizing SESRSYN............................................343
12.1.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................343
12.1.2 Functionality...............................................................................................................................343
12.1.3 Function block........................................................................................................................... 344
12.1.4 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 344
12.1.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 346

8
Technical manual
 Table of contents

12.1.6 Monitored data..........................................................................................................................348

12.1.7 Operation principle...................................................................................................................349
12.1.7.1 Basic functionality................................................................................................................. 349
12.1.7.2 Logic diagrams.......................................................................................................................349
12.1.8 Technical data............................................................................................................................ 358
12.2 Autorecloser for 1 phase, 2 phase and/or 3 phase operation SMBRREC .......................... 359
12.2.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................359
12.2.2 Functionality.............................................................................................................................. 360
12.2.3 Function block........................................................................................................................... 360
12.2.4 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 360
12.2.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 362
12.2.6 Operation principle................................................................................................................... 363
12.2.6.1 Logic Diagrams.......................................................................................................................363
12.2.6.2 Auto-reclosing operation Off and On................................................................................ 363
12.2.6.3 Auto-reclosing mode selection........................................................................................... 364
12.2.6.4 Start auto-reclosing and conditions for start of a reclosing cycle..............................364
12.2.6.5 Control of the auto-reclosing open time for shot 1........................................................ 365
12.2.6.6 Long trip signal...................................................................................................................... 365
12.2.6.7 Time sequence diagrams..................................................................................................... 370
12.2.7 Technical data............................................................................................................................ 373
12.3 Interlocking .................................................................................................................................... 373
12.3.1 Functionality............................................................................................................................... 373
12.3.2 Operation principle................................................................................................................... 374
12.3.3 Logical node for interlocking SCILO ..................................................................................... 376
12.3.3.1 Identification...........................................................................................................................376
12.3.3.2 Functionality........................................................................................................................... 376
12.3.3.3 Function block........................................................................................................................ 376
12.3.3.4 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 376
12.3.3.5 Logic diagram......................................................................................................................... 377
12.3.4 Interlocking for busbar earthing switch BB_ES ..................................................................377
12.3.4.1 Identification........................................................................................................................... 377
12.3.4.2 Functionality............................................................................................................................377
12.3.4.3 Function block........................................................................................................................ 378
12.3.4.4 Logic diagram......................................................................................................................... 378
12.3.4.5 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 378
12.3.5 Interlocking for bus-section breaker A1A2_BS.................................................................... 379
12.3.5.1 Identification...........................................................................................................................379
12.3.5.2 Functionality........................................................................................................................... 379
12.3.5.3 Function block........................................................................................................................ 380
12.3.5.4 Logic diagram.........................................................................................................................380
12.3.5.5 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 381
12.3.6 Interlocking for bus-section disconnector A1A2_DC .........................................................382
12.3.6.1 Identification...........................................................................................................................382
12.3.6.2 Functionality........................................................................................................................... 383
12.3.6.3 Function block........................................................................................................................ 383
12.3.6.4 Logic diagram.........................................................................................................................384

9
Technical manual
Table of contents

12.3.6.5 Signals......................................................................................................................................384
12.3.7 Interlocking for bus-coupler bay ABC_BC ........................................................................... 385
12.3.7.1 Identification.......................................................................................................................... 385
12.3.7.2 Functionality........................................................................................................................... 385
12.3.7.3 Function block........................................................................................................................ 386
12.3.7.4 Logic diagram......................................................................................................................... 387
12.3.7.5 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 389
12.3.8 Interlocking for 1 1/2 CB BH ....................................................................................................391
12.3.8.1 Identification...........................................................................................................................391
12.3.8.2 Functionality............................................................................................................................391
12.3.8.3 Function blocks...................................................................................................................... 393
12.3.8.4 Logic diagrams.......................................................................................................................395
12.3.8.5 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 398
12.3.9 Interlocking for double CB bay DB ........................................................................................402
12.3.9.1 Identification.......................................................................................................................... 403
12.3.9.2 Functionality........................................................................................................................... 403
12.3.9.3 Logic diagrams...................................................................................................................... 404
12.3.9.4 Function block........................................................................................................................ 407
12.3.9.5 Signals......................................................................................................................................408
12.3.10 Interlocking for line bay ABC_LINE ........................................................................................ 411
12.3.10.1 Identification........................................................................................................................... 411
12.3.10.2 Functionality............................................................................................................................ 411
12.3.10.3 Function block.........................................................................................................................413
12.3.10.4 Logic diagram......................................................................................................................... 414
12.3.10.5 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 419
12.3.11 Interlocking for transformer bay AB_TRAFO .......................................................................421
12.3.11.1 Identification...........................................................................................................................421
12.3.11.2 Functionality............................................................................................................................421
12.3.11.3 Function block........................................................................................................................ 422
12.3.11.4 Logic diagram......................................................................................................................... 423
12.3.11.5 Signals......................................................................................................................................424
12.3.12 Position evaluation POS_EVAL............................................................................................... 426
12.3.12.1 Identification.......................................................................................................................... 426
12.3.12.2 Functionality........................................................................................................................... 426
12.3.12.3 Function block........................................................................................................................ 426
12.3.12.4 Logic diagram.........................................................................................................................426
12.3.12.5 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 427
12.4 Apparatus control APC..................................................................................................................427
12.4.1 Functionality...............................................................................................................................427
12.4.2 Operation principle...................................................................................................................428
12.4.3 Error handling............................................................................................................................ 428
12.4.4 Bay control QCBAY.................................................................................................................... 431
12.4.4.1 Functionality........................................................................................................................... 432
12.4.4.2 Function block........................................................................................................................ 432
12.4.4.3 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 432
12.4.4.4 Settings....................................................................................................................................433

10
Technical manual
 Table of contents

12.4.4.5 Operation principle................................................................................................................433

12.4.5 Local/Remote switch LOCREM.............................................................................................. 434
12.4.5.1 Function block........................................................................................................................ 435
12.4.5.2 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 435
12.4.5.3 Settings....................................................................................................................................436
12.4.5.4 Operation principle................................................................................................................436
12.4.6 Switch controller SCSWI...........................................................................................................437
12.4.6.1 Functionality .......................................................................................................................... 437
12.4.6.2 Function block........................................................................................................................ 438
12.4.6.3 Signals......................................................................................................................................438
12.4.6.4 Settings................................................................................................................................... 440
12.4.6.5 Operation principle............................................................................................................... 440
12.4.7 Circuit breaker SXCBR..............................................................................................................445
12.4.7.1 Functionality .......................................................................................................................... 446
12.4.7.2 Function block........................................................................................................................446
12.4.7.3 Signals......................................................................................................................................446
12.4.7.4 Settings....................................................................................................................................447
12.4.7.5 Operation principle................................................................................................................447
12.4.8 Proxy for signals from switching device via GOOSE XLNPROXY .................................... 451
12.4.8.1 Functionality............................................................................................................................451
12.4.8.2 Function block........................................................................................................................ 451
12.4.8.3 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 451
12.4.8.4 Settings....................................................................................................................................452
12.4.8.5 Operation principle................................................................................................................453
12.4.8.6 Position supervision..............................................................................................................453
12.4.8.7 Command response evaluation.......................................................................................... 453
12.5 Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation SLGAPC................ 454
12.5.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................455
12.5.2 Functionality.............................................................................................................................. 455
12.5.3 Function block........................................................................................................................... 455
12.5.4 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 456
12.5.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 457
12.5.6 Monitored data.......................................................................................................................... 457
12.5.7 Operation principle................................................................................................................... 457
12.5.7.1 Graphical display....................................................................................................................458
12.6 Selector mini switch VSGAPC......................................................................................................459
12.6.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................459
12.6.2 Functionality.............................................................................................................................. 459
12.6.3 Function block........................................................................................................................... 459
12.6.4 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 459
12.6.5 Settings.......................................................................................................................................460
12.6.6 Operation principle...................................................................................................................460
12.7 Generic communication function for Double Point indication DPGAPC............................ 461
12.7.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 461
12.7.2 Functionality...............................................................................................................................461
12.7.3 Function block............................................................................................................................461

11
Technical manual
Table of contents

12.7.4 Signals..........................................................................................................................................461
12.7.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 461
12.7.6 Operation principle...................................................................................................................462
12.8 Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GAPC.................................................................. 462
12.8.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................462
12.8.2 Functionality.............................................................................................................................. 462
12.8.3 Function block........................................................................................................................... 463
12.8.4 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 463
12.8.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 463
12.8.6 Operation principle...................................................................................................................464
12.9 AutomationBits, command function for DNP3.0 AUTOBITS................................................ 464
12.9.1 Identification............................................................................................................................. 464
12.9.2 Functionality.............................................................................................................................. 464
12.9.3 Function block........................................................................................................................... 465
12.9.4 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 465
12.9.5 Settings.......................................................................................................................................466
12.9.6 Operation principle...................................................................................................................466
12.10 Single command, 16 signals SINGLECMD................................................................................. 467
12.10.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................467
12.10.2 Functionality...............................................................................................................................467
12.10.3 Function block............................................................................................................................467
12.10.4 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 467
12.10.5 Settings.......................................................................................................................................468
12.10.6 Operation principle...................................................................................................................468

Section 13 Scheme communication................................................................................ 469

13.1 Scheme communication logic for distance or overcurrent protection ZCPSCH..............469
13.1.1 Identification............................................................................................................................. 469
13.1.2 Functionality.............................................................................................................................. 469
13.1.3 Function block........................................................................................................................... 469
13.1.4 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 470
13.1.5 Settings.......................................................................................................................................470
13.1.6 Operation principle................................................................................................................... 471
13.1.6.1 Blocking scheme..................................................................................................................... 471
13.1.6.2 Delta blocking scheme.......................................................................................................... 472
13.1.6.3 Permissive underreaching scheme.....................................................................................472
13.1.6.4 Permissive overreaching scheme....................................................................................... 473
13.1.6.5 Unblocking scheme................................................................................................................473
13.1.6.6 Intertrip scheme.....................................................................................................................474
13.1.6.7 Simplified logic diagram...................................................................................................... 474
13.1.7 Technical data............................................................................................................................ 475
13.2 Phase segregated scheme communication logic for distance protection ZC1PPSCH .. 476
13.2.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................476
13.2.2 Functionality...............................................................................................................................476
13.2.3 Function block............................................................................................................................477
13.2.4 Signals..........................................................................................................................................477

12
Technical manual
 Table of contents

13.2.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 478

13.2.6 Operation principle................................................................................................................... 478
13.2.6.1 Blocking scheme.................................................................................................................... 479
13.2.6.2 Permissive underreach scheme.......................................................................................... 479
13.2.6.3 Permissive overreach scheme.............................................................................................480
13.2.6.4 Unblocking scheme............................................................................................................... 480
13.2.6.5 Intertrip scheme.................................................................................................................... 480
13.2.6.6 Simplified logic diagram...................................................................................................... 480
13.2.7 Technical data............................................................................................................................482
13.3 Current reversal and Weak-end infeed logic for distance protection 3-phase
ZCRWPSCH .....................................................................................................................................482
13.3.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................482
13.3.2 Functionality.............................................................................................................................. 482
13.3.3 Function block........................................................................................................................... 483
13.3.4 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 483
13.3.5 Settings.......................................................................................................................................484
13.3.6 Operation principle...................................................................................................................484
13.3.6.1 Current reversal logic............................................................................................................484
13.3.6.2 Weak-end infeed logic.......................................................................................................... 485
13.3.7 Technical data............................................................................................................................486
13.4 Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for phase segregated communication
ZC1WPSCH ..................................................................................................................................... 487
13.4.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................487
13.4.2 Functionality...............................................................................................................................487
13.4.3 Function block........................................................................................................................... 487
13.4.4 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 488
13.4.5 Settings.......................................................................................................................................489
13.4.6 Operation principle...................................................................................................................489
13.4.6.1 Current reversal logic ...........................................................................................................489
13.4.6.2 Weak end infeed logic...........................................................................................................490
13.4.7 Technical data............................................................................................................................ 491
13.5 Local acceleration logic ZCLCPSCH........................................................................................... 491
13.5.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 491
13.5.2 Functionality...............................................................................................................................491
13.5.3 Function block........................................................................................................................... 492
13.5.4 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 492
13.5.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 492
13.5.6 Operation principle...................................................................................................................493
13.5.6.1 Zone extension....................................................................................................................... 493
13.5.6.2 Loss-of-Load acceleration................................................................................................... 493
13.6 Direct transfer trip logic.............................................................................................................. 494
13.6.1 Introduction............................................................................................................................... 494
13.6.2 Low active power and power factor protection LAPPGAPC.............................................495
13.6.2.1 Identification.......................................................................................................................... 496
13.6.2.2 Functionality........................................................................................................................... 496
13.6.2.3 Function block........................................................................................................................ 496

13
Technical manual
Table of contents

13.6.2.4 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 497

13.6.2.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................497
13.6.2.6 Monitored data...................................................................................................................... 498
13.6.2.7 Operation principle............................................................................................................... 498
13.6.2.8 Technical data........................................................................................................................ 500
13.6.3 Compensated over and undervoltage protection COUVGAPC........................................500
13.6.3.1 Identification.......................................................................................................................... 500
13.6.3.2 Functionality........................................................................................................................... 501
13.6.3.3 Function block........................................................................................................................ 501
13.6.3.4 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 501
13.6.3.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................502
13.6.3.6 Monitored data.......................................................................................................................503
13.6.3.7 Operation principle................................................................................................................503
13.6.3.8 Technical data........................................................................................................................ 505
13.6.4 Sudden change in current variation SCCVPTOC.................................................................505
13.6.4.1 Identification.......................................................................................................................... 505
13.6.4.2 Functionality........................................................................................................................... 505
13.6.4.3 Function block........................................................................................................................ 506
13.6.4.4 Signals......................................................................................................................................506
13.6.4.5 Settings................................................................................................................................... 506
13.6.4.6 Operation principle................................................................................................................507
13.6.4.7 Technical data.........................................................................................................................507
13.6.5 Carrier receive logic LCCRPTRC..............................................................................................507
13.6.5.1 Identification.......................................................................................................................... 508
13.6.5.2 Functionality........................................................................................................................... 508
13.6.5.3 Function block........................................................................................................................508
13.6.5.4 Signals......................................................................................................................................508
13.6.5.5 Settings................................................................................................................................... 509
13.6.5.6 Operation principle............................................................................................................... 509
13.6.5.7 Technical data........................................................................................................................ 509
13.6.6 Negative sequence overvoltage protection LCNSPTOV................................................... 509
13.6.6.1 Identification...........................................................................................................................510
13.6.6.2 Functionality........................................................................................................................... 510
13.6.6.3 Function block........................................................................................................................ 510
13.6.6.4 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 510
13.6.6.5 Settings.................................................................................................................................... 510
13.6.6.6 Monitored data....................................................................................................................... 511
13.6.6.7 Operation principle................................................................................................................ 511
13.6.6.8 Technical data......................................................................................................................... 511
13.6.7 Zero sequence overvoltage protection LCZSPTOV.............................................................511
13.6.7.1 Identification........................................................................................................................... 512
13.6.7.2 Functionality............................................................................................................................512
13.6.7.3 Function block.........................................................................................................................512
13.6.7.4 Signals.......................................................................................................................................512
13.6.7.5 Settings.................................................................................................................................... 512
13.6.7.6 Monitored data....................................................................................................................... 513

14
Technical manual
 Table of contents

13.6.7.7 Operation principle................................................................................................................ 513

13.6.7.8 Technical data......................................................................................................................... 513
13.6.8 Negative sequence overcurrent protection LCNSPTOC.................................................... 513
13.6.8.1 Identification...........................................................................................................................514
13.6.8.2 Functionality............................................................................................................................514
13.6.8.3 Function block........................................................................................................................ 514
13.6.8.4 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 514
13.6.8.5 Settings.................................................................................................................................... 514
13.6.8.6 Monitored data....................................................................................................................... 515
13.6.8.7 Operation principle................................................................................................................ 515
13.6.8.8 Technical data......................................................................................................................... 515
13.6.9 Zero sequence overcurrent protection LCZSPTOC............................................................ 515
13.6.9.1 Identification...........................................................................................................................516
13.6.9.2 Functionality............................................................................................................................516
13.6.9.3 Function block.........................................................................................................................516
13.6.9.4 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 516
13.6.9.5 Settings.................................................................................................................................... 516
13.6.9.6 Monitored data....................................................................................................................... 517
13.6.9.7 Operation principle................................................................................................................ 517
13.6.9.8 Technical data......................................................................................................................... 517
13.6.10 Three phase overcurrent LCP3PTOC......................................................................................517
13.6.10.1 Identification...........................................................................................................................518
13.6.10.2 Functionality............................................................................................................................518
13.6.10.3 Function block.........................................................................................................................518
13.6.10.4 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 518
13.6.10.5 Settings.................................................................................................................................... 519
13.6.10.6 Monitored data....................................................................................................................... 519
13.6.10.7 Operation principle................................................................................................................ 519
13.6.10.8 Technical data.........................................................................................................................520
13.6.11 Three phase undercurrent LCP3PTUC...................................................................................520
13.6.11.1 Identification.......................................................................................................................... 520
13.6.11.2 Functionality........................................................................................................................... 520
13.6.11.3 Function block.........................................................................................................................521
13.6.11.4 Signals.......................................................................................................................................521
13.6.11.5 Settings.................................................................................................................................... 521
13.6.11.6 Monitored data....................................................................................................................... 522
13.6.11.7 Operation principle................................................................................................................ 522
13.6.11.8 Technical data.........................................................................................................................522

Section 14 Logic................................................................................................................. 523

14.1 Tripping logic SMPPTRC .............................................................................................................. 523
14.1.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 523
14.1.2 Functionality...............................................................................................................................523
14.1.3 Function block............................................................................................................................523
14.1.4 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 524
14.1.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 524

15
Technical manual
Table of contents

14.1.6 Operation principle................................................................................................................... 525

14.1.6.1 Logic diagram.........................................................................................................................526
14.1.7 Technical data............................................................................................................................ 529
14.2 Trip matrix logic TMAGAPC..........................................................................................................529
14.2.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................529
14.2.2 Functionality...............................................................................................................................529
14.2.3 Function block........................................................................................................................... 530
14.2.4 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 530
14.2.5 Settings........................................................................................................................................531
14.2.6 Operation principle................................................................................................................... 532
14.2.7 Technical data............................................................................................................................ 533
14.3 Logic for group alarm ALMCALH................................................................................................ 533
14.3.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 533
14.3.2 Functionality...............................................................................................................................533
14.3.3 Function block........................................................................................................................... 534
14.3.4 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 534
14.3.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 535
14.3.6 Operation principle................................................................................................................... 535
14.3.7 Technical data............................................................................................................................ 535
14.4 Logic for group warning WRNCALH...........................................................................................535
14.4.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................535
14.4.2 Functionality...............................................................................................................................535
14.4.3 Function block............................................................................................................................536
14.4.4 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 536
14.4.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 537
14.4.6 Operation principle................................................................................................................... 537
14.4.7 Technical data............................................................................................................................ 537
14.5 Logic for group indication INDCALH..........................................................................................537
14.5.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 537
14.5.2 Functionality...............................................................................................................................537
14.5.3 Function block............................................................................................................................538
14.5.4 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 538
14.5.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 539
14.5.6 Operation principle................................................................................................................... 539
14.5.7 Technical data............................................................................................................................ 539
14.6 Basic configurable logic blocks.................................................................................................. 539
14.6.1 AND function block AND..........................................................................................................540
14.6.1.1 Function block........................................................................................................................540
14.6.1.2 Signals......................................................................................................................................540
14.6.1.3 Technical data......................................................................................................................... 541
14.6.2 Controllable gate function block GATE................................................................................. 541
14.6.2.1 Function block........................................................................................................................ 541
14.6.2.2 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 541
14.6.2.3 Settings.................................................................................................................................... 541
14.6.2.4 Technical data.........................................................................................................................542
14.6.3 Inverter function block INV......................................................................................................542

16
Technical manual
 Table of contents

14.6.3.1 Function block........................................................................................................................ 542

14.6.3.2 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 542
14.6.3.3 Technical data.........................................................................................................................542
14.6.4 Loop delay function block LLD............................................................................................... 542
14.6.4.1 Function block........................................................................................................................ 543
14.6.4.2 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 543
14.6.4.3 Technical data.........................................................................................................................543
14.6.5 OR function block......................................................................................................................543
14.6.5.1 Function block........................................................................................................................ 543
14.6.5.2 Signals......................................................................................................................................544
14.6.5.3 Technical data........................................................................................................................ 544
14.6.6 Pulse timer function block PULSETIMER.............................................................................. 544
14.6.6.1 Function block........................................................................................................................ 544
14.6.6.2 Signals......................................................................................................................................544
14.6.6.3 Settings....................................................................................................................................545
14.6.6.4 Technical data........................................................................................................................ 545
14.6.7 Reset-set with memory function block RSMEMORY.......................................................... 545
14.6.7.1 Function block........................................................................................................................ 545
14.6.7.2 Signals......................................................................................................................................546
14.6.7.3 Settings....................................................................................................................................546
14.6.7.4 Technical data........................................................................................................................ 546
14.6.8 Set-reset with memory function block SRMEMORY.......................................................... 546
14.6.8.1 Function block........................................................................................................................ 547
14.6.8.2 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 547
14.6.8.3 Settings....................................................................................................................................547
14.6.8.4 Technical data.........................................................................................................................547
14.6.9 Settable timer function block TIMERSET..............................................................................547
14.6.9.1 Function block........................................................................................................................ 548
14.6.9.2 Signals......................................................................................................................................548
14.6.9.3 Settings................................................................................................................................... 548
14.6.9.4 Technical data........................................................................................................................ 549
14.6.10 Exclusive OR function block XOR........................................................................................... 549
14.6.10.1 Function block........................................................................................................................ 549
14.6.10.2 Signals......................................................................................................................................549
14.6.10.3 Technical data........................................................................................................................ 550
14.7 Configurable logic blocks Q/T....................................................................................................550
14.7.1 ANDQT function block.............................................................................................................. 551
14.7.1.1 Function block.........................................................................................................................551
14.7.1.2 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 551
14.7.1.3 Technical data.........................................................................................................................552
14.7.2 Single point indication related signals combining function block INDCOMBSPQT.... 552
14.7.2.1 Function block........................................................................................................................ 552
14.7.2.2 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 552
14.7.2.3 Technical data.........................................................................................................................553
14.7.3 Single point input signal attributes converting function block INDEXTSPQT..............553
14.7.3.1 Function block........................................................................................................................ 553

17
Technical manual
Table of contents

14.7.3.2 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 553

14.7.3.3 Technical data.........................................................................................................................553
14.7.4 Invalid logic function block INVALIDQT................................................................................ 553
14.7.4.1 Function block........................................................................................................................ 554
14.7.4.2 Signals......................................................................................................................................554
14.7.4.3 Technical data.........................................................................................................................555
14.7.5 Inverter function block INVERTERQT.................................................................................... 555
14.7.5.1 Function block........................................................................................................................ 555
14.7.5.2 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 555
14.7.5.3 Technical data.........................................................................................................................556
14.7.6 ORQT function block................................................................................................................ 556
14.7.6.1 Function block........................................................................................................................ 556
14.7.6.2 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 556
14.7.6.3 Technical data.........................................................................................................................557
14.7.7 Pulse timer function block PULSETIMERQT......................................................................... 557
14.7.7.1 Function block........................................................................................................................ 557
14.7.7.2 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 557
14.7.7.3 Settings.................................................................................................................................... 557
14.7.7.4 Technical data.........................................................................................................................557
14.7.8 Reset/Set function block RSMEMORYQT.............................................................................558
14.7.8.1 Function block........................................................................................................................ 558
14.7.8.2 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 558
14.7.8.3 Settings....................................................................................................................................559
14.7.8.4 Technical data.........................................................................................................................559
14.7.9 Set/Reset function block SRMEMORYQT.............................................................................559
14.7.9.1 Function block........................................................................................................................ 559
14.7.9.2 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 559
14.7.9.3 Settings................................................................................................................................... 560
14.7.9.4 Technical data........................................................................................................................ 560
14.7.10 Settable timer function block TIMERSETQT........................................................................560
14.7.10.1 Function block........................................................................................................................ 560
14.7.10.2 Signals......................................................................................................................................560
14.7.10.3 Settings.................................................................................................................................... 561
14.7.10.4 Technical data......................................................................................................................... 561
14.7.11 Exclusive OR function block XORQT...................................................................................... 561
14.7.11.1 Function block.........................................................................................................................561
14.7.11.2 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 561
14.7.11.3 Technical data.........................................................................................................................562
14.8 Extension logic package...............................................................................................................562
14.9 Fixed signals FXDSIGN..................................................................................................................562
14.9.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................562
14.9.2 Functionality...............................................................................................................................562
14.9.3 Function block............................................................................................................................563
14.9.4 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 563
14.9.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 563
14.9.6 Operation principle................................................................................................................... 563

18
Technical manual
 Table of contents

14.10 Boolean 16 to Integer conversion B16I...................................................................................... 564

14.10.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................564
14.10.2 Function block........................................................................................................................... 564
14.10.3 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 564
14.10.4 Monitored data..........................................................................................................................565
14.10.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 565
14.10.6 Operation principle...................................................................................................................565
14.10.7 Technical data............................................................................................................................566
14.11 Boolean to integer conversion with logical node representation, 16 bit BTIGAPC.......... 566
14.11.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................566
14.11.2 Functionality.............................................................................................................................. 566
14.11.3 Function block............................................................................................................................567
14.11.4 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 567
14.11.5 Settings.......................................................................................................................................568
14.11.6 Monitored data..........................................................................................................................568
14.11.7 Operation principle...................................................................................................................568
14.11.8 Technical data............................................................................................................................569
14.12 Integer to boolean 16 conversion IB16...................................................................................... 569
14.12.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................569
14.12.2 Functionality.............................................................................................................................. 569
14.12.3 Function block........................................................................................................................... 569
14.12.4 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 569
14.12.5 Setting parameters...................................................................................................................570
14.12.6 Operation principle................................................................................................................... 570
14.12.7 Technical data.............................................................................................................................571
14.13 Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node representation ITBGAPC..................... 571
14.13.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 571
14.13.2 Functionality...............................................................................................................................572
14.13.3 Function block............................................................................................................................572
14.13.4 Signals..........................................................................................................................................572
14.13.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 573
14.13.6 Operation principle................................................................................................................... 573
14.13.7 Technical data............................................................................................................................ 574
14.14 Elapsed time integrator with limit transgression and overflow supervision TEIGAPC...574
14.14.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................574
14.14.2 Functionality...............................................................................................................................574
14.14.3 Function block............................................................................................................................575
14.14.4 Signals..........................................................................................................................................575
14.14.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 576
14.14.6 Operation principle................................................................................................................... 576
14.14.6.1 Operation accuracy................................................................................................................ 577
14.14.6.2 Memory storage..................................................................................................................... 578
14.14.7 Technical data............................................................................................................................ 578
14.15 Comparator for integer inputs INTCOMP.................................................................................578
14.15.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................578
14.15.2 Functionality...............................................................................................................................578

19
Technical manual
Table of contents

14.15.3 Function block............................................................................................................................579

14.15.4 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 579
14.15.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 579
14.15.6 Operation principle................................................................................................................... 579
14.16 Comparator for real inputs REALCOMP....................................................................................580
14.16.1 Identification............................................................................................................................. 580
14.16.2 Functionality.............................................................................................................................. 580
14.16.3 Function block........................................................................................................................... 580
14.16.4 Signals..........................................................................................................................................581
14.16.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 581
14.16.6 Operation principle................................................................................................................... 581
14.16.7 Technical data............................................................................................................................ 583

Section 15 Monitoring.......................................................................................................585
15.1 Measurements................................................................................................................................585
15.1.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................585
15.1.2 Functionality.............................................................................................................................. 585
15.1.3 Function block........................................................................................................................... 586
15.1.4 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 588
15.1.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 591
15.1.6 Monitored data..........................................................................................................................602
15.1.7 Operation principle...................................................................................................................605
15.1.7.1 Measurement supervision................................................................................................... 605
15.1.7.2 Measurements CVMMXN......................................................................................................609
15.1.7.3 Phase current measurement CMMXU................................................................................ 613
15.1.7.4 Phase-phase and phase-neutral voltage measurements VMMXU, VNMMXU............ 614
15.1.7.5 Voltage and current sequence measurements VMSQI, CMSQI.....................................614
15.1.8 Technical data............................................................................................................................ 614
15.2 Gas medium supervision SSIMG................................................................................................. 616
15.2.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 616
15.2.2 Functionality...............................................................................................................................616
15.2.3 Function block............................................................................................................................616
15.2.4 Signals..........................................................................................................................................616
15.2.5 Settings........................................................................................................................................617
15.2.6 Operation principle................................................................................................................... 617
15.2.7 Technical data............................................................................................................................ 618
15.3 Liquid medium supervision SSIML............................................................................................. 618
15.3.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 618
15.3.2 Functionality...............................................................................................................................619
15.3.3 Function block............................................................................................................................619
15.3.4 Signals..........................................................................................................................................619
15.3.5 Settings.......................................................................................................................................620
15.3.6 Operation principle...................................................................................................................620
15.3.7 Technical data............................................................................................................................ 621
15.4 Breaker monitoring SSCBR...........................................................................................................621
15.4.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 621

20
Technical manual
 Table of contents

15.4.2 Functionality............................................................................................................................... 621

15.4.3 Function block............................................................................................................................622
15.4.4 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 622
15.4.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 623
15.4.6 Monitored data..........................................................................................................................624
15.4.7 Operation principle................................................................................................................... 625
15.4.7.1 Circuit breaker contact travel time.....................................................................................627
15.4.7.2 Circuit breaker status........................................................................................................... 628
15.4.7.3 Remaining life of circuit breaker.........................................................................................628
15.4.7.4 Accumulated energy..............................................................................................................629
15.4.7.5 Circuit breaker operation cycles.........................................................................................630
15.4.7.6 Circuit breaker operation monitoring................................................................................631
15.4.7.7 Circuit breaker spring charge monitoring........................................................................ 632
15.4.7.8 Circuit breaker gas pressure indication............................................................................ 632
15.4.8 Technical data............................................................................................................................ 633
15.5 Event function EVENT................................................................................................................... 633
15.5.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................633
15.5.2 Functionality...............................................................................................................................633
15.5.3 Function block........................................................................................................................... 634
15.5.4 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 634
15.5.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 635
15.5.6 Operation principle................................................................................................................... 637
15.6 Disturbance report DRPRDRE..................................................................................................... 638
15.6.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................638
15.6.2 Functionality.............................................................................................................................. 638
15.6.3 Function block........................................................................................................................... 639
15.6.4 Signals.........................................................................................................................................640
15.6.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 642
15.6.6 Monitored data..........................................................................................................................649
15.6.7 Operation principle................................................................................................................... 653
15.6.8 Technical data............................................................................................................................659
15.7 Logical signal status report BINSTATREP................................................................................ 659
15.7.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................659
15.7.2 Functionality.............................................................................................................................. 660
15.7.3 Function block........................................................................................................................... 660
15.7.4 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 660
15.7.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 661
15.7.6 Operation principle................................................................................................................... 661
15.8 Measured value expander block RANGE_XP.............................................................................662
15.8.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................662
15.8.2 Functionality...............................................................................................................................662
15.8.3 Function block........................................................................................................................... 662
15.8.4 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 662
15.8.5 Operation principle...................................................................................................................663
15.9 Fault locator LMBRFLO.................................................................................................................663
15.9.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................663

21
Technical manual
Table of contents

15.9.2 Functionality.............................................................................................................................. 663

15.9.3 Function block........................................................................................................................... 664
15.9.4 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 664
15.9.5 Settings.......................................................................................................................................665
15.9.6 Monitored data..........................................................................................................................666
15.9.7 Operation principle...................................................................................................................666
15.9.7.1 Measuring Principle............................................................................................................... 667
15.9.7.2 Accurate algorithm for measurement of distance to fault........................................... 667
15.9.7.3 The non-compensated impedance model........................................................................ 670
15.9.7.4 IEC 60870-5-103..................................................................................................................... 670
15.9.8 Technical data............................................................................................................................ 671
15.10 Limit counter L4UFCNT................................................................................................................ 671
15.10.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 671
15.10.1.1 Identification........................................................................................................................... 671
15.10.2 Functionality............................................................................................................................... 671
15.10.3 Operation principle................................................................................................................... 671
15.10.3.1 Design....................................................................................................................................... 671
15.10.3.2 Reporting................................................................................................................................. 673
15.10.4 Function block............................................................................................................................673
15.10.5 Signals..........................................................................................................................................673
15.10.6 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 674
15.10.7 Monitored data.......................................................................................................................... 674
15.10.8 Technical data............................................................................................................................ 674
15.11 Running hour-meter TEILGAPC .................................................................................................. 674
15.11.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................674
15.11.2 Functionality...............................................................................................................................675
15.11.3 Function block............................................................................................................................675
15.11.4 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 676
15.11.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 676
15.11.6 Operation principle................................................................................................................... 676
15.11.6.1 Operation accuracy................................................................................................................678
15.11.6.2 Memory storage..................................................................................................................... 678
15.11.7 Technical data............................................................................................................................ 678

Section 16 Metering...........................................................................................................679
16.1 Pulse-counter logic PCFCNT........................................................................................................679
16.1.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................679
16.1.2 Functionality...............................................................................................................................679
16.1.3 Function block............................................................................................................................679
16.1.4 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 679
16.1.5 Settings.......................................................................................................................................680
16.1.6 Monitored data..........................................................................................................................680
16.1.7 Operation principle...................................................................................................................680
16.1.8 Technical data............................................................................................................................682
16.2 Function for energy calculation and demand handling ETPMMTR......................................682
16.2.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................682

22
Technical manual
 Table of contents

16.2.2 Functionality.............................................................................................................................. 683

16.2.3 Function block........................................................................................................................... 683
16.2.4 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 683
16.2.5 Settings.......................................................................................................................................684
16.2.6 Monitored data..........................................................................................................................685
16.2.7 Operation principle...................................................................................................................686
16.2.8 Technical data............................................................................................................................688
16.2.8.1 Technical data........................................................................................................................ 688

Section 17 Station communication................................................................................. 689

17.1 Communication protocols...........................................................................................................689
17.2 Communication protocol diagnostics...................................................................................... 689
17.3 DNP3 protocol................................................................................................................................690
17.4 IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol................................................................................... 690
17.4.1 Functionality.............................................................................................................................. 690
17.4.2 Communication interfaces and protocols........................................................................... 691
17.4.3 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 691
17.4.4 Technical data............................................................................................................................692
17.4.5 Generic communication function for Single Point indication SPGAPC, SP16GAPC..... 692
17.4.5.1 Functionality........................................................................................................................... 692
17.4.5.2 Function block........................................................................................................................ 692
17.4.5.3 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 693
17.4.5.4 Settings....................................................................................................................................693
17.4.5.5 Monitored data.......................................................................................................................693
17.4.5.6 Operation principle............................................................................................................... 694
17.4.6 Generic communication function for Measured Value MVGAPC.....................................694
17.4.6.1 Functionality........................................................................................................................... 695
17.4.6.2 Function block........................................................................................................................ 695
17.4.6.3 Signals......................................................................................................................................695
17.4.6.4 Settings....................................................................................................................................695
17.4.6.5 Monitored data...................................................................................................................... 696
17.4.6.6 Operation principle............................................................................................................... 696
17.4.7 IEC 61850-8-1 redundant station bus communication - PRP........................................... 696
17.4.7.1 Functionality........................................................................................................................... 696
17.4.7.2 Function block........................................................................................................................ 697
17.4.7.3 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 697
17.4.7.4 Settings....................................................................................................................................697
17.4.7.5 Monitored data...................................................................................................................... 698
17.4.7.6 Principle of operation........................................................................................................... 698
17.5 LON communication protocol.................................................................................................... 699
17.5.1 Functionality.............................................................................................................................. 699
17.5.2 Settings.......................................................................................................................................700
17.5.3 Operation principle...................................................................................................................700
17.5.4 Technical data.............................................................................................................................715
17.6 SPA communication protocol...................................................................................................... 716
17.6.1 Functionality............................................................................................................................... 716

23
Technical manual
Table of contents

17.6.2 Design.......................................................................................................................................... 716

17.6.3 Settings........................................................................................................................................716
17.6.4 Operation principle....................................................................................................................717
17.6.4.1 Communication ports............................................................................................................721
17.6.5 Technical data.............................................................................................................................721
17.7 IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol............................................................................... 722
17.7.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................ 722
17.7.2 Measurands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103MEAS.........................................................................722
17.7.2.1 Functionality............................................................................................................................722
17.7.2.2 Identification...........................................................................................................................722
17.7.2.3 Function block.........................................................................................................................723
17.7.2.4 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 723
17.7.2.5 Settings.................................................................................................................................... 723
17.7.3 Measurands user defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103 I103MEASUSR........................... 724
17.7.3.1 Functionality........................................................................................................................... 724
17.7.3.2 Identification...........................................................................................................................724
17.7.3.3 Function block........................................................................................................................ 724
17.7.3.4 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 724
17.7.3.5 Settings.................................................................................................................................... 725
17.7.4 Function status auto-recloser for IEC 60870-5-103 I103AR.............................................. 725
17.7.4.1 Functionality............................................................................................................................725
17.7.4.2 Identification...........................................................................................................................726
17.7.4.3 Function block........................................................................................................................ 726
17.7.4.4 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 726
17.7.4.5 Settings.................................................................................................................................... 726
17.7.5 Function status earth-fault for IEC 60870-5-103 I103EF................................................... 726
17.7.5.1 Functionality........................................................................................................................... 726
17.7.5.2 Identification...........................................................................................................................726
17.7.5.3 Function block.........................................................................................................................727
17.7.5.4 Signals.......................................................................................................................................727
17.7.5.5 Settings.................................................................................................................................... 727
17.7.6 Function status fault protection for IEC 60870-5-103 I103FLTPROT..............................727
17.7.6.1 Functionality............................................................................................................................727
17.7.6.2 Identification........................................................................................................................... 727
17.7.6.3 Function block........................................................................................................................ 728
17.7.6.4 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 728
17.7.6.5 Settings.................................................................................................................................... 729
17.7.7 IED status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IED................................................................................ 729
17.7.7.1 Functionality........................................................................................................................... 729
17.7.7.2 Identification...........................................................................................................................729
17.7.7.3 Function block........................................................................................................................ 730
17.7.7.4 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 730
17.7.7.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................730
17.7.8 Supervison status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103SUPERV......................................................... 730
17.7.8.1 Functionality........................................................................................................................... 730
17.7.8.2 Identification.......................................................................................................................... 730

24
Technical manual
 Table of contents

17.7.8.3 Function block......................................................................................................................... 731

17.7.8.4 Signals.......................................................................................................................................731
17.7.8.5 Settings.................................................................................................................................... 731
17.7.9 Status for user defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103 I103USRDEF...................................731
17.7.9.1 Functionality............................................................................................................................ 731
17.7.9.2 Identification...........................................................................................................................732
17.7.9.3 Function block.........................................................................................................................732
17.7.9.4 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 732
17.7.9.5 Settings.................................................................................................................................... 733
17.7.10 Function commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103CMD...........................................................734
17.7.10.1 Functionality........................................................................................................................... 734
17.7.10.2 Identification...........................................................................................................................734
17.7.10.3 Function block........................................................................................................................ 734
17.7.10.4 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 734
17.7.10.5 Settings.................................................................................................................................... 735
17.7.11 IED commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IEDCMD...............................................................735
17.7.11.1 Functionality............................................................................................................................735
17.7.11.2 Identification...........................................................................................................................735
17.7.11.3 Function block.........................................................................................................................735
17.7.11.4 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 735
17.7.11.5 Settings.................................................................................................................................... 736
17.7.12 Function commands user defined for IEC 60870-5-103 I103USRCMD........................... 736
17.7.12.1 Functionality........................................................................................................................... 736
17.7.12.2 Identification...........................................................................................................................736
17.7.12.3 Function block........................................................................................................................ 736
17.7.12.4 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 737
17.7.12.5 Settings.................................................................................................................................... 737
17.7.13 Function commands generic for IEC 60870-5-103 I103GENCMD.................................... 738
17.7.13.1 Functionality........................................................................................................................... 738
17.7.13.2 Identification...........................................................................................................................738
17.7.13.3 Function block........................................................................................................................ 738
17.7.13.4 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 738
17.7.13.5 Settings.................................................................................................................................... 739
17.7.14 IED commands with position and select for IEC 60870-5-103 I103POSCMD................ 739
17.7.14.1 Functionality........................................................................................................................... 739
17.7.14.2 Identification...........................................................................................................................739
17.7.14.3 Function block........................................................................................................................ 739
17.7.14.4 Signals......................................................................................................................................740
17.7.14.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................740
17.7.15 IED commands with position for IEC 60870-5-103 I103POSCMDV................................. 740
17.7.15.1 Functionality........................................................................................................................... 740
17.7.15.2 Identification.......................................................................................................................... 740
17.7.15.3 Function block.........................................................................................................................741
17.7.15.4 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 741
17.7.15.5 Settings.................................................................................................................................... 741
17.7.16 Operation principle ...................................................................................................................741

25
Technical manual
Table of contents

17.7.16.1 General......................................................................................................................................741
17.7.16.2 Communication ports...........................................................................................................750
17.7.17 Technical data............................................................................................................................ 750
17.8 Horizontal communication via GOOSE for interlocking GOOSEINTLKRCV....................... 750
17.8.1 Functionality...............................................................................................................................750
17.8.2 Function block............................................................................................................................ 751
17.8.3 Signals.......................................................................................................................................... 751
17.8.4 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 753
17.8.5 Operation principle................................................................................................................... 753
17.9 GOOSE binary receive GOOSEBINRCV.......................................................................................754
17.9.1 Function block............................................................................................................................754
17.9.2 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 754
17.9.3 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 755
17.9.4 Operation principle................................................................................................................... 756
17.10 GOOSE function block to receive a double point value GOOSEDPRCV.............................. 756
17.10.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................756
17.10.2 Functionality............................................................................................................................... 757
17.10.3 Function block............................................................................................................................ 757
17.10.4 Signals..........................................................................................................................................757
17.10.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 757
17.10.6 Operation principle .................................................................................................................. 757
17.11 GOOSE function block to receive an integer value GOOSEINTRCV..................................... 758
17.11.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................758
17.11.2 Functionality...............................................................................................................................758
17.11.3 Function block............................................................................................................................758
17.11.4 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 758
17.11.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 759
17.11.6 Operation principle .................................................................................................................. 759
17.12 GOOSE function block to receive a measurand value GOOSEMVRCV.................................759
17.12.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................759
17.12.2 Functionality.............................................................................................................................. 760
17.12.3 Function block........................................................................................................................... 760
17.12.4 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 760
17.12.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 760
17.12.6 Operation principle .................................................................................................................. 760
17.13 GOOSE function block to receive a single point value GOOSESPRCV................................. 761
17.13.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 761
17.13.2 Functionality............................................................................................................................... 761
17.13.3 Function block............................................................................................................................ 761
17.13.4 Signals..........................................................................................................................................761
17.13.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 762
17.13.6 Operation principle .................................................................................................................. 762
17.14 GOOSE VCTR configuration for send and receive GOOSEVCTRCONF................................763
17.14.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 763
17.14.2 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 763
17.15 GOOSE voltage control receiving block GOOSEVCTRRCV.....................................................763

26
Technical manual
 Table of contents

17.15.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 763

17.15.2 Signals..........................................................................................................................................763
17.16 MULTICMDRCV and MULTICMDSND..........................................................................................763
17.16.1 Functionality...............................................................................................................................763
17.16.2 Design.......................................................................................................................................... 763
17.16.2.1 General..................................................................................................................................... 763
17.16.3 Function block............................................................................................................................764
17.16.4 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 764
17.16.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 766
17.16.6 Operation principle................................................................................................................... 766
17.17 Security events on protocols SECALARM..................................................................................766
17.17.1 Security alarm SECALARM....................................................................................................... 766
17.17.1.1 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 766
17.17.1.2 Settings.................................................................................................................................... 767
17.18 Activity logging parameters ACTIVLOG.................................................................................... 767
17.18.1 Activity logging ACTIVLOG...................................................................................................... 767
17.18.2 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 767

Section 18 Remote communication.................................................................................769

18.1 Binary signal transfer....................................................................................................................769
18.1.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................769
18.1.2 Functionality...............................................................................................................................769
18.1.3 Function block............................................................................................................................769
18.1.4 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 770
18.1.5 Settings........................................................................................................................................771
18.1.6 Monitored data.......................................................................................................................... 774
18.1.7 Operation principle................................................................................................................... 775
18.2 Transmission of local analog data via LDCM to remote end, function block
LDCMTRN called LDCMTransmit.................................................................................................775
18.2.1 Function block............................................................................................................................ 775
18.2.2 Signals..........................................................................................................................................776

Section 19 Security............................................................................................................ 777

19.1 Authority check ATHCHCK............................................................................................................777
19.1.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 777
19.1.2 Functionality............................................................................................................................... 777
19.1.3 Operation principle .................................................................................................................. 778
19.1.3.1 Authorization with Central Account Management enabled IED...................................780
19.2 Authority management AUTHMAN............................................................................................ 782
19.2.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 782
19.2.2 AUTHMAN....................................................................................................................................782
19.2.3 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 782
19.3 FTP access with password FTPACCS.........................................................................................782
19.3.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 782
19.3.2 FTP access with TLS, FTPACCS...............................................................................................782
19.3.3 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 783
19.4 Authority status ATHSTAT........................................................................................................... 783

27
Technical manual
Table of contents

19.4.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 783

19.4.2 Functionality...............................................................................................................................783
19.4.3 Function block............................................................................................................................783
19.4.4 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 783
19.4.5 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 784
19.4.6 Operation principle .................................................................................................................. 784
19.5 Self supervision with internal event list INTERRSIG............................................................... 784
19.5.1 Functionality...............................................................................................................................784
19.5.2 Function block........................................................................................................................... 784
19.5.3 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 785
19.5.4 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 785
19.5.5 Operation principle................................................................................................................... 785
19.5.5.1 Internal signals....................................................................................................................... 786
19.5.5.2 Supervision of analog inputs...............................................................................................788
19.5.6 Technical data............................................................................................................................ 788
19.6 ChangeLock function CHNGLCK.................................................................................................788
19.6.1 Functionality...............................................................................................................................788
19.6.2 Function block............................................................................................................................789
19.6.3 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 789
19.6.4 Operation principle .................................................................................................................. 789
19.7 Denial of service DOS....................................................................................................................790
19.7.1 Functionality ..............................................................................................................................790
19.7.2 Function blocks......................................................................................................................... 790
19.7.3 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 790
19.7.4 Settings........................................................................................................................................791
19.7.5 Monitored data.......................................................................................................................... 791
19.7.6 Operation principle................................................................................................................... 792

Section 20 Basic IED functions.........................................................................................793

20.1 Time synchronization TIMESYNCHGEN.....................................................................................793
20.1.1 Functionality...............................................................................................................................793
20.1.2 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 793
20.1.3 Operation principle .................................................................................................................. 797
20.1.3.1 General concepts....................................................................................................................797
20.1.3.2 Real-time clock (RTC) operation......................................................................................... 799
20.1.3.3 Synchronization alternatives.............................................................................................. 800
20.1.4 Technical data............................................................................................................................802
20.2 Parameter setting groups........................................................................................................... 803
20.2.1 Functionality.............................................................................................................................. 803
20.2.2 Function block........................................................................................................................... 803
20.2.3 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 803
20.2.4 Settings.......................................................................................................................................804
20.2.5 Operation principle.................................................................................................................. 804
20.3 Test mode functionality TESTMODE......................................................................................... 805
20.3.1 Functionality.............................................................................................................................. 805
20.3.2 Function block........................................................................................................................... 805

28
Technical manual
 Table of contents

20.3.3 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 806

20.3.4 Settings.......................................................................................................................................806
20.3.5 Operation principle ..................................................................................................................806
20.4 IED identifiers TERMINALID.........................................................................................................807
20.4.1 Functionality.............................................................................................................................. 807
20.4.2 Settings ...................................................................................................................................... 807
20.5 Product information PRODINF................................................................................................... 808
20.5.1 Functionality.............................................................................................................................. 808
20.5.2 Settings ......................................................................................................................................808
20.5.3 Factory defined settings......................................................................................................... 808
20.6 Signal matrix for binary inputs SMBI.........................................................................................809
20.6.1 Functionality.............................................................................................................................. 809
20.6.2 Function block........................................................................................................................... 809
20.6.3 Signals......................................................................................................................................... 809
20.6.4 Operation principle................................................................................................................... 810
20.7 Signal matrix for binary outputs SMBO ................................................................................... 810
20.7.1 Functionality...............................................................................................................................810
20.7.2 Function block............................................................................................................................810
20.7.3 Signals.......................................................................................................................................... 811
20.7.4 Operation principle....................................................................................................................811
20.8 Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI......................................................................................... 811
20.8.1 Functionality............................................................................................................................... 811
20.8.2 Function block............................................................................................................................ 811
20.8.3 Signals..........................................................................................................................................812
20.8.4 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 813
20.8.5 Operation principle .................................................................................................................. 815
20.8.5.1 Frequency values.................................................................................................................... 816
20.9 Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM........................................................................................... 816
20.9.1 Functionality...............................................................................................................................816
20.9.2 Function block............................................................................................................................ 817
20.9.3 Signals..........................................................................................................................................817
20.9.4 Settings........................................................................................................................................817
20.9.5 Operation principle .................................................................................................................. 818
20.10 Global base values GBASVAL....................................................................................................... 818
20.10.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 818
20.10.2 Functionality...............................................................................................................................818
20.10.3 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 819
20.11 Primary system values PRIMVAL................................................................................................. 819
20.11.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 819
20.11.2 Functionality...............................................................................................................................819
20.11.3 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 819

Section 21 IED hardware................................................................................................... 821

21.1 Overview.......................................................................................................................................... 821
21.1.1 Variants of case size with local HMI display.........................................................................821
21.1.2 Case from the rear side............................................................................................................822

29
Technical manual
Table of contents

21.2 Hardware modules........................................................................................................................ 822

21.2.1 Overview......................................................................................................................................822
21.2.2 Numeric processing module (NUM)...................................................................................... 823
21.2.2.1 Introduction............................................................................................................................ 823
21.2.2.2 Functionality........................................................................................................................... 823
21.2.2.3 Block diagram.........................................................................................................................824
21.2.3 Power supply module (PSM)................................................................................................... 824
21.2.3.1 Introduction............................................................................................................................ 824
21.2.3.2 Design...................................................................................................................................... 824
21.2.3.3 Technical data.........................................................................................................................825
21.2.4 Local human-machine interface (Local HMI)....................................................................... 825
21.2.5 Transformer input module (TRM).......................................................................................... 825
21.2.5.1 Introduction............................................................................................................................ 825
21.2.5.2 Design.......................................................................................................................................825
21.2.5.3 Technical data.........................................................................................................................826
21.2.6 Analog digital conversion module, with time synchronization (ADM) ...........................827
21.2.6.1 Introduction............................................................................................................................ 827
21.2.6.2 Design.......................................................................................................................................827
21.2.7 Binary input module (BIM).......................................................................................................828
21.2.7.1 Introduction............................................................................................................................ 828
21.2.7.2 Design...................................................................................................................................... 829
21.2.7.3 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 831
21.2.7.4 Settings....................................................................................................................................832
21.2.7.5 Monitored data.......................................................................................................................832
21.2.7.6 Technical data.........................................................................................................................832
21.2.8 Binary output modules (BOM)................................................................................................ 833
21.2.8.1 Introduction............................................................................................................................ 833
21.2.8.2 Design...................................................................................................................................... 834
21.2.8.3 Signals...................................................................................................................................... 835
21.2.8.4 Settings....................................................................................................................................836
21.2.8.5 Monitored data.......................................................................................................................836
21.2.8.6 Technical data........................................................................................................................ 840
21.2.9 Binary input/output module (IOM)....................................................................................... 840
21.2.9.1 Introduction............................................................................................................................840
21.2.9.2 Design.......................................................................................................................................841
21.2.9.3 Signals......................................................................................................................................843
21.2.9.4 Settings....................................................................................................................................843
21.2.9.5 Monitored data...................................................................................................................... 844
21.2.9.6 Technical data........................................................................................................................ 846
21.2.10 Serial and LON communication module (SLM) .................................................................. 848
21.2.10.1 Introduction............................................................................................................................848
21.2.10.2 Design...................................................................................................................................... 848
21.2.10.3 Technical data........................................................................................................................ 849
21.2.11 Galvanic RS485 communication module..............................................................................849
21.2.11.1 Introduction............................................................................................................................ 849
21.2.11.2 Design...................................................................................................................................... 849

30
Technical manual
 Table of contents

21.2.11.3 Technical data........................................................................................................................ 850

21.2.12 Optical ethernet module (OEM)..............................................................................................851
21.2.12.1 Introduction.............................................................................................................................851
21.2.12.2 Functionality............................................................................................................................851
21.2.12.3 Design.......................................................................................................................................851
21.2.12.4 Technical data......................................................................................................................... 851
21.2.13 Line data communication module (LDCM).......................................................................... 852
21.2.13.1 Introduction............................................................................................................................ 852
21.2.13.2 Design.......................................................................................................................................852
21.2.13.3 Technical data.........................................................................................................................853
21.2.14 IRIG-B time synchronization module IRIG-B.........................................................................854
21.2.14.1 Introduction............................................................................................................................ 854
21.2.14.2 Design...................................................................................................................................... 854
21.2.14.3 Settings................................................................................................................................... 854
21.2.14.4 Technical data.........................................................................................................................855
21.3 Dimensions..................................................................................................................................... 855
21.3.1 Case without rear cover...........................................................................................................855
21.3.2 Case with rear cover................................................................................................................. 856
21.3.3 Flush mounting dimensions................................................................................................... 858
21.3.4 Side-by-side flush mounting dimensions............................................................................ 858
21.3.5 Wall mounting dimensions......................................................................................................859
21.4 Mounting alternatives.................................................................................................................. 860
21.4.1 Flush mounting......................................................................................................................... 860
21.4.1.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................. 860
21.4.1.2 Mounting procedure for flush mounting..........................................................................860
21.4.2 19” panel rack mounting.......................................................................................................... 861
21.4.2.1 Overview...................................................................................................................................861
21.4.2.2 Mounting procedure for 19” panel rack mounting.......................................................... 861
21.4.3 Wall mounting............................................................................................................................ 862
21.4.3.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................. 862
21.4.3.2 Mounting procedure for wall mounting............................................................................ 863
21.4.3.3 How to reach the rear side of the IED................................................................................863
21.4.4 Side-by-side 19” rack mounting............................................................................................. 864
21.4.4.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................. 864
21.4.4.2 Mounting procedure for side-by-side rack mounting.................................................... 865
21.4.4.3 IED mounted with a RHGS6 case........................................................................................ 865
21.4.5 Side-by-side flush mounting...................................................................................................866
21.4.5.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................. 866
21.4.5.2 Mounting procedure for side-by-side flush mounting...................................................867
21.5 Technical data................................................................................................................................ 867
21.5.1 Enclosure.....................................................................................................................................867
21.5.2 Electrical safety......................................................................................................................... 868
21.5.3 Connection system...................................................................................................................868
21.5.4 Influencing factors....................................................................................................................869
21.5.5 Type tests according to standard......................................................................................... 870

31
Technical manual
Table of contents

Section 22 Labels............................................................................................................... 873

22.1 Labels on IED.................................................................................................................................. 873

Section 23 Connection diagrams..................................................................................... 877

Section 24 Inverse time characteristics......................................................................... 879

24.1 Application...................................................................................................................................... 879
24.2 Principle of operation................................................................................................................... 881
24.2.1 Mode of operation.....................................................................................................................881
24.3 Inverse characteristics................................................................................................................. 886

Section 25 Glossary........................................................................................................... 915

32
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 1
Introduction

Section 1 Introduction

1.1 This manual GUID-AB423A30-13C2-46AF-B7FE-A73BB425EB5F v19

The technical manual contains operation principle descriptions, and lists function blocks, logic
diagrams, input and output signals, setting parameters and technical data, sorted per
function. The manual can be used as a technical reference during the engineering phase,
installation and commissioning phase, and during normal service.

1.2 Intended audience GUID-C9B8127F-5748-4BEA-9E4F-CC762FE28A3A v10

This manual addresses system engineers and installation and commissioning personnel, who
use technical data during engineering, installation and commissioning, and in normal service.

The system engineer must have a thorough knowledge of protection systems, protection
equipment, protection functions and the configured functional logic in the IEDs. The
installation and commissioning personnel must have a basic knowledge in handling electronic
equipment.

33
Technical manual
Section 1 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Introduction

1.3 Product documentation

1.3.1 Product documentation set GUID-3AA69EA6-F1D8-47C6-A8E6-562F29C67172 v15

Deinstalling & disposal

Planning & purchase

Decommissioning
Commissioning

Maintenance
Engineering

Operation
Installing
Engineering manual
Installation manual

Commissioning manual
Operation manual

Application manual

Technical manual

Communication
protocol manual
Cyber security
deployment guideline
IEC07000220-4-en.vsd
IEC07000220 V4 EN-US

Figure 1: The intended use of manuals throughout the product lifecycle

The engineering manual contains instructions on how to engineer the IEDs using the various
tools available within the PCM600 software. The manual provides instructions on how to set
up a PCM600 project and insert IEDs to the project structure. The manual also recommends a
sequence for the engineering of protection and control functions, LHMI functions as well as
communication engineering for IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 61850, DNP3, LON and SPA.

The installation manual contains instructions on how to install the IED. The manual provides
procedures for mechanical and electrical installation. The chapters are organized in the
chronological order in which the IED should be installed.

The commissioning manual contains instructions on how to commission the IED. The manual
can also be used by system engineers and maintenance personnel for assistance during the
testing phase. The manual provides procedures for the checking of external circuitry and
energizing the IED, parameter setting and configuration as well as verifying settings by
secondary injection. The manual describes the process of testing an IED in a station which is
not in service. The chapters are organized in the chronological order in which the IED should be
commissioned. The relevant procedures may be followed also during the service and
maintenance activities.

The operation manual contains instructions on how to operate the IED once it has been
commissioned. The manual provides instructions for the monitoring, controlling and setting of
the IED. The manual also describes how to identify disturbances and how to view calculated
and measured power grid data to determine the cause of a fault.

34
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 1
Introduction

The application manual contains application descriptions and setting guidelines sorted per
function. The manual can be used to find out when and for what purpose a typical protection
function can be used. The manual can also provide assistance for calculating settings.

The technical manual contains operation principle descriptions, and lists function blocks, logic
diagrams, input and output signals, setting parameters and technical data, sorted per
function. The manual can be used as a technical reference during the engineering phase,
installation and commissioning phase, and during normal service.

The communication protocol manual describes the communication protocols supported by

the IED. The manual concentrates on the vendor-specific implementations.

The point list manual describes the outlook and properties of the data points specific to the
IED. The manual should be used in conjunction with the corresponding communication
protocol manual.

The cyber security deployment guideline describes the process for handling cyber security
when communicating with the IED. Certification, Authorization with role based access control,
and product engineering for cyber security related events are described and sorted by
function. The guideline can be used as a technical reference during the engineering phase,
installation and commissioning phase, and during normal service.

1.3.2 Document revision history GUID-C8027F8A-D3CB-41C1-B078-F9E59BB73A6C v2

Document revision/date History

January 2016 First release

B/March 2019 Maintenance release

1.3.3 Related documents GUID-94E8A5CA-BE1B-45AF-81E7-5A41D34EE112 v4

Documents related to RED650 Document numbers

Application manual 1MRK 505 363-UEN
Commissioning manual 1MRK 505 365-UEN
Product guide 1MRK 505 366-BEN
Technical manual 1MRK 505 364-UEN
Type test certificate 1MRK 505 366-TEN

650 series manuals Document numbers

Operation manual 1MRK 500 125-UEN
Engineering manual 1MRK 511 381-UEN
Installation manual 1MRK 514 025-UEN
Communication protocol manual, DNP3 1MRK 511 374-UUS
Communication protocol manual, IEC 60870-5-103 1MRK 511 377-UEN
Communication protocol manual, IEC 61850 Edition 1 1MRK 511 375-UEN
Communication protocol manual, IEC 61850 Edition 2 1MRK 511 376-UEN
Communication protocol manual, LON 1MRK 511 378-UEN
Communication protocol manual, SPA 1MRK 511 379-UEN
Point list manual, DNP3 1MRK 511 380-UUS
Accessories guide IEC: 1MRK 514 012-UEN
ANSI: 1MRK 514 012-UUS
Table continues on next page

35
Technical manual
Section 1 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Introduction

650 series manuals Document numbers

Cyber security deployment guideline 1MRK 511 382-UEN
Connection and Installation components 1MRK 513 003-BEN
Test system, COMBITEST 1MRK 512 001-BEN

1.4 Document symbols and conventions

1.4.1 Symbols GUID-2945B229-DAB0-4F15-8A0E-B9CF0C2C7B15 v12

The electrical warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which could
result in electrical shock.

The warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which could result in
personal injury.

The caution hot surface icon indicates important information or warning about
the temperature of product surfaces.

Class 1 Laser product. Take adequate measures to protect the eyes and do not
view directly with optical instruments.

The caution icon indicates important information or warning related to the

concept discussed in the text. It might indicate the presence of a hazard which
could result in corruption of software or damage to equipment or property.

The information icon alerts the reader of important facts and conditions.

The tip icon indicates advice on, for example, how to design your project or
how to use a certain function.

Although warning hazards are related to personal injury, it is necessary to understand that
under certain operational conditions, operation of damaged equipment may result in
degraded process performance leading to personal injury or death. It is important that the
user fully complies with all warning and cautionary notices.

36
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 1
Introduction

1.4.2 Document conventions GUID-96DFAB1A-98FE-4B26-8E90-F7CEB14B1AB6 v8

• Abbreviations and acronyms in this manual are spelled out in the glossary. The glossary
also contains definitions of important terms.
• Push button navigation in the LHMI menu structure is presented by using the push button
icons.
For example, to navigate between the options, use and .
• HMI menu paths are presented in bold.
For example, select Main menu/Settings.
• LHMI messages are shown in Courier font.
For example, to save the changes in non-volatile memory, select Yes and press .
• Parameter names are shown in italics.
For example, the function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting.
• Each function block symbol shows the available input/output signal.
• the character ^ in front of an input/output signal name indicates that the signal
name may be customized using the PCM600 software.
• the character * after an input signal name indicates that the signal must be
connected to another function block in the application configuration to achieve a
valid application configuration.
• Dimensions are provided both in inches and millimeters. If it is not specifically mentioned
then the dimension is in millimeters.
• Logic diagrams describe the signal logic of the function block and are bordered by dashed
lines.
In a logic diagram, input and output signal paths are shown as lines that touch the outer
border of the diagram. Input signals are always on the left-hand side and output signals
are on the right-hand side.
Input and output signals can be configured using PCM600. They can be connected to the
inputs and outputs of other functions and to binary inputs and outputs. Examples of input
signals are BLKTR, BLOCK, and VTSZ. Examples of output signals are TRIP, START, STL1,
STL2, and STL3.
• Frames with a shaded area on the right-hand side represent setting parameters.
These parameters can only be set via the PST or LHMI. Their values are high (1) only
when the corresponding setting parameter is set to the symbolic value specified
within the frame. Example is the signal Timer tPP=On. Their logical values
correspond automatically to the selected setting value.
• Internal signals are illustrated graphically and end approximately 2 mm from the
frame edge. If an internal signal path cannot be drawn with a continuous line, the
same signal name is used where the signal should continue, see figure 2 and figure 3.
Example of the internal signal is BLK.
• Signal paths that extend beyond the logic diagram and continue in another diagram
will be approximately 2 mm from the frame edge, see figure 3 and figure 4. Examples
are STNDL1N, STNDL2N, STNDL3N, STNDL1L2, STNDL2L3, and STNDL3L1.

37
Technical manual
Section 1 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Introduction

STZMPP
OR
STCND

AND STNDL1L2
L1L2

STNDL2L3
L2L3 AND

L3L1 AND STNDL3L1

AND STNDL1N
L1N

AND STNDL2N
L2N

STNDL3N
L3N AND

OR STPE

OR
VTSZ STND
OR AND
BLOCK
BLOCFUNC BLK

99000557-2.vsd
IEC99000557-TIFF V3 EN-US

Figure 2: Logic diagram example with intermediate output signals

IEC00000488-TIFF V1 EN-US

Figure 3: Logic diagram example with intermediate input signals

38
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 1
Introduction

Timer tPP=On
STZMPP AND tPP
AND
t

BLOCFUNC
OR OR
tPE
t
AND
Timer tPE=On AND
STZMPE 15ms
BLKTR AND t
TRIP
BLK OR

STL1 AND TRL1

STL2 AND TRL2

STL3 AND TRL3

IEC09000887-3-en.vsdx

IEC09000887 V3 EN-US

Figure 4: Logic diagram example with a parameter input

Illustrations are used as an example and might show other products than the
one the manual describes. The example that is illustrated is still valid.

1.5 IEC 61850 edition 1 / edition 2 mapping GUID-C5133366-7260-4C47-A975-7DBAB3A33A96 v3

Table 1: IEC 61850 edition 1 / edition 2 mapping

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes
AGSAL AGSAL AGSAL
SECLLN0
ALMCALH ALMCALH ALMCALH
ALTIM - ALTIM
ALTMS - ALTMS
ALTRK - ALTRK
BRCPTOC BRCPTOC BRCPTOC
BTIGAPC B16IFCVI BTIGAPC
CCPDSC CCRPLD CCPDSC
CCRBRF CCRBRF CCRBRF
CCSSPVC CCSRDIF CCSSPVC
CMMXU CMMXU CMMXU
CMSQI CMSQI CMSQI
Table continues on next page

39
Technical manual
Section 1 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Introduction

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

CVGAPC GF2LLN0 GF2MMXN
GF2MMXN GF2PHAR
GF2PHAR GF2PTOV
GF2PTOV GF2PTUC
GF2PTUC GF2PTUV
GF2PTUV GF2PVOC
GF2PVOC PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC
CVMMXN CVMMXN CVMMXN
DPGAPC DPGGIO DPGAPC
DRPRDRE DRPRDRE DRPRDRE
EF4PTOC EF4LLN0 EF4PTRC
EF4PTRC EF4RDIR
EF4RDIR GEN4PHAR
GEN4PHAR PH1PTOC
PH1PTOC
EFPIOC EFPIOC EFPIOC
ETPMMTR ETPMMTR ETPMMTR
FUFSPVC SDDRFUF FUFSPVC
HZPDIF HZPDIF HZPDIF
INDCALH INDCALH INDCALH
ITBGAPC IB16FCVB ITBGAPC
L4UFCNT L4UFCNT L4UFCNT
LCPTTR LCPTTR LCPTTR
LD0LLN0 LLN0 LLN0
LDLPSCH LDLPDIF LDLPSCH
LFPTTR LFPTTR LFPTTR
LMBRFLO LMBRFLO LMBRFLO
LOVPTUV LOVPTUV LOVPTUV
LPHD LPHD LPHD
LT3CPDIF LT3CPDIF LT3CGAPC
LT3CPDIF
LT3CPHAR
LT3CPTRC
MVGAPC MVGGIO MVGAPC
NS4PTOC EF4LLN0 EF4PTRC
EF4PTRC EF4RDIR
EF4RDIR PH1PTOC
GEN4PHAR
PH1PTOC
OC4PTOC OC4LLN0 GEN4PHAR
GEN4PHAR PH3PTOC
PH3PTOC PH3PTRC
PH3PTRC
OV2PTOV GEN2LLN0 OV2PTOV
OV2PTOV PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC
PCFCNT PCGGIO PCFCNT
PHPIOC PHPIOC PHPIOC
PRPSTATUS RCHLCCH RCHLCCH
SCHLCCH
Table continues on next page

40
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 1
Introduction

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

QCBAY QCBAY BAY/LLN0
QCRSV QCRSV QCRSV
REFPDIF REFPDIF REFPDIF
ROV2PTOV GEN2LLN0 PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC ROV2PTOV
ROV2PTOV
SCILO SCILO SCILO
SCSWI SCSWI SCSWI
SESRSYN RSY1LLN0 AUT1RSYN
AUT1RSYN MAN1RSYN
MAN1RSYN SYNRSYN
SYNRSYN
SINGLELCCH - SCHLCCH
SLGAPC SLGGIO SLGAPC
SMBRREC SMBRREC SMBRREC
SMPPTRC SMPPTRC SMPPTRC
SP16GAPC SP16GGIO SP16GAPC
SPC8GAPC SPC8GGIO SPC8GAPC
SPGAPC SPGGIO SPGAPC
SSCBR SSCBR SSCBR
SSIMG SSIMG SSIMG
SSIML SSIML SSIML
SXCBR SXCBR SXCBR
SXSWI SXSWI SXSWI
T3WPDIF T3WPDIF T3WGAPC
T3WPDIF
T3WPHAR
T3WPTRC
TEIGAPC TEIGGIO TEIGAPC
TEILGAPC TEILGGIO TEILGAPC
TMAGAPC TMAGGIO TMAGAPC
TRPTTR TRPTTR TRPTTR
UV2PTUV GEN2LLN0 PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC UV2PTUV
UV2PTUV
VMMXU VMMXU VMMXU
VMSQI VMSQI VMSQI
VNMMXU VNMMXU VNMMXU
VSGAPC VSGGIO VSGAPC
WRNCALH WRNCALH WRNCALH
ZCLCPSCH ZCLCPLAL ZCLCPSCH
ZCPSCH ZCPSCH ZCPSCH
Table continues on next page

41
Technical manual
Section 1 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Introduction

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

ZCRWPSCH ZCRWPSCH ZCRWPSCH
ZCVPSOF ZCVPSOF ZCVPSOF
ZMFPDIS ZMFLLN0 PSFPDIS
PSFPDIS PSFPDIS
ZMFPDIS ZMFPDIS
ZMFPTRC ZMFPTRC
ZMMMXU ZMMMXU

42
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 2
Available functions

Section 2 Available functions

2.1 Main protection functions GUID-66BAAD98-851D-4AAC-B386-B38B57718BD2 v12

Table 2: Example of quantities

2 = number of basic instances

0-3 = option quantities
3-A03 = optional function included in packages A03 (refer to ordering details)

IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Line Differential

RED650 (A11)
Differential protection
HZPDIF 87 1Ph high impedance differential protection 0-3 3333
- ---
AAAA
0000
2222
L3CPDIF 87L Line differential protection, 3 CT sets, 2–3 line ends 1 11
L6CPDIF 87L Line differential protection, 6 CT sets, 3–5 line ends 1 1111
- -
AA
00
44
LT3CPDIF 87LT Line differential protection, 3 CT sets, with inzone 1
transformers, 2–3 line ends
LT6CPDIF 87LT Line differential protection, 6 CT sets, with inzone 1 1111
transformers, 3–5 line ends - ---
AAAA
0000
6666
LDLPSCH 87L Line differential protection logic 1
Impedance protection
ZMFPDIS 21 Distance protection, quad & mho characteristic 1
ZCVPSOF Automatic switch onto fault logic, voltage and 1
current based

2.2 Back-up protection functions GUID-A8D0852F-807F-4442-8730-E44808E194F0 v11

IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Line Differential

RED650 (A11)
Current protection
PHPIOC 50 Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection 1
OC4PTOC 51_671) Four step phase overcurrent protection 1

EFPIOC 50N Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection 1

EF4PTOC 51N Four step residual overcurrent protection 1
67N2)
Table continues on next page

43
Technical manual
Section 2 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Available functions

IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Line Differential

RED650 (A11)
NS4PTOC 46I2 Four step directional negative phase sequence
overcurrent protection
SDEPSDE 67N Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and
power protection
CCRBRF 50BF Breaker failure protection 1
STBPTOC 50STB Stub protection
CCPDSC 52PD Pole discordance protection 1
GUPPDUP 37 Directional underpower protection
GOPPDOP 32 Directional overpower protection
BRCPTOC 46 Broken conductor check

Voltage protection
UV2PTUV 27 Two step undervoltage protection 1
OV2PTOV 59 Two step overvoltage protection
ROV2PTOV 59N Two step residual overvoltage protection
LOVPTUV 27 Loss of voltage check

Multipurpose protection
CVGAPC General current and voltage protection 2

1) 67 requires voltage
2) 67N requires voltage

2.3 Control and monitoring functions GUID-E3777F16-0B76-4157-A3BF-0B6B978863DE v13

IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Line differential

RED650 (A11)
Control
SESRSYN Synchrocheck, energizing check and synchronizing 1
SMBRREC Autorecloser 1
QCBAY Apparatus control 1
LOCREM Handling of LRswitch positions 1
LOCREMCTRL LHMI control of PSTO 1
SLGAPC Logic Rotating Switch for function selection and LHMI presentation 15
VSGAPC Selector mini switch 20
DPGAPC Generic communication function for Double Point indication 16
SPC8GAPC Single Point Generic Control 8 signals 5
AUTOBITS AutomationBits, command function for DNP3.0 3
SINGLECMD Single command, 16 signals 4
I103CMD Function commands for IEC 60870-5-103 1
I103GENCMD Function commands generic for IEC 60870-5-103 50
I103POSCMD IED commands with position and select for IEC 60870-5-103 50
I103POSCMDV IED direct commands with position for IEC 60870-5-503 50
I103IEDCMD IED commands for IEC 60870-5-103 1
Table continues on next page

44
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 2
Available functions

IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Line differential

RED650 (A11)
I103USRCMD Function commands user defined for IEC 60870-5-103 4
SCILO Interlocking 1
SCSWI Switch Controller 1
SXCBR Circuit Breaker 1
Circuit breaker for 1CB 1
Secondary system supervision
CCSSPVC Current circuit supervison 1
FUFSPVC Fuse failure supervision 1
Logic
SMPPTRC Tripping logic 6
TMAGAPC Trip matrix logic 12
ALMCALH Logic for group alarm 5
WRNCALH Logic for group warning 5
INDCALH Logic for group indication 5
AND, GATE, INV, Basic configurable logic blocks (see Table 3) 40–420
LLD, OR,
PULSETIMER,
RSMEMORY,
SRMEMORY,
TIMERSET, XOR
FXDSIGN Fixed signal function block 1
B16I Boolean 16 to Integer conversion 18
BTIGAPC Boolean 16 to Integer conversion with Logic Node representation 16
IB16 Integer to Boolean 16 conversion 18
ITBGAPC Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with Logic Node representation 16
TEIGAPC Elapsed time integrator with limit transgression and overflow 12
supervision
INTCOMP Comparator for integer inputs 12
REALCOMP Comparator for real inputs 12
Monitoring
CVMMXN, Measurements 6
VMMXU, CMSQI,
VMSQI, VNMMXU
CMMXU Measurements 10
AISVBAS Function block for service value presentation of secondary analog 1
inputs
SSIMG Gas medium supervision 21
SSIML Liquid medium supervision 3
SSCBR Circuit breaker condition monitoring 3
EVENT Event function 20
DRPRDRE, Disturbance report 1
A1RADR-A4RADR,
B1RBDR-B8RBDR
SPGAPC Generic communication function for Single Point indication 64
SP16GAPC Generic communication function for Single Point indication 16 inputs 16
MVGAPC Generic communication function for Measured Value 24
Table continues on next page

45
Technical manual
Section 2 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Available functions

IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Line differential

RED650 (A11)
BINSTATREP Logical signal status report 3
RANGE_XP Measured value expander block 66
LMBRFLO Fault locator 1
I103MEAS Measurands for IEC 60870-5-103 1
I103MEASUSR Measurands user defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103 3
I103AR Function status auto-recloser for IEC 60870-5-103 1
I103EF Function status earth-fault for IEC 60870-5-103 1
I103FLTPROT Function status fault protection for IEC 60870-5-103 1
I103IED IED status for IEC 60870-5-103 1
I103SUPERV Supervison status for IEC 60870-5-103 1
I103USRDEF Status for user defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103 20
L4UFCNT Event counter with limit supervision 30
TEILGAPC Running hour-meter 6
Metering
PCFCNT Pulse-counter logic 16
ETPMMTR Function for energy calculation and demand handling 6

Table 3: Total number of instances for basic configurable logic blocks

Basic configurable logic block Total number of instances
AND 280
GATE 40
INV 420
LLD 40
OR 289
PULSETIMER 40
RSMEMORY 40
SRMEMORY 40
TIMERSET 60
XOR 40

2.4 Communication GUID-5F144B53-B9A7-4173-80CF-CD4C84579CB5 v13

IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Line differential

RED650 (A11)
Station communication
LONSPA, SPA SPA communication protocol 1
ADE LON communciation protocol 1
HORZCOMM Network variables via LON 1
PROTOCOL Operation selection between SPA and IEC 60870-5-103 for SLM 1
RS485PROT Operation selection for RS485 1
RS485GEN RS485 1
Table continues on next page

46
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 2
Available functions

IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Line differential

RED650 (A11)
DNPGEN DNP3.0 communication general protocol 1
DNPGENTCP DNP3.0 communication general TCP protocol 1
CHSERRS485 DNP3.0 for EIA-485 communication protocol 1
CH1TCP, CH2TCP, DNP3.0 for TCP/IP communication protocol 1
CH3TCP, CH4TCP
CHSEROPT DNP3.0 for TCP/IP and EIA-485 communication protocol 1
MSTSER DNP3.0 for serial communication protocol 1
MST1TCP, DNP3.0 for TCP/IP communication protocol 1
MST2TCP,
MST3TCP,
MST4TCP
DNPFREC DNP3.0 fault records for TCP/IP and EIA-485 communication protocol 1
IEC 61850-8-1 Parameter setting function for IEC 61850 1
GOOSEINTLKRCV Horizontal communication via GOOSE for interlocking 59
GOOSEBINRCV GOOSE binary receive 16
GOOSEDPRCV GOOSE function block to receive a double point value 64
GOOSEINTRCV GOOSE function block to receive an integer value 32
GOOSEMVRCV GOOSE function block to receive a measurand value 60
GOOSESPRCV GOOSE function block to receive a single point value 64
MULTICMDRCV/ Multiple command and transmit 60/10
MULTICMDSND
FRONT, LANABI, Ethernet configuration 1
LANAB, LANCDI,
LANCD, GATEWAY
OPTICAL103 IEC 60870-5-103 Optical serial communication 1
RS485103 IEC 60870-5-103 serial communication for RS485 1
AGSAL Generic security application component 1
LD0LLN0 IEC 61850 LD0 LLN0 1
SYSLLN0 IEC 61850 SYS LLN0 1
LPHD Physical device information 1
PCMACCS IED configuration protocol 1
SECALARM Component for mapping security events on protocols such as DNP3 1
and IEC103
FSTACCS, Field service tool access via SPA protocol over ethernet 1
FSTACCSNA communication
ACTIVLOG Activity logging parameters 1
ALTRK Service Tracking 1
SINGLELCCH Single ethernet port link status 1
PRPSTATUS Dual ethernet port link status 1
PRP IEC 62439-3 parallel redundancy protocol 1-P03
Remote communication
BinSignRec1_1, Binary signal transfer receive/transmit 3/3/6
BinSignRec1_2,
BinSignReceive2,
BinSignTrans1_1,
BinSignTrans1_2,
BinSignTransm2
Table continues on next page

47
Technical manual
Section 2 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Available functions

IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Line differential

RED650 (A11)
LDCMTRN Transmission of analog data from LDCM 1
LDCMRecBinStat1, Receive binary status from remote LDCM 6/3/3
LDCMRecBinStat2,
LDCMRecBinStat3
Scheme communication
ZCPSCH Scheme communication logic for distance or overcurrent protection 1
ZCRWPSCH Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for distance protection 1
ZCLCPSCH Local acceleration logic 1

2.5 Basic IED functions GUID-C8F0E5D2-E305-4184-9627-F6B5864216CA v10

Table 4: Basic IED functions

IEC 61850 or function Description
name
INTERRSIG Self supervision with internal event list
SELFSUPEVLST Self supervision with internal event list
TIMESYNCHGEN Time synchronization module
BININPUT, Time synchronization
SYNCHCAN,
SYNCHGPS,
SYNCHCMPPS,
SYNCHLON,
SYNCHPPH,
SYNCHPPS, SNTP,
SYNCHSPA,
SYNCHCMPPS
TIMEZONE Time synchronization
DSTBEGIN, GPS time synchronization module
DSTENABLE, DSTEND
IRIG-B Time synchronization
SETGRPS Number of setting groups
ACTVGRP Parameter setting groups
TESTMODE Test mode functionality
CHNGLCK Change lock function
SMBI Signal matrix for binary inputs
SMBO Signal matrix for binary outputs
SMAI1 - SMAI12 Signal matrix for analog inputs
3PHSUM Summation block 3 phase
ATHSTAT Authority status
ATHCHCK Authority check
AUTHMAN Authority management
FTPACCS FTP access with password
SPACOMMMAP SPA communication mapping
SPATD Date and time via SPA protocol
DOSFRNT Denial of service, frame rate control for front port
Table continues on next page

48
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 2
Available functions

IEC 61850 or function Description

name
DOSLANAB Denial of service, frame rate control for OEM port AB
DOSLANCD Denial of service, frame rate control for OEM port CD
DOSSCKT Denial of service, socket flow control
GBASVAL Global base values for settings
PRIMVAL Primary system values
ALTMS Time master supervision
ALTIM Time management
MSTSER DNP3.0 for serial communication protocol

Table 5: Local HMI functions

IEC 61850 or function ANSI Description
name
LHMICTRL Local HMI signals
LANGUAGE Local human machine language
SCREEN Local HMI Local human machine screen behavior
FNKEYTY1–FNKEYTY5 Parameter setting function for HMI in PCM600
FNKEYMD1–
FNKEYMD5
LEDGEN General LED indication part for LHMI
OPENCLOSE_LED LHMI LEDs for open and close keys
GRP1_LED1– Basic part for CP HW LED indication module
GRP1_LED15
GRP2_LED1–
GRP2_LED15
GRP3_LED1–
GRP3_LED15

49
Technical manual
50
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 3
Analog inputs

Section 3 Analog inputs SEMOD55010-1 v3

3.1 Introduction SEMOD55003-5 v10

Analog input channels must be configured and set properly in order to get correct
measurement results and correct protection operations. For power measuring and all
directional and differential functions the directions of the input currents must be defined in
order to reflect the way the current transformers are installed/connected in the field ( primary
and secondary connections ). Measuring and protection algorithms in the IED use primary
system quantities. Setting values are in primary quantities as well and it is important to set
the data about the connected current and voltage transformers properly.

A reference PhaseAngleRef can be defined to facilitate service values reading. This analog
channels phase angle will always be fixed to zero degrees and all other angle information will
be shown in relation to this analog input. During testing and commissioning of the IED the
reference channel can be changed to facilitate testing and service values reading.

The availability of VT inputs depends on the ordered transformer input module

(TRM) type.

3.2 Function block SEMOD116577-1 v4

The hardware channels appear in the signal matrix tool (SMT) and in ACT when
a TRM is included in the configuration with the hardware configuration tool. In
the SMT or the ACT they can be mapped to the desired virtual input (SMAI) of
the IED and used internally in the configuration.

3.3 Signals
PID-3921-OUTPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 6: TRM_6I_6U Output signals

Name Type Description
STATUS BOOLEAN Analogue input module status
CH1(I) STRING Analogue current input 1
CH2(I) STRING Analogue current input 2
CH3(I) STRING Analogue current input 3
CH4(I) STRING Analogue current input 4
CH5(I) STRING Analogue current input 5
CH6(I) STRING Analogue current input 6
CH7(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 7
CH8(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 8
Table continues on next page

51
Technical manual
Section 3 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Analog inputs

Name Type Description

CH9(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 9
CH10(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 10
CH11(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 11
CH12(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 12

PID-3923-OUTPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 7: TRM_7I_5U Output signals

Name Type Description
STATUS BOOLEAN Analogue input module status
CH1(I) STRING Analogue current input 1
CH2(I) STRING Analogue current input 2
CH3(I) STRING Analogue current input 3
CH4(I) STRING Analogue current input 4
CH5(I) STRING Analogue current input 5
CH6(I) STRING Analogue current input 6
CH7(I) STRING Analogue current input 7
CH8(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 8
CH9(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 9
CH10(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 10
CH11(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 11
CH12(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 12

PID-3924-OUTPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 8: TRM_9I_3U Output signals

Name Type Description
STATUS BOOLEAN Analogue input module status
CH1(I) STRING Analogue current input 1
CH2(I) STRING Analogue current input 2
CH3(I) STRING Analogue current input 3
CH4(I) STRING Analogue current input 4
CH5(I) STRING Analogue current input 5
CH6(I) STRING Analogue current input 6
CH7(I) STRING Analogue current input 7
CH8(I) STRING Analogue current input 8
CH9(I) STRING Analogue current input 9
CH10(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 10
CH11(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 11
CH12(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 12

52
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 3
Analog inputs

PID-6598-OUTPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 9: TRM_10I_2U Output signals

Name Type Description
STATUS BOOLEAN Analogue input module status
CH1(I) STRING Analogue current input 1
CH2(I) STRING Analogue current input 2
CH3(I) STRING Analogue current input 3
CH4(I) STRING Analogue current input 4
CH5(I) STRING Analogue current input 5
CH6(I) STRING Analogue current input 6
CH7(I) STRING Analogue current input 7
CH8(I) STRING Analogue current input 8
CH9(I) STRING Analogue current input 9
CH10(I) STRING Analogue current input 10
CH11(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 11
CH12(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 12

3.4 Settings
SEMOD129840-4 v2
Dependent on ordered IED type.
PID-4153-SETTINGS v8

Table 10: AISVBAS Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
PhaseAngleRef TRM40-Ch1 - Ch12 - - TRM40-Ch1 Reference channel
TRM41-Ch1 - Ch12 for phase angle
MU1-L1I - L4I presentation
MU1-L1U - L4U
MU2-L1I - L4I
MU2-L1U - L4U
MU3-L1I - L4I
MU3-L1U - L4U
MU4-L1I - L4I
MU4-L1U - L4U
MU5-L1I - L4I
MU5-L1U - L4U
MU6-L1I - L4I
MU6-L1U - L4U
MU7-L1I - L4I
MU7-L1U - L4U
MU8-L1I - L4I
MU8-L1U - L4U
MU9-L1I - L4I
MU9-L1U - L4U
MU10-L1I - L4I
MU10-L1U - L4U
MU11-L1I - L4I
MU11-L1U - L4U
MU12-L1I - L4I
MU12-L1U - L4U

53
Technical manual
Section 3 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Analog inputs

GUID-72A8BEE0-2430-4C94-A1E0-9B6A0D149FE2 v1

All the visible parameter selections that are visible are not supported by the
650-series IED.

PID-3921-SETTINGS v5

Table 11: TRM_6I_6U Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTStarPoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec1 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim1 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint2 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec2 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim2 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint3 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec3 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim3 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint4 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec4 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim4 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint5 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec5 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim5 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint6 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec6 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim6 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
VTsec7 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim7 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec8 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim8 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec9 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim9 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec10 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim10 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec11 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim11 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec12 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim12 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage

54
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 3
Analog inputs

PID-3923-SETTINGS v5

Table 12: TRM_7I_5U Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTStarPoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec1 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim1 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint2 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec2 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim2 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint3 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec3 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim3 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint4 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec4 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim4 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint5 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec5 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim5 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint6 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec6 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim6 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint7 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec7 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim7 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
VTsec8 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim8 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec9 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim9 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec10 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim10 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec11 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim11 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec12 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim12 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage

55
Technical manual
Section 3 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Analog inputs

PID-3924-SETTINGS v5

Table 13: TRM_9I_3U Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTStarPoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec1 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim1 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint2 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec2 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim2 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint3 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec3 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim3 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint4 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec4 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim4 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint5 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec5 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim5 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint6 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec6 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim6 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint7 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec7 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim7 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint8 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec8 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim8 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint9 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec9 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim9 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
VTsec10 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim10 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec11 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim11 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec12 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim12 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage

56
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 3
Analog inputs

PID-6598-SETTINGS v4

Table 14: TRM_10I_2U Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTStarPoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec1 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim1 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint2 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec2 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim2 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint3 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec3 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim3 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint4 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec4 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim4 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint5 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec5 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim5 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint6 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec6 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim6 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint7 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec7 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim7 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint8 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec8 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim8 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint9 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec9 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim9 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint10 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec10 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim10 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
VTsec11 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim11 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec12 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim12 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage

57
Technical manual
Section 3 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Analog inputs

3.5 Monitored data

PID-4153-MONITOREDDATA v4

Table 15: AISVBAS Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
Status INTEGER 0=Ok - Service value status
1=Error
2=AngRefLow
3=Uncorrelated

PID-3921-MONITOREDDATA v4

Table 16: TRM_6I_6U Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
STATUS BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Analogue input module status
1=Error

PID-3923-MONITOREDDATA v4

Table 17: TRM_7I_5U Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
STATUS BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Analogue input module status
1=Error

PID-3924-MONITOREDDATA v4

Table 18: TRM_9I_3U Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
STATUS BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Analogue input module status
1=Error

PID-6598-MONITOREDDATA v4

Table 19: TRM_10I_2U Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
STATUS BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Analogue input module status
1=Error

3.6 Operation principle SEMOD55028-5 v8

The direction of a current depends on the connection of the CT. The main CTs are typically star
connected and can be connected with the star point towards the object or away from the
object. This information must be set in the IED.

The convention of the directionality is defined as follows:

• Positive value of current or power means that the quantity has the direction into the
object.
• Negative value of current or power means that the quantity has the direction out from the
object.

58
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 3
Analog inputs

For directional functions the directional conventions are defined as follows (see figure 5)

• Forward means the direction is into the object.

• Reverse means the direction is out from the object.

Definition of direction Definition of direction

for directional functions for directional functions
Reverse Forward Forward Reverse
Protected Object
Line, transformer, etc
e.g. P, Q, I e.g. P, Q, I
Measured quantity is Measured quantity is
positive when flowing positive when flowing
towards the object towards the object

Set parameter Set parameter

CTStarPoint CTStarPoint
Correct Setting is Correct Setting is
"ToObject" "FromObject"

en05000456.vsd
IEC05000456 V1 EN-US

Figure 5: Internal convention of the directionality in the IED

If the settings of the primary CT is correct, that is CTStarPoint set as FromObject or ToObject
according to the plant condition, then a positive quantity always flows towards the protected
object, and a Forward direction always looks towards the protected object.

The settings of the IED is performed in primary values. The ratios of the main CTs and VTs are
therefore basic data for the IED. The user has to set the rated secondary and primary currents
and voltages of the CTs and VTs to provide the IED with their rated ratios.

The CT and VT ratio and the name on respective channel is done under IED Configuration/HW
Configuration/ADM in the Parameter Settings Tool or under Main menu/Configuration/
Analog modules in the HMI.

3.7 Technical data SEMOD55412-1 v1

M16988-1 v11

Table 20: TRM - Energizing quantities, rated values and limits for protection transformer
Description Value
Frequency
Rated frequency fr 50/60 Hz

Operating range fr ± 10%

Current inputs
Rated current Ir 1 or 5 A

Operating range (0-100) x Ir

Thermal withstand 100 × Ir for 1 s *)

30 × Ir for 10 s
10 × Ir for 1 min
4 × Ir continuously

Dynamic withstand 250 × Ir one half wave

Burden < 20 mVA at Ir = 1 A

< 150 mVA at Ir = 5 A

Table continues on next page

59
Technical manual
Section 3 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Analog inputs

Description Value
*) max. 350 A for 1 s when COMBITEST test switch is included.
Voltage inputs **)
Rated voltage Ur 110 or 220 V

Operating range 0 - 340 V

Thermal withstand 450 V for 10 s
420 V continuously
Burden < 20 mVA at 110 V
< 80 mVA at 220 V
**) all values for individual voltage inputs
Note! All current and voltage data are specified as RMS values at rated frequency

SEMOD53376-2 v6

Table 21: CT and VT circuit connectors

Connector type Rated voltage and current Maximum conductor area
Screw compression type 250 V AC, 20 A 4 mm2 (AWG12)
2 x 2.5 mm2 (2 x AWG14)
Terminal blocks suitable for ring lug 250 V AC, 20 A 4 mm2 (AWG12)
terminals

60
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 4
Binary input and output modules

Section 4 Binary input and output modules

4.1 Binary input

4.1.1 Binary input debounce filter GUID-AE43976C-E966-484C-AF39-89B2B12F56DC v5

The debounce filter eliminates bounces and short disturbances on a binary input.

A time counter is used for filtering. The time counter is increased once in a millisecond when a
binary input is high, or decreased when a binary input is low. A new debounced binary input
signal is forwarded when the time counter reaches the set DebounceTime value and the
debounced input value is high or when the time counter reaches 0 and the debounced input
value is low. The default setting of DebounceTime is 1 ms.

The binary input ON-event gets the time stamp of the first rising edge, after which the counter
does not reach 0 again. The same happens when the signal goes down to 0 again.

4.1.2 Oscillation filter GUID-41B89E6F-50C3-44BF-9171-3CC82EB5CA15 v4

Binary input wiring can be very long in substations and there are electromagnetic fields from
for example nearby breakers. An oscillation filter is used to reduce the disturbance from the
system when a binary input starts oscillating.

An oscillation counter counts the debounced signal state changes during 1 s. If the counter
value is greater than the set value OscBlock, the input signal is blocked. The input signal is
ignored until the oscillation counter value during 1 s is below the set value OscRelease.

4.1.3 Settings
GUID-07348953-4A72-444B-A31A-030ABEA8E0C4 v1

OscBlock must always be set to a value greater than OscRelease. If this is not
done, oscillation detection will not function correctly, and the resulting
behaviour will be undefined.

4.1.3.1 Setting parameters for binary input modules

PID-3473-SETTINGS v2

Table 22: BIM Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off/On
On
DebounceTime 0.001 - 0.020 s 0.001 0.001 Debounce time for binary inputs
OscBlock 1 - 40 Hz 1 40 Oscillation block limit
OscRelease 1 - 30 Hz 1 30 Oscillation release limit

61
Technical manual
Section 4 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Binary input and output modules

4.1.3.2 Setting parameters for binary input/output module

PID-4050-SETTINGS v2

Table 23: IOMIN Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Binary input/output module in
On operation (On) or not (Off)
DebounceTime 0.001 - 0.020 s 0.001 0.001 Debounce time for binary inputs
OscBlock 1 - 40 Hz 1 40 Oscillation block limit
OscRelease 1 - 30 Hz 1 30 Oscillation release limit

62
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

Section 5 Local Human-Machine-Interface

LHMI

5.1 Local HMI screen behaviour

5.1.1 Identification
GUID-84392EFF-4D3F-4A67-A6ED-34C6E98574D6 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Local HMI screen behaviour SCREEN - -

5.1.2 Settings
PID-6457-SETTINGS v3

Table 24: SCREEN Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
DisplayTimeout 1 - 120 Min 1 10 Local HMI display timeout
ContrastLevel -100 - 100 % 10 0 Contrast level for display
DefaultScreen - 0 Default screen
EvListSrtOrder Latest on top - - Latest on top Sort order of event list
Oldest on top
AutoIndicationDRP Off - - Off Automatic indication of disturbance
On report
SubstIndSLD No - - No Substitute indication on single line
Yes diagram
InterlockIndSLD No - - No Interlock indication on single line
Yes diagram
BypassCommands No - - No Enable bypass of commands
Yes

5.2 Local HMI signals

5.2.1 Identification
GUID-03AB7AEE-87D3-4F3C-B6B9-B1EB1B538E38 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Local HMI signals LHMICTRL - -

5.2.2 Function block GUID-A8AC51E9-5BD7-4A80-9576-4816F14DD08D v2

63
Technical manual
Section 5 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

LHMICTRL
CLRLEDS HMI-ON
RED-S
YELLOW-S
YELLOW-F
CLRPULSE
LEDSCLRD

IEC09000320-1-en.vsd
IEC09000320 V1 EN-US

Figure 6: LHMICTRL function block

5.2.3 Signals
PID-3992-INPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 25: LHMICTRL Input signals

Name Type Default Description
CLRLEDS BOOLEAN 0 Input to clear the LCD-HMI LEDs

PID-3992-OUTPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 26: LHMICTRL Output signals

Name Type Description
HMI-ON BOOLEAN Backlight of the LCD display is active
RED-S BOOLEAN Red LED on the LCD-HMI is steady
YELLOW-S BOOLEAN Yellow LED on the LCD-HMI is steady
YELLOW-F BOOLEAN Yellow LED on the LCD-HMI is flashing
CLRPULSE BOOLEAN A pulse is provided when the LEDs on the LCD-HMI are
cleared
LEDSCLRD BOOLEAN Active when the LEDs on the LCD-HMI are not active

5.3 Basic part for LED indication module

5.3.1 Identification
GUID-6E36C0BC-F284-4C88-A4A8-9535D3BE8B14 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Basic part for LED indication module LEDGEN - -
Basic part for LED indication HW GRP1_LED1 - - -
module GRP1_LED15

GRP2_LED1 -
GRP2_LED15

GRP3_LED1 -
GRP3_LED15

5.3.2 Function block GUID-BDB5797F-F27E-4FEE-9FDB-1C9E2F572BB6 v3

64
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

LEDGEN
BLOCK NEWIND
RESET ACK

IEC09000321-1-en.vsd
IEC09000321 V1 EN-US

Figure 7: LEDGEN function block

GRP1_LED1
^HM1L01R
^HM1L01Y
^HM1L01G
IEC09000322 V1 EN-US

Figure 8: GRP1_LED1 function block

The GRP1_LED1 function block is an example. The 15 LEDs in each of the three groups have a
similar function block.

5.3.3 Signals
PID-4114-INPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 27: LEDGEN Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Input to block the operation of the LEDs
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Input to acknowledge/reset the indication LEDs

PID-4114-OUTPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 28: LEDGEN Output signals

Name Type Description
NEWIND BOOLEAN New indication signal if any LED indication input is set
ACK BOOLEAN A pulse is provided when the LEDs are acknowledged

PID-1697-INPUTSIGNALS v16

Table 29: GRP1_LED1 Input signals

Name Type Default Description
HM1L01R BOOLEAN 0 Red indication of LED1, local HMI alarm group 1
HM1L01Y BOOLEAN 0 Yellow indication of LED1, local HMI alarm group 1
HM1L01G BOOLEAN 0 Green indication of LED1, local HMI alarm group 1

5.3.4 Settings
PID-4114-SETTINGS v5

Table 30: LEDGEN Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off/On
On
tRestart 0.0 - 100.0 s 0.1 0.0 Defines the disturbance length
tMax 0.1 - 100.0 s 0.1 1.0 Maximum time for the definition of a
disturbance

65
Technical manual
Section 5 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

PID-1697-SETTINGS v16

Table 31: GRP1_LED1 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SequenceType Follow-S - - Follow-S Sequence type for LED 1, local HMI
Follow-F alarm group 1
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
LabelOff 0 - 18 - 1 G1L01_OFF Label string shown when LED 1, alarm
group 1 is off
LabelRed 0 - 18 - 1 G1L01_RED Label string shown when LED 1, alarm
group 1 is red
LabelYellow 0 - 18 - 1 G1L01_YELLOW Label string shown when LED 1, alarm
group 1 is yellow
LabelGreen 0 - 18 - 1 G1L01_GREEN Label string shown when LED 1, alarm
group 1 is green

5.4 LCD part for HMI function keys control module GUID-EECAE7FA-7078-472C-A429-F7607DB884EB v2

5.4.1 Identification
GUID-E6611022-5EA3-420D-ADCD-9D1E7604EFEB v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
LCD part for HMI Function Keys FNKEYMD1 - - -
Control module FNKEYMD5

5.4.2 Function block

GUID-A803A728-5CFC-4606-98E4-793E873B99D4 v3

FNKEYMD1
^LEDCTL1 ^FKEYOUT1
IEC09000327 V1 EN-US

Figure 9: FNKEYMD1 function block

Only the function block for the first button is shown above. There is a similar block for every
function key button.

5.4.3 Signals
PID-1657-INPUTSIGNALS v16

Table 32: FNKEYMD1 Input signals

Name Type Default Description
LEDCTL1 BOOLEAN 0 LED control input for function key

PID-1657-OUTPUTSIGNALS v17

Table 33: FNKEYMD1 Output signals

Name Type Description
FKEYOUT1 BOOLEAN Output controlled by function key

66
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

5.4.4 Settings
PID-1657-SETTINGS v17

Table 34: FNKEYMD1 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Mode Off - - Off Output operation mode
Toggle
Pulsed
PulseTime 0.001 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Pulse time for output controlled by
LCDFn1
LabelOn 0 - 18 - 1 LCD_FN1_ON Label for LED on state
LabelOff 0 - 18 - 1 LCD_FN1_OFF Label for LED off state

PID-6327-SETTINGS v1

Table 35: FNKEYTY1 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Type Off - - Off Function key type
Menu shortcut
Control
MenuShortcut - 0 Menu shortcut for function key

GUID-BCE87D54-C836-40EE-8DA7-779B767059AB v1
MenuShortcut values are product dependent and created dynamically depending on the
product main menu.

67
Technical manual
Section 5 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

5.5 Operation principle

5.5.1 Local HMI AMU0600442 v14

IEC13000239-2-en.vsd

IEC13000239 V2 EN-US

Figure 10: Local human-machine interface

The LHMI of the IED contains the following elements:

• Keypad
• Display (LCD)
• LED indicators
• Communication port for PCM600

The LHMI is used for setting, monitoring and controlling.

68
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

5.5.1.1 Keypad AMU0600428 v17

The LHMI keypad contains push-buttons which are used to navigate in different views or
menus. The push-buttons are also used to acknowledge alarms, reset indications, provide help
and switch between local and remote control mode.

The keypad also contains programmable push-buttons that can be configured either as menu
shortcut or control buttons.

69
Technical manual
Section 5 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

24

1
23
2
18
3

19
4

6 20

21

7 22

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

IEC15000157-2-en.vsd

IEC15000157 V2 EN-US

Figure 11: LHMI keypad with object control, navigation and command push-buttons and
RJ-45 communication port

1...5 Function button

6 Close
7 Open
8 Escape
9 Left
10 Down
11 Up
12 Right
13 Key
14 Enter
15 Remote/Local
16 Uplink LED
17 Not in use
18 Multipage
19 Menu
20 Clear
21 Help

70
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

22 Communication port
23 Programmable indication LEDs
24 IED status LEDs

5.5.1.2 Display GUID-55739D4F-1DA5-4112-B5C7-217AAF360EA5 v11

The LHMI includes a graphical monochrome liquid crystal display (LCD) with a resolution of 320
x 240 pixels. The character size can vary. The amount of characters and rows fitting the view
depends on the character size and the view that is shown.

The display view is divided into four basic areas.

IEC15000270-1-en.vsdx

IEC15000270 V1 EN-US

Figure 12: Display layout

1 Path
2 Content
3 Status
4 Scroll bar (appears when needed)

71
Technical manual
Section 5 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

• The path shows the current location in the menu structure. If the path is too long to be
shown, it is truncated from the beginning, and the truncation is indicated with three dots.
• The content area shows the menu content.
• The status area shows the current IED time, the user that is currently logged in and the
object identification string which is settable via the LHMI or with PCM600.
• If text, pictures or other items do not fit in the display, a vertical scroll bar appears on the
right. The text in content area is truncated from the beginning if it does not fit in the
display horizontally. Truncation is indicated with three dots.

IEC15000138-1-en.vsdx

IEC15000138 V1 EN-US

Figure 13: Truncated path

The number after : (colon sign) at the end of the function instance, for example, 1 in SMAI1:1,
indicates the number of that function instance.

The function key button panel shows on request what actions are possible with the function
buttons. Each function button has a LED indication that can be used as a feedback signal for
the function button control action. The LED is connected to the required signal with PCM600.

72
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

IEC13000281-1-en.vsd
GUID-C98D972D-D1D8-4734-B419-161DBC0DC97B V1 EN-US

Figure 14: Function button panel

The indication LED panel shows on request the alarm text labels for the indication LEDs. Three
indication LED pages are available.

IEC13000240-1-en.vsd
GUID-5157100F-E8C0-4FAB-B979-FD4A971475E3 V1 EN-US

Figure 15: Indication LED panel

The function button and indication LED panels are not visible at the same time. Each panel is
shown by pressing one of the function buttons or the Multipage button. Pressing the ESC
button clears the panel from the display. Both panels have a dynamic width that depends on
the label string length.

5.5.1.3 LEDs AMU0600427 v12

The LHMI includes three status LEDs above the display: Ready, Start and Trip.

There are 15 programmable indication LEDs on the front of the LHMI. Each LED can indicate
three states with the colors: green, yellow and red. The texts related to each three-color LED
are divided into three panels.

There are 3 separate panels of LEDs available. The 15 physical three-color LEDs in one LED
group can indicate 45 different signals. Altogether, 135 signals can be indicated since there are
three LED groups. The LEDs are lit according to priority, with red being the highest and green

73
Technical manual
Section 5 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

the lowest priority. For example, if on one panel there is an indication that requires the green
LED to be lit, and on another panel there is an indication that requires the red LED to be lit, the
red LED takes priority and is lit. The LEDs can be configured with PCM600 and the operation
mode can be selected with the LHMI or PCM600.

Information panels for the indication LEDs are shown by pressing the Multipage button.
Pressing that button cycles through the three pages. A lit or un-acknowledged LED is indicated
with a highlight. Such lines can be selected by using the Up/Down arrow buttons. Pressing the
Enter key shows details about the selected LED. Pressing the ESC button exits from
information pop-ups as well as from the LED panel as such.

The Multipage button has a LED. This LED is lit whenever any LED on any panel is lit. If there are
un-acknowledged indication LEDs, then the Multipage LED blinks. To acknowledge LEDs, press
the Clear button to enter the Reset menu (refer to description of this menu for details).

There are two additional LEDs which are next to the control buttons and . They can,
for example, represent the status of a circuit breaker. The LEDs are controlled by the function
block OPENCLOSE_LED which must be configured to show the status of the breaker.

5.5.2 LED configuration alternatives

5.5.2.1 Functionality GUID-1A03E0EF-C10F-4797-9D9F-5CCA86CA29EB v5

The function blocks LEDGEN and GRP1_LEDx, GRP2_LEDx and GRP3_LEDx (x=1-15) controls and
supplies information about the status of the indication LEDs. The input and output signals of
the function blocks are configured with PCM600. The input signal for each LED is selected
individually using SMT or ACT. Each LED is controlled by the GRPn_LEDx (n=1-3) function block
that controls the color and the operating mode.

Each indication LED on local HMI can be set individually to operate in 6 different sequences;
two as follow type and four as latch type. Two of the latching sequence types are intended to
be used as a protection indication system, either in collecting or restarting mode, with reset
functionality. The other two are intended to be used as signalling system in collecting mode
with acknowledgment functionality.

5.5.2.2 Status LEDs GUID-4822DF9C-E343-442B-B3F1-3FA8CD8DF234 v4

There are three status LEDs above the LCD in front of the IED: green, yellow and red.

The green LED has a fixed function that presents the healthy status of the IED. The yellow and
red LEDs are user configured. The yellow LED can be used to indicate that a disturbance report
is triggered (steady) or that the IED is in test mode (flashing). The red LED can be used to
indicate a trip command.

Here is a typical configuration of the status LEDs:

• Green LED: unlit > no power; blinking > startup or abnormal situation (IED is not in
service); steady > IED is in service
• Yellow LED: unlit > no attention required; blinking > IED is in Testmode (IED is not in
normal service); steady > at least one of the signals configured to turn the yellow LED on
has been active
• Red LED: unlit > no attention required; blinking > user performs a common write from
PCM600; steady > at least one of the signals configured to turn the red LED on has been
active

The yellow and red status LEDs are configured in the disturbance recorder function, DRPRDRE,
by connecting a start or trip signal from the actual function to a BxRBDR binary input function

74
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

block using the PCM600, and configuring the setting to Off, Start or Trip for that particular
signal.

5.5.2.3 Indication LEDs

Operating modes GUID-B67F1ED3-900B-4D34-8EEB-A3005999CE50 v4

Collecting mode

• LEDs that are used in the collecting mode of operation are accumulated continuously until
the unit is acknowledged manually. This mode is suitable when the LEDs are used as a
simplified alarm system. When all three inputs (red, yellow and green) are connected to
different sources of events for the same function block, collecting mode shows the
highest priority LED color that was activated since the latest acknowledgment was made.
If a number of different indications were made since the latest acknowledgment, it is not
possible to get a clear view of what triggered the latest event without looking at the
sequence of events list. A condition for getting the sequence of events is that the signals
have been engineered in the disturbance recorder.

Re-starting mode

• In the re-starting mode of operation each new start resets all previous active LEDs and
activates only those which appear during one disturbance. Only LEDs defined for re-
starting mode with the latched sequence type 6 (LatchedReset-S) will initiate a reset and a
restart at a new disturbance. A disturbance is defined to end a settable time after the
reset of the activated input signals or when the maximum time limit has elapsed. In
sequence 6, the restarting or reset mode means that upon occurrence of any new event,
all previous indications will be reset. This facilitates that only the LED indications related
to the latest event is shown.

Acknowledgment/reset GUID-E6727E8F-C28B-4295-AE21-BC5643363805 v3

• From local HMI

• The active LED indications can be acknowledged/reset manually. Manual
acknowledgment and manual reset have the same meaning and is a common signal
for all the operating sequences and LEDs. The function is positive edge triggered,
not level triggered. The acknowledgment/reset is performed via the button and
menus on the LHMI.

• From function input

• The active LED indications can also be acknowledged/reset via an input, CLRLEDS, to
the function block LHMICTRL. This input can for example be configured to a binary
input operated from an external push button or a function button. The function is
positive edge triggered, not level triggered. This means that even if the button is
continuously pressed, the acknowledgment/reset only affects indications active at
the moment when the button is first pressed.

• Automatic reset
• The automatic reset can only be performed for LED indications defined for re-
starting mode with the latched sequence type 6 (LatchedReset-S). When the
automatic reset of the LEDs has been performed, still persisting indications will be
indicated with a steady light.

75
Technical manual
Section 5 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

Operating sequence GUID-DFCA880B-308C-4334-94DF-97C7765E8C13 v5

The sequences can be of type Follow or Latched. For the Follow type, the LED follows the input
signal completely. For the Latched type, each LED latches to the corresponding input signal
until it is reset.

The figures below show the function of available sequences selectable for each LED separately.
The following 6 sequences are available:

• Sequence 1: Follow-S
• Sequence 2: Follow-F
• Sequence 3: LatchedAck-F-S
• Sequence 4: LatchedAck-S-F
• Sequence 5: LatchedColl-S
• Sequence 6: LatchedReset-S

For sequence 1 and 2, which are of the Follow type, the acknowledgment (Ack ) /reset function
is not applicable because the indication shown by the LED follows its input signal. Sequence 3
and 4, which are of the Latched type with acknowledgement, are only working in collecting
(Coll) mode. Sequence 5 is working according to Latched type and collecting mode while
Sequence 6 is working according to Latched type and re-starting (Reset) mode. The letters S
and F in the sequence names have the meaning S = Steady and F = Flash.

At the activation of the input signal to any LED, the indication on the corresponding LED
obtains a color that corresponds to the activated input, and operates according to the
selected sequence diagrams shown below.

In the sequence diagrams the different statuses of the LEDs are shown using the following
symbols:

= No indication = Steady light = Flash

G= Green Y= Yellow R= Red

IEC09000311.vsd
IEC09000311 V1 EN-US

Figure 16: Symbols used in the sequence diagrams

Sequence 1 (Follow-S) SEMOD56072-39 v4

This sequence follows the corresponding input signals all the time with a steady light. It does
not react on acknowledgment or reset. Every LED is independent of the other LEDs in its
operation.

Activating
signal

LED

IEC01000228_2_en.vsd
IEC01000228 V2 EN-US

Figure 17: Operating Sequence 1 (Follow-S)

GUID-107FE952-3B4C-4C01-831A-3147E652327C v4
If inputs for two or more colors are active at the same time to the same LED, the priority color
it shows is in accordance with the color described above. An example of the operation when
two colors are activated in parallel to the same LED is shown in figure18.

76
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

Activating
signal GREEN

Activating
signal RED

LED G G R G

IEC09000312_1_en.vsd
IEC09000312 V1 EN-US

Figure 18: Operating sequence 1, two colors

Sequence 2 (Follow-F) SEMOD56072-47 v2

This sequence is the same as Sequence 1, Follow-S, but the LEDs are flashing instead of
showing steady light.

Sequence 3 LatchedAck-F-S SEMOD56072-50 v2

This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode. Every LED is independent
of the other LEDs in its operation. At the activation of the input signal, the indication starts
flashing. After acknowledgment the indication disappears if the signal is not present any
more. If the signal is still present after acknowledgment it gets a steady light.

Activating
signal

LED

Acknow.
en01000231.vsd
IEC01000231 V1 EN-US

Figure 19: Operating Sequence 3 LatchedAck-F-S

GUID-CC607709-5344-4C88-AA97-6395FD335E55 v5

The sequence described below is valid only if the same function block is used
for all three colour LEDs.

When an acknowledgment is performed, all indications that appear before the indication with
higher priority has been reset, will be acknowledged, independent of if the low priority
indication appeared before or after acknowledgment. In figure 20 it is shown the sequence
when a signal of lower priority becomes activated after acknowledgment has been performed
on a higher priority signal. The low priority signal will be shown as acknowledged when the
high priority signal resets.

77
Technical manual
Section 5 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

Activating
signal GREEN

Activating
signal RED

R R G
LED

Acknow
IEC09000313_1_en.vsd
IEC09000313 V1 EN-US

Figure 20: Operating Sequence 3 (LatchedAck-F-S), 2 colors involved

GUID-A652A49D-F016-472D-8D38-6D3E75DAB1DB v3
If all three signals are activated the order of priority is still maintained. Acknowledgment of
indications with higher priority will acknowledge also low priority indications, which are not
visible according to figure 21.

Activating
signal GREEN

Activating
signal YELLOW
Activating
signal RED

LED G Y R R Y

Acknow.
IEC09000314-1-en.vsd
IEC09000314 V1 EN-US

Figure 21: Operating sequence 3, three colors involved, alternative 1

GUID-071B9EB5-A1D2-49C5-9458-4D21B7E068BE v3
If an indication with higher priority appears after acknowledgment of a lower priority
indication the high priority indication will be shown as not acknowledged according to figure
22.

78
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

Activating
signal GREEN

Activating
signal YELLOW
Activating
signal RED

LED G G R R Y

Acknow.
IEC09000315-1-en.vsd
IEC09000315 V1 EN-US

Figure 22: Operating sequence 3, three colors involved, alternative 2

Sequence 4 (LatchedAck-S-F) SEMOD56072-64 v1

This sequence has the same functionality as sequence 3, but steady and flashing light have
been alternated.

Sequence 5 LatchedColl-S SEMOD56072-67 v4

This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode. At the activation of the
input signal, the indication will light up with a steady light. The difference to sequence 3 and 4
is that indications that are still activated will not be affected by the reset that is, immediately
after the positive edge of the reset has been executed a new reading and storing of active
signals is performed. Every LED is independent of the other LEDs in its operation.

Activating
signal

LED

Reset

IEC01000235_2_en.vsd
IEC01000235 V2 EN-US

Figure 23: Operating Sequence 5 LatchedColl-S

GUID-4D52D221-F54F-4966-95B1-6ED6C536CEC9 v3
That means if an indication with higher priority has reset while an indication with lower
priority still is active at the time of reset, the LED will change color according to figure24.

79
Technical manual
Section 5 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

Activating
signal GREEN

Activating
signal RED

R G
LED

Reset
IEC09000316_1_en.vsd
IEC09000316 V1 EN-US

Figure 24: Operating sequence 5, two colors

Sequence 6 LatchedReset-S SEMOD56072-75 v4

In this mode all activated LEDs, which are set to Sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), are
automatically reset at a new disturbance when activating any input signal for other LEDs set to
Sequence 6 LatchedReset-S. Also in this case indications that are still activated will not be
affected by manual reset, that is, immediately after the positive edge of that the manual reset
has been executed a new reading and storing of active signals is performed. LEDs set for
sequence 6 are completely independent in its operation of LEDs set for other sequences.

Timing diagram for sequence 6 SEMOD56072-86 v4

Figure 25 shows the timing diagram for two indications within one disturbance.

Disturbance
tRestart

Activating
signal 1

Activating
signal 2

LED 1

LED 2

Automatic
reset

Manual
reset
IEC01000239_2-en.vsd
IEC01000239 V2 EN-US

Figure 25: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two indications within same

disturbance
Figure 26 shows the timing diagram for a new indication after tRestart time has elapsed.

80
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

Disturbance Disturbance

tRestart tRestart

Activating
signal 1

Activating
signal 2

LED 1

LED 2

Automatic
reset

Manual
reset
IEC01000240_2_en.vsd
IEC01000240 V2 EN-US

Figure 26: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two different disturbances

Figure 27 shows the timing diagram when a new indication appears after the first one has
reset but before tRestart has elapsed.

Disturbance

tRestart

Activating
signal 1

Activating
signal 2

LED 1

LED 2

Automatic
reset

Manual
reset
IEC01000241_2_en.vsd
IEC01000241 V2 EN-US

Figure 27: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two indications within same

disturbance but with reset of activating signal between
Figure 28 shows the timing diagram for manual reset.

81
Technical manual
Section 5 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

Disturbance

tRestart

Activating
signal 1

Activating
signal 2

LED 1

LED 2

Automatic
reset

Manual
reset
IEC01000242_2_en.vsd
IEC01000242 V2 EN-US

Figure 28: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), manual reset

5.5.3 Function keys

5.5.3.1 Functionality GUID-BED38E9A-C90D-4B7F-AA20-42821C4F6A1C v3

Local Human-Machine-Interface (LHMI) has five function buttons, directly to the left of the
LCD, that can be configured either as menu shortcut or control buttons. Each button has an
indication LED that can be configured in the application configuration.

When used as a menu shortcut, a function button provides a fast way to navigate between
default nodes in the menu tree. When used as a control, the button can control a binary signal.

5.5.3.2 Operation principle GUID-977C3829-B19B-457E-8A4D-45317226EF22 v3

Each output on the FNKEYMD1 - FNKEYMD5 function blocks can be controlled from the LHMI
function keys. By pressing a function button on the LHMI, the output status of the actual
function block will change. These binary outputs can in turn be used to control other function
blocks, for example, switch control blocks, binary I/O outputs etc.

FNKEYMD1 - FNKEYMD5 function block also has a number of settings and parameters that
control the behavior of the function block. These settings and parameters are normally set
using the PST.

Operating sequence GUID-84CA7C61-4F83-4F86-A07F-BF9EC4E309BF v5

The operation mode is set individually for each output, either OFF, TOGGLE or PULSED.

Setting OFF

This mode always sets the outputs to a low value (0).

82
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

Input value

Output value

IEC09000330-2-en.vsd

IEC09000330 V2 EN-US

Figure 29: Sequence diagram for setting OFF

Setting TOGGLE

In this mode the output toggles each time the function key has been pressed for more than
500ms. Note that the input attribute is reset each time the function block executes. The
function block execution is marked with a dotted line below.

Input value
500ms 500ms 500ms

Output value

IEC09000331_1_en.vsd

IEC09000331 V2 EN-US

Figure 30: Sequence diagram for setting TOGGLE

Setting PULSED

In this mode the output sets high (1) when the function key has been pressed for more than
500ms and remains high according to set pulse time. After this time the output will go back to
0. The input attribute is reset when the function block detects it being high and there is no
output pulse.

Note that the third positive edge on the input attribute does not cause a pulse, since the edge
was applied during pulse output. A new pulse can only begin when the output is zero; else the
trigger edge is lost.

Input value
500ms 500ms 500ms 500ms

pulse time pulse time pulse time

Output value

IEC09000332_2_en.vsd

IEC09000332 V2 EN-US

Figure 31: Sequence diagram for setting PULSED

Input function GUID-8EA4AE21-7A74-403A-84AE-D5CEF9292A63 v2

All function keys work the same way: When the LHMI is configured so that a certain function
button is of type CONTROL, then the corresponding input on this function block becomes
active, and will light the yellow function button LED when high. This functionality is active even
if the function block operation setting is set to off. It has been implemented this way for

83
Technical manual
Section 5 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

safety reasons; the idea is that the function key LEDs should always reflect the actual status of
any primary equipment monitored by these LEDs.

84
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 6
Differential protection

Section 6 Differential protection

6.1 High impedance differential protection, single phase

HZPDIF IP14239-1 v4

6.1.1 Identification M14813-1 v4

IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

Function description
identification identification device number

High impedance differential

HZPDIF Id 87
protection, single phase

SYMBOL-CC V2 EN-US

6.1.2 Functionality M13071-3 v12

The 1Ph High impedance differential protection HZPDIF functions can be used when the
involved CT cores have the same turns ratio and similar magnetizing characteristics. It utilizes
an external CT secondary current summation by wiring. Actually all CT secondary circuits which
are involved in the differential scheme are connected in parallel. External series resistor, and a
voltage dependent resistor which are both mounted externally to the IED, are also required.

The external resistor unit shall be ordered under IED accessories in the Product Guide.

HZPDIF can be used to protect tee-feeders or busbars, reactors, motors, auto-transformers,

capacitor banks and so on. One such function block is used for a high-impedance restricted
earth fault protection. Three such function blocks are used to form three-phase, phase-
segregated differential protection. Several function block instances (for example, six) can be
available in a single IED.

6.1.3 Function block M13737-3 v3

HZPDIF
ISI* TRIP
BLOCK ALARM
BLKTR MEASVOLT

IEC05000363-2-en.vsd
IEC05000363 V2 EN-US

Figure 32: HZPDIF function block

85
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Differential protection

6.1.4 Signals IP14244-1 v2

PID-3495-INPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 36: HZPDIF Input signals

Name Type Default Description
ISI GROUP - Single phase current input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip

PID-3495-OUTPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 37: HZPDIF Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip signal
ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm signal
MEASVOLT REAL Measured RMS voltage on CT secondary side

6.1.5 Settings IP14245-1 v2

PID-3495-SETTINGS v5

Table 38: HZPDIF Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
U>Alarm 5 - 500 V 1 10 Alarm voltage level in volts on CT
secondary side
tAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Time delay to activate alarm
U>Trip 10 - 900 V 1 100 Operate voltage level in volts on CT
secondary side
SeriesResistor 50 - 20000 Ohm 1 250 Value of series resistor in Ohms

6.1.6 Monitored data

PID-3495-MONITOREDDATA v4

Table 39: HZPDIF Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
MEASVOLT REAL - kV Measured RMS voltage on CT
secondary side

6.1.7 Operation principle IP14242-1 v2

M13075-3 v11
High impedance protection system is a simple technique which requires that all CTs, used in
the protection scheme, have relatively high knee point voltage, similar magnetizing
characteristic and the same ratio. These CTs are installed in all ends of the protected object. In
order to make a scheme all CT secondary circuits belonging to one phase are connected in
parallel. From the CT junction points a measuring branch is connected. The measuring branch
is a series connection of one variable setting resistor (or series resistor) RS with high ohmic

86
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 6
Differential protection

value and an over-current element. Thus, the high impedance differential protection responds
to the current flowing through the measuring branch. However, this current is result of a
differential voltage caused by this parallel CT connection across the measuring branch. Non-
linear resistor (that is, metrosil) is used in order to protect entire scheme from high peak
voltages which may appear during internal faults. Typical high impedance differential scheme
is shown in Figure 33. Note that only one phase is shown in this figure.

RS

3 U
I
1
I> (50) 5

2
GUID-5CEAF088-D92B-45E5-B98F-3083894A694C V1 EN-US

Figure 33: HZPDIF scheme

Where in the Figure:

1. shows one main CT secondary winding connected in parallel with all other CTs, from the
same phase, connected to this scheme.
2. shows the scheme earthing point.

It is of utmost importance to insure that only one earthing point exists in

such protection scheme.

3. shows the setting (stabilizing) resistor RS.

4. shows the over-current measuring element.

The series connection of stabilizing resistor and over-current element is

designated as measuring branch.

5. shows the non-linear resistor (that is, metrosil).

6. U is the voltage across the CT paralleling point (for example, across the measuring
branch).
7. I is the current flowing through the measuring branch.

U and I are interrelated in accordance with the following formula U=RS × I.

Due to the parallel CT connections the high impedance differential relay can only measure one
current and that is the relay operating quantity. That means that there is no any stabilizing
quantity (that is, bias) in high-impedance differential protection schemes. Therefore in order
to guaranty the stability of the differential relay during external faults the operating quantity
must not exceed the set pickup value. Thus, for external faults, even with severe saturation of

87
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Differential protection

some of the current transformers, the voltage across the measuring branch shall not rise
above the relay set pickup value. To achieve that a suitable value for setting resistor RS is
selected in such a way that the saturated CT secondary winding provides a much lower
impedance path for the false differential current than the measuring branch. In case of an
external fault causing current transformer saturation, the non-saturated current transformers
drive most of the spill differential current through the secondary winding of the saturated
current transformer and not through the measuring brunch of the relay. The voltage drop
across the saturated current transformer secondary winding appears also across the
measuring brunch, however it will typically be relatively small. Therefore, the pick-up value of
the relay has to be set above this false operating voltage.

See the application manual for operating voltage and sensitivity calculation.

6.1.7.1 Logic diagram M13075-9 v5

The logic diagram shows the operation principles for the 1Ph High impedance differential
protection function HZPDIF, see Figure 34.

The function utilizes the raw samples from the single phase current input connected to it. Thus
the twenty samples per fundamental power system cycle are available to the HZPDIF function.
These current samples are first multiplied with the set value for the used stabilizing resistor in
order to get voltage waveform across the measuring branch. The voltage waveform is then
filtered in order to get its RMS value. Note that used filtering is designed in such a way that it
ensures complete removal of the DC current component which may be present in the primary
fault current. The voltage RMS value is then compared with set Alarm and Trip thresholds. Note
that the TRIP signal is intentionally delayed on drop off for 30 ms within the function. The
measured RMS voltage is available as a service value from the function. The function has block
and trip block inputs available as well.

IEC05000301 V1 EN-US

Figure 34: Logic diagram for 1Ph High impedance differential protection HZPDIF

88
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 6
Differential protection

6.1.8 Technical data IP14246-1 v1

M13081-1 v11

Table 40: HZPDIF technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate voltage (10-900) V ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
I=U/R ±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio >95% at (30-900) V -

Maximum continuous power U>Trip2/SeriesResistor ≤200 W -

Operate time at 0 to 10 x Ud Min. = 5 ms

Max. = 15 ms
Reset time at 10 to 0 x Ud Min. = 75 ms
Max. = 95 ms
Critical impulse time 2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Ud -

Operate time at 0 to 2 x Ud Min. = 25 ms

Max. = 35 ms
Reset time at 2 to 0 x Ud Min. = 50 ms
Max. = 70 ms
Critical impulse time 15 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Ud -

89
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Differential protection

6.2 Line differential protection IP13934-1 v1

6.2.1 Identification
M14844-1 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number

Line differential protection, 3 CT

sets, 2-3 line ends
L3CPDIF 3Id/I> 87L

SYMBOL-HH V1 EN-US

Line differential protection, 6 CT

sets, 3-5 line ends
L6CPDIF 3Id/I> 87L

SYMBOL-HH V1 EN-US

Line differential protection 3 CT

sets, with in-zone transformers, 2-3 LT3CPDIF 3Id/I> 87LT
line ends

SYMBOL-HH V1 EN-US

Line differential protection 6 CT

sets, with in-zone transformers, 3-5 LT6CPDIF 3Id/I> 87LT
line ends

SYMBOL-HH V1 EN-US

Line differential logic LDLPSCH - 87L

6.2.2 Functionality

6.2.2.1 Line differential protection, 3 sets with in-zone transformers LT3CPDIF M14917-3 v6

Line differential protection applies the Kirchhoff's law and compares the currents entering and
leaving the protected multi-terminal circuit, consisting of overhead power lines and cables.
Under the condition that there are no in-line or tap (shunt) power transformers within the zone
of protection, it offers a phase segregated fundamental frequency current based differential
protection with high sensitivity and provides phase selection information for single-pole
tripping

The three-terminal version is used for conventional two-terminal lines with or without a 1½
circuit breaker arrangement in one end, as well as three-terminal lines with single breaker
arrangements at all terminals.

90
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 6
Differential protection

Protected zone

IED Communication channel IED

IEC05000039-3-en.vsd
IEC05000039 V3 EN-US

Figure 35: Example of application on a conventional two-terminal line

The six-terminal versions are used for conventional two-terminal lines with 1½ circuit breaker
arrangements in both ends, as well as multi-terminal lines with up to five terminals.

Protected zone

IED Comm. Channel IED

Comm. Channel Comm. Channel

IED

IEC05000040_2_en.vsd
IEC05000040 V2 EN-US

Figure 36: Example of application on a three-terminal line with 1½ breaker arrangements

The current differential algorithm provides high sensitivity for internal faults and it has
excellent stability for external faults. Current samples from all CTs are exchanged between the
IEDs in the line ends (master-master mode) or sent to one IED (master-slave mode) for
evaluation.

A restrained dual biased slope evaluation is made where the bias current is the highest phase
current in any line end, giving a secure through-fault stability even with heavily saturated CTs.
In addition to the restrained evaluation, an unrestrained (instantaneous) high differential
current setting can be used for fast tripping of internal faults with very high currents.

A special feature with this function is that applications with small power transformers (rated
current less than 50% of the differential current setting IdMin) connected as line taps (that is,
as shunt power transformers), without measurements of currents in the tap, can be handled.
The normal load current is considered to be negligible, and special measures must be taken in
the event of a short circuit on the LV side of the transformer. In this application, the tripping of
the differential protection can be time-delayed for low differential currents to achieve
coordination with downstream overcurrent IEDs. The local protection of the small tap power
transformer is given the time needed to disconnect the faulty transformer.

A line charging current compensation provides increased sensitivity of line differential

protection.
M14932-3 v8
One three-winding power transformer can be included in the line differential protection zone.
In such application, the differential protection is based on the ampere turns balance between
the transformer windings. Three-winding transformers are correctly represented with vector
group compensations made in the algorithm. The function includes 2nd and 5th harmonic
restraint and zero-sequence current elimination. The phase-segregated differential protection
with single-pole tripping is usually not possible in such applications.

91
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Differential protection

Protected zone

IED Comm. Channel IED

Comm. Channel Comm. Channel

IED

IEC05000042_2_en.vsd
IEC05000042 V2 EN-US

Figure 37: Example of application on a three-terminal line with an in-line power

transformer in the protection zone

6.2.2.2 Analog signal transfer for line differential protection M13647-3 v7

The line differential protection function can be arranged as a master-master system or a

master-slave system alternatively. In the former, current samples are exchanged between all
IEDs, and an evaluation is made in each IED. This means that a 64 kbit/s communication
channel is needed between every IED included in the same line differential protection zone. In
the latter, current samples are sent from all slave IEDs to one master IED where the evaluation
is made, and trip signals are sent to the remote ends when needed. In this system, a 64 kbit/s
communication channel is only needed between the master, and each one of the slave IEDs.
The Master-Slave condition for the differential function appears automatically when the
setting Operation for the differential function is set to Off.

It is recommended to use the same firmware version as well as hardware

version for a specific line differential scheme.

Protected zone

IED IED

Comm.
Channels

IED IED IED

IEC0500043_2_en.vsd
IEC05000043 V2 EN-US

Figure 38: Five terminal lines with master-master system

92
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 6
Differential protection

Protected zone

RED RED
670 670

Comm.
Channels

RED RED RED

670 670 670

en05000044.vsd
IEC05000044 V1 EN-US

Figure 39: Five terminal line with master-slave system

Current samples from IEDs located geographically apart from each other, must be time
coordinated so that the current differential algorithm can be executed correctly, this is done
with the echo method.For applications where transmit and receive times can differ, the
optional built in GPS receivers can be used

The communication link is continuously monitored, and an automatic switchover to a standby

link is possible after a preset time.

6.2.3 Function block SEMOD54630-1 v1

M14921-3 v3

L3CPDIF
I3P1* TRIP
I3P2* TRL1
I3P3* TRL2
TRL3
STARTRES
STARTUNR
STARTENH
START
STL1
STL2
STL3
INTFAULT
EXTFAULT
BLK2H
BLK2HL1
BLK2HL2
BLK2HL3
BLK5H
BLK5HL1
BLK5HL2
BLK5HL3
ALARM
OPENCT
OPENCTAL
IDL1
IDL2
IDL3
IDL1MAG
IDL2MAG
IDL3MAG
IBIAS
IDNSMAG

IEC06000252-3-en.vsd
IEC06000252 V3 EN-US

Figure 40: L3CPDIF function block

93
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Differential protection

M14920-3 v3

L6CPDIF
I3P1* TRIP
I3P2* TRL1
I3P3* TRL2
I3P4* TRL3
I3P5* STARTRES
I3P6* STARTUNR
STARTENH
START
STL1
STL2
STL3
INTFAULT
EXTFAULT
BLK2H
BLK2HL1
BLK2HL2
BLK2HL3
BLK5H
BLK5HL1
BLK5HL2
BLK5HL3
ALARM
OPENCT
OPENCTAL
IDL1
IDL2
IDL3
IDL1MAG
IDL2MAG
IDL3MAG
IBIAS
IDNSMAG

IEC06000253-3-en.vsd
IEC06000253 V3 EN-US

Figure 41: L6CPDIF function block

M14937-3 v3

LT3CPDIF
I3P1* TRIP
I3P2* TRL1
I3P3* TRL2
TRL3
STARTRES
STARTUNR
STARTENH
START
STL1
STL2
STL3
INTFAULT
EXTFAULT
BLK2H
BLK2HL1
BLK2HL2
BLK2HL3
BLK5H
BLK5HL1
BLK5HL2
BLK5HL3
ALARM
OPENCT
OPENCTAL
IDL1
IDL2
IDL3
IDL1MAG
IDL2MAG
IDL3MAG
IBIAS
IDNSMAG

IEC06000254-3-en.vsd
IEC06000254 V3 EN-US

Figure 42: LT3CPDIF function block

94
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 6
Differential protection

M14936-3 v2

LT6CPDIF
I3P1* TRIP
I3P2* TRL1
I3P3* TRL2
I3P4* TRL3
I3P5* STARTRES
I3P6* STARTUNR
STARTENH
START
STL1
STL2
STL3
INTFAULT
EXTFAULT
BLK2H
BLK2HL1
BLK2HL2
BLK2HL3
BLK5H
BLK5HL1
BLK5HL2
BLK5HL3
ALARM
OPENCT
OPENCTAL
IDL1
IDL2
IDL3
IDL1MAG
IDL2MAG
IDL3MAG
IBIAS
IDNSMAG

IEC06000255-3-en.vsd
IEC06000255 V3 EN-US

Figure 43: LT6CPDIF function block

M12591-3 v4

LDLPSCH
CTFAIL TRIP
OUTSERV TRL1
BLOCK TRL2
TRL3
TRLOCAL
TRLOCL1
TRLOCL2
TRLOCL3
TRREMOTE
DIFLBLKD

IEC13000302-1-en.vsd
IEC13000302 V1 EN-US

Figure 44: LDLPSCH function block

6.2.4 Signals
PID-6750-INPUTSIGNALS v1

Table 41: L3CPDIF Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P1 GROUP - Three phase current grp1 samples and DFT values
SIGNAL
I3P2 GROUP - Three phase current grp2 samples and DFT values
SIGNAL
I3P3 GROUP - Three phase current grp3 samples and DFT values
SIGNAL

95
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Differential protection

PID-6750-OUTPUTSIGNALS v1

Table 42: L3CPDIF Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common, main, trip output signal
TRL1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L1
TRL2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L2
TRL3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L3
STARTRES BOOLEAN Start of restrained differential protection
STARTUNR BOOLEAN Start of unrestrained differential protection
STARTENH BOOLEAN Start of enhanced restrained differential protection
START BOOLEAN Common, main, start output signal
STL1 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L1
STL2 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L2
STL3 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L3
INTFAULT BOOLEAN Internal fault has been detected
EXTFAULT BOOLEAN External fault has been detected
BLK2H BOOLEAN Common block signal, due to 2nd harmonic
BLK2HL1 BOOLEAN Block signal due to 2nd harmonic, phase L1
BLK2HL2 BOOLEAN Block signal due to 2nd harmonic, phase L2
BLK2HL3 BOOLEAN Block signal due to 2nd harmonic, phase L3
BLK5H BOOLEAN Common block signal, due to 5-th harmonic
BLK5HL1 BOOLEAN Block signal due to 5th harmonic, phase L1
BLK5HL2 BOOLEAN Block signal due to 5th harmonic, phase L2
BLK5HL3 BOOLEAN Block signal due to 5th harmonic, phase L3
ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm for sustained differential current
OPENCT BOOLEAN An open CT was detected
OPENCTAL BOOLEAN Open CT Alarm output signal. Issued after a delay ...
IDL1 REAL Instantaneous differential current, phase L1
IDL2 REAL Instantaneous differential current, phase L2
IDL3 REAL Instantaneous differential current, phase L3
IDL1MAG REAL Magnitude of fund. freq. differential current, phase L1
IDL2MAG REAL Magnitude of fund. freq. differential current, phase L2
IDL3MAG REAL Magnitude of fund. freq. differential current, phase L3
IBIAS REAL Magnitude of the bias current, common for L1, L2, L3
IDNSMAG REAL Magnitude of the negative sequence differential current

96
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 6
Differential protection

PID-6748-INPUTSIGNALS v1

Table 43: L6CPDIF Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P1 GROUP - Three phase current grp1 samples and DFT values
SIGNAL
I3P2 GROUP - Three phase current grp2 samples and DFT values
SIGNAL
I3P3 GROUP - Three phase current grp3 samples and DFT values
SIGNAL
I3P4 GROUP - Three phase current grp4 samples and DFT values
SIGNAL
I3P5 GROUP - Three phase current grp5 samples and DFT values
SIGNAL
I3P6 GROUP - Three phase current grp6 samples and DFT values
SIGNAL

PID-6748-OUTPUTSIGNALS v1

Table 44: L6CPDIF Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common, main, trip output signal
TRL1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L1
TRL2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L2
TRL3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L3
STARTRES BOOLEAN Start of restrained differential protection
STARTUNR BOOLEAN Start of unrestrained differential protection
STARTENH BOOLEAN Start of enhanced restrained differential protection
START BOOLEAN Common, main, start output signal
STL1 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L1
STL2 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L2
STL3 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L3
INTFAULT BOOLEAN Internal fault has been detected
EXTFAULT BOOLEAN External fault has been detected
BLK2H BOOLEAN Common block signal, due to 2nd harmonic
BLK2HL1 BOOLEAN Block signal due to 2nd harmonic, phase L1
BLK2HL2 BOOLEAN Block signal due to 2nd harmonic, phase L2
BLK2HL3 BOOLEAN Block signal due to 2nd harmonic, phase L3
BLK5H BOOLEAN Common block signal, due to 5-th harmonic
BLK5HL1 BOOLEAN Block signal due to 5th harmonic, phase L1
BLK5HL2 BOOLEAN Block signal due to 5th harmonic, phase L2
BLK5HL3 BOOLEAN Block signal due to 5th harmonic, phase L3
ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm for sustained differential current
OPENCT BOOLEAN An open CT was detected
OPENCTAL BOOLEAN Open CT Alarm output signal. Issued after a delay ...
IDL1 REAL Instantaneous differential current, phase L1
IDL2 REAL Instantaneous differential current, phase L2
Table continues on next page

97
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Differential protection

Name Type Description

IDL3 REAL Instantaneous differential current, phase L3
IDL1MAG REAL Magnitude of fund. freq. differential current, phase L1
IDL2MAG REAL Magnitude of fund. freq. differential current, phase L2
IDL3MAG REAL Magnitude of fund. freq. differential current, phase L3
IBIAS REAL Magnitude of the bias current, common for L1, L2, L3
IDNSMAG REAL Magnitude of the negative sequence differential current

PID-3701-INPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 45: LT3CPDIF Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P1 GROUP - Three phase current grp1 samples and DFT values
SIGNAL
I3P2 GROUP - Three phase current grp2 samples and DFT values
SIGNAL
I3P3 GROUP - Three phase current grp3 samples and DFT values
SIGNAL

PID-3701-OUTPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 46: LT3CPDIF Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common, main, trip output signal
TRL1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L1
TRL2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L2
TRL3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L3
STARTRES BOOLEAN Start of restrained differential protection
STARTUNR BOOLEAN Start of unrestrained differential protection
STARTENH BOOLEAN Start of enhanced restrained differential protection
START BOOLEAN Common, main, start output signal
STL1 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L1
STL2 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L2
STL3 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L3
INTFAULT BOOLEAN Internal fault has been detected
EXTFAULT BOOLEAN External fault has been detected
BLK2H BOOLEAN Common block signal, due to 2nd harmonic
BLK2HL1 BOOLEAN Block signal due to 2nd harmonic, phase L1
BLK2HL2 BOOLEAN Block signal due to 2nd harmonic, phase L2
BLK2HL3 BOOLEAN Block signal due to 2nd harmonic, phase L3
BLK5H BOOLEAN Common block signal, due to 5-th harmonic
BLK5HL1 BOOLEAN Block signal due to 5th harmonic, phase L1
BLK5HL2 BOOLEAN Block signal due to 5th harmonic, phase L2
BLK5HL3 BOOLEAN Block signal due to 5th harmonic, phase L3
ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm for sustained differential current
OPENCT BOOLEAN An open CT was detected
Table continues on next page

98
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 6
Differential protection

Name Type Description

OPENCTAL BOOLEAN Open CT Alarm output signal. Issued after a delay ...
IDL1 REAL Instantaneous differential current, phase L1
IDL2 REAL Instantaneous differential current, phase L2
IDL3 REAL Instantaneous differential current, phase L3
IDL1MAG REAL Magnitude of fund. freq. differential current, phase L1
IDL2MAG REAL Magnitude of fund. freq. differential current, phase L2
IDL3MAG REAL Magnitude of fund. freq. differential current, phase L3
IBIAS REAL Magnitude of the bias current, common for L1, L2, L3
IDNSMAG REAL Magnitude of the negative sequence differential current

PID-3699-INPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 47: LT6CPDIF Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P1 GROUP - Three phase current grp1 samples and DFT values
SIGNAL
I3P2 GROUP - Three phase current grp2 samples and DFT values
SIGNAL
I3P3 GROUP - Three phase current grp3 samples and DFT values
SIGNAL
I3P4 GROUP - Three phase current grp4 samples and DFT values
SIGNAL
I3P5 GROUP - Three phase current grp5 samples and DFT values
SIGNAL
I3P6 GROUP - Three phase current grp6 samples and DFT values
SIGNAL

PID-3699-OUTPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 48: LT6CPDIF Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common, main, trip output signal
TRL1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L1
TRL2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L2
TRL3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L3
STARTRES BOOLEAN Start of restrained differential protection
STARTUNR BOOLEAN Start of unrestrained differential protection
STARTENH BOOLEAN Start of enhanced restrained differential protection
START BOOLEAN Common, main, start output signal
STL1 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L1
STL2 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L2
STL3 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L3
INTFAULT BOOLEAN Internal fault has been detected
EXTFAULT BOOLEAN External fault has been detected
BLK2H BOOLEAN Common block signal, due to 2nd harmonic
BLK2HL1 BOOLEAN Block signal due to 2nd harmonic, phase L1
Table continues on next page

99
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Differential protection

Name Type Description

BLK2HL2 BOOLEAN Block signal due to 2nd harmonic, phase L2
BLK2HL3 BOOLEAN Block signal due to 2nd harmonic, phase L3
BLK5H BOOLEAN Common block signal, due to 5-th harmonic
BLK5HL1 BOOLEAN Block signal due to 5th harmonic, phase L1
BLK5HL2 BOOLEAN Block signal due to 5th harmonic, phase L2
BLK5HL3 BOOLEAN Block signal due to 5th harmonic, phase L3
ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm for sustained differential current
OPENCT BOOLEAN An open CT was detected
OPENCTAL BOOLEAN Open CT Alarm output signal. Issued after a delay ...
IDL1 REAL Instantaneous differential current, phase L1
IDL2 REAL Instantaneous differential current, phase L2
IDL3 REAL Instantaneous differential current, phase L3
IDL1MAG REAL Magnitude of fund. freq. differential current, phase L1
IDL2MAG REAL Magnitude of fund. freq. differential current, phase L2
IDL3MAG REAL Magnitude of fund. freq. differential current, phase L3
IBIAS REAL Magnitude of the bias current, common for L1, L2, L3
IDNSMAG REAL Magnitude of the negative sequence differential current

PID-3560-INPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 49: LDLPSCH Input signals

Name Type Default Description
CTFAIL BOOLEAN 0 CT failure indication from local CT supervision
OUTSERV BOOLEAN 0 Input for indicating that the terminal is out of service
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

PID-3560-OUTPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 50: LDLPSCH Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General trip from differential protection system
TRL1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L1
TRL2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L2
TRL3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L3
TRLOCAL BOOLEAN Trip from local differential function
TRLOCL1 BOOLEAN Trip from local differential function in phase L1
TRLOCL2 BOOLEAN Trip from local differential function in phase L2
TRLOCL3 BOOLEAN Trip from local differential function in phase L3
TRREMOTE BOOLEAN Trip from remote differential function
DIFLBLKD BOOLEAN Local line differential function blocked

100
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 6
Differential protection

6.2.5 Settings
PID-6750-SETTINGS v1

Table 51: L3CPDIF Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
IdMin 0.20 - 2.00 IB 0.01 0.30 Oper - restr charact., section 1
sensitivity, multiple IBase
IdMinHigh 0.20 - 10.00 IB 0.01 0.80 Initial lower sensitivity, as multiple of
IBase
tIdMinHigh 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Time interval of initial lower
sensitivity, in sec
IdUnre 1.00 - 50.00 IB 0.01 10.00 Unrestrained differential current limit,
multiple of IBase
NegSeqDiffEn Off - - On Off/On selection for internal /
On external fault discriminator
NegSeqROA 30.0 - 120.0 Deg 1.0 60.0 Internal/external fault discriminator
Operate Angle, degrees
IMinNegSeq 0.01 - 0.20 IB 0.01 0.04 Min. value of neg. seq. curr. as multiple
of IBase
CrossBlockEn No - - No Off/On selection of the cross -block
Yes logic
ChargCurEnable Off - - Off Off/On selection for compensation of
On charging currents
AddDelay Off - - Off Off/On selection for delayed diff. trip
On command
IMaxAddDelay 0.20 - 5.00 IB 0.01 1.00 Below limit, extra delay can be
applied, multiple of IBase
tDefTime 0.000 - 6.000 s 0.001 0.000 Definite time additional delay in
seconds
tMinInv 0.001 - 6.000 s 0.001 0.010 Inverse Delay Minimum Time. In
seconds
CurveType ANSI Ext. inv. - - IEC Def. Time 19 curve types. Example: 15 for
ANSI Very inv. definite time delay.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Programmable
RI type
RD type
k 0.05 - 1.10 - 0.01 1.00 Time Multiplier Setting (TMS) for
inverse delays
IdiffAlarm 0.05 - 1.00 IB 0.01 0.15 Sustained differential current alarm,
factor of IBase
tAlarmdelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 10.000 Delay for alarm due to sustained
differential current, in s

101
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Differential protection

Table 52: L3CPDIF Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
EndSection1 0.20 - 1.50 IB 0.01 1.25 End of section 1, as multiple of
reference current IBase
EndSection2 1.00 - 10.00 IB 0.01 3.00 End of section 2, as multiple of
reference current IBase
SlopeSection2 10.0 - 50.0 % 0.1 40.0 Slope in section 2 of operate-restrain
characteristic, in %
SlopeSection3 30.0 - 100.0 % 0.1 80.0 Slope in section 3 of operate- restrain
characteristic, in %
I2/I1Ratio 5.0 - 100.0 % 1.0 10.0 Max. ratio of 2nd harm. to
fundamental harm dif. curr. in %
I5/I1Ratio 5.0 - 100.0 % 1.0 25.0 Max. ratio of 5th harm. to
fundamental harm dif. curr. in %
p 0.01 - 1000.00 - 0.01 0.02 Settable curve parameter, user-
programmable curve type.
a 0.01 - 1000.00 - 0.01 0.14 Settable curve parameter, user-
programmable curve type.
b 0.01 - 1000.00 - 0.01 1.00 Settable curve parameter, user-
programmable curve type.
c 0.01 - 1000.00 - 0.01 1.00 Settable curve parameter, user-
programmable curve type.
OpenCTEnable Off - - On Open CTEnable Off/On
On
tOCTAlarmDelay 0.100 - 10.000 s 0.001 1.000 Open CT: time in s to alarm after an
open CT is detected
tOCTResetDelay 0.100 - 10.000 s 0.001 0.250 Reset delay in s. After delay, diff.
function is activated
OCTBlockEn Off - - On Enable Open CT blocking function trip
On Off/On

Table 53: L3CPDIF Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups
NoOfUsedCTs 2 - - 2 Total number of 3-Ph CT sets
3 connected to diff protection

PID-6748-SETTINGS v1

Table 54: L6CPDIF Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
IdMin 0.20 - 2.00 IB 0.01 0.30 Oper - restr charact., section 1
sensitivity, multiple IBase
IdMinHigh 0.20 - 10.00 IB 0.01 0.80 Initial lower sensitivity, as multiple of
IBase
tIdMinHigh 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Time interval of initial lower
sensitivity, in sec
Table continues on next page

102
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 6
Differential protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

IdUnre 1.00 - 50.00 IB 0.01 10.00 Unrestrained differential current limit,
multiple of IBase
NegSeqDiffEn Off - - On Off/On selection for internal /
On external fault discriminator
NegSeqROA 30.0 - 120.0 Deg 1.0 60.0 Internal/external fault discriminator
Operate Angle, degrees
IMinNegSeq 0.01 - 0.20 IB 0.01 0.04 Min. value of neg. seq. curr. as multiple
of IBase
CrossBlockEn No - - No Off/On selection of the cross -block
Yes logic
I2/I1Ratio 5.0 - 100.0 % 1.0 10.0 Max. ratio of 2nd harm. to
fundamental harm dif. curr. in %
I5/I1Ratio 5.0 - 100.0 % 1.0 25.0 Max. ratio of 5th harm. to
fundamental harm dif. curr. in %
ChargCurEnable Off - - Off Off/On selection for compensation of
On charging currents
AddDelay Off - - Off Off/On selection for delayed diff. trip
On command
IMaxAddDelay 0.20 - 5.00 IB 0.01 1.00 Below limit, extra delay can be
applied, multiple of IBase
tDefTime 0.000 - 6.000 s 0.001 0.000 Definite time additional delay in
seconds
tMinInv 0.001 - 6.000 s 0.001 0.010 Inverse Delay Minimum Time. In
seconds
CurveType ANSI Ext. inv. - - IEC Def. Time 19 curve types. Example: 15 for
ANSI Very inv. definite time delay.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Programmable
RI type
RD type
k 0.05 - 1.10 - 0.01 1.00 Time Multiplier Setting (TMS) for
inverse delays
IdiffAlarm 0.05 - 1.00 IB 0.01 0.15 Sustained differential current alarm,
factor of IBase
tAlarmdelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 10.000 Delay for alarm due to sustained
differential current, in s

103
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Differential protection

Table 55: L6CPDIF Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
EndSection1 0.20 - 1.50 IB 0.01 1.25 End of section 1, as multiple of
reference current IBase
EndSection2 1.00 - 10.00 IB 0.01 3.00 End of section 2, as multiple of
reference current IBase
SlopeSection2 10.0 - 50.0 % 0.1 40.0 Slope in section 2 of operate-restrain
characteristic, in %
SlopeSection3 30.0 - 100.0 % 0.1 80.0 Slope in section 3 of operate- restrain
characteristic, in %
p 0.01 - 1000.00 - 0.01 0.02 Settable curve parameter, user-
programmable curve type.
a 0.01 - 1000.00 - 0.01 0.14 Settable curve parameter, user-
programmable curve type.
b 0.01 - 1000.00 - 0.01 1.00 Settable curve parameter, user-
programmable curve type.
c 0.01 - 1000.00 - 0.01 1.00 Settable curve parameter, user-
programmable curve type.
OpenCTEnable Off - - On Open CTEnable Off/On
On
tOCTAlarmDelay 0.100 - 10.000 s 0.001 1.000 Open CT: time in s to alarm after an
open CT is detected
tOCTResetDelay 0.100 - 10.000 s 0.001 0.250 Reset delay in s. After delay, diff.
function is activated
OCTBlockEn Off - - On Enable Open CT blocking function trip
On Off/On

Table 56: L6CPDIF Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups
NoOfUsedCTs 2 - - 2 Total number of 3-Ph CT sets
3 connected to diff protection
4
5
6

PID-6605-SETTINGS v3

Table 57: LT3CPDIF Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
IdMin 0.20 - 2.00 IB 0.01 0.30 Oper - restr charact., section 1
sensitivity, multiple IBase
IdMinHigh 0.20 - 10.00 IB 0.01 0.80 Initial lower sensitivity, as multiple of
IBase
tIdMinHigh 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Time interval of initial lower
sensitivity, in sec
IdUnre 1.00 - 50.00 IB 0.01 10.00 Unrestrained differential current limit,
multiple of IBase
Table continues on next page

104
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 6
Differential protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

NegSeqDiffEn Off - - On Off/On selection for internal /
On external fault discriminator
NegSeqROA 30.0 - 120.0 Deg 1.0 60.0 Internal/external fault discriminator
Operate Angle, degrees
IMinNegSeq 0.01 - 0.20 IB 0.01 0.04 Min. value of neg. seq. curr. as multiple
of IBase
CrossBlockEn No - - No Off/On selection of the cross -block
Yes logic
ChargCurEnable Off - - Off Off/On selection for compensation of
On charging currents
AddDelay Off - - Off Off/On selection for delayed diff. trip
On command
IMaxAddDelay 0.20 - 5.00 IB 0.01 1.00 Below limit, extra delay can be
applied, multiple of IBase
tDefTime 0.000 - 6.000 s 0.001 0.000 Definite time additional delay in
seconds
tMinInv 0.001 - 6.000 s 0.001 0.010 Inverse Delay Minimum Time. In
seconds
CurveType ANSI Ext. inv. - - IEC Def. Time 19 curve types. Example: 15 for
ANSI Very inv. definite time delay.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Programmable
RI type
RD type
k 0.05 - 1.10 - 0.01 1.00 Time Multiplier Setting (TMS) for
inverse delays
IdiffAlarm 0.05 - 1.00 IB 0.01 0.15 Sustained differential current alarm,
factor of IBase
tAlarmdelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 10.000 Delay for alarm due to sustained
differential current, in s

Table 58: LT3CPDIF Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
EndSection1 0.20 - 1.50 IB 0.01 1.25 End of section 1, as multiple of
reference current IBase
EndSection2 1.00 - 10.00 IB 0.01 3.00 End of section 2, as multiple of
reference current IBase
SlopeSection2 10.0 - 50.0 % 0.1 40.0 Slope in section 2 of operate-restrain
characteristic, in %
SlopeSection3 30.0 - 100.0 % 0.1 80.0 Slope in section 3 of operate- restrain
characteristic, in %
I2/I1Ratio 5.0 - 100.0 % 1.0 10.0 Max. ratio of 2nd harm. to
fundamental harm dif. curr. in %
Table continues on next page

105
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Differential protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

I5/I1Ratio 5.0 - 100.0 % 1.0 25.0 Max. ratio of 5th harm. to
fundamental harm dif. curr. in %
p 0.01 - 1000.00 - 0.01 0.02 Settable curve parameter, user-
programmable curve type.
a 0.01 - 1000.00 - 0.01 0.14 Settable curve parameter, user-
programmable curve type.
b 0.01 - 1000.00 - 0.01 1.00 Settable curve parameter, user-
programmable curve type.
c 0.01 - 1000.00 - 0.01 1.00 Settable curve parameter, user-
programmable curve type.
OpenCTEnable Off - - On Open CTEnable Off/On
On
tOCTAlarmDelay 0.100 - 10.000 s 0.001 1.000 Open CT: time in s to alarm after an
open CT is detected
tOCTResetDelay 0.100 - 10.000 s 0.001 0.250 Reset delay in s. After delay, diff.
function is activated
OCTBlockEn Off - - On Enable Open CT blocking function trip
On Off/On

Table 59: LT3CPDIF Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups
NoOfUsedCTs 2 - - 2 Total number of 3-Ph CT sets
3 connected to diff protection
ZerSeqCurSubtr Off - - Off Off/On for elimination of zero seq.
On from diff. and bias curr
TraAOnInpCh No Transf A - - No Transf A Power transformer A applied on input
1 channel X
2
3
RatVoltW1TraA 1.0 - 9999.9 kV 0.1 130.0 Transformer A rated voltage (kV) on
winding 1 (HV winding)
RatVoltW2TraA 1.0 - 9999.9 kV 0.1 130.0 Transformer A rated voltage (kV) on
winding 2 (LV winding)
ClockNumTransA 0 [0 deg] - - 0 [0 deg] Transf. A phase shift in multiples of 30
1 [30 deg lag] deg, 5 for 150 deg
2 [60 deg lag]
3 [90 deg lag]
4 [120 deg lag]
5 [150 deg lag]
6 [180 deg lag]
7 [210 deg lag]
8 [240 deg lag]
9 [270 deg lag]
10 [300 deg lag]
11 [330 deg lag]
TraBOnInpCh No Transf B - - No Transf B Power transformer B applied on input
1 channel X
2
3
Table continues on next page

106
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 6
Differential protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

RatVoltW1TraB 1.0 - 9999.9 kV 0.1 130.0 Transformer B rated voltage (kV) on
winding 1 (HV winding)
RatVoltW2TraB 1.0 - 9999.9 kV 0.1 130.0 Transformer B rated voltage (kV) on
winding 2 (LV winding)
ClockNumTransB 0 [0 deg] - - 0 [0 deg] Transf. B phase shift in multiples of 30
1 [30 deg lag] deg, 2 for 60 deg
2 [60 deg lag]
3 [90 deg lag]
4 [120 deg lag]
5 [150 deg lag]
6 [180 deg lag]
7 [210 deg lag]
8 [240 deg lag]
9 [270 deg lag]
10 [300 deg lag]
11 [330 deg lag]

PID-6606-SETTINGS v3

Table 60: LT6CPDIF Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
IdMin 0.20 - 2.00 IB 0.01 0.30 Oper - restr charact., section 1
sensitivity, multiple IBase
IdMinHigh 0.20 - 10.00 IB 0.01 0.80 Initial lower sensitivity, as multiple of
IBase
tIdMinHigh 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Time interval of initial lower
sensitivity, in sec
IdUnre 1.00 - 50.00 IB 0.01 10.00 Unrestrained differential current limit,
multiple of IBase
NegSeqDiffEn Off - - On Off/On selection for internal /
On external fault discriminator
NegSeqROA 30.0 - 120.0 Deg 1.0 60.0 Internal/external fault discriminator
Operate Angle, degrees
IMinNegSeq 0.01 - 0.20 IB 0.01 0.04 Min. value of neg. seq. curr. as multiple
of IBase
CrossBlockEn No - - No Off/On selection of the cross -block
Yes logic
I2/I1Ratio 5.0 - 100.0 % 1.0 10.0 Max. ratio of 2nd harm. to
fundamental harm dif. curr. in %
I5/I1Ratio 5.0 - 100.0 % 1.0 25.0 Max. ratio of 5th harm. to
fundamental harm dif. curr. in %
ChargCurEnable Off - - Off Off/On selection for compensation of
On charging currents
AddDelay Off - - Off Off/On selection for delayed diff. trip
On command
IMaxAddDelay 0.20 - 5.00 IB 0.01 1.00 Below limit, extra delay can be
applied, multiple of IBase
tDefTime 0.000 - 6.000 s 0.001 0.000 Definite time additional delay in
seconds
tMinInv 0.001 - 6.000 s 0.001 0.010 Inverse Delay Minimum Time. In
seconds
Table continues on next page

107
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Differential protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

CurveType ANSI Ext. inv. - - IEC Def. Time 19 curve types. Example: 15 for
ANSI Very inv. definite time delay.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Programmable
RI type
RD type
k 0.05 - 1.10 - 0.01 1.00 Time Multiplier Setting (TMS) for
inverse delays
IdiffAlarm 0.05 - 1.00 IB 0.01 0.15 Sustained differential current alarm,
factor of IBase
tAlarmdelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 10.000 Delay for alarm due to sustained
differential current, in s

Table 61: LT6CPDIF Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
EndSection1 0.20 - 1.50 IB 0.01 1.25 End of section 1, as multiple of
reference current IBase
EndSection2 1.00 - 10.00 IB 0.01 3.00 End of section 2, as multiple of
reference current IBase
SlopeSection2 10.0 - 50.0 % 0.1 40.0 Slope in section 2 of operate-restrain
characteristic, in %
SlopeSection3 30.0 - 100.0 % 0.1 80.0 Slope in section 3 of operate- restrain
characteristic, in %
p 0.01 - 1000.00 - 0.01 0.02 Settable curve parameter, user-
programmable curve type.
a 0.01 - 1000.00 - 0.01 0.14 Settable curve parameter, user-
programmable curve type.
b 0.01 - 1000.00 - 0.01 1.00 Settable curve parameter, user-
programmable curve type.
c 0.01 - 1000.00 - 0.01 1.00 Settable curve parameter, user-
programmable curve type.
OpenCTEnable Off - - On Open CTEnable Off/On
On
tOCTAlarmDelay 0.100 - 10.000 s 0.001 1.000 Open CT: time in s to alarm after an
open CT is detected
tOCTResetDelay 0.100 - 10.000 s 0.001 0.250 Reset delay in s. After delay, diff.
function is activated
OCTBlockEn Off - - On Enable Open CT blocking function trip
On Off/On

108
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 6
Differential protection

Table 62: LT6CPDIF Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups
NoOfUsedCTs 2 - - 2 Total number of 3-Ph CT sets
3 connected to diff protection
4
5
6
ZerSeqCurSubtr Off - - Off Off/On for elimination of zero seq.
On from diff. and bias curr
TraAOnInpCh No Transf A - - No Transf A Power transformer A applied on input
1 channel X
2
3
4
5
6
RatVoltW1TraA 1.0 - 9999.9 kV 0.1 130.0 Transformer A rated voltage (kV) on
winding 1 (HV winding)
RatVoltW2TraA 1.0 - 9999.9 kV 0.1 130.0 Transformer A rated voltage (kV) on
winding 2 (LV winding)
ClockNumTransA 0 [0 deg] - - 0 [0 deg] Transf. A phase shift in multiples of 30
1 [30 deg lag] deg, 5 for 150 deg
2 [60 deg lag]
3 [90 deg lag]
4 [120 deg lag]
5 [150 deg lag]
6 [180 deg lag]
7 [210 deg lag]
8 [240 deg lag]
9 [270 deg lag]
10 [300 deg lag]
11 [330 deg lag]
TraBOnInpCh No Transf B - - No Transf B Power transformer B applied on input
1 channel X
2
3
4
5
6
RatVoltW1TraB 1.0 - 9999.9 kV 0.1 130.0 Transformer B rated voltage (kV) on
winding 1 (HV winding)
RatVoltW2TraB 1.0 - 9999.9 kV 0.1 130.0 Transformer B rated voltage (kV) on
winding 2 (LV winding)
ClockNumTransB 0 [0 deg] - - 0 [0 deg] Transf. B phase shift in multiples of 30
1 [30 deg lag] deg, 2 for 60 deg
2 [60 deg lag]
3 [90 deg lag]
4 [120 deg lag]
5 [150 deg lag]
6 [180 deg lag]
7 [210 deg lag]
8 [240 deg lag]
9 [270 deg lag]
10 [300 deg lag]
11 [330 deg lag]

109
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Differential protection

PID-3560-SETTINGS v5

Table 63: LDLPSCH Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
TestModeSet Off - - Off Test mode On/Off
On
ReleaseLocal Block all - - Block all Release of local terminal for trip under
Release local test mode

6.2.6 Monitored data

PID-6750-MONITOREDDATA v1

Table 64: L3CPDIF Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IDL1MAG REAL - A Magnitude of fund. freq. differential
current, phase L1
IDL2MAG REAL - A Magnitude of fund. freq. differential
current, phase L2
IDL3MAG REAL - A Magnitude of fund. freq. differential
current, phase L3
IBIAS REAL - A Magnitude of the bias current,
common for L1, L2, L3
IDNSMAG REAL - A Magnitude of the negative sequence
differential current
NSANGLE REAL - deg Angle between local and remote neg.
seq. currents
ICHARGE REAL - A Amount of compensated charging
current

PID-6748-MONITOREDDATA v1

Table 65: L6CPDIF Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IDL1MAG REAL - A Magnitude of fund. freq. differential
current, phase L1
IDL2MAG REAL - A Magnitude of fund. freq. differential
current, phase L2
IDL3MAG REAL - A Magnitude of fund. freq. differential
current, phase L3
IBIAS REAL - A Magnitude of the bias current,
common for L1, L2, L3
IDNSMAG REAL - A Magnitude of the negative sequence
differential current
NSANGLE REAL - deg Angle between local and remote neg.
seq. currents
ICHARGE REAL - A Amount of compensated charging
current

110
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 6
Differential protection

PID-3701-MONITOREDDATA v3

Table 66: LT3CPDIF Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OPENCTIN INTEGER - - Open CT on Input : 1 for input 1, 2 for
input 2
OPENCTPH INTEGER - - Open CT in Phase : 1 for L1, 2 for L2, 3
for L3
IDL1MAG REAL - A Magnitude of fund. freq. differential
current, phase L1
IDL2MAG REAL - A Magnitude of fund. freq. differential
current, phase L2
IDL3MAG REAL - A Magnitude of fund. freq. differential
current, phase L3
IBIAS REAL - A Magnitude of the bias current,
common for L1, L2, L3
IDNSMAG REAL - A Magnitude of the negative sequence
differential current
NSANGLE REAL - deg Angle between local and remote neg.
seq. currents
ICHARGE REAL - A Amount of compensated charging
current

PID-3699-MONITOREDDATA v3

Table 67: LT6CPDIF Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OPENCTIN INTEGER - - Open CT on Input : 1 for input 1, 2 for
input 2
OPENCTPH INTEGER - - Open CT in Phase : 1 for L1, 2 for L2, 3
for L3
IDL1MAG REAL - A Magnitude of fund. freq. differential
current, phase L1
IDL2MAG REAL - A Magnitude of fund. freq. differential
current, phase L2
IDL3MAG REAL - A Magnitude of fund. freq. differential
current, phase L3
IBIAS REAL - A Magnitude of the bias current,
common for L1, L2, L3
IDNSMAG REAL - A Magnitude of the negative sequence
differential current
NSANGLE REAL - deg Angle between local and remote neg.
seq. currents
ICHARGE REAL - A Amount of compensated charging
current

6.2.7 Operation principle

6.2.7.1 Algorithm and logic M13652-3 v7

The Line differential protection function evaluates measured current values from local and
remote line ends in order to distinguish between internal or external faults or undisturbed
conditions.

111
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Differential protection

The local currents are fed to the IED via the analog input modules and then they pass the
analog-to-digital converter, as shown in Figure 45.

Local end Remote end

Remote end IED

LDCM

Local end IED

Current
samples from
local end
Analog Input A/D
Module Converter Current
Pre-processing
samples from
Block
remote end
LDCM

Line Diffferential Function

CH1IL1RE [magnitude] Trip by unrestrained differential protection

Trip commands
CH1IL1IM Calculation of Differential ³1 TRIP
CH1IL2RE fundamental and bias currents
Start L1
CH1IL2IM frequency Magnitudes of applied to
differential differential operate / bias -, Start L2
currents Output logic: TRL1
currents (3x) and unrestrained Start L3 TRL2
Currents from
all ends as & bias current characteristics TRL3
Bias current St L1 low sens - 2nd harmonic block
phasors STARTRES
- 5th harmonic block
St L2 low sens STARTUNR
CH1IL1SM St L3 low sens STARTENH
- Cross block logic
CH1IL2SM Calculation
CH1IL3SM of [samples] 2nd h. block
- Enhanced trip for START
CH2IL1SM instantaneous internal faults STL1
differential Harmonic STL2
Instantaneous analysis - Decreased STL3
currents
Curr. samples differential 5th h. block sensitivity for

Information
nd th
from all ends (3x) ( 2 and 5 )
currents external faults BLK2H
(samples) BLK2HL1
- BLK2HL2
CH1INSRE Conditional trip for BLK2HL3
CH1INSIM Calculation simultaneous external
of and internal faults BLK5H
CH1INSRE High sensitive Internal fault
negative-- BLK5HL1
CH1INSIM Two to six internal/external fault BLK5HL2
sequence contributions discriminator BLK5HL3
External fault -
differential to neg. seq. Conditional extra time
Neg. seq. current differential delay for trip signals
currents from current as INTFAULT
(1x)
all ends phasors EXTFAULT
as phasors

IEC05000294-4-en.vsd
IEC05000294 V3 EN-US

Figure 45: A simplified block diagram of the power line differential protection
The IED receives the remote currents as samples via a communication link. When entering the
IED, they are processed in the Line Differential Communication Module (LDCM) where they are
time-coordinated with the local current samples, and interpolated in order to be comparable
with the local samples.

112
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 6
Differential protection

In the preprocessing block, the real and imaginary parts of the fundamental frequency phase
currents and negative sequence currents are derived by means of fundamental frequency
numerical Fourier filters. Together with the current samples, which are required to internally
estimate the 2nd and the 5th harmonic contents in the instantaneous differential currents, they
are then forwarded to the differential function block where three kinds of analyses are carried
out.

The first analysis is the classical differential and bias current evaluation with the characteristic
as seen in Figure 46. Line differential protection is phase-segregated where the differential
current is the vectorial sum of all measured currents taken separately for each phase. The bias
current, on the other hand, is considered the greatest phase current in any line end and it is
common for all the tree phases. The two slopes (SlopeSection1, SlopeSection2) and
breakpoints (EndSection1, EndSection2) can be set in PCM600 or via the local human-machine
interface (LHMI).

Current values found to be above the characteristic formed by IdMin and the dual slope will
give a start in that phase. The level IdMinHigh is a setting value that is used to temporarily
decrease the sensitivity in situations when the protected line circuit is just energized, that is,
connected to the power system at one end.

There is also an unrestrained high differential current setting that can be used for fast tripping
of internal faults with very high currents. This unrestrained protection is phase-segregated,
that is, it is known which phase(s) require a trip command.

113
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Differential protection

Operate current
[ in pu of IBase]
Operate
5
unconditionally

UnrestrainedLimit
4

Operate IdMinHigh
3 C
conditionally
A B

2
Section 1 Section 2 Section 3

SlopeSection3
1
IdMin
SlopeSection2 Restrain
0
0 1 2 3 4 5

EndSection1 Restrain current

EndSection2 [ in pu of IBase]

en05000300.vsd
IEC05000300 V1 EN-US

Figure 46: Description of the restrained and the unrestrained operate characteristics

where:

slope = D Ioperate × 100%

D Irestrain
EQUATION1246 V1 EN-US

and where the restrained characteristic is defined by

the settings:

1. IdMin
2. EndSection1
3. EndSection2
4. SlopeSection2
5. SlopeSection3

The second analysis is the 2nd and 5th harmonic analysis of the three instantaneous differential
currents. Occurrence of these harmonics over a level that is set separately for each one blocks
tripping action from the biased slope evaluation. Harmonics blocking based on 2nd and 5th
harmonics is used only used if one of the following conditions are fulfilled:

• When a power transformer is included in the protected zone.

• When the bias current is less than 125 % Ibase.
• When an external fault has been detected by the negative sequence internal/external fault
discriminator and 200 ms after that.

114
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 6
Differential protection

The third analysis is the negative sequence current analysis. Effectively this is a fault
discriminator that distinguishes between internal and external faults. The directional test is
made so that the end with the highest negative sequence current is found. Then, the sum of
the negative sequence currents at all other circuit ends is calculated. Finally, the relative phase
angle between these two negative sequence currents is determined. The characteristic for this
fault discriminator is shown in Figure 47, where the directional characteristic is defined by the
two setting parameters IminNegSeq and NegSeqRoa.

90 deg
120 deg
If one or the Internal/external
other of fault boundary
currents is too
low, then no
measurement
NegSeqROA
is done, and
(Relay
120 degrees
Operate
is mapped
Angle)

180 deg 0 deg

IMinNegSeq

External Internal
fault fault
region region

270 deg en05000188-3-en.vsd

IEC05000188 V3 EN-US

Figure 47: Operate characteristic of the internal/external fault discriminator

The reference direction (that is, the positive direction) of currents in a power line is considered
to be towards the line. Thus, when both negative sequence currents to be compared have this
direction, the phase difference between them is ideally zero. In reality, the angle will usually be
greater than zero, and this because of the possible different negative sequence impedance
angles on both sides as seen from the fault location.

An internal fault can be suspected. In the opposite case, when one negative sequence current
is entering and the other is leaving the protected object, the phase difference will ideally be
180 degrees. An external fault can be suspected. If either the local or the sum of the remote
negative sequence currents or both is below the set level, the fault discriminator does not
make any fault classification and the value 120 degrees is set. This value is an indication that
negative sequence directional comparison has not been possible. In this case, neither internal
nor external fault is signalized. When an external fault is detected, the 2nd and 5th harmonic
analysis is activated for 200 ms. This gives better stability against unwanted trips. Under an
external fault condition, the cross block logic algorithm is active as well.

When a fault is classified as internal by the negative sequence fault discriminator, a trip
command is issued under the condition that at least one start signal has been issued, while all
eventual block signals (issued by the harmonic analysis of the instantaneous differential
currents) are ignored.

115
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Differential protection

For all differential functions it is the common trip that shall be used to initiate a
trip of a breaker. The separate trip signals from the different parts lacks the
safety against maloperation. This does in some cases result in a 6 ms time
difference between, for example restrained trip is issued and common trip is
issued. The separate trip signals shall only be used for information purpose of
which part that has caused the trip.

With reference to Figure 45, the outputs from the three analysis blocks are fed to the output
logic. Figure 48 shows a simplified block diagram of this output logic where only trip
commands and no alarm signals are shown for simplicity.

Trip unrestrained L1
TRIP
Trip unrestrained L2 OR
Trip unrestrained L3

Start L1 TRL1
AND OR
Start L2 OR AND
OR
Start L3 TRL2
AND OR
OR AND
OR
OR TRL3
AND
St L1 IdMinHigh OR AND
OR
St L2 IdMinHigh
St L3 IdMinHigh

Internal fault
AND
NegSeqDiffEn

tIdMinHigh
t
AND
External fault
tIdMinHigh OR
Line energizing t

Diff curr L1 2nd harm AND

OR OR
Diff curr L1 5th harm
nd
Diff curr L2 2 harm AND
OR OR
Diff curr L2 5th harm
nd
Diff curr L3 2 harm AND
OR OR
Diff curr L3 5th harm

OR
AND

CrossBlockEn

IEC05000295-4-en.vsd
IEC05000295 V4 EN-US

Figure 48: Simplified block diagram

Remembering that current values plotted above the characteristic formed by IdMin and the
dual slope in Figure 47 are said to give a start, the output logic can be summarized as follows:

116
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 6
Differential protection

• A start in one phase, gives a trip under the condition that the content of the 2nd and the
5th harmonic is below the set level for these harmonics in the phase with start, if
CrossBlockEn = OFF. If CrossBlockEn = ON, then all phases with their start signals set,
must be free of their respective harmonic block signals; otherwise no trip command is
issued. Otherwise it is blocked as long as the harmonic is above the set level. However,
when a line is energized the current setting value IdMinHigh is used. Effectively this means
that the line A-B-C in Figure 46 forms the characteristic. The harmonic block scheme is
generally not applied if there are no in-line or shunt power transformers within the
protection zone. In other words, if there are no in-line or tap (shunt) power transformers
within the protection zone, then no harmonics can prevent a trip command. This makes
the response of the differential protection faster in approximately 90% of all cases.
• Current values above the unrestrained limit, gives a trip irrespective of any presence of
harmonics.
• Classification of a fault as internal by the negative sequence currents based fault
discriminator, gives a trip under the condition that at least one start signal has been
issued, that is, set to 1 (TRUE). The negative sequence current based fault discriminator
itself is not phase-sensitive, and the start signals are required to determine which phases
were affected by the fault. Any harmonic blocking is then ignored. The harmonic block
scheme is not applied if there are no in-line or tap (shunt) power transformers within the
protection zone. In other words, if there are no in-line or tap power transformers within
the protection zone, then harmonics cannot prevent a trip command. This makes the
response of the protection faster in the majority of cases. If there is no power transformer
within the protected circuit, then the 2nd and 5th harmonic analysis is only activated
temporarily under external fault conditions, or when the bias current is lower than 1. 25 ⅹ
IBase.
• Classification of a fault as external by the negative sequence fault discriminator will cause
the harmonic logic scheme to be applied under the duration of the external fault signal, at
least for 200 ms. Even the cross block logic scheme is then active.

The compensation of charging currents can be selected active or inactive by setting

ChargCurEnable Yes or No. The compensation works so that the fundamental frequency
differential current that is measured under steady state undisturbed conditions, is identified
and then subtracted making the resulting differential current zero (or close to zero). This
action is made separately for each phase. The magnitude of the subtracted pre-fault currents
in Amperes can be read at any time as the service value ICHARGE.

Values of the pre-fault differential currents are not updated under disturbance conditions. The
updating process is resumed 50 ms after normal conditions have been restored. Normal
conditions are only assumed if there are no start signals, neither internal nor external fault is
declared, the power system is symmetrical.

The change in the charging current that the fault causes by decreasing the system voltage is
not considered in the algorithm. For more information, see the application manual.

Note that the subtraction of the charging current is limited to a value specified by IdMin.
Observe as well that IdMin must always be set at least 25 % - 50 % above the value of charging
currents.

Note that all small pre-fault differential currents are subtracted, regardless of their origin.
Besides the true charging currents, the following currents are eliminated:

• Small false differential currents due to small errors (inequalities) of current transformers.
• Small false differential currents because of off-nominal load tap changer positions when a
power transformer is included in the protected zone.
• Load currents of tap power transformers included in the protected zone.

117
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Differential protection

6.2.7.2 Time synchronization SEMOD52396-4 v5

In a numerical line differential protection, current samples from protections located

geographically apart from each other, must be time coordinated so that the currents from the
different line ends can be compared without introducing irrelevant errors. Accuracy
requirements on this time coordination are extremely high.

As an example, an inaccuracy of 0.1 ms in a 50 Hz system gives a maximum amplitude error

approximately around 3% whilst an inaccuracy of 1 ms gives a maximum amplitude error of
approximately 31%. The corresponding figures for a 60 Hz system are 4% and 38%
respectively.

In Line differential protection, the time coordination is made with the so-called echo method.
The echo method can be complemented with GPS synchronization as an option.

Each IED has an accurate local clock with a very small time drift. This clock makes time tagging
of telegrams, and the echo method is then used to find out the time difference between the
clocks in two ends of a power line.

Referring to Figure 49, it works such that the transmission time to send a message from
station B to station A (T1 → T2) and receive a message from A to B (T3 → T4) is measured. The
time instances T2 and T3 are taken with the local clock reference of station A, and the time
instances T1 and T4 are taken with the local clock reference of station B.

T2 T3
A

B
T1 T4
en05000293.vsd
IEC05000293 V1 EN-US

Figure 49: Measuring time differences

Calculation of the delay time one-way Td and the time difference Δt between the clocks in A
and B is then possible to do with equation 2 and equation 3, which are only valid under the
condition that the send and receive times are equal.

(T2 - T1 ) + (T4 - T3 )
Td =
2
EQUATION1358 V1 EN-US (Equation 2)

(T1 + T4 ) - (T2 + T3 )
Dt =
2
EQUATION1359 V1 EN-US (Equation 3)

Δt is calculated every time a telegram is received, and the time difference is then used to
adjust and interpolate the current measurements from the remote end before the current
differential algorithm is executed.

The echo method can be used in telecommunications transmission networks with varying
signal propagation delay as long as there is delay symmetry, that is, the send and receive
delays are equal. The delay variation can depend on the signal going different routes in the
network from time to other.

118
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 6
Differential protection

When the delay symmetry is lost, the expression for Δt given above is no longer valid. Under
these conditions GPS synchronization of the local IED clocks must be used.

Including the optional GPS, means that there will be one GPS receiver module in each IED,
synchronizing its local IED clock. As GPS synchronization is very accurate, in the order of 1 μs,
all IEDs in the same line differential scheme will have the same clock reference. It is then
possible to detect asymmetric transmission time delay and compensate for it.

When the IED is equipped with GPS, this hardware is integrated in the IED. Besides the GPS
receiver itself, it also consists of filters and regulators for post processing of the GPS time
synch pulse, which is necessary to achieve a reliable GPS synchronization. Especially short
interruptions and spurious out of synch GPS signals are handled securely in this way.

When GPS synchronization is used, an interruption in the GPS signal leads to freewheeling
during 8 seconds that is, during this time the synchronization benefits from the stability in the
local clocks. If the interruption persists more than 8 seconds, either fall back to the echo
synchronization method or blocking of Line differential protection function is made, as
selected through setting parameter GPSSyncErr.

6.2.7.3 Analog signal communication for line differential protection SEMOD52424-1 v1

Communication principle SEMOD52415-4 v3

For a two-terminal line, the current from the local CT needs to be communicated over a 64
kbit/s channel to the remote line end, and the remote end current communicated back on the
same channel. If there is, for example, a three terminal line another 64 kbit/s channel will be
needed to exchange the same local current with the third line end current.

In one-and-a-half breaker arrangements, there are two local currents meaning two 64 kbit/s
channels to each remote substation. Alternatively, it is possible to add together the two local
currents before sending them and in that way reduce the number of communication channels
needed. This is achieved by selecting proper setting for parameter TransmCurr (CT-SUM, CT-
DIFF1 or CT-DIFF2). However, information about bias currents is reduced if the alternative
option is followed. For further information and discussions on this matter, refer to the
Application manual.

The communication can be arranged as a master-master system or a master-slave system

alternatively. Figure 37 shows a master-master system for a three-terminal line. Here current
samples are exchanged between all IEDs, and an evaluation is made in each IED. This means
that a 64 kbit/s communication channel is needed between every IED included in the same line
differential protection zone.

Protected zone

IED IED

Comm. Channels

IED IED IED

IEC05000292_2_en.vsd
IEC05000292 V2 EN-US

Figure 50: 5–terminal line with master-master system

In the master-slave system, current samples are sent from all slave IEDs to one master IED
where the evaluation is made and trip signals are sent to the remote ends when needed. In this
system, a 64 kbit/s communication channel is only needed between the master, and each one
of the slave IEDs.

119
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Differential protection

Protected zone

IED IED

Comm. Channels

IED IED IED

IEC05000291_2_en.vsd
IEC05000291 V2 EN-US

Figure 51: 5–terminal line with master-slave system

The master-slave configuration is achieved by setting parameter Operation in the slaves to Off
for Line differential protection function, and setting parameter ChannelMode to On for the
LDCMs in the slaves.

Test mode SEMOD52415-48 v2

Line differential protection function in one IED can be set in test mode. This can block the trip
outputs on that IED, and set the remote IEDs in a remote test mode, so that injected currents
can be echoed back phase shifted and with a settable amplitude. The trip outputs in the
remote IEDs can also be blocked automatically. For further information, refer to the
installation and commissioning manual.

Communication of current sampled values SEMOD52415-22 v2

The currents are sampled twenty times per power system cycle in the protection terminals, but
the communication exchange is made only once every 5 ms. This means that at in each
telegram sent, 5 consecutive current samples in a 50 Hz system and 6 consecutive current
samples in a 60 Hz system (three phases each sampling instant) are included. Figure 52 shows
the principle.

Current Current Current Current Current Current Current Current

sample sample sample sample sample sample sample sample
telegram telegram telegram telegram telegram telegram telegram telegram
sent sent sent sent sent sent sent sent

Time
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 (ms)

en05000290.vsd
IEC05000290 V1 EN-US

Figure 52: Communication of current sampled values.

where:
x is the current sampling moment

Redundant communication channels SEMOD52415-25 v4

With redundant communication channels, as shown in figure 53, both channels are in
operation continuously but with one of them favoured as a primary channel.

120
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 6
Differential protection

Telecom. Network
LD LD
CM CM
LD LD
CM CM
Telecom. Network

Primary
channel
Secondary redundant
IEC05000289 V1 EN-US
channel en05000289.vsd

Figure 53: Direct fiber optical connection between two IEDs with LDOM over longer
distances.
If communication is lost on the primary channel, switchover to the secondary channel is made
after a settable time delay RedChSwTime. Return of the primary channel will cause a
switchback after another settable time delay RedChRturnTime.

For a three-terminals line in a master-master configuration, a loss of one communication

channel will not cause the line differential protection to be unserviceable. Instead it will
automatically revert to a partial master-slave mode with the two IEDs that have an
unserviceable communication link between them, will serve as slaves.

For more details about the remote communication see section remote communication and the
application manual.

6.2.7.4 Open CT detection feature GUID-5B7ACC4D-4EC9-40F1-B18D-561F13945FE3 v1

Line differential protection has a built-in, advanced open CT detection feature.

A sudden inadvertently opened CT circuit may cause an unexpected and unwanted operation
of the Line differential protection under normal load conditions. Damage of secondary
equipment may occur due to high voltage from open CT circuit outputs. It is always an
advantage, from the point of view of security and reliability, to have the open CT detection
function to block the line differential protection function in case of an open CT condition, and
produce an alarm signal to the operational personnel to quickly correct the open CT condition.

The built-in open CT feature can be enabled or disabled by the setting parameter
OpenCTEnable (Off/On). When enabled, this feature tries to prevent mal-operation when a
loaded main CT connected to line differential protection is by mistake open circuited on the
secondary side. Note that this feature can only detect interruption of one CT phase current at
a time. If two or even all three-phase currents of one set of CTs are accidentally interrupted at
precisely the same time, this feature cannot operate. Line differential protection generates a
trip signal if the false differential current is sufficiently high. An open CT circuit is typically
detected in 12–14 ms, and if the load in the protected circuit is relatively high, about the
nominal load, the unwanted trip cannot always be prevented. Still, the information about what
was the cause of the open CT secondary circuit, is vital.

The principle applied to detect an open CT is a simple pattern recognition method, similar to
the waveform check used by the Power transformer differential protection in order to detect
the magnetizing inrush condition. The open CT detection principle is based on the fact that for
an open CT, the current in the phase with the open CT suddenly drops to zero (that is, as seen
by the protection), while the currents of the other two phases continue as before.

121
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Differential protection

The open CT function is supposed to detect an open CT under normal conditions, that is, with
the protected multi-terminal circuit under normal load (10...120% of the rated load). If the load
currents are very low or zero, the open CT condition cannot be detected. In addition to load
condition requirement, Open CT function also checks the differential current on faulty phase. If
the differential current is lower than 10% of IBase, the open CT condition cannot be detected.
Therefore, the Open CT algorithm only detects an open CT if the load on the power
transformer protected object is 10...120% of rated load and the differential current is higher
than 10% of IBase on that phase. The search for an open CT starts 60 seconds (50 seconds in
60 Hz systems) after the bias current has entered the 10...120% range. The Open CT detection
feature can also be explicitly deactivated by setting: OpenCTEnable = 0 ( Off).

The open CT function can be selected to either block the differential function or issue the
alarm signal via the setting OCTBlockEn.

When the setting OCTBlockEn is set to ON and an open CT is detected, the output OPENCT is
set to 1 and all the differential functions are blocked, except the unrestrained (instantaneous)
differential. An alarm signal is also produced after a settable delay (tOCTAlarmDelay) to report
to operational personnel for quick remedy actions once the open CT is detected. When the
open CT condition is removed (that is, the previously open CT is reconnected), the functions
remain blocked for a specified interval of time, which is also defined by a setting
(tOCTResetDelay). This is to prevent an eventual mal-operation after the reconnection of the
previously open CT secondary circuit.

Otherwise when the setting OCTBlockEn is set to OFF, only an alarm signal is issued once an
open CT is detected.

The open CT algorithm provides detailed information about the location of the defective CT
secondary circuit. The algorithm clearly indicates the IED side, CT input and phase in which an
open CT condition has been detected. These indications are provided via the following outputs
from the Line differential protection function:

1. Output OPENCT provides instant information to indicate that an open CT circuit has been
detected.
2. Output OPENCTAL provides a time-delayed alarm that the open CT circuit has been
detected. Time delay is defined by the parameter tOCTAlarmDelay.
3. Integer output OPENCTIN provides information on the local HMI regarding which open CT
circuit has been detected (1=CT input No 1; 2=CT input No 2).
4. Integer output OPENCTPH provides information on the local HMI regarding in which phase
an open CT circuit has been detected (1=Phase L1; 2= Phase L2; 3= Phase L3).

Once the open CT condition is declared, the algorithm stops to search for further open CT
circuits. It waits until the first open CT circuit has been corrected. Note that once the open CT
condition has been detected, it can be reset automatically within the differential function. It is
not possible to externally reset an open CT condition. To reset the open CT circuit alarm
automatically, the following conditions must be fulfilled:

• Bias current is for at least one minute smaller than 120%

• The open CT condition in the defective CT circuit has been corrected (for example, current
asymmetry disappears)
• The above two conditions are fulfilled for a longer time than defined by the setting
parameter tOCTResetDelay

If an open CT has been detected in a separate group of three CTs, the algorithm is reset either
when the missing current returns to the normal value, or when all three currents become zero.
After the reset, the open CT detection algorithm starts again to search for open CT circuits
within the protected zone.

122
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 6
Differential protection

6.2.7.5 Binary signal transfer SEMOD52489-4 v4

There is space for eight binary signals integrated in the telegram of the line differential analog
communication.

6.2.7.6 Line differential coordination function LDLPSCH GUID-687F26CE-20EF-424A-A355-6308CED80E6C v6

Line differential coordination function (LDLPSCH) is a support function to the Line differential
protection functions. The function gathers and coordinates local IED signals and the signals
from remote IEDs between the Line differential protection functions and the LDCM
communication module.

The function acts as the interface to and from Line differential protection.

The task of LDLPSCH is to transfer the signals via LDCM between IEDs in the protection zone.
Once LDLPSCH receives a block or trip signal from one IED, this block or trip signal is
transferred to other IEDs by LDLPSCH function.

When the line differential protection function in local IED is set to test mode, LDLPSCH sets
the remote IEDs in a remote test mode and block the trip outputs in the remote IEDs. Figure
54 shows a simplified block diagram which illustrates block signal handling by LDLPSCH.

The following figures indicates up to 4 remote terminals, the 650 products can only support
two remote terminals.

TestModeRemoteTerm1
TestModeRemoteTerm2
TestModeRemoteTerm3 OR
50 ms
TestModeRemoteTerm4
t
OR
BlockRemote Ter m1
BlockRemote Ter m2
BlockRemote Ter m3 OR
BlockRemote Ter m4 LocalDiffB lock
OR

50 ms
LOCAL DIFFB LOCKED
OPE N CT BLK t

TestModeInpu t CTFailOCTToRemote
(signal to L DCM)
AND

50 ms TestModeToRemote
t
AND
TestModeS et
AND
Block Remote Tri p
OR
ReleaseLo cal

OR Block Remote Tri p

TERMINALOUTOFSERVICE
100 ms BlockToRe mo te
OR OR
BLO CK t

IEC13000259-4-en.vsd
IEC13000259 V4 EN-US

Figure 54: Block signal logic of LDLPSCH

When LDLPSCH receives the trip signal from local IED (or remote IED), this trip signal is
transferred to remote IEDs (or local IED) in the protection zone. Figure 55 shows a simplified
block diagram which illustrates trip signal handling by LDLPSCH.

123
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Differential protection

TRL OCL1
DiffTripL1
AND
OR
TRL1

TripL1ToRemote
AND

TRIP
OR

TripL1Remote Te rm1
TripL1Remote Te rm2
TripL1Remote Te rm3 OR
TripL1Remote Te rm4 AND

DiffTripL2 TRL OCL2

AND
TRL2
OR

AND

TripL2ToRemote
AND

TRL OCAL
TripL2Remote Te rm1 OR
TripL2Remote Te rm2
TripL2Remote Te rm3 OR
TripL2Remote Te rm4
TRL OCL3
DiffTripL3
AND
BlockLocalTrip TRL3
OR

TripL3ToRemote
BlockTripToRemo te AND

TripL3Remote Te rm1 TRREMOTE

OR
TripL3Remote Te rm2
TripL3Remote Te rm3 OR
TripL3Remote Te rm4 AND

BlockRemote Trip

IEC130 00260-3-en.vsd

IEC13000260 V3 EN-US

Figure 55: Trip signal logic of LDLPSCH

Some of the signals in the above block diagrams are used as the internal signals by LDLPSCH.
Table Internal signals describes the source or destination of these internal signals.

Table 68: Internal signals

Internal signals Source of destination Description
testModeRemoteTerm1 Signal from LDCM Test mode from remote terminal 1
testModeRemoteTerm2 Signal from LDCM Test mode from remote terminal 2
testModeRemoteTerm3 Signal from LDCM Test mode from remote terminal 3
blockRemoteTerm1 Signal from LDCM Block from remote terminal 1
blockRemoteTerm2 Signal from LDCM Block from remote terminal 2
testModeInput Signal from test mode function Input for forcing the function into
test mode
diffTripL1 Signal from differential function Trip from local differential
function in phase L1
diffTripL2 Signal from differential function Trip from local differential
function in phase L2
Table continues on next page

124
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 6
Differential protection

Internal signals Source of destination Description

diffTripL3 Signal from differential function Trip from local differential
function in phase L3
tripL1RemoteTerm1 Signal from LDCM Trip from remote terminal 1 in
phase L1
tripL1RemoteTerm2 Signal from LDCM Trip from remote terminal 2 in
phase L1
tripL2RemoteTerm1 Signal from LDCM Trip from remote terminal 1 in
phase L2
tripL2RemoteTerm2 Signal from LDCM Trip from remote terminal 2 in
phase L2
tripL3RemoteTerm1 Signal from LDCM Trip from remote terminal 1 in
phase L3
tripL3RemoteTerm2 Signal from LDCM Trip from remote terminal 2 in
phase L3
tripL1ToRemote Signal to LDCM Trip to remote terminals phase L1
tripL2ToRemote Signal to LDCM Trip to remote terminals phase L2
tripL3ToRemote Signal to LDCM Trip to remote terminals phase L3
localDiffBlock Signal to differential function Block local line differential
function operation
blockToRemote Signal to LDCM Block to be sent to remote
terminals
testModeToRemote Signal to LDCM Test mode indication to be sent to
remote terminals

6.2.8 Technical data IP14336-1 v1

M16023-1 v11

Table 69: L3CPDIF, L6CPDIF, LT3CPDIF, LT6CPDIF single IED without communication technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Minimum operate current (20-200)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
±1.0% of I at I > Ir

SlopeSection2 (10.0-50.0)% -
SlopeSection3 (30.0-100.0)% -
EndSection 1 (20–150)% of IBase -
EndSection 2 (100–1000)% of IBase -
Unrestrained limit function (100–5000)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Second harmonic blocking (5.0–100.0)% of fundamental ±1.0% of Ir

Note: fundamental magnitude =
100% of Ir

Fifth harmonic blocking (5.0–100.0)% of fundamental ±2.0% of Ir

Note: fundamental magnitude =
100% of Ir

*Inverse characteristics, see table 16 curve types See table 819,821 and table 823
819,821 and table 823
Critical impulse time 2ms typically at 0 to 10 x IdMin -

Charging current compensation On/Off -

LT3CPDIF and LT6CPDIF (With in-zone transformer enabled and tIdMinHigh set to 0) :
Table continues on next page

125
Technical manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Differential protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

*Operate time, restrained function at Min. = 25 ms -
0 to 10 x IdMin Max. = 35 ms

*Reset time, restrained function at 10 Min. = 5 ms -

x IdMinto 0 Max. = 15 ms

*Operate time, unrestrained function Min. = 5 ms -

at 0 to 10 x IdUnre Max. = 15 ms

*Reset time, unrestrained function at Min. = 15 ms -

10 x IdUnreto 0 Max. = 30 ms

**Operate time, unrestrained Min. = 10 ms -

negative sequence function Max. = 25 ms
**Reset time, unrestrained negative Min. = 10 ms -
sequence function Max. = 30 ms
L3CPDIF and L6CPDIF (With tIdMinHigh set to 0):
*Operate time, restrained function at Min. = 10 ms -
0 to 10 x IdMin Max. = 20 ms

*Reset time, restrained function at 10 Min. = 15 ms -

x IdMinto 0 Max. = 25 ms

*Operate time, unrestrained function Min. = 5 ms -

at 0 to 10 x IdUnre Max. = 15 ms

*Reset time, unrestrained function at Min. = 15 ms -

10 x IdUnreto 0 Max. = 30 ms

**Operate time, unrestrained Min. = 10 ms -

negative sequence function Max. = 20 ms
**Reset time, unrestrained negative Min. = 10 ms -
sequence function Max. = 35 ms
The data in the table are valid for a single IED with two local current input groups.
*Note: Data obtained with single three-phase input current group.
**Note: Data obtained with two three-phase input current groups. The rated symmetrical currents are applied
on both sides as pre- and post-fault currents. The fault is performed by increasing one phase current to
double on one side and decreasing same phase current to zero on the other side.

Table 70: L3CPDIF, L6CPDIF, LT3CPDIF, LT6CPDIF with 64 Kbit/s communication technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Minimum operate current (20-200)% of IBase ±4.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
±4.0% of I at I > Ir

SlopeSection2 (10.0-50.0)% -
SlopeSection3 (30.0-100.0)% -
EndSection 1 (20–150)% of IBase -
EndSection 2 (100–1000)% of IBase -
Unrestrained limit function (100–5000)% of IBase ±4.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
±4.0% of I at I > Ir

Second harmonic blocking (5.0–100.0)% of fundamental ±3.0% of Ir

Note: fundamental magnitude =
100% of Ir

Fifth harmonic blocking (5.0–100.0)% of fundamental ±10.0% of Ir

Note: fundamental magnitude =
100% of Ir

*Inverse characteristics, see table 16 curve types See table 819,821 and table 823
819,821 and table 823
Table continues on next page

126
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 6
Differential protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Critical impulse time 2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x IdMin -

Charging current compensation On/Off -

LT3CPDIF and LT6CPDIF (With in-zone transformer enabled and tIdMinHigh set to 0) :
*Operate time, restrained function at Min. = 30 ms -
0 to 10 x IdMin Max. = 50 ms

*Reset time, restrained function at 10 Min. = 10 ms -

x IdMinto 0 Max. = 25 ms

*Operate time, unrestrained function Min. = 10 ms -

at 0 to 10 x IdUnre Max. = 25 ms

*Reset time, unrestrained function at Min. = 20 ms -

10 x IdUnreto 0 Max. = 40 ms

**Operate time, unrestrained Min. = 15 ms -

negative sequence function Max. = 35 ms
**Reset time, unrestrained negative Min. = 20 ms -
sequence function Max. = 35 ms
L3CPDIF and L6CPDIF (With tIdMinHigh set to 0):
*Operate time, restrained function at Min. = 10 ms -
0 to 10 x IdMin Max. = 30 ms

*Reset time, restrained function at 10 Min. = 20 ms -

x IdMinto 0 Max. = 45 ms

*Operate time, unrestrained function Min. = 10 ms -

at 0 to 10 x IdUnre Max. = 25 ms

*Reset time, unrestrained function at Min. = 20 ms -

10 x IdUnreto 0 Max. = 50 ms

**Operate time, unrestrained Min. = 15 ms -

negative sequence function Max. = 35 ms
**Reset time, unrestrained negative Min. = 15 ms -
sequence function Max. = 40 ms
The data in the table are valid for a single IED with 64 Kbits/s communication in the loop-back mode.
*Note: Data obtained with single three-phase input current group. The operate and reset times for L3CPDIF
are valid for an static output from SOM.
**Note: Data obtained with two three-phase input current groups. The rated symmetrical currents are applied
on both sides as pre- and post-fault currents. The fault is performed by increasing one phase current to
double on one side and decreasing same phase current to zero on the other side.

127
Technical manual
128
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

Section 7 Impedance protection

7.1 Distance protection ZMFPDIS GUID-CC4F7338-2281-411D-B55A-67BF03F31681 v3

7.1.1 Identification GUID-8ACD3565-C607-4399-89D2-A05657840E6D v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Distance protection zone ZMFPDIS 21

S00346 V1 EN-US

7.1.2 Functionality GUID-2E34AB7F-886E-499F-8984-09041A89238D v8

The ZMFPDIS function is a six zone full scheme protection with three fault loops for phase-to-
phase faults and three fault loops for phase-to-earth faults for each of the independent zones,
which makes the function suitable in applications with single-phase autoreclosing.

In each measurement zone, ZMFPDIS function is designed with the flexibility to operate in
either quadrilateral or mho characteristic mode for separate phase-to-ground or phase-to-
phase loops.

The zones can operate independently of each other. Zones 3 to 5 in directional (forward or
reverse) or non-directional mode. Zone1 and zone2 are designed to measure in forward
direction only, while one zone (ZRV) is designed to measure in the reverse direction. This
makes them suitable, together with a communication scheme, for protection of power lines
and cables in complex network configurations, such as parallel lines, multi-terminal lines, and
so on.

A built-in adaptive load compensation algorithm prevents overreaching of the distance zones
in the load exporting end during phase-to-earth faults on heavily loaded power lines. It also
reduces underreach in the importing end.

The ZMFPDIS function block itself incorporates a phase-selection element and a directional
element, contrary to previous designs in the 600-series, where these elements were
represented with separate function-blocks.

The operation of the phase-selection element is primarily based on current change criteria (i.e.
delta quantities), with significantly increased dependability. There is also a phase selection
criterion operating in parallel which bases its operation only on voltage and current phasors.

The directional element utilizes a set of well-established quantities to provide fast and correct
directional decision during various power system operating conditions, including close-in
three-phase faults, simultaneous faults and faults with only zero-sequence in-feed.

129
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Impedance protection

7.1.3 Function block GUID-322E158B-C2A1-4F0D-A749-01C7942875ED v1

ZMFPDIS
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TRZ1
BLOCK TRL1Z1
VTSZ TRL2Z1
BLKZ1 TRL3Z1
BLKZ2 TRZ2
BLKZ3 TRL1Z2
BLKZ4 TRL2Z2
BLKZ5 TRL3Z2
BLKZRV TRZ3
BLKTRZ1 TRZ4
BLKTRZ2 TRZ5
BLKTRZ3 TRZRV
BLKTRZ4 START
BLKTRZ5 STZ1
BLKTRZRV STNDZ1
STZ2
STL1Z2
STL2Z2
STL3Z2
STNDZ2
STZ3
STNDZ3
STZ4
STNDZ4
STZ5
STNDZ5
STZRV
STL1ZRV
STL2ZRV
STL3ZRV
STNDZRV
STND
STNDL1
STNDL2
STNDL3
STFWL1
STFWL2
STFWL3
STFWPE
STRVL1
STRVL2
STRVL3
STRVPE
STFW1PH
STFW2PH
STFW3PH
STPE
STPP
IEC11000433-3-en.vsdx
IEC11000433 V3 EN-US

Figure 56: ZMFPDIS function block

7.1.4 Signals
PID-6815-INPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 71: ZMFPDIS Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Blocks and resets timers and outputs of entire function
VTSZ BOOLEAN 0 Blocks and resets timers and outputs of entire function
BLKZ1 BOOLEAN 0 Blocks and resets zone 1 timers and outputs
BLKZ2 BOOLEAN 0 Blocks and resets zone 2 timers and outputs
Table continues on next page

130
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

Name Type Default Description

BLKZ3 BOOLEAN 0 Blocks and resets zone 3 timers and outputs
BLKZ4 BOOLEAN 0 Blocks and resets zone 4 timers and outputs
BLKZ5 BOOLEAN 0 Blocks and resets zone 5 timers and outputs
BLKZRV BOOLEAN 0 Blocks and resets reverse zone timers and outputs
BLKTRZ1 BOOLEAN 0 Blocks and resets zone 1 timers and trip outputs
BLKTRZ2 BOOLEAN 0 Blocks and resets zone 2 timers and trip outputs
BLKTRZ3 BOOLEAN 0 Blocks and resets zone 3 timers and trip outputs
BLKTRZ4 BOOLEAN 0 Blocks and resets zone 4 timers and trip outputs
BLKTRZ5 BOOLEAN 0 Blocks and resets zone 5 timers and trip outputs
BLKTRZRV BOOLEAN 0 Blocks and resets reverse zone timers and trip outputs
EXTNST BOOLEAN 0 External start of zone timers
RELCNDZ1 INTEGER 127 Release word for the measuring loops of zone 1
RELCNDZ2 INTEGER 127 Release word for the measuring loops of zone 2
RELCNDZ3 INTEGER 127 Release word for the measuring loops of zone 3
RELCNDZ4 INTEGER 127 Release word for the measuring loops of zone 4
RELCNDZ5 INTEGER 127 Release word for the measuring loops of zone 5
RELCNDZRV INTEGER 127 Release word for the measuring loops of zone RV

PID-7066-OUTPUTSIGNALS v1

Table 72: ZMFPDIS Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip in any phase or phases from any zone or zones
TRZ1 BOOLEAN Trip in any phase or phases from zone 1 - forward direction
TRL1Z1 BOOLEAN Trip in phase L1 from zone 1 - forward direction
TRL2Z1 BOOLEAN Trip in phase L2 from zone 1 - forward direction
TRL3Z1 BOOLEAN Trip in phase L3 from zone 1 - forward direction
TRZ2 BOOLEAN Trip in any phase or phases from zone 2 - forward direction
TRL1Z2 BOOLEAN Trip in phase L1 from zone 2 - forward direction
TRL2Z2 BOOLEAN Trip in phase L2 from zone 2 - forward direction
TRL3Z2 BOOLEAN Trip in phase L3 from zone 2 - forward direction
TRZ3 BOOLEAN Trip in any phase or phases from zone 3 - zone direction
TRZ4 BOOLEAN Trip in any phase or phases from zone 4 - zone direction
TRZ5 BOOLEAN Trip in any phase or phases from zone 5 - zone direction
TRZRV BOOLEAN Trip in any phase or phases from zone RV - reverse direction
START BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from any zone or zones
STZ1 BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone 1 - forward direction
STNDZ1 BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone 1 - any direction
STZ2 BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone 2 - forward direction
STL1Z2 BOOLEAN Start in phase L1 from zone 2 - forward direction
STL2Z2 BOOLEAN Start in phase L2 from zone 2 - forward direction
STL3Z2 BOOLEAN Start in phase L3 from zone 2 - forward direction
STNDZ2 BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone 2 - any direction
Table continues on next page

131
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Impedance protection

Name Type Description

STZ3 BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone 3 - zone direction
STNDZ3 BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone 3 - any direction
STZ4 BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone 4 - zone direction
STNDZ4 BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone 4 - any direction
STZ5 BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone 5 - zone direction
STNDZ5 BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone 5 - any direction
STZRV BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone RV - reverse direction
STL1ZRV BOOLEAN Start in phase L1 from zone RV - reverse direction
STL2ZRV BOOLEAN Start in phase L2 from zone RV - reverse direction
STL3ZRV BOOLEAN Start in phase L3 from zone RV - reverse direction
STNDZRV BOOLEAN Start in any phase or phases from zone RV - any direction
STND BOOLEAN Fault detected in any phase or phases - any direction
STNDL1 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L1 - any direction
STNDL2 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L2 - any direction
STNDL3 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L3 - any direction
STNDPE BOOLEAN Fault with earth connection detected in any phase or phases -
any direction
STFWL1 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L1 - forward direction
STFWL2 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L2 - forward direction
STFWL3 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L3 - forward direction
STFWPE BOOLEAN Fault with earth connection detected - forward direction
STRVL1 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L1 - reverse direction
STRVL2 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L2 - reverse direction
STRVL3 BOOLEAN Fault detected in phase L3 - reverse direction
STRVPE BOOLEAN Fault with earth connection detected - reverse direction
STFW1PH BOOLEAN Single-phase fault detected - forward direction
STFW2PH BOOLEAN Two-phase fault detected - forward direction
STFW3PH BOOLEAN Three-phase fault detected - forward direction
STPE BOOLEAN Ph-E zone measurement enabled - any direction
STPP BOOLEAN Ph-Ph zone measurement enabled - any direction

7.1.5 Settings
PID-7071-SETTINGS v1

Table 73: ZMFPDIS Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups
ZDbRepInt 1 - 100000 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
ZHiLim 0.0 - 5000.0 Ohm 0.1 150.0 High limit in ohm
ZLowLim 0.0 - 5000.0 Ohm 0.1 50.0 Low limit in ohm
Table continues on next page

132
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

ZMax 0.0 - 5000.0 Ohm 0.1 1500.0 Maximum value in ohm
ZRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
Dead band & 5s
Cyclic
Dead band & 30s
Cyclic
Dead band & 1min
Cyclic
ZAngDbRepInt 1 - 100000 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s

Table 74: ZMFPDIS Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
RLdFw 0.01 - 5000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 60.00 Resistance determining the load
impedance area - forward
RLdRvFactor 1 - 1000 %RLdF 1 100 Resistance factor determining the
w load impedance area - reverse
XLd 0.01 - 10000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 400.00 Reactance determining the load
impedance area
ArgLd 5 - 70 Deg 1 30 Angle determining the load
impedance area
CVTType Any - - Passive type CVT selection determining filtering of
Passive type the function
None (Magnetic)
OpModePPZ1 Off - - Quadrilateral On/Off and characteristic setting for
Quadrilateral Ph-Ph loops, zone 1
Mho
MhoOffset
OpModePEZ1 Off - - Quadrilateral On/Off and characteristic setting for
Quadrilateral Ph-E loops, zone 1
Mho
MhoOffset
X1PPZ1 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Positive sequence reactance reach,
Ph-Ph, zone 1
R1PPZ1 0.00 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive sequence resistive reach, Ph-
Ph, zone 1
X1PEZ1 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 30.00 Positive sequence reactance reach,
Ph-E, zone 1
R1PEZ1 0.00 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive sequence resistive reach, Ph-
E, zone 1
X0Z1 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 100.00 Zero sequence reactance reach, zone 1
R0Z1 0.00 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 15.00 Zero sequence resistive reach, zone 1
RFPPZ1 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone 1
RFPEZ1 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, zone 1
tPPZ1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay to trip, Phase-Phase, zone
1
tPEZ1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay to trip, Phase-Earth, zone 1
Table continues on next page

133
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Impedance protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

IMinOpPPZ1 10 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate Ph-Ph current for
Phase-Phase loops, zone 1
IMinOpPEZ1 5 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops, zone 1
OpModePPZ2 Off - - Quadrilateral On/Off and characteristic setting for
Quadrilateral Ph-Ph loops, zone 2
Mho
MhoOffset
OpModePEZ2 Off - - Quadrilateral On/Off and characteristic setting for
Quadrilateral Ph-E loops, zone 2
Mho
MhoOffset
X1Z2 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactance reach,
zone 2
R1Z2 0.00 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive sequence resistive reach,
zone 2
X0Z2 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 120.00 Zero sequence reactance reach, zone 2
R0Z2 0.00 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 15.00 Zero sequence resistive reach, zone 2
RFPPZ2 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone 2
RFPEZ2 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, zone 2
tPPZ2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.400 Time delay to trip, Phase-Phase, zone
2
tPEZ2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.400 Time delay to trip, Phase-Earth, zone 2
IMinOpPPZ2 10 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate Ph-Ph current for
Phase-Phase loops, zone 2
IMinOpPEZ2 5 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops, zone 2
OpModePPZ3 Off - - Quadrilateral On/Off and characteristic setting for
Quadrilateral Ph-Ph loops, zone 3
Mho
MhoOffset
OpModePEZ3 Off - - Quadrilateral On/Off and characteristic setting for
Quadrilateral Ph-E loops, zone 3
Mho
MhoOffset
DirModeZ3 Non-directional - - Forward Direction of zone 3
Forward
Reverse
X1Z3 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactance reach,
zone 3
R1Z3 0.00 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive sequence resistive reach,
zone 3
X0Z3 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 120.00 Zero sequence reactance reach, zone 3
R0Z3 0.00 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 15.00 Zero sequence resistive reach, zone 3
RFPPZ3 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone 3
RFPEZ3 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, zone 3
tPPZ3 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.800 Time delay to trip, Phase-Phase, zone
3
tPEZ3 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.800 Time delay to trip, Phase-Earth, zone 3
IMinOpPPZ3 10 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate Ph-Ph current for
Phase-Phase loops, zone 3
Table continues on next page

134
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

IMinOpPEZ3 5 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops, zone 3
OpModePPZ4 Off - - Quadrilateral On/Off and characteristic setting for
Quadrilateral Ph-Ph loops, zone 4
Mho
MhoOffset
OpModePEZ4 Off - - Quadrilateral On/Off and characteristic setting for
Quadrilateral Ph-E loops, zone 4
Mho
MhoOffset
DirModeZ4 Non-directional - - Forward Direction of zone 4
Forward
Reverse
X1Z4 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactance reach,
zone 4
R1Z4 0.00 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive sequence resistive reach,
zone 4
X0Z4 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 120.00 Zero sequence reactance reach, zone
4
R0Z4 0.00 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 15.00 Zero sequence resistive reach, zone 4
RFPPZ4 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone 4
RFPEZ4 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, zone 4
tPPZ4 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.200 Time delay to trip, Phase-Phase, zone
4
tPEZ4 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.200 Time delay to trip, Phase-Earth, zone 4
IMinOpPPZ4 10 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate Ph-Ph current for
Phase-Phase loops, zone 4
IMinOpPEZ4 5 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops, zone 4
OpModePPZ5 Off - - Quadrilateral On/Off and characteristic setting for
Quadrilateral Ph-Ph loops, zone 5
Mho
MhoOffset
OpModePEZ5 Off - - Quadrilateral On/Off and characteristic setting for
Quadrilateral Ph-E loops, zone 5
Mho
MhoOffset
DirModeZ5 Non-directional - - Forward Direction of zone 5
Forward
Reverse
X1Z5 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactance reach,
zone 5
R1Z5 0.00 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive sequence resistive reach,
zone 5
X0Z5 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 120.00 Zero sequence reactance reach, zone
5
R0Z5 0.00 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 15.00 Zero sequence resistive reach, zone 5
RFPPZ5 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone 5
RFPEZ5 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, zone 5
tPPZ5 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.600 Time delay to trip, Phase-Phase, zone
5
tPEZ5 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.600 Time delay to trip, Phase-Earth, zone 5
Table continues on next page

135
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Impedance protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

IMinOpPPZ5 10 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate Ph-Ph current for
Phase-Phase loops, zone 5
IMinOpPEZ5 5 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops, zone 5
OpModePPZRV Off - - Quadrilateral On/Off and characteristic setting for
Quadrilateral Ph-Ph loops, zone RV
Mho
MhoOffset
OpModePEZRV Off - - Quadrilateral On/Off and characteristic setting for
Quadrilateral Ph-E loops, zone RV
Mho
MhoOffset
X1ZRV 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactance reach,
zone RV
R1ZRV 0.00 - 1000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5.00 Positive sequence resistive reach,
zone RV
X0ZRV 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 120.00 Zero sequence reactance reach, zone
RV
R0ZRV 0.00 - 3000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 15.00 Zero sequence resistive reach, zone
RV
RFPPZRV 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 30.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone RV
RFPEZRV 0.01 - 9000.00 Ohm/l 0.01 100.00 Fault resistance reach, Ph-E, zone RV
tPPZRV 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay to trip, Phase-Phase, zone
RV
tPEZRV 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay to trip, Phase-Earth, zone
RV
IMinOpPPZRV 10 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate Ph-Ph current for
Phase-Phase loops, zone RV
IMinOpPEZRV 5 - 6000 %IB 1 10 Minimum operate phase current for
Phase-Earth loops, zone RV

Table 75: ZMFPDIS Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ZZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 100 0 Zero point clamping
ZHiHiLim 0.0 - 5000.0 Ohm 0.1 800.0 High High limit in ohm
ZLowLowLim 0.0 - 5000.0 Ohm 0.1 35.0 Low Low limit in ohm
ZMin 0.000 - 5000.000 Ohm 0.001 0.005 Minimum value in ohm
ZLimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 0.500 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits

136
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

Table 76: ZMFPDIS Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
RLdFwMax 0.01 - 5000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 5000.00 Maximum used resistance
determining the load impedance area,
if RLdFw is greater than RLdFwMax
then RLdFw is set to RLdFwMax
RLdFwMin 0.01 - 5000.00 Ohm/p 0.01 0.01 Minimum used resistance determining
the load impedance area, if RLdFw is
less than RLdFwMin then RLdFw is set
to RLdFwMin
ArgLdMax 5 - 70 Deg 1 70 Maximum used angle determining the
load impedance area, if ArgLd is
greater than ArgLdMax then ArgLd is
set to ArgLdMax
ArgLdMin 5 - 70 Deg 1 5 Minimum used angle determining the
load impedance area, if ArgLd is less
than ArgLdMin then ArgLd is set to
ArgLdMin
ZoneLinkStart Phase Selection - - Phase Selection Selection of start source for all
1st starting zone ZoneLinked trip delay timers
INReleasePE 5 - 400 %MaxIP 1 400 3I0 limit for releasing Phase-to-Earth
h measuring loops
TimerModeZ1 Disable all - - Enable Ph-E PhPh On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E trip
Enable Ph-E output, zone 1
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
TimerLinksZ1 LoopLink (tPP & - - LoopLink (tPP & How start of trip delay timers should
tPE) tPE) be linked for zone 1
LoopLink &
ZoneLink
No Links
TimerModeZ2 Disable all - - Enable Ph-E PhPh On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E trip
Enable Ph-E output, zone 2
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
TimerLinksZ2 LoopLink (tPP & - - LoopLink (tPP & How start of trip delay timers should
tPE) tPE) be linked for zone 2
LoopLink &
ZoneLink
No Links
TimerModeZ3 Disable all - - Enable Ph-E PhPh On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E trip
Enable Ph-E output, zone 3
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
TimerLinksZ3 LoopLink (tPP & - - LoopLink (tPP & How start of trip delay timers should
tPE) tPE) be linked for zone 3
LoopLink &
ZoneLink
No Links
TimerModeZ4 Disable all - - Enable Ph-E PhPh On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E trip
Enable Ph-E output, zone 4
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
TimerLinksZ4 LoopLink (tPP & - - LoopLink (tPP & How start of trip delay timers should
tPE) tPE) be linked for zone 4
LoopLink &
ZoneLink
No Links
Table continues on next page

137
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Impedance protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

TimerModeZ5 Disable all - - Enable Ph-E PhPh On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E trip
Enable Ph-E output, zone 5
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
TimerLinksZ5 LoopLink (tPP & - - LoopLink (tPP & How start of trip delay timers should
tPE) tPE) be linked for zone 5
LoopLink &
ZoneLink
No Links
TimerModeZRV Disable all - - Enable Ph-E PhPh On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-E trip
Enable Ph-E output, zone RV
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-E PhPh
TimerLinksZRV LoopLink (tPP & - - LoopLink (tPP & How start of trip delay timers should
tPE) tPE) be linked for zone RV
LoopLink &
ZoneLink
No Links

7.1.6 Monitored data

PID-7066-MONITOREDDATA v1

Table 77: ZMFPDIS Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
L1Dir INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction in phase L1
2=Reverse
0=No direction
L2Dir INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction in phase L2
2=Reverse
0=No direction
L3Dir INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction in phase L3
2=Reverse
0=No direction
L1L2Dir INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction in loop L1L2
2=Reverse
0=No direction
L2L3Dir INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction in loop L2L3
2=Reverse
0=No direction
L3L1Dir INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction in loop L3L1
2=Reverse
0=No direction
L1R REAL - Ohm Resistance in phase L1
L1X REAL - Ohm Reactance in phase L1
L2R REAL - Ohm Resistance in phase L2
L2X REAL - Ohm Reactance in phase L2
L3R REAL - Ohm Resistance in phase L3
L3X REAL - Ohm Reactance in phase L3
L12R REAL - Ohm Resistance in phase L1-L2
L12X REAL - Ohm Reactance in phase L1-L2
L23R REAL - Ohm Resistance in phase L2-L3
L23X REAL - Ohm Reactance in phase L2-L3
Table continues on next page

138
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

L31R REAL - Ohm Resistance in phase L3-L1
L31X REAL - Ohm Reactance in phase L3-L1
ZL1IMAG REAL - Ohm ZL1 Amplitude, magnitude of
instantaneous value
ZL1ANGIM REAL - deg ZL1 Angle, magnitude of
instantaneous value
ZL2IMAG REAL - Ohm ZL2 Amplitude, magnitude of
instantaneous value
ZL2ANGIM REAL - deg ZL2 Angle, magnitude of
instantaneous value
ZL3IMAG REAL - Ohm ZL3 Amplitude, magnitude of
instantaneous value
ZL3ANGIM REAL - deg ZL3 Angle, magnitude of
instantaneous value
ZL12IMAG REAL - Ohm ZL12 Amplitude, magnitude of
instantaneous value
ZL12ANGIM REAL - deg ZL12 Angle, magnitude of
instantaneous value
ZL23IMAG REAL - Ohm ZL23 Amplitude, magnitude of
instantaneous value
ZL23ANGIM REAL - deg ZL23 Angle, magnitude of
instantaneous value
ZL31IMAG REAL - Ohm ZL31 Amplitude, magnitude of
instantaneous value
ZL31ANGIM REAL - deg ZL31 Angle, magnitude of
instantaneous value

7.1.7 Operation principle GUID-2432C04F-62E4-4817-9900-C830306FB4B0 v2

Settings, input and output names are sometimes mentioned in the following text without its
zone suffix (i.e. BLKZx instead of BLKZ3) when the description is equally valid for all zones.

7.1.7.1 Filtering GUID-16B5060B-101C-402A-BF25-06E70FDD7836 v2

Practically all voltage, current and impedance quantities used within the ZMFPDIS function are
derived from fundamental frequency phasors filtered by a half cycle filter.

The phasor filter is frequency adaptive in the sense that its coefficients are changed based on
the estimated power system frequency.

A half cycle filter will not be able to reject both even and odd harmonics. So, while odd
harmonics will be completely attenuated, accuracy will be affected by even harmonics. Even
harmonics will not cause the distance zones to overreach however; instead there will be a
slightly variable underreach, on average in the same order as the magnitude ratio between the
harmonic and fundamental component.

7.1.7.2 Distance measuring zones GUID-74B12BB1-FE0A-4DE4-BDBE-159A438D396B v3

The execution of the different fault loops within the IED are of full scheme type, which means
that earth fault loop for phase-to-earth faults and phase-to-phase faults for forward and
reverse faults are executed in parallel.

139
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Impedance protection

Figure 57 presents an outline of the different measuring loops for the six distance zones.

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 1

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 2

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 3

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 4

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 Zone 5

L1-N L2-N L3-N L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1

Zone RV

IEC05000458-2-en.vsd
IEC05000458 V2 EN-US

Figure 57: The different measuring loops at phase-to-earth fault and phase-to-phase
fault
Each distance protection zone performs like one independent distance protection function
with six measuring elements.

Transients from CVTs may have a significant impact on the transient overreach of a distance
protection. At the same time these transients can be very diverse in nature from one type to
the other; in fact, more diverse than can be distinguished by the algorithm itself in the course
of a few milliseconds. So, a setting (CVTtype) is introduced in order to inform the algorithm
about the type of CVT applied and thus providing the advantage of knowing how performance
should be optimized, even during the first turbulent milliseconds of the fault period.

There are two types of CVTs from the function point of view, the passive and the active type,
which refers to the type of ferro-resonance suppression device that is employed. The active
type requires more rigorous filtering which will have a negative impact on operate times.
However, this will be evident primarily at higher source impedance ratios (SIRs), SIR 5 and
above, or close to the reach limit.

The IEC 60044-5 transient classification is of little or no use in relation to this. It is not
primarily the damping of transients that is important; it is the frequency content of the
transients that is decisive, i.e. how difficult it is to filter out the specific frequency. So, even if
two CVTs, one passive and the other active type, comply with the same transient class, the
active type requires more extensive filtering in order to avoid transient overreach.

To avoid overreach and at the same time achieve fast operate times, a supplementary circular
characteristic is implemented. A circular characteristic exists for every measuring loop and
quadrilateral/mho characteristic. There are no specific reach settings for this circular zone. It
uses the normal quadrilateral/mho zone settings to determine a reach that will be
appropriate. This implies that the circular characteristic will always have somewhat shorter
reach than the quadrilateral/mho zone.

7.1.7.3 Phase-selection element GUID-1E718907-C321-4041-B0ED-D55104B2C9B4 v6

The operation of the phase-selection element is primarily based on current change criteria (i.e.
delta quantities) with significantly increased dependability. To handle this, there is also a
phase selection criterion operating in parallel which bases its operation only on voltage and
current phasors.

This continuous criteria will, in the vast majority of cases, operate in parallel and carry on the
fault indication after the current change phase has ended. Only in some particularly difficult
faults on heavily loaded lines, the continuous criteria might not be sufficient, for example,
when the estimated fault impedance resides within the load area defined by the load

140
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

encroachment characteristic. In this case, the indication will be restricted to a pulse lasting for
one or two power system cycles.

The phase-selection element can, owing to the current change criteria, distinguish faults with
minimum influence from load and fault impedance. In other words, it is not restricted by a load
encroachment characteristic during the current change phase. This significantly improves
performance for remote phase-to-earth faults on heavily loaded lines. One exception, however,
are three-phase faults to which the load encroachment characteristic always has to be applied
in order to distinguish fault from load.

Phase-to-phase-earth faults (also called double earth faults) will practically always activate
phase-to-phase zone measurements. Measurement in two phase-to-earth loops at the same
time is associated with so-called simultaneous faults: two earth faults at the same time, one
each on the two circuits of a double line, or when the zero sequence current is relatively high
due to a source with low Z0/Z1 ratio. In these situations zone measurement will be released
both for the related phase-to-earth loops and the phase-to-phase loop simultaneously. On the
other hand, simultaneous faults closer to the remote bus will gradually take on the properties
of a phase-to-phase-earth fault and the function will eventually use phase-to-phase zone
measurements also here.

In cases where the fault current infeed is more or less completely of zero sequence nature (all
phase currents in phase), the measurement will be performed in the phase-to-earth loops only
for a phase-to-phase-earth fault.

AND
2-phase Fault
I3P detected by
Impedance/ current
2-phase fault
U3P PHSLy
based Phase AND
selection

PHSLxLy
AND

a
b
a>b
250%
OR
a
b a>b
50% AND OR

a
b
a<b
INMag
IL1Mag IN / Imax
IL2Mag
MAX
IL3Mag a ForcePE
b
a<b

INReleasePE

IEC17000230-1-en.vsdx

IEC17000230 V1 EN-US

Figure 58: Phase-selection logic

Figure 58 explains the release of two-phase faults (including simultaneous

faults as well as cross-country faults for high impedance earthed networks.
This is not valid for single-phase faults.

However, should it be desirable to use phase-to-earth (and only phase-to-earth) zone

measurement for phase-to-phase-earth faults, there is a setting INReleasePE that can be
lowered from its excessive default value to the level above which phase-to-earth measurement
should be activated.

7.1.7.4 Directional element GUID-24431EEC-5037-41CD-BC4A-7AC196F158F3 v4

Several criteria are employed when making the directional decision. The basis is provided by
comparing a positive sequence based polarizing voltage with phase currents. For extra
security, especially in making a very fast decision, this method is complemented with an

141
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Impedance protection

equivalent comparison where, instead of the phase current, the change in phase current is
used. Moreover, a basic negative sequence directional evaluation is taken into account as a
reliable reference during high load condition. Finally, zero sequence directional evaluation is
used whenever there is more or less exclusive zero sequence in-feed.

Fundamentally, the directional sectors that represent forward direction, one per measuring
loop, are defined by the following equations.

U PolL1
−15° < arg < 120°
I L1
IECEQUATION15059 V1 EN-US (Equation 4)

U PolL1L 2
−15° < arg < 120°
I L1L 2
IECEQUATION15060 V1 EN-US (Equation 5)

Where:
UPolL1 is the polarizing voltage for phase L1.

IL1 is the phase current in phase L1.

UPolL1L2 is the polarizing voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1).

IL1L2 is the current difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1).

The corresponding reverse directional sectors range from 165 to -60 degrees.

Since the polarizing voltage is also used for the Mho distance characteristics, the magnitude
of the voltage is just as interesting as the phase. If there are symmetrical conditions and the
measured per phase positive sequence voltage magnitude is above 75% of the base voltage
before the fault, the pre-fault magnitude will be memorized and used as long as there is a
fault. The phase angle however will only be memorized (locked) for 75 ms at a time, not to lose
synchronism with the real system voltage.

Should the positive sequence voltage drop below 2% of the base voltage, it will be considered
invalid. In this situation, directional signals and starts from Mho elements will be sealed-in and
kept static as long as there is a fault.

7.1.7.5 Fuse failure GUID-FA7B94D6-8BAF-4D05-8DC0-7FEBF0967D16 v3

The ZMFPDIS function has to be blocked by an additional function like the Fuse failure
supervision (FUFSPVC) or an equivalent external device. Typically, the binary input VTSZ is
used for this purpose.

A built-in supervision feature within distance protection itself, based on phase current change,
will ensure that the FUFSPVC blocking signal is received in time. Namely, an intentional time
delay will be introduced if no current magnitude change greater than 5% of IBase has been
detected for any of the three phase currents.

7.1.7.6 Measuring principles

Quadrilateral characteristic GUID-32E76D16-41ED-4CEF-B081-8413211AA783 v5

ZMFPDIS implements quadrilateral and mho characteristic in all the six zones separately. Set
OpModePEZx or OpModePPZx to Quadrilateral, to choose particular measuring loop in a zone
to work as quadrilateral distance protection.

142
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

All ZMFPDIS zones operate according to the non-directional impedance characteristics

presented in figure 60 and figure 59. The phase-to-earth characteristic is given in ohms-per-
loop domain while the phase-to-phase characteristic is given in ohms-per-phase domain.

X (Ohm/phase)

RFPP R1PP RFPP

2 2
X 0 PE - X 1RVPE
XNRV =XX00PEPG- -
X31XRVPE
1RVPG
XNRV =
XNRV =
3 3
XNFW = XX
X00
PE
0 --
PE
PG X-1X 11FWPE
XFWPE
FWPG
XNFW==
XNFW
X1PP 3 33

j j
R (Ohm/phase)

RFPP RFPP
2 2

X1PP

RFPP R1PP RFPP

2 2
IEC11000416-1-en.vsd
IEC11000416 V1 EN-US

Figure 59: ZMFPDIS Characteristic for phase-to-phase measuring

143
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Impedance protection

X (Ohm/loop)

R1PE+Rn

RFPE RFPE

X0PE-X1PE
Xn =
3
X1PE+Xn R0PE-R1PE
Rn =
3
jN jN
R (Ohm/loop)

RFPE RFPE

X1PE+Xn

RFPE RFPE
IEC11000415-1-en.vsd

R1PE+Rn
IEC11000415 V1 EN-US

Figure 60: ZMFPDIS Characteristic for phase-to-earth measuring, ohm/loop domain

The faulty loop in relation to the fault type can be presented as in figure 61. The main intention
with this illustration is to make clear how the fault resistive reach should be interpreted and
set. Note in particular that the setting RFPP always represents the total fault resistance of the
loop, regardless the fact that the fault resistance (arc) may be divided into parts like for three-
phase or phase-to-phase faults. The R1 + jX1 represent the positive sequence impedance from
the measuring point to the fault location.

144
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

IL1 R1 + j X1
Phase-to-earth
UL1
element

Phase-to-earth
RFPE
fault in phase L1
(Arc + tower
resistance)

0
IN (R0-R1)/3 +
j (X0-X1)/3 )

IL1 R1 + j X1 Phase-to-phase
UL1 element L1-L2
Phase-to-phase
fault in phase RFPP
L1-L2 IL2
UL2 (Arc resistance)
R1 + j X1

IL1 R1 + j X1 0.5·RFPP Phase-to-phase

UL1 element L1-L3
Three-phase
fault or Phase-to-
phase-earth fault IL3
UL3
R1 + j X1 0.5·RFPP
IEC11000419-2-en.vsd
IEC11000419 V2 EN-US

Figure 61: Fault loop model

Mho characteristic GUID-9269239B-3A04-44CD-BE00-FD850D42836B v2

ZMFPDIS implements quadrilateral and mho characteristic in all the six zones separately. Set
OpModePEZx or OpModePPZx setting to Mho or Offset, to choose a particular measuring loop
in a zone to work as mho (or Offset Mho) distance protection.

Zones 3 to 5 can be selected to be either forward or reverse with positive sequence polarized
mho characteristic; alternatively self polarized offset mho characteristics. The operating
characteristic is in accordance to figure 62 where zone 5 is selected offset mho.

145
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Impedance protection

X
X

Z4
Z3
ZS=0
Z2
Z1 R
Z5 R

ZS=Z1
ZRV
ZS=2Z1

IEC15000056-1-en.vsdx

IEC15000056 V1 EN-US

Figure 62: Mho, offset mho characteristics and the source impedance influence on the
mho characteristic
The mho characteristic has a dynamic expansion due to the source impedance. Instead of
crossing the origin, as for the mho to the left of figure 62, which is only valid where the source
impedance (Zs) is zero, the crossing point is moved to the coordinates of the negative source
impedance given an expansion of the circle shown to the right of figure 62. Z1 denotes the
complex positive sequence impedance.

The magnitude of the polarizing voltage is determined completely by the positive sequence
voltage magnitude from before the fault. This will give a somewhat less dynamic expansion of
the mho circle during faults. However, if the source impedance is high, the dynamic expansion
of the mho circle might lower the security of the function too much with high loading and mild
power swing conditions.

Basic operation characteristics GUID-E6CC3CA7-72BE-40FC-A557-7BDB62F7BC1E v2

In ZMFPDIS, each zone measurement loop characteristic can be set to mho characteristic or
offset mho characteristic by setting OpModePEZx or OpModePPZx (where x is 1-5 depending
on selected zone).

ZMFPDIS fixes zone 1 and 2 in Forward mode and zone RV in Reverse mode. Zone 3-5 can be set
to Non-directional, Forward or Reverse by setting the parameter DirModeZx (where x is 3-5
depending on selected zone).

If DirModeZx (where x is 3-5 depending on selected zone) is selected as Non-directional, the

directional element will not have any effect on the measurement loop and operation of the
function. When DirModeZx (where x is 3-5 depending on selected zone) is selected as Forward
or Reverse, directional lines are introduced. Information about the directional lines is given
from the directional element. Basic Mho and offset Mho characteristics with different mode
settings are indicated in figure 63.

146
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

X X X
(a) Rset (b) (c) Rset

Xset Xset

R R R

Xset

(a)-(f)
Rset For phase-to-phase fault
Rset  R1Zx
Forward Reverse Non-directional
Xset  X 1Zx
Mho Characteristics For phase-to-earth fault
Rset  R1Zx  RNZx
Xset  X 1Zx  XNZx
(d) X
(e) X (f) X X 0 Zx  X 1Zx
XNZx 
3
R 0 Zx  R1Zx
RNZx 
Rset 3
Rset Rset

Xset Xset Xset

R R R

Xset Xset Xset

Rset Rset Rset

Forward Reverse Non-directional

Offset Mho Characteristics
(a) and (c) are for Zone 1, Zone 2 and Zone 3-5 when DirModeZ3-5 = Forward.
(b) and (d) are for ZoneRV and Zone 3-5 when DirModeZ3-5 = Reverse
(c) and (f) are for Zone 3-5 when DirModeZ3-5 = Non-Directional
IEC15000055-2-en.vsdx

IEC15000055 V2 EN-US

Figure 63: Mho and offset Mho characteristics

For each zone, the impedance is set in cartesian coordinates (resistance and reactance) which
is the same as for quadrilateral characteristic.

The ZMFPDIS function has only one set of reach setting so the reverse will be the same as for
the forward reach, meaning that the non-directional offset mho characteristic will always be
centered around the origin. In detail, for Zone 1, the resistive and reactance reaches for phase-
to-earth fault and phase-to-phase fault are set individually using the settings R1PPZ1, X1PPZ1,
R1PEZ1, X1PEZ1, X0Z1 and R0Z1. In Zone 2-5 and Zone RV, the same zone reach settings are
used for phase-to-earth fault and phase-to-phase (R1Zx, X1Zx, X0Zx and R0Zx, x=2-5 or RV).

Theory of operation SEMOD154224-46 v6

The mho algorithm is based on the phase comparison of an operating phasor and a polarizing
phasor. When the operating phasor leads the reference polarizing phasor by 90 degrees or
more, the function operates and gives a trip output.

Phase-to-phase fault SEMOD154224-240 v2

Mho GUID-D162893C-918A-4DDA-AAC2-0D0A814D85C1 v1
The plain Mho circle has the characteristic as in figure 64. The condition for deriving the angle
β is according to equation 6.

(
β = arg U L1L 2 − I L1L 2 ⋅ Z 1set − arg U pol ) ( )
IECEQUATION15027 V1 EN-US (Equation 6)

147
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Impedance protection

where

U L1L2 is the voltage vector difference between phases L1 and L2

EQUATION1790 V2
EN-US

I L1L2 is the current vector difference between phases L1 and L2

EQUATION1791
EN-US V2

is the positive sequence impedance setting for phase-to-phase fault in zone direction
Z 1set

For Zone 1,

Z 1set = R1PPZ 1 + j ⋅ X 1PPZ 1

IECEQUATION15011 V1 EN-US (Equation 7)

where
R1PPZ1 is the positive sequence resistive reach for phase-to-phase fault for zone 1
X1PPZ1 is the positive sequence reactance reach for phase-to-phase fault for zone 1

For Zone 2-5 and RV

Z 1set = R1Zx + j ⋅ X 1Zx

IECEQUATION15012 V1 EN-US (Equation 8)

where
R1Zx is the positive sequence resistive reach for zone x (x=2-5 and RV)
X1Zx is the positive sequence reactance reach for zone x (x=2-5 and RV)
is the polarizing voltage
Upol

Operation occurs if 90°≤β≤270°

148
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

IL1L2  jX

I L1L 2  Z1set
UcompUL1L2 IL1L2 Z1set

UL1L2

U pol

I L1L 2  R

IEC15000060-1-en.vsdx

IEC15000060 V1 EN-US

Figure 64: Simplified mho characteristic and vector diagram for phase L1-to-L2 fault
Offset Mho GUID-3E13E6D5-0832-4386-9677-9A40BFF42F8F v1
The characteristic for offset mho is a circle where two points on the circle are given by the two
vectors Z 1set and Z 1RVset where Z 1set and Z 1RVset are settable through the resistance and
reactance settings in forward and reverse directions.

The condition for operation at phase-to-phase fault is that the angle β between the two
compensated voltages is greater than or equal to 90° (figure 65). The angle will be 90° for fault
location on the boundary of the circle.

The angle β for L1 to L2 fault can be defined according to equation below.

 U 
L1L 2 − I L1L 2 ⋅ Z 1set
β = arg  
 (
 U L1L 2 − − I L1L 2 ⋅ Z 1RVset ) 

IECEQUATION15008 V1 EN-US (Equation 9)

where
is the positive sequence impedance setting for phase-to-phase fault opposite to zone
Z 1RVset direction and is defined as

For Zone 1,
Z 1RVset = R1PPZ 1 + j ⋅ X 1PPZ 1
IECEQUATION15015 V1 EN-US (Equation 10)
For Zone 2-5 and RV,
Z 1RVset = R1Zx + j ⋅ X 1Zx
IECEQUATION15016 V1 EN-US (Equation 11)

149
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Impedance protection

IEC15000058-1-en.vsdx

IEC15000058 V1 EN-US

Figure 65: Simplified offset mho characteristic and voltage vector for phase L1 to L2
fault
Operation occurs if 90°≤β≤270 °.

Phase-to-earth fault GUID-DB8CF641-0D3F-4F7A-A628-829F3DB0AC5B

SEMOD154224-283 v2
v1
The measuring of earth faults uses earth return compensation applied in a conventional way.
The compensation voltage is derived by considering the influence from the earth return path.

Compensation for earth return path for faults involving earth is done by setting the positive
and zero sequence impedance of the line. It is known that the ground compensation factor KN
is,

Z 0set − Z 1set
KN =
3 ⋅ Z 1set
IECEQUATION15017 V1 EN-US

Z 0set = R 0Zx + j ⋅ X 0 Zx
IECEQUATION15018 V1 EN-US

For Zone 1,
Z 1set = R1PEZ 1 + j ⋅ X 1PEZ 1
IECEQUATION15019 V1 EN-US

For Zone 2-5 and RV,

Z 1set = R1Zx + j ⋅ X 1Zx
IECEQUATION15020 V1 EN-US (Equation 12)

150
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

where
is the complex zero sequence impedance of the line in Ω/phase
Z 0set
is the complex positive sequence impedance of the line in Ω/
Z 1set phase
R1PEZ1 is the positive sequence resistive reach of the line in Ω/phase
for phase-to-earth fault for zone 1
X1PEZ1 is the positive sequence reactance reach of the line in Ω/phase
for phase-to-earth fault for zone 1
R0Zx is the zero sequence resistive reach of the line in Ω/phase for
zone x (x=2-5, or RV)
X0Zx is the zero sequence reactance reach of the line in Ω/phase for
zone x (x=2-5, or RV)

For an earth fault in phase L1, the angle β between the compensation voltage and the

polarizing voltage Upol is,

β = arg [U L1 − ( I L1 + 3I 0 ⋅ K N ) ⋅ Z 1set ] − arg(U pol )

IECEQUATION15021 V1 EN-US (Equation 13)

where
is the phase voltage in faulty phase L1
UL1
is the phase current in faulty phase L1
IL1
3I0 is the zero-sequence current in faulty phase L1

is the complex positive sequence impedance of the line in Ω/

Z 1set phase for phase-to-earth fault in zone direction

is the polarizing voltage for phase L1

Upol

151
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Impedance protection

IL1•jX

UcompUL1 (IL1 3I0 KN )  Z1set

3I0KN Z1set

U L1
I L1  Z1set
U pol

IL1•R
IEC15000059-1-en.vsdx

IEC15000059 V1 EN-US

Figure 66: Simplified offset mho characteristic and vector diagram for phase L1-to-earth
fault
Operation occurs if 90°≤β≤270°.

Offset mho GUID-B1EF3931-7B86-4C7B-BCEA-3034482BA240 v1

The condition for operation of offset mho at phase-to-earth fault is that the angle β between
the two compensated voltages is equal to or greater than 90°, see figure 67. The angle will be
90° for fault location on the boundary of the circle.

( ) {
β = arg U L1 − ( I L1 + 3I 0 ⋅ K N ) ⋅ Z 1set − arg U L1 −  −( I L1 + 3I 0 ⋅ K N ⋅ Z 1RVset ] ) }
IECEQUATION15022 V1 EN-US (Equation 14)

where
is the complex positive sequence impedance of the line in Ω/
Z 1RVset phase for phase-to-earth fault opposite to zone direction and is
defined as,

For Zone 1,
Z 1RVset = R1PEZ 1 + j ⋅ X 1PEZ 1
IECEQUATION15025 V1 EN-US (Equation 15)
For Zone 2-5 and RV,
Z 1RVset = R1Zx + j ⋅ X 1Zx
IECEQUATION15026 V1 EN-US (Equation 16)

152
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

IL1• jX

Ucomp1  U L1  ( I L1  3I 0  K N )  Z1set

( I L1  3I 0  K N )  Z1set U L1

U comp 2  U L1   ( I L1  3I 0  K N )  Z1RVset ) 

( I L1  3I 0  K N )  Z1RVset
IL1• R

IEC15000057-1-en.vsdx
IEC15000057 V1 EN-US

Figure 67: Simplified offset mho characteristic and voltage vector for phase L1-to-earth
fault
Operation occurs if 90 °≤β≤270 °.

7.1.7.7 Load encroachment GUID-6785BF05-2775-4422-8077-A663D01C6C07 v5

In some cases the measured load impedance might enter the set zone characteristic without
any fault on the protected line. This phenomenon is called load encroachment and it might
occur when an external fault is cleared and high emergency load is transferred onto the
protected line. The effect of load encroachment is illustrated on the left in figure 68. The
entrance of the load impedance inside the characteristic is of course not desirable and the way
to handle this with conventional distance protection is to consider this with the resistive reach
settings, that is, to have a security margin between the distance zone characteristic and the
minimum load impedance. Such a solution has the drawback that it will reduce the sensitivity
of the distance protection, that is, the ability to detect resistive faults.

The IED has a built in feature which shapes the characteristic according to the characteristic
shown in figure 68. The load encroachment algorithm will increase the possibility to detect
high fault resistances, especially for phase-to-earth faults at the remote line end. For example,
for a given setting of the load angle ArgLd, the resistive blinder for the zone measurement can
be set according to figure 68 affording higher fault resistance coverage without risk for
unwanted operation due to load encroachment. Separate resistive blinder settings are
available in forward and reverse direction.

The use of the load encroachment feature is essential for long heavily loaded lines, where there
might be a conflict between the necessary emergency load transfer and necessary sensitivity
of the distance protection. The function can also preferably be used on heavy loaded, medium
long lines. For short lines, the major concern is to get sufficient fault resistance coverage. Load
encroachment is not a major problem. See section "".

153
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Impedance protection

X X

Z1 Z1

Load impedance
area in forward ArgLd
R
direction R

RLdRv RLdFw

IEC09000248-2-en.vsd
IEC09000248 V2 EN-US

Figure 68: Load encroachment phenomena and shaped load encroachment

characteristic
[1]

7.1.7.8 Simplified logic schemes GUID-B43F2F0B-C8A2-4CFD-A9DD-51E167A90B56 v5

PHSL1, PHSL2,...PHSL3L1 are internal binary logical signals from the Phase-selection element.
They correspond directly to the six loops of the distance zones and determine which loops
should be released to operate.

FWL1, FWL2,...FWL3L1 and RVL1, RVL2,...RVL3L1 are the internal binary signals from the
Directional element. An FW signal is activated if the criteria for a forward fault or load is
fulfilled for its particular loop. The equivalent applies to the reverse (RV) signals.

The internal input 'IN present' is activated if the residual current (3I0) exceeds 10% of the
maximum phase current magnitude and at the same time is above 5% of IBase. However, if
current transformer saturation is detected, this criterion is changed to residual voltage (3U0)
exceeding 5% of UBase/sqrt(3) instead.

FW(Ln & LmLn) DIR(Ln & LmLn)Z1

FW(Ln & LmLn) DIR(Ln & LmLn)Z2

RV(Ln & LmLn) DIR(Ln & LmLn)ZRV

DirModeZ3-5
TRUE (1) Non-directional
FW(Ln & LmLn) Forward DIR(Ln & LmLn)Z3-5
RV(Ln & LmLn) Reverse

IEC12000137-2-en.vsd
IEC12000137 V2 EN-US

Figure 69: Connection of directional signals to Zones

[1] RLdRv=RLdRvFactor*RLdFw

154
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

PEZx
OR
ZML1Zx
PHSL1 AND
DIRL1Zx AND
ZML2Zx
PHSL2 AND
DIRL2Zx AND
ZML3Zx L1Zx
OR
PHSL3 AND
DIRL3Zx AND

ZML1L2Zx L2Zx
OR
PHSL1L2 AND
DIRL1L2Zx AND
ZML2L3Zx L3Zx
PHSL2L3 AND OR
DIRL2L3Zx AND
ZML3L1Zx
PHSL3L1 AND
DIRL3L1Zx AND

PPZx
OR

NDZx
OR

IEC12000140-1-en.vsd
IEC12000140 V1 EN-US

Figure 70: Intermediate logic

155
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Impedance protection

TimerModeZx =
Enable Ph-Ph,
Ph-E

PPZx AND tPPZx

OR AND
AND t
TZx
PEZx AND tPEZx OR
OR
AND t
AND

BLOCK
VTSZ
BLKZx OR
BLKTRZx
OR TimerLinksZx
LoopLink (tPP-tPE)
ZoneLinkStart LoopLink & ZoneLink
OR
STPHS Phase Selection No Links
1st starting zone
LNKZ1 FALSE (0)
LNKZ2
LNKZRV LNKZx
AND
LNKZ3 OR
TimerLinksZx =
LNKZ4 LoopLink & ZoneLink
LNKZ5

IEC12000139-3-en.vsdx

IEC12000139 V3 EN-US

Figure 71: Logic for linking of timers

156
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

15 ms
TZx
t TRIPZx
AND

BLKTRZx
TRL1Zx
OR AND
BLOCK
VTSZ TRL2Zx
OR AND
BLKZx
TRL3Zx
AND
15 ms
L1Zx
t STL1Zx
AND
15 ms
L2Zx
t STL2Zx
AND
15 ms
L3Zx
t STL3Zx
AND

PPZx 15 ms
PEZx OR t STARTZx
AND

15 ms
NDZx
t STNDZx
AND

IEC12000138-1-en.vsd
IEC12000138 V1 EN-US

Figure 72: Start and trip outputs

15 ms
OR t STPE
AND
PHSL1
15 ms
PHSL2 OR t
AND
PHSL3
15 ms
OR t
PHSL1L2 AND

PHSL2L3 15 ms
OR t
AND
PHSL3L1
15 ms
OR t STPP
AND

BLOCK STARTND
OR
VTSZ OR
STPHS

IEC12000133-1-en.vsd
IEC12000133 V1 EN-US

Figure 73: Additional start outputs 1

157
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Impedance protection

PHSL1
FWL1 AND
PHSL2 15 ms
FWL2 AND OR t STFWL1
AND
PHSL3
FWL3 AND 15 ms
PHSL1L2 OR t STFWL2
AND
FWL1L2 AND
PHSL2L3 15 ms
FWL2L3 AND OR t STFWL3
PHSL3L1 AND
FWL3L1 AND
OR
STFWPE
IN present AND

STFW1PH
=1
BLOCK
VTSZ OR

STFW2PH
=2

STFW3PH
=3

IEC12000134-1-en.vsd
IEC12000134 V1 EN-US

Figure 74: Additional start outputs 2

PHSL1
RVL1 AND
PHSL2 15 ms
RVL2 AND OR t STRVL1
AND
PHSL3
RVL3 AND 15 ms
PHSL1L2 OR t STRVL2
AND
RVL1L2 AND
PHSL2L3 15 ms
RVL2L3 AND OR t STRVL3
PHSL3L1 AND
RVL3L1 AND
OR
STRVPE
IN present AND

BLOCK
VTSZ OR

IEC12000141-1-en.vsd
IEC12000141 V1 EN-US

Figure 75: Additional start outputs 3

158
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

7.1.7.9 Measurement

Measurement supervision SEMOD54417-130 v3

The protection, control, and monitoring IEDs have functionality to measure and further
process information for currents and voltages obtained from the pre-processing blocks. The
number of processed alternate measuring quantities depends on the type of IED and built-in
options.

The information on measured quantities is available for the user at different locations:

• Locally by means of the local HMI

• Remotely using the monitoring tool within PCM600 or over the station bus
• Internally by connecting the analogue output signals to the Disturbance Report function

GUID-8568A19F-0100-4A1A-B3C3-444FD7D6F00B v1

X equals Z in the name of the below mentioned settings.

Zero point clamping GUID-4894EF16-3376-48EB-863F-9CE14487ACAB v1

Measured value below zero point clamping limit is forced to zero. This allows the noise in the
input signal to be ignored. The zero point clamping limit is a setting (XZeroDb where X equals
Z).

Continuous monitoring of the measured quantity SEMOD54417-140 v4

Users can continuously monitor the measured quantity available in the function block by
means of four defined operating thresholds, see figure 76. The monitoring has two different
modes of operating:

• Overfunction, when the measured current exceeds the High limit (XHiLim) or High-high
limit (XHiHiLim) pre-set values
• Underfunction, when the measured current decreases under the Low limit (XLowLim) or
Low-low limit (XLowLowLim) pre-set values.

X_RANGE is illustrated in figure 76.

X_RANGE = 3
High-high limit

X_RANGE= 1 Hysteresis
High limit

X_RANGE=0

X_RANGE=0 t

Low limit

X_RANGE=2

Low-low limit
X_RANGE=4

IEC05000657-2-en.vsdx

IEC05000657 V2 EN-US

Figure 76: Presentation of operating limits

159
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Impedance protection

Each analogue output has one corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE). The output
signal is an integer in the interval 0-4 (0: Normal, 1: High limit exceeded, 3: High-high limit
exceeded, 2: below Low limit and 4: below Low-low limit). The output may be connected to a
measurement expander block (XP (RANGE_XP)) to get measurement supervision as binary
signals.

The logical value of the functional output signals changes according to figure 76.

The user can set the hysteresis (XLimHyst), which determines the difference between the
operating and reset value at each operating point, in wide range for each measuring channel
separately. The hysteresis is common for all operating values within one channel.

Actual value of the measured quantity SEMOD54417-150 v3

The actual value of the measured quantity is available locally and remotely. The measurement
is continuous for each measured quantity separately, but the reporting of the value to the
higher levels depends on the selected reporting mode. The following basic reporting modes
are available:

• Cyclic reporting (Cyclic)

• Amplitude dead-band supervision (Dead band)
• Integral dead-band supervision (Int deadband)

Cyclic reporting SEMOD54417-158 v3

The cyclic reporting of measured value is performed according to chosen setting (XRepTyp).
The measuring channel reports the value independent of amplitude or integral dead-band
reporting.

In addition to the normal cyclic reporting the IED also report spontaneously when measured
value passes any of the defined threshold limits.

Y
Value Reported Value Reported
Value Reported Value Reported
(1st)

Y3 Value Reported
Y2 Y4

Y1 Y5

t (*) t (*) t (*) t (*)

t
Value 1

Value 2

Value 3

Value 4

Value 5

(*)Set value for t: XDbRepInt IEC05000500-2-en.vsdx

IEC05000500 V2 EN-US

Figure 77: Periodic reporting

160
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

Amplitude dead-band supervision SEMOD54417-163 v6

If a measuring value is changed, compared to the last reported value, and the change is larger
than the ±ΔY pre-defined limits that are set by user (XDbRepInt), then the measuring channel
reports the new value to a higher level. This limits the information flow to a minimum
necessary. Figure 78 shows an example with the amplitude dead-band supervision. The picture
is simplified: the process is not continuous but the values are evaluated with a time interval of
one execution cycle from each other.

Value Reported
Y

Value Reported Value Reported

Value Reported
(1st)
Y3 Y
Y
Y2 Y
Y
Y
Y
Y1

IEC99000529-2-en.vsdx

IEC99000529 V2 EN-US

Figure 78: Amplitude dead-band supervision reporting

After the new value is reported, the ±ΔY limits for dead-band are automatically set around it.
The new value is reported only if the measured quantity changes more than defined by the ±ΔY
set limits.

Integral dead-band reporting SEMOD54417-167 v4

The measured value is reported if the time integral of all changes exceeds the pre-set limit
(XDbRepInt), figure 79, where an example of reporting with integral dead-band supervision is
shown. The picture is simplified: the process is not continuous but the values are evaluated
with a time interval of one execution cycle from each other.

The last value reported, Y1 in figure 79 serves as a basic value for further measurement. A
difference is calculated between the last reported and the newly measured value and is
multiplied by the time increment (discrete integral). The absolute values of these integral
values are added until the pre-set value is exceeded. This occurs with the value Y2 that is
reported and set as a new base for the following measurements (as well as for the values Y3,
Y4 and Y5).

The integral dead-band supervision is particularly suitable for monitoring signals with small
variations that can last for relatively long periods.

161
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Impedance protection

Y A1 >=
A >= pre-set value
A2 >=
pre-set value pre-set value
Y3 A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 >=
pre-set value
Y2 A1 A2
A4 A6
Value Reported Y4 A3 A5 A7
Value
(1st) Value
A Reported Y5
Reported Value
Reported Value
Y1 Reported

t
IEC99000530-2-en.vsdx

IEC99000530 V2 EN-US

Figure 79: Reporting with integral dead-band supervision

Measurement ZMMXU GUID-2DB6F5A4-A3C2-4BBA-8327-393B7F89EDC6 v2

The magnitude and angle of the impedance for each phase are available on the outputs
(ZLxMAG and ZLxANGL (x=1,2,3)). Each analogue output has a corresponding supervision level
output (ZLxRANG, ZLxANGR). The supervision output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see
section “Measurement supervision”.

Impedance measurement is calculated based on UL1/ IL1 , UL2 / IL2 , UL3 / IL3 , where ULX and
ILX are phase-to-earth voltage and phase current.
When the operating current is too low, the impedance measurement can be erroneous. In
order to avoid such error, minimum operating current will be checked. For phase currents
lower than 3% of IBase, the magnitude of impedance is force to 9999999 and the angle is
forced to 0 degree.

Inside the function, to ensure the readability of the output for the users, ZLxMAG and ZLxANGL
(x=1,2,3) will not change more often than a certain time period, for example, every 100 ms.

162
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

7.1.8 Technical data

GUID-6C2EF52A-8166-4A23-9861-38931682AA7D v7

Table 78: ZMFPDIS technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Number of zones 3 selectable -
directions, 3 fixed
directions
Minimum operate current, Ph- (5-6000)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir
Ph and Ph-E
Positive sequence reactance (0.01 - 3000.00) Pseudo continuous
reach, Ph-E and Ph-Ph loop ohm/p ramp:
±2.0% of set value
Positive sequence resistance (0.00 - 1000.00) Conditions:
reach, Ph-E and Ph-Ph loop ohm/p Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ramp of shots:
Zero sequence reactance (0.01 - 9000.00) Ur ±2.0% of set value
reach ohm/p Current range: (0.5-30) x Conditions:
Ir IEC 60255-121 point B
Zero sequence resistive reach (0.00 - 3000.00) Angle: At 0 degrees and
ohm/p 85 degrees
Fault resistance reach, Ph-E (0.01 -9000.00) IEC 60255-121 points
and Ph-Ph ohm/l A,B,C,D,E

Dynamic overreach < 5% at 85 degrees -

measured with CVTs
and 0.5 < SIR < 30,
IEC 60255-121
Reset ratio 105% typically -
Directional blinders Forward: -15 – 120 Pseudo continuous ramp:
degrees ±2.0 degrees, IEC 60255-121
Reverse: 165 – -60
degrees
Resistance determining the (0.01 - 5000.00) Pseudo continuous Ramp of shots:
load impedance area - forward ohm/p ramp: ±5.0% of set value
±2.0% of set value Conditions:
Conditions: Tested at ArgLd = 30
Tested at ArgLd = 30 degrees
degrees
Angle determining the load 5 - 70 degrees Pseudo continuous ramp:
impedance area ±2.0 degrees
Conditions:
Tested at RLdFw = 20 ohm/p
Definite time delay to trip, Ph- (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% of set value or ±35 ms whichever is greater
E and Ph-Ph operation
Operate time 24 ms typically, IEC -
60255-121
Reset time at 0.1 to 2 x Zreach Min. = 20 ms -
Max. = 35 ms

7.2 Automatic switch onto fault logic ZCVPSOF SEMOD153633-1 v3

163
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Impedance protection

7.2.1 Identification
SEMOD155890-2 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Automatic switch onto fault logic ZCVPSOF - -

7.2.2 Functionality SEMOD153644-5 v8

Automatic switch onto fault logic ZCVPSOF is a function that gives an instantaneous trip at
the closing of breaker onto a fault. A dead-line detection check is provided to activate
ZCVPSOF when the line is dead.

Mho distance protections cannot operate for switch onto fault condition when the phase
voltages are close to zero. An additional logic based on UI Level is used for this purpose.

ZCVPSOF is a complementary function to the distance protection function. It is enabled for

operation either by the closing command to the circuit breaker (normally closed auxiliary
contact of the circuit breaker) or automatically by the dead-line detection. Once enabled, it
remains active for tSOTF duration after the enabling signal is reset. The protection function
can be enabled for tripping during the activated time, freely selected from the functions
included in the terminal. The start of any of the selected protection functions during the
enabled condition results in an immediate TRIP output from the function.

7.2.3 Function block SEMOD156265-4 v6

IEC06000459 V3 EN-US

Figure 80: ZCVPSOF function block

7.2.4 Signals SEMOD156281-1 v2

PID-3875-INPUTSIGNALS v8

Table 79: ZCVPSOF Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Current DFT
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Voltage DFT
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
START_DLYD BOOLEAN 0 Start from function to be accelerated with delay by SOTF
BC BOOLEAN 0 External enabling of SOTF
ZACC BOOLEAN 0 Distance zone to be accelerated by SOTF

PID-3875-OUTPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 80: ZCVPSOF Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip output

164
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

7.2.5 Settings IP15016-1 v2

PID-3875-SETTINGS v8

Table 81: ZCVPSOF Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
AutoInitMode DLD disabled - - DLD disabled Automatic switch onto fault
Voltage initialization
Current
Current & Voltage
Mode Impedance - - UILevel Mode of operation of SOTF Function
UILevel
UILvl&Imp
IPh< 1 - 100 %IB 1 20 Current level for detection of dead line
in % of IBase
UPh< 1 - 100 %UB 1 70 Voltage level for detection of dead line
in % of UBase
tDuration 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Time delay for UI detection (s)
tSOTF 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Drop off delay time of switch onto
fault function
tDLD 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Delay time for activation of dead line
detection
tOperate 0.03 - 120.00 s 0.01 0.03 Time delay to operate of switch onto
fault function

Table 82: ZCVPSOF Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

7.2.6 Monitored data

PID-3875-MONITOREDDATA v5

Table 83: ZCVPSOF Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IL1 REAL - A Current in phase L1
IL2 REAL - A Current in phase L2
IL3 REAL - A Current in phase L3
UL1 REAL - kV Voltage in phase L1
UL2 REAL - kV Voltage in phase L2
UL3 REAL - kV Voltage in phase L3

7.2.7 Operation principle SEMOD153665-4 v7

The automatic switch onto fault logic ZCVPSOF can be activated externally (by the breaker-
closed input) or internally (automatically) with the dead-line detection using the UI level-based
logic.

165
Technical manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Impedance protection

When the setting AutoInitMode is DLD disabled, ZCVPSOF is activated by an external binary
input BC.

When the setting AutoInitMode is set to either Voltage, Current or Current & Voltage modes,
ZCVPSOF is activated by the dead-line detection.

The activation from the dead-line detection function is released if the internal signal DeadLine
from the UlLevel Detector function is activated at the same time as the inputs ZACC and
START_DLYD are not activated at least for the duration of tDLD. The internal signal DeadLine
from the UlLevel Detector function is activated under any of the following conditions:

• If all three-phase currents are below the setting IPh< and the AutoInitMode setting is set
to Current
• If all three-phase voltages are below the setting UPh< and the AutoInitMode setting is set
to Voltage
• If all three-phase currents and voltages are below the settings IPh< and UPh< and the
AutoInitMode setting is set to Current & Voltage

The activated signal is extended for the duration of tSOTF.

To get the TRIP signal, one of the different operate modes must also be selected with the
Mode parameter.
• Mode = Impedance; TRIP is released if the input ZACC is activated (connected normally to
the nondirectional distance protection zone) or the START_DLYD input is activated with a
set time delay of tOperate
• Mode = UlLevel; TRIP is released if UlLevel detector is activated
• Mode = UlLvl&Imp; TRIP is released based either on the impedance-measured criteria or
UlLevel detection

The SOTF UlLevel Detector logic is based on current and voltage levels. The internal signal
SOTFUILevel is activated if the phase voltage is below the set UPh< and the corresponding
phase current is above the set IPh< for a time longer than the duration set by tDuration.

The function can be blocked by activating the input BLOCK.

The measured phase voltages and currents are provided as service values.

166
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 7
Impedance protection

BLOCK
15ms
BC TRIP
& t

ZACC tSOTF
tDLD t
START_DLYD ≥1
& t

≥1
tOperate
t

I3P
U3P

DeadLine
IPh< UILevel tDuration
Detector t
UPh<

AutoInitMode

&
Mode = Impedance

SOTFUILevel
& ≥1
Mode = UILevel

≥1
&
Mode = UILvl&Imp

IEC07000084 V3 EN-US

Figure 81: Simplified logic diagram for Automatic switch onto fault logic

7.2.8 Technical data SEMOD173230-1 v1

M16043-1 v11

Table 84: ZCVPSOF technical data

Parameter Range or value Accuracy
Operate voltage, detection of dead line (1–100)% of ±0.5% of Ur
UBase
Operate current, detection of dead line (1–100)% of ±1.0% of Ir
IBase
Time delay to operate for the switch onto fault (0.03-120.00) s ±0.2% or ±20 ms whichever is greater
function
Time delay for UI detection (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±20 ms whichever is greater
Delay time for activation of dead line detection (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±20 ms whichever is greater
Drop-off delay time of switch onto fault function (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is greater

167
Technical manual
168
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

Section 8 Current protection

8.1 Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection PHPIOC IP14506-1 v6

8.1.1 Identification
M14880-1 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Instantaneous phase overcurrent PHPIOC 50
protection 3-phase output
3I>>

SYMBOL-Z V1 EN-US

8.1.2 Functionality M12910-3 v12

The instantaneous three phase overcurrent function has a low transient overreach and short
tripping time to allow use as a high set short-circuit protection function.

8.1.3 Function block M12602-3 v6

PHPIOC
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK TRL1
ENMULT TRL2
TRL3

IEC04000391-2-en.vsd
IEC04000391 V2 EN-US

Figure 82: PHPIOC function block

8.1.4 Signals IP11433-1 v2

PID-6519-INPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 85: PHPIOC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase current
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
ENMULT BOOLEAN 0 Enable current start value multiplier

169
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Current protection

PID-6519-OUTPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 86: PHPIOC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip signal from any phase
TRL1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L1
TRL2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L2
TRL3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L3

8.1.5 Settings IP11434-1 v2

PID-6519-SETTINGS v5

Table 87: PHPIOC Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OpMode 2 out of 3 - - 1 out of 3 Select operation mode 2-out of 3 / 1-
1 out of 3 out of 3
IP>> 5 - 2500 %IB 1 200 Operate phase current level in % of
IBase

Table 88: PHPIOC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
StValMult 0.5 - 5.0 - 0.1 1.0 Multiplier for operate current level

Table 89: PHPIOC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

Table 90: PHPIOC Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
IP>>MinEd2Set 5 - 2500 %IB 1 5 Minimum settable operate phase
current level in % of IBase, for 61850
Ed.2 settings
IP>>MaxEd2Set 5 - 2500 %IB 1 2500 Maximum settable operate phase
current level in % of IBase, for 61850
Ed.2 settings

8.1.6 Monitored data

PID-6519-MONITOREDDATA v5

Table 91: PHPIOC Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IL1 REAL - A Current in phase L1
IL2 REAL - A Current in phase L2
IL3 REAL - A Current in phase L3

170
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

8.1.7 Operation principle M12913-3 v7

The sampled analogue phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter (DFT)
block. The RMS value of each phase current is derived from the fundamental frequency
components, as well as sampled values of each phase current. These phase current values are
fed to the instantaneous phase overcurrent protection 3-phase output function PHPIOC. In a
comparator the RMS values are compared to the set operation current value of the function
(IP>>). If a phase current is larger than the set operation current a signal from the comparator
for this phase is set to true. This signal will, without delay, activate the output signal TRLn
(n=1,2,3) for this phase and the TRIP signal that is common for all three phases.

There is an operation mode (OpMode) setting: 1 out of 3 or 2 out of 3. If the parameter is set to
1 out of 3 any phase trip signal will be activated. If the parameter is set to 2 out of 3 at least
two phase signals must be activated for trip.

There is also a possibility to activate a preset change of the set operation current (StValMult)
via a binary input (ENMULT). In some applications the operation value needs to be changed,
for example due to transformer inrush currents.

PHPIOC can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK.

8.1.8 Technical data IP11435-1 v1

M12336-1 v12

Table 92: PHPIOC technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate current (5-2500)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio > 95% at (50–2500)% of IBase -

Operate time at 0 to 2 x Iset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 25 ms
Reset time at 2 to 0 x Iset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 25 ms
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Operate time at 0 to 10 x Iset Min. = 5 ms -

Max. = 15 ms
Reset time at 10 to 0 x Iset Min. = 25 ms -
Max. = 40 ms
Critical impulse time 2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset -

Dynamic overreach < 5% at t = 100 ms -

8.2 Four step phase overcurrent protection OC4PTOC SEMOD129998-1 v7

171
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Current protection

8.2.1 Identification
M14885-1 v5

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Four step phase overcurrent OC4PTOC 51_67
protection 3-phase output

TOC-REVA V2 EN-US

8.2.2 Functionality M12846-3 v16

The four step three-phase overcurrent protection function OC4PTOC has an inverse or definite
time delay independent for step 1 to 4 separately.

All IEC and ANSI inverse time characteristics are available together with an optional user
defined time characteristic.

The directional function needs voltage as it is voltage polarized with memory. The function can
be set to be directional or non-directional independently for each of the steps.

A second harmonic blocking level can be set for the function and can be used to block each
step individually.

172
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

8.2.3 Function block M12609-3 v7

OC4PTOC
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TR1
BLOCK TR2
BLKTR TR3
BLKST1 TR4
BLKST2 TRL1
BLKST3 TRL2
BLKST4 TRL3
ENMULT1 TR1L1
ENMULT2 TR1L2
ENMULT3 TR1L3
ENMULT4 TR2L1
TR2L2
TR2L3
TR3L1
TR3L2
TR3L3
TR4L1
TR4L2
TR4L3
START
ST1
ST2
ST3
ST4
STL1
STL2
STL3
ST1L1
ST1L2
ST1L3
ST2L1
ST2L2
ST2L3
ST3L1
ST3L2
ST3L3
ST4L1
ST4L2
ST4L3
ST2NDHRM
DIRL1
DIRL2
DIRL3
IEC06000187-3-en.vsd
IEC06000187 V3 EN-US

Figure 83: OC4PTOC function block

8.2.4 Signals
PID-6498-INPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 93: OC4PTOC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip
BLKST1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of Step1
BLKST2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of Step2
BLKST3 BOOLEAN 0 Block of Step3
BLKST4 BOOLEAN 0 Block of Step4
Table continues on next page

173
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Current protection

Name Type Default Description

ENMULT1 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for step1
ENMULT2 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for step2
ENMULT3 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for step3
ENMULT4 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for step4

PID-6498-OUTPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 94: OC4PTOC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
TR1 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step1
TR2 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step2
TR3 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step3
TR4 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step4
TRL1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L1
TRL2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L2
TRL3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L3
TR1L1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase L1
TR1L2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase L2
TR1L3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase L3
TR2L1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step2 phase L1
TR2L2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step2 phase L2
TR2L3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step2 phase L3
TR3L1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step3 phase L1
TR3L2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step3 phase L2
TR3L3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step3 phase L3
TR4L1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step4 phase L1
TR4L2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step4 phase L2
TR4L3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step4 phase L3
START BOOLEAN General start signal
ST1 BOOLEAN Common start signal from step1
ST2 BOOLEAN Common start signal from step2
ST3 BOOLEAN Common start signal from step3
ST4 BOOLEAN Common start signal from step4
STL1 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L1
STL2 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L2
STL3 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L3
ST1L1 BOOLEAN Start signal from step1 phase L1
ST1L2 BOOLEAN Start signal from step1 phase L2
ST1L3 BOOLEAN Start signal from step1 phase L3
ST2L1 BOOLEAN Start signal from step2 phase L1
ST2L2 BOOLEAN Start signal from step2 phase L2
ST2L3 BOOLEAN Start signal from step2 phase L3
Table continues on next page

174
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

Name Type Description

ST3L1 BOOLEAN Start signal from step3 phase L1
ST3L2 BOOLEAN Start signal from step3 phase L2
ST3L3 BOOLEAN Start signal from step3 phase L3
ST4L1 BOOLEAN Start signal from step4 phase L1
ST4L2 BOOLEAN Start signal from step4 phase L2
ST4L3 BOOLEAN Start signal from step4 phase L3
ST2NDHRM BOOLEAN Second harmonic detected
DIRL1 INTEGER Direction for phase1
DIRL2 INTEGER Direction for phase2
DIRL3 INTEGER Direction for phase3

8.2.5 Settings
PID-6498-SETTINGS v3

Table 95: OC4PTOC Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
AngleRCA 40 - 65 Deg 1 55 Relay characteristic angle (RCA)
AngleROA 40 - 89 Deg 1 80 Relay operation angle (ROA)
StartPhSel 1 out of 3 - - 1 out of 3 Number of phases required for op (1
2 out of 3 of 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3)
3 out of 3
DirMode1 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 1 (off, nodir,
Non-directional forward, reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Characterist1 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type for
ANSI Very inv. step 1
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
I1> 5 - 2500 %IB 1 1000 Operating phase current level for step
1 in % of IBase
t1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Def time delay or add time delay for
inverse char of step 1
k1 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time
delay for step 1
Table continues on next page

175
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

IMin1 1 - 10000 %IB 1 100 Minimum operate current for step1 in
% of IBase
t1Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse
curves for step 1
I1Mult 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for current operate level for
step 1
DirMode2 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 2 (off, nodir,
Non-directional forward, reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Characterist2 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type for
ANSI Very inv. step 2
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
I2> 5 - 2500 %IB 1 500 Operating phase current level for step
2 in % of IBase
t2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.400 Def time delay or add time delay for
inverse char of step 2
k2 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time
delay for step 2
IMin2 1 - 10000 %IB 1 50 Minimum operate current for step2 in
% of IBase
t2Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse
curves for step 2
I2Mult 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for current operate level for
step 2
DirMode3 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 3 (off, nodir,
Non-directional forward, reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Table continues on next page

176
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Characterist3 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type for
ANSI Very inv. step 3
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
I3> 5 - 2500 %IB 1 250 Operating phase current level for step
3 in % of IBase
t3 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.800 Def time delay or add time delay for
inverse char of step 3
k3 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time
delay for step 3
IMin3 1 - 10000 %IB 1 33 Minimum operate current for step3 in
% of IBase
t3Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse
curves for step 3
I3Mult 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for current operate level for
step 3
DirMode4 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 4 (off, nodir,
Non-directional forward, reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Characterist4 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type for
ANSI Very inv. step 4
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
I4> 5 - 2500 %IB 1 175 Operating phase current level for step
4 in % of IBase
t4 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 2.000 Def time delay or add time delay for
inverse char of step 4
k4 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time
delay for step 4
Table continues on next page

177
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

IMin4 1 - 10000 %IB 1 17 Minimum operate current for step4 in
% of IBase
t4Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse
curves for step 4
I4Mult 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for current operate level for
step 4

Table 96: OC4PTOC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
IMinOpPhSel 1 - 100 %IB 1 7 Minimum current for phase selection
in % of IBase
2ndHarmStab 5 - 100 %IB 1 20 Operate level of 2nd harmonic curr in
% of fundamental curr
ResetTypeCrv1 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for step 1
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
tReset1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Constant reset time for step 1
tPCrv1 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer
programmable curve for step 1
tACrv1 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter A for customer
programmable curve for step 1
tBCrv1 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Parameter B for customer
programmable curve for step 1
tCCrv1 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve for step 1
tPRCrv1 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Parameter PR for customer
programmable curve for step 1
tTRCrv1 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter TR for customer
programmable curve for step 1
tCRCrv1 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter CR for customer
programmable curve for step 1
HarmBlock1 Off - - Off Enable block of step 1 from harmonic
On restrain
ResetTypeCrv2 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for step 2
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
tReset2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Constant reset time for step 2
tPCrv2 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer
programmable curve for step 2
tACrv2 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter A for customer
programmable curve for step 2
tBCrv2 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Parameter B for customer
programmable curve for step 2
tCCrv2 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve for step 2
tPRCrv2 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Parameter PR for customer
programmable curve for step 2
tTRCrv2 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter TR for customer
programmable curve for step 2
tCRCrv2 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter CR for customer
programmable curve for step 2
Table continues on next page

178
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

HarmBlock2 Off - - Off Enable block of step 2 from harmonic
On restrain
ResetTypeCrv3 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for step 3
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
tReset3 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Constant reset time for step 3
tPCrv3 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer
programmable curve for step 3
tACrv3 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter A for customer
programmable curve for step 3
tBCrv3 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Parameter B for customer
programmable curve for step 3
tCCrv3 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve for step 3
tPRCrv3 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Parameter PR for customer
programmable curve for step 3
tTRCrv3 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter TR for customer
programmable curve for step 3
tCRCrv3 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter CR for customer
programmable curve for step 3
HarmBlock3 Off - - Off Enable block of step 3 from harmonic
On restrain
ResetTypeCrv4 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for step
IEC Reset 4
ANSI reset
tReset4 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Constant reset time for step 4
tPCrv4 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer
programmable curve for step 4
tACrv4 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter A for customer
programmable curve for step 4
tBCrv4 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Parameter B for customer
programmable curve for step 4
tCCrv4 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve for step 4
tPRCrv4 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Parameter PR for customer
programmable curve for step 4
tTRCrv4 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter TR for customer
programmable curve for step 4
tCRCrv4 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter CR for customer
programmable curve for step 4
HarmBlock4 Off - - Off Enable block of step 4 from harmonic
On restrain

Table 97: OC4PTOC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
MeasType DFT - - DFT Selection between DFT and RMS
RMS measurement
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

179
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Current protection

Table 98: OC4PTOC Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
I1>MinEd2Set 5 - 2500 %IB 1 5 Minimum settable operating phase
current level for step 1 in % of IBase,
for 61850 Ed.2 settings
I1>MaxEd2Set 5 - 2500 %IB 1 2500 Maximum settable operating phase
current level for step 1 in % of IBase,
for 61850 Ed.2 settings
I2>MinEd2Set 5 - 2500 %IB 1 5 Minimum settable operating phase
current level for step 2 in % of IBase,
for 61850 Ed.2 settings
I2>MaxEd2Set 5 - 2500 %IB 1 2500 Maximum settable operating phase
current level for step 2 in % of IBase,
for 61850 Ed.2 settings
I3>MinEd2Set 5 - 2500 %IB 1 5 Minimum settable operating phase
current level for step 3 in % of IBase,
for 61850 Ed.2 settings
I3>MaxEd2Set 5 - 2500 %IB 1 2500 Maximum settable operating phase
current level for step 3 in % of IBase,
for 61850 Ed.2 settings
I4>MinEd2Set 5 - 2500 %IB 1 5 Minimum settable operating phase
current level for step 4 in % of IBase,
for 61850 Ed.2 settings
I4>MaxEd2Set 5 - 2500 %IB 1 2500 Maximum settable operating phase
current level for step 4 in % of IBase,
for 61850 Ed.2 settings

8.2.6 Monitored data

PID-6498-MONITOREDDATA v3

Table 99: OC4PTOC Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
DIRL1 INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction for phase1
2=Reverse
0=No direction
DIRL2 INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction for phase2
2=Reverse
0=No direction
DIRL3 INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction for phase3
2=Reverse
0=No direction
IL1 REAL - A Current in phase L1
IL2 REAL - A Current in phase L2
IL3 REAL - A Current in phase L3

8.2.7 Operation principle M12883-3 v9

The Four step phase overcurrent protection OC4PTOC is divided into four different sub-
functions, one for each step. For each step x , where x is step 1, 2, 3 and 4, an operation mode
is set by DirModex: Off/Non-directional/Forward/Reverse.

The protection design can be divided into four parts:

180
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

• The direction element

• The harmonic restraint blocking function
• The four step over current function
• The mode selection

If VT inputs are not available or not connected, setting parameter DirModex

shall be left to default value, Non-directional.

4 step over current

Direction dirPh1Flt element faultState
faultState
Element One element for each
dirPh2Flt step
I3P dirPh3Flt START

U3P

TRIP

Harmonic harmRestrBlock
Restraint
Element

enableDir
Mode Selection
enableStep1-4
DirectionalMode1-4

en05000740-2-en.vsd

IEC05000740 V2 EN-US

Figure 84: Functional overview of OC4PTOC

M12883-16 v10
A common setting for all steps, StartPhSel, is used to specify the number of phase currents to
be high to enable operation. The settings can be chosen: 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3.

The sampled analogue phase currents are processed in a pre-processing function block. Using
a parameter setting MeasType within the general settings for the four step phase overcurrent
protection 1 and 3-phase output function OC4PTOC, it is possible to select the type of the
measurement used for all overcurrent stages. It is possible to select either discrete Fourier
filter (DFT) or true RMS filter (RMS).

If DFT option is selected then only the RMS value of the fundamental frequency components of
each phase current is derived. Influence of DC current component and higher harmonic current
components are almost completely suppressed. If RMS option is selected then the true RMS
values is used. The true RMS value in addition to the fundamental frequency component
includes the contribution from the current DC component as well as from higher current
harmonic. The selected current values are fed to OC4PTOC.

181
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Current protection

In a comparator, the DFT or RMS values are compared to the set operation current value of the
function (I1>, I2>, I3> or I4>) for each phase current. If a phase current is larger than the set
operation current, outputs START, STx, STL1, STL2 and STL3 are activated without delay.
Output signals STL1, STL2 and STL3 are common for all steps. This means that the lowest set
step will initiate the activation. The START signal is common for all three phases and all steps.
It shall be noted that the selection of measured value (DFT or RMS) do not influence the
operation of directional part of OC4PTOC.

Service value for individually measured phase currents are also available on the local HMI for
OC4PTOC function, which simplifies testing, commissioning and in service operational
checking of the function.

A harmonic restrain of the function can be chosen. A set 2nd harmonic current in relation to
the fundamental current is used. The 2nd harmonic current is taken from the pre-processing of
the phase currents and the relation is compared to a set restrain current level.

The function can be directional. The direction of the fault current is given as current angle in
relation to the voltage angle. The fault current and fault voltage for the directional function is
dependent of the fault type. To enable directional measurement at close in faults, causing low
measured voltage, the polarization voltage is a combination of the apparent voltage (85%) and
a memory voltage (15%). The following combinations are used.

Phase-phase short circuit:

U refL1L 2 = U L1 - U L 2 I dirL1L 2 = I L1 - I L 2
EQUATION1449 V1 EN-US (Equation 17)

U refL 2 L 3 = U L 2 - U L 3 I dirL 2 L 3 = I L 2 - I L 3
EQUATION1450 V1 EN-US (Equation 18)

U refL 3 L1 = U L 3 - U L1 I dirL 3 L1 = I L 3 - I L1
EQUATION1451 V1 EN-US (Equation 19)

Phase-earth short circuit:

U refL1 = U L1 I dirL1 = I L1
EQUATION1452 V1 EN-US (Equation 20)

U refL 2 = U L 2 I dirL 2 = I L 2
EQUATION1453 V1 EN-US (Equation 21)

U refL 3 = U L 3 I dirL 3 = I L 3
EQUATION1454 V1 EN-US (Equation 22)

The polarizing voltage is available as long as the positive-sequence voltage exceeds 4% of the
set base voltage UBase. So the directional element can use it for all unsymmetrical faults
including close-in faults.

For close-in three-phase faults, the U1L1M memory voltage, based on the same positive
sequence voltage, ensures correct directional discrimination.

The memory voltage is used for 100 ms or until the positive sequence voltage is restored.

After 100 ms, the following occurs:

182
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

• If the current is still above the set value of the minimum operating current (between 10
and 30% of the set terminal rated current IBase), the condition seals in.
• If the fault has caused tripping, the trip endures.
• If the fault was detected in the reverse direction, the measuring element in the
reverse direction remains in operation.
• If the current decreases below the minimum operating value, the memory resets until the
positive sequence voltage exceeds 10% of its rated value.

The directional setting is given as a characteristic angle AngleRCA for the function and an
angle window ROADir.

Reverse

Uref

RCA
ROA

ROA Forward

Idir

en05000745.vsd
IEC05000745 V1 EN-US

Figure 85: Directional characteristic of the phase overcurrent protection

The default value of AngleRCA is –65°. The parameters AngleROA gives the angle sector from
AngleRCA for directional borders.

A minimum current for directional phase start current signal can be set. IminOpPhSel is the
start level for directional evaluation of IL1, IL2 and IL3. The directional signals release the
overcurrent measurement in respective phases if their current amplitudes are higher than the
start level (IminOpPhSel) and the direction of the current is according to the set direction of
the step.

If no blockings are given, the start signals will start the timers of the step. The time
characteristic for each step can be chosen as definite time delay or inverse time characteristic.
A wide range of standardized inverse time characteristics is available.It is also possible to
create a tailor made time characteristic.

The possibilities for inverse time characteristics are described in section "Inverse
characteristics".

All four steps in OC4PTOC can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The binary input
BLKSTx (x=1, 2, 3 or 4) blocks the operation of respective step.

183
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Current protection

Characteristx=DefTime
|IOP| AND
tx TRx
a OR
a>b
Ix> b

AND
STx

txmin
BLKSTx AND
BLOCK
Inverse

Characteristx=Inverse

DirModex=Off OR STAGEx_DIR_Int
DirModex=Non-directional
DirModex=Forward
AND OR
FORWARD_Int
DirModex=Reverse

AND
REVERSE_Int

IEC12000008.vsd
IEC12000008.vsd

IEC12000008 V2 EN-US

Figure 86: Simplified logic diagram for OC4PTOC

I3P
DFWDLx

U3P DFWDLxx

DREVLx
Directional
Element
AngleRCA DREVLxx FORWARD_int

Directional
AngleROA Release REVERSE_int
Block

STLx

Greater
IminOpPhSel Comparator
x- means three phases 1,2 and 3
xx – means phase to phase 12,23,31

IEC15000266-1-en.vsdx

IEC15000266 V1 EN-US

Figure 87: OC4 directional release block diagram

Different types of reset time can be selected as described in section "Inverse characteristics".

There is a possibility to activate a preset change (IxMult x= 1, 2, 3 or 4) of the set operation

current via a binary input (enable multiplier). In some applications the operation value needs to
be changed, for example due to changed network switching state.

184
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

The function can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The start signals from the function
can be blocked from the binary input BLKST.The trip signals from the function can be blocked
from the binary input BLKTR.
GUID-E3980B2D-EEDA-4BF1-A07D-E7B721130554 v6
A harmonic restrain of the directional phase overcurrent protection function OC4PTOC can be
chosen. If the ratio of the 2nd harmonic component in relation to the fundamental frequency
component in a phase current exceeds the preset level defined by the parameter 2ndHarmStab
setting, any of the four overcurrent stages can be selectively blocked by the parameter
HarmBlockx setting. When the 2nd harmonic restraint feature is active, the OC4PTOC function
output signal ST2NDHRM will be set to the logical value one.

BLOCK

a
a>b
0.07*IBase b

a
a>b
b
Extract second AND
IOP
harmonic current a
a>b
component b

2ndH_BLOCK_Int
Extract
fundamental
current component
X
2ndHarmStab

IEC13000014-2-en.vsd
IEC13000014 V2 EN-US

Figure 88: Second harmonic blocking

When DirModex is set to Forward/Reverse and Ix> is set at its minimum value,
that is, 5.0% of IBase, the operation from the respective overcurrent step takes
place at 20.0% of IBase. This is done to avoid unintentional maloperations
during unbalanced loading conditions that might appear in power systems and
the unbalanced loading condition might lead to a neutral current in the range
of 10.0% to 15.0% of IBase.

8.2.8 Technical data

M12342-1 v21

Table 100: OC4PTOC technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate current, step 1-4 (5-2500)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio > 95% at (50–2500)% of -

lBase
Minimum operate current, step 1-4 (1-10000)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Relay characteristic angle (RCA) (40.0–65.0) degrees ±2.0 degrees

Relay operating angle (ROA) (40.0–89.0) degrees ±2.0 degrees
Second harmonic blocking (5–100)% of fundamental ±2.0% of Ir

Independent time delay at 0 to 2 x Iset, step (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is

1-4 greater

Minimum operate time for inverse curves , (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is
step 1-4 greater
Table continues on next page

185
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Current protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Inverse time characteristics, see table 818, 16 curve types See table 818, table 820 and
table 820 and table 822 table 822
Operate time, start non-directional at 0 to Min. = 15 ms -
2 x Iset
Max. = 30 ms
Reset time, start non-directional at 2 x Iset Min. = 15 ms -
to 0
Max. = 30 ms
Operate time, start non-directional at 0 to Min. = 5 ms -
10 x Iset Max. = 20 ms

Reset time, start non-directional at 10 x Iset Min. = 20 ms -

to 0 Max. = 35 ms

Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

Operate frequency, directional overcurrent 38-83 Hz -
Operate frequency, non-directional 10-90 Hz -
overcurrent

8.3 Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection EFPIOC IP14508-1 v3

8.3.1 Identification
M14887-1 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Instantaneous residual overcurrent EFPIOC 50N
protection
IN>>

IEF V1 EN-US

8.3.2 Functionality M12701-3 v15

The Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection EFPIOC has a low transient overreach and
short tripping times to allow the use for instantaneous earth-fault protection, with the reach
limited to less than the typical eighty percent of the line at minimum source impedance.
EFPIOC is configured to measure the residual current from the three-phase current inputs and
can be configured to measure the current from a separate current input.

8.3.3 Function block M12614-3 v6

EFPIOC
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK
BLKAR
MULTEN

IEC06000269-2-en.vsd
IEC06000269 V2 EN-US

Figure 89: EFPIOC function block

186
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

8.3.4 Signals IP11448-1 v2

PID-3574-INPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 101: EFPIOC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase currents
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKAR BOOLEAN 0 Block input for auto reclose
ENMULT BOOLEAN 0 Enable current multiplier

PID-3574-OUTPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 102: EFPIOC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip signal

8.3.5 Settings IP11449-1 v2

PID-3574-SETTINGS v3

Table 103: EFPIOC Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
IN>> 5 - 2500 %IB 1 200 Operate residual current level in % of
IBase

Table 104: EFPIOC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
StValMult 0.5 - 5.0 - 0.1 1.0 Multiplier for operate current level

Table 105: EFPIOC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

8.3.6 Monitored data

PID-3574-MONITOREDDATA v2

Table 106: EFPIOC Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IN REAL - A Residual current

187
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Current protection

8.3.7 Operation principle M12704-3 v7

The sampled analog residual currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter (DFT) block.
From the fundamental frequency components of the residual current, as well as from the
sample values the equivalent RMS value is derived. This current value is fed to the
Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection (EFPIOC). In a comparator the RMS value is
compared to the set operation current value of the function (IN>>). If the residual current is
larger than the set operation current a signal from the comparator is set to true. This signal
will, without delay, activate the output signal TRIP.

There is also a possibility to activate a preset change of the set operation current via a binary
input (enable multiplier MULTEN). In some applications the operation value needs to be
changed, for example due to transformer inrush currents.

EFPIOC function can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The trip signals from the
function can be blocked from the binary input BLKAR, that can be activated during single pole
trip and autoreclosing sequences.

8.3.8 Technical data IP11450-1 v1

M12340-2 v8

Table 107: EFPIOC technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate current (5-2500)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio > 95% at (50–2500)% of lBase -

Operate time at 0 to 2 x Iset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 25 ms
Reset time at 2 to 0 x Iset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 25 ms
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Operate time at 0 to 10 x Iset Min. = 5 ms -

Max. = 15 ms
Reset time at 10 to 0 x Iset Min. = 25 ms -
Max. = 35 ms
Critical impulse time 2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset -

Dynamic overreach < 5% at t = 100 ms -

8.4 Four step residual overcurrent protection EF4PTOC IP14509-1 v7

8.4.1 Identification
M14881-1 v5

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Four step residual overcurrent EF4PTOC 51N_67N
4(IN>)
protection
4
alt
4
TEF-REVA V2 EN-US

188
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

8.4.2 Functionality M13667-3 v18

The four step residual overcurrent protection EF4PTOC has an inverse or definite time delay
independent for each step.

All IEC and ANSI time-delayed characteristics are available together with an optional user
defined characteristic.

EF4PTOC can be set directional or non-directional independently for each of the steps.

IDir, UPol and IPol can be independently selected to be either zero sequence or negative
sequence.

Second harmonic blocking can be set individually for each step.

EF4PTOC can be used as main protection for phase-to-earth faults.

EF4PTOC can also be used to provide a system back-up for example, in the case of the primary
protection being out of service due to communication or voltage transformer circuit failure.

Directional operation can be combined together with corresponding communication logic in

permissive or blocking teleprotection scheme. Current reversal and weak-end infeed
functionality are available as well.

Residual current can be calculated by summing the three phase currents or taking the input
from neutral CT

8.4.3 Function block M12619-3 v7

EF4PTOC
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TRIN1
I3PPOL* TRIN2
I3PDIR* TRIN3
BLOCK TRIN4
BLKTR TRSOTF
BLKST1 START
BLKST2 STIN1
BLKST3 STIN2
BLKST4 STIN3
ENMULT1 STIN4
ENMULT2 STSOTF
ENMULT3 STFW
ENMULT4 STRV
CBPOS 2NDHARMD
CLOSECB
OPENCB

IEC06000424-4-en.vsdx
IEC06000424 V4 EN-US

Figure 90: EF4PTOC function block

8.4.4 Signals IP11453-1 v2

189
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Current protection

PID-6529-INPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 108: EF4PTOC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group connection for operate current
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group connection for polarizing voltage
SIGNAL
I3PPOL GROUP - Group connection for polarizing current
SIGNAL
I3PDIR GROUP - Group connection for directional current
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 General block
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip
BLKST1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1 (Start and trip)
BLKST2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 2 (Start and trip)
BLKST3 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 3 (Start and trip)
BLKST4 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 4 (Start and trip)
ENMULT1 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for step1
ENMULT2 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for step2
ENMULT3 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for step3
ENMULT4 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for step4
CBPOS BOOLEAN 0 Breaker position
CLOSECB BOOLEAN 0 Breaker close command
OPENCB BOOLEAN 0 Breaker open command

PID-6529-OUTPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 109: EF4PTOC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General trip signal
TRIN1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 1
TRIN2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 2
TRIN3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 3
TRIN4 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 4
TRSOTF BOOLEAN Trip signal from earth fault switch onto fault function
START BOOLEAN General start signal
STIN1 BOOLEAN Start signal step 1
STIN2 BOOLEAN Start signal step 2
STIN3 BOOLEAN Start signal step 3
STIN4 BOOLEAN Start signal step 4
STSOTF BOOLEAN Start signal from earth fault switch onto fault function
STFW BOOLEAN Start signal forward direction
STRV BOOLEAN Start signal reverse direction
2NDHARMD BOOLEAN 2nd harmonic block signal

190
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

8.4.5 Settings IP11454-1 v2

PID-6529-SETTINGS v5

Table 110: EF4PTOC Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
EnDir Disable - - Enable Enabling the Directional calculation
Enable
AngleRCA -180 - 180 Deg 1 65 Relay Characteristic Angle (RCA)
polMethod Voltage - - Voltage Type of polarization
Current
Dual
UPolMin 1 - 100 %UB 1 1 Minimum voltage level for polarization
in % of UBase
IPolMin 2 - 100 %IB 1 5 Minimum current level for polarization
in % of IBase
RNPol 0.50 - 1000.00 Ohm 0.01 5.00 Real part of source impedance used
for current polarisation
XNPol 0.50 - 3000.00 Ohm 0.01 40.00 Imaginary part of source imp. used for
current polarisation
IN>Dir 1 - 100 %IB 1 10 Residual current level in % of IBase for
Direction release
2ndHarmStab 5 - 100 % 1 20 Operate level of 2nd harmonic curr in
% of fundamental curr
BlkParTransf Off - - Off Enable blocking at energizing of
On parallel transformers
UseStartValue IN1> - - IN4> Current level blk at parallel transf
IN2> (step1, 2, 3 or 4)
IN3>
IN4>
SOTF Off - - Off SOTF operation mode (Off/SOTF/
SOTF Undertime/SOTF&Undertime)
UnderTime
SOTF&UnderTime
ActivationSOTF Open - - Open Select signal to activate SOTF: CB-
Closed Open/ -Closed/ -Close cmd
CloseCommand
StepForSOTF Step 2 - - Step 2 Select start from step 2 or 3 to start
Step 3 SOTF
HarmBlkSOTF Off - - Off Enable harmonic restrain function in
On SOTF
tSOTF 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay for SOTF
t4U 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Switch-onto-fault active time
ActUnderTime CB position - - CB position Select signal to activate under time
CB command (CB Pos / CB Command)
tUnderTime 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.300 Time delay for under time
DirMode1 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 1 (Off, Non-
Non-directional dir, Forward, Reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Table continues on next page

191
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Characterist1 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Time delay characteristic for step 1
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
IN1> 1 - 2500 %IB 1 100 Residual current operate level for step
1 in % of IBase
t1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Def time delay or add time delay for
inverse char of step 1
k1 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the step 1 selected
time characteristic
IMin1 1.00 - 10000.00 %IB 1.00 100.00 Minimum operate residual current for
step 1 in % of IBase
t1Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse
time characteristic step 1
IN1Mult 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for the residual current
setting value for step 1
HarmBlock1 Off - - On Enable block of step 1 from harmonic
On restrain
DirMode2 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 2 (Off, Non-
Non-directional dir, Forward, Reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Characterist2 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Time delay characteristic for step 2
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
IN2> 1 - 2500 %IB 1 50 Residual current operate level for step
2 in % of IBase
t2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.400 Def time delay or add time delay for
inverse char of step 2
Table continues on next page

192
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

k2 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the step 2 selected
time characteristic
IMin2 1.00 - 10000.00 %IB 1.00 50 Minimum operate residual current for
step 2 in % of IBase
t2Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse
time characteristic step 2
IN2Mult 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for the residual current
setting value for step 2
HarmBlock2 Off - - On Enable block of step 2 from harmonic
On restrain
DirMode3 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 3 (Off, Non-
Non-directional dir, Forward, Reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Characterist3 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Time delay characteristic for step 3
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
IN3> 1 - 2500 %IB 1 33 Residual current operate level for step
3 in % of IBase
t3 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.800 Def time delay or add time delay for
inverse char of step 3
k3 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the step 3 selected
time characteristic
IMin3 1.00 - 10000.00 %IB 1.00 33 Minimum operate residual current for
step 3 in % of IBase
t3Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse
time characteristic step 3
IN3Mult 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for the residual current
setting value for step 3
HarmBlock3 Off - - On Enable block of step 3 from harmonic
On restrain
DirMode4 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 4 (Off, Non-
Non-directional dir, Forward, Reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Table continues on next page

193
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Characterist4 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Time delay characteristic for step 4
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
IN4> 1 - 2500 %IB 1 17 Residual current operate level for step
4 in % of IBase
t4 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.200 Def time delay or add time delay for
inverse char of step 4
k4 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the step 4 selected
time characteristic
IMin4 1.00 - 10000.00 %IB 1.00 17 Minimum operate residual current for
step 4 in % of IBase
t4Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse
time characteristic step 4
IN4Mult 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for the residual current
setting value for step 4
HarmBlock4 Off - - On Enable block of step 4 from harmonic
On restrain

Table 111: EF4PTOC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ResetTypeCrv1 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Reset curve type for step1
IEC Reset (Instantaneous / IEC / ANSI)
ANSI reset
tReset1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset time delay for step 1
tPCrv1 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Param P for customized inverse trip
time curve for step 1
tACrv1 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param A for customized inverse trip
time curve for step 1
tBCrv1 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Param B for customized inverse trip
time curve for step 1
tCCrv1 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param C for customized inverse trip
time curve for step 1
tPRCrv1 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Param PR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 1
tTRCrv1 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param TR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 1
tCRCrv1 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param CR for customized inverse
reset time curve for step 1
Table continues on next page

194
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

ResetTypeCrv2 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Reset curve type for step2
IEC Reset (Instantaneous / IEC / ANSI)
ANSI reset
tReset2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset time delay for step 2
tPCrv2 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Param P for customized inverse trip
time curve for step 2
tACrv2 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param A for customized inverse trip
time curve for step 2
tBCrv2 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Param B for customized inverse trip
time curve for step 2
tCCrv2 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param C for customized inverse trip
time curve for step 2
tPRCrv2 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Param PR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 2
tTRCrv2 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param TR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 2
tCRCrv2 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param CR for customized inverse
reset time curve for step 2
ResetTypeCrv3 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Reset curve type for step3
IEC Reset (Instantaneous / IEC / ANSI)
ANSI reset
tReset3 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset time delay for step 3
tPCrv3 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Param P for customized inverse trip
time curve for step 3
tACrv3 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param A for customized inverse trip
time curve for step 3
tBCrv3 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Param B for customized inverse trip
time curve for step 3
tCCrv3 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param C for customized inverse trip
time curve for step 3
tPRCrv3 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Param PR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 3
tTRCrv3 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param TR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 3
tCRCrv3 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param CR for customized inverse
reset time curve for step 3
ResetTypeCrv4 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Reset curve type for step4
IEC Reset (Instantaneous / IEC / ANSI)
ANSI reset
tReset4 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset time delay for step 4
tPCrv4 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Param P for customized inverse trip
time curve for step 4
tACrv4 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param A for customized inverse trip
time curve for step 4
tBCrv4 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Param B for customized inverse trip
time curve for step 4
tCCrv4 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param C for customized inverse trip
time curve for step 4
tPRCrv4 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Param PR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 4
tTRCrv4 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param TR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 4
tCRCrv4 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param CR for customized inverse
reset time curve for step 4

195
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Current protection

Table 112: EF4PTOC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups
SeqTypeIDir Zero seq - - Zero seq Choice of measurand for directional
Neg seq current
SeqTypeIPol Zero seq - - Zero seq Choice of measurand for polarizing
Neg seq current
SeqTypeUPol Zero seq - - Zero seq Choice of measurand for polarizing
Neg seq voltage

Table 113: EF4PTOC Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
IN1>MinEd2Set 1 - 2500 %IB 1 1 Minimum settable operate residual
current level for step 1 in % of IBase,
for 61850 Ed.2 settings
IN1>MaxEd2Set 1 - 2500 %IB 1 2500 Maximum settable operate residual
current level for step 1 in % of IBase,
for 61850 Ed.2 settings
IN2>MinEd2Set 1 - 2500 %IB 1 1 Minimum settable operate residual
current level for step 2 in % of IBase,
for 61850 Ed.2 settings
IN2>MaxEd2Set 1 - 2500 %IB 1 2500 Maximum settable operate residual
current level for step 2 in % of IBase,
for 61850 Ed.2 settings
IN3>MinEd2Set 1 - 2500 %IB 1 1 Minimum settable operate residual
current level for step 3 in % of IBase,
for 61850 Ed.2 settings
IN3>MaxEd2Set 1 - 2500 %IB 1 2500 Maximum settable operate residual
current level for step 3 in % of IBase,
for 61850 Ed.2 settings
IN4>MinEd2Set 1 - 2500 %IB 1 1 Minimum settable operate residual
current level for step 4 in % of IBase,
for 61850 Ed.2 settings
IN4>MaxEd2Set 1 - 2500 %IB 1 2500 Maximum settable operate residual
current level for step 4 in % of IBase,
for 61850 Ed.2 settings

8.4.6 Monitored data

PID-6529-MONITOREDDATA v4

Table 114: EF4PTOC Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IOp REAL - A Operating current level
UPol REAL - kV Polarizing voltage level
IPol REAL - A Polarizing current level
UPOLIANG REAL - deg Polarizing angle between voltage and
current
IPOLIANG REAL - deg Polarizing current angle

196
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

8.4.7 Operation principle IP12992-1 v2

M13941-51 v6
This function has the following three “Analog Inputs” on its function block in the configuration
tool:

1. I3P, input used for “Operating Quantity”. Supply the zero-sequence magnitude measuring
functionality.
2. U3P, input used for “Voltage Polarizing Quantity”. Supply either zero or negative sequence
voltage to the directional functionality
3. I3PPOL, input used for “Current Polarizing Quantity”. Provide polarizing current to the
directional functionality. This current is normally taken from the grounding of a power
transformer.
4. I3PDIR, input used for “Directional detection”. Supply either zero or negative sequence
current to the directional functionality.

These inputs are connected from the corresponding pre-processing function blocks in the
Configuration Tool within PCM600.

8.4.7.1 Operating quantity within the function M13941-58 v7

The function always uses Residual Current (3I0) for its operating quantity. The residual current
can be:

1. directly measured (when a dedicated CT input of the IED is connected in PCM600 to the
fourth analog input of the pre-processing block connected to EF4PTOC function input
I3P). This dedicated IED CT input can be for example, connected to:
• parallel connection of current instrument transformers in all three phases (Holm-
Green connection).
• one single core balance, current instrument transformer (cable CT).
• one single current instrument transformer located between power system star point
and earth (that is, current transformer located in the star point of a star connected
transformer winding).
• one single current instrument transformer located between two parts of a protected
object (that is, current transformer located between two star points of double star
shunt capacitor bank).
2. calculated from three-phase current input within the IED (when the fourth analog input
into the pre-processing block connected to EF4PTOC function Analog Input I3P is not
connected to a dedicated CT input of the IED in PCM600). In such case the pre-processing
block will calculate 3I0 from the first three inputs into the pre-processing block by using
the following formula (will take I2 from SMAI AI3P connected to I3PDIR input which was
connected to I3P input also):

If zero sequence current is selected,

Iop = 3I0 = IL1 + IL2 + IL3

EQUATION1874 V2 EN-US (Equation 23)

where:
IL1, IL2 and IL3 are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase currents.

The residual current is pre-processed by a discrete Fourier filter. Thus the phasor of the
fundamental frequency component of the residual current is derived. The phasor magnitude is
used within the EF4PTOC protection to compare it with the set operation current value of the
four steps (IN1>, IN2>, IN3> or IN4>). If the residual current is larger than the set operation

197
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Current protection

current and the step is used in non-directional mode a signal from the comparator for this
step is set to true. This signal will, without delay, activate the output signal STINx (x=step 1-4)
for this step and a common START signal.

8.4.7.2 Internal polarizing M13941-82 v10

A polarizing quantity is used within the protection in order to determine the direction to the
earth fault (Forward/Reverse).

The function can be set to use voltage polarizing, current polarizing or dual polarizing.

Current polarizing
When current polarizing is selected the function will use an external residual current (3I0) as
polarizing quantity IPol. This current can be:

1. directly measured (when a dedicated CT input of the IED is connected in PCM600 to the
fourth analog input of the pre-processing block connected to EF4PTOC function input
I3PPOL). This dedicated IED CT input is then typically connected to one single current
transformer located between power system star point and earth (current transformer
located in the star point of a star connected transformer winding).
• For some special line protection applications this dedicated IED CT input can be
connected to parallel connection of current transformers in all three phases (Holm-
Green connection).
2. calculated from three phase current input within the IED (when the fourth analog input
into the pre-processing block connected to EF4PTOC function analog input I3PPOL is NOT
connected to a dedicated CT input of the IED in PCM600). In such case the pre-processing
block will calculate 3I0 from the first three inputs into the pre-processing block by using
the following formula:

IPol = 3I0 = IL1 + IL2 + IL3

EQUATION2018 V2 EN-US (Equation 25)

where:
IL1, IL2 and IL3 are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase currents.

The residual current is pre-processed by a discrete fourier filter. Thus the phasor of the
fundamental frequency component of the polarizing current is derived. This phasor is then
multiplied with pre-set equivalent zero-sequence source Impedance in order to calculate
equivalent polarizing voltage UIPol in accordance with the following formula:

UIPol = Z 0s × IPol = (RNPol + j × XNPol) × IPol

EQUATION1877 V2 EN-US (Equation 26)

which will be then used, together with the phasor of the operating current, in order to
determine the direction to the earth fault (Forward/Reverse).

In order to enable current polarizing the magnitude of polarizing current shall be bigger than a
minimum level defined by setting parameter IPolMin.

Dual polarizing
When dual polarizing is selected the function will use the vectorial sum of the voltage based
and current based polarizing in accordance with the following formula:

198
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

UTotPol=UUPol + UIPol=UPol + Z 0s × IPol = UPol + ( RNPol + jXNPol ) × Ipol

IECEQUATION2408 V1 EN-US (Equation 27)

UPol and IPol can be either zero sequence component or negative sequence component
depending upon the user selection.

Then the phasor of the total polarizing voltage UTotPol will be used, together with the phasor
of the operating current, to determine the direction of the earth fault (Forward/Reverse).

8.4.7.3 External polarizing for earth-fault function M13941-144 v4

The individual steps within the protection can be set as non-directional. When this setting is
selected it is then possible via function binary input BLKSTx to provide external directional
control (that is, torque control) by for example using one of the following functions if available
in the IED:

1. Distance protection directional function.

2. Negative sequence polarized General current and voltage multi purpose protection
function.

8.4.7.4 Directional detection for earth fault function GUID-FC382DD3-E2C8-455E-8CD5-1DE1793DD178 v4

Zero sequence components will be used for detecting directionality for earth fault function. In
some cases zero sequence quantities might detect directionality wrong. Negative sequence
quantities will be used in such scenario. The user can select either zero sequence components
or negative sequence components for detecting directionality with the parameter
SeqTypeIPol. I3PDIR input always connected to the same source as I3P input.

8.4.7.5 Base quantities within the protection M13941-152 v5

The base quantities are entered as global settings for all functions in the IED. Base current
(IBase) shall be entered as rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes.
Base voltage (UBase) shall be entered as rated phase-to-phase voltage of the protected object
in primary kV.

8.4.7.6 Internal earth-fault protection structure M13941-157 v3

The protection is internally divided into the following parts:

1. Four residual overcurrent steps.

2. Directional supervision element for residual overcurrent steps with integrated directional
comparison step for communication based earth-fault protection schemes (permissive or
blocking).
3. Second harmonic blocking element with additional feature for sealed-in blocking during
switching of parallel transformers.
4. Switch on to fault feature with integrated Under-Time logic for detection of breaker
problems during breaker opening or closing sequence.

8.4.7.7 Four residual overcurrent steps M13941-166 v7

Each overcurrent step uses operating quantity Iop (residual current) as measuring quantity.
Each of the four residual overcurrent steps has the following built-in facilities:

• Directional mode can be set to Off/Non-directional/Forward/Reverse. By this parameter

setting the directional mode of the step is selected. It shall be noted that the directional

199
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Current protection

decision (Forward/Reverse) is not made within the residual overcurrent step itself. The
direction of the fault is determined in common “directional supervision element”.
• Residual current start value.
• Type of operating characteristic (inverse or definite time). By this parameter setting it is
possible to select inverse or definite time delay for the earth-fault protection. Most of the
standard IEC and ANSI inverse characteristics are available. For the complete list of
available inverse curves please refer to section "Inverse characteristics".
• Type of reset characteristic (Instantaneous / IEC Reset / ANSI Reset). By this parameter
setting it is possible to select the reset characteristic of the step. For the complete list of
available reset curves please refer to section "".
• Time delay related settings. By these parameter settings the properties like definite time
delay, minimum operating time for inverse curves, reset time delay and parameters to
define user programmable inverse curve are defined.
• Supervision by second harmonic blocking feature (On/Off). By this parameter setting it is
possible to prevent operation of the step if the second harmonic content in the residual
current exceeds the preset level.
• Multiplier for scaling of the set residual current pickup value by external binary signal. By
this parameter setting it is possible to increase residual current pickup value when
function binary input ENMULTx has logical value 1.

Simplified logic diagram for one residual overcurrent step is shown in figure 91.

BLKTR
EMULTX

IMinx Characteristx=DefTime
X T b
a>b
F a
tx TRINx
AND AND
|IOP|
a OR t
a>b
b

STINx
INxMult AND
X T
INx> F
AND Inverse
BLKSTx
AND
BLOCK Characteristx=Inverse

txmin
2ndHarm_BLOCK_Int
OR t
HarmRestrainx=Off

DirModex=Off OR STEPx_DIR_Int
DirModex=Non-directional
DirModex=Forward
AND OR
FORWARD_Int
DirModex=Reverse

AND
REVERSE_Int

IEC10000008.vsd

IEC10000008 V5 EN-US

Figure 91: Simplified logic diagram for residual overcurrent step x, where x = step 1, 2, 3 or 4
The protection can be completely blocked from the binary input BLOCK. Output signals for
respective step, and STINx and TRINx, can be blocked from the binary input BLKSTx. The trip
signals from the function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTR.

200
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

8.4.7.8 Directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison

function M13941-179 v9

It shall be noted that at least one of the four residual overcurrent steps shall be
set as directional in order to enable execution of the directional supervision
element and the integrated directional comparison function.

The protection has integrated directional feature. As the operating quantity current lop is
always used. The polarizing method is determined by the parameter setting polMethod. The
polarizing quantity will be selected by the function in one of the following three ways:

1. When polMethod = Voltage, UPol will be used as polarizing quantity.

2. When polMethod = Current, IPol will be used as polarizing quantity.
3. WhenpolMethod = Dual, UPol + IPol · ZNPol will be used as polarizing quantity.

The operating and polarizing quantity are then used inside the directional element, as shown
in figure 92, in order to determine the direction of the earth fault.

Operating area

STRV
0.6 * IN>DIR
Characteristic for reverse
release of measuring steps
-RCA -85 deg
Characteristic
for STRV 40% of
IN>DIR RCA +85 deg

RCA
65° Upol = -3U 0

-RCA +85 deg

RCA -85 deg

Characteristic for forward
release of measuring steps
IN>DIR

STFW

I op = 3I0

Operating area
Characteristic
for STFW IEC11000243-1-en.ai
IEC11000243 V1 EN-US

Figure 92: Operating characteristic for earth-fault directional element using the zero
sequence components
Two relevant setting parameters for directional supervision element are:

• Directional element will be internally enabled to operate as soon as Iop is bigger than 40%
of I>Dir and directional condition is fulfilled in set direction.
• Relay characteristic angle AngleRCA, which defines the position of forward and reverse
areas in the operating characteristic.

201
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Current protection

Directional comparison step, built-in within directional supervision element, will set EF4PTOC
function output binary signals:

1. STFW=1 when operating quantity magnitude Iop x cos(φ - AngleRCA) is bigger than
setting parameter I>Dir and directional supervision element detects fault in forward
direction.
2. STRV=1 when operating quantity magnitude Iop x cos(φ - AngleRCA) is bigger than 60% of
setting parameter I>Dir and directional supervision element detects fault in reverse
direction.

These signals shall be used for communication based earth-fault teleprotection

communication schemes (permissive or blocking).

Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated directional
comparison step is shown in figure 93:

| IopDir |
a
a>b STRV
b AND
REVERSE_Int
0.6
X
a
a>b
AND STFW
I>Dir b
FORWARD_Int

X
0.4

FWD
AND FORWARD_Int
AngleRCA
polMethod=Voltage
OR
UPolMin
Characteristic
Directional

polMethod=Dual UPol IPolMin

T
I3PDIR
polMethod=Current 0.0 F
OR
UTotPol
IPol AND REVERSE_Int
T RVS
0.0 F

UIPol STAGE1_DIR_Int
RNPol Complex X T STAGE2_DIR_Int
XNPol Number 0.0 F STAGE3_DIR_Int OR
STAGE4_DIR_Int
BLOCK AND

IEC07000067-5-en.vsd

IEC07000067 V5 EN-US

Figure 93: Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated directional
comparison step

8.4.7.9 Second harmonic blocking element M13941-200 v6

A harmonic restrain of four step residual overcurrent protection function EF4PTOC can be
chosen for each step by a parameter setting HarmRestrainx. If the ratio of the 2nd harmonic
component in relation to the fundamental frequency component in the residual current
exceeds the preset level (defined by parameter 2ndHarmStab) then ST2NDHRM function

202
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

output signal is set to logical value one and harmonic restraining feature to the function block
will be applicable.

Blocking from 2nd harmonic element activates if all three criteria are satisfied:

1. Current fundamental frequency component > IMinOpHarmBlk

2. Current second harmonic component > IMinOpHarmBlk
3. Ratio of the 2nd harmoinc component in relation to the fundamental frequency
component in the residual current exceeds the preset level defined parameter
2ndHarmStab setting

If all the above three conditions are fulfilled then ST2NDHRM function output signal is set to
logical value one and harmonic restraining feature to the function block is applicable.

In addition to the basic functionality explained above the 2nd harmonic blocking can be set in
such way to seal-in until residual current disappears. This feature might be required to
stabilize EF4PTOC during switching of parallel transformers in the station. In case of parallel
transformers there is a risk of sympathetic inrush current. If one of the transformers is in
operation, and the parallel transformer is switched in, the asymmetric inrush current of the
switched in transformer will cause partial saturation of the transformer already in service. This
is called transferred saturation. The 2nd harmonic of the inrush currents of the two
transformers is in phase opposition. The summation of the two currents thus gives a small 2nd
harmonic current. The residual fundamental current is however significant. The inrush current
of the transformer in service before the parallel transformer energizing, is a little delayed
compared to the first transformer. Therefore we have high 2nd harmonic current component
initially. After a short period this current is however small and the normal 2nd harmonic
blocking resets. If the BlkParTransf function is activated the 2nd harmonic restrain signal is
latched as long as the residual current measured by the relay is larger than a selected step
current level by using setting UseStartValue.

This feature has been called Block for Parallel Transformers. This 2nd harmonic seal-in feature
is activated when all of the following three conditions are simultaneously fulfilled:

1. Feature is enabled by entering setting parameter BlkParTransf = On.

2. Basic 2nd harmonic restraint feature has been active for at least 70ms.
3. Residual current magnitude is higher than the set start value for one of the four residual
overcurrent stages. By a parameter setting UseStartValue it is possible to select which
one of the four start values that will be used (IN1> or IN2> or IN3> or IN4>).

Once Block for Parallel Transformers is activated the basic 2nd harmonic blocking signal is
sealed-in until the residual current magnitude falls below a value defined by parameter setting
UseStartValue (see condition 3 above).

Simplified logic diagram for 2nd harmonic blocking feature is shown in figure 94.

203
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Current protection

BLOCK

a
a>b
0.07*IBase b

a
a>b
b
Extract second AND
IOP
harmonic current a
a>b
component b

Extract
fundamental
current component
X
2ndHarmStab

q-1

t=70ms OR
t AND OR 2ndH_BLOCK_Int

BlkParTransf=On

a
a>b
b
UseStartValue
IN1>
IN2>
IN3>
IN4>

q-1 = unit delay

IEC13000015-3-en.vsd

IEC13000015 V3 EN-US

Figure 94: Simplified logic diagram for 2nd harmonic blocking feature and Block for Parallel
Transformers feature

8.4.7.10 Switch on to fault feature M13941-211 v4

Integrated in the four step residual overcurrent protection are Switch on to fault logic (SOTF)
and Under-Time logic. The setting parameter SOTF is set to activate either SOTF or Under-
Time logic or both. When the circuit breaker is closing there is a risk to close it onto a
permanent fault, for example during an autoreclosing sequence. The SOTF logic will enable
fast fault clearance during such situations. The time during which SOTF and Under-Time logics
will be active after activation is defined by the setting parameter t4U.

The SOTF logic uses the start signal from step 2 or step 3 for its operation, selected by setting
parameter StepForSOTF. The SOTF logic can be activated either from change in circuit breaker
position or from circuit breaker close command pulse. The setting parameter ActivationSOTF
can be set for activation of CB position open change, CB position closed change or CB close
command. In case of a residual current start from step 2 or 3 (dependent on setting) the
function will give a trip after a set delay tSOTF. This delay is normally set to a short time
(default 200 ms).

The Under-Time logic always uses the start signal from the step 4. The Under-Time logic will
normally be set to operate for a lower current level than the SOTF function. The Under-Time
logic can also be blocked by the 2nd harmonic restraint feature. This enables high sensitivity
even if power transformer inrush currents can occur at breaker closing. This logic is typically

204
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

used to detect asymmetry of CB poles immediately after switching of the circuit breaker. The
Under-Time logic is activated either from change in circuit breaker position or from circuit
breaker close and open command pulses. This selection is done by setting parameter
ActUnderTime. In case of a start from step 4 this logic will give a trip after a set delay
tUnderTime. This delay is normally set to a relatively short time (default 300 ms). Practically
the Under-Time logic acts as circuit breaker pole-discordance protection, but it is only active
immediately after breaker switching. The Under-Time logic can only be used in solidly or low
impedance grounded systems.

SOTF

200 ms
Open
t
t4U
200 ms
Closed
t ActivationSOTF

tSOTF
Close command AND
AND t
STIN2

StepForSOTF
STIN3

SOTF
BLOCK
OFF
SOTF
UNDERTIME TRIP
UnderTime

tUnderTime
SOTF or
2nd Harmonic AND
HarmResSOFT t UnderTime

OR

Open
Close OR

t4U

Close command ActUnderTime

AND

STIN4

IEC06000643-6-en.vsdx

IEC06000643 V6 EN-US

Figure 95: Simplified logic diagram for SOTF and Under-Time features
M13941-3 v4
EF4PTOC Logic Diagram Simplified logic diagram for the complete EF4PTOC function is
shown in figure 96:

205
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Current protection

signal to communication scheme

Directional Check
Element

4 step over current

INPol Direction
operatingCurrent element
Element
3U0 One element for each
earthFaultDirection step
3I0
angleValid
I3PDIR
DirMode
enableDir

harmRestrBlock
3I0 Harmonic
Restraint 1
Element TRIP


start step 2, 3 and 4

Blocking at parallel
transformers
SwitchOnToFault
TRSOTF

CB
DirMode pos
or cmd
enableDir
Mode
Selection enableStep1-4

DirectionalMode1-4

IEC06000376-4-en.vsdx
IEC06000376 V4 EN-US

Figure 96: Functional overview of EF4PTOC

8.4.8 Technical data IP11455-1 v1

M15223-1 v18

Table 115: EF4PTOC technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate current, step 1-4 (1-2500)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio > 95% at (10-2500)% of -

IBase
Relay characteristic angle (-180 to 180) degrees ±2.0 degrees
(RCA)
Operate current for directional release (1–100)% of IBase For RCA ±60 degrees:
±2.5% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
±2.5% of I at I > Ir

Independent time delay at 0 to 2 x Iset, (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is

step 1-4 greater

Minimum operate time for inverse curves, (0.000 - 60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is
step 1-4 greater
Inverse time characteristics, see Table 16 curve types See Table 818, Table 820 and
818, Table 820 and Table 822 Table 822
Second harmonic blocking (5–100)% of fundamental ±2.0% of Ir

Minimum polarizing voltage (1–100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

Minimum polarizing current (2-100)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir

Real part of source Z used for current (0.50-1000.00) W/phase -

polarization
Table continues on next page

206
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Imaginary part of source Z used for (0.50–3000.00) W/phase -
current polarization
*Operate time, start non-directional at 0 Min. = 15 ms -
to 2 x Iset Max. = 30 ms

*Reset time, start non-directional at 2 x Min. = 15 ms -

Iset to 0 Max. = 30 ms

*Operate time, start non-directional at 0 Min. = 5 ms -

to 10 x Iset Max. = 20 ms

*Reset time, start non-directional at 10 x Min. = 20 ms -

Iset to 0 Max. = 35 ms

Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

*Note: Operate time and reset time are only valid if harmonic blocking is turned off for a step.

8.5 Four step directional negative phase sequence

overcurrent protection NS4PTOC GUID-E8CF8AA2-AF54-4FD1-A379-3E55DCA2FA3A v1

8.5.1 Identification
GUID-E1720ADA-7F80-4F2C-82A1-EF2C9EF6A4B4 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Four step negative sequence NS4PTOC 46I2
overcurrent protection I2
4
alt
4
IEC10000053 V1 EN-US

8.5.2 Functionality GUID-485E9D36-0032-4559-9204-101539A32F47 v5

Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection (NS4PTOC) has an inverse or definite time
delay independent for each step separately.

All IEC and ANSI time delayed characteristics are available together with an optional user
defined characteristic.

The directional function is voltage polarized.

NS4PTOC can be set directional or non-directional independently for each of the steps.

NS4PTOC can be used as main protection for unsymmetrical fault; phase-phase short circuits,
phase-phase-earth short circuits and single phase earth faults.

NS4PTOC can also be used to provide a system backup for example, in the case of the primary
protection being out of service due to communication or voltage transformer circuit failure.

Directional operation can be combined together with corresponding communication logic in

permissive or blocking teleprotection scheme. The same logic as for directional zero sequence
current can be used. Current reversal and weak-end infeed functionality are available.

207
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Current protection

8.5.3 Function block GUID-8EDB8B12-0D86-4F6B-A1FB-F5D0C72AA545 v2

NS4PTOC
I3P* TRIP
I3PDIR* TR1
U3P* TR2
BLOCK TR3
BLKTR TR4
BLKST1 START
BLKST2 ST1
BLKST3 ST2
BLKST4 ST3
ENMULT1 ST4
ENMULT2 STFW
ENMULT3 STRV
ENMULT4

IEC10000054-2-en.vsd
IEC10000054 V2 EN-US

Figure 97: NS4PTOC function block

8.5.4 Signals
PID-6530-INPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 116: NS4PTOC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group connection for operate current
SIGNAL
I3PDIR GROUP - Group connection for directional current
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group connection for polarizing voltage
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 General block
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip
BLKST1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1 (Start and trip)
BLKST2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 2 (Start and trip)
BLKST3 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 3 (Start and trip)
BLKST4 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 4 (Start and trip)
ENMULT1 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for step1
ENMULT2 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for step2
ENMULT3 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for step3
ENMULT4 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for step4

PID-6530-OUTPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 117: NS4PTOC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General trip signal
TR1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 1
TR2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 2
TR3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 3
TR4 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 4
START BOOLEAN General start signal
ST1 BOOLEAN Start signal step 1
Table continues on next page

208
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

Name Type Description

ST2 BOOLEAN Start signal step 2
ST3 BOOLEAN Start signal step 3
ST4 BOOLEAN Start signal step 4
STFW BOOLEAN Forward directional start signal
STRV BOOLEAN Reverse directional start signal

8.5.5 Settings
PID-6530-SETTINGS v3

Table 118: NS4PTOC Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
EnDir Disable - - Enable Enabling the Directional calculation
Enable
AngleRCA -180 - 180 Deg 1 65 Relay characteristic angle (RCA)
UPolMin 1 - 100 %UB 1 5 Minimum voltage level for polarization
in % of UBase
I2>Dir 1 - 100 %IB 1 10 Residual current level in % of IBase for
Direction release
DirMode1 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 1 (off, nodir,
Non-directional forward, reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Characterist1 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Time delay characteristic for step 1
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
I2-1> 1 - 2500 %IB 1 100 Negative sequence current op level for
step 1 in % of IBase
t1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Def time delay or add time delay for
inverse char of step 1
k1 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the step 1 selected
time characteristic
IMin1 1.00 - 10000.00 %IB 1.00 100.00 Minimum current for step 1
t1Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse
time characteristic step 1
I1Mult 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for scaling the current
setting value for step 1
Table continues on next page

209
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

DirMode2 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 2 (off, nodir,
Non-directional forward, reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Characterist2 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Time delay characteristic for step 2
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
I2-2> 1 - 2500 %IB 1 50 Negative sequence current op level for
step 2 in % of IBase
t2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.400 Def time delay or add time delay for
inverse char of step 2
k2 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the step 2 selected
time characteristic
IMin2 1.00 - 10000.00 %IB 1.00 50 Minimum current for step 2
t2Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse
time characteristic step 2
I2Mult 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for scaling the current
setting value for step 2
DirMode3 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 3 (off, nodir,
Non-directional forward, reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Characterist3 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Time delay characteristic for step 3
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
I2-3> 1 - 2500 %IB 1 33 Negative sequence current op level for
step 3 in % of IBase
t3 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.800 Def time delay or add time delay for
inverse char of step 3
Table continues on next page

210
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

k3 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the step 3 selected
time characteristic
IMin3 1.00 - 10000.00 %IB 1.00 33 Minimum current for step 3
t3Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse
time characteristic step 3
I3Mult 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for scaling the current
setting value for step 3
DirMode4 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 4 (off, nodir,
Non-directional forward, reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Characterist4 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Time delay characteristic for step 4
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
I2-4> 1 - 2500 %IB 1 17 Negative sequence current op level for
step 4 in % of IBase
t4 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.200 Def time delay or add time delay for
inverse char of step 4
k4 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the step 4 selected
time characteristic
IMin4 1.00 - 10000.00 %IB 1.00 17 Minimum current for step 4
t4Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse
time characteristic step 4
I4Mult 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for scaling the current
setting value for step 4

Table 119: NS4PTOC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ResetTypeCrv1 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Reset curve type for step1
IEC Reset (Instantaneous / IEC / ANSI)
ANSI reset
tReset1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset time delay for step 1
tPCrv1 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Param P for customized inverse trip
time curve for step 1
tACrv1 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param A for customized inverse trip
time curve for step 1
tBCrv1 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Param B for customized inverse trip
time curve for step 1
Table continues on next page

211
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tCCrv1 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param C for customized inverse trip
time curve for step 1
tPRCrv1 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Param PR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 1
tTRCrv1 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param TR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step
tCRCrv1 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param CR for customized inverse
reset time curve for step 1
ResetTypeCrv2 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Reset curve type for step2
IEC Reset (Instantaneous / IEC / ANSI)
ANSI reset
tReset2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset time delay for step 2
tPCrv2 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Param P for customized inverse trip
time curve for step 2
tACrv2 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param A for customized inverse trip
time curve for step 2
tBCrv2 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Param B for customized inverse trip
time curve for step 2
tCCrv2 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param C for customized inverse trip
time curve for step 2
tPRCrv2 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Param PR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 2
tTRCrv2 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param TR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 2
tCRCrv2 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param C for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 2
ResetTypeCrv3 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Reset curve type for step3
IEC Reset (Instantaneous / IEC / ANSI)
ANSI reset
tReset3 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset time delay for step 3
tPCrv3 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Param P for customized inverse trip
time curve for step 3
tACrv3 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param A for customized inverse trip
time curve for step 3
tBCrv3 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Param B for customized inverse trip
time curve for step 3
tCCrv3 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param C for customized inverse trip
time curve for step 3
tPRCrv3 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Param PR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 3
tTRCrv3 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param TR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 3
tCRCrv3 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param CR for customized inverse
reset time curve for step 3
ResetTypeCrv4 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Reset curve type for step4
IEC Reset (Instantaneous / IEC / ANSI)
ANSI reset
tReset4 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset time delay for step 4
tPCrv4 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Param P for customized inverse trip
time curve for step 4
tACrv4 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param A for customized inverse trip
time curve for step 4
Table continues on next page

212
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tBCrv4 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Param B for customized inverse trip
time curve for step 4
tCCrv4 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param C for customized inverse trip
time curve for step 4
tPRCrv4 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Param PR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 4
tTRCrv4 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param TR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 4
tCRCrv4 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param CR for customized inverse
reset time curve for step 4

Table 120: NS4PTOC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

8.5.6 Monitored data

PID-6530-MONITOREDDATA v3

Table 121: NS4PTOC Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IOp REAL - A Operating current level
UPol REAL - kV Polarizing voltage level
UPOLIANG REAL - deg Polarizing angle between voltage and
current

8.5.7 Operation principle GUID-8923EC0B-A5BA-431B-9699-EB67E2637560 v3

Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC function has the following
three “Analog Inputs” on its function block in the configuration tool:

1. I3P, input used for “Operating Quantity”.

2. U3P, input used for “Polarizing Quantity”.
3. I3PDIR, input used for "Directional finding"

These inputs are connected from the corresponding pre-processing function blocks in the
Configuration Tool within PCM600.

8.5.7.1 Operating quantity within the function GUID-8F0A5BDE-AC98-4188-9085-42A8DF00C476 v3

Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC function always uses negative
sequence current (I2) for its operating quantity. The negative sequence current is calculated
from three-phase current input within the IED. The pre-processing block calculates I2 from the
first three inputs into the pre-processing block by using the following formula:

1
I2 =
3
(
× IL1 + a × IL 2 + a × IL 3
2
)
EQUATION2266 V2 EN-US (Equation 28)

213
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Current protection

where:
IL1, IL2 and IL3 are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase currents.
a is so called operator which gives a phase shift of 120 deg, that is, a = 1∠120
deg

a2 similarly gives a phase shift of 240 deg, that is, a2 = 1∠240 deg

The phasor magnitude is used within the NS4PTOC protection to compare it with the set
operation current value of the four steps (I1>, I2>, I3> or I4>). If the negative sequence current
is larger than the set operation current and the step is used in non-directional mode a signal
from the comparator for this step is set to true. This signal, without delay, activates the
output signal STx (x=1 - 4) for this step and a common START signal.

8.5.7.2 Internal polarizing facility of the function GUID-B00FE98B-F269-4F1B-AC03-68250798851B v3

A polarizing quantity is used within the protection to determine the direction to the fault
(Forward/Reverse).

Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC function uses the voltage
polarizing method.

NS4PTOC uses the negative sequence voltage -U2 as polarizing quantity U3P. This voltage is
calculated from three phase voltage input within the IED. The pre-processing block calculates -
U2 from the first three inputs into the pre-processing block by using the following formula:

1
UPol = -U 2 = - × (UL1 + a 2 × UL 2 + a × UL3 )
3
EQUATION2267 V2 EN-US

where:
UL1, UL2 and UL3 are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase voltages.

To use this all three phase-to-earth voltages must be connected to three IED VT
inputs.

This phasor is used together with the phasor of the operating current, in order to determine
the direction to the fault (Forward/Reverse).To enable voltage polarizing the magnitude of
polarizing voltage must be bigger than a minimum level defined by setting UpolMin.

Note that –U2 is used to determine the location of the fault. This ensures the required
inversion of the polarizing voltage within the function.

8.5.7.3 External polarizing for negative sequence function GUID-21930E81-1B40-4BA4-B1D8-3B365327AEF6 v1

The individual steps within the protection can be set as non-directional. When this setting is
selected it is then possible via function binary input BLKSTx (where x indicates the relevant
step within the protection) to provide external directional control (that is, torque control) by
for example using one of the following functions if available in the IED:

214
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

• Distance protection directional function

• Negative sequence polarized general current and voltage multi purpose protection
function

8.5.7.4 Internal negative sequence protection structure GUID-A6B9B3F1-A1FE-4653-A8AF-61FCCF19CE95 v1

The protection is internally divided into the following parts:

• Four negative sequence overcurrent steps

• Directional supervision element for negative sequence overcurrent steps with integrated
directional comparison step for communication based negative sequence protection
schemes (permissive or blocking)

Each part is described separately in the following sections.

8.5.7.5 Four negative sequence overcurrent stages GUID-D8ACB136-2BA6-4ADA-A096-5C38BD12DB72 v1

Each overcurrent stage uses Operating Quantity I2 (negative sequence current) as measuring
quantity. Every of the four overcurrent stage has the following built-in facilities:

• Operating mode (Off/ Non-directional /Forward / Reverse). By this parameter setting the
operating mode of the stage is selected. Note that the directional decision (Forward/
Reverse) is not made within the overcurrent stage itself. The direction of the fault is
determined in common “Directional Supervision Element” described in the next
paragraph.
• Negative sequence current pickup value.
• Type of operating characteristic (Inverse or Definite Time). By this parameter setting it is
possible to select Inverse or definite time delay for negative sequence overcurrent
function. Most of the standard IEC and ANSI inverse characteristics are available. For the
complete list of available inverse curves, refer to Chapter ""
• Type of reset characteristic (Instantaneous / IEC Reset /ANSI reset).By this parameter
setting it is possible to select the reset characteristic of the stage. For the complete list of
available reset curves, refer to Chapter ""
• Time delay related settings. By these parameter settings the properties like definite time
delay, minimum operating time for inverse curves, reset time delay and parameters to
define user programmable inverse curve are defined.
• Multiplier for scaling of the set negative sequence current pickup value by external binary
signal. By this parameter setting it is possible to increase negative sequence current
pickup value when function binary input ENMULTx has logical value 1.

Simplified logic diagram for one negative sequence overcurrent stage is shown in the
following figure:

215
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Current protection

BLKTR

Characteristx=DefTime AND
TRx
|IOP| AND
tx
a OR
a>b
ENMULTx b

STx
IxMult AND
X T
Ix> F
txmin
BLKSTx AND
BLOCK
Inverse

Characteristx=Inverse

DirModex=Off OR STAGEx_DIR_Int
DirModex=Non-directional
DirModex=Forward
AND OR
FORWARD_Int
DirModex=Reverse

AND
REVERSE_Int

IEC09000683.vsd
IEC09000683 V3 EN-US

Figure 98: Simplified logic diagram for negative sequence overcurrent stage x , where x=1, 2, 3 or 4
NS4PTOC can be completely blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The start signals from
NS4PTOC for each stage can be blocked from the binary input BLKSTx. The trip signals from
NS4PTOC can be blocked from the binary input BLKTR.

8.5.7.6 Directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison

function GUID-F54E21F7-7C99-41D6-BEC6-2D6EC6D2B2A3 v3

At least one of the four negative sequence overcurrent steps must be set as
directional in order to enable execution of the directional supervision element
and the integrated directional comparison function.

The operating and polarizing quantity are then used inside the directional element, as shown
in figure 99, to determine the direction of the fault.

216
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

Reverse
Area

AngleRCA Upol=-U2

Forward
Area
Iop = I2

IEC10000031-1-en.vsd
IEC10000031 V1 EN-US

Figure 99: Operating characteristic for fault directional element

Two relevant setting parameters for directional supervision element are:

• Directional element is internally enable to operate as soon as Iop is bigger than 40% of
I>Dir and the directional condition is fulfilled in set direction.
• Relay characteristic angle AngleRCA which defines the position of forward and reverse
areas in the operating characteristic.

Directional comparison step, built-in within directional supervision element, set NS4PTOC
output binary signals:

1. STFW=1 when tip of I2 phasor (operating quantity magnitude) is in forward area, see fig
99 (Operating quantity magnitude is bigger than setting I>Dir)
2. STRV=1 when tip of I2 phasor (operating quantity magnitude) is in the reverse area, see fig
99. (Operating quantity magnitude is bigger than 60% of setting I>Dir)

These signals must be used for communication based fault teleprotection communication
schemes (permissive or blocking).

Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated directional
comparison step is shown in figure 100:

217
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Current protection

|Iop|
a a>
STRV
b b REVERSE_Int
AND
0.6
X
a a>
STFW
I>Dir b b FORWARD_Int
AND

X
0.4

FWD
AND FORWARD_Int
AngleRCA

C h a r a c e ri s ti c
D i r e c ti o n a l
UPolMin

IPolMin

t
Iop

UPol
AND REVERSE_Int
RVS

STAGE1_DIR_Int
STAGE2_DIR_Int
STAGE3_DIR_Int OR
STAGE4_DIR_Int
BLOCK AND

IEC07000067-4.vsd

IEC07000067-4 V2 EN-US

Figure 100: Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated directional
comparison step

8.5.8 Technical data GUID-10E9194D-3AE9-4D0F-867E-473E6F4BF443 v1

GUID-E83AD807-8FE0-4244-A50E-86B9AF92469E v5

Table 122: NS4PTOC technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate current, step 1 - 4 (1-2500)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir
±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio > 95% at (10-2500)% of IBase -

Independent time delay at 0 (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is
to 2 x Iset, step 1 - 4 greater

Minimum operate time for (0.000 - 60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is

inverse curves, step 1 - 4 greater
Inverse time characteristics, 16 curve types See table 818, table 820 and
see table 818, table 820 and table 822
table 822
Minimum operate current, (1.00 - 10000.00)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
step 1 - 4 ±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Relay characteristic angle (-180 to 180) degrees ±2.0 degrees

(RCA)
Table continues on next page

218
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate current for (1–100)% of IBase For RCA ±60 degrees:
directional release ±2.5% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
±2.5% of I at I > Ir

Minimum polarizing voltage (1–100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

Minimum polarizing current (2-100)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir

Real part of negative (0.50-1000.00) W/phase -

sequence source impedance
used for current polarization
Imaginary part of negative (0.50–3000.00) W/phase -
sequence source impedance
used for current polarization
Operate time, start non- Min. = 15 ms -
directional at 0 to 2 x Iset Max. = 30 ms

Reset time, start non- Min. = 15 ms -

directional at 2 to 0 x Iset Max. = 30 ms

Operate time, start non- Min. = 5 ms -

directional at 0 to 10 x Iset Max. = 20 ms

Reset time, start non- Min. = 20 ms -

directional at 10 to 0 x Iset Max. = 35 ms

Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

Transient overreach <10% at τ = 100 ms -

8.6 Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power

protection SDEPSDE SEMOD171436-1 v4

8.6.1 Identification
SEMOD172025-2 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Sensitive directional residual over SDEPSDE - 67N
current and power protection

8.6.2 Functionality SEMOD171959-4 v11

In networks with high impedance earthing, the phase-to-earth fault current is significantly
smaller than the short circuit currents. Another difficulty for earth fault protection is that the
magnitude of the phase-to-earth fault current is almost independent of the fault location in
the network.

Directional residual current can be used to detect and give selective trip of phase-to-earth
faults in high impedance earthed networks. The protection uses the residual current
component 3I0 · cos φ, where φ is the angle between the residual current and the residual
voltage (-3U0), compensated with a characteristic angle. Alternatively, the function can be set
to strict 3I0 level with a check of angle φ.

219
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Current protection

Directional residual power can also be used to detect and give selective trip of phase-to-earth
faults in high impedance earthed networks. The protection uses the residual power
component 3I0 · 3U0 · cos φ, where φ is the angle between the residual current and the
reference residual voltage, compensated with a characteristic angle.

A normal non-directional residual current function can also be used with definite or inverse
time delay.

A backup neutral point voltage function is also available for non-directional residual
overvoltage protection.

In an isolated network, that is, the network is only coupled to earth via the capacitances
between the phase conductors and earth, the residual current always has -90º phase shift
compared to the residual voltage (3U0). The characteristic angle is chosen to -90º in such a
network.

In resistance earthed networks or in Petersen coil earthed, with a parallel resistor, the active
residual current component (in phase with the residual voltage) should be used for the earth
fault detection. In such networks, the characteristic angle is chosen to 0º.

As the amplitude of the residual current is independent of the fault location, the selectivity of
the earth fault protection is achieved by time selectivity.

When should the sensitive directional residual overcurrent protection be used and when
should the sensitive directional residual power protection be used? Consider the following:

• Sensitive directional residual overcurrent protection gives possibility for better sensitivity.
The setting possibilities of this function are down to 0.25 % of IBase, 1 A or 5 A. This
sensitivity is in most cases sufficient in high impedance network applications, if the
measuring CT ratio is not too high.
• Sensitive directional residual power protection gives possibility to use inverse time
characteristics. This is applicable in large high impedance earthed networks, with large
capacitive earth fault currents. In such networks, the active fault current would be small
and by using sensitive directional residual power protection, the operating quantity is
elevated. Therefore, better possibility to detect earth faults. In addition, in low impedance
earthed networks, the inverse time characteristic gives better time-selectivity in case of
high zero-resistive fault currents.

Phase
currents
IN

Phase-
ground
voltages
UN

IEC13000013-1-en.vsd
IEC13000013 V1 EN-US

Figure 101: Connection of SDEPSDE to analog preprocessing function block

220
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

Overcurrent functionality uses true 3I0, i.e. sum of GRPxL1, GRPxL2 and GRPxL3. For 3I0 to be
calculated, connection is needed to all three phase inputs.

Directional and power functionality uses IN and UN. If a connection is made to GRPxN this
signal is used, else if connection is made to all inputs GRPxL1, GRPxL2 and GRPxL3 the
internally calculated sum of these inputs (3I0 and 3U0) will be used.

8.6.3 Function block SEMOD172780-4 v5

SDEPSDE
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TRDIRIN
BLOCK TRNDIN
BLKTR TRUN
BLKTRDIR START
BLKNDN STDIRIN
BLKUN STNDIN
STUN
STFW
STRV
STDIR
UNREL

IEC07000032-2-en.vsd
IEC07000032 V2 EN-US

Figure 102: SDEPSDE function block

8.6.4 Signals
PID-3892-INPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 123: SDEPSDE Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all the outputs of the function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Blocks the trip outputs of the function
BLKTRDIR BOOLEAN 0 Blocks the directional operate outputs of the function
BLKNDN BOOLEAN 0 Blocks the Non directional current residual outputs
BLKUN BOOLEAN 0 Blocks the Non directional voltage residual outputs

PID-3892-OUTPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 124: SDEPSDE Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General trip of the function
TRDIRIN BOOLEAN Trip of the directional residual over current function
TRNDIN BOOLEAN Trip of non directional residual over current
TRUN BOOLEAN Trip of non directional residual over voltage
START BOOLEAN General start of the function
STDIRIN BOOLEAN Start of the directional residual over current function
STNDIN BOOLEAN Start of non directional residual over current
STUN BOOLEAN Start of non directional residual over voltage
Table continues on next page

221
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Current protection

Name Type Description

STFW BOOLEAN Start of directional function for a fault in forward direction
STRV BOOLEAN Start of directional function for a fault in reverse direction
STDIR INTEGER Direction of fault. A general signal common to all three mode
of residual over current protection
UNREL BOOLEAN Residual voltage release of operation of all directional modes

8.6.5 Settings
PID-3892-SETTINGS v6

Table 125: SDEPSDE Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OpMode 3I0Cosfi - - 3I0Cosfi Selection of operation mode for
3I03U0Cosfi protection
3I0 and fi
DirMode Forward - - Forward Direction of operation forward or
Reverse reverse
RCADir -179 - 180 Deg 1 -90 Relay characteristic angle RCA, in deg
RCAComp -10.0 - 10.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Relay characteristic angle
compensation
ROADir 0 - 90 Deg 1 90 Relay open angle ROA used as release
in phase mode, in deg
INCosPhi> 0.25 - 200.00 %IB 0.01 1.00 Set level for 3I0cosFi, directional res
over current in % of IBase
SN> 0.25 - 200.00 %SB 0.01 10.00 Set level for 3I03U0cosFi, starting inv
time count in % of SBase
INDir> 0.25 - 200.00 %IB 0.01 5.00 Set level for directional residual over
current prot in % of IBase
tDef 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Definite time delay directional
residual overcurrent, in sec
SRef 0.03 - 200.00 %SB 0.01 10.00 Reference value of res power for
inverse time count in % of SBase
kSN 0.00 - 2.00 - 0.01 0.10 Time multiplier setting for directional
residual power mode
OpINNonDir> Off - - Off Operation of non-directional residual
On overcurrent protection
INNonDir> 1.00 - 400.00 %IB 0.01 10.00 Set level for non directional residual
over current in % of IBase
tINNonDir 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Time delay for non-directional residual
over current, in sec
Table continues on next page

222
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

TimeChar ANSI Ext. inv. - - IEC Norm. inv. Operation curve selection for IDMT
ANSI Very inv. operation
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
tMin 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.040 Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT
curves, in sec
kIN 0.05 - 2.00 - 0.01 1.00 IDMT time mult for non-dir res over
current protection
OpUN> Off - - Off Operation of non-directional residual
On overvoltage protection
UN> 1.00 - 200.00 %UB 0.01 20.00 Set level for non-directional residual
over voltage in % of UBase
tUN 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Time delay for non-directional residual
over voltage, in sec
INRel> 0.25 - 200.00 %IB 0.01 1.00 Residual release current for all
directional modes in % of IBase
UNRel> 1.00 - 300.00 %UB 0.01 3.00 Residual release voltage for all
direction modes in % of UBase

Table 126: SDEPSDE Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tReset 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.040 Time delay used for reset of definite
timers, in sec
tPCrv 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Setting P for customer programmable
curve
tACrv 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Setting A for customer programmable
curve
tBCrv 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Setting B for customer programmable
curve
tCCrv 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Setting C for customer programmable
curve
ResetTypeCrv Immediate - - IEC Reset Reset mode when current drops off.
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
tPRCrv 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Setting PR for customer
programmable curve
tTRCrv 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Setting TR for customer
programmable curve
tCRCrv 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Setting CR for customer
programmable curve

223
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Current protection

Table 127: SDEPSDE Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Global base selection for function
groups

Table 128: SDEPSDE Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
RotResU 0 deg - - 180 deg Setting for rotating polarizing
180 deg quantity if necessary

8.6.6 Monitored data

PID-3892-MONITOREDDATA v5

Table 129: SDEPSDE Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
INCOSPHI REAL - A Magnitude of residual current along
the polarizing quantity 3I0cos(Fi-RCA)
IN REAL - A Measured magnitude of the residual
current 3I0
UN REAL - kV Measured magnitude of the residual
voltage 3U0
SN REAL - MVA Measured magnitude of residual
power 3I03U0cos(Fi-RCA)
ANG FI-RCA REAL - deg Angle between 3U0 and 3I0 minus RCA
(Fi-RCA)

8.6.7 Operation principle

8.6.7.1 Function inputs SEMOD171963-4 v4

The function is using phasors of the residual current and voltage. Group signals I3P and U3P
containing phasors of residual current and voltage are taken from pre-processor blocks.

The sensitive directional earth fault protection has the following sub-functions included:

Directional residual current protection measuring 3I0·cos φ

SEMOD171963-8 v7
φ is defined as the angle between the residual current 3I0 and the reference voltage (|
φ=ang(3I0)-ang(Uref)|). The reference voltage (Uref) is the polarizing quantity which is used for
directionality and is defined as Uref = -3U0 e—jRCADir, that is -3U0 inversely rotated by the set
characteristic angle RCADir. RCADir is normally set equal to 0 in a high impedance earthed
network with a neutral point resistor as the active current component is appearing out on the
faulted feeder only. RCADir is set equal to -90° in an isolated network as all currents are mainly
capacitive. The function operates when 3I0·cos φ gets larger than the set value.

224
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

RCADir = 0o,ROADir = 90o

3I0

j = ang(3I0 ) - ang(3Uref )
-3U0 = Uref
3I0 × cosj

IEC06000648-4-en.vsd
IEC06000648 V4 EN-US

Figure 103: RCADir set to 0°

Uref
RCADir = −90 , ROADir = 90

3I0

3I0 ⋅ cos ϕ

ϕ = ang (3I0 ) − ang (Uref )

−3U0

IEC06000649_3_en.vsd
IEC06000649 V3 EN-US

Figure 104: RCADir set to -90°

For trip, the operating quantity 3I0 cos φ, the residual current 3I0, and the residual voltage 3U0
must be larger than the set levels : INCosPhi>, INRel> and UNRel>. Refer to the simplified
logical diagram in Figure 108.

Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTRDIR.

When the function picks up, binary output signals START and STDIRIN are activated. If the
output signals START and STDIRIN remain active for the set delay tDef the binary output
signals TRIP and TRDIRIN get activated. The trip from this sub-function has definite time delay.

ROADir is Relay Operating Angle. ROADir is identifying a window around the reference
direction in order to detect directionality. Figure 105 shows the restrictions made by the
ROADir.

225
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Current protection

RCADir = 0o

3I0
Operate area

j
-3U0 = Uref
3I0 × cos j

ROADir

IEC06000650_2_en.vsd
IEC06000650 V2 EN-US

Figure 105: Characteristic with ROADir restriction

The function indicates forward/reverse direction to the fault. Reverse direction is defined as
3I0·cos (φ + 180°) ≥ the set value.

It is also possible to tilt the characteristic to compensate for current transformer angle error
with a setting RCAComp as shown in the Figure 106:

226
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

RCADir = 0º

Operate area

-3U0 =Uref

Instrument
transformer
angle error 
RCAcomp
Characteristic after
angle compensation

3I0 (prim) 3I0 (to prot)

IEC06000651-3-en.vsd

IEC06000651 V3 EN-US

Figure 106: Explanation of RCAComp

Directional residual power protection measuring 3I0 · 3U0 · cos φ

SEMOD171963-32 v6
φ is defined as the angle between the residual current 3I0 and the reference voltage (Uref = -3U0
e-jRCA) compensated with the set characteristic angle RCADir (|φ=ang(3I0)—ang(Uref)|). The
function operates when 3I0 · 3U0 · cos φ gets larger than the set value SN>. Refer to the
simplified logical diagram in Figure 108.

For trip, the residual power 3I0 · 3U0 · cos φ, the residual current 3I0 and the release voltage
3U0, shall be larger than the set levels (SN>, INRel> and UNRel>).

Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTRDIR.

When the function picks up, binary output signals START and STDIRIN are activated. If the
output signals START and STDIRIN remain active for the set delay tDef or after the inverse time
delay (setting kSN) the binary output signals TRIP and TRDIRIN get activated.

The function shall indicate forward/reverse direction to the fault. Reverse direction is defined
as 3I0 · 3U0·cos (φ + 180°) ³ the set value.

This variant has the possibility of choice between definite time delay and inverse time delay.

The inverse time delay is defined as:

kSN × (3I0 × 3U 0 × cos j(reference))

t inv =
3I0 × 3U 0 × cos j(measured)
EQUATION1942 V2 EN-US (Equation 29)

227
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Current protection

Directional residual current protection measuring 3I0 and φ

SEMOD171963-48 v4
The function will operate if the residual current is larger than the set value and the angle |φ =
ang(3I0)-ang(Uref)| is within the sector RCADir ± ROADir

RCADir = 0º

ROADir = 80º

Operate area

3I0

-3U0

IEC06000652-3-en.vsd
IEC06000652 V3 EN-US

Figure 107: Example of characteristic

For trip, Residual current 3I0 shall be larger than both INRel> and INDir>, and residual voltage
3U0 shall be larger than the UNRel>. In addition, the angle φ shall be in the set area defined by
ROADir and RCADir. Refer to the simplified logical diagram in Figure 108.

Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTRDIR.

When the function picks up, binary output signals START and STDIRIN are activated. If the
output signals START and STDIRIN remain active for the set delay tDef the binary output
signals TRIP and TRDIRIN get activated.

The function indicates forward/reverse direction to the fault. Reverse direction is defined as φ
is within the angle sector: RCADir + 180° ± ROADir

This variant has definite time delay.

Directional functions SEMOD171963-60 v4

Non-directional earth fault current protection SEMOD171963-63 v6

This function will measure the residual current without checking the phase angle. The function
will be used to detect cross-country faults. This function can serve as alternative or backup to
distance protection with phase preference logic. To assure selectivity the distance protection
can block the non-directional earth fault current function via the input BLKNDN.

The non-directional function is using the calculated residual current, derived as sum of the
phase currents. This will give a better ability to detect cross-country faults with high residual
current, also when dedicated core balance CT for the sensitive earth fault protection will
saturate.

This variant has the possibility of choice between definite time delay and inverse time delay
(TimeChar parameter). The inverse time delay shall be according to IEC 60255-3.

228
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

For trip, the residual current 3I0 shall be larger than the set level (INNonDir>).

Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKNDN.

When the function picks up, binary output signal STNDIN is activated. If the output signal
STNDIN remains active for the set delay tINNonDir or after the inverse time delay the binary
output signals TRIP and TRNDIN get activated.

Residual overvoltage release and protection SEMOD171963-72 v7

All the directional functions shall be released when the residual voltage gets higher than a set
level UNRel>.

In addition, there is also a separate non-directional residual over voltage protection, with its
own definite time delay tUN and set level UN>.

For trip, the residual voltage 3U0 shall be larger than the set level (UN>).

Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKUN.

When the function picks up, binary output signal STUN is activated. If the output signal STUN
is active for the set delay tUNNonDir, the binary output signals TRIP and TRUN get activated. A
simplified logical diagram of the total function is shown in Figure 108.

OpINNonDir> = On
STNDIN
&
INNonDir>
t
TRNDIN
TimeChar IN
OpUN> = On
STUN
&
UN>
tUN TRUN
t

OpMode = 3I0Cosfi
INRel>

UNRel> & &

tDef
INCosPhi> t

OpMode = 3I0 and fi

& ³ STDIRIN
INDir> &
1

tDef ³ TRDIRIN
t 1
OpMode = 3I03U0Cosfi
& &
SN>
t
³ S
1 N
STFW
RCADir Direction &
Detection
RCAComp Logic STRV
&
ROADir

DirMode = Forward

DirMode = Reverse
IEC06000653.vsd

IEC06000653 V4 EN-US

Figure 108: Simplified logical diagram of the sensitive earth fault current protection

229
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Current protection

8.6.8 Technical data SEMOD173352-1 v1

SEMOD173350-2 v14

Table 130: SDEPSDE technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate level for 3I0·cosj (0.25-200.00)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir
directional residual ±1.0% of I at I > Ir
overcurrent
Operate level for ·3I0·3U0 (0.25-200.00)% of SBase ±1.0% of Sr at S £ Sr
cosj directional residual ±1.0% of S at S > Sr
power

Operate level for 3I0 and j (0.25-200.00)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at £ Ir

residual overcurrent ±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Operate level for non- (1.00-400.00)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir

directional overcurrent ±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Operate level for non- (1.00-200.00)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U £ Ur

directional residual ±0.5% of U at U > Ur
overvoltage
Residual release current for (0.25-200.00)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir
all directional modes ±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Residual release voltage for (1.00-300.00)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U £ Ur

all directional modes ±0.5% of U at U > Ur

Operate time for non- Min. = 40 ms

directional residual
overcurrent at 0 to 2 x Iset Max. = 65 ms

Reset time for non- Min. = 40 ms

directional residual
overcurrent at 2 to 0 x Iset Max. = 65 ms

Operate time for Min. = 110 ms

directional residual
overcurrent at 0 to 2 x Iset Max. = 160 ms

Reset time for directional Min. = 20 ms

residual overcurrent at 2 to
0 x Iset Max. = 60 ms

Independent time delay for (0.000 – 60.000) s ±0.2% or ± 75 ms whichever is

non-directional residual greater
overvoltage at 0.8 to 1.2 x
Uset

Independent time delay for (0.000 – 60.000) s ±0.2% or ± 75 ms whichever is

non-directional residual greater
overcurrent at 0 to 2 x Iset

Independent time delay for (0.000 – 60.000) s ±0.2% or ± 170 ms whichever is

directional residual greater
overcurrent at 0 to 2 x Iset

Inverse characteristics, see 16 curve types See Table 824, Table 825 and Table
table 824, Table 825 and 826
Table 826
Relay characteristic angle (-179 to 180) degrees ±2.0 degrees
(RCADir)
Relay operate angle (0 to 90) degrees ±2.0 degrees
(ROADir)

230
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

8.7 Breaker failure protection CCRBRF IP14514-1 v6

8.7.1 Identification
M14878-1 v5

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Breaker failure protection, 3-phase CCRBRF 50BF
activation and output
3I>BF

SYMBOL-U V1 EN-US

8.7.2 Functionality M11550-6 v16

Breaker failure protection (CCRBRF) ensures a fast backup tripping of the surrounding
breakers in case the own breaker fails to open. CCRBRF can be current-based, contact-based
or an adaptive combination of these two conditions.

A current check with extremely short reset time is used as check criterion to achieve high
security against inadvertent operation.

Contact check criteria can be used where the fault current through the breaker is small.

CCRBRF can be single- or three-phase initiated to allow use with single phase tripping
applications. For the three-phase version of CCRBRF the current criteria can be set to operate
only if two out of four for example, two phases or one phase plus the residual current start.
This gives a higher security to the back-up trip command.

CCRBRF function can be programmed to give a single- or three-phase re-trip of its own
breaker to avoid unnecessary tripping of surrounding breakers at an incorrect initiation due to
mistakes during testing.

8.7.3 Function block M11944-3 v7

CCRBRF
I3P* TRBU
BLOCK TRBU2
START TRRET
STL1 TRRETL1
STL2 TRRETL2
STL3 TRRETL3
CBCLDL1 CBALARM
CBCLDL2
CBCLDL3
CBFLT

IEC06000188-2-en.vsd
IEC06000188 V2 EN-US

Figure 109: CCRBRF function block

231
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Current protection

8.7.4 Signals
PID-3562-INPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 131: CCRBRF Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
START BOOLEAN 0 Three phase start of breaker failure protection function
STL1 BOOLEAN 0 Start signal of phase L1
STL2 BOOLEAN 0 Start signal of phase L2
STL3 BOOLEAN 0 Start signal of phase L3
CBCLDL1 BOOLEAN 0 Circuit breaker closed in phase L1
CBCLDL2 BOOLEAN 0 Circuit breaker closed in phase L2
CBCLDL3 BOOLEAN 0 Circuit breaker closed in phase L3
CBFLT BOOLEAN 0 CB faulty, unable to trip. Back-up trip instantaneously

PID-3562-OUTPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 132: CCRBRF Output signals

Name Type Description
TRBU BOOLEAN Back-up trip by breaker failure protection function
TRBU2 BOOLEAN Second back-up trip by breaker failure protection function
TRRET BOOLEAN Retrip by breaker failure protection function
TRRETL1 BOOLEAN Retrip by breaker failure protection function phase L1
TRRETL2 BOOLEAN Retrip by breaker failure protection function phase L2
TRRETL3 BOOLEAN Retrip by breaker failure protection function phase L3
CBALARM BOOLEAN Alarm for faulty circuit breaker

8.7.5 Settings
PID-3562-SETTINGS v5

Table 133: CCRBRF Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
FunctionMode Current - - Current Detection for trip based on Current/
Contact Contact/Current&Contact
Current/Contact
BuTripMode 2 out of 4 - - 1 out of 3 Back-up trip modes: 2 out of 4 or 1 out
1 out of 3 of 3 or 1 out of 4
1 out of 4
RetripMode Retrip Off - - Retrip Off Oper mode of re-trip logic: OFF/CB
CB Pos Check Pos Check/No CB Pos Check
No CBPos Check
IP> 5 - 200 %IB 1 10 Operate phase current level in % of
IBase
Table continues on next page

232
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

IN> 2 - 200 %IB 1 10 Operate residual current level in % of
IBase
t1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of re-trip
t2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Time delay of back-up trip
t2MPh 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Time delay of back-up trip at multi-
phase start
tPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Trip pulse duration

Table 134: CCRBRF Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
I>BlkCont 5 - 200 %IB 1 20 I> in % of IBase block operation using
Function Mode Contact
t3 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.030 Additional time delay to t2 for a
second back-up trip
tCBAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Time delay for alarm when faulty
circuit breaker indicated

Table 135: CCRBRF Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

8.7.6 Monitored data

PID-3562-MONITOREDDATA v5

Table 136: CCRBRF Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IL1 REAL - A Measured current in phase L1
IL2 REAL - A Measured current in phase L2
IL3 REAL - A Measured current in phase L3
IN REAL - A Measured residual current

8.7.7 Operation principle M16914-3 v11

Breaker failure protection CCRBRF is initiated from the protection trip command, either from
protection functions within the IED or from external protection devices.

To this function the three-phase current input and/or change to: the breaker normally open
auxiliary contact (i.e. "52a" or "closed") shall be connected. On OHL feeders where single pole
auto-reclosing is used, auxiliary contact from each CB pole shall be connected separately

The input START signal (i.e. initiate signal) can be phase selective or common (for all three
phases). Phase selective start signals enable single pole retrip functionality. This means that a
second attempt to open the same breaker can be done phase-selective. The retrip attempt is
made after a set time delay t1. For transmission lines, single pole trip and auto-reclosing is
often used. The retrip function can be phase selective if it is initiated from the phase selective
line protection.

233
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Current protection

The re-trip function can be done with or without current check. With this current check, the re-
trip is only performed if thecurrent through the circuit breaker is larger than the operate
current level.

The re-trip function can be performed with or without CB position check according to table
137.

Table 137: Dependencies between parameters RetripMode and FunctionMode

RetripMode FunctionMode Description
Retrip Off N/A the re-trip function is not
activated
CB Pos Check Current re-trip is done if phase current is
larger than the operate level after
re-trip time has elapsed
Contact re-trip is done when auxiliary
contact position indicates that
breaker is still closed after re-trip
time has elapsed
Current&Contact both methods according to above
are used but taken into account
also I>BlkCont
No CBPos Check Current re-trip is done without check of
current level
Contact re-trip is done without check of
auxiliary contact position
Current&Contact re-trip is done without check of
current level or auxiliary contact
position

The start signal can be an internal or external protection trip signal. This signal will start the
back-up trip timer. The function detects the successful breaker opening, either by detection of
low current through RMS evaluation and a special adapted current algorithm or by open
contact indication. The special algorithm enables a very fast detection of successful breaker
opening, that is, fast resetting of the current measurement. If the current and/or contact
detection has not detected breaker opening before the back-up timer has run its time a back-
up trip is initiated.

Further the following possibilities are available:

•
• The minimum length of the retrip pulse, the backup trip pulse and the second backup trip
pulse are settable. This pulse duration is defined by a parameter setting tPulse. The retrip
pulse, the backup trip pulse and the second backup trip pulse will however sustain as long
as there is an indication of closed breaker.
• If the current detection is used it is possible to use three different options: 1 out of 3
where it is sufficient to detect failure to open (high current) in one pole, 1 out of 4 where it
is sufficient to detect failure to open (high current) in one pole or high residual current
and 2 out of 4 where at least two currents (phase current and/or residual current) shall be
high for breaker failure detection.
• The current detection level for the residual current can be set different from the setting of
phase current detection.
• It is possible to have different backup time delays for single-phase faults and for multi-
phase faults.
• It is possible to have this option activated for small load currents only.
• It is possible to have instantaneous back-up trip function if a signal is high if the circuit
breaker is incapable to clear faults, for example, at low gas pressure.

234
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

30 ms
START
STL1 OR BFP Started L1
150 ms
AND S
SR Q t
R
BLOCK
OR Time out L1
Reset L1 AND
Retrip Time Out L1
Backup Time Out L1

IEC09000976-3-en-us.vsd
IEC09000976 V3 EN-US

Figure 110: Simplified logic scheme of the CCRBRF starting logic

IP>
a
a>b
b

FunctionMode Current
OR AND Reset L1
OR

1 Contact Time out L1

Current and Contact OR
AND
Current High L1
IL1
BFP Started L1 AND CB Closed L1
OR

a AND AND
a>b OR AND
I>BlkCont b

CBCLDL1 Contact Closed L1

AND

IEC09000977-2-en.vsd

IEC09000977 V2 EN-US

Figure 111: Simplified logic scheme of the CCRBRF , CB position evaluation

t1 TRRETL3
BFP Started L1 From other
t Retrip Time Out L1
phases TRRETL2 OR
TRRET

tPulse
RetripMode No CBPos Check AND
OR TRRETL1
OR

1 30ms
OR

CB Pos Check
AND
CB Closed L1
CBFLT

IEC09000978-4-en.vsd
IEC09000978 V4 EN-US

Figure 112: Simplified logic scheme of the retrip logic function

235
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Current protection

BUTripMode
1 out of 3
2 out of 4
OR
1 1 out of 4 AND

Current high L1

BFP Started L1
AND
IN
a
a>b
IN> b

Contact Closed L1
OR

OR
Current High L2
From other AND Backup Time Out L1
Current High L3
phases
Current High L1
CBFLT
AND

t2
30ms Backup Trip L1
BFP Started L1 t AND
OR
t2MPh

AND t

AND
OR OR
tPulse
From other Backup Trip L2 OR TRBU
OR
phases Backup Trip L3
BFP Started L2 AND
From other
phases BFP Started L3 OR tPulse
t3
OR
TRBU2
S Q
SR
t
AND R

IEC09000979-5-en-us.vsd
IEC09000979 V5 EN-US

Figure 113: Simplified logic scheme of the back-up trip logic function

8.7.8 Technical data IP10269-1 v1

M12353-1 v13

Table 138: CCRBRF technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate phase current (5-200)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir
±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio, phase current > 95% -

Operate residual current (2-200)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir
±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio, residual current > 95% -

Phase current level for blocking of contact (5-200)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir
function ±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio > 95% -

Operate time for current detection 10 ms typically -
Reset time for current detection 15 ms maximum -
Time delay for re-trip at 0 to 2 x Iset (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is
greater
Time delay for back-up trip at 0 to 2 x Iset (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is
greater
Table continues on next page

236
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Time delay for back-up trip at multi-phase (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±20 ms whichever is
start at 0 to 2 x Iset greater

Additional time delay for a second back-up (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±20 ms whichever is
trip at 0 to 2 x Iset greater

Time delay for alarm for faulty circuit breaker (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is
greater

8.8 Stub protection STBPTOC IP14515-1 v3

8.8.1 Identification
M17108-1 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Stub protection STBPTOC 50STB

3I>STUB

SYMBOL-T V1 EN-US

8.8.2 Functionality M12902-3 v9

When a power line is taken out of service for maintenance and the line disconnector is opened
in multi-breaker arrangements the voltage transformers will mostly be outside on the
disconnected part. The primary line distance protection will thus not be able to operate and
must be blocked.

The stub protection STBPTOC covers the zone between the current transformers and the open
disconnector. The three-phase instantaneous overcurrent function is released from a normally
open, NO (b) auxiliary contact on the line disconnector.

8.8.3 Function block M12524-3 v5

STBPTOC
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
BLKTR
RELEASE

IEC05000678-2-en.vsd
IEC05000678 V2 EN-US

Figure 114: STBPTOC function block

8.8.4 Signals
PID-3462-INPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 139: STBPTOC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase currents
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip
RELEASE BOOLEAN 0 Release of stub protection

237
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Current protection

PID-3462-OUTPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 140: STBPTOC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General trip
START BOOLEAN General start

8.8.5 Settings
PID-3462-SETTINGS v5

Table 141: STBPTOC Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
ReleaseMode Release - - Release Release of stub protection
Continuous
I> 5 - 2500 %IB 1 200 Operate current level in % of IBase

Table 142: STBPTOC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tDelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay

Table 143: STBPTOC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

8.8.6 Monitored data

PID-3462-MONITOREDDATA v5

Table 144: STBPTOC Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IL1 REAL - A Current in phase L1
IL2 REAL - A Current in phase L2
IL3 REAL - A Current in phase L3

8.8.7 Operation principle M12905-3 v5

The sampled analog phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter (DFT) block.
From the fundamental frequency components of each phase current the RMS value of each
phase current is derived. These phase current values are fed to a comparator in the stub
protection function STBPTOC. In a comparator the RMS values are compared to the set
operating current value of the function I>.

If a phase current is larger than the set operating current the signal from the comparator for
this phase is activated. This signal will, in combination with the release signal from line
disconnection (RELEASE input), activate the timer for the TRIP signal. If the fault current

238
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

remains during the timer delay t, the TRIP output signal is activated. The function can be
blocked by activation of the BLOCK input.

STUB PROTECTION FUNCTION

BLOCK

TRIP
STIL1 AND

STIL2 OR

STIL3

RELEASE

en05000731.vsd
IEC05000731 V1 EN-US

Figure 115: Simplified logic diagram for Stub protection

8.8.8 Technical data

M12350-1 v11

Table 145: STBPTOC technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operating current (5-2500)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio > 95% at (50-2500)% of IBase -

Independent time delay at 0 to 2 x (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms
Iset whichever is greater

Operate time, start at 0 to 2 x Iset Min. = 10 ms -

Max. = 20 ms
Reset time, start at 2 to 0 x Iset Min. = 10 ms -
Max. = 20 ms
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

8.9 Pole discordance protection CCPDSC IP14516-1 v5

239
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Current protection

8.9.1 Identification
M14888-1 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Pole discordance protection CCPDSC 52PD

PD

SYMBOL-S V1 EN-US

8.9.2 Functionality M13269-3 v14

An open phase can cause negative and zero sequence currents which cause thermal stress on
rotating machines and can cause unwanted operation of zero sequence or negative sequence
current functions.

Normally the own breaker is tripped to correct such a situation. If the situation persists the
surrounding breakers should be tripped to clear the unsymmetrical load situation.

The Pole discordance protection function CCPDSC operates based on information from
auxiliary contacts of the circuit breaker for the three phases with additional criteria from
unsymmetrical phase currents when required.

8.9.3 Function block M17149-3 v6

CCPDSC
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
BLKDBYAR
CLOSECMD
OPENCMD
EXTPDIND
POLE1OPN
POLE1CL
POLE2OPN
POLE2CL
POLE3OPN
POLE3CL

IEC13000305-1-en.vsd
IEC13000305 V1 EN-US

Figure 116: CCPDSC function block

8.9.4 Signals
PID-3525-INPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 146: CCPDSC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase currents
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKDBYAR BOOLEAN 0 Block of function at CB single phase auto re-closing cycle
CLOSECMD BOOLEAN 0 Close order to CB
OPENCMD BOOLEAN 0 Open order to CB
EXTPDIND BOOLEAN 0 Pole discordance signal from CB logic
POLE1OPN BOOLEAN 1 Pole one opened indication from CB
Table continues on next page

240
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

Name Type Default Description

POLE1CL BOOLEAN 0 Pole one closed indication from CB
POLE2OPN BOOLEAN 1 Pole two opened indication from CB
POLE2CL BOOLEAN 0 Pole two closed indication from CB
POLE3OPN BOOLEAN 1 Pole three opened indication from CB
POLE3CL BOOLEAN 0 Pole three closed indication from CB

PID-3525-OUTPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 147: CCPDSC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip signal to CB
START BOOLEAN Trip condition TRUE, waiting for time delay

8.9.5 Settings
PID-3525-SETTINGS v6

Table 148: CCPDSC Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
tTrip 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.300 Time delay between trip condition and
trip signal
ContSel Off - - Off Contact function selection
PD signal from CB
Pole pos aux cont.
CurrSel Off - - Off Current function selection
CB oper monitor
Continuous
monitor
CurrUnsymLevel 0 - 100 % 1 80 Unsym magn of lowest phase current
compared to the highest.
CurrRelLevel 0 - 100 %IB 1 10 Current magnitude for release of the
function in % of IBase

Table 149: CCPDSC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

8.9.6 Monitored data

PID-3525-MONITOREDDATA v4

Table 150: CCPDSC Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IMin REAL - A Lowest phase current
IMax REAL - A Highest phase current

241
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Current protection

8.9.7 Operation principle

M13273-3 v6
The detection of pole discordance can be made in two different ways. If the contact based
function is used an external logic can be made by connecting the auxiliary contacts of the
circuit breaker so that a pole discordance is indicated, see figure 117.

circuit breaker

Pole discordance signal from circuit breaker

en05000287.vsd

IEC05000287 V2 EN-US

Figure 117: Pole discordance external detection logic

This binary signal is connected to a binary input of the IED. The appearance of this signal will
start a timer that will give a trip signal after the set time delay.

There is also a possibility to connect all phase selective auxiliary contacts (phase contact open
and phase contact closed) to binary inputs of the IED, see figure 118.

C.B.

poleOneClosed from C.B.

poleTwoClosed from C.B.

poleThreeClosed from C.B.

+
poleOneOpened from C.B.

poleTwoOpened from C.B.

poleThreeOpened from C.B.

en05000288.vsd
IEC05000288 V1 EN-US

Figure 118: Pole discordance signals for internal logic

In this case the logic is realized within the function. If the inputs are indicating pole
discordance the trip timer is started. This timer will give a trip signal after the set delay.

Pole discordance can also be detected by means of phase selective current measurement. The
sampled analog phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter (DFT) block. From
the fundamental frequency components of each phase current the RMS value of each phase
current is derived. The smallest and the largest phase current are derived. If the smallest phase
current is lower than the setting CurrUnsymLevel times the largest phase current the settable
trip timer (tTrip) is started. The tTrip timer gives a trip signal after the set delay. The TRIP
signal is a pulse 150 ms long. The current based pole discordance function can be set to be
active either continuously or only directly in connection to breaker open or close command.

242
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

The function also has a binary input that can be configured from the autoreclosing function, so
that the pole discordance function can be blocked during sequences with a single pole open if
single pole autoreclosing is used.
M13946-3 v7
The simplified block diagram of the current and contact based Pole discordance protection
function CCPDSC is shown in figure 119.

BLOCK
OR
BLKDBYAR

PolPosAuxCont

AND
POLE1OPN
POLE1CL
POLE2OPN
Discordance
POLE2CL
detection
POLE3OPN
POLE3CL t 150 ms
t TRIP
AND
OR

PD Signal from CB
AND
EXTPDIND

CLOSECMD t+200 ms
OR
OPENCMD

AND

Unsymmetry current
detection

en05000747.vsd
IEC05000747 V1 EN-US

Figure 119: Simplified block diagram of pole discordance function CCPDSC - contact and
current based
CCPDSC is blocked if:

• The IED is in TEST mode and CCPDSC has been blocked from the local HMI
• The input signal BLOCK is high
• The input signal BLKDBYAR is high

The BLOCK signal is a general purpose blocking signal of the pole discordance protection. It
can be connected to a binary input in the IED in order to receive a block command from
external devices or can be software connected to other internal functions in the IED itself in
order to receive a block command from internal functions. Through OR gate it can be
connected to both binary inputs and internal function outputs.

The BLKDBYAR signal blocks the pole discordance operation when a single phase
autoreclosing cycle is in progress. It can be connected to the output signal 1PT1 on
SMBRRECfunction block. If the autoreclosing function is an external device, then BLKDBYAR
has to be connected to a binary input in the IED and this binary input is connected to a
signalization “1phase autoreclosing in progress” from the external autoreclosing device.

If the pole discordance protection is enabled, then two different criteria can generate a trip
signal TRIP:

• Pole discordance signaling from the circuit breaker.

• Unsymmetrical current detection.

243
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Current protection

8.9.7.1 Pole discordance signaling from circuit breaker M13946-18 v4

If one or two poles of the circuit breaker have failed to open or to close the pole discordance
status, then the function input EXTPDIND is activated from the pole discordance signal
derived from the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts (one NO contact for each phase connected
in parallel, and in series with one NC contact for each phase connected in parallel) and, after a
settable time interval tTrip (0-60 s), a 150 ms trip pulse command TRIP is generated by the
Polediscordance function.

8.9.7.2 Unsymmetrical current detection M13946-21 v4

Unsymmetrical current indicated if:

• any phase current is lower than CurrUnsymLevel of the highest current in the three
phases.
• the highest phase current is greater than CurrRelLevel of IBase.

If these conditions are true, an unsymmetrical condition is detected and the internal signal
INPS is turned high. This detection is enabled to generate a trip after a set time delay tTrip if
the detection occurs in the next 200 ms after the circuit breaker has received a command to
open trip or close and if the unbalance persists. The 200 ms limitation is for avoiding
unwanted operation during unsymmetrical load conditions.

The pole discordance protection is informed that a trip or close command has been given to
the circuit breaker through the inputs CLOSECMD (for closing command information) and
OPENCMD (for opening command information). These inputs can be connected to terminal
binary inputs if the information are generated from the field (that is from auxiliary contacts of
the close and open push buttons) or may be software connected to the outputs of other
integrated functions (that is close command from a control function or a general trip from
integrated protections).

8.9.8 Technical data

M13279-1 v9

Table 151: CCPDSC technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate current (0–100)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir

Independent time delay (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ± 25 ms whichever is greater

between trip condition and
trip signal

8.10 Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP SEMOD156693-1 v4

8.10.1 Identification
SEMOD158941-2 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP 37
P<
2
SYMBOL-LL V2 EN-US

244
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

8.10.2 Functionality SEMOD155787-4 v6

The task of a generator in a power plant is to convert mechanical energy available as a torque
on a rotating shaft to electric energy.

Sometimes, the mechanical power from a prime mover may decrease so much that it does not
cover bearing losses and ventilation losses. Then, the synchronous generator becomes a
synchronous motor and starts to take electric power from the rest of the power system. This
operating state, where individual synchronous machines operate as motors, implies no risk for
the machine itself. If the generator under consideration is very large and if it consumes lots of
electric power, it may be desirable to disconnect it to ease the task for the rest of the power
system.

Often, the motoring condition may imply that the turbine is in a very dangerous state. The task
of the low forward power protection is to protect the turbine and not to protect the generator
itself.

Figure 120 illustrates the low forward power and reverse power protection with underpower
and overpower functions respectively. The underpower IED gives a higher margin and should
provide better dependability. On the other hand, the risk for unwanted operation immediately
after synchronization may be higher. One should set the underpower IED to trip if the active
power from the generator is less than about 2%. One should set the overpower IED to trip if
the power flow from the network to the generator is higher than 1% depending on the type of
turbine.

When IED with a metering class input CTs is used pickup can be set to more sensitive value
(e.g.0,5% or even to 0,2%).

Underpower IED Overpower IED

Operate
Q Q
Operate
Line Line

Margin Margin
P P

Operating point Operating point

without without
turbine torque turbine torque

IEC06000315-2-en.vsd
IEC06000315 V2 EN-US

Figure 120: Protection with underpower IED and overpower IED

8.10.3 Function block SEMOD172623-4 v4

GUPPDUP
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TRIP1
BLOCK TRIP2
BLOCK1 START
BLOCK2 START1
START2
P
PPERCENT
Q
QPERCENT

IEC07000027-2-en.vsd
IEC07000027 V2 EN-US

Figure 121: GUPPDUP function block

245
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Current protection

8.10.4 Signals
PID-3709-INPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 152: GUPPDUP Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Current group connection
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Voltage group connection
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLOCK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of stage 1
BLOCK2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of stage 2

PID-3709-OUTPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 153: GUPPDUP Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal
TRIP1 BOOLEAN Trip of stage 1
TRIP2 BOOLEAN Trip of stage 2
START BOOLEAN Common start
START1 BOOLEAN Start of stage 1
START2 BOOLEAN Start of stage 2
P REAL Active Power in MW
PPERCENT REAL Active power in % of SBase
Q REAL Reactive power in MVAr
QPERCENT REAL Reactive power in % of SBase

8.10.5 Settings
PID-3709-SETTINGS v5

Table 154: GUPPDUP Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OpMode1 Off - - UnderPower Operation mode for stage 1 Off / On
UnderPower
Power1 0.0 - 500.0 %SB 0.1 1.0 Stage 1 underpower setting in Angle1
direction in % of SBase
Angle1 -180.0 - 180.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Characteristic angle for max power
senistivity stage 1
TripDelay1 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 1.00 Trip delay for stage 1
DropDelay1 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.06 Drop-off delay for stage 1
OpMode2 Off - - UnderPower Operation mode for stage 2 Off / On
UnderPower
Power2 0.0 - 500.0 %SB 0.1 1.0 Power setting for stage 2 in % of
SBase
Table continues on next page

246
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Angle2 -180.0 - 180.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Characteristic angle for max power
senistivity stage 2
TripDelay2 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 1.00 Trip delay for stage 2
DropDelay2 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.06 Drop-off delay for stage 2

Table 155: GUPPDUP Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
k 0.000 - 0.999 - 0.001 0.000 Low pass filter coefficient for power
measurement, P and Q
Hysteresis1 0.2 - 5.0 %SB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis of stage 1 in %
SBase
Hysteresis2 0.2 - 5.0 %SB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis of stage 2 in %
SBase
IAmpComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude correction compensates
current error at 5% of Ir
IAmpComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude correction compensates
current error at 30% of Ir
IAmpComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude correction compensates
current error at 100% of Ir
UAmpComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude correction compensates
voltage error at 5% of Ur
UAmpComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude correction compensates
voltage error at 30% of Ur
UAmpComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude correction compensates
voltage error at 100% of Ur
IAngComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Corr of error betw current and voltage
angles at 5% of Ir
IAngComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Corr of error betw current and voltage
angles at 30% of Ir
IAngComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Corr of error betw current and voltage
angles at 100% of Ir

Table 156: GUPPDUP Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups
Mode L1, L2, L3 - - Pos Seq Selection of measured current and
Arone voltage
Pos Seq
L1L2
L2L3
L3L1
L1
L2
L3

247
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Current protection

8.10.6 Monitored data

PID-3709-MONITOREDDATA v4

Table 157: GUPPDUP Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
P REAL - MW Active Power in MW
PPERCENT REAL - % Active power in % of SBase
Q REAL - MVAr Reactive power in MVAr
QPERCENT REAL - % Reactive power in % of SBase

8.10.7 Operation principle

SEMOD172136-4 v4
A simplified scheme showing the principle of the power protection function is shown in
figure 122. The function has two stages with individual settings.

Chosen current
phasors P

Complex Derivation of S(angle)

S(angle) < t TRIP1
power S(composant)
Chosen voltage Power1
calculation in Char angle
phasors Q
START1

S(angle) < t TRIP2

Power2
START2

P = POWRE

Q = POWIM

IEC09000018-2-en.vsd
IEC09000018 V2 EN-US

Figure 122: Simplified logic diagram of the power protection function

The function will use voltage and current phasors calculated in the pre-processing blocks. The
apparent complex power is calculated according to chosen formula as shown in table 158.

Table 158: Complex power calculation

Set value: Mode Formula used for complex power calculation
L1, L2, L3
S = U L1 × I L1* + U L 2 × I L 2* + U L 3 × I L 3*
EQUATION1697 V1 EN-US (Equation 30)
Arone
S = U L1L 2 × I L1* - U L 2 L 3 × I L 3*
EQUATION1698 V1 EN-US (Equation 31)
PosSeq
S = 3 × U PosSeq × I PosSeq*
EQUATION1699 V1 EN-US (Equation 32)
Table continues on next page

248
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

Set value: Mode Formula used for complex power calculation

L1L2
S = U L1L 2 × ( I L1* - I L 2* )
EQUATION1700 V1 EN-US (Equation 33)
L2L3
S = U L 2 L 3 × ( I L 2* - I L 3* )
EQUATION1701 V1 EN-US (Equation 34)
L3L1
S = U L 3 L1 × ( I L 3* - I L1* )
EQUATION1702 V1 EN-US (Equation 35)
L1
S = 3 × U L1 × I L1*
EQUATION1703 V1 EN-US (Equation 36)
L2
S = 3 × U L 2 × I L 2*
EQUATION1704 V1 EN-US (Equation 37)
L3
S = 3 × U L 3 × I L 3*
EQUATION1705 V1 EN-US (Equation 38)

The active and reactive power is available from the function and can be used for monitoring
and fault recording.

The component of the complex power S = P + jQ in the direction Angle1(2) is calculated. If this
angle is 0° the active power component P is calculated. If this angle is 90° the reactive power
component Q is calculated.

The calculated power component is compared to the power pick up setting Power1(2). For
directional underpower protection, a start signal START1(2) is activated if the calculated power
component is smaller than the pick up value. For directional overpower protection, a start
signal START1(2) is activated if the calculated power component is larger than the pick up
value. After a set time delay TripDelay1(2) a trip TRIP1(2) signal is activated if the start signal is
still active. At activation of any of the two stages a common signal START will be activated. At
trip from any of the two stages also a common signal TRIP will be activated.

To avoid instability there is a settable hysteresis in the power function. The absolute
hysteresis of the stage1(2) is Hysteresis1(2) = abs (Power1(2) + drop-power1(2)). For generator
low forward power protection the power setting is very low, normally down to 0.02 p.u. of
rated generator power. The hysteresis should therefore be set to a smaller value. The drop-
power value of stage1 can be calculated with the Power1(2), Hysteresis1(2): drop-power1(2) =
Power1(2) + Hysteresis1(2)

For small power1 values the hysteresis1 may not be too big, because the drop-power1(2) would
be too small. In such cases, the hysteresis1 greater than (0.5 · Power1(2)) is corrected to the
minimal value.

If the measured power drops under the drop-power1(2) value, the function will reset after a set
time DropDelay1(2). The reset means that the start signal will drop out and that the timer of
the stage will reset.

8.10.7.1 Low pass filtering SEMOD172136-39 v3

In order to minimize the influence of the noise signal on the measurement it is possible to
introduce the recursive, low pass filtering of the measured values for S (P, Q). This will make
slower measurement response to the step changes in the measured quantity. Filtering is
performed in accordance with the following recursive formula:

249
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Current protection

S = k × SOld + (1 - k ) × SCalculated
EQUATION1959 V1 EN-US (Equation 39)

Where
S is a new measured value to be used for the protection function
Sold is the measured value given from the function in previous execution cycle

SCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle

k is settable parameter by the end user which influence the filter properties
TD

Default value for parameter k is 0.00. With this value the new calculated value is immediately
given out without any filtering (that is without any additional delay). When k is set to value
bigger than 0, the filtering is enabled. A typical value for k=0.92 in case of slow operating
functions.

8.10.7.2 Calibration of analog inputs SEMOD172136-57 v3

Measured currents and voltages used in the Power function can be calibrated to get class 0.5
measuring accuracy. This is achieved by amplitude and angle compensation at 5, 30 and 100%
of rated current and voltage. The compensation below 5% and above 100% is constant and
linear in between, see example in figure 123.

IEC05000652 V2 EN-US

Figure 123: Calibration curves

The first current and voltage phase in the group signals will be used as reference and the
amplitude and angle compensation will be used for related input signals.

250
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

Analog outputs (Monitored data) from the function can be used for service values or in the
disturbance report. The active power is provided as MW value: P, or in percent of base power:
PPERCENT. The reactive power is provided as Mvar value: Q, or in percent of base power:
QPERCENT.

8.10.8 Technical data SEMOD175153-1 v1

SEMOD175152-2 v10

Table 159: GUPPDUP technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Power level (0.0–500.0)% of SBase ±1.0% of Sr at S ≤ Sr
for Step 1 and Step 2 ±1.0% of S at S > Sr
where

S r = 1.732 × U r × I r

Characteristic angle (-180.0–180.0) degrees ±2.0 degrees

for Step 1 and Step 2
Independent time delay to operate (0.01-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is
for Step 1 and Step 2 at 2 to 0.5 x greater
Sr and k=0.000

8.11 Directional overpower protection GOPPDOP SEMOD172360-1 v4

8.11.1 Identification
SEMOD176574-2 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Directional overpower protection GOPPDOP 32
P>
2
DOCUMENT172362-IMG158942
V2 EN-US

8.11.2 Functionality SEMOD172356-4 v5

The task of a generator in a power plant is to convert mechanical energy available as a torque
on a rotating shaft to electric energy.

Sometimes, the mechanical power from a prime mover may decrease so much that it does not
cover bearing losses and ventilation losses. Then, the synchronous generator becomes a
synchronous motor and starts to take electric power from the rest of the power system. This
operating state, where individual synchronous machines operate as motors, implies no risk for
the machine itself. If the generator under consideration is very large and if it consumes lots of
electric power, it may be desirable to disconnect it to ease the task for the rest of the power
system.

Often, the motoring condition may imply that the turbine is in a very dangerous state. The task
of the reverse power protection is to protect the turbine and not to protect the generator
itself.

Figure 124 illustrates the low forward power and reverse power protection with underpower
and overpower functions respectively. The underpower IED gives a higher margin and should

251
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Current protection

provide better dependability. On the other hand, the risk for unwanted operation immediately
after synchronization may be higher. One should set the underpower IED to trip if the active
power from the generator is less than about 2%. One should set the overpower IED to trip if
the power flow from the network to the generator is higher than 1%.

When IED with a metering class input CTs is used pickup can be set to more sensitive value
(e.g.0,5% or even to 0,2%).

Underpower IED Overpower IED

Operate
Q Q
Operate
Line Line

Margin Margin
P P

Operating point Operating point

without without
turbine torque turbine torque

IEC06000315-2-en.vsd
IEC06000315 V2 EN-US

Figure 124: Reverse power protection with underpower IED and overpower IED

8.11.3 Function block SEMOD172667-4 v4

GOPPDOP
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TRIP1
BLOCK TRIP2
BLOCK1 START
BLOCK2 START1
START2
P
PPERCENT
Q
QPERCENT

IEC07000028-2-en.vsd
IEC07000028 V2 EN-US

Figure 125: GOPPDOP function block

8.11.4 Signals
PID-3710-INPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 160: GOPPDOP Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Current group connection
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Voltage group connection
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLOCK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of stage 1
BLOCK2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of stage 2

252
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

PID-3710-OUTPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 161: GOPPDOP Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal
TRIP1 BOOLEAN Trip of stage 1
TRIP2 BOOLEAN Trip of stage 2
START BOOLEAN Common start
START1 BOOLEAN Start of stage 1
START2 BOOLEAN Start of stage 2
P REAL Active power P in MW
PPERCENT REAL Active power P in % of SBase
Q REAL Reactive power Q in MVAr
QPERCENT REAL Reactive power Q in % of SBase

8.11.5 Settings
PID-3710-SETTINGS v5

Table 162: GOPPDOP Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OpMode1 Off - - OverPower Operation mode for stage 1 Off / On
OverPower
Power1 0.0 - 500.0 %SB 0.1 120.0 Stage 1 overpower setting in Angle1
direction in % of SBase
Angle1 -180.0 - 180.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Characteristic angle for max power
senistivity stage 1
TripDelay1 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 1.00 Trip delay for stage 1
DropDelay1 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.06 Drop-off delay for stage 1
OpMode2 Off - - OverPower Operation mode for stage 2 Off / On
OverPower
Power2 0.0 - 500.0 %SB 0.1 120.0 Stage 2 overpower setting in Angle2
direction in % of SBase
Angle2 -180.0 - 180.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Characteristic angle for max power
senistivity stage 2
TripDelay2 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 1.00 Trip delay for stage 2
DropDelay2 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.06 Drop-off delay for stage 2

Table 163: GOPPDOP Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
k 0.000 - 0.999 - 0.001 0.000 Low pass filter coefficient for power
measurement, P and Q
Hysteresis1 0.2 - 5.0 %SB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis of stage 1 in % of
SBase
Hysteresis2 0.2 - 5.0 %SB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis of stage 2 in % of
SBase
Table continues on next page

253
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

IAmpComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude correction compensates
current error at 5% of Ir
IAmpComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude correction compensates
current error at 30% of Ir
IAmpComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude correction compensates
current error at 100% of Ir
UAmpComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude correction compensates
voltage error at 5% of Ur
UAmpComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude correction compensates
voltage error at 30% of Ur
UAmpComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude correction compensates
voltage error at 100% of Ur
IAngComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Corr of error betw current and voltage
angles at 5% of Ir
IAngComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Corr of error betw current and voltage
angles at 30% of Ir
IAngComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Corr of error betw current and voltage
angles at 100% of Ir

Table 164: GOPPDOP Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups
Mode L1, L2, L3 - - Pos Seq Selection of measured current and
Arone voltage
Pos Seq
L1L2
L2L3
L3L1
L1
L2
L3

8.11.6 Monitored data

PID-3710-MONITOREDDATA v4

Table 165: GOPPDOP Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
P REAL - MW Active power P in MW
PPERCENT REAL - % Active power P in % of SBase
Q REAL - MVAr Reactive power Q in MVAr
QPERCENT REAL - % Reactive power Q in % of SBase

8.11.7 Operation principle

SEMOD172154-4 v3
A simplified scheme showing the principle of the power protection function is shown in
figure 126. The function has two stages with individual settings.

254
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

Chosen current
phasors P

Complex Derivation of S(angle)

S(angle) > t TRIP1
power S(composant)
Chosen voltage Power1
calculation in Char angle
phasors Q
START1

S(angle) > t TRIP2

Power2
START2

P = POWRE

Q = POWIM

IEC06000567-2-en.vsd
IEC06000567 V2 EN-US

Figure 126: Simplified logic diagram of the power protection function

The function will use voltage and current phasors calculated in the pre-processing blocks. The
apparent complex power is calculated according to chosen formula as shown in table 166.

Table 166: Complex power calculation

Set value: Mode Formula used for complex power calculation
L1, L2, L3
S = U L1 × I L1* + U L 2 × I L 2* + U L 3 × I L 3*
EQUATION1697 V1 EN-US (Equation 40)
Arone
S = U L1L 2 × I L1* - U L 2 L 3 × I L 3*
EQUATION1698 V1 EN-US (Equation 41)
PosSeq
S = 3 × U PosSeq × I PosSeq*
EQUATION1699 V1 EN-US (Equation 42)
L1L2
S = U L1L 2 × ( I L1* - I L 2* )
EQUATION1700 V1 EN-US (Equation 43)
L2L3
S = U L 2 L 3 × ( I L 2* - I L 3* )
EQUATION1701 V1 EN-US (Equation 44)
L3L1
S = U L 3 L1 × ( I L 3* - I L1* )
EQUATION1702 V1 EN-US (Equation 45)
L1
S = 3 × U L1 × I L1*
EQUATION1703 V1 EN-US (Equation 46)
L2
S = 3 × U L 2 × I L 2*
EQUATION1704 V1 EN-US (Equation 47)
L3
S = 3 × U L 3 × I L 3*
EQUATION1705 V1 EN-US (Equation 48)

255
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Current protection

The active and reactive power is available from the function and can be used for monitoring
and fault recording.

The component of the complex power S = P + jQ in the direction Angle1(2) is calculated. If this
angle is 0° the active power component P is calculated. If this angle is 90° the reactive power
component Q is calculated.

The calculated power component is compared to the power pick up setting Power1(2). A start
signal START1(2) is activated if the calculated power component is larger than the pick up
value. After a set time delay TripDelay1(2) a trip TRIP1(2) signal is activated if the start signal is
still active. At activation of any of the two stages a common signal START will be activated. At
trip from any of the two stages also a common signal TRIP will be activated.

To avoid instability there is a settable hysteresis in the power function. The absolute
hysteresis of the stage1(2) is Hysteresis1(2) = abs (Power1(2) – drop-power1(2)). For generator
reverse power protection the power setting is very low, normally down to 0.02 p.u. of rated
generator power. The hysteresis should therefore be set to a smaller value. The drop-power
value of stage1 can be calculated with the Power1(2), Hysteresis1(2): drop-power1(2) =
Power1(2) – Hysteresis1(2)

For small power1 values the hysteresis1 may not be too big, because the drop-power1(2) would
be too small. In such cases, the hysteresis1 greater than (0.5 · Power1(2)) is corrected to the
minimal value.

If the measured power drops under the drop-power1(2) value the function will reset after a set
time DropDelay1(2). The reset means that the start signal will drop out ant that the timer of
the stage will reset.

8.11.7.1 Low pass filtering SEMOD172154-37 v4

In order to minimize the influence of the noise signal on the measurement it is possible to
introduce the recursive, low pass filtering of the measured values for S (P, Q). This will make
slower measurement response to the step changes in the measured quantity. Filtering is
performed in accordance with the following recursive formula:

S = k × SOld + (1 - k ) × SCalculated
EQUATION1959 V1 EN-US (Equation 49)

Where
S is a new measured value to be used for the protection function
Sold is the measured value given from the function in previous execution cycle

SCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle

k is settable parameter by the end user which influence the filter properties

Default value for parameter k is 0.00. With this value the new calculated value is immediately
given out without any filtering (that is, without any additional delay). When k is set to value
bigger than 0, the filtering is enabled. A typical value for k = 0.92 in case of slow operating
functions.

8.11.7.2 Calibration of analog inputs SEMOD172154-55 v2

Measured currents and voltages used in the Power function can be calibrated to get class 0.5
measuring accuracy. This is achieved by amplitude and angle compensation at 5, 30 and 100%

256
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

of rated current and voltage. The compensation below 5% and above 100% is constant and
linear in between, see example in figure 127.

IEC05000652 V2 EN-US

Figure 127: Calibration curves

The first current and voltage phase in the group signals will be used as reference and the
amplitude and angle compensation will be used for related input signals.

Analog outputs from the function can be used for service values or in the disturbance report.
The active power is provided as MW value: P, or in percent of base power: PPERCENT. The
reactive power is provided as Mvar value: Q, or in percent of base power: QPERCENT.

8.11.8 Technical data SEMOD175160-1 v1

SEMOD175159-2 v8

Table 167: GOPPDOP technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Power level (0.0–500.0)% of SBase ±1.0% of Sr at S ≤ Sr
for Step 1 and Step 2 ±1.0% of S at S > Sr

Characteristic angle (-180.0–180.0) degrees ±2.0 degrees

for Step 1 and Step 2
Operate time, start at 0.5 to 2 x Sr Min. =10 ms
and k=0.000
Max. = 25 ms
Reset time, start at 2 to 0.5 x Sr Min. = 35 ms
and k=0.000
Max. = 55 ms
Independent time delay to operate (0.01-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is
for Step 1 and Step 2 at 0.5 to 2 x greater
Sr and k=0.000

257
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Current protection

8.12 Broken conductor check BRCPTOC SEMOD171761-1 v3

8.12.1 Identification
SEMOD172362-2 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Broken conductor check BRCPTOC - 46

8.12.2 Functionality SEMOD171805-5 v6

Conventional protection functions cannot detect the broken conductor condition. Broken
conductor check BRCPTOC function, consisting of continuous phase selective current
unsymmetrical check on the line where the IED is connected, gives an alarm or trip at detecting
broken conductors.

8.12.3 Function block SEMOD171906-11 v4

BRCPTOC
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
BLKTR

IEC07000034-2-en.vsd
IEC07000034 V2 EN-US

Figure 128: BRCPTOC function block

8.12.4 Signals
PID-3479-INPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 168: BRCPTOC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip

PID-3479-OUTPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 169: BRCPTOC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Operate signal of the protection logic
START BOOLEAN Start signal of the protection logic

258
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 8
Current protection

8.12.5 Settings
PID-3479-SETTINGS v5

Table 170: BRCPTOC Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
Iub> 50 - 90 %IM 1 50 Highest and lowest phase currents
difference in % of highest phase
current
IP> 5 - 100 %IB 1 20 Minimum phase current for operation
of Iub> in % of IBase
tOper 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Operate time delay

Table 171: BRCPTOC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tReset 0.010 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Time delay in reset

Table 172: BRCPTOC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

8.12.6 Monitored data

PID-3479-MONITOREDDATA v4

Table 173: BRCPTOC Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IUNBAL REAL - - Measured unbalance of phase
currents

8.12.7 Operation principle SEMOD171791-5 v5

Broken conductor check (BRCPTOC) detects a broken conductor condition by detecting the
asymmetry between currents in the three phases. The current-measuring elements
continuously measure the three-phase currents.

The current asymmetry signal output START is set on if:

• The difference in currents between the phase with the lowest current and the phase with
the highest current is greater than set percentage Iub> of the highest phase current
• The highest phase current is greater than the minimum setting value IP>.
• The lowest phase current is below 50% of the minimum setting value IP>

The third condition is included to avoid problems in systems involving parallel lines. If a
conductor breaks in one phase on one line, the parallel line will experience an increase in
current in the same phase. This might result in the first two conditions being satisfied. If the
unsymmetrical detection lasts for a period longer than the set time tOper the TRIP output is
activated.

259
Technical manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Current protection

The simplified logic diagram of the broken conductor check function is shown in figure 129

BRCPTOC is disabled (blocked) if:

• The IED is in TEST status and the function has been blocked from the local HMI test menu
(BlockBRC=Yes).
• The input signal BLOCK is high.

The BLOCK input can be connected to a binary input of the IED in order to receive a block
command from external devices, or can be software connected to other internal functions of
the IED itself to receive a block command from internal functions.

The output trip signal TRIP is a three-phase trip. It can be used to command a trip to the circuit
breaker or for alarm purpose only.

TEST

TEST-ACTIVE
and
Block BRCPTOC=Yes
START

Function Enable
BLOCK or
tOper
TRIP
and t
Unsymmetrical
Current Detection
STI

IL1<50%IP>

IL2<50%IP> or

IL3<50%IP>

IEC09000158-3-en.vsd
IEC09000158 V3 EN-US

Figure 129: Simplified logic diagram for Broken conductor check BRCPTOC

8.12.8 Technical data SEMOD171939-1 v1

SEMOD175200-2 v7

Table 174: BRCPTOC technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Minimum phase current for operation (5–100)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir

Unbalance current operation (50–90)% of maximum current ±1.0% of Ir

Independent operate time delay (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms whichever is

greater
Independent reset time delay (0.010-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is
greater
Start time at current change from Ir to Min. = 25 ms -
0 Max. = 35 ms

Reset time at current change from 0 to Min. = 5 ms -

Ir Max. = 20 ms

260
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 9
Voltage protection

Section 9 Voltage protection

9.1 Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV IP14544-1 v3

9.1.1 Identification
M16876-1 v6

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV 27

3U<

V2 EN-US
SYMBOL-R-2U-GREATER-THAN

9.1.2 Functionality M13789-3 v11

Undervoltages can occur in the power system during faults or abnormal conditions. Two step
undervoltage protection (UV2PTUV) function can be used to open circuit breakers to prepare
for system restoration at power outages or as long-time delayed back-up to primary
protection.

UV2PTUV has two voltage steps, each with inverse or definite time delay.

UV2PTUV has a high reset ratio to allow settings close to system service voltage.

9.1.3 Function block M13794-3 v6

UV2PTUV
U3P* TRIP
BLOCK TR1
BLKTR1 TR1L1
BLKST1 TR1L2
BLKTR2 TR1L3
BLKST2 TR2
TR2L1
TR2L2
TR2L3
START
ST1
ST1L1
ST1L2
ST1L3
ST2
ST2L1
ST2L2
ST2L3

IEC06000276-2-en.vsd
IEC06000276 V2 EN-US

Figure 130: UV2PTUV function block

261
Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Voltage protection

9.1.4 Signals
PID-3586-INPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 175: UV2PTUV Input signals

Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Three phase voltages
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of operate signal, step 1
BLKST1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1
BLKTR2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of operate signal, step 2
BLKST2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 2

PID-3586-OUTPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 176: UV2PTUV Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
TR1 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step1
TR1L1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase L1
TR1L2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase L2
TR1L3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase L3
TR2 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step2
TR2L1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step2 phase L1
TR2L2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step2 phase L2
TR2L3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step2 phase L3
START BOOLEAN General start signal
ST1 BOOLEAN Common start signal from step1
ST1L1 BOOLEAN Start signal from step1 phase L1
ST1L2 BOOLEAN Start signal from step1 phase L2
ST1L3 BOOLEAN Start signal from step1 phase L3
ST2 BOOLEAN Common start signal from step2
ST2L1 BOOLEAN Start signal from step2 phase L1
ST2L2 BOOLEAN Start signal from step2 phase L2
ST2L3 BOOLEAN Start signal from step2 phase L3

262
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 9
Voltage protection

9.1.5 Settings
PID-3586-SETTINGS v6

Table 177: UV2PTUV Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OperationStep1 Off - - On Enable execution of step 1
On
Characterist1 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for
Inverse curve A step 1
Inverse curve B
Prog. inv. curve
OpMode1 1 out of 3 - - 1 out of 3 Number of phases required for op (1
2 out of 3 of 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3) from step 1
3 out of 3
U1< 1.0 - 100.0 %UB 0.1 70.0 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT)
in % of UBase, step 1
t1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 5.00 Definitive time delay of step 1
t1Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Minimum operate time for inverse
curves for step 1
k1 0.05 - 1.10 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time
delay for step 1
IntBlkSel1 Off - - Off Internal (low level) blocking mode,
Block of trip step 1
Block all
IntBlkStVal1 1 - 50 %UB 1 20 Voltage setting for internal blocking in
% of UBase, step 1
tBlkUV1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of internal (low level)
blocking for step 1
HystAbs1 0.0 - 50.0 %UB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase,
step 1
OperationStep2 Off - - On Enable execution of step 2
On
Characterist2 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for
Inverse curve A step 2
Inverse curve B
Prog. inv. curve
OpMode2 1 out of 3 - - 1 out of 3 Number of phases required for op (1
2 out of 3 of 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3) from step 2
3 out of 3
U2< 1.0 - 100.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT)
in % of UBase, step 2
t2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Definitive time delay of step 2
t2Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Minimum operate time for inverse
curves for step 2
k2 0.05 - 1.10 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time
delay for step 2
IntBlkSel2 Off - - Off Internal (low level) blocking mode,
Block of trip step 2
Block all
Table continues on next page

263
Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Voltage protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

IntBlkStVal2 1 - 50 %UB 1 20 Voltage setting for internal blocking in
% of UBase, step 2
tBlkUV2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of internal (low level)
blocking for step 2
HystAbs2 0.0 - 50.0 %UB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase,
step 2

Table 178: UV2PTUV Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tReset1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite
Time curve step 1
ResetTypeCrv1 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of used IDMT reset curve
Frozen timer type for step 1
Linearly
decreased
tIReset1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 1
ACrv1 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter A for customer
programmable curve for step 1
BCrv1 0.50 - 100.00 - 0.01 1.00 Parameter B for customer
programmable curve for step 1
CCrv1 0.0 - 1.0 - 0.1 0.0 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve for step 1
DCrv1 0.000 - 60.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer
programmable curve for step 1
PCrv1 0.000 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer
programmable curve for step 1
CrvSat1 0 - 100 % 1 0 Tuning param for prog. under voltage
IDMT curve, step 1
tReset2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite
Time curve step 2
ResetTypeCrv2 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of used IDMT reset curve
Frozen timer type for step 2
Linearly
decreased
tIReset2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 2
ACrv2 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter A for customer
programmable curve for step 2
BCrv2 0.50 - 100.00 - 0.01 1.00 Parameter B for customer
programmable curve for step 2
CCrv2 0.0 - 1.0 - 0.1 0.0 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve for step 2
DCrv2 0.000 - 60.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer
programmable curve for step 2
PCrv2 0.000 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer
programmable curve for step 2
CrvSat2 0 - 100 % 1 0 Tuning param for prog. under voltage
IDMT curve, step 2

264
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 9
Voltage protection

Table 179: UV2PTUV Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ConnType PhN DFT - - PhN DFT Group selector for connection type
PhPh RMS
PhN RMS
PhPh DFT
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

9.1.6 Monitored data

PID-3586-MONITOREDDATA v5

Table 180: UV2PTUV Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
UL1 REAL - kV Voltage in phase L1
UL2 REAL - kV Voltage in phase L2
UL3 REAL - kV Voltage in phase L3

9.1.7 Operation principle M15326-3 v8

Two-step undervoltage protection (UV2PTUV) is used to detect low power system voltage.
UV2PTUV has two voltage measuring steps with separate time delays. If one, two or three
phase voltages decrease below the set value, a corresponding START signal is generated.
UV2PTUV can be set to START/TRIP based on 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3 of the measured
voltages, being below the set point. If the voltage remains below the set value for a time
period corresponding to the chosen time delay, the corresponding trip signal is issued. To
avoid an unwanted trip due to disconnection of the related high voltage equipment, a voltage
controlled blocking of the function is available, that is, if the voltage is lower than the set
blocking level the function is blocked and no START or TRIP signal is generated.The time delay
characteristic is individually chosen for each step and can be either definite time delay or
inverse time delay.

UV2PTUV can be set to measure phase-to-earth fundamental value, phase-to-phase

fundamental value, phase-to-earth true RMS value or phase-to-phase true RMS value. The
choice of the measuring is done by the parameter ConnType. The voltage related settings are
made in percent of base voltage which is set in kV phase-to-phase voltage. This means
operation for phase-to-earth voltage under:

U < (%) ⋅UBase(kV )

3
EQUATION1429 V2 EN-US (Equation 50)

and operation for phase-to-phase voltage under:

U < (%) × UBase(kV)

EQUATION1990 V1 EN-US (Equation 51)

When phase-to-earth voltage measurement is selected the function

automatically introduces division of the base value by the square root of three.

265
Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Voltage protection

9.1.7.1 Measurement principle M15326-6 v6

Depending on the set ConnType value, UV2PTUV measures phase-to-earth or phase-to-phase

voltages and compare against set values, U1< and U2<. The parameters OpMode1 and
OpMode2 influence the requirements to activate the START outputs. Either 1 out of 3, 2 out of
3, or 3 out of 3 measured voltages have to be lower than the corresponding set point to issue
the corresponding START signal.

To avoid oscillations of the output START signal, a hysteresis has been included.

9.1.7.2 Time delay M15326-10 v10

The time delay for the two steps can be either definite time delay (DT) or inverse time delay
(IDMT). For the inverse time delay three different modes are available:

• inverse curve A
• inverse curve B
• customer programmable inverse curve

The type A curve is described as:

k
t=
æ Un < -U ö
ç ÷
è Un < ø
EQUATION1431 V2 EN-US (Equation 52)

where:
Un< Set value for step 1 and step 2
U Measured voltage

The type B curve is described as:

k × 480
t= 2.0
+ 0.055
æ Un < - U ö
ç 32 × - 0.5 ÷
è Un < ø
EQUATION1432 V2 EN-US (Equation 53)

The customer programmable curve can be created as:

é ù
ê ú
ê k×A ú
t=ê pú
+D
ê æ Un < - U ö ú
êçB × -C÷ ú
ëè Un < ø û
EQUATION1433 V2 EN-US (Equation 54)

When the denominator in the expression is equal to zero the time delay will be infinity. There
will be an undesired discontinuity. Therefore a tuning parameter CrvSatn is set to compensate
for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval Un< down to Un< · (1.0 – CrvSatn/100) the used

266
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 9
Voltage protection

voltage will be: Un< · (1.0 – CrvSatn/100). If the programmable curve is used this parameter
must be calculated so that:

CrvSatn
B× -C > 0
100
EQUATION1435 V1 EN-US (Equation 55)

The lowest voltage is always used for the inverse time delay integration. The details of the
different inverse time characteristics are shown in section 24.3"Inverse characteristics".

Voltage

UL1
UL2
UL3

IDMT Voltage

Time

IEC12000186-1-en.vsd

IEC12000186 V1 EN-US

Figure 131: Voltage used for the inverse time characteristic integration
Trip signal issuing requires that the undervoltage condition continues for at least the user set
time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for definite time mode (DT) and by
some special voltage level dependent time curves for the inverse time mode (IDMT). If the start
condition, with respect to the measured voltage ceases during the delay time, and is not
fulfilled again within a user defined reset time (tReset1 and tReset2 for the definite time and
tIReset1 and tIReset2pickup for the inverse time) the corresponding start output is reset. Here
it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the start condition must be fulfilled
again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area. Note that
for the undervoltage function the IDMT reset time is constant and does not depend on the
voltage fluctuations during the drop-off period. However, there are three ways to reset the
timer, either the timer is reset instantaneously, or the timer value is frozen during the reset
time, or the timer value is linearly decreased during the reset time. See figure 132 and
figure 133.

267
Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Voltage protection

tIReset1
Voltage Measured
START Voltage
HystAbs1
TRIP

U1<

Time

START

TRIP

Time
Integrator Frozen Timer

Time
Linearly
Instantaneous
decreased IEC05000010-5-en.vsdx

IEC05000010 V5 EN-US

Figure 132: Voltage profile not causing a reset of the START signal for step 1, and inverse time delay at
different reset types

268
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 9
Voltage protection

tIReset1
Voltage
START
START
HystAbs1 Measured Voltage
TRIP

U1<

Time

START t

TRIP

Time
Integrator Frozen Timer

Time
Instantaneous Linearly decreased
IEC05000011-en-4.vsdx

IEC05000011 V4 EN-US

Figure 133: Voltage profile causing a reset of the START signal for step 1, and inverse time delay at
different reset types
Definite timer delay

When definite time delay is selected the function will operate as shown in figure 134. Detailed
information about individual stage reset/operation behavior is shown in figure 135 and figure
136 respectively. Note that by setting tResetn = 0.0s, instantaneous reset of the definite time
delayed stage is ensured.

269
Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Voltage protection

ST1

U t1
a tReset1
TR1
t
a<b t
U1< R
b
AND

IEC09000785-3-en.vsd
IEC09000785 V3 EN-US

Figure 134: Logic diagram for step 1, DT operation

U1<

ST1

TR1

tReset1

t1

IEC10000039-3-en.vsd
IEC10000039 V3 EN-US

Figure 135: Example for Definite Time Delay stage1 reset

U1<

ST1

TR1

tReset1

t1

IEC10000040-3-en.vsd
IEC10000040 V3 EN-US

Figure 136: Example for Definite Time Delay stage1 operation

270
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 9
Voltage protection

9.1.7.3 Blocking M15326-20 v7

It is possible to block Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV partially or completely, by

binary input signals or by parameter settings, where:

BLOCK: blocks all outputs

BLKTR1: blocks all trip outputs of step 1
BLKST1: blocks all start and trip outputs related to step 1
BLKTR2: blocks all trip outputs of step 2
BLKST2: blocks all start and trip outputs related to step 2

If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of IntBlkStVal1, either the trip output
of step 1, or both the trip and the START outputs of step 1, are blocked. The characteristic of
the blocking is set by the IntBlkSel1 parameter. This internal blocking can also be set to Off
resulting in no voltage based blocking. Corresponding settings and functionality are valid also
for step 2.

In case of disconnection of the high voltage component the measured voltage will get very
low. The event will START both the under voltage function and the blocking function, as seen in
figure 137. The delay of the blocking function must be set less than the time delay of under
voltage function.

U Disconnection

Normal voltage

U1<

U2<

tBlkUV1 <
t1,t1Min
IntBlkStVal1
tBlkUV2 <
t2,t2Min
IntBlkStVal2

Time

Block step 1

Block step 2
en05000466.vsd
IEC05000466 V1 EN-US

Figure 137: Blocking function

271
Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Voltage protection

9.1.7.4 Design M15326-35 v7

The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the three phase-to-neutral voltages or
the three phase-to-phase voltages. Recursive fourier filters or true RMS filters of input voltage
signals are used. The voltages are individually compared to the set value, and the lowest
voltage is used for the inverse time characteristic integration. A special logic is included to
achieve the 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 and 3 out of 3 criteria to fulfill the START condition. The design
of Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV is schematically shown in Figure 138.

UL1 Comparator ST1L1

UL1 < U1< Voltage Phase Phase 1
Selector
OpMode1 ST1L2
UL2 Comparator Phase 2
1 out of 3
UL2 < U1< 2 out of 3 ST1L3
3 out of 3 Phase 3 Start t1
UL3 Comparator t1Reset
UL3 < U1< IntBlkStVal1 &
OR ST1
Trip
Output
START Logic TR1L1

Step 1 TR1L2
Time integrator TRIP
MinVoltSelector tIReset1
ResetTypeCrv1 TR1L3

TR1
OR

Comparator ST2L1
UL1 < U2< Voltage Phase Phase 1
Selector
OpMode2 ST2L2
Comparator Phase 2
UL2 < U2< 1 out of 3
2 out of 3 Start t2 ST2L3
3 out of 3 Phase 3 t2Reset
Comparator IntBlkStVal2 &
UL3 < U2< Trip ST2
Output OR
Logic
START TR2L1

Step 2
TR2L2
Time integrator TRIP
MinVoltSelector tIReset2
ResetTypeCrv2 TR2L3

TR2
OR
START
OR

TRIP
OR

IEC05000834-2-en.vsd
IEC05000834 V2 EN-US

Figure 138: Schematic design of Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV

272
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 9
Voltage protection

9.1.8 Technical data IP13001-1 v1

M13290-1 v14

Table 181: UV2PTUV technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate voltage, low and high (1.0–100.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
step
Absolute hysteresis (0.0–50.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

Internal blocking level, step 1 and (1–50)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

step 2
Inverse time characteristics for - See table 830
step 1 and step 2, see table 830
Definite time delay, step 1 at 1.2 to (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±40ms whichever is
0 x Uset greater

Definite time delay, step 2 at 1.2 to (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40ms whichever is

0 x Uset greater

Minimum operate time, inverse (0.000–60.000) s ±0.5% or ±40ms whichever is

characteristics greater
Operate time, start at 2 to 0 x Uset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Reset time, start at 0 to 2 x Uset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Operate time, start at 1.2 to 0 x Min. = 5 ms -
Uset Max. = 25 ms

Reset time, start at 0 to 1.2 x Uset Min. = 15 ms -

Max. = 35 ms
Critical impulse time 5 ms typically at 1.2 to 0 x Uset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

9.2 Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV IP14545-1 v3

9.2.1 Identification
M17002-1 v7

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV 59

3U>

SYMBOL-C-2U-SMALLER-THAN V2 EN-US

9.2.2 Functionality OV2PTOV M13798-3 v14

Overvoltages may occur in the power system during abnormal conditions such as sudden
power loss, tap changer regulating failures, and open line ends on long lines.

Two step overvoltage protection (OV2PTOV) function can be used to detect open line ends,
normally then combined with a directional reactive over-power function to supervise the

273
Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Voltage protection

system voltage. When triggered, the function will cause an alarm, switch in reactors, or switch
out capacitor banks.

OV2PTOV has two voltage steps, each of them with inverse or definite time delayed.

OV2PTOV has a high reset ratio to allow settings close to system service voltage.

9.2.3 Function block M13803-3 v6

OV2PTOV
U3P* TRIP
BLOCK TR1
BLKTR1 TR1L1
BLKST1 TR1L2
BLKTR2 TR1L3
BLKST2 TR2
TR2L1
TR2L2
TR2L3
START
ST1
ST1L1
ST1L2
ST1L3
ST2
ST2L1
ST2L2
ST2L3

IEC06000277-2-en.vsd
IEC06000277 V2 EN-US

Figure 139: OV2PTOV function block

9.2.4 Signals
PID-3535-INPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 182: OV2PTOV Input signals

Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Group signal for three phase voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of operate signal, step 1
BLKST1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1
BLKTR2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of operate signal, step 2
BLKST2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 2

PID-3535-OUTPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 183: OV2PTOV Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
TR1 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step1
TR1L1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase L1
TR1L2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase L2
TR1L3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase L3
TR2 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step2
TR2L1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step2 phase L1
Table continues on next page

274
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 9
Voltage protection

Name Type Description

TR2L2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step2 phase L2
TR2L3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step2 phase L3
START BOOLEAN General start signal
ST1 BOOLEAN Common start signal from step1
ST1L1 BOOLEAN Start signal from step1 phase L1
ST1L2 BOOLEAN Start signal from step1 phase L2
ST1L3 BOOLEAN Start signal from step1 phase L3
ST2 BOOLEAN Common start signal from step2
ST2L1 BOOLEAN Start signal from step2 phase L1
ST2L2 BOOLEAN Start signal from step2 phase L2
ST2L3 BOOLEAN Start signal from step2 phase L3

9.2.5 Settings
PID-3535-SETTINGS v6

Table 184: OV2PTOV Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OperationStep1 Off - - On Enable execution of step 1
On
Characterist1 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for
Inverse curve A step 1
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
OpMode1 1 out of 3 - - 1 out of 3 Number of phases required for op (1
2 out of 3 of 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3) from step 1
3 out of 3
U1> 1.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT)
in % of UBase, step 1
t1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 5.00 Definitive time delay of step 1
t1Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Minimum operate time for inverse
curves for step 1
k1 0.05 - 1.10 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time
delay for step 1
HystAbs1 0.0 - 50.0 %UB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase,
step 1
OperationStep2 Off - - On Enable execution of step 2
On
Characterist2 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for
Inverse curve A step 2
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
OpMode2 1 out of 3 - - 1 out of 3 Number of phases required for op (1
2 out of 3 of 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3) from step 2
3 out of 3
U2> 1.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT)
in % of UBase, step 2
Table continues on next page

275
Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Voltage protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

t2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Definitive time delay of step 2
t2Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Minimum operate time for inverse
curves for step 2
k2 0.05 - 1.10 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time
delay for step 2
HystAbs2 0.0 - 50.0 %UB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase,
step 2

Table 185: OV2PTOV Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tReset1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite
Time curve step 1
ResetTypeCrv1 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of used IDMT reset curve
Frozen timer type for step 1
Linearly
decreased
tIReset1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 1
ACrv1 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter A for customer
programmable curve for step 1
BCrv1 0.50 - 100.00 - 0.01 1.00 Parameter B for customer
programmable curve for step 1
CCrv1 0.0 - 1.0 - 0.1 0.0 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve for step 1
DCrv1 0.000 - 60.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer
programmable curve for step 1
PCrv1 0.000 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer
programmable curve for step 1
CrvSat1 0 - 100 % 1 0 Tuning param for prog. over voltage
IDMT curve, step 1
tReset2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite
Time curve step 2
ResetTypeCrv2 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of used IDMT reset curve
Frozen timer type for step 2
Linearly
decreased
tIReset2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 2
ACrv2 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter A for customer
programmable curve for step 2
BCrv2 0.50 - 100.00 - 0.01 1.00 Parameter B for customer
programmable curve for step 2
CCrv2 0.0 - 1.0 - 0.1 0.0 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve for step 2
DCrv2 0.000 - 60.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer
programmable curve for step 2
PCrv2 0.000 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer
programmable curve for step 2
CrvSat2 0 - 100 % 1 0 Tuning param for prog. over voltage
IDMT curve, step 2

276
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 9
Voltage protection

Table 186: OV2PTOV Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ConnType PhN DFT - - PhN DFT Group selector for connection type
PhPh DFT
PhN RMS
PhPh RMS
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

9.2.6 Monitored data

PID-3535-MONITOREDDATA v5

Table 187: OV2PTOV Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
UL1 REAL - kV Voltage in phase L1
UL2 REAL - kV Voltage in phase L2
UL3 REAL - kV Voltage in phase L3

9.2.7 Operation principle M15330-3 v10

Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV is used to detect high power system voltage.
OV2PTOV has two steps with separate time delays. If one-, two- or three-phase voltages
increase above the set value, a corresponding START signal is issued. OV2PTOV can be set to
START/TRIP, based on 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3 of the measured voltages, being above
the set point. If the voltage remains above the set value for a time period corresponding to the
chosen time delay, the corresponding trip signal is issued.

The time delay characteristic is individually chosen for the two steps, and can be either
definite time or inverse time delayed.

The voltage related settings are made in percent of the global set base voltage UBase, which is
set in kV, phase-to-phase.

OV2PTOV can be set to measure phase-to-earth fundamental value, phase-to-phase

fundamental value, phase-to-earth RMS value or phase-to-phase RMS value. The choice of
measuring is done by the parameter ConnType.

The setting of the analog inputs are given as primary phase-to-earth or phase-to-phase
voltage. OV2PTOV will operate if the voltage gets higher than the set percentage of the set
base voltage UBase. This means operation for phase-to-earth voltage over:

U > (%) × UBase( kV )

3
EQUATION1434 V1 EN-US (Equation 56)

and operation for phase-to-phase voltage over:

U > (%) × UBase(kV)

EQUATION1993 V1 EN-US (Equation 57)

277
Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Voltage protection

When phase-to-earth voltage measurement is selected the function

automatically introduces division of the base value by the square root of three.

9.2.7.1 Measurement principle M15330-6 v6

All the three voltages are measured continuously, and compared with the set values, U1> for
Step 1 and U2> for Step 2. The parameters OpMode1 and OpMode2 influence the requirements
to activate the START outputs. Either 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3 measured voltages have
to be higher than the corresponding set point to issue the corresponding START signal.

To avoid oscillations of the output START signal, a hysteresis is included.

9.2.7.2 Time delay M15330-10 v10

The time delay for the two steps can be either definite time delay (DT) or inverse time delay
(IDMT). For the inverse time delay four different modes are available:

• inverse curve A
• inverse curve B
• inverse curve C
• customer programmable inverse curve

The type A curve is described as:

k
t=
æ U - Un > ö
ç ÷
è Un > ø
IECEQUATION2422 V1 EN-US (Equation 58)

where:
Un> Set value for step 1 and step 2
U Measured voltage

The type B curve is described as:

k  480
t 2.0
 0.035
 U  Un  
 32   0.5 
 Un  

IECEQUATION2423 V2 EN-US (Equation 59)

The type C curve is described as:

k × 480
t= 3.0
+ 0.035
æ U - Un > ö
ç 32 × - 0.5 ÷
è U n > ø
IECEQUATION2425 V1 EN-US (Equation 60)

278
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 9
Voltage protection

The customer programmable curve is defined by the below equation, where A, B, C, D, k and p
are settings:

k×A
t= p
+D
æ U -Un > ö
çB× -C÷
è Un > ø
EQUATION1439 V2 EN-US (Equation 61)

When the denominator in the expression is equal to zero the time delay will be infinity. There
will be an undesired discontinuity. Therefore, a tuning parameter CrvSatn is set to compensate
for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval Un> up to Un> · (1.0 + CrvSatn/100) the used
voltage will be: Un> · (1.0 + CrvSatn/100). If the programmable curve is used this parameter
must be calculated so that:

CrvSatn
B× -C > 0
100
EQUATION1435 V1 EN-US (Equation 62)

The highest phase (or phase-to-phase) voltage is always used for the inverse time delay
integration, see figure 140. The details of the different inverse time characteristics are shown
in section "Inverse characteristics".

Voltage
IDMT Voltage

UL1
UL2
UL3

Time

IEC05000016-2-en.vsd
IEC05000016 V2 EN-US

Figure 140: Voltage used for the inverse time characteristic integration
Operation of the trip signal requires that the overvoltage condition continues for at least the
user set time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for definite time mode
(DT) and by selected voltage level dependent time curves for the inverse time mode (IDMT). If
the START condition, with respect to the measured voltage ceases during the delay time, and
is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time (tReset1 and tReset2 for the definite time
and tIReset1 and tIReset2 for the inverse time) the corresponding START output is reset, after
that the defined reset time has elapsed. Here it should be noted that after leaving the
hysteresis area, the START condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the
signal to only return back to the hysteresis area. The hysteresis value for each step is settable
HystAbsn (where n means either 1 or 2 respectively) to allow a high and accurate reset of the
function. For OV2PTOV the IDMT reset time is constant and does not depend on the voltage
fluctuations during the drop-off period. However, there are three ways to reset the timer:

279
Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Voltage protection

either the timer is reset instantaneously, or the timer value is frozen during the reset time, or
the timer value is linearly decreased during the reset time.

tIReset1
Voltage
START
TRIP

U1>

HystAbs1 Measured
Voltage

Time

START t

TRIP

Time
Integrator Linearly decreased
Frozen Timer
t

Instantaneous Time
IEC09000055‐3‐en.vsdx

IEC09000055 V3 EN-US

Figure 141: Voltage profile not causing a reset of the START signal for step 1, and inverse time delay at
different reset types

280
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 9
Voltage protection

tIReset1
Voltage
START TRIP
START HystAbs1

U1>
Measured
Voltage

Time

START t

TRIP

Time
Integrator Frozen Timer

Time
Linearly
Instantaneous decreased
IEC05000020‐4‐en.vsdx

IEC05000020 V4 EN-US

Figure 142: Voltage profile causing a reset of the START signal for step 1, and inverse time delay at
different reset types
Definite time delay

When definite time delay is selected, the function will operate as shown in figure 143. Detailed
information about individual stage reset/operation behavior is shown in figure 144 and figure
145 respectively. Note that by setting tResetn = 0.0s (where n means either 1 or 2 respectively),
instantaneous reset of the definite time delayed stage is ensured.

281
Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Voltage protection

ST1

U tReset1 t1
a
a>b t t
TR1
U1>
b AND
OFF ON
Delay Delay

IEC10000100-2-en.vsd
IEC10000100 V2 EN-US

Figure 143: Logic diagram for step 1, definite time delay, DT operation

U1>

START

TRIP

tReset1

t1

IEC10000037-2-en.vsd
IEC10000037 V2 EN-US

Figure 144: Example for step 1, Definite Time Delay stage 1 reset

U1>

START

TRIP

tReset1

t1

IEC10000038-2-en.vsd
IEC10000038 V2 EN-US

Figure 145: Example for Definite Time Delay stage 1 operation

282
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 9
Voltage protection

9.2.7.3 Blocking M15330-20 v7

It is possible to block Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV partially or completely, by

binary input signals where:

BLOCK: blocks all outputs

BLKTR1: blocks all trip outputs of step 1
BLKST1: blocks all start and trip outputs related to step 1
BLKTR2: blocks all trip outputs of step 2
BLKST2: blocks all start and trip outputs related to step 2

9.2.7.4 Design M15330-34 v7

The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the three phase-to-earth voltages or
the three phase-to-phase voltages. Recursive Fourier filters or true RMS filters of input voltage
signals are used. The phase voltages are individually compared to the set value, and the
highest voltage is used for the inverse time characteristic integration. A special logic is
included to achieve the 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3 criteria to fulfill the START condition.
The design of Two step overvoltage protection (OV2PTOV) is schematically described in
figure 146.

283
Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Voltage protection

UL1 Comparator ST1L1

UL1 > U1> Phase 1
Voltage Phase
Selector ST1L2
UL2 Comparator OpMode1 Phase 2
UL2 > U1> 1 out of 3
Start ST1L3
2 out of 3
3 out of 3 Phase 3 t1
UL3 Comparator t1Reset
UL3 > U1> & ST1
OR
Trip
START Output TR1L1
Logic

Time integrator Step 1 TR1L2

TRIP
MaxVoltSelect tIreset1
ResetTypeCrv1 TR1L3

OR TR1

Comparator ST2L1
UL1 > U2> Phase 1
Voltage Phase
Selector ST2L2
Comparator OpMode2 Phase 2
UL2 > U2> 1 out of 3
Start ST2L3
2 out of 3
Phase 3 t2
3 out of 3
Comparator t2Reset
UL3 > U2> & ST2
OR
Trip
START Output TR2L1
Logic

Time integrator Step 2 TR2L2

MaxVoltSelect tIreset2 TRIP
ResetTypeCrv2 TR2L3

TR2
OR

START
OR

TRIP
OR

IEC05000013-2-en.vsd

IEC05000013-WMF V2 EN-US

Figure 146: Schematic design of Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV

9.2.8 Technical data IP13013-1 v1

M13304-1 v13

Table 188: OV2PTOV technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate voltage, step 1 and 2 (1.0-200.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur
±0.5% of U at U > Ur

Absolute hysteresis (0.0–50.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur

±0.5% of U at U > Ur

Inverse time characteristics - See table 829

for steps 1 and 2, see
table 829
Definite time delay, low step (0.00 - 6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms whichever is
(step 1) at 0 to 1.2 x Uset greater

Table continues on next page

284
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 9
Voltage protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Definite time delay, high step (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms whichever is
(step 2) at 0 to 1.2 x Uset greater

Minimum operate time, (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms whichever is

Inverse characteristics greater
Operate time, start at 0 to 2 x Min. = 15 ms -
Uset Max. = 30 ms

Reset time, start at 2 to 0 x Min. = 15 ms -

Uset Max. = 30 ms

Operate time, start at 0 to 1.2 Min. = 20 ms -

x Uset Max. = 35 ms

Reset time, start at 1.2 to 0 x Min. = 5 ms -

Uset Max. = 25 ms

Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

9.3 Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV IP14546-1 v4

9.3.1 Identification
SEMOD54295-2 v5

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Two step residual overvoltage ROV2PTOV 59N
protection
3U0
TRV V1 EN-US

9.3.2 Functionality M13808-3 v10

Residual voltages may occur in the power system during earth faults.

Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV function calculates the residual voltage
from the three-phase voltage input transformers or measures it from a single voltage input
transformer fed from an open delta or neutral point voltage transformer.

ROV2PTOV has two voltage steps, each with inverse or definite time delay.

Reset delay ensures operation for intermittent earth faults.

9.3.3 Function block M13812-3 v6

ROV2PTOV
U3P* TRIP
BLOCK TR1
BLKTR1 TR2
BLKST1 START
BLKTR2 ST1
BLKST2 ST2

IEC06000278-2-en.vsd
IEC06000278 V2 EN-US

Figure 147: ROV2PTOV function block

285
Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Voltage protection

9.3.4 Signals
PID-3531-INPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 189: ROV2PTOV Input signals

Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Three phase voltages
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of operate signal, step 1
BLKST1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1
BLKTR2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of operate signal, step 2
BLKST2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 2

PID-3531-OUTPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 190: ROV2PTOV Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
TR1 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step1
TR2 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step2
START BOOLEAN General start signal
ST1 BOOLEAN Common start signal from step1
ST2 BOOLEAN Common start signal from step2

9.3.5 Settings
PID-3531-SETTINGS v5

Table 191: ROV2PTOV Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OperationStep1 Off - - On Enable execution of step 1
On
Characterist1 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for
Inverse curve A step 1
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
U1> 1.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 30.0 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT),
step 1 in % of UBase
t1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 5.00 Definitive time delay of step 1
t1Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Minimum operate time for inverse
curves for step 1
k1 0.05 - 1.10 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time
delay for step 1
HystAbs1 0.0 - 50.0 %UB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase,
step 1
OperationStep2 Off - - On Enable execution of step 2
On
Table continues on next page

286
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 9
Voltage protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Characterist2 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for
Inverse curve A step 2
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
U2> 1.0 - 100.0 %UB 0.1 45.0 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT),
step 2 in % of UBase
t2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Definitive time delay of step 2
t2Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Minimum operate time for inverse
curves for step 2
k2 0.05 - 1.10 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time
delay for step 2
HystAbs2 0.0 - 50.0 %UB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase,
step 2

Table 192: ROV2PTOV Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tReset1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite
Time curve step 1
ResetTypeCrv1 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of used IDMT reset curve
Frozen timer type for step 1
Linearly
decreased
tIReset1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 1
ACrv1 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter A for customer
programmable curve for step 1
BCrv1 0.50 - 100.00 - 0.01 1.00 Parameter B for customer
programmable curve for step 1
CCrv1 0.0 - 1.0 - 0.1 0.0 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve for step 1
DCrv1 0.000 - 60.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer
programmable curve for step 1
PCrv1 0.000 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer
programmable curve for step 1
CrvSat1 0 - 100 % 1 0 Tuning param for prog. over voltage
IDMT curve, step 1
tReset2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Time delay in DT reset (s), step 2
ResetTypeCrv2 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of used IDMT reset curve
Frozen timer type for step 2
Linearly
decreased
tIReset2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 2
ACrv2 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter A for customer
programmable curve for step 2
BCrv2 0.50 - 100.00 - 0.01 1.00 Parameter B for customer
programmable curve for step 2
CCrv2 0.0 - 1.0 - 0.1 0.0 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve for step 2
Table continues on next page

287
Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Voltage protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

DCrv2 0.000 - 60.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer
programmable curve for step 2
PCrv2 0.000 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer
programmable curve for step 2
CrvSat2 0 - 100 % 1 0 Tuning param for prog. over voltage
IDMT curve, step 2

Table 193: ROV2PTOV Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

9.3.6 Monitored data

PID-3531-MONITOREDDATA v4

Table 194: ROV2PTOV Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
ULevel REAL - kV Magnitude of measured voltage

9.3.7 Operation principle M15331-3 v7

Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV is used to detect high single-phase
voltage, such as high residual voltage, also called 3U0. The residual voltage can be measured
directly from a voltage transformer in the neutral of a power transformer or from a three-
phase voltage transformer, where the secondary windings are connected in an open delta.
Another possibility is to measure the three-phase voltages and internally in the IED calculate
the corresponding residual voltage and connect this calculated residual voltage to ROV2PTOV.
ROV2PTOV has two steps with separate time delays. If the single-phase (residual) voltage
remains above the set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time delay, the
corresponding TRIP signal is issued.

The time delay characteristic is individually chosen for the two steps and can be either,
definite time delay or inverse time delay.

The voltage related settings are made in percent of the base voltage, which is set in kV, phase-
phase.

9.3.7.1 Measurement principle M15331-6 v5

The residual voltage is measured continuously, and compared with the set values, U1> and
U2>.

To avoid oscillations of the output START signal, a hysteresis has been included.

9.3.7.2 Time delay M15331-10 v10

The time delay for the two steps can be either definite time delay (DT) or inverse time delay
(IDMT). For the inverse time delay four different modes are available:

288
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 9
Voltage protection

• inverse curve A
• inverse curve B
• inverse curve C
• customer programmable inverse curve

The type A curve is described as:

k
t=
æ U - Un > ö
ç ÷
è Un > ø
IECEQUATION2422 V1 EN-US (Equation 63)

where:
Un> Set value for step 1 and step 2
U Measured voltage

The type B curve is described as:

k  480
t 2.0
 0.035
 U  Un  
 32   0.5 
 U n  

IECEQUATION2423 V2 EN-US (Equation 64)

The type C curve is described as:

k × 480
t= 3.0
+ 0.035
æ U - Un > ö
ç 32 × - 0.5 ÷
è U> ø
IECEQUATION2421 V1 EN-US (Equation 65)

The customer programmable curve can be created as:

k×A
t= p
+D
æ U -Un > ö
çB× -C÷
è Un > ø
EQUATION1439 V2 EN-US (Equation 66)

When the denominator in the expression is equal to zero the time delay will be infinity. There
will be an undesired discontinuity. Therefore a tuning parameter CrvSatn is set to compensate
for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval Un> up to Un> · (1.0 + CrvSatn/100) the used
voltage will be: Un> · (1.0 + CrvSatn/100). If the programmable curve is used this parameter
must be calculated so that:

CrvSatn
B× -C > 0
100
EQUATION1440 V1 EN-US (Equation 67)

289
Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Voltage protection

The details of the different inverse time characteristics are shown in section "Inverse
characteristics".

TRIP signal issuing requires that the residual overvoltage condition continues for at least the
user set time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for definite time mode
(DT) and by some special voltage level dependent time curves for the inverse time mode
(IDMT).

If the START condition, with respect to the measured voltage ceases during the delay time, and
is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time (tReset1 and tReset2 for the definite time
and tIReset1 and tIReset2 for the inverse time) the corresponding START output is reset, after
the defined reset time has elapsed.

Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the START condition must be
fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area.
Also notice that for the overvoltage function IDMT reset time is constant and does not depend
on the voltage fluctuations during the drop-off period. However, there are three ways to reset
the timer, either the timer is reset instantaneously, or the timer value is frozen during the reset
time, or the timer value is linearly decreased during the reset time. See figure 148 and
figure 149.

tIReset1
Voltage
START
TRIP

U1>

HystAbs1 Measured
Voltage

Time

START t

TRIP

Time
Integrator Linearly decreased
Frozen Timer
t

Instantaneous Time
IEC09000055‐3‐en.vsdx

IEC09000055 V3 EN-US

Figure 148: Voltage profile not causing a reset of the START signal for step 1, and inverse time delay

290
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 9
Voltage protection

tIReset1
Voltage
START TRIP
START HystAbs1

U1>
Measured
Voltage

Time

START t

TRIP

Time
Integrator Frozen Timer

Time
Linearly
Instantaneous decreased
IEC05000020‐4‐en.vsdx

IEC05000020 V4 EN-US

Figure 149: Voltage profile causing a reset of the START signal for step 1, and inverse time delay
Definite timer delay

When definite time delay is selected, the function will operate as shown in figure 150. Detailed
information about individual stage reset/operation behavior is shown in figure 151 and figure
152 respectively. Note that by setting tResetn = 0.0s, instantaneous reset of the definite time
delayed stage is ensured.

291
Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Voltage protection

ST1

U tReset1 t1
a
a>b t t
TR1
U1>
b AND
OFF ON
Delay Delay

IEC10000100-2-en.vsd
IEC10000100 V2 EN-US

Figure 150: Logic diagram for step 1, Definite time delay, DT operation

U1<

ST1

TR1

tReset1

t1

IEC10000039-3-en.vsd
IEC10000039 V3 EN-US

Figure 151: Example for Definite Time Delay stage 1 reset

U1<

ST1

TR1

tReset1

t1

IEC10000040-3-en.vsd
IEC10000040 V3 EN-US

Figure 152: Example for Definite Time Delay stage 1 operation

292
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 9
Voltage protection

9.3.7.3 Blocking M15331-18 v6

It is possible to block Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV partially or

completely, by binary input signals where:

BLOCK: blocks all outputs

BLKTR1: blocks all trip outputs of step 1
BLKST1: blocks all start and trip outputs related to step 1
BLKTR2: blocks all trip outputs of step 2
BLKST2: blocks all start and trip inputs related to step 2

9.3.7.4 Design M15331-32 v6

The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the residual voltage. Recursive Fourier
filters filter the input voltage signal for the rated frequency. The single input voltage is
compared to the set value, and is also used for the inverse time characteristic integration. The
design of Two step residual overvoltage protection (ROV2PTOV) is schematically described in
figure 153.

UN Comparator Phase 1 ST1

UN > U1>
Start TR1
START t1
tReset1
&
Trip
Time integrator Output
tIReset1 TRIP
Logic
ResetTypeCrv1
Step 1

ST2
Comparator Phase 1
UN > U2> TR2
Start
t2
START tReset2
& START
Trip OR
Time integrator Output
TRIP Logic
tIReset2
ResetTypeCrv2 TRIP
Step 2 OR

IEC05000748_2_en.vsd
IEC05000748 V2 EN-US

Figure 153: Schematic design of Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV

293
Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Voltage protection

9.3.8 Technical data

M13317-2 v13

Table 195: ROV2PTOV technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate voltage, step 1 - step 2 (1.0-200.0)% of UBase ± 0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur
± 0.5% of U at U > Ur

Absolute hysteresis (0.0–50.0)% of UBase ± 0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur

± 0.5% of U at U > Ur

Inverse time characteristics for - See table 831

low and high step, see table 831
Definite time delay low step (0.00–6000.00) s ± 0.2% or ± 45 ms whichever is
(step 1) at 0 to 1.2 x Uset greater

Definite time delay high step (0.000–60.000) s ± 0.2% or ± 45 ms whichever is

(step 2) at 0 to 1.2 x Uset greater

Minimum operate time (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.2% or ± 45 ms whichever is

greater
Operate time, start at 0 to 2 x Min. = 15 ms -
Uset Max. = 30 ms

Reset time, start at 2 to 0 x Uset Min. = 15 ms -

Max. = 30 ms
Operate time, start at 0 to 1.2 x Min. = 20 ms -
Uset Max. = 35 ms

Reset time, start at 1.2 to 0 x Min. = 5 ms -

Uset Max. = 25 ms

Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

9.4 Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV SEMOD171453-1 v3

9.4.1 Identification
SEMOD171954-2 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV - 27

9.4.2 Functionality SEMOD171457-5 v7

Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV is suitable for use in networks with an automatic system
restoration function. LOVPTUV issues a three-pole trip command to the circuit breaker, if all
three phase voltages fall below the set value for a time longer than the set time and the circuit
breaker remains closed.

The operation of LOVPTUV is supervised by the fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC.

294
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 9
Voltage protection

9.4.3 Function block SEMOD171785-4 v4

LOVPTUV
U3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
CBOPEN
VTSU

IEC07000039-2-en.vsd
IEC07000039 V2 EN-US

Figure 154: LOVPTUV function block

9.4.4 Signals
PID-3519-INPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 196: LOVPTUV Input signals

Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Voltage connection
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block the all outputs
CBOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Circuit breaker open
VTSU BOOLEAN 0 Block from voltage circuit supervision

PID-3519-OUTPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 197: LOVPTUV Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip signal
START BOOLEAN Start signal

9.4.5 Settings
PID-3519-SETTINGS v5

Table 198: LOVPTUV Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
UPE 1 - 100 %UB 1 70 Operate voltage in % of base voltage
UBase
tTrip 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 7.000 Operate time delay

Table 199: LOVPTUV Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tPulse 0.050 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Duration of TRIP pulse
tBlock 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Time delay to block when all 3ph
voltages are not low
tRestore 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 3.000 Time delay for enable the function
after restoration

295
Technical manual
Section 9 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Voltage protection

Table 200: LOVPTUV Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

9.4.6 Operation principle SEMOD171765-4 v6

The operation of Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV is based on line voltage measurement.
LOVPTUV is provided with a logic, which automatically recognizes if the line was restored for
at least tRestore before starting the tTrip timer. All three phases are required to be low before
the output TRIP is activated. The START output signal indicates start.

Additionally, LOVPTUV is automatically blocked if only one or two phase voltages have been
detected low for more than tBlock.

LOVPTUV operates again only if the line has been restored to full voltage for at least tRestore.
Operation of the function is also inhibited by fuse failure and open circuit breaker information
signals, by their connection to dedicated inputs of the function block.

Due to undervoltage conditions being continuous the trip pulse is limited to a length set by
setting tPulse.

The operation of LOVPTUV is supervised by the fuse-failure function (BLKU input) and the
information about the open position (CBOPEN) of the associated circuit breaker.

The BLOCK input can be connected to a binary input of the IED in order to receive a block
command from external devices or can be software connected to other internal functions of
the IED itself in order to receive a block command from internal functions. LOVPTUV is also
blocked when the IED is in TEST status and the function has been blocked from the HMI test
menu. (Blocked=Yes).

296
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 9
Voltage protection

TEST

TEST-ACTIVE
&
Blocked = Yes

START
BLOCK >1
Function Enable tTrip tPulse TRIP
STUL1N & t

STUL2N &
only 1 or 2 phases are low for
Latched at least 10 s (not three)
STUL3N Enable
&

tBlock
>1 t

CBOPEN Reset Enable

>1
&
VTSU
tRestore
>1 Set Enable
t
>1
Line restored for
at least 3 s

IEC07000089_2_en.vsd

IEC07000089 V2 EN-US

Figure 155: Simplified diagram of Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV

9.4.7 Technical data

SEMOD175210-2 v6

Table 201: LOVPTUV technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate voltage (1–100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

Pulse timer when (0.050–60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater

disconnecting all three phases
Time delay for enabling the (0.000–60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
functions after restoration
Operate time delay when (0.000–60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
disconnecting all three phases
Time delay to block when all (0.000–60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
three phase voltages are not
low

297
Technical manual
298
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 10
Multipurpose protection

Section 10 Multipurpose protection

10.1 General current and voltage protection CVGAPC IP14552-1 v2

10.1.1 Identification
M14886-2 v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
General current and voltage CVGAPC 2(I>/U<) -
protection

10.1.2 Functionality
M13083-11 v9
The General current and voltage protection (CVGAPC) can be utilized as a negative sequence
current protection detecting unsymmetrical conditions such as open phase or unsymmetrical
faults.

CVGAPC can also be used to improve phase selection for high resistive earth faults, outside
the distance protection reach, for the transmission line. Three functions are used, which
measures the neutral current and each of the three phase voltages. This will give an
independence from load currents and this phase selection will be used in conjunction with the
detection of the earth fault from the directional earth fault protection function.

10.1.3 Function block M13748-3 v3

CVGAPC
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TROC1
BLOCK TROC2
BLKOC1 TRUC1
BLKOC1TR TRUC2
ENMLTOC1 TROV1
BLKOC2 TROV2
BLKOC2TR TRUV1
ENMLTOC2 TRUV2
BLKUC1 START
BLKUC1TR STOC1
BLKUC2 STOC2
BLKUC2TR STUC1
BLKOV1 STUC2
BLKOV1TR STOV1
BLKOV2 STOV2
BLKOV2TR STUV1
BLKUV1 STUV2
BLKUV1TR BLK2ND
BLKUV2 DIROC1
BLKUV2TR DIROC2
UDIRLOW
CURRENT
ICOSFI
VOLTAGE
UIANGLE

IEC05000372-2-en.vsd
IEC05000372 V2 EN-US

Figure 156: CVGAPC function block

299
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Multipurpose protection

10.1.4 Signals
PID-3857-INPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 202: CVGAPC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKOC1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of over current function OC1
BLKOC1TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for over current function OC1
ENMLTOC1 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for OC1
BLKOC2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of over current function OC2
BLKOC2TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for over current function OC2
ENMLTOC2 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for OC2
BLKUC1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of under current function UC1
BLKUC1TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for under current function UC1
BLKUC2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of under current function UC2
BLKUC2TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for under current function UC2
BLKOV1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of over voltage function OV1
BLKOV1TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for over voltage function OV1
BLKOV2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of over voltage function OV2
BLKOV2TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for over voltage function OV2
BLKUV1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of under voltage function UV1
BLKUV1TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for under voltage function UV1
BLKUV2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of under voltage function UV2
BLKUV2TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for under voltage function UV2

PID-3857-OUTPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 203: CVGAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General trip signal
TROC1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from overcurrent function OC1
TROC2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from overcurrent function OC2
TRUC1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from undercurrent function UC1
TRUC2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from undercurrent function UC2
TROV1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from overvoltage function OV1
TROV2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from overvoltage function OV2
TRUV1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from undervoltage function UV1
TRUV2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from undervoltage function UV2
START BOOLEAN General start signal
STOC1 BOOLEAN Start signal from overcurrent function OC1
STOC2 BOOLEAN Start signal from overcurrent function OC2
Table continues on next page

300
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 10
Multipurpose protection

Name Type Description

STUC1 BOOLEAN Start signal from undercurrent function UC1
STUC2 BOOLEAN Start signal from undercurrent function UC2
STOV1 BOOLEAN Start signal from overvoltage function OV1
STOV2 BOOLEAN Start signal from overvoltage function OV2
STUV1 BOOLEAN Start signal from undervoltage function UV1
STUV2 BOOLEAN Start signal from undervoltage function UV2
BLK2ND BOOLEAN Block from second harmonic detection
DIROC1 INTEGER Directional mode of OC1 (nondir, forward,reverse)
DIROC2 INTEGER Directional mode of OC2 (nondir, forward,reverse)
UDIRLOW BOOLEAN Low voltage for directional polarization
CURRENT REAL Measured current value
ICOSFI REAL Measured current multiplied with cos (Phi)
VOLTAGE REAL Measured voltage value
UIANGLE REAL Angle between voltage and current

10.1.5 Settings
PID-3857-SETTINGS v7

Table 204: CVGAPC Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
CurrentInput phase1 - - MaxPh Select current signal which will be
phase2 measured inside function
phase3
PosSeq
NegSeq
3*ZeroSeq
MaxPh
MinPh
UnbalancePh
phase1-phase2
phase2-phase3
phase3-phase1
MaxPh-Ph
MinPh-Ph
UnbalancePh-Ph
VoltageInput phase1 - - MaxPh Select voltage signal which will be
phase2 measured inside function
phase3
PosSeq
-NegSeq
-3*ZeroSeq
MaxPh
MinPh
UnbalancePh
phase1-phase2
phase2-phase3
phase3-phase1
MaxPh-Ph
MinPh-Ph
UnbalancePh-Ph
OperHarmRestr Off - - Off Operation of 2nd harmonic restrain
On Off / On
Table continues on next page

301
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Multipurpose protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

l_2nd/l_fund 10.0 - 50.0 % 1.0 20.0 Ratio of second to fundamental
current harmonic in %
BlkLevel2nd 10 - 5000 %IB 1 5000 Harm analyse disabled above this
current level in % of fundamental
current
EnRestrainCurr Off - - Off Enable current restrain function On /
On Off
RestrCurrInput PosSeq - - PosSeq Select current signal which will be
NegSeq used for curr restrain
3*ZeroSeq
Max
RestrCurrCoeff 0.00 - 5.00 - 0.01 0.00 Restraining current coefficient
RCADir -180 - 180 Deg 1 -75 Relay Characteristic Angle
ROADir 1 - 90 Deg 1 75 Relay Operate Angle
LowVolt_VM 0.0 - 5.0 %UB 0.1 0.5 Below this level in % of UBase setting
ActLowVolt takes over
Operation_OC1 Off - - Off Operation OC1 Off / On
On
StartCurr_OC1 2.0 - 5000.0 %IB 1.0 120.0 Operate current level for OC1 in % of
IBase
CurveType_OC1 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type for
ANSI Very inv. OC1
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Programmable
RI type
RD type
tDef_OC1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.50 Independent (definite) time delay of
OC1
k_OC1 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.30 Time multiplier for the dependent
time delay for OC1
IMin1 1 - 10000 %IB 1 100 Minimum operate current for step1 in
% of IBase
tMin_OC1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.05 Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT
curves for OC1
VCntrlMode_OC1 Voltage control - - Off Control mode for voltage controlled
Off OC1 function
VDepMode_OC1 Step - - Step Voltage dependent mode OC1 (step,
Slope slope)
VDepFact_OC1 0.02 - 5.00 - 0.01 1.00 Multiplying factor for I pickup when
OC1 is U dependent
ULowLimit_OC1 1.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Voltage low limit setting OC1 in % of
UBase
UHighLimit_OC1 1.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 100.0 Voltage high limit setting OC1 in % of
UBase
Table continues on next page

302
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 10
Multipurpose protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

HarmRestr_OC1 Off - - Off Enable block of OC1 by 2nd harmonic
On restrain
DirMode_OC1 Non-directional - - Non-directional Directional mode of OC1 (nondir,
Forward forward, reverse)
Reverse
DirPrinc_OC1 I&U - - I&U Measuring on IandU or IcosPhiandU
IcosPhi&U for OC1
ActLowVolt1_VM Non-directional - - Non-directional Low voltage level action for Dir_OC1
Block (Nodir, Blk, Mem)
Memory
Operation_OC2 Off - - Off Operation OC2 Off / On
On
StartCurr_OC2 2.0 - 5000.0 %IB 1.0 120.0 Operate current level for OC2 in % of
IBase
CurveType_OC2 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type for
ANSI Very inv. OC2
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Programmable
RI type
RD type
tDef_OC2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.50 Independent (definite) time delay of
OC2
k_OC2 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.30 Time multiplier for the dependent
time delay for OC2
IMin2 1 - 10000 %IB 1 50 Minimum operate current for step2 in
% of IBase
tMin_OC2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.05 Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT
curves for OC2
VCntrlMode_OC2 Voltage control - - Off Control mode for voltage controlled
Off OC2 function
VDepMode_OC2 Step - - Step Voltage dependent mode OC2 (step,
Slope slope)
VDepFact_OC2 0.02 - 5.00 - 0.01 1.00 Multiplying factor for I pickup when
OC2 is U dependent
ULowLimit_OC2 1.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Voltage low limit setting OC2 in % of
UBase
UHighLimit_OC2 1.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 100.0 Voltage high limit setting OC2 in % of
UBase
HarmRestr_OC2 Off - - Off Enable block of OC2 by 2nd harmonic
On restrain
DirMode_OC2 Non-directional - - Non-directional Directional mode of OC2 (nondir,
Forward forward, reverse)
Reverse
DirPrinc_OC2 I&U - - I&U Measuring on IandU or IcosPhiandU
IcosPhi&U for OC2
Table continues on next page

303
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Multipurpose protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

ActLowVolt2_VM Non-directional - - Non-directional Low voltage level action for Dir_OC2
Block (Nodir, Blk, Mem)
Memory
Operation_UC1 Off - - Off Operation UC1 Off / On
On
EnBlkLowI_UC1 Off - - Off Enable internal low current level
On blocking for UC1
BlkLowCurr_UC1 0 - 150 %IB 1 20 Internal low current blocking level for
UC1 in % of IBase
StartCurr_UC1 2.0 - 150.0 %IB 1.0 70.0 Operate undercurrent level for UC1 in
% of IBase
tDef_UC1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.50 Independent (definite) time delay of
UC1
tResetDef_UC1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite
Time curve UC1
HarmRestr_UC1 Off - - Off Enable block of UC1 by 2nd harmonic
On restrain
Operation_UC2 Off - - Off Operation UC2 Off / On
On
EnBlkLowI_UC2 Off - - Off Enable internal low current level
On blocking for UC2
BlkLowCurr_UC2 0 - 150 %IB 1 20 Internal low current blocking level for
UC2 in % of IBase
StartCurr_UC2 2.0 - 150.0 %IB 1.0 70.0 Operate undercurrent level for UC2 in
% of IBase
tDef_UC2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.50 Independent (definite) time delay of
UC2
HarmRestr_UC2 Off - - Off Enable block of UC2 by 2nd harmonic
On restrain
Operation_OV1 Off - - Off Operation OV1 Off / On
On
StartVolt_OV1 2.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 Operate voltage level for OV1 in % of
UBase
CurveType_OV1 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for
Inverse curve A OV1
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
tDef_OV1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 1.00 Operate time delay in sec for definite
time use of OV1
tMin_OV1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.05 Minimum operate time for IDMT
curves for OV1
k_OV1 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.30 Time multiplier for the dependent
time delay for OV1
Operation_OV2 Off - - Off Operation OV2 Off / On
On
StartVolt_OV2 2.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 Operate voltage level for OV2 in % of
UBase
CurveType_OV2 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for
Inverse curve A OV2
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
Table continues on next page

304
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 10
Multipurpose protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tDef_OV2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 1.00 Operate time delay in sec for definite
time use of OV2
tMin_OV2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.05 Minimum operate time for IDMT
curves for OV2
k_OV2 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.30 Time multiplier for the dependent
time delay for OV2
Operation_UV1 Off - - Off Operation UV1 Off / On
On
StartVolt_UV1 2.0 - 150.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Operate undervoltage level for UV1 in
% of UBase
CurveType_UV1 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for
Inverse curve A UV1
Inverse curve B
Prog. inv. curve
tDef_UV1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 1.00 Operate time delay in sec for definite
time use of UV1
tMin_UV1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.05 Minimum operate time for IDMT
curves for UV1
k_UV1 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.30 Time multiplier for the dependent
time delay for UV1
EnBlkLowV_UV1 Off - - On Enable internal low voltage level
On blocking for UV1
BlkLowVolt_UV1 0.0 - 5.0 %UB 0.1 0.5 Internal low voltage blocking level for
UV1 in % of UBase
Operation_UV2 Off - - Off Operation UV2 Off / On
On
StartVolt_UV2 2.0 - 150.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Operate undervoltage level for UV2 in
% of UBase
CurveType_UV2 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for
Inverse curve A UV2
Inverse curve B
Prog. inv. curve
tDef_UV2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 1.00 Operate time delay in sec for definite
time use of UV2
tMin_UV2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.05 Minimum operate time for IDMT
curves for UV2
k_UV2 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.30 Time multiplier for the dependent
time delay for UV2
EnBlkLowV_UV2 Off - - On Enable internal low voltage level
On blocking for UV2
BlkLowVolt_UV2 0.0 - 5.0 %UB 0.1 0.5 Internal low voltage blocking level for
UV2 in % of UBase

Table 205: CVGAPC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CurrMult_OC1 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for scaling the current
setting value for OC1
ResCrvType_OC1 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for OC1
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
tResetDef_OC1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite
Time curve OC1
Table continues on next page

305
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Multipurpose protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

P_OC1 0.001 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.020 Parameter P for customer
programmable curve for OC1
A_OC1 0.000 - 999.000 - 0.001 0.140 Parameter A for customer
programmable curve for OC1
B_OC1 0.000 - 99.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter B for customer
programmable curve for OC1
C_OC1 0.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve for OC1
PR_OC1 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Parameter PR for customer
programmable curve for OC1
TR_OC1 0.005 - 600.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter TR for customer
programmable curve for OC1
CR_OC1 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter CR for customer
programmable curve for OC1
CurrMult_OC2 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for scaling the current
setting value for OC2
ResCrvType_OC2 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for OC2
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
tResetDef_OC2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite
Time curve OC2
P_OC2 0.001 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.020 Parameter P for customer
programmable curve for OC2
A_OC2 0.000 - 999.000 - 0.001 0.140 Parameter A for customer
programmable curve for OC2
B_OC2 0.000 - 99.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter B for customer
programmable curve for OC2
C_OC2 0.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve for OC2
PR_OC2 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Parameter PR for customer
programmable curve for OC2
TR_OC2 0.005 - 600.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter TR for customer
programmable curve for OC2
CR_OC2 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter CR for customer
programmable curve for OC2
tResetDef_UC2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite
Time curve UC2
ResCrvType_OV1 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for OV1
Frozen timer
Linearly
decreased
tResetDef_OV1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay in sec for definite
time use of OV1
tResetIDMT_OV1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay in sec for IDMT
curves for OV1
A_OV1 0.005 - 999.000 - 0.001 0.140 Parameter A for customer
programmable curve for OV1
B_OV1 0.500 - 99.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter B for customer
programmable curve for OV1
C_OV1 0.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve for OV1
D_OV1 0.000 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer
programmable curve for OV1
Table continues on next page

306
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 10
Multipurpose protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

P_OV1 0.001 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.020 Parameter P for customer
programmable curve for OV1
ResCrvType_OV2 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for OV2
Frozen timer
Linearly
decreased
tResetDef_OV2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay in sec for definite
time use of OV2
tResetIDMT_OV2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay in sec for IDMT
curves for OV2
A_OV2 0.005 - 999.000 - 0.001 0.140 Parameter A for customer
programmable curve for OV2
B_OV2 0.500 - 99.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter B for customer
programmable curve for OV2
C_OV2 0.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve for OV2
D_OV2 0.000 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer
programmable curve for OV2
P_OV2 0.001 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.020 Parameter P for customer
programmable curve for OV2
ResCrvType_UV1 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for UV1
Frozen timer
Linearly
decreased
tResetDef_UV1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay in sec for definite
time use of UV1
tResetIDMT_UV1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay in sec for IDMT
curves for UV1
A_UV1 0.005 - 999.000 - 0.001 0.140 Parameter A for customer
programmable curve for UV1
B_UV1 0.500 - 99.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter B for customer
programmable curve for UV1
C_UV1 0.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve for UV1
D_UV1 0.000 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer
programmable curve for UV1
P_UV1 0.001 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.020 Parameter P for customer
programmable curve for UV1
ResCrvType_UV2 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for UV2
Frozen timer
Linearly
decreased
tResetDef_UV2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay in sec for definite
time use of UV2
tResetIDMT_UV2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay in sec for IDMT
curves for UV2
A_UV2 0.005 - 999.000 - 0.001 0.140 Parameter A for customer
programmable curve for UV2
B_UV2 0.500 - 99.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter B for customer
programmable curve for UV2
Table continues on next page

307
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Multipurpose protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

C_UV2 0.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve for UV2
D_UV2 0.000 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer
programmable curve for UV2
P_UV2 0.001 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.020 Parameter P for customer
programmable curve for UV2

Table 206: CVGAPC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

10.1.6 Monitored data

PID-3857-MONITOREDDATA v5

Table 207: CVGAPC Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
DIROC1 INTEGER 1=Forward - Directional mode of OC1 (nondir,
0=Non- forward,reverse)
directional
2=Reverse
DIROC2 INTEGER 1=Forward - Directional mode of OC2 (nondir,
0=Non- forward,reverse)
directional
2=Reverse
CURRENT REAL - A Measured current value
ICOSFI REAL - A Measured current multiplied with cos
(Phi)
VOLTAGE REAL - kV Measured voltage value
UIANGLE REAL - deg Angle between voltage and current

10.1.7 Operation principle

10.1.7.1 Measured quantities within CVGAPC M13751-3 v3

General current and voltage protection (CVGAPC) function is always connected to three-phase
current and three-phase voltage input in the configuration tool, but it will always measure only
one current and one voltage quantity selected by the end user in the setting tool.

The user can select to measure one of the current quantities shown in table 208.

Table 208: Current selection for CVGAPC function

Set value for the
parameter Comment
CurrentInput
1 Phase1 CVGAPC function will measure the phase L1 current phasor
2 Phase2 CVGAPC function will measure the phase L2 current phasor
3 Phase3 CVGAPC function will measure the phase L3 current phasor
Table continues on next page

308
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 10
Multipurpose protection

Set value for the

parameter Comment
CurrentInput
4 PosSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated positive sequence current
phasor
5 NegSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated negative sequence current
phasor
6 3ZeroSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated zero sequence current phasor
multiplied by factor 3
7 MaxPh CVGAPC function will measure current phasor of the phase with maximum
magnitude
8 MinPh CVGAPC function will measure current phasor of the phase with minimum
magnitude
9 UnbalancePh CVGAPC function will measure magnitude of unbalance current, which is
internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between the current
phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude and current phasor of the phase
with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to 0° all the time
10 Phase1-Phase2 CVGAPC function will measure the current phasor internally calculated as the
vector difference between the phase L1 current phasor and phase L2 current
phasor (IL1-IL2)

11 Phase2-Phase3 CVGAPC function will measure the current phasor internally calculated as the
vector difference between the phase L2 current phasor and phase L3 current
phasor (IL2-IL3)

12 Phase3-Phase1 CVGAPC function will measure the current phasor internally calculated as the
vector difference between the phase L3 current phasor and phase L1 current
phasor ( IL3-IL1)

13 MaxPh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph current phasor with the maximum
magnitude
14 MinPh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph current phasor with the minimum
magnitude
15 UnbalancePh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure magnitude of unbalance current, which is
internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between the ph-ph
current phasor with maximum magnitude and ph-ph current phasor with
minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to 0° all the time

The user can select to measure one of the voltage quantities shown in table 209:

Table 209: Voltage selection for CVGAPC function

Set value for the
parameter Comment
VoltageInput
1 Phase1 CVGAPC function will measure the phase L1 voltage phasor
2 Phase2 CVGAPC function will measure the phase L2 voltage phasor
3 Phase3 CVGAPC function will measure the phase L3 voltage phasor
4 PosSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated positive sequence voltage
phasor
5 -NegSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated negative sequence voltage
phasor. This voltage phasor will be intentionally rotated for 180° in order to
enable easier settings for the directional feature when used.
6 -3ZeroSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated zero sequence voltage phasor
multiplied by factor 3. This voltage phasor will be intentionally rotated for 180° in
order to enable easier settings for the directional feature when used.
7 MaxPh CVGAPC function will measure voltage phasor of the phase with maximum
magnitude
Table continues on next page

309
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Multipurpose protection

Set value for the

parameter Comment
VoltageInput
8 MinPh CVGAPC function will measure voltage phasor of the phase with minimum
magnitude
9 UnbalancePh CVGAPC function will measure magnitude of unbalance voltage, which is
internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between the voltage
phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude and voltage phasor of the phase
with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to 0° all the time
10 Phase1-Phase2 CVGAPC function will measure the voltage phasor internally calculated as the
vector difference between the phase L1 voltage phasor and phase L2 voltage
phasor (UL1-UL2)

11 Phase2-Phase3 CVGAPC function will measure the voltage phasor internally calculated as the
vector difference between the phase L2 voltage phasor and phase L3 voltage
phasor (UL2-UL3)

12 Phase3-Phase1 CVGAPC function will measure the voltage phasor internally calculated as the
vector difference between the phase L3 voltage phasor and phase L1 voltage
phasor ( UL3-UL1)

13 MaxPh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph voltage phasor with the maximum
magnitude
14 MinPh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph voltage phasor with the minimum
magnitude
15 UnbalancePh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure magnitude of unbalance voltage, which is
internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between the ph-ph
voltage phasor with maximum magnitude and ph-ph voltage phasor with
minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to 0° all the time

It is important to notice that the voltage selection from table 209 is always applicable
regardless the actual external VT connections. The three-phase VT inputs can be connected to
IED as either three phase-to-ground voltages UL1, UL2 & UL3 or three phase-to-phase voltages
UL1L2, UL2L3 & UL3L1). This information about actual VT connection is entered as a setting
parameter for the pre-processing block, which will then take automatic care about it.

The user can select one of the current quantities shown in table 210 for built-in current
restraint feature:

Table 210: Restraint current selection for CVGAPC function

Set value for the
parameter RestrCurr Comment
1 PosSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated positive sequence current
phasor
2 NegSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated negative sequence current
phasor
3 3ZeroSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated zero sequence current phasor
multiplied by factor 3
4 MaxPh CVGAPC function will measure current phasor of the phase with maximum
magnitude

10.1.7.2 Base quantities for CVGAPC function M13751-133 v3

The parameter settings for the base quantities, which represent the base (100%) for pickup
levels of all measuring stages, shall be entered as setting parameters for every CVGAPC
function.

Base current shall be entered as:

310
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 10
Multipurpose protection

1. rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes, when the measured
Current Quantity is selected from 1 to 9, as shown in table 208.
2. rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes multiplied by √3
(1.732*Iphase), when the measured Current Quantity is selected from 10 to 15, as shown in
table 208.

Base voltage shall be entered as:

1. rated phase-to-earth voltage of the protected object in primary kV, when the measured
Voltage Quantity is selected from 1 to 9, as shown in table 209.
2. rated phase-to-phase voltage of the protected object in primary kV, when the measured
Voltage Quantity is selected from 10 to 15, as shown in table 209.

10.1.7.3 Built-in overcurrent protection steps M13751-136 v3

Two overcurrent protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and therefore
only one will be explained here.

Overcurrent step simply compares the magnitude of the measured current quantity (see
table 208) with the set pickup level. Non-directional overcurrent step will pickup if the
magnitude of the measured current quantity is bigger than this set level. However depending
on other enabled built-in features this overcurrent pickup might not cause the overcurrent
step start signal. Start signal will only come if all of the enabled built-in features in the
overcurrent step are fulfilled at the same time.

Second harmonic feature M13751-254 v2

The overcurrent protection step can be restrained by a second harmonic component in the
measured current quantity (see table 208). However it shall be noted that this feature is not
applicable when one of the following measured currents is selected:

• PosSeq (positive sequence current)

• NegSeq (negative sequence current)
• UnbalancePh (unbalance phase current)
• UnbalancePh-Ph (unbalance ph-ph current)

This feature will simple prevent overcurrent step start if the second-to-first harmonic ratio in
the measured current exceeds the set level.

Directional feature M13751-263 v5

The overcurrent protection step operation can be made dependent on the relevant phase
angle between measured current phasor (see table 208) and measured voltage phasor (see
table 209). In protection terminology it means that the General currrent and voltage protection
(CVGAPC) function can be made directional by enabling this built-in feature. In that case
overcurrent protection step will only operate if the current flow is in accordance with the set
direction (Forward, which means towards the protected object, or Reverse, which means from
the protected object). For this feature it is of the outmost importance to understand that the
measured voltage phasor (see table 209) and measured current phasor (see table 208) will be
used for directional decision. Therefore it is the sole responsibility of the end user to select the
appropriate current and voltage signals in order to get a proper directional decision. CVGAPC
function will NOT do this automatically. It will simply use the current and voltage phasors
selected by the end user to check for the directional criteria.

Table 211 gives an overview of the typical choices (but not the only possible ones) for these
two quantities from traditional directional relays.

311
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Multipurpose protection

Table 211: Typical current and voltage choices for directional feature
Set value for the Set value for the
parameter parameter Comment
CurrentInput VoltageInput
PosSeq PosSeq Directional positive sequence overcurrent function is obtained.
Typical setting for RCADir is from 45° to 90° depending on the
power system voltage level (X/R ratio)
NegSeq -NegSeq Directional negative sequence overcurrent function is obtained.
Typical setting for RCADir is from 45° to 90° depending on the
power system voltage level (X/R ratio)
3ZeroSeq -3ZeroSeq Directional zero sequence overcurrent function is obtained.
Typical setting for RCADir is from 0° to 90° depending on the
power system earthing (that is, solidly earthed, earthed via
resistor)
Phase1 Phase2-Phase3 Directional overcurrent function for the first phase is obtained.
Typical setting for RCADir is +30° or +45°
Phase2 Phase3-Phase1 Directional overcurrent function for the second phase is
obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is +30° or +45°
Phase3 Phase1-Phase2 Directional overcurrent function for the third phase is obtained.
Typical setting for RCADir is +30° or +45°

Unbalance current or voltage measurement shall not be used when the directional feature is
enabled.

Two types of directional measurement principles are available, I & U and IcosPhi&U. The first
principle, referred to as "I & U" in the parameter setting tool, checks that:

• the magnitude of the measured current is bigger than the set pick-up level
• the phasor of the measured current is within the operating region (defined by the relay
operate angle, ROADir parameter setting; see figure 157).

U=-3U0
RCADir

Ipickup ROADir I=3Io

Operate region
mta line

en05000252.vsd
IEC05000252 V1 EN-US

Figure 157: I & U directional operating principle for CVGAPC function

where:
RCADir is 75°
ROADir is 50°

The second principle, referred to as "IcosPhi&U" in the parameter setting tool, checks that:

312
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 10
Multipurpose protection

• that the product I·cos(Φ) is bigger than the set pick-up level, where Φ is angle between the
current phasor and the mta line
• that the phasor of the measured current is within the operating region (defined by the
I·cos(Φ) straight line and the relay operate angle, ROADir parameter setting; see
figure 157).

U=-3U0
RCADir

Ipickup ROADir F I=3Io

Operate region
mta line

en05000253.vsd
IEC05000253 V1 EN-US

Figure 158: CVGAPC, IcosPhi&U directional operating principle

where:
RCADir is 75°
ROADir is 50°

Note that it is possible to decide by a parameter setting how the directional feature shall
behave when the magnitude of the measured voltage phasor falls below the pre-set value.
User can select one of the following three options:

• Non-directional (operation allowed for low magnitude of the reference voltage)

• Block (operation prevented for low magnitude of the reference voltage)
• Memory (memory voltage shall be used to determine direction of the current)

It shall also be noted that the memory duration is limited in the algorithm to 100 ms. After that
time the current direction will be locked to the one determined during memory time and it will
re-set only if the current fails below set pickup level or voltage goes above set voltage memory
limit.

Voltage restraint/control feature M13751-326 v4

The overcurrent protection step operation can be made dependent of a measured voltage
quantity (see table 209). Practically then the pickup level of the overcurrent step is not
constant but instead decreases with the decrease in the magnitude of the measured voltage
quantity. Two different types of dependencies are available:

• Voltage restraint overcurrent (when setting parameter VDepMode_OC1=Slope)

313
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Multipurpose protection

OC1 Stage Pickup Level

StartCurr_OC1

VDepFact_OC1 * StartCurr_OC1

ULowLimit_OC1 UHighLimit_OC1
Selected Voltage
Magnitude
en05000324.vsd
IEC05000324 V1 EN-US

Figure 159: Example for OC1 step current pickup level variation as function of measured
voltage magnitude in Slope mode of operation

• Voltage controlled overcurrent (when setting parameter VDepMode_OC1=Step)

OC1 Stage Pickup Level

StartCurr_OC1

VDepFact_OC1 * StartCurr_OC1

UHighLimit_OC1 Selected Voltage Magnitude

en05000323.vsd
IEC05000323 V1 EN-US

Figure 160: Example for OC1 step current pickup level variation as function of measured
voltage magnitude in Step mode of operation
This feature will simply change the set overcurrent pickup level in accordance with magnitude
variations of the measured voltage. It shall be noted that this feature will as well affect the
pickup current value for calculation of operate times for IDMT curves (overcurrent with IDMT
curve will operate faster during low voltage conditions).

Current restraint feature M13751-338 v3

The overcurrent protection step operation can be made dependent of a restraining current
quantity (see table 210). Practically then the pickup level of the overcurrent step is not
constant but instead increases with the increase in the magnitude of the restraining current.

314
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 10
Multipurpose protection

IMeasured
ea ain
ar tr
te es
e ra ff *Ir
Op oe
s trC
e
I>R
IsetHigh

IsetLow

atan(RestrCoeff)

Restraint
en05000255.vsd
IEC05000255 V1 EN-US

Figure 161: Current pickup variation with restraint current magnitude

This feature will simply prevent overcurrent step to start if the magnitude of the measured
current quantity is smaller than the set percentage of the restrain current magnitude. However
this feature will not affect the pickup current value for calculation of operate times for IDMT
curves. This means that the IDMT curve operate time will not be influenced by the restrain
current magnitude.

When set, the start signal will start definite time delay or inverse (IDMT) time delay in
accordance with the end user setting. If the start signal has value one for longer time than the
set time delay, the overcurrent step will set its trip signal to one. Reset of the start and trip
signal can be instantaneous or time delay in accordance with the end user setting.

10.1.7.4 Built-in undercurrent protection steps M13751-231 v2

Two undercurrent protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and therefore
only one will be explained here. Undercurrent step simply compares the magnitude of the
measured current quantity (see table 208) with the set pickup level. The undercurrent step will
pickup and set its start signal to one if the magnitude of the measured current quantity is
smaller than this set level. The start signal will start definite time delay with set time delay. If
the start signal has value one for longer time than the set time delay the undercurrent step will
set its trip signal to one. Reset of the start and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay
in accordance with the setting.

10.1.7.5 Built-in overvoltage protection steps M13751-234 v3

Two overvoltage protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and therefore
only one will be explained here.

Overvoltage step simply compares the magnitude of the measured voltage quantity (see
table 209) with the set pickup level. The overvoltage step will pickup if the magnitude of the
measured voltage quantity is bigger than this set level.

The start signal will start definite time delay or inverse (IDMT) time delay in accordance with
the end user setting. If the start signal has value one for longer time than the set time delay,
the overvoltage step will set its trip signal to one. Reset of the start and trip signal can be
instantaneous or time delay in accordance with the end user setting.

315
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Multipurpose protection

10.1.7.6 Built-in undervoltage protection steps M13751-239 v3

Two undervoltage protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and therefore
only one will be explained here.

Undervoltage step simply compares the magnitude of the measured voltage quantity (see
table 209) with the set pickup level. The undervoltage step will pickup if the magnitude of the
measured voltage quantity is smaller than this set level.

The start signal will start definite time delay or inverse (IDMT) time delay in accordance with
the end user setting. If the start signal has value one for longer time than the set time delay,
the undervoltage step will set its trip signal to one. Reset of the start and trip signal can be
instantaneous or time delay in accordance with the end user setting.

10.1.7.7 Logic diagram M13085-3 v6

The simplified internal logics, for CVGAPC function are shown in the following figures.

IED
ADM CVGAPC function

Current and voltage selection

settings
Phasor calculation of
scaling with CT ratio

individual currents
A/D conversion

Selection of which current Selected current

and voltage shall be given to
Phasors &
samples

the built-in protection Selected voltage

elements

Restraint current selection

Selected restraint current

A/D conversion scaling

Selection of restraint current

Phasor calculation of
individual voltages
with CT ratio

Phasors &
samples

IEC05000169_2_en.vsd

IEC05000169 V2 EN-US

Figure 162: Treatment of measured currents and voltages within IED for CVGAPC function
Figure 162 shows how internal treatment of measured currents is done for multipurpose
protection function

The following currents and voltages are inputs to the multipurpose protection function. They
must all be expressed in true power system (primary) Amperes and kilovolts.

1. Instantaneous values (samples) of currents & voltages from one three-phase current and
one three-phase voltage input.
2. Fundamental frequency phasors from one three-phase current and one three-phase
voltage input calculated by the pre-processing modules.
3. Sequence currents & voltages from one three-phase current and one three-phase voltage
input calculated by the pre-processing modules.

316
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 10
Multipurpose protection

The multipurpose protection function:

1. Selects one current from the three-phase input system (see table 208) for internally
measured current.
2. Selects one voltage from the three-phase input system (see table 209) for internally
measured voltage.
3. Selects one current from the three-phase input system (see table 210) for internally
measured restraint current.

317
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Multipurpose protection

CURRENT

UC1
TRUC1
2nd Harmonic
Selected current restraint
STUC2
UC2
nd
TRUC2
2 Harmonic
restraint

STOC1
OC1 TROC1

2nd Harmonic BLK2ND

restraint ³1
Selected restraint current
Current restraint
DIROC1
Directionality
Voltage control /
restraint

STOC2
OC2 TROC2

2nd Harmonic
restraint
Current restraint ³1
UDIRLOW

Directionality DIROC2

Voltage control /
restraint

STOV1
OV1 TROV1

STOV2
OV2 TROV2

STUV1
Selected voltage
UV1 TRUV1

STUV2
UV2 TRUV2

VOLTAGE

en05000170.vsd
IEC05000170 V1 EN-US

Figure 163: CVGAPC function main logic diagram for built-in protection elements
Logic in figure 163 can be summarized as follows:

318
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 10
Multipurpose protection

1. The selected currents and voltage are given to built-in protection elements. Each
protection element and step makes independent decision about status of its START and
TRIP output signals.
2. More detailed internal logic for every protection element is given in the following four
figures.
3. Common START and TRIP signals from all built-in protection elements & steps (internal OR
logic) are available from multipurpose function as well.

a
a>b AND
BlkLevel2nd b

Enable
second Second harmonic
harmonic check DEF time BLKTRO C1 TROC1
selected DEF AND
OR
a
a>b
b
OC1=On STOC1
AND
StartCurr_OC1 BLKOC1
X
Inverse

Voltage Directionali ty DIR_OK Inverse

control or time
check selected
restrai nt
feature

Selected v oltage
Curren t
Restrai nt
Feature
Selected restrain current Imea sure d > k Irestra int

IEC05000831-2-en.vsdx

IEC05000831 V2 EN-US

Figure 164: Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first overcurrent step that is, OC1 (step OC2 has
the same internal logic)

Bin input: BLKUC1TR

Selected current a TRUC1

b>a
DEF AND
b
StartCurr_UC1
AND

Operation_UC1=On
STUC1

Bin input: BLKUC1

en05000750.vsd

IEC05000750 V1 EN-US

Figure 165: Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first undercurrent step that is, UC1 (step UC2
has the same internal logic)

319
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Multipurpose protection

DEF time BLKTROV1

selected DEF TROV1
AND
OR
Selected voltage a
a>b
b STOV1
StartVolt_OV1
AND

Inverse
Operation_OV1=On
Inverse time
BLKOV1 selected

en05000751.vsd

IEC05000751 V1 EN-US

Figure 166: Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first overvoltage step OV1 (step OV2 has the
same internal logic)

DEF time BLKTRUV

selected DEF 1 TRUV1
AND
OR
Selected voltage a
b>a
b STUV1
AND
StartVolt_UV1

Inverse
Operation_UV1=On
Inverse time
BLKUV1 selected

en05000752.vsd

IEC05000752 V1 EN-US

Figure 167: Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first undervoltage step UV1 (step UV2 has the
same internal logic)

10.1.8 Technical data

M13095-2 v7

Table 212: CVGAPC technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Measuring current input phase1, phase2, phase3, PosSeq, - -
NegSeq, -3*ZeroSeq, MaxPh, MinPh,
UnbalancePh, phase1-phase2, phase2-
phase3, phase3-phase1, MaxPh-Ph,
MinPh-Ph, UnbalancePh-Ph
Measuring voltage input phase1, phase2, phase3, PosSeq, - -
NegSeq, -3*ZeroSeq, MaxPh, MinPh,
UnbalancePh, phase1-phase2, phase2-
phase3, phase3-phase1, MaxPh-Ph,
MinPh-Ph, UnbalancePh-Ph
Start overcurrent, step 1 - 2 (2 - 5000)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Table continues on next page

320
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 10
Multipurpose protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Start undercurrent, step 1 - 2 (2 - 150)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Independent time delay, (0.00 - 6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is

overcurrent at 0 to 2 x Iset, step 1 - greater
2
Independent time delay, (0.00 - 6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is
undercurrent at 2 to 0 x Iset, step 1 greater
-2
Overcurrent (non-directional):
Start time at 0 to 2 x Iset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Reset time at 2 to 0 x Iset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Start time at 0 to 10 x Iset Min. = 5 ms -
Max. = 20 ms
Reset time at 10 to 0 x Iset Min. = 20 ms -
Max. = 35 ms
Undercurrent:
Start time at 2 to 0 x Iset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Reset time at 0 to 2 x Iset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Overcurrent:
Inverse time characteristics, see 16 curve types See table 818, 820 and table
table 818, 820 and table 822 822
Overcurrent:
Minimum operate time for inverse (0.00 - 6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is
curves, step 1 - 2 greater
Voltage level where voltage (0.0 - 5.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
memory takes over
Start overvoltage, step 1 - 2 (2.0 - 200.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur
±0.5% of U at U > Ur

Start undervoltage, step 1 - 2 (2.0 - 150.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur

±0.5% of U at U > Ur

Independent time delay, (0.00 - 6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is

overvoltage at 0.8 to 1.2 x Uset, greater
step 1 - 2
Independent time delay, (0.00 - 6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is
undervoltage at 1.2 to 0.8 x Uset, greater
step 1 - 2
Overvoltage:
Start time at 0.8 to 1.2 x Uset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Reset time at 1.2 to 0.8 x Uset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Undervoltage:
Start time at 1.2 to 0.8 x Uset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Reset time at 1.2 to 0.8 x Uset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Overvoltage:
Table continues on next page

321
Technical manual
Section 10 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Multipurpose protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Inverse time characteristics, see 4 curve types See table 829
table 829
Undervoltage:
Inverse time characteristics, see 3 curve types See table 830
table 830
High and low voltage limit, voltage (1.0 - 200.0)% of UBase ±1.0% of Ur at U ≤ Ur
dependent operation, step 1 - 2 ±1.0% of U at U > Ur

Directional function Settable: NonDir, forward and reverse -

Relay characteristic angle (-180 to +180) degrees ±2.0 degrees
Relay operate angle (1 to 90) degrees ±2.0 degrees
Reset ratio, overcurrent > 95% -
Reset ratio, undercurrent < 105% -
Reset ratio, overvoltage > 95% -
Reset ratio, undervoltage < 105% -
Overcurrent:
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

Undercurrent:
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

Overvoltage:
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0.8 to 1.2 x Uset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

Undervoltage:
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 1.2 to 0.8 x Uset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

322
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 11
Secondary system supervision

Section 11 Secondary system supervision

11.1 Current circuit supervision CCSSPVC IP14555-1 v5

11.1.1 Identification
M14870-1 v5

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Current circuit supervision CCSSPVC - 87

11.1.2 Functionality M12444-3 v10

Open or short circuited current transformer cores can cause unwanted operation of many
protection functions such as differential, earth-fault current and negative-sequence current
functions.

Current circuit supervision (CCSSPVC) compares the residual current from a three phase set of
current transformer cores with the neutral point current on a separate input taken from
another set of cores on the current transformer.

A detection of a difference indicates a fault in the circuit and is used as alarm or to block
protection functions expected to give inadvertent tripping.

11.1.3 Function block M12436-3 v8

CCSSPVC
I3P* FAIL
IREF* ALARM
BLOCK
IEC13000304-1-en.vsd
IEC13000304 V1 EN-US

Figure 168: CCSSPVC function block

Signal IREF must be connected in the configuration.

11.1.4 Signals
PID-3482-INPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 213: CCSSPVC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for three phase current input
SIGNAL
IREF GROUP - Residual reference current input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

323
Technical manual
Section 11 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Secondary system supervision

PID-3482-OUTPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 214: CCSSPVC Output signals

Name Type Description
FAIL BOOLEAN Detection of current circuit failure
ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm for current circuit failure

11.1.5 Settings
PID-3482-SETTINGS v6

Table 215: CCSSPVC Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
IMinOp 10 - 200 %IB 1 20 Minimum operate current differential
level in % of IBase

Table 216: CCSSPVC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Ip>Block 20 - 500 %IB 1 150 Block of the function at high phase
current, in % of IBase

Table 217: CCSSPVC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

11.1.6 Operation principle M12396-5 v9

Current circuit supervision CCSSPVC compares the absolute value of the vectorial sum of the
three phase currents |ΣIphase| and the absolute value of the residual current |Iref| from
another current transformer set, see figure 169.

The FAIL output will be set to a logical one when the following criteria are fulfilled:

• The numerical value of the difference |ΣIphase| – |Iref| is higher than 80% of the numerical
value of the sum |ΣIphase| + |Iref|.
• The numerical value of the current |ΣIphase| – |Iref| is equal to or higher than the set
operate value IMinOp.
• No phase current has exceeded Ip>Block during the last 10 ms.
• CCSSPVC is enabled by setting Operation = On.

The FAIL output remains activated 100 ms after the AND-gate resets when being activated for
more than 20 ms. If the FAIL lasts for more than 150 ms an ALARM will be issued. In this case
the FAIL and ALARM will remain activated 1 s after the AND-gate resets. This prevents
unwanted resetting of the blocking function when phase current supervision element(s)
operate, for example, during a fault.

324
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 11
Secondary system supervision

IL1 IL1 I>1.054 * IMinOp

IL2 IL2 +
IL3 IL3  -
+ +
I ref Iref + x -
0,8
I>IP>Block
10 ms AND
OR FAIL
OR t

40 ms 100 ms

170 ms 3000 ms ALARM

OPERATION
BLOCK

IEC05000463-3-en.vsd
IEC05000463 V3 EN-US

Figure 169: Simplified logic diagram for Current circuit supervision CCSSPVC
The operate characteristic is percentage restrained, see figure 170.

| åI phase | - | I ref |

Slope = 1

Operation
Slope = 0.8
area
I MinOp

| åI phase | + | I ref |
99000068.vsd
IEC99000068 V1 EN-US

Figure 170: Operate characteristics

Due to the formulas for the axis compared, |SIphase | - |I ref | and |S I phase | + |
I ref | respectively, the slope can not be above 2.

11.1.7 Technical data

M12358-1 v8

Table 218: CCSSPVCtechnical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate current (10-200)% of IBase ±10.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
±10.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio, Operate current >90%

Block current (20-500)% of IBase ±5.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
±5.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio, Block current >90% at (50-500)% of IBase

325
Technical manual
Section 11 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Secondary system supervision

11.2 Fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC IP14556-1 v3

11.2.1 Identification
M14869-1 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC - -

11.2.2 Functionality SEMOD113820-4 v11

The aim of the fuse failure supervision function FUFSPVC is to block voltage measuring
functions at failures in the secondary circuits between the voltage transformer and the IED in
order to avoid inadvertent operations that otherwise might occur.

The fuse failure supervision function basically has three different detection methods, negative
sequence and zero sequence based detection and an additional delta voltage and delta current
detection.

The negative sequence detection algorithm is recommended for IEDs used in isolated or high-
impedance earthed networks. It is based on the negative-sequence quantities.

The zero sequence detection is recommended for IEDs used in directly or low impedance
earthed networks. It is based on the zero sequence measuring quantities.

The selection of different operation modes is possible by a setting parameter in order to take
into account the particular earthing of the network.

A criterion based on delta current and delta voltage measurements can be added to the fuse
failure supervision function in order to detect a three phase fuse failure, which in practice is
more associated with voltage transformer switching during station operations.

11.2.3 Function block M13678-3 v9

FUFSPVC
I3P* BLKZ
U3P* BLKU
BLOCK 3PH
CBCLOSED DLD1PH
MCBOP DLD3PH
DISCPOS STDI
BLKTRIP STDIL1
STDIL2
STDIL3
STDU
STDUL1
STDUL2
STDUL3

IEC14000065-1-en.vsd
IEC14000065 V1 EN-US

Figure 171: FUFSPVC function block

326
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 11
Secondary system supervision

11.2.4 Signals
PID-3492-INPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 219: FUFSPVC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Current connection
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Voltage connection
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
CBCLOSED BOOLEAN 0 Active when circuit breaker is closed
MCBOP BOOLEAN 0 Active when external MCB opens protected voltage circuit
DISCPOS BOOLEAN 0 Active when line disconnector is open
BLKTRIP BOOLEAN 0 Blocks operation of function when active

PID-3492-OUTPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 220: FUFSPVC Output signals

Name Type Description
BLKZ BOOLEAN Start of current and voltage controlled function
BLKU BOOLEAN General start of function
3PH BOOLEAN Three-phase start of function
DLD1PH BOOLEAN Dead line condition in at least one phase
DLD3PH BOOLEAN Dead line condition in all three phases
STDI BOOLEAN Common start signal of sudden change in current
STDIL1 BOOLEAN Start signal of sudden change in current, phase L1
STDIL2 BOOLEAN Start signal of sudden change in current, phase L2
STDIL3 BOOLEAN Start signal of sudden change in current, phase L3
STDU BOOLEAN Common start signal of sudden change in voltage
STDUL1 BOOLEAN Start signal of sudden change in voltage, phase L1
STDUL2 BOOLEAN Start signal of sudden change in voltage, phase L2
STDUL3 BOOLEAN Start signal of sudden change in voltage, phase L3

327
Technical manual
Section 11 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Secondary system supervision

11.2.5 Settings
PID-3492-SETTINGS v7

Table 221: FUFSPVC Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OpMode Off - - UZsIZs Operating mode selection
UNsINs
UZsIZs
UZsIZs OR
UNsINs
UZsIZs AND
UNsINs
OptimZsNs
3U0> 1 - 100 %UB 1 30 Operate level of residual overvoltage
element in % of UBase
3I0< 1 - 100 %IB 1 10 Operate level of residual undercurrent
element in % of IBase
3U2> 1 - 100 %UB 1 30 Operate level of neg seq overvoltage
element in % of UBase
3I2< 1 - 100 %IB 1 10 Operate level of neg seq undercurrent
element in % of IBase
OpDUDI Off - - Off Operation of change based function
On Off/On
DU> 1 - 100 %UB 1 60 Operate level of change in phase
voltage in % of UBase
DI< 1 - 100 %IB 1 15 Operate level of change in phase
current in % of IBase
UPh> 1 - 100 %UB 1 70 Operate level of phase voltage in % of
UBase
IPh> 1 - 100 %IB 1 10 Operate level of phase current in % of
IBase
SealIn Off - - On Seal in functionality Off/On
On
USealln< 1 - 100 %UB 1 70 Operate level of seal-in phase voltage
in % of UBase
IDLD< 1 - 100 %IB 1 5 Operate level for open phase current
detection in % of IBase
UDLD< 1 - 100 %UB 1 60 Operate level for open phase voltage
detection in % of UBase

Table 222: FUFSPVC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

328
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 11
Secondary system supervision

11.2.6 Monitored data

PID-3492-MONITOREDDATA v6

Table 223: FUFSPVC Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
3I0 REAL - A Magnitude of zero sequence current
3I2 REAL - A Magnitude of negative sequence
current
3U0 REAL - kV Magnitude of zero sequence voltage
3U2 REAL - kV Magnitude of negative sequence
voltage

11.2.7 Operation principle

11.2.7.1 Zero and negative sequence detection M13677-3 v5

The zero and negative sequence function continuously measures the currents and voltages in
all three phases and calculates, see figure 172:

• the zero-sequence voltage 3U0

• the zero-sequence current 3I0
• the negative sequence current 3I2
• the negative sequence voltage 3U2

The measured signals are compared with their respective set values 3U0> and 3I0<, 3U2> and
3I2<.

The function enable the internal signal FuseFailDetZeroSeq if the measured zero-sequence
voltage is higher than the set value 3U0> and the measured zero-sequence current is below the
set value 3I0<.

The function enable the internal signal FuseFailDetNegSeq if the measured negative sequence
voltage is higher than the set value 3U2> and the measured negative sequence current is below
the set value 3I2<.

A drop out delay of 100 ms for the measured zero-sequence and negative sequence current will
prevent a false fuse failure detection at un-equal breaker opening at the two line ends.

329
Technical manual
Section 11 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Secondary system supervision

Sequence Detection
3I0< CurrZeroSeq
IL1
Zero 3I0
sequence
filter 100 ms CurrNegSeq
a
IL2 a>b t
b
Negative 3I2
sequence
IL3 filter FuseFailDetZeroSeq
AND
100 ms
a
a>b t
3I2< b
FuseFailDetNegSeq
AND
3U0>
VoltZeroSeq
UL1
Zero
sequence a 3U0
a>b
b
filter
UL2 VoltNegSeq

Negative
sequence a 3U2
a>b
UL3 filter b

3U2>

IEC10000036-2-en.vsd
IEC10000036 V2 EN-US

Figure 172: Simplified logic diagram for sequence detection part

The calculated values 3U0, 3I0, 3I2 and 3U2 are available as service values on local HMI and
monitoring tool in PCM600.

Input and output signals M13677-19 v6

The output signals 3PH, BLKU and BLKZ as well as the signals DLD1PH and DLD3PH from dead
line detections are blocked if any of the following conditions occur:

• The input BLOCK is activated

• The input BLKTRIP is activated and the internal signal FuseFailStarted is not present
• The operation mode selector OpMode is set to Off
• The IED is in TEST status (TEST-ACTIVE is high) and the function has been blocked from
the HMI (BlockFUSE=Yes)

The input BLOCK signal is a general purpose blocking signal of the fuse failure supervision
function. It can be connected to a binary input of the IED in order to receive a block command
from external devices or can be software connected to other internal functions of the IED itself
in order to receive a block command from internal functions. Through OR gate it can be
connected to both binary inputs and internal function outputs.

The input BLKTRIP is intended to be connected to the trip output from any of the protection
functions included in the IED. When activated for more than 20 ms, the operation of the fuse
failure is blocked; a fixed drop-out timer prolongs the block for 100 ms. The aim is to increase
the security against unwanted operations during the opening of the breaker, which might
cause unbalance conditions for which the fuse failure might operate.

The output signal BLKZ will also be blocked if the internal dead line detection is activated. The
dead line detection signal has a 200 ms drop-out time delay.

The input signal MCBOP is supposed to be connected via a terminal binary input to the N.C.
auxiliary contact of the miniature circuit breaker protecting the VT secondary circuit. The
MCBOP signal sets the output signals BLKU and BLKZ in order to block all the voltage related
functions when the MCB is open independent of the setting of OpMode selector. The
additional drop-out timer of 150 ms prolongs the presence of MCBOP signal to prevent the
unwanted operation of voltage dependent function due to non simultaneous closing of the
main contacts of the miniature circuit breaker.

330
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 11
Secondary system supervision

The input signal DISCPOS is supposed to be connected via a terminal binary input to the N.C.
auxiliary contact of the line disconnector. The DISCPOS signal sets the output signal BLKU in
order to block the voltage related functions when the line disconnector is open. The
impedance protection function is not affected by the position of the line disconnector since
there will be no line currents that can cause malfunction of the distance protection. If
DISCPOS=0 it signifies that the line is connected to the system and when the DISCPOS=1 it
signifies that the line is disconnected from the system and the block signal BLKU is generated.

The output BLKU can be used for blocking the voltage related measuring functions
(undervoltage protection, energizing check and so on) except for the impedance protection.

The function output BLKZ shall be used for blocking the impedance protection function.

11.2.7.2 Delta current and delta voltage detection M13685-3 v7

A simplified diagram for the functionality is found in figure 173. The calculation of the changes
of currents and voltages is based on a sample analysis algorithm. The calculated delta
quantities are compared with their respective set values DI< and DU>. The algorithm detects a
fuse failure if a sufficient change in voltage without a sufficient change in current is detected
in each phase separately. The following quantities are calculated in all three phases:

• The change in voltage DU

• The change in current DI

The internal FuseFailDetDUDI signal is activated if the following conditions are fulfilled:

• The magnitude of the phase-ground voltage has been above UPh> for more than 1.5 cycles
(i.e. 30 ms in a 50 Hz system)
• The magnitudes of DU in three phases are higher than the corresponding setting DU>
• The magnitudes of DI in three phases are below the setting DI<

In addition to the above conditions, at least one of the following conditions shall be fulfilled in
order to activate the internal FuseFailDetDUDI signal:

• The magnitude of the phase currents in three phases are higher than the setting IPh>
• The circuit breaker is closed (CBCLOSED = True)

The first criterion means that detection of failure in three phases together with high current
for the three phases will set the output. The measured phase current is used to reduce the risk
of false fuse failure detection. If the current on the protected line is low, a voltage drop in the
system (not caused by fuse failure) may be followed by current change lower than the setting
DI<, and therefore a false fuse failure might occur.

The second criterion requires that the delta condition shall be fulfilled at the same time as
circuit breaker is closed. If CBCLOSED input is connected to FALSE , then only the first criterion
can enable the delta function.If the DUDI detections of three phases set the internal signal
FuseFailDetDUDI at the level high, then the signal FuseFailDetDUDI will remain high as long as
the voltages of three phases are lower then the setting Uph>.

In addition to fuse failure detection, two internal signals DeltaU and DeltaI are also generated
by the delta current and delta voltage DUDI detection algorithm. The internal signals DelatU
and DeltaI are activated when a sudden change of voltage, or respectively current, is detected.
The detection of the sudden change is based on a sample analysis algorithm. In particular
DelatU is activated if at least three consecutive voltage samples are higher then the setting
DU>. In a similar way DelatI is activated if at least three consecutive current samples are higher
then the setting DI<. When DeltaU or DeltaI are active, the output signals STDUL1, STDUL2,
STDUL3 and respectively STDIL1, STDIL2, STDIL3, based on a sudden change of voltage or
current detection, are activated with a 20 ms time off delay. The common start output signals

331
Technical manual
Section 11 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Secondary system supervision

STDU or STDI are activated with a 60 ms time off delay, if any sudden change of voltage or
current is detected.

The delta function (except the sudden change of voltage and current detection)
is deactivated by setting the parameter OpDUDI to Off.

DUDI Detection
DUDI detection Phase 1
DeltaIL1
IL1
IL2
IL3 DI detection based on sample analysis OR

DI<

UL1

DU detection based on sample analysis

AND
DU>
1.5 cycle 20 ms DeltaUL1
a
a>b t t
UPh> b

IL1 DeltaIL2
IL2 DUDI detection Phase 2
DeltaUL2
IL3
UL2 Same logic as for phase 1

IL1 DeltaIL3
DUDI detection Phase 3
IL2
DeltaUL3
IL3
UL3 Same logic as for phase 1

UL1
a
a<b
b

IL1
a
a>b
IPh> b AND

OR AND
CBCLOSED AND OR

UL2
a
a<b
b

IL2
a
a>b
b AND

OR AND
AND OR

UL3
a
a<b
b

IL3
a
a>b
b AND

OR AND
AND OR FuseFailDetDUDI
AND

IEC12000166-3-en.vsd

IEC12000166 V3 EN-US

Figure 173: Simplified logic diagram for the DU/DI detection part

332
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 11
Secondary system supervision

intBlock
STDI
AND

20 ms
DeltaIL1 STDIL1
t AND
OR
20 ms
DeltaIL2
t STDIL2
AND
20 ms
DeltaIL3
t
STDIL3
AND

STDU
AND

20 ms
DeltaUL1 STDUL1
t AND
OR
20 ms
DeltaUL2
t STDUL2
AND
20 ms
DeltaUL3
t
STDUL3
AND

IEC12000165-1-en.vsd
IEC12000165 V1 EN-US

Figure 174: Internal signals DeltaU or DeltaI and the corresponding output signals

11.2.7.3 Dead line detection M13679-44 v4

A simplified diagram for the functionality is found in figure 175. A dead phase condition is
indicated if both the voltage and the current in one phase is below their respective setting
values UDLD< and IDLD<. If at least one phase is considered to be dead the output DLD1PH
and the internal signal DeadLineDet1Ph is activated. If all three phases are considered to be
dead the output DLD3PH is activated

333
Technical manual
Section 11 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Secondary system supervision

Dead Line Detection

IL1
a
a<b AllCurrLow
b
AND
IL2
a
a<b
b

IL3
a
a<b
b

IDLD<
DeadLineDet1Ph
UL1
a AND
a<b
b OR DLD1PH
AND
UL2
a AND
a<b
b
AND DLD3PH
UL3 AND
a AND
a<b
b

UDLD<

intBlock

IEC10000035-1-en.vsd
IEC10000035 V2 EN-US

Figure 175: Simplified logic diagram for Dead Line detection part

11.2.7.4 Main logic GUID-D474A49E-D3A8-438C-B7E4-E527FEC2F335 v6

A simplified diagram for the functionality is found in figure 176. The fuse failure supervision
function (FUFSPVC) can be switched on or off by the setting parameter Operation to On or
Off.

For increased flexibility and adaptation to system requirements an operation mode selector,
OpMode, has been introduced to make it possible to select different operating modes for the
negative and zero sequence based algorithms. The different operation modes are:

• Off. The negative and zero sequence function is switched off.

• UNsINs. Negative sequence is selected.
• UZsIZs. Zero sequence is selected.
• UZsIZs OR UNsINs. Both negative and zero sequence are activated and work in parallel
(OR-condition for operation).
• UZsIZs AND UNsINs. Both negative and zero sequence are activated and work in series
(AND-condition for operation).
• OptimZsNs. Optimum of negative and zero sequence current (the function that has the
highest magnitude of measured negative and zero sequence current will be activated).

The delta function can be activated by setting the parameter OpDUDI to On. When selected it
operates in parallel with the sequence based algorithms.

As soon as any fuse failure situation is detected, signals FuseFailDetZeroSeq,

FuseFailDetNegSeq or FuseFailDetDUDI, and the specific functionality is released, the function
will activate the output signal BLKU. The output signal BLKZ will be activated as well if the
internal dead phase detection, DeadLineDet1Ph, is not activated at the same time. The output
BLKU can be used for blocking voltage related measuring functions (under voltage protection,
energizing check, and so on). The output BLKZ shall be used to block the impedance
protection functions.

If the fuse failure situation is present for more than 5 seconds and the setting parameter
SealIn is set to On it will be sealed in as long as at least one phase voltages is below the set

334
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 11
Secondary system supervision

value USealIn<. This will keep the BLKU and BLKZ signals activated as long as any phase
voltage is below the set value USealIn<. If all three phase voltages drop below the set value
USealIn< and the setting parameter SealIn is set to On the output signal 3PH will also be
activated. The signals 3PH, BLKU and BLKZ will now be active as long as any phase voltage is
below the set value USealIn<.

If SealIn is set to On the fuse failure condition lasting more then 5 seconds is stored in the non-
volatile memory in the IED. At start-up of the IED (due to auxiliary power interruption or re-
start due to configuration change) it uses the stored value in its non-volatile memory and re-
establishes the conditions that were present before the shut down. All phase voltages must be
restored above USealIn< before fuse failure is de-activated and resets the signals BLKU, BLKZ
and 3PH.

The output signal BLKU will also be active if all phase voltages have been above the setting
USealIn< for more than 60 seconds, the zero or negative sequence voltage has been above the
set value 3U0> and 3U2> for more than 5 seconds, all phase currents are below the setting
IDLD< (criteria for open phase detection) and the circuit breaker is closed (input CBCLOSED is
activated).

If a MCB is used then the input signal MCBOP is to be connected via a binary input to the N.C.
auxiliary contact of the miniature circuit breaker protecting the VT secondary circuit. The
MCBOP signal sets the output signals BLKU and BLKZ in order to block all the voltage related
functions when the MCB is open independent of the setting of OpMode or OpDUDI. An
additional drop-out timer of 150 ms prolongs the presence of MCBOP signal to prevent the
unwanted operation of voltage dependent function due to non simultaneous closing of the
main contacts of the miniature circuit breaker.

The input signal DISCPOS is supposed to be connected via a terminal binary input to the N.C.
auxiliary contact of the line disconnector. The DISCPOS signal sets the output signal BLKU in
order to block the voltage related functions when the line disconnector is open. The
impedance protection function does not have to be affected since there will be no line currents
that can cause malfunction of the distance protection.

335
Technical manual
Section 11 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Secondary system supervision

Fuse failure detection

Main logic
TEST

TEST ACTIVE
AND
BlocFuse = Yes

BLOCK intBlock
OR
BLKTRIP 20 ms 100 ms
AND t t
FusefailStarted

All UL < USealIn<

OR
AND
3PH
AND
SealIn = On AND

AND
Any UL < UsealIn<

FuseFailDetDUDI
AND 5s
OpDUDI = On
OR t
FuseFailDetZeroSeq
AND

AND

FuseFailDetNegSeq
AND

UNsINs OR
UZsIZs OR
UZsIZs OR UNsINs
OpMode
UZsIZs AND UNsINs
OptimZsNs
OR
CurrZeroSeq
a AND
CurrNegSeq a>b
b

AND

DeadLineDet1Ph 200 ms
AND BLKZ
t OR AND
150 ms
MCBOP t

AND BLKU
60 s
t OR OR
All UL > UsealIn<
AND

VoltZeroSeq 5s
VoltNegSeq OR t

AllCurrLow
CBCLOSED

DISCPOS IEC10000033-2-en.vsd

IEC10000033 V2 EN-US

Figure 176: Simplified logic diagram for fuse failure supervision function, Main logic

336
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 11
Secondary system supervision

11.2.8 Technical data

M16069-1 v11

Table 224: FUFSPVCtechnical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate voltage, zero sequence (1-100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

Operate current, zero sequence (1–100)% of IBase ±0.5% of Ir

Operate voltage, negative sequence (1-100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

Operate current, negative sequence (1–100)% of IBase ±0.5% of Ir

Operate voltage change level (1-100)% of UBase ±10.0% of Ur

Operate current change level (1–100)% of IBase ±10.0% of Ir

Operate phase voltage (1-100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

Operate phase current (1–100)% of IBase ±0.5% of Ir

Operate phase dead line voltage (1-100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

Operate phase dead line current (1–100)% of IBase ±0.5% of Ir

Operate time, start, 1 ph, at 1 to 0 x Ur Min. = 10 ms -

Max. = 25 ms
Reset time, start, 1 ph, at 0 to 1 x Ur Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms

11.3 Fuse failure supervision VDSPVC GUID-9C5BA1A7-DF2F-49D4-A13A-C6B483DDFCDC v2

11.3.1 Identification GUID-109434B0-23E5-4053-9E6E-418530A07F9C v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Fuse failure supervision VDSPVC VTS 60

11.3.2 Functionality GUID-6AF2219A-264F-4971-8D03-3B8A9D0CB284 v4

Different protection functions within the protection IED operates on the basis of measured
voltage at the relay point. Some example of protection functions are:

• Distance protection function.

• Undervoltage function.
• Energisation function and voltage check for the weak infeed logic.

These functions can operate unintentionally, if a fault occurs in the secondary circuits between
voltage instrument transformers and the IED. These unintentional operations can be
prevented by VDSPVC.

VDSPVC is designed to detect fuse failures or faults in voltage measurement circuit, based on
phase wise comparison of voltages of main and pilot fused circuits. VDSPVC blocking output
can be configured to block functions that need to be blocked in case of faults in the voltage
circuit.

337
Technical manual
Section 11 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Secondary system supervision

11.3.3 Function block GUID-0C4A6C94-E0D7-4E36-AB49-D74A5E330D36 v2

VDSPVC
U3P1* MAINFUF
U3P2* PILOTFUF
BLOCK U1L1FAIL
U1L2FAIL
U1L3FAIL
U2L1FAIL
U2L2FAIL
U2L3FAIL

IEC14000048-1-en.vsd
IEC12000142 V2 EN-US

Figure 177: VDSPVC function block

11.3.4 Signals
PID-3485-INPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 225: VDSPVC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
U3P1 GROUP - Main fuse voltage
SIGNAL
U3P2 GROUP - Pilot fuse voltage
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

PID-3485-OUTPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 226: VDSPVC Output signals

Name Type Description
MAINFUF BOOLEAN Block of main fuse failure
PILOTFUF BOOLEAN Alarm of pilot fuse failure
U1L1FAIL BOOLEAN Fuse failure of Main fuse group phase L1
U1L2FAIL BOOLEAN Fuse failure of Main fuse group phase L2
U1L3FAIL BOOLEAN Fuse failure of Main fuse group phase L3
U2L1FAIL BOOLEAN Fuse failure of Pilot fuse group phase L1
U2L2FAIL BOOLEAN Fuse failure of Pilot fuse group phase L2
U2L3FAIL BOOLEAN Fuse failure of Pilot fuse group phase L3

338
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 11
Secondary system supervision

11.3.5 Settings
PID-3485-SETTINGS v7

Table 227: VDSPVC Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Mode Off / On
On
Ud>MainBlock 10.0 - 80.0 %UB 0.1 20.0 Blocking picked up voltage level in %
of UBase when main fuse fails
Ud>PilotAlarm 10.0 - 80.0 %UB 0.1 30.0 Alarm picked up voltage level in % of
UBase when pilot fuse fails
SealIn Off - - On Seal in functionality Off/On
On
USealIn 0.0 - 100.0 %UB 0.1 70.0 Operate level of seal-in voltage in % of
UBase

Table 228: VDSPVC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

Table 229: VDSPVC Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ConTypeMain Ph-N - - Ph-N Selection of connection type for main
Ph-Ph fuse group
ConTypePilot Ph-N - - Ph-N Selection of connection type for pilot
Ph-Ph fuse group

11.3.6 Monitored data

PID-3485-MONITOREDDATA v6

Table 230: VDSPVC Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
UL1DIF_A REAL - kV Differential voltage phase L1 for alarm
functionality
UL2DIF_A REAL - kV Differential voltage phase L2 for alarm
functionality
UL3DIF_A REAL - kV Differential voltage phase L3 for alarm
functionality
UL1DIF_B REAL - kV Differential voltage phase L1 for block
functionality
UL2DIF_B REAL - kV Differential voltage phase L2 for block
functionality
UL3DIF_B REAL - kV Differential voltage phase L3 for block
functionality

339
Technical manual
Section 11 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Secondary system supervision

11.3.7 Operation principle GUID-06BC0CC0-8A4F-4D84-A0B1-506E433F72F3 v4

VDSPVC requires six voltage inputs, which are the three phase voltages on main and pilot fuse
groups. The initial voltage difference between the two groups is theoretical zero in the healthy
condition. Any subsequent voltage difference will be due to a fuse failure.

If the main fuse voltage becomes smaller than the pilot fuse voltage (vMainL1 < vPilotL1 or
vMainL2 < vPilotL2 or vMainL3 < vPilotL3) and the voltage difference exceeds the operation
level (Ud>MainBlock), a blocking signal will be initiated to indicate the main fuse failure and
block the voltage-dependent functions. In addition, the function also indicates the phase in
which the voltage reduction has occurred.

If the pilot fuse voltage becomes smaller than the main fuse voltage (vPilotL1 < vMainL1 or
vPilotL2 < vMainL2 or vPilotL3 < vMainL3) and the voltage difference exceeds the operation
level (Ud>PilotAlarm), an alarm signal will be initiated to indicate the pilot fuse failure and also
the faulty phase where the voltage reduction occurred.

When SealIn is set to On and the fuse failure has last for more than 5 seconds, the blocked
protection functions will remain blocked until normal voltage conditions are restored above
the USealIn setting. Fuse failure outputs are deactivated when normal voltage conditions are
restored.

5s
a
a<b AND OR t
USealIn b

SealIn=0

vPilotL1
+
vMainL1 -
å MAX a U1L1FAIL
OR
a>b AND
Ud>MainBlock b MAINFAIL
OR
0

MIN ABS a
a>b AND U2L1FAIL
Ud> PilotAlarm b
BLOCK
OR PILOTFAIL

vPilotL2 U1L2FAIL
vMainL2 Phase L2, same as Phase L1 U2L2FAIL

vPilotL3 U1L3FAIL
vMainL3 Phase L3, same as Phase L1 U2L3FAIL

IEC12000144-1-en.vsd
IEC12000144 V1 EN-US

Figure 178: Simplified logic diagram VDSPVC

340
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 11
Secondary system supervision

11.3.8 Technical data

GUID-E2EA8017-BB4B-48B0-BEDA-E71FEE353774 v4

Table 231: VDSPVC technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, block of main (10.0-80.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
fuse failure
Reset ratio <110%
Operate time, block of main Min. = 5 ms –
fuse failure at 1 to 0 x Ur
Max. = 15 ms
Reset time, block of main fuse Min. = 15 ms –
failure at 0 to 1 x Ur
Max. = 30 ms
Operate value, alarm for pilot (10.0-80.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
fuse failure
Reset ratio <110% –
Operate time, alarm for pilot Min. = 5 ms –
fuse failure at 1 to 0 x Ur
Max. = 15 ms
Reset time, alarm for pilot Min. = 15 ms –
fuse failure at 0 to 1 x Ur
Max. = 30 ms

341
Technical manual
342
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 12
Control

Section 12 Control

12.1 Synchrocheck, energizing check, and synchronizing

SESRSYN IP14558-1 v4

12.1.1 Identification
M14889-1 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Synchrocheck, energizing check, and SESRSYN 25
synchronizing
sc/vc

SYMBOL-M V1 EN-US

12.1.2 Functionality M12480-3 v15

The Synchronizing function allows closing of asynchronous networks at the correct moment
including the breaker closing time, which improves the network stability.

Synchrocheck, energizing check, and synchronizing SESRSYN function checks that the voltages
on both sides of the circuit breaker are in synchronism, or with at least one side dead to
ensure that closing can be done safely.

SESRSYN function includes a built-in voltage selection scheme for double bus and 1½ breaker
or ring busbar arrangements.

Manual closing as well as automatic reclosing can be checked by the function and can have
different settings.

For systems, which are running asynchronous, a synchronizing function is provided. The main
purpose of the synchronizing function is to provide controlled closing of circuit breakers when
two asynchronous systems are going to be connected. The synchronizing function evaluates
voltage difference, phase angle difference, slip frequency and frequency rate of change before
issuing a controlled closing of the circuit breaker. Breaker closing time is a parameter setting.

343
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Control

12.1.3 Function block M12431-3 v7

SESRSYN
U3PBB1* SYNOK
U3PBB2* AUTOSYOK
U3PLN1* AUTOENOK
U3PLN2* MANSYOK
BLOCK MANENOK
BLKSYNCH TSTSYNOK
BLKSC TSTAUTSY
BLKENERG TSTMANSY
B1QOPEN TSTENOK
B1QCLD USELFAIL
B2QOPEN B1SEL
B2QCLD B2SEL
LN1QOPEN LN1SEL
LN1QCLD LN2SEL
LN2QOPEN SYNPROGR
LN2QCLD SYNFAIL
UB1OK UOKSYN
UB1FF UDIFFSYN
UB2OK FRDIFSYN
UB2FF FRDIFFOK
ULN1OK FRDERIVA
ULN1FF UOKSC
ULN2OK UDIFFSC
ULN2FF FRDIFFA
STARTSYN PHDIFFA
TSTSYNCH FRDIFFM
TSTSC PHDIFFM
TSTENERG INADVCLS
AENMODE UDIFFME
MENMODE FRDIFFME
PHDIFFME
UBUS
ULINE
MODEAEN
MODEMEN

IEC10000046-1-en.vsd
IEC10000046 V1 EN-US

Figure 179: SESRSYN function block

12.1.4 Signals
PID-3845-INPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 232: SESRSYN Input signals

Name Type Default Description
U3PBB1 GROUP - Group signal for phase to earth voltage input L1, busbar 1
SIGNAL
U3PBB2 GROUP - Group signal for phase to earth voltage input L1, busbar 2
SIGNAL
U3PLN1 GROUP - Group signal for phase to earth voltage input L1, line 1
SIGNAL
U3PLN2 GROUP - Group signal for phase to earth voltage input L1, line 2
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 General block
BLKSYNCH BOOLEAN 0 Block synchronizing
BLKSC BOOLEAN 0 Block synchro check
BLKENERG BOOLEAN 0 Block energizing check
B1QOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open status for CB or disconnector connected to bus1
B1QCLD BOOLEAN 0 Close status for CB or disconnector connected to bus1
B2QOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open status for CB or disconnector connected to bus2
B2QCLD BOOLEAN 0 Close status for CB or disconnector connected to bus2
Table continues on next page

344
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 12
Control

Name Type Default Description

LN1QOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open status for CB or disconnector connected to line1
LN1QCLD BOOLEAN 0 Close status for CB or disconnector connected to line1
LN2QOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open status for CB or disconnector connected to line2
LN2QCLD BOOLEAN 0 Close status for CB or disconnector connected to line2
UB1OK BOOLEAN 0 Bus1 voltage transformer OK
UB1FF BOOLEAN 0 Bus1 voltage transformer fuse failure
UB2OK BOOLEAN 0 Bus2 voltage transformer OK
UB2FF BOOLEAN 0 Bus2 voltage transformer fuse failure
ULN1OK BOOLEAN 0 Line1 voltage transformer OK
ULN1FF BOOLEAN 0 Line1 voltage transformer fuse failure
ULN2OK BOOLEAN 0 Line2 voltage transformer OK
ULN2FF BOOLEAN 0 Line2 voltage transformer fuse failure
STARTSYN BOOLEAN 0 Start synchronizing
TSTSYNCH BOOLEAN 0 Set synchronizing in test mode
TSTSC BOOLEAN 0 Set synchro check in test mode
TSTENERG BOOLEAN 0 Set energizing check in test mode
AENMODE INTEGER 0 Input for setting of automatic energizing mode
MENMODE INTEGER 0 Input for setting of manual energizing mode

PID-3845-OUTPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 233: SESRSYN Output signals

Name Type Description
SYNOK BOOLEAN Synchronizing OK output
AUTOSYOK BOOLEAN Auto synchro check OK
AUTOENOK BOOLEAN Automatic energizing check OK
MANSYOK BOOLEAN Manual synchro check OK
MANENOK BOOLEAN Manual energizing check OK
TSTSYNOK BOOLEAN Synchronizing OK test output
TSTAUTSY BOOLEAN Auto synchro check OK test output
TSTMANSY BOOLEAN Manual synchro check OK test output
TSTENOK BOOLEAN Energizing check OK test output
USELFAIL BOOLEAN Selected voltage transformer fuse failed
B1SEL BOOLEAN Bus1 selected
B2SEL BOOLEAN Bus2 selected
LN1SEL BOOLEAN Line1 selected
LN2SEL BOOLEAN Line2 selected
SYNPROGR BOOLEAN Synchronizing in progress
SYNFAIL BOOLEAN Synchronizing failed
UOKSYN BOOLEAN Voltage amplitudes for synchronizing above set limits
UDIFFSYN BOOLEAN Voltage difference out of limit for synchronizing
FRDIFSYN BOOLEAN Frequency difference out of limit for synchronizing
FRDIFFOK BOOLEAN Frequency difference in band for synchronizing
Table continues on next page

345
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Control

Name Type Description

FRDERIVA BOOLEAN Frequency derivative out of limit for synchronizing
UOKSC BOOLEAN Voltage amplitudes above set limits
UDIFFSC BOOLEAN Voltage difference out of limit
FRDIFFA BOOLEAN Frequency difference out of limit for Auto operation
PHDIFFA BOOLEAN Phase angle difference out of limit for Auto operation
FRDIFFM BOOLEAN Frequency difference out of limit for Manual operation
PHDIFFM BOOLEAN Phase angle difference out of limit for Manual Operation
INADVCLS BOOLEAN Inadvertent circuit breaker closing
UDIFFME REAL Calculated difference of voltage in p.u of set voltage base
value
FRDIFFME REAL Calculated difference of frequency
PHDIFFME REAL Calculated difference of phase angle
UBUS REAL Bus voltage
ULINE REAL Line voltage
MODEAEN INTEGER Selected mode for automatic energizing
MODEMEN INTEGER Selected mode for manual energizing

12.1.5 Settings
PID-3845-SETTINGS v6

Table 234: SESRSYN Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OperationSynch Off - - Off Operation for synchronizing function
On Off/On
UHighBusSynch 50.0 - 120.0 %UBB 1.0 80.0 Voltage high limit bus for
synchronizing in % of UBaseBus
UHighLineSynch 50.0 - 120.0 %UBL 1.0 80.0 Voltage high limit line for
synchronizing in % of UBaseLine
UDiffSynch 0.02 - 0.50 pu 0.01 0.10 Voltage difference limit for
synchronizing in p.u of set voltage
base value
FreqDiffMin 0.003 - 0.250 Hz 0.001 0.010 Minimum frequency difference limit
for synchronizing
FreqDiffMax 0.050 - 0.500 Hz 0.001 0.200 Maximum frequency difference limit
for synchronizing
FreqRateChange 0.000 - 0.500 Hz/s 0.001 0.300 Maximum allowed frequency rate of
change
tBreaker 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.080 Closing time of the breaker
tClosePulse 0.050 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Breaker closing pulse duration
tMaxSynch 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 600.00 Resets synch if no close has been
made before set time
tMinSynch 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 2.000 Minimum time to accept
synchronizing conditions
OperationSC Off - - On Operation for synchronism check
On function Off/On
Table continues on next page

346
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 12
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

UHighBusSC 50.0 - 120.0 %UBB 1.0 80.0 Voltage high limit bus for
synchrocheck in % of UBaseBus
UHighLineSC 50.0 - 120.0 %UBL 1.0 80.0 Voltage high limit line for
synchrocheck in % of UBaseLine
UDiffSC 0.02 - 0.50 pu 0.01 0.15 Voltage difference limit for
synchrocheck in p.u of set voltage
base value
FreqDiffA 0.003 - 1.000 Hz 0.001 0.010 Frequency difference limit between
bus and line Auto
FreqDiffM 0.003 - 1.000 Hz 0.001 0.010 Frequency difference limit between
bus and line Manual
PhaseDiffA 5.0 - 90.0 Deg 1.0 25.0 Phase angle difference limit between
bus and line Auto
PhaseDiffM 5.0 - 90.0 Deg 1.0 25.0 Phase angle difference limit between
bus and line Manual
tSCA 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Time delay output for synchrocheck
Auto
tSCM 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Time delay output for synchrocheck
Manual
AutoEnerg Off - - DLLB Automatic energizing check mode
DLLB
DBLL
Both
ManEnerg Off - - Both Manual energizing check mode
DLLB
DBLL
Both
ManEnergDBDL Off - - Off Manual dead bus, dead line energizing
On
UHighBusEnerg 50.0 - 120.0 %UBB 1.0 80.0 Voltage high limit bus for energizing
check in % of UBaseBus
UHighLineEnerg 50.0 - 120.0 %UBL 1.0 80.0 Voltage high limit line for energizing
check in % of UBaseLine
ULowBusEnerg 10.0 - 80.0 %UBB 1.0 40.0 Voltage low limit bus for energizing
check in % of UBaseBus
ULowLineEnerg 10.0 - 80.0 %UBL 1.0 40.0 Voltage low limit line for energizing
check in % of UBaseLine
UMaxEnerg 50.0 - 180.0 %UB 1.0 115.0 Maximum voltage for energizing in %
of UBase, Line and/or Bus
tAutoEnerg 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Time delay for automatic energizing
check
tManEnerg 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Time delay for manual energizing
check

347
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Control

Table 235: SESRSYN Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SelPhaseBus1 Phase L1 - - Phase L1 Select phase for busbar1
Phase L2
Phase L3
Phase L1L2
Phase L2L3
Phase L3L1
Positive sequence
GblBaseSelBus 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups, Bus
GblBaseSelLine 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups, Line
SelPhaseBus2 Phase L1 - - Phase L1 Select phase for busbar2
Phase L2
Phase L3
Phase L1L2
Phase L2L3
Phase L3L1
Positive sequence
SelPhaseLine1 Phase L1 - - Phase L1 Select phase for line1
Phase L2
Phase L3
Phase L1L2
Phase L2L3
Phase L3L1
Positive sequence
SelPhaseLine2 Phase L1 - - Phase L1 Select phase for line2
Phase L2
Phase L3
Phase L1L2
Phase L2L3
Phase L3L1
Positive sequence
CBConfig No voltage sel. - - No voltage sel. Select CB configuration
Double bus
1 1/2 bus CB
1 1/2 bus alt. CB
Tie CB

Table 236: SESRSYN Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
PhaseShift -180 - 180 Deg 1 0 Additional phase angle for selected
line voltage

12.1.6 Monitored data

PID-3845-MONITOREDDATA v6

Table 237: SESRSYN Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
UDIFFME REAL - - Calculated difference of voltage in p.u
of set voltage base value
FRDIFFME REAL - Hz Calculated difference of frequency
PHDIFFME REAL - deg Calculated difference of phase angle
UBUS REAL - kV Bus voltage
ULINE REAL - kV Line voltage

348
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 12
Control

12.1.7 Operation principle

12.1.7.1 Basic functionality M14832-3 v7

The synchrocheck function measures the conditions across the circuit breaker and compares
them to set limits. The output is only given when all measured quantities are simultaneously
within their set limits.

The energizing check function measures the bus and line voltages and compares them to both
high and low threshold detectors. The output is given only when the actual measured
quantities match the set conditions.

The synchronizing function measures the conditions across the circuit breaker, and also
determines the angle change occurring during the closing delay of the circuit breaker, from the
measured slip frequency. The output is given only when all measured conditions are
simultaneously within their set limits. The issue of the output is timed to give closure at the
optimal time including the time for the circuit breaker and the closing circuit.

For double bus single circuit breaker and 1½ circuit breaker arrangements, the SESRSYN
function blocks have the capability to make the necessary voltage selection. For double bus
single circuit breaker arrangements, selection of the correct voltage is made using auxiliary
contacts of the bus disconnectors. For 1½ circuit breaker arrangements, correct voltage
selection is made using auxiliary contacts of the bus disconnectors as well as the circuit
breakers.

The internal logic for each function block as well as, the input and outputs, and the setting
parameters with default setting and setting ranges is described in this document. For
application related information, please refer to the application manual.

12.1.7.2 Logic diagrams IP14739-1 v1

M14833-3 v5
The logic diagrams that follow illustrate the main principles of the SESRSYN function
components such as Synchrocheck, Synchronizing, Energizing check and Voltage selection,
and are intended to simplify the understanding of the function.

Synchrocheck M14834-3 v13

The voltage difference, frequency difference and phase angle difference values are measured
in the IED centrally and are available for the synchrocheck function for evaluation. By setting
the phases used for SESRSYN, with the settings SelPhaseBus1, SelPhaseBus2, SelPhaseLine1
and SelPhaseLine2, a compensation is made automatically for the voltage amplitude
difference and the phase angle difference caused if different setting values are selected for
both sides of the breaker. If needed an additional phase angle adjustment can be done for
selected line voltage with the PhaseShift setting.

When the function is set to OperationSC = On, the measuring will start.

The function will compare the bus and line voltage values with the set values for UHighBusSC
and UHighLineSC.

If both sides are higher than the set values, the measured values are compared with the set
values for acceptable frequency, phase angle and voltage difference: FreqDiffA, FreqDiffM,
PhaseDiffA, PhaseDiffM and UDiffSC. If additional phase angle adjustment is done with the
PhaseShift setting, the adjustment factor is deducted from the line voltage before the
comparison of the phase angle values.

The frequency on both sides of the circuit breaker is also measured. The frequencies must not
deviate from the rated frequency more than +/-5Hz. The frequency difference between the bus
frequency and the line frequency is measured and may not exceed the set value FreqDiff.

349
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Control

Two sets of settings for frequency difference and phase angle difference are available and
used for the manual closing and autoreclose functions respectively, as required.

The inputs BLOCK and BLKSC are available for total block of the complete SESRSYN function
and selective block of the Synchrocheck function respectively. Input TSTSC will allow testing of
the function where the fulfilled conditions are connected to a separate test output.

The outputs MANSYOK and AUTOSYOK are activated when the actual measured conditions
match the set conditions for the respective output. The output signal can be delayed
independently for MANSYOK and AUTOSYOK conditions.

A number of outputs are available as information about fulfilled checking conditions. UOKSC
shows that the voltages are high, UDIFFSC, FRDIFFA, FRDIFFM, PHDIFFA, PHDIFFM shows
when the voltage difference, frequency difference and phase angle difference conditions are
out of limits.

Output INADVCLS, inadvertent circuit breaker closing, indicates that the circuit breaker has
been closed at wrong phase angle by mistake. The output is activated, if the voltage
conditions are fulfilled at the same time the phase angle difference between bus and line is
suddenly changed from being larger than 60 degrees to smaller than 5 degrees.

Note! Similar logic for Manual Synchrocheck.

OperationSC = On
AND TSTAUTSY
AND

TSTSC

InvalidSelection AND
BLKSC
OR AUTOSYOK
BLOCK AND
BLOCK
0-60 s
AND t
tSCA

UDiffSC 50 ms
AND t
UHighBusSC
UOKSC
AND
UHighLineSC
UDIFFSC
1
FRDIFFA
FreqDiffA 1

PHDIFFA
PhaseDiffA 1

UDIFFME
voltageDifferenceValue
FRDIFFME
frequencyDifferenceValue
PHDIFFME
phaseAngleDifferenceValue

32 ms 100 ms
AND t INADVCLS
PhDiff > 60° AND

PhDiff < 5°

IEC07000114-5-en.vsd
IEC07000114 V5 EN-US

Figure 180: Simplified logic diagram for the Auto Synchrocheck function

350
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 12
Control

Synchronizing SEMOD171603-4 v12.1.1

When the function is set to OperationSynch = On the measuring will be performed.

The function will compare the values for the bus and line voltage with the set values for
UHighBusSynch and UHighLineSynch, which is a supervision that the voltages are both live.
Also the voltage difference is checked to be smaller than the set value for UDiffSynch, which is
a p.u value of set voltage base values. If both sides are higher than the set values and the
voltage difference between bus and line is acceptable, the measured values are compared with
the set values for acceptable frequency FreqDiffMax and FreqDiffMin, rate of change of
frequency FreqRateChange and phase angle, which has to be smaller than the internally preset
value of 15 degrees.

The measured frequencies between the settings for the maximum and minimum frequency will
initiate the measuring and the evaluation of the angle change to allow operation to be sent at
the right moment including the set tBreaker time. The calculation of the operation pulse sent
in advance is using the measured SlipFrequency and the set tBreaker time. To prevent
incorrect closing pulses, a maximum closing angle between bus and line is preset internally to
a value of 15 degrees.. Table 238 below shows the maximum settable value for tBreaker at the
preset maximum closing angle of 15 degrees, at different allowed slip frequencies for
synchronizing.

Table 238: Dependencies between tBreaker and SlipFrequency with maximum closing angle of 15 degrees
tBreaker [s] (max settable value) with the internally SlipFrequency [Hz] (BusFrequency -
preset closing angle of 15 degrees LineFrequency)
0.040 1.000
0.050 0.800
0.080 0.500
0.200 0.200
0.400 0.100
0.800 0.050
1.000 0.040

At operation the SYNOK output will be activated with a pulse tClosePulse and the function
resets. The function will also reset if the synchronizing conditions are not fulfilled within the
set tMaxSynch time. This prevents that the function is, by mistake, maintained in operation for
a long time, waiting for conditions to be fulfilled.

The inputs BLOCK and BLKSYNCH are available for total block of the complete SESRSYN
function and block of the Synchronizing function respectively. TSTSYNCH will allow testing of
the function where the fulfilled conditions are connected to a separate output.

351
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Control

OperationSynch=On

TSTSYNCH

STARTSYN

InvalidSelection
SYNPROGR
AND
Block AND
S
OR
R
BLKSYNCH

UDiffSynch
50 ms SYNOK
AND
UHighBusSynch AND t

UHighLineSynch OR

FreqDiffMax TSTSYNOK
AND
FreqDiffMin

tClose
FreqRateChange Pulse
AND

fBus&fLine ± 5Hz tMax

Phase Diff < 15 deg Synch
SYNFAIL
AND
PhaseDiff=closing angle

FreqDiff
Close pulse
in advance
tBreaker

IEC06000636-4-en.vsd
IEC06000636 V4 EN-US

Figure 181: Simplified logic diagram for the synchronizing function

Energizing check M14835-3 v11

Voltage values are measured in the IED and are available for evaluation by the Energizing check
function.

The function measures voltages on the busbar and the line to verify whether they are live or
dead. This is done by comparing with the set values UHighBusEnerg and ULowBusEnerg for
bus energizing and UHighLineEnerg and ULowLineEnerg for line energizing.

The frequency on both sides of the circuit breaker is also measured. The frequencies must not
deviate from the rated frequency more than +/-5Hz.

The Energizing direction can be selected individually for the Manual and the Automatic
functions respectively. When the conditions are met the outputs AUTOENOK and MANENOK
respectively will be activated if the fuse supervision conditions are fulfilled. The output signal
can be delayed independently for MANENOK and AUTOENOK conditions. The Energizing
direction can also be selected by an integer input AENMODE respective MENMODE, which for
example, can be connected to a Binary to Integer function block (B16I). Integers supplied shall
be 1=Off, 2=DLLB, 3=DBLL and 4= Both. Not connected input will mean that the setting is done
from Parameter Setting tool. The active position can be read on outputs MODEAEN resp
MODEMEN. The modes are 0=OFF, 1=DLLB, 2=DBLL and 3=Both.

The inputs BLOCK and BLKENERG are available for total block of the complete SESRSYN
function respective block of the Energizing check function. TSTENERG will allow testing of the
function where the fulfilled conditions are connected to a separate test output.

352
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 12
Control

manEnergOpenBays
MANENOK
OR

TSTENERG

BLKENERG
OR
BLOCK

selectedFuseOK

UHighBusEnerg
DLLB tManEnerg
AND
OR t
AND
OR
ULowLineEnerg AND

ManEnerg BOTH

ULowBusEnerg
DBLL
AND

UHighLineEnerg

TSTENOK
ManEnergDBDL AND AND

UMaxEnerg
fBus and fLine ±5 Hz

IEC14000031-1-en.vsd
IEC14000031 V1 EN-US

Figure 182: Manual energizing

TSTENERG

BLKENERG
OR
BLOCK

selectedFuseOK

UHighBusEnerg
DLLB 50ms tAutoEnerg
AND
OR t t
AND OR
AUTOENOK
ULowLineEnerg AND
BOTH
AutoEnerg
ULowBusEnerg
DBLL
AND

UHighLineEnerg

TSTENOK
UMaxEnerg AND

fBus and fLine ±5 Hz

IEC14000030-2-en.vsdx
IEC14000030 V2 EN-US

Figure 183: Automatic energizing

353
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Control

BLKENERG
BLOCK OR manEnergOpenBays
AND

ManEnerg

1½ bus CB
CBConfig AND

B1QOPEN
LN1QOPEN AND
OR
B1QCLD
B2QOPEN
AND

LN2QOPEN

1½ bus alt. CB AND OR

AND
OR

B2QCLD
AND

Tie CB
AND
AND
OR

AND

IEC14000032-1-en.vsd
IEC14000032 V1 EN-US

Figure 184: Open bays

Fuse failure supervision M14837-3 v10

External fuse failure signals or signals from a tripped fuse switch/MCB are connected to binary
inputs that are configured to the inputs of SESRSYN function in the IED. Alternatively, the
internal signals from fuse failure supervision can be used when available. There are two
alternative connection possibilities. Inputs labelled OK must be connected if the available
contact indicates that the voltage circuit is healthy. Inputs labelled FF must be connected if
the available contact indicates that the voltage circuit is faulty.

The UB1OK/UB2OK and UB1FF/UB2FF inputs are related to the busbar voltage and the
ULN1OK/ULN2OK and ULN1FF/ULN2FF inputs are related to the line voltage. Configure them
to the binary input or function outputs that indicate the status of the external fuse failure of
the busbar and line voltages. In the event of a fuse failure, the energizing check function is
blocked. The synchronizing and the synchrocheck function requires full voltage on both sides,
thus no blocking at fuse failure is needed.

Voltage selection M14836-3 v9

The voltage selection module including supervision of included voltage transformers for the
different arrangements is a basic part of the SESRSYN function and determines the voltages
fed to the Synchronizing, Synchrocheck and Energizing check functions. This includes the
selection of the appropriate Line and Bus voltages and MCB supervision.

The voltage selection type to be used is set with the parameter CBConfig.

If No voltage sel. is set the voltages used will be U-Line1 and U-Bus1. This setting is also used in
the case when external voltage selection is provided. Fuse failure supervision for the used
inputs must also be connected.

The voltage selection function, selected voltages, and fuse conditions are used for the
Synchronizing, Synchrocheck and Energizing check inputs.

354
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 12
Control

For the disconnector positions it is advisable to use (NO) a and (NC) b type contacts to supply
Disconnector Open and Closed positions but, it is also possible to use an inverter for one of
the positions.

If breaker or disconnector positions not are available for deciding if energizing is allowed, it is
considered to be allowed to manually energize. This is only allowed for manual energizing in
1½ breaker and Tie breaker arrangements. Manual energization of a completely open diameter
in 1 1/2 CB switchgear is allowed by internal logic.

Voltage selection for a single circuit breaker with double busbars M14838-3 v9
The setting CBConfig selected for Double Bus activates the voltage selection for single CB and
double busbars. This function uses the binary input from the disconnectors auxiliary contacts
B1QOPEN-B1QCLD for Bus 1, and B2QOPEN-B2QCLD for Bus 2 to select between bus 1 and bus
2 voltages. If the disconnector connected to bus 1 is closed and the disconnector connected to
bus 2 is opened the bus 1 voltage is used. All other combinations use the bus 2 voltage. The
outputs B1SEL and B2SEL respectively indicate the selected Bus voltage.

The function checks the fuse-failure signals for bus 1, bus 2 and line voltage transformers.
Inputs UB1OK-UB1FF supervise the MCB for Bus 1 and UB2OK-UB2FF supervises the MCB for
Bus 2. ULN1OK and ULN1FF supervises the MCB for the Line voltage transformer. The inputs
fail (FF) or healthy (OK) can alternatively be used dependent on the available signal. If a VT
failure is detected in the selected voltage source an output signal USELFAIL is set. This output
signal is true if the selected bus or line voltages have a VT failure. This output as well as the
function can be blocked with the input signal BLOCK. The function logic diagram is shown in
figure 185.

B1QOPEN
B1SEL
B1QCLD AND

B2QOPEN B2SEL
AND
1
B2QCLD
invalidSelection
AND

bus1Voltage busVoltage

bus2Voltage

UB1OK AND
UB1FF OR
OR selectedFuseOK
AND
UB2OK AND
UB2FF OR USELFAIL
AND

ULN1OK
ULN1FF OR

BLOCK

en05000779-2.vsd
IEC05000779 V2 EN-US

Figure 185: Logic diagram for the voltage selection function of a single circuit breaker with double
busbars

355
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Control

Voltage selection for a 1 1/2 circuit breaker arrangement M14839-3 v8

Note that with 1½ breaker schemes three Synchrocheck functions must be used for the
complete diameter. Below, the scheme for one Bus breaker and the Tie breaker is described.

With the setting parameter CBConfig the selection of actual CB location in the 1 1/2 circuit
breaker switchgear is done. The settings are: 1 1/2 Bus CB, 1 1/2 alt. Bus CB or Tie CB.

This voltage selection function uses the binary inputs from the disconnectors and circuit
breakers auxiliary contacts to select the right voltage for the SESRSYN function. For the bus
circuit breaker one side of the circuit breaker is connected to the busbar and the other side is
connected either to line 1, line 2 or the other busbar depending on the best selection of voltage
circuit.

Inputs LN1QOPEN-LN1QCLD, B1QOPEN-B1QCLD, B2QOPEN-B2QCLD, LN2QOPEN-LN2QCLD are

inputs for the position of the Line disconnectors respectively the Bus and Tie breakers. The
outputs LN1SEL, LN2SEL and B2SEL will give indication of the selected Line voltage as a
reference to the fixed Bus 1 voltage, which indicates B1SEL.

The fuse supervision is connected to ULN1OK-ULN1FF, ULN2OK-ULN2FF and with alternative

Healthy or Failing fuse signals depending on what is available from each fuse (MCB).

The tie circuit breaker is connected either to bus 1 or line 1 voltage on one side and the other
side is connected either to bus 2 or line 2 voltage. Four different output combinations are
possible, bus to bus, bus to line, line to bus and line to line.

• The line 1 voltage is selected if the line 1 disconnector is closed.

• The bus 1 voltage is selected if the line 1 disconnector is open and the bus 1 circuit breaker
is closed.
• The line 2 voltage is selected if the line 2 disconnector is closed.
• The bus 2 voltage is selected if the line 2 disconnector is open and the bus 2 circuit breaker
is closed.

The function also checks the fuse-failure signals for bus 1, bus 2, line 1 and line 2. If a VT failure
is detected in the selected voltage an output signal USELFAIL is set. This output signal is true
if the selected bus or line voltages have a MCB trip. This output as well as the function can be
blocked with the input signal BLOCK. The function block diagram for the voltage selection of a
bus circuit breaker is shown in figure 186 and for the tie circuit breaker in figure 187.

356
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 12
Control

LN1QOPEN
AND
LN1SEL
LN1QCLD

B1QOPEN
LN2SEL
B1QCLD AND AND
B2SEL
OR
LN2QOPEN
AND invalidSelection
LN2QCLD AND
AND
B2QOPEN
B2QCLD AND

line1Voltage lineVoltage

line2Voltage

bus2Voltage

UB1OK
UB1FF OR

OR selectedFuseOK
UB2OK AND
AND
UB2FF OR

USELFAIL
ULN1OK AND
AND
ULN1FF OR

ULN2OK
AND
ULN2FF OR

BLOCK

en05000780-2.vsd
IEC05000780 V2 EN-US

Figure 186: Simplified logic diagram for the voltage selection function for a bus circuit breaker in a 1 1/2
breaker arrangement

357
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Control

LN1QOPEN
AND
LN1SEL
LN1QCLD
B1SEL
1

B1QOPEN AND
AND
B1QCLD AND

line1Voltage busVoltage

bus1Voltage
LN2QOPEN
LN2SEL
LN2QCLD AND
B2SEL
1
invalidSelection
OR
B2QOPEN AND
AND
B2QCLD AND

line2Voltage lineVoltage

bus2Voltage

UB1OK AND
UB1FF OR

OR selectedFuseOK
UB2OK AND
AND
UB2FF OR

USELFAIL
ULN1OK AND
AND
ULN1FF OR

ULN2OK
AND
ULN2FF OR

BLOCK

en05000781-2.vsd
IEC05000781 V2 EN-US

Figure 187: Simplified logic diagram for the voltage selection function for the tie circuit breaker in 1 1/2
breaker arrangement.

12.1.8 Technical data

M12359-1 v13

Table 239: SESRSYN technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Phase shift, jline - jbus (-180 to 180) degrees -

Voltage high limit for synchronizing and (50.0-120.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur

synchrocheck ±0.5% of U at U > Ur

Reset ratio, synchrocheck > 95% -

Frequency difference limit between bus (0.003-1.000) Hz ±2.5 mHz
and line for synchrocheck
Table continues on next page

358
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 12
Control

Function Range or value Accuracy

Phase angle difference limit between bus (5.0-90.0) degrees ±2.0 degrees
and line for synchrocheck
Voltage difference limit between bus and (0.02-0.5) p.u ±0.5% of Ur
line for synchronizing and synchrocheck
Time delay output for synchrocheck when (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is
angle difference between bus and line greater
jumps from “PhaseDiff” + 2 degrees to
“PhaseDiff” - 2 degrees
Frequency difference minimum limit for (0.003-0.250) Hz ±2.5 mHz
synchronizing
Frequency difference maximum limit for (0.050-0.500) Hz ±2.5 mHz
synchronizing
Maximum allowed frequency rate of (0.000-0.500) Hz/s ±10.0 mHz/s
change
Breaker closing pulse duration (0.050-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is
greater
tMaxSynch, which resets synchronizing (0.000-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is
function if no close has been made before greater
set time
Minimum time to accept synchronizing (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is
conditions greater
Voltage high limit for energizing check (50.0-120.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur
±0.5% of U at U > Ur

Reset ratio, voltage high limit > 95% -

Voltage low limit for energizing check (10.0-80.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

Reset ratio, voltage low limit < 105% -

Maximum voltage for energizing (50.0-180.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur
±0.5% of U at U > Ur

Time delay for energizing check when (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±100 ms whichever is
voltage jumps from 0 to 90% of Urated greater
Operate time for synchrocheck function Min. = 15 ms –
when angle difference between bus and Max. = 30 ms
line jumps from “PhaseDiff” + 2 degrees to
“PhaseDiff” - 2 degrees
Operate time for energizing function Min. = 70 ms –
when voltage jumps from 0 to 90% of Max. = 90 ms
Urated

12.2 Autorecloser for 1 phase, 2 phase and/or 3 phase

operation SMBRREC IP14559-1 v6

12.2.1 Identification
M14890-1 v6

Function Description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Autorecloser for 1 phase, 2 phase and/or 3 SMBRREC 79
phase
O->I

SYMBOL-L V1 EN-US

359
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Control

12.2.2 Functionality M12390-3 v15

The autorecloser SMBRREC function provides high-speed and/or delayed auto-reclosing for
single or multi-breaker applications.

Up to five three-phase reclosing attempts can be included by parameter setting. The first
attempt can be single-, two and/or three phase for single phase or multi-phase faults
respectively.

Multiple autoreclosing functions are provided for multi-breaker arrangements. A priority

circuit allows one circuit breaker to close first and the second will only close if the fault proved
to be transient.

Each autoreclosing function is configured to co-operate with the synchrocheck function.

The autoreclosing function provides high-speed and/or delayed three pole autoreclosing.

12.2.3 Function block M12633-3 v6

SMBRREC
ON BLOCKED
OFF SETON
BLKON READY
BLKOFF ACTIVE
RESET SUCCL
INHIBIT UNSUCCL
START INPROGR
STARTHS 1PT1
TRSOTF 2PT1
SKIPHS 3PT1
ZONESTEP 3PT2
TR2P 3PT3
TR3P 3PT4
THOLHOLD 3PT5
CBREADY PERMIT1P
CBPOS PREP3P
PLCLOST CLOSECB
SYNC WFMASTER
WAIT COUNT1P
RSTCOUNT COUNT2P
MODEINT COUNT3P1
COUNT3P2
COUNT3P3
COUNT3P4
COUNT3P5
COUNTAR
MODE

IEC06000189-2-en.vsd
IEC06000189 V2 EN-US

Figure 188: SMBRREC function block

12.2.4 Signals
PID-3666-INPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 240: SMBRREC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
ON BOOLEAN 0 Switches the AR On (at ExternalCtrl = On)
OFF BOOLEAN 0 Switches the AR Off (at ExternalCtrl = On)
BLKON BOOLEAN 0 Sets the AR in blocked state
BLKOFF BOOLEAN 0 Releases the AR from the blocked state
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Resets the AR to initial conditions
INHIBIT BOOLEAN 0 Interrupts and inhibits reclosing sequence
Table continues on next page

360
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 12
Control

Name Type Default Description

START BOOLEAN 0 Reclosing sequence starts by a protection trip signal
STARTHS BOOLEAN 0 Start HS reclosing without SC: t13PhHS
TRSOTF BOOLEAN 0 Makes AR to continue to shots 2-5 at a trip from SOTF
SKIPHS BOOLEAN 0 Will skip the high speed shot and continue on delayed shots
ZONESTEP BOOLEAN 0 Coordination between local AR and down stream devices
TR2P BOOLEAN 0 Signal to the AR that a two-phase tripping occurred
TR3P BOOLEAN 0 Signal to the AR that a three-phase tripping occurred
THOLHOLD BOOLEAN 0 Hold the AR in wait state
CBREADY BOOLEAN 0 CB must be ready for CO/OCO operation to allow start /
close
CBPOS BOOLEAN 0 Status of the circuit breaker Closed/Open
PLCLOST BOOLEAN 0 Power line carrier or other form of permissive signal lost
SYNC BOOLEAN 0 Synchronizing check fulfilled (for 3Ph attempts)
WAIT BOOLEAN 0 Wait for master (in Multi-breaker arrangements)
RSTCOUNT BOOLEAN 0 Resets all counters
MODEINT INTEGER 0 Integer input used to set the reclosingMode, alternative to
setting

PID-3666-OUTPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 241: SMBRREC Output signals

Name Type Description
BLOCKED BOOLEAN The AR is in blocked state
SETON BOOLEAN The AR operation is switched on, operative
READY BOOLEAN Indicates that the AR function is ready for a new sequence
ACTIVE BOOLEAN Reclosing sequence in progress
SUCCL BOOLEAN Activated if CB closes during the time tUnsucCl
UNSUCCL BOOLEAN Reclosing unsuccessful, signal resets after the reclaim time
INPROGR BOOLEAN Reclosing shot in progress, activated during open time
1PT1 BOOLEAN Single-phase reclosing is in progress, shot 1
2PT1 BOOLEAN Two-phase reclosing is in progress, shot 1
3PT1 BOOLEAN Three-phase reclosing in progress, shot 1
3PT2 BOOLEAN Three-phase reclosing in progress, shot 2
3PT3 BOOLEAN Three-phase reclosing in progress, shot 3
3PT4 BOOLEAN Three-phase reclosing in progress, shot 4
3PT5 BOOLEAN Three-phase reclosing in progress, shot 5
PERMIT1P BOOLEAN Permit single-phase trip, inverse signal to PREP3P
PREP3P BOOLEAN Prepare three-phase trip, control of the next trip operation
CLOSECB BOOLEAN Closing command for CB
WFMASTER BOOLEAN Signal to Slave issued by Master for sequential reclosing
COUNT1P INTEGER Counting the number of single-phase reclosing shots
COUNT2P INTEGER Counting the number of two-phase reclosing shots
COUNT3P1 INTEGER Counting the number of three-phase reclosing shot 1
COUNT3P2 INTEGER Counting the number of three-phase reclosing shot 2
Table continues on next page

361
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Control

Name Type Description

COUNT3P3 INTEGER Counting the number of three-phase reclosing shot 3
COUNT3P4 INTEGER Counting the number of three-phase reclosing shot 4
COUNT3P5 INTEGER Counting the number of three-phase reclosing shot 5
COUNTAR INTEGER Counting total number of reclosing shots
MODE INTEGER Integer output for reclosing mode

12.2.5 Settings
PID-3666-SETTINGS v7

Table 242: SMBRREC Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
ExternalCtrl Off - - Off To be set On if AR is to be used with
On external control; Off / On
ARMode 3 phase - - 1/2/3ph The AR mode selection e.g. 3ph, 1/3ph
1/2/3ph
1/2ph
1ph+1*2ph
1/2ph+1*3ph
1ph+1*2/3ph
t1 1Ph 0.000 - 120.000 s 0.001 1.000 Open time for shot 1, single-phase
t1 3Ph 0.000 - 120.000 s 0.001 6.000 Open time for shot 1, delayed
reclosing 3ph
t1 3PhHS 0.000 - 120.000 s 0.001 0.400 Open time for shot 1, high speed
reclosing 3ph
tReclaim 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 60.00 Duration of the reclaim time
tSync 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 30.00 Maximum wait time for synchrocheck
OK
tTrip 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Maximum trip pulse duration
tPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Duration of the circuit breaker closing
pulse
tCBClosedMin 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 5.00 Min time that CB must be closed
before new sequence allows
tUnsucCl 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 30.00 Wait time for CB before indicating
Unsuccessful/Successful
Priority None - - None Priority selection between adjacent
Low terminals None/Low/High
High
tWaitForMaster 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 60.00 Maximum wait time for release from
Master

362
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 12
Control

Table 243: SMBRREC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
NoOfShots 1 - - 1 Max number of reclosing shots 1-5
2
3
4
5
StartByCBOpen Off - - Off To be set ON if AR is to be started by
On CB open position
CBAuxContType NormClosed - - NormOpen Select the CB aux contact type NC/NO
NormOpen for CBPOS input
CBReadyType CO - - CO Select type of circuit breaker ready
OCO signal CO/OCO
t1 2Ph 0.000 - 120.000 s 0.001 1.000 Open time for shot 1, two-phase
t2 3Ph 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 30.00 Open time for shot 2, three-phase
t3 3Ph 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 30.00 Open time for shot 3, three-phase
t4 3Ph 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 30.00 Open time for shot 4, three-phase
t5 3Ph 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 30.00 Open time for shot 5, three-phase
Extended t1 Off - - Off Extended open time at loss of
On permissive channel Off/On
tExtended t1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.500 3Ph Dead time is extended with this
value at loss of perm ch
tInhibit 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Inhibit reclosing reset time
CutPulse Off - - Off Shorten closing pulse at a new trip
On Off/On
Follow CB Off - - Off Advance to next shot if CB has been
On closed during dead time
AutoCont Off - - Off Continue with next reclosing-shot if
On breaker did not close
tAutoContWait 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 2.000 Wait time after close command before
proceeding to next shot
UnsucClByCBChk NoCBCheck - - NoCBCheck Unsuccessful closing signal obtained
CB check by checking CB position
BlockByUnsucCl Off - - Off Block AR at unsuccessful reclosing
On
ZoneSeqCoord Off - - Off Coordination of down stream devices
On to local prot unit’s AR

12.2.6 Operation principle

12.2.6.1 Logic Diagrams M12394-372 v3

The logic diagrams below illustrate the principles applicable in the understanding of the
functionality.

12.2.6.2 Auto-reclosing operation Off and On M12394-11 v8

Operation of the automatic reclosing can be set to Off or On via the setting parameters and
through external control. With the setting Operation = On, the function is activated while with
the setting Operation = Off the function is deactivated. With the setting Operation = On and

363
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Control

ExternalCtrl = On , the activation/deactivation is made by input signal pulses to the inputs

ON/OFF, for example, from a control system.

When the function is set On and is operative the output SETON is activated (high). If the input
conditions CBPOS and CBREADY also are fulfilled, the automatic recloser is prepared to start
the reclosing cycle and the output signal READY on the SMBRREC function block is activated
(high).

12.2.6.3 Auto-reclosing mode selection M12394-382 v5

The Auto-reclosing mode is selected with setting ARMode = 3phase, 1/2/3ph, 1/2ph, 1ph
+1*2ph, 1/2ph+1*3ph, 1ph+1*2/3ph.

As an alternative to setting the mode can be selected by connecting an integer, for example
from function block B16I to input MODEINT.

Following integers shall be used: 1=3phase, 2=1/2/3ph, 3=1/2ph, 4=1ph+1*2ph, 5=1/2ph+1*3ph

or 6=1ph+1*2/3ph.

When a valid integer is connected to the input MODEINT the selected ARMode setting will be
invalid and the MODEINT input value will be used instead. The selected mode is reported as an
integer on the output MODE.

12.2.6.4 Start auto-reclosing and conditions for start of a reclosing cycle M12394-15 v10

The usual way to start a reclosing cycle, or sequence, is to start it when a selective line
protection tripping has occurred, by applying a signal to the START input. Activation of the
START input only will start the 3 phase open timer. It should be necessary to adjust three-
phase auto-reclosing open time, (dead time) for different power system configurations or
during tripping at different protection stages. The input STARTHS (start high-speed reclosing)
can also be used to start a 3 phase dead time without synchro check condition..

To start a new auto-reclosing cycle, a number of conditions of input signals need to be met.
The inputs are:

• CBREADY: CB ready for a reclosing cycle, for example, charged operating gear
• CBPOS: to ensure that the CB was closed when the line fault occurred and start was
applied
• No BLKON or INHIBIT signal shall be present.

After the start has been accepted, it is latched in and an internal signal “Started” is set. It can
be interrupted by a signal to the INHIBIT input.

To start auto-reclosing by CB position Open instead of from protection trip signals, one has to
configure the CB Open position signal to inputs CBPOS and START and set a parameter
StartByCBOpen = On and CBAuxContType = NormClosed (normally closed). One also has to
configure and connect signals from manual trip commands to input INHIBIT.

The logic for switching the auto-recloser On/Off and the starting of the reclosing is shown in
figure 189. The following should be considered:

• Setting Operation can be set to Off or On. ExternalCtrl offers the possibility of switching
by external signals to inputs ON and OFF.
• SMBRREC is normally started by selective tripping. It is either a Zone 1 or Communication
aided trip, or a general trip. If the general trip is used the function must be blocked from
all back-up tripping connected to INHIBIT. In both alternatives the breaker failure function
must be connected to inhibit the function. START makes a first attempt with

364
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 12
Control

synchrocheck, STARTHS makes its first attempt without synchrocheck. TRSOTF starts
shots 2-5.
• Circuit breaker checks that the breaker was closed for a time before the opening occurred
and that the CB has sufficient stored energy to perform an auto-reclosing sequence and is
connected to inputs CBPOS and CBREADY.

Operation:On

AND
External Ctrl: On

OR
ON AND SETON
S
OR
OFF AND R

autoInitiate

initiate
OR
Additional conditions
TRSOTF AND
CBReady
start
120 ms
CBREADY AND
t AND
AND S
tCBClosedMin
CBPOS
t R
NC AND
CB Closed
CBAuxContType OR
Blocking conditions AND
NO AND READY
AND
OR
Inhibit conditions

count 0

IEC05000782-3-en.vsd

IEC05000782 V3 EN-US

Figure 189: Auto-reclosing Off/On and start

12.2.6.5 Control of the auto-reclosing open time for shot 1 M12394-49 v7

It is possible to use up to four different time settings for the first shot, and one extension
time. There are separate settings for single- , two- and three-phase auto-reclosing open times,
t1 1Ph, t1 2Ph, t1 3Ph. If only the START input signal is applied, and an auto-reclosing program
with single-phase reclosing is selected, the auto-reclosing open time t1 1Ph will be used. If one
of the inputs TR2P or TR3P is activated in connection with the input START, the auto-reclosing
open time for two-phase or three-phase reclosing is used. There is also a separate time setting
facility for three-phase high-speed auto-reclosing, t1 3PhHS available for use when required. It
is activated by input STARTHS.

An auto-reclosing open time extension delay, tExtended t1, can be added to the normal shot 1
delay. It is intended to come into use if the communication channel for permissive line
protection is lost. In a case like this there can be a significant time difference in fault clearance
at the two line ends. A longer auto-reclosing open time can then be useful. This extension time
is controlled by setting parameter Extended t1 = On and the input PLCLOST.

12.2.6.6 Long trip signal M12394-78 v5

In normal circumstances the trip command resets quickly due to fault clearing. The user can
set a maximum trip pulse duration tTrip. When trip signals are longer, the auto-reclosing open
time is extended by tExtended t1. If Extended t1 = Off, a long trip signal interrupts the
reclosing sequence in the same way as a signal to input INHIBIT.

365
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Control

Extended t1: On

PLCLOST Extend t1
initiate AND OR AND
AND
tTrip
t
AND
start

long duration
AND
(inhibit SMBRREC)

IEC05000783.vsd

IEC05000783 V3 EN-US

Figure 190: Control of extended auto-reclosing open time and long trip pulse detection
M12394-81 v2

Reclosing checks and the reclaim timer M12394-180 v6

When dead time has elapsed during the auto-reclosing procedure certain conditions must be
fulfilled before the CB closing command is issued. To achieve this, signals are exchanged
between program modules to check that these conditions are met. In three-phase reclosing a
synchronizing and/or energizing check can be used. It is possible to use a synchrocheck
function in the same physical device or an external one. The release signal is configured by
connecting to the auto-reclosing function input SYNC. If reclosing without checking is
preferred the SYNC input can be set to TRUE (set high). At confirmation from the synchro-
check, or if the reclosing is of single-phase or two-phase type, the signal passes on. At three-
phase high-speed reclosing started by STARTHS, synchronization is not checked, and the state
of the SYNC input is disregarded.

By choosing CBReadyType = CO (CB ready for a Close-Open sequence) the readiness of the
circuit breaker is also checked before issuing the CB closing command. If the CB has a
readiness contact of type CBReadyType = OCO (CB ready for an Open-Close-Open sequence)
this condition may not be fulfilled during the dead time and at the moment of reclosure. The
Open-Close-Open condition was however checked at the start of the reclosing cycle and it is
then likely that the CB is prepared for a Close-Open sequence.

The synchro-check or energizing check must be fulfilled within a set time interval, tSync. If it is
not, or if other conditions are not met, the reclosing is interrupted and blocked.

The reclaim timer defines a time from the issue of the reclosing command, after which the
reclosing function resets. Should a new trip occur during this time, it is treated as a
continuation of the first fault. The reclaim timer is started when the CB closing command is
given.

A number of outputs for Autoreclosing state control keeps track of the actual state in the
reclosing sequence.

366
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 12
Control

t1 1Ph
"SMBRREC Open time" timers
t

From logic for OR 1P2PTO

t1 2Ph
reclosing t
programs
1P2PTO t1 3Ph HS
t
3PHSTO
3PHSTO
3PT1TO
t1 3Ph
3PT2TO t
3PT1TO
3PT3TO OR
AND
3PT4TO OR Pulse AR
3PT5TO AND

SYNC
initiate AND Blocking out
CBReady AND OR

SMRREC State
tSync Control
AND t COUNTER
0 Shot 0
CL Shot 1
1
2 Shot 2
3 Shot 3
Pulse (above) tReclaim
AND t R 4 Shot 4
OR Shot 5
5
TR2P LOGIC
TR3P reclosing Reclaim Timer On
1PT1
programs
start 2PT1
initiate 3PHS
INPROGR
Shot 0 3PT1 OR
Shot 1 3PT2
Shot 2
Shot 3 3PT3
Shot 4
Shot 5 3PT4
PERMIT1P
3PT5
PREP3P
1
Blocking out tInhibit
t
OR
Inhibit
Long duration OR
INHIBIT Reclaim Timer On
IEC05000784.vsd

IEC05000784 V3 EN-US

Figure 191: Reclosing Reclaim and Inhibit timers

Pulsing of the CB closing command M12394-231 v7

The CB closing command, CLOSECB is a pulse with a duration set by parameter tPulse. For
circuit-breakers without anti-pumping function, the close pulse cutting described below can
be used. This is done by selecting the parameter CutPulse=On. In case of a new AR start pulse,
the closing command pulse is cut (interrupted). The minimum duration of the pulse is always
50 ms. See figure 192

367
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Control

When a reclosing command is issued, the appropriate reclosing operation counter is

incremented. There is a counter for each type of reclosing and one for the total number of
reclosing commands issued.

tTrip
pulse tPulse
**) AND CLOSECB
OR
initiate
50 ms CloseCB

1PT1 AND COUNT1P

counter

2PT1 AND
counter
COUNT2P

3PT1 AND COUNT3P1

counter

3PT2 AND COUNT3P2

counter

3PT3 AND COUNT3P3

counter

3PT4 AND COUNT3P4

counter

3PT5 AND COUNT3P5

counter

counter COUNTAR
RSTCOUNT

**) Only if "CutPulse" = On

IEC05000785.vsd

IEC05000785 V2 EN-US

Figure 192: Pulsing of closing command and driving the operation counters

Transient fault M12394-257 v3

After the reclosing command the reclaim timer tReclaim starts running for the set time. If no
tripping occurs within this time, the auto-reclosing will reset.

Permanent fault and reclosing unsuccessful signal M12394-260 v6

If a new trip occurs after the CB closing command, and number of set reclosing shot have been
done, a new input signal connected to START or TRSOTF appears, the output UNSUCCL
(unsuccessful closing) is set high. The timers for the first shot can no longer be started.
Depending on the setting for the number of reclosing shots, further shots may be made or the
reclosing sequence will be ended. After the reclaim time has elapsed, the auto-reclosing
function resets but the CB remains open. The CB closed data at the CBPOS input will be
missing. Because of this, the reclosing function will not be ready for a new reclosing cycle.

Normally the signal UNSUCCL appears when a new trip and start is received after the last
reclosing shot has been made and the auto-reclosing function is blocked. The signal resets
once the reclaim time has elapsed. The “unsuccessful“ signal can also be made to depend on
CB position input. The parameter UnsucClByCBChk should then be set to CBCheck, and a timer
tUnsucCl should also be set. If the CB does not respond to the closing command and does not
close, but remains open, the output UNSUCCL is set high after time tUnsucCl.

368
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 12
Control

initiate
block start AND
OR UNSUCCL
AND S

shot 0
R

UnsucClByCBchk = CBcheck

Pulse OR tUnsucCl
AND
AND t
CBclosed

IEC05000786_High.vsd
IEC05000786 V2 EN-US

Figure 193: Issue of signal UNSUCCL, unsuccessful reclosing

Automatic continuation of the reclosing sequence M12394-283 v4

The auto-reclosing function can be programmed to proceed to the following reclosing shots (if
selected) even if the start signals are not received from the protection functions, but the
breaker is still not closed. This is done by setting parameter AutoCont = On and
tAutoContWait to the required delay for the function to proceed without a new start.

tAutoContWait
t

AND

CloseCB
AND S Q

AND

CBClosed
OR

initiate

IEC05000787.vsd
IEC05000787 V2 EN-US

Figure 194: Automatic proceeding of shot 2 to 5

Start of reclosing from CB open information M12394-308 v5

If a user wants to apply starting of auto-reclosing from CB open position instead of from
protection trip signals, the function offers such a possibility. This starting mode is selected by
a setting parameter StartByCBOpen = On. One needs then to block reclosing at all manual trip
operations. Typically, one also set CBAuxContType = NormClosed and connect a CB auxiliary
contact of type NC (normally closed) to inputs CBPOS and START. When the signal changes
from CB closed to CB open an auto-reclosing start pulse of limited length is generated and
latched in the function, subject to the usual checks. Then the reclosing sequence continues as

369
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Control

usual. One needs to connect signals from manual tripping and other functions, which shall
prevent reclosing, to the input INHIBIT.

StartByCBOpen = On
1

START AND

STARTHS AND
autoiniate
³1
100 ms
AND

100 ms
AND

IEC05000788.vsd
IEC05000788 V2 EN-US

Figure 195: Pulsing of the start inputs

12.2.6.7 Time sequence diagrams M12458-10 v4

Some examples of the timing of internal and external signals at typical transient and
permanent faults are shown below in figures 196 to 199.

Fault
CB POS
Closed Open Closed
CB READY CO)

START (Trip)
SYNC
tReclaim
READY

INPROG

1PT1

ACTIVE

CLOSE CB t1 1Ph tPulse

PREP3P

SUCCL

Time

en04000196-3-en.vsd
IEC04000196 V3 EN-US

Figure 196: Transient single-phase fault. Single -phase reclosing

370
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 12
Control

Fault
CB POS Open
Closed Open C C
CB READY (CO)

START (Trip)

TR3P
SYNC

READY

INPROGR

3PT1 t1 3Ph

3PT2 t2 3Ph

ACTIVE tReclaim

CLOSE CB tPulse tPulse

PREP3P

UNSUCCL
Time

en04000197-
2.vsd
IEC04000197 V2 EN-US

Figure 197: Permanent fault. Three-phase trip. Two-shot reclosing

371
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Control

Fault
CBCLOSED
CBREADY(CO)

START

TR3P
SYNC

READY
INPROGR

1PT1

3PT1

3PT2
CLOSE CB t1s

P3P

UNSUC CL tReclaim

en04000198-2.vsd
IEC04000198 V2 EN-US

Figure 198: Permanent single-phase fault. Program 1/2/3ph, single-phase single-shot

reclosing

Fault
CBCLOSED
CBREADY(CO)

START

TR3P

SYNC

READY

INPROGR

1PT1

3PT1

3PT2
t2
CLOSE CB t1s

P3P

UNSUC CL tReclaim

en04000199-
2.vsd
IEC04000199 V2 EN-US

Figure 199: Permanent single-phase fault. Program 1ph + 3ph or 1/2ph + 3ph, two-shot
reclosing

372
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 12
Control

12.2.7 Technical data

M12379-1 v12

Table 244: SMBRREC technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Number of autoreclosing shots 1-5 -
Autoreclosing open time:
shot 1 - t1 1Ph (0.000-120.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms
shot 1 - t1 2Ph whichever is greater
shot 1 - t1 3PhHS
shot 1 - t1 3Ph
shot 2 - t2 3Ph (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms
shot 3 - t3 3Ph whichever is greater
shot 4 - t4 3Ph
shot 5 - t5 3Ph
Extended autorecloser open time (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms
whichever is greater
Minimum time CB must be closed before AR becomes (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms
ready for autoreclosing cycle whichever is greater
Maximum operate pulse duration (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms
whichever is greater
Reclaim time (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms
whichever is greater
Circuit breaker closing pulse length (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms
whichever is greater
Wait for master release (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms
whichever is greater
Inhibit reset time (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms
whichever is greater
Autorecloser maximum wait time for sync (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms
whichever is greater
CB check time before unsuccessful (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms
whichever is greater
Wait time after close command before proceeding to (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms
next shot whichever is greater

12.3 Interlocking IP15572-1 v2

12.3.1 Functionality M15106-3 v7

The interlocking functionality blocks the possibility to operate high-voltage switching devices,
for instance when a disconnector is under load, in order to prevent material damage and/or
accidental human injury.

Each control IED has interlocking functions for different switchyard arrangements, each
handling the interlocking of one bay. The interlocking functionality in each IED is not
dependent on any central function. For the station-wide interlocking, the IEDs communicate
via the station bus or by using hard wired binary inputs/outputs.

The interlocking conditions depend on the circuit configuration and status of the system at
any given time.

373
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Control

12.3.2 Operation principle M13528-4 v6

The interlocking function consists of software modules located in each control IED. The
function is distributed and not dependent on any central function. Communication between
modules in different bays is performed via the station bus.

The reservation function (see section "Functionality") is used to ensure that HV apparatuses
that might affect the interlock are blocked during the time gap, which arises between position
updates. This can be done by means of the communication system, reserving all HV
apparatuses that might influence the interlocking condition of the intended operation. The
reservation is maintained until the operation is performed.

After the selection and reservation of an apparatus, the function has complete data on the
status of all apparatuses in the switchyard that are affected by the selection. Other operators
cannot interfere with the reserved apparatus or the status of switching devices that may
affect it.

The open or closed positions of the HV apparatuses are inputs to software modules
distributed in the control IEDs. Each module contains the interlocking logic for a bay. The
interlocking logic in a module is different, depending on the bay function and the switchyard
arrangements, that is, double-breaker or 1 1/2 breaker bays have different modules. Specific
interlocking conditions and connections between standard interlocking modules are
performed with an engineering tool. Bay-level interlocking signals can include the following
kind of information:

• Positions of HV apparatuses (sometimes per phase)

• Valid positions (if evaluated in the control module)
• External release (to add special conditions for release)
• Line voltage (to block operation of line earthing switch)
• Output signals to release the HV apparatus

The interlocking module is connected to the surrounding functions within a bay as shown in
figure 200.

Apparatus control
Interlocking
modules
modules in
SCILO SCSWI
other bays SXSWI

Apparatus control
modules
Interlocking SCILO SCSWI SXCBR
module

Apparatus control
modules
en04000526.vsd SCILO SCSWI SXSWI

IEC04000526 V1 EN-US

Figure 200: Interlocking module on bay level

Bays communicate via the station bus and can convey information regarding the following:

• Unearthed busbars
• Busbars connected together
• Other bays connected to a busbar
• Received data from other bays is valid

374
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 12
Control

Figure 201 illustrates the data exchange principle.

Station bus

Bay 1 Bay n Bus coupler

Disc QB1 and QB2 closed Disc QB1 and QB2 closed WA1 unearthed
WA1 unearthed
WA1 and WA2 interconn

...
WA1 not earthed WA1 not earthed
WA2 not earthed WA2 not earthed WA1 and WA2 interconn
WA1 and WA2 interconn WA1 and WA2 interconn in other bay

..
WA1

WA2
QB1 QB2 QB1 QB2 QB1 QB2 QC1 QC2

QA1 QA1 QA1

QB9 QB9

en05000494.vsd
IEC05000494 V1 EN-US

Figure 201: Data exchange between interlocking modules

When invalid data such as intermediate position, loss of a control IED, or input board error are
used as conditions for the interlocking condition in a bay, a release for execution of the
function will not be given.

On the local HMI an override function exists, which can be used to bypass the interlocking
function in cases where not all the data required for the condition is valid.

For all interlocking modules these general rules apply:

• The interlocking conditions for opening or closing of disconnectors and earthing switches
are always identical.
• Earthing switches on the line feeder end, for example, rapid earthing switches, are
normally interlocked only with reference to the conditions in the bay where they are
located, not with reference to switches on the other side of the line. So a line voltage
indication may be included into line interlocking modules. If there is no line voltage
supervision within the bay, then the appropriate inputs must be set to no voltage, and the
operator must consider this when operating.
• Earthing switches can only be operated on isolated sections for example, without load/
voltage. Circuit breaker contacts cannot be used to isolate a section, that is, the status of
the circuit breaker is irrelevant as far as the earthing switch operation is concerned.
• Disconnectors cannot break power current or connect different voltage systems.
Disconnectors in series with a circuit breaker can only be operated if the circuit breaker is
open, or if the disconnectors operate in parallel with other closed connections. Other
disconnectors can be operated if one side is completely isolated, or if the disconnectors
operate in parallel to other closed connections, or if they are earthed on both sides.
• Circuit breaker closing is only interlocked against running disconnectors in its bay or
additionally in a transformer bay against the disconnectors and earthing switch on the
other side of the transformer, if there is no disconnector between CB and transformer.
• Circuit breaker opening is only interlocked in a bus-coupler bay, if a bus bar transfer is in
progress.

To make the implementation of the interlocking function easier, a number of standardized and
tested software interlocking modules containing logic for the interlocking conditions are
available:

• Line for double and transfer busbars, ABC_LINE

• Bus for double and transfer busbars, ABC_BC
• Transformer bay for double busbars, AB_TRAFO

375
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Control

• Bus-section breaker for double busbars, A1A2_BS

• Bus-section disconnector for double busbars, A1A2_DC
• Busbar earthing switch, BB_ES
• Double CB Bay, DB_BUS_A, DB_LINE, DB_BUS_B
• 1 1/2-CB diameter, BH_LINE_A, BH_CONN, BH_LINE_B

The interlocking conditions can be altered, to meet the customer specific requirements, by
adding configurable logic by means of the graphical configuration tool PCM600. The inputs
Qx_EXy on the interlocking modules are used to add these specific conditions.

The input signals EXDU_xx shall be set to true if there is no transmission error at the transfer
of information from other bays. Required signals with designations ending in TR are intended
for transfer to other bays.

12.3.3 Logical node for interlocking SCILO IP14138-1 v2

12.3.3.1 Identification
GUID-3EC5D7F1-FDA0-4F0E-9391-08D357689E0C v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Logical node for interlocking SCILO - 3

12.3.3.2 Functionality M15048-3 v6

The Logical node for interlocking SCILO function is used to enable a switching operation if the
interlocking conditions permit. SCILO function itself does not provide any interlocking
functionality. The interlocking conditions are generated in separate function blocks containing
the interlocking logic.

12.3.3.3 Function block M15049-3 v6

SCILO
POSOPEN EN_OPEN
POSCLOSE EN_CLOSE
OPEN_EN
CLOSE_EN

IEC05000359-2-en.vsd
IEC05000359 V2 EN-US

Figure 202: SCILO function block

12.3.3.4 Signals
PID-3487-INPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 245: SCILO Input signals

Name Type Default Description
POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open position of switch device
POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Closed position of switch device
OPEN_EN BOOLEAN 0 Open operation from interlocking logic is enabled
CLOSE_EN BOOLEAN 0 Close operation from interlocking logic is enabled

376
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 12
Control

PID-3487-OUTPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 246: SCILO Output signals

Name Type Description
EN_OPEN BOOLEAN Open operation at closed or interm. or bad pos. is enabled
EN_CLOSE BOOLEAN Close operation at open or interm. or bad pos. is enabled

12.3.3.5 Logic diagram M15086-3 v6

The function contains logic to enable the open and close commands respectively if the
interlocking conditions are fulfilled. That means also, if the switch has a defined end position
for example, open, then the appropriate enable signal (in this case EN_OPEN) is false. The
enable signals EN_OPEN and EN_CLOSE can be true at the same time only in the intermediate
and bad position state and if they are enabled by the interlocking function. The position inputs
come from the logical nodes Circuit breaker/Circuit switch (SXCBR/SXSWI) and the enable
signals come from the interlocking logic. The outputs are connected to the logical node Switch
controller (SCSWI). One instance per switching device is needed.

POSOPEN SCILO
POSCLOSE =1 1
EN_OPEN
&
>1
&

OPEN_EN
CLOSE_EN & EN_CLOSE
>1
&
en04000525.vsd

IEC04000525 V1 EN-US

Figure 203: SCILO function logic diagram

12.3.4 Interlocking for busbar earthing switch BB_ES IP14164-1 v4

12.3.4.1 Identification
GUID-F3CBAFDC-3723-429F-9183-45229A6F0A12 v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Interlocking for busbar earthing BB_ES - 3
switch

12.3.4.2 Functionality M15015-3 v7

The interlocking for busbar earthing switch (BB_ES) function is used for one busbar earthing
switch on any busbar parts according to figure 204.

377
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Control

QC

en04000504.vsd
IEC04000504 V1 EN-US

Figure 204: Switchyard layout BB_ES

12.3.4.3 Function block M15069-3 v6

BB_ES
QC_OP QCREL
QC_CL QCITL
BB_DC_OP BBESOPTR
VP_BB_DC BBESCLTR
EXDU_BB

IEC05000347-2-en.vsd
IEC05000347 V2 EN-US

Figure 205: BB_ES function block

12.3.4.4 Logic diagram M15103-3 v4

BB_ES
VP_BB_DC QCREL
BB_DC_OP QCITL
EXDU_BB & 1

QC_OP BBESOPTR
QC_CL BBESCLTR
en04000546.vsd

IEC04000546 V1 EN-US

12.3.4.5 Signals
PID-3494-INPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 247: BB_ES Input signals

Name Type Default Description
QC_OP BOOLEAN 0 Busbar earthing switch QC is in open position
QC_CL BOOLEAN 0 Busbar earthing switch QC is in closed position
BB_DC_OP BOOLEAN 0 All disconnectors on this busbar part are open
VP_BB_DC BOOLEAN 0 Status for all disconnectors on this busbar part are valid
EXDU_BB BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from bays with disc on this busbar part

PID-3494-OUTPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 248: BB_ES Output signals

Name Type Description
QCREL BOOLEAN Switching of QC is allowed
QCITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC is forbidden
BBESOPTR BOOLEAN QC on this busbar part is in open position
BBESCLTR BOOLEAN QC on this busbar part is in closed position

378
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 12
Control

12.3.5 Interlocking for bus-section breaker A1A2_BS IP14154-1 v2

12.3.5.1 Identification
GUID-29EF1F25-E10A-4C82-A6B7-FA246D9C6CD2 v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Interlocking for bus-section breaker A1A2_BS - 3

12.3.5.2 Functionality M15110-3 v7

The interlocking for bus-section breaker (A1A2_BS) function is used for one bus-section circuit
breaker between section 1 and 2 according to figure 206. The function can be used for
different busbars, which includes a bus-section circuit breaker.

WA1 (A1) WA2 (A2)

QC1 QB1 QB2 QC2

QA1

QC3 QC4

en04000516.vsd
A1A2_BS
IEC04000516 V1 EN-US

Figure 206: Switchyard layout A1A2_BS

379
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Control

12.3.5.3 Function block M13535-3 v6

A1A2_BS
QA1_OP QA1OPREL
QA1_CL QA1OPITL
QB1_OP QA1CLREL
QB1_CL QA1CLITL
QB2_OP QB1REL
QB2_CL QB1ITL
QC3_OP QB2REL
QC3_CL QB2ITL
QC4_OP QC3REL
QC4_CL QC3ITL
S1QC1_OP QC4REL
S1QC1_CL QC4ITL
S2QC2_OP S1S2OPTR
S2QC2_CL S1S2CLTR
BBTR_OP QB1OPTR
VP_BBTR QB1CLTR
EXDU_12 QB2OPTR
EXDU_ES QB2CLTR
QA1O_EX1 VPS1S2TR
QA1O_EX2 VPQB1TR
QA1O_EX3 VPQB2TR
QB1_EX1
QB1_EX2
QB2_EX1
QB2_EX2

IEC05000348-2-en.vsd
IEC05000348 V2 EN-US

Figure 207: A1A2_BS function block

12.3.5.4 Logic diagram M15098-3 v4

A1A2_BS
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB1_OP
QB1_CL =1 VPQB1
QB2_OP
QB2_CL =1 VPQB2
QC3_OP
QC3_CL =1 VPQC3
QC4_OP
QC4_CL =1 VPQC4
S1QC1_OP
S1QC1_CL =1 VPS1QC1
S2QC2_OP
S2QC2_CL =1 VPS2QC2
VPQB1
QB1_OP QA1OPREL
& >1
QA1O_EX1 QA1OPITL
1
VPQB2
QB2_OP
&
QA1O_EX2
VP_BBTR
BBTR_OP
&
EXDU_12
QA1O_EX3

VPQB1 QA1CLREL
VPQB2 & QA1CLITL
1
VPQA1
VPQC3 QB1REL
& >1
VPQC4 QB1ITL
1
VPS1QC1
QA1_OP
QC3_OP
QC4_OP
S1QC1_OP
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX1

VPQC3
VPS1QC1
&
QC3_CL
S1QC1_CL
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX2

en04000542.vsd

IEC04000542 V1 EN-US

380
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 12
Control

VPQA1
VPQC3 QB2REL
VPQC4 & >1
QB2ITL
VPS2QC2 1
QA1_OP
QC3_OP
QC4_OP
S2QC2_OP
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX1
VPQC4
VPS2QC2
&
QC4_CL
S2QC2_CL
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX2

VPQB1 QC3REL
VPQB2 QC3ITL
QB1_OP & 1
QC4REL
QB2_OP
QC4ITL
1

QB1_OP QB1OPTR
QB1_CL QB1CLTR
VPQB1 VPQB1TR

QB2_OP QB2OPTR
QB2_CL QB2CLTR
VPQB2 VPQB2TR
QB1_OP S1S2OPTR
QB2_OP >1 S1S2CLTR
QA1_OP 1
VPQB1
VPS1S2TR
VPQB2 &
VPQA1
en04000543.vsd

IEC04000543 V1 EN-US

12.3.5.5 Signals
PID-3498-INPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 249: A1A2_BS Input signals

Name Type Default Description
QA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in closed position
QB1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in open position
QB1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in closed position
QB2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in open position
QB2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in closed position
QC3_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in open position
QC3_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in closed position
QC4_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC4 is in open position
QC4_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC4 is in closed position
S1QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 on bus section 1 is in open position
S1QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 on bus section 1 is in closed position
S2QC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC2 on bus section 2 is in open position
S2QC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC2 on bus section 2 is in closed position
BBTR_OP BOOLEAN 0 No busbar transfer is in progress
VP_BBTR BOOLEAN 0 Status are valid for app. involved in the busbar transfer
EXDU_12 BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from any bay connected to busbar 1 and 2
EXDU_ES BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from bays containing earth. sw. QC1 or QC2
QA1O_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for apparatus QA1
QA1O_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for apparatus QA1
Table continues on next page

381
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Control

Name Type Default Description

QA1O_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for apparatus QA1
QB1_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB1_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB2_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB2_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2

PID-3498-OUTPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 250: A1A2_BS Output signals

Name Type Description
QA1OPREL BOOLEAN Opening of QA1 is allowed
QA1OPITL BOOLEAN Opening of QA1 is forbidden
QA1CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is allowed
QA1CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is forbidden
QB1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB1 is allowed
QB1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB1 is forbidden
QB2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB2 is allowed
QB2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB2 is forbidden
QC3REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC3 is allowed
QC3ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC3 is forbidden
QC4REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC4 is allowed
QC4ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC4 is forbidden
S1S2OPTR BOOLEAN No bus section connection between bus section 1 and 2
S1S2CLTR BOOLEAN Bus coupler connection between bus section 1 and 2 exists
QB1OPTR BOOLEAN QB1 is in open position
QB1CLTR BOOLEAN QB1 is in closed position
QB2OPTR BOOLEAN QB2 is in open position
QB2CLTR BOOLEAN QB2 is in closed position
VPS1S2TR BOOLEAN Status of the app. between bus section 1 and 2 are valid
VPQB1TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed)
VPQB2TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB2 is valid (open or closed)

12.3.6 Interlocking for bus-section disconnector A1A2_DC IP14159-1 v2

12.3.6.1 Identification
GUID-0A0229EB-5ECD-405C-B706-6A54CBBDB49D v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Interlocking for bus-section A1A2_DC - 3
disconnector

382
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 12
Control

12.3.6.2 Functionality M13544-3 v7

The interlocking for bus-section disconnector (A1A2_DC) function is used for one bus-section
disconnector between section 1 and 2 according to figure 208. A1A2_DC function can be used
for different busbars, which includes a bus-section disconnector.

QB
WA1 (A1) WA2 (A2)

QC1 QC2

A1A2_DC en04000492.vsd

IEC04000492 V1 EN-US

Figure 208: Switchyard layout A1A2_DC

12.3.6.3 Function block M13541-3 v6

A1A2_DC
QB_OP QBOPREL
QB_CL QBOPITL
S1QC1_OP QBCLREL
S1QC1_CL QBCLITL
S2QC2_OP DCOPTR
S2QC2_CL DCCLTR
S1DC_OP VPDCTR
S2DC_OP
VPS1_DC
VPS2_DC
EXDU_ES
EXDU_BB
QBCL_EX1
QBCL_EX2
QBOP_EX1
QBOP_EX2
QBOP_EX3

IEC05000349-2-en.vsd
IEC05000349 V2 EN-US

Figure 209: A1A2_DC function block

383
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Control

12.3.6.4 Logic diagram M15099-3 v5

A1A2_DC
QB_OP
VPQB VPDCTR
QB_CL =1
DCOPTR
DCCLTR
S1QC1_OP
VPS1QC1
S1QC1_CL =1
S2QC2_OP
VPS2QC2
S2QC2_CL =1
VPS1QC1
VPS2QC2
VPS1_DC & >1 QBOPREL
S1QC1_OP QBOPITL
1
S2QC2_OP
S1DC_OP
EXDU_ES

EXDU_BB
QBOP_EX1

VPS1QC1
VPS2QC2
VPS2_DC &
S1QC1_OP
S2QC2_OP
S2DC_OP
EXDU_ES

EXDU_BB
QBOP_EX2

VPS1QC1
VPS2QC2
S1QC1_CL &
S2QC2_CL
EXDU_ES
QBOP_EX3

en04000544.vsd

IEC04000544 V1 EN-US

IEC04000545 V1 EN-US

12.3.6.5 Signals
PID-3499-INPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 251: A1A2_DC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
QB_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB is in open position
QB_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB is in closed position
S1QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 on bus section 1 is in open position
S1QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 on bus section 1 is in closed position
S2QC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC2 on bus section 2 is in open position
S2QC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC2 on bus section 2 is in closed position
S1DC_OP BOOLEAN 0 All disconnectors on bus section 1 are in open position
Table continues on next page

384
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 12
Control

Name Type Default Description

S2DC_OP BOOLEAN 0 All disconnectors on bus section 2 are in open position
VPS1_DC BOOLEAN 0 Switch status of disconnectors on bus section 1 are valid
VPS2_DC BOOLEAN 0 Switch status of disconnectors on bus section 2 are valid
EXDU_ES BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from bays containing earth. sw. QC1 or QC2
EXDU_BB BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from bays with disc conn to section 1 and 2
QBCL_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External close condition for section disconnector QB
QBCL_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External close condition for section disconnector QB
QBOP_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for section disconnector QB
QBOP_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for section disconnector QB
QBOP_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for section disconnector QB

PID-3499-OUTPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 252: A1A2_DC Output signals

Name Type Description
QBOPREL BOOLEAN Opening of QB is allowed
QBOPITL BOOLEAN Opening of QB is forbidden
QBCLREL BOOLEAN Closing of QB is allowed
QBCLITL BOOLEAN Closing of QB is forbidden
DCOPTR BOOLEAN The bus section disconnector is in open position
DCCLTR BOOLEAN The bus section disconnector is in closed position
VPDCTR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB is valid (open or closed)

12.3.7 Interlocking for bus-coupler bay ABC_BC IP14144-1 v2

12.3.7.1 Identification
GUID-8149EE0A-E2A4-431C-9D07-D1A0BD296743 v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Interlocking for bus-coupler bay ABC_BC - 3

12.3.7.2 Functionality M13555-3 v8

The interlocking for bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC) function is used for a bus-coupler bay
connected to a double busbar arrangement according to figure 210. The function can also be
used for a single busbar arrangement with transfer busbar or double busbar arrangement
without transfer busbar.

385
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Control

WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
WA7 (C)
QB1 QB2 QB20 QB7
QC1

QA1

QC2

en04000514.vsd
IEC04000514 V1 EN-US

Figure 210: Switchyard layout ABC_BC

12.3.7.3 Function block M13552-3 v6

ABC_BC
QA1_OP QA1OPREL
QA1_CL QA1OPITL
QB1_OP QA1CLREL
QB1_CL QA1CLITL
QB2_OP QB1REL
QB2_CL QB1ITL
QB7_OP QB2REL
QB7_CL QB2ITL
QB20_OP QB7REL
QB20_CL QB7ITL
QC1_OP QB20REL
QC1_CL QB20ITL
QC2_OP QC1REL
QC2_CL QC1ITL
QC11_OP QC2REL
QC11_CL QC2ITL
QC21_OP QB1OPTR
QC21_CL QB1CLTR
QC71_OP QB220OTR
QC71_CL QB220CTR
BBTR_OP QB7OPTR
BC_12_CL QB7CLTR
VP_BBTR QB12OPTR
VP_BC_12 QB12CLTR
EXDU_ES BC12OPTR
EXDU_12 BC12CLTR
EXDU_BC BC17OPTR
QA1O_EX1 BC17CLTR
QA1O_EX2 BC27OPTR
QA1O_EX3 BC27CLTR
QB1_EX1 VPQB1TR
QB1_EX2 VQB220TR
QB1_EX3 VPQB7TR
QB2_EX1 VPQB12TR
QB2_EX2 VPBC12TR
QB2_EX3 VPBC17TR
QB20_EX1 VPBC27TR
QB20_EX2
QB7_EX1
QB7_EX2

IEC05000350-2-en.vsd
IEC05000350 V2 EN-US

Figure 211: ABC_BC function block

386
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 12
Control

12.3.7.4 Logic diagram M15095-3 v4

ABC_BC
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB1_OP
QB1_CL =1 VPQB1
QB20_OP
QB20_CL =1 VPQB20
QB7_OP
QB7_CL =1 VPQB7
QB2_OP
QB2_CL =1 VPQB2
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
QC11_OP
QC11_CL =1 VPQC11
QC21_OP
QC21_CL =1 VPQC21
QC71_OP
QC71_CL =1 VPQC71
VPQB1
QB1_OP QA1OPREL
& >1 QA1OPITL
QA1O_EX1 1
VPQB20
QB20_OP &
QA1O_EX2
VP_BBTR
BBTR_OP &
EXDU_12
QA1O_EX3
VPQB1 QA1CLREL
VPQB2 QA1CLITL
VPQB7 & 1
VPQB20
en04000533.vsd

IEC04000533 V1 EN-US

VPQA1
VPQB2 QB1REL
& >1
VPQC1 QB1ITL
VPQC2 1
VPQC11
QA1_OP
QB2_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC11_OP
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX1
VPQB2
VP_BC_12
&
QB2_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
QB1_EX2
VPQC1
VPQC11
&
QC1_CL
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX3

en04000534.vsd

IEC04000534 V1 EN-US

387
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Control

VPQA1
VPQB1 QB2REL
& >1
VPQC1 QB2ITL
VPQC2 1
VPQC21
QA1_OP
QB1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX1
VPQB1
VP_BC_12
&
QB1_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
QB2_EX2
VPQC1
VPQC21
&
QC1_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX3

en04000535.vsd

IEC04000535 V1 EN-US

VPQA1
VPQB20 QB7REL
& >1
VPQC1 QB7ITL
VPQC2 1
VPQC71
QA1_OP
QB20_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC71_OP
EXDU_ES
QB7_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC71
&
QC2_CL
QC71_CL
EXDU_ES
QB7_EX2
VPQA1
VPQB7 QB20REL
& >1
VPQC1 QB20ITL
VPQC2 1
VPQC21
QA1_OP
QB7_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES
QB20_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC21
&
QC2_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB20_EX2

en04000536.vsd

IEC04000536 V1 EN-US

388
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 12
Control

VPQB1 QC1REL
VPQB20 QC1ITL
& 1
VPQB7
QC2REL
VPQB2
QB1_OP QC2ITL
1
QB20_OP
QB7_OP
QB2_OP
QB1_OP QB1OPTR
QB1_CL QB1CLTR
VPQB1 VPQB1TR
QB20_OP QB220OTR
QB2_OP & QB220CTR
VPQB20 1
VQB220TR
VPQB2 &
QB7_OP QB7OPTR
QB7_CL QB7CLTR
VPQB7 VPQB7TR
QB1_OP QB12OPTR
QB2_OP >1 QB12CLTR
VPQB1 1
VPQB12TR
VPQB2 &
QA1_OP BC12OPTR
QB1_OP >1 BC12CLTR
QB20_OP 1
VPQA1
VPBC12TR
VPQB1 &
VPQB20
QA1_OP BC17OPTR
QB1_OP >1 BC17CLTR
QB7_OP 1
VPQA1
VPBC17TR
VPQB1 &
VPQB7
QA1_OP BC27OPTR
QB2_OP >1 BC27CLTR
QB7_OP 1
VPQA1
VPBC27TR
VPQB2 &
VPQB7
en04000537.vsd

IEC04000537 V1 EN-US

12.3.7.5 Signals
PID-3500-INPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 253: ABC_BC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
QA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in closed position
QB1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in open position
QB1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in closed position
QB2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in open position
QB2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in closed position
QB7_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB7 is in open position
QB7_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB7 is in closed position
QB20_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB20 is in open position
QB20_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB20 is in closed position
QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in open position
QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in closed position
QC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in open position
QC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in closed position
QC11_OP BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in open position
QC11_CL BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in closed position
QC21_OP BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in open position
QC21_CL BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in closed position
QC71_OP BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC71 on busbar WA7 is in open position
Table continues on next page

389
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Control

Name Type Default Description

QC71_CL BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC71 on busbar WA7 is in closed position
BBTR_OP BOOLEAN 0 No busbar transfer is in progress
BC_12_CL BOOLEAN 0 A bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA1 and
WA2
VP_BBTR BOOLEAN 0 Status are valid for app. involved in the busbar transfer
VP_BC_12 BOOLEAN 0 Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and WA2 are
valid
EXDU_ES BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from any bay containing earthing switches
EXDU_12 BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from any bay connected to WA1/WA2
busbars
EXDU_BC BOOLEAN 0 No transmission error from any other bus coupler bay
QA1O_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for apparatus QA1
QA1O_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for apparatus QA1
QA1O_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for apparatus QA1
QB1_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB1_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB1_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB2_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB2_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB2_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB20_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB20
QB20_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB20
QB7_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB7
QB7_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB7

PID-3500-OUTPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 254: ABC_BC Output signals

Name Type Description
QA1OPREL BOOLEAN Opening of QA1 is allowed
QA1OPITL BOOLEAN Opening of QA1 is forbidden
QA1CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is allowed
QA1CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is forbidden
QB1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB1 is allowed
QB1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB1 is forbidden
QB2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB2 is allowed
QB2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB2 is forbidden
QB7REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB7 is allowed
QB7ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB7 is forbidden
QB20REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB20 is allowed
QB20ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB20 is forbidden
QC1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is allowed
QC1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is forbidden
QC2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is allowed
Table continues on next page

390
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 12
Control

Name Type Description

QC2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is forbidden
QB1OPTR BOOLEAN QB1 is in open position
QB1CLTR BOOLEAN QB1 is in closed position
QB220OTR BOOLEAN QB2 and QB20 are in open position
QB220CTR BOOLEAN QB2 or QB20 or both are not in open position
QB7OPTR BOOLEAN QB7 is in open position
QB7CLTR BOOLEAN QB7 is in closed position
QB12OPTR BOOLEAN QB1 or QB2 or both are in open position
QB12CLTR BOOLEAN QB1 and QB2 are not in open position
BC12OPTR BOOLEAN No connection via the own bus coupler between WA1 and WA2
BC12CLTR BOOLEAN Conn. exists via the own bus coupler between WA1 and WA2
BC17OPTR BOOLEAN No connection via the own bus coupler between WA1 and WA7
BC17CLTR BOOLEAN Conn. exists via the own bus coupler between WA1 and WA7
BC27OPTR BOOLEAN No connection via the own bus coupler between WA2 and
WA7
BC27CLTR BOOLEAN Conn. exists via the own bus coupler between WA2 and WA7
VPQB1TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed)
VQB220TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB2 and QB20 are valid (open or closed)
VPQB7TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB7 is valid (open or closed)
VPQB12TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB1 and QB2 are valid (open or closed)
VPBC12TR BOOLEAN Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and WA2 are
valid
VPBC17TR BOOLEAN Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and WA7 are
valid
VPBC27TR BOOLEAN Status of the bus coupler app. between WA2 and WA7 are
valid

12.3.8 Interlocking for 1 1/2 CB BH IP14173-1 v3

12.3.8.1 Identification
GUID-03F1A3BB-4A1E-49E8-88C6-10B3876F64DA v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Interlocking for 1 1/2 breaker BH_CONN - 3
diameter
Interlocking for 1 1/2 breaker BH_LINE_A - 3
diameter
Interlocking for 1 1/2 breaker BH_LINE_B - 3
diameter

12.3.8.2 Functionality M13570-3 v6

The interlocking for 1 1/2 breaker diameter (BH_CONN, BH_LINE_A, BH_LINE_B) functions are
used for lines connected to a 1 1/2 breaker diameter according to figure 212.

391
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Control

WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
QB1 QB2
QC1 QC1

QA1 QA1

QC2 QC2

QB6 QB6

QC3 QC3
BH_LINE_A BH_LINE_B

QB61 QA1 QB62

QB9 QB9
QC1 QC2
QC9 QC9

BH_CONN
en04000513.vsd

IEC04000513 V1 EN-US

Figure 212: Switchyard layout 1 1/2 breaker

M13570-7 v4
Three types of interlocking modules per diameter are defined. BH_LINE_A and BH_LINE_B are
the connections from a line to a busbar. BH_CONN is the connection between the two lines of
the diameter in the 1 1/2 breaker switchyard layout.

392
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 12
Control

12.3.8.3 Function blocks IP14412-1 v1

M13574-3 v6

BH_LINE_A
QA1_OP QA1CLREL
QA1_CL QA1CLITL
QB6_OP QB6REL
QB6_CL QB6ITL
QB1_OP QB1REL
QB1_CL QB1ITL
QC1_OP QC1REL
QC1_CL QC1ITL
QC2_OP QC2REL
QC2_CL QC2ITL
QC3_OP QC3REL
QC3_CL QC3ITL
QB9_OP QB9REL
QB9_CL QB9ITL
QC9_OP QC9REL
QC9_CL QC9ITL
CQA1_OP QB1OPTR
CQA1_CL QB1CLTR
CQB61_OP VPQB1TR
CQB61_CL
CQC1_OP
CQC1_CL
CQC2_OP
CQC2_CL
QC11_OP
QC11_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
EXDU_ES
QB6_EX1
QB6_EX2
QB1_EX1
QB1_EX2
QB9_EX1
QB9_EX2
QB9_EX3
QB9_EX4
QB9_EX5
QB9_EX6
QB9_EX7

IEC05000352-2-en.vsd
IEC05000352 V2 EN-US

Figure 213: BH_LINE_A function block

393
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Control

M13578-3 v6

BH_LINE_B
QA1_OP QA1CLREL
QA1_CL QA1CLITL
QB6_OP QB6REL
QB6_CL QB6ITL
QB2_OP QB2REL
QB2_CL QB2ITL
QC1_OP QC1REL
QC1_CL QC1ITL
QC2_OP QC2REL
QC2_CL QC2ITL
QC3_OP QC3REL
QC3_CL QC3ITL
QB9_OP QB9REL
QB9_CL QB9ITL
QC9_OP QC9REL
QC9_CL QC9ITL
CQA1_OP QB2OPTR
CQA1_CL QB2CLTR
CQB62_OP VPQB2TR
CQB62_CL
CQC1_OP
CQC1_CL
CQC2_OP
CQC2_CL
QC21_OP
QC21_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
EXDU_ES
QB6_EX1
QB6_EX2
QB2_EX1
QB2_EX2
QB9_EX1
QB9_EX2
QB9_EX3
QB9_EX4
QB9_EX5
QB9_EX6
QB9_EX7

IEC05000353-2-en.vsd
IEC05000353 V2 EN-US

Figure 214: BH_LINE_B function block

M13582-3 v6

BH_CONN
QA1_OP QA1CLREL
QA1_CL QA1CLITL
QB61_OP QB61REL
QB61_CL QB61ITL
QB62_OP QB62REL
QB62_CL QB62ITL
QC1_OP QC1REL
QC1_CL QC1ITL
QC2_OP QC2REL
QC2_CL QC2ITL
1QC3_OP
1QC3_CL
2QC3_OP
2QC3_CL
QB61_EX1
QB61_EX2
QB62_EX1
QB62_EX2

IEC05000351-2-en.vsd
IEC05000351 V2 EN-US

Figure 215: BH_CONN function block

394
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 12
Control

12.3.8.4 Logic diagrams IP14413-1 v1

M13577-1 v5

BH_CONN
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB61_OP
QB61_CL =1 VPQB61
QB62_OP
QB62_CL =1 VPQB62
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
1QC3_OP
1QC3_CL =1 VP1QC3
2QC3_OP
2QC3_CL =1 VP2QC3
VPQB61 QA1CLREL
VPQB62 & QA1CLITL
1
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB61REL
& >1
VPQC2 QB61ITL
1
VP1QC3
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
1QC3_OP
QB61_EX1
VPQC1
VP1QC3
&
QC1_CL
1QC3_CL
QB61_EX2
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB62REL
& >1
VPQC2 QB62ITL
1
VP2QC3
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
2QC3_OP
QB62_EX1
VPQC2
VP2QC3
&
QC2_CL
2QC3_CL
QB62_EX2
VPQB61 QC1REL
VPQB62 QC1ITL
& 1
QB61_OP QC2REL
QB62_OP QC2ITL
1
en04000560.vsd

IEC04000560 V1 EN-US

395
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Control

BH_LINE_A
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB1_OP
QB1_CL =1 VPQB1
QB6_OP
QB6_CL =1 VPQB6
QC9_OP
QC9_CL =1 VPQC9
QB9_OP
QB9_CL =1 VPQB9
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
QC3_OP
QC3_CL =1 VPQC3
CQA1_OP
CQA1_CL =1 VPCQA1
CQC1_OP
CQC1_CL =1 VPCQC1
CQC2_OP
CQC2_CL =1 VPCQC2
CQB61_OP
CQB61_CL =1 VPCQB61
QC11_OP
QC11_CL =1 VPQC11
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON =1 VPVOLT
VPQB1 QA1CLREL
VPQB6 QA1CLITL
& 1
VPQB9
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB6REL
VPQC2 & >1
QB6ITL
1
VPQC3
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QB6_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC3
&
QC2_CL
QC3_CL
QB6_EX2
en04000554.vsd

IEC04000554 V1 EN-US

VPQA1
VPQC1 QB1REL
VPQC2 & >1
QB1ITL
1
VPQC11
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC11_OP
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX1

VPQC1
VPQC11
&
QC1_CL
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX2

VPQB1 QC1REL
VPQB6 QC1ITL
QB1_OP & 1
QC2REL
QB6_OP QC2ITL
VPQB6 1
VPQB9 QC3REL
VPCQB61 &
QC3ITL
1
QB6_OP
QB9_OP
CQB61_OP
VPQA1 QB9REL
VPQB6 QB9ITL
VPQC9 & >1 1

VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC3
VPCQA1
VPCQB61
VPCQC1
VPCQC2
QB9_EX1
QB6_OP
QB9_EX2
>1
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP &
QB9_EX3

en04000555.vsd

IEC04000555 V1 EN-US

396
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 12
Control

CQB61_OP
QB9_EX4
>1 & >1
CQA1_OP
CQC1_OP
CQC2_OP &
QB9_EX5
QC9_OP
QC3_OP
QB9_EX6
VPQC9
VPQC3
&
QC9_CL
QC3_CL
QB9_EX7
VPQB9 QC9REL
VPVOLT QC9ITL
QB9_OP & 1

VOLT_OFF
QB1_OP QB1OPTR
QB1_CL QB1CLTR
VPQB1 VPQB1TR
en04000556.vsd

IEC04000556 V1 EN-US

BH_LINE_B
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB2_OP
QB2_CL =1 VPQB2
QB6_OP
QB6_CL =1 VPQB6
QC9_OP
QC9_CL =1 VPQC9
QB9_OP
QB9_CL =1 VPQB9
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
QC3_OP
QC3_CL =1 VPQC3
CQA1_OP
CQA1_CL =1 VPCQA1
CQC1_OP
CQC1_CL =1 VPCQC1
CQC2_OP
CQC2_CL =1 VPCQC2
CQB62_OP
CQB62_CL =1 VPCQB62
QC21_OP
QC21_CL =1 VPQC21
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON =1 VPVOLT
VPQB2 QA1CLREL
VPQB6 QA1CLITL
& 1
VPQB9
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB6REL
VPQC2 & >1
QB6ITL
1
VPQC3
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QB6_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC3
&
QC2_CL
QC3_CL
QB6_EX2
en04000557.vsd

IEC04000557 V1 EN-US

397
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Control

VPQA1
VPQC1 QB2REL
VPQC2 & >1
QB2ITL
1
VPQC21
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX1

VPQC1
VPQC21
&
QC1_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX2

VPQB2 QC1REL
VPQB6 QC1ITL
QB2_OP & 1
QC2REL
QB6_OP QC2ITL
VPQB6 1
VPQB9 QC3REL
VPCQB62 &
QC3ITL
1
QB6_OP
QB9_OP
CQB62_OP
VPQA1 QB9REL
VPQB6 QB9ITL
VPQC9 & >1 1

VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC3
VPCQA1
VPCQB62
VPCQC1
VPCQC2
QB9_EX1
QB6_OP
QB9_EX2
>1
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP &
QB9_EX3

en04000558.vsd

IEC04000558 V1 EN-US

CQB62_OP
QB9_EX4
>1 & >1
CQA1_OP
CQC1_OP
CQC2_OP &
QB9_EX5
QC9_OP
QC3_OP
QB9_EX6
VPQC9
VPQC3
&
QC9_CL
QC3_CL
QB9_EX7
VPQB9 QC9REL
VPVOLT QC9ITL
QB9_OP & 1

VOLT_OFF
QB2_OP QB2OPTR
QB2_CL QB2CLTR
VPQB2 VPQB2TR
en04000559.vsd

IEC04000559 V1 EN-US

12.3.8.5 Signals
PID-3593-INPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 255: BH_LINE_A Input signals

Name Type Default Description
QA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in closed position
QB6_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB6 is in open position
QB6_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB6 is in close position
QB1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in open position
Table continues on next page

398
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 12
Control

Name Type Default Description

QB1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in closed position
QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in open position
QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in closed position
QC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in open position
QC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in closed position
QC3_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in open position
QC3_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in closed position
QB9_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB9 is in open position
QB9_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB9 is in closed position
QC9_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC9 is in open position
QC9_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC9 is in closed position
CQA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
CQB61_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB61 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQB61_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB61 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
CQC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
CQC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC2 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC2 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
QC11_OP BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in open position
QC11_CL BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in closed position
VOLT_OFF BOOLEAN 0 There is no voltage on line and not VT (fuse) failure
VOLT_ON BOOLEAN 0 There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse) failure
EXDU_ES BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from bay containing earthing switch QC11
QB6_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB6
QB6_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB6
QB1_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB1_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB9_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX4 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX5 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX6 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX7 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9

PID-3593-OUTPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 256: BH_LINE_A Output signals

Name Type Description
QA1CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is allowed
QA1CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is forbidden
QB6REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB6 is allowed
Table continues on next page

399
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Control

Name Type Description

QB6ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB6 is forbidden
QB1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB1 is allowed
QB1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB1 is forbidden
QC1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is allowed
QC1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is forbidden
QC2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is allowed
QC2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is forbidden
QC3REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC3 is allowed
QC3ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC3 is forbidden
QB9REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB9 is allowed
QB9ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB9 is forbidden
QC9REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC9 is allowed
QC9ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC9 is forbidden
QB1OPTR BOOLEAN QB1 is in open position
QB1CLTR BOOLEAN QB1 is in closed position
VPQB1TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed)

PID-3594-INPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 257: BH_LINE_B Input signals

Name Type Default Description
QA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in closed position
QB6_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB6 is in open position
QB6_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB6 is in close position
QB2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in open position
QB2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in closed position
QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in open position
QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in closed position
QC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in open position
QC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in closed position
QC3_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in open position
QC3_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in closed position
QB9_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB9 is in open position
QB9_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB9 is in closed position
QC9_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC9 is in open position
QC9_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC9 is in closed position
CQA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
CQB62_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB62 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQB62_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB62 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
CQC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
Table continues on next page

400
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 12
Control

Name Type Default Description

CQC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC2 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC2 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
QC21_OP BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in open position
QC21_CL BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in closed position
VOLT_OFF BOOLEAN 0 There is no voltage on line and not VT (fuse) failure
VOLT_ON BOOLEAN 0 There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse) failure
EXDU_ES BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from bay containing earthing switch QC21
QB6_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB6
QB6_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB6
QB2_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB2_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB9_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX4 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX5 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX6 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX7 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9

PID-3594-OUTPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 258: BH_LINE_B Output signals

Name Type Description
QA1CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is allowed
QA1CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is forbidden
QB6REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB6 is allowed
QB6ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB6 is forbidden
QB2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB2 is allowed
QB2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB2 is forbidden
QC1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is allowed
QC1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is forbidden
QC2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is allowed
QC2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is forbidden
QC3REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC3 is allowed
QC3ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC3 is forbidden
QB9REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB9 is allowed
QB9ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB9 is forbidden
QC9REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC9 is allowed
QC9ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC9 is forbidden
QB2OPTR BOOLEAN QB2 is in open position
QB2CLTR BOOLEAN QB2 is in closed position
VPQB2TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB2 is valid (open or closed)

401
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Control

PID-3501-INPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 259: BH_CONN Input signals

Name Type Default Description
QA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in closed position
QB61_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB61 is in open position
QB61_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB61 is in closed position
QB62_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB62 is in open position
QB62_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB62 is in closed position
QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in open position
QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in closed position
QC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in open position
QC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in closed position
1QC3_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC3 on line 1 is in open position
1QC3_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC3 on line 1 is in closed position
2QC3_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC3 on line 2 is in open position
2QC3_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC3 on line 2 is in closed position
QB61_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB61
QB61_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB61
QB62_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB62
QB62_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB62

PID-3501-OUTPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 260: BH_CONN Output signals

Name Type Description
QA1CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is allowed
QA1CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is forbidden
QB61REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB61 is allowed
QB61ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB61 is forbidden
QB62REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB62 is allowed
QB62ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB62 is forbidden
QC1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is allowed
QC1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is forbidden
QC2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is allowed
QC2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is forbidden

12.3.9 Interlocking for double CB bay DB IP14167-1 v2

402
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 12
Control

12.3.9.1 Identification
GUID-D6D10255-2818-44E4-A44E-DF623161C486 v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Interlocking for double CB bay DB_BUS_A - 3
Interlocking for double CB bay DB_BUS_B - 3
Interlocking for double CB bay DB_LINE - 3

12.3.9.2 Functionality M13585-3 v10

The interlocking for a double busbar double circuit breaker bay including DB_BUS_A,
DB_BUS_B and DB_LINE functions are used for a line connected to a double busbar
arrangement according to figure 216.

WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
QB1 QB2
QC1 QC4

QA1 QA2

DB_BUS_A DB_BUS_B
QC2 QC5

QB61 QB62

QC3

QB9
DB_LINE

QC9

en04000518.vsd
IEC04000518 V1 EN-US

Figure 216: Switchyard layout double circuit breaker

403
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Control

12.3.9.3 Logic diagrams IP14633-1 v1

M15105-1 v4

DB_BUS_A
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB61_OP
QB61_CL =1 VPQB61
QB1_OP
QB1_CL =1 VPQB1
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
QC3_OP
QC3_CL =1 VPQC3
QC11_OP
QC11_CL =1 VPQC11
VPQB61 QA1CLREL
VPQB1 & QA1CLITL
1
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB61REL
& >1
VPQC2 QB61ITL
1
VPQC3
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QB61_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC3
&
QC2_CL
QC3_CL
QB61_EX2
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB1REL
& >1
VPQC2 QB1ITL
1
VPQC11
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC11_OP
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX1

VPQC1
VPQC11
&
QC1_CL
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX2

en04000547.vsd

IEC04000547 V1 EN-US

VPQB61 QC1REL
VPQB1 QC1ITL
& 1
QB61_OP QC2REL
QB1_OP QC2ITL
1
QB1_OP QB1OPTR
QB1_CL QB1CLTR
VPQB1 VPQB1TR
en04000548.vsd

IEC04000548 V1 EN-US

404
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 12
Control

DB_BUS_B
QA2_OP
QA2_CL =1 VPQA2
QB62_OP
QB62_CL =1 VPQB62
QB2_OP
QB2_CL =1 VPQB2
QC4_OP
QC4_CL =1 VPQC4
QC5_OP
QC5_CL =1 VPQC5
QC3_OP
QC3_CL =1 VPQC3
QC21_OP
QC21_CL =1 VPQC21
VPQB62 QA2CLREL
VPQB2 & QA2CLITL
1
VPQA2
VPQC4 QB62REL
& >1
VPQC5 QB62ITL
1
VPQC3
QA2_OP
QC4_OP
QC5_OP
QC3_OP
QB62_EX1
VPQC5
VPQC3
&
QC5_CL
QC3_CL
QB62_EX2
VPQA2
VPQC4 QB2REL
& >1
VPQC5 QB2ITL
1
VPQC21
QA2_OP
QC4_OP
QC5_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX1

VPQC4
VPQC21
&
QC4_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX2

en04000552.vsd

IEC04000552 V1 EN-US

VPQB62 QC4REL
VPQB2 QC4ITL
& 1
QB62_OP QC5REL
QB2_OP QC5ITL
1
QB2_OP QB2OPTR
QB2_CL QB2CLTR
VPQB2 VPQB2TR
en04000553.vsd

IEC04000553 V1 EN-US

405
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Control

DB_LINE
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QA2_OP
QA2_CL =1 VPQA2
QB61_OP
QB61_CL =1 VPQB61
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
QB62_OP
QB62_CL =1 VPQB62
QC4_OP
QC4_CL =1 VPQC4
QC5_OP
QC5_CL =1 VPQC5
QB9_OP
QB9_CL =1 VPQB9
QC3_OP
QC3_CL =1 VPQC3
QC9_OP
QC9_CL =1 VPQC9
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON =1 VPVOLT
VPQA1
VPQA2 QB9REL
VPQC1 & >1
QB9ITL
1
VPQC2
VPQC3
VPQC4
VPQC5
VPQC9
QA1_OP
QA2_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QC4_OP
QC5_OP
QC9_OP
QB9_EX1

& en04000549.vsd

IEC04000549 V1 EN-US

VPQA1
VPQC1
VPQC2 & >1
VPQC3
VPQC9
VPQB62
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QC9_OP
QB62_OP
QB9_EX2
VPQA2
VPQB61
&
VPQC3
VPQC4
VPQC5
VPQC9
QA2_OP
QB61_OP
QC3_OP
QC4_OP
QC5_OP
QC9_OP
QB9_EX3
VPQC3
VPQC9
&
VPQB61
VPQB62
QC3_OP
QC9_OP
QB61_OP
QB62_OP
QB9_EX4
VPQC3
VPQC9
&
QC3_CL
QC9_CL
QB9_EX5
en04000550.vsd

IEC04000550 V1 EN-US

406
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 12
Control

VPQB61
VPQB62 QC3REL
VPQB9 &
QC3ITL
1
QB61_OP
QB62_OP
QB9_OP
VPQB9
VPVOLT QC9REL
QB9_OP &
QC9ITL
1
VOLT_OFF
en04000551.vsd

IEC04000551 V1 EN-US

12.3.9.4 Function block IP14391-1 v1

M13591-3 v6

DB_BUS_A
QA1_OP QA1CLREL
QA1_CL QA1CLITL
QB1_OP QB61REL
QB1_CL QB61ITL
QB61_OP QB1REL
QB61_CL QB1ITL
QC1_OP QC1REL
QC1_CL QC1ITL
QC2_OP QC2REL
QC2_CL QC2ITL
QC3_OP QB1OPTR
QC3_CL QB1CLTR
QC11_OP VPQB1TR
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES
QB61_EX1
QB61_EX2
QB1_EX1
QB1_EX2

IEC05000354-2-en.vsd
IEC05000354 V2 EN-US

Figure 217: DB_BUS_A function block

M15107-3 v6

DB_LINE
QA1_OP QB9REL
QA1_CL QB9ITL
QA2_OP QC3REL
QA2_CL QC3ITL
QB61_OP QC9REL
QB61_CL QC9ITL
QC1_OP
QC1_CL
QC2_OP
QC2_CL
QB62_OP
QB62_CL
QC4_OP
QC4_CL
QC5_OP
QC5_CL
QB9_OP
QB9_CL
QC3_OP
QC3_CL
QC9_OP
QC9_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
QB9_EX1
QB9_EX2
QB9_EX3
QB9_EX4
QB9_EX5

IEC05000356-2-en.vsd
IEC05000356 V2 EN-US

Figure 218: DB_LINE function block

407
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Control

M13596-3 v6

DB_BUS_B
QA2_OP QA2CLREL
QA2_CL QA2CLITL
QB2_OP QB62REL
QB2_CL QB62ITL
QB62_OP QB2REL
QB62_CL QB2ITL
QC4_OP QC4REL
QC4_CL QC4ITL
QC5_OP QC5REL
QC5_CL QC5ITL
QC3_OP QB2OPTR
QC3_CL QB2CLTR
QC21_OP VPQB2TR
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB62_EX1
QB62_EX2
QB2_EX1
QB2_EX2

IEC05000355-2-en.vsd
IEC05000355 V2 EN-US

Figure 219: DB_BUS_B function block

12.3.9.5 Signals
PID-3598-INPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 261: DB_BUS_A Input signals

Name Type Default Description
QA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in closed position
QB1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in open position
QB1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in closed position
QB61_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB61 is in open position
QB61_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB61 is in closed position
QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in open position
QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in closed position
QC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in open position
QC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in closed position
QC3_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in open position
QC3_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in closed position
QC11_OP BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in open position
QC11_CL BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in closed position
EXDU_ES BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from bay containing earthing switch QC11
QB61_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB61
QB61_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB61
QB1_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB1_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1

408
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 12
Control

PID-3598-OUTPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 262: DB_BUS_A Output signals

Name Type Description
QA1CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is allowed
QA1CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is forbidden
QB61REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB61 is allowed
QB61ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB61 is forbidden
QB1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB1 is allowed
QB1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB1 is forbidden
QC1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is allowed
QC1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is forbidden
QC2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is allowed
QC2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is forbidden
QB1OPTR BOOLEAN QB1 is in open position
QB1CLTR BOOLEAN QB1 is in closed position
VPQB1TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed)

PID-3601-INPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 263: DB_BUS_B Input signals

Name Type Default Description
QA2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA2 is in open position
QA2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA2 is in closed position
QB2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in open position
QB2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in closed position
QB62_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB62 is in open position
QB62_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB62 is in closed position
QC4_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC4 is in open position
QC4_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC4 is in closed position
QC5_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC5 is in open position
QC5_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC5 is in closed position
QC3_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in open position
QC3_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in closed position
QC21_OP BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in open position
QC21_CL BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in closed position
EXDU_ES BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from bay containing earthing switch QC21
QB62_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB62
QB62_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB62
QB2_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB2_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2

409
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Control

PID-3601-OUTPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 264: DB_BUS_B Output signals

Name Type Description
QA2CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of QA2 is allowed
QA2CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of QA2 is forbidden
QB62REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB62 is allowed
QB62ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB62 is forbidden
QB2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB2 is allowed
QB2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB2 is forbidden
QC4REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC4 is allowed
QC4ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC4 is forbidden
QC5REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC5 is allowed
QC5ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC5 is forbidden
QB2OPTR BOOLEAN QB2 is in open position
QB2CLTR BOOLEAN QB2 is in closed position
VPQB2TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB2 is valid (open or closed)

PID-3508-INPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 265: DB_LINE Input signals

Name Type Default Description
QA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in closed position
QA2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA2 is in open position
QA2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA2 is in closed position
QB61_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB61 is in open position
QB61_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB61 is in closed position
QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in open position
QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in closed position
QC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in open position
QC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in closed position
QB62_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB62 is in open position
QB62_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB62 is in closed position
QC4_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC4 is in open position
QC4_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC4 is in closed position
QC5_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC5 is in open position
QC5_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC5 is in closed position
QB9_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB9 is in open position
QB9_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB9 is in closed position
QC3_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in open position
QC3_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in closed position
QC9_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC9 is in open position
QC9_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC9 is in closed position
VOLT_OFF BOOLEAN 0 There is no voltage on the line and not VT (fuse) failure
Table continues on next page

410
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 12
Control

Name Type Default Description

VOLT_ON BOOLEAN 0 There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse) failure
QB9_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX4 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX5 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9

PID-3508-OUTPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 266: DB_LINE Output signals

Name Type Description
QB9REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB9 is allowed
QB9ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB9 is forbidden
QC3REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC3 is allowed
QC3ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC3 is forbidden
QC9REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC9 is allowed
QC9ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC9 is forbidden

12.3.10 Interlocking for line bay ABC_LINE IP14139-1 v2

12.3.10.1 Identification
GUID-BEA26EA4-F402-4385-9238-1361E862D987 v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Interlocking for line bay ABC_LINE - 3

12.3.10.2 Functionality M13561-3 v8

The interlocking for line bay (ABC_LINE) function is used for a line connected to a double
busbar arrangement with a transfer busbar according to figure 220. The function can also be
used for a double busbar arrangement without transfer busbar or a single busbar
arrangement with/without transfer busbar.

411
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Control

WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
WA7 (C)
QB1 QB2 QB7
QC1

QA1

QC2

QB9
QC9

en04000478.vsd
IEC04000478 V1 EN-US

Figure 220: Switchyard layout ABC_LINE

412
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 12
Control

12.3.10.3 Function block M15108-3 v6

ABC_LINE
QA1_OP QA1CLREL
QA1_CL QA1CLITL
QB9_OP QB9REL
QB9_CL QB9ITL
QB1_OP QB1REL
QB1_CL QB1ITL
QB2_OP QB2REL
QB2_CL QB2ITL
QB7_OP QB7REL
QB7_CL QB7ITL
QC1_OP QC1REL
QC1_CL QC1ITL
QC2_OP QC2REL
QC2_CL QC2ITL
QC9_OP QC9REL
QC9_CL QC9ITL
QC11_OP QB1OPTR
QC11_CL QB1CLTR
QC21_OP QB2OPTR
QC21_CL QB2CLTR
QC71_OP QB7OPTR
QC71_CL QB7CLTR
BB7_D_OP QB12OPTR
BC_12_CL QB12CLTR
BC_17_OP VPQB1TR
BC_17_CL VPQB2TR
BC_27_OP VPQB7TR
BC_27_CL VPQB12TR
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
VP_BB7_D
VP_BC_12
VP_BC_17
VP_BC_27
EXDU_ES
EXDU_BPB
EXDU_BC
QB9_EX1
QB9_EX2
QB1_EX1
QB1_EX2
QB1_EX3
QB2_EX1
QB2_EX2
QB2_EX3
QB7_EX1
QB7_EX2
QB7_EX3
QB7_EX4

IEC05000357-2-en.vsd
IEC05000357 V2 EN-US

Figure 221: ABC_LINE function block

413
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Control

12.3.10.4 Logic diagram M15089-3 v5

ABC_LINE
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB9_OP
QB9_CL =1 VPQB9
QA1CLREL
QB1_OP
QB1_CL =1 VPQB1 QA1CLITL
& 1
QB2_OP
QB2_CL =1 VPQB2
QB7_OP
QB7_CL =1 VPQB7
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
QC9_OP
QC9_CL =1 VPQC9
QC11_OP
QC11_CL =1 VPQC11
QC21_OP
QC21_CL =1 VPQC21
QC71_OP
QC71_CL =1 VPQC71
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON =1 VPVOLT
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB9REL
VPQC2 & >1
QB9ITL
1
VPQC9
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC9_OP
QB9_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC9
&
QC2_CL
QC9_CL
QB9_EX2

en04000527.vsd
IEC04000527 V1 EN-US

414
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 12
Control

VPQA1 QB1REL
& ³1
VPQB2
VPQC1 1 QB1ITL
VPQC2
VPQC11
QA1_OP
QB2_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC11_OP
EXDU_ES

QB1_EX1

VPQB2 &
VP_BC_12
QB2_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC

QB1_EX2

VPQC1 &
VPQC11
QC1_CL
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES

QB1EX3

en04000528.vsd

IEC04000528 V1 EN-US

415
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Control

VPQA1 QB2REL
& ³1
VPQB1
VPQC1 1 QB2ITL
VPQC2
VPQC21
QA1_OP
QB1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES

QB2_EX1

VPQB1 &
VP_BC_12
QB1_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC

QB2_EX2

VPQC1 &
VPQC21
QC1_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES

QB2_EX3

en04000529.vsd

IEC04000529 V1 EN-US

416
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 12
Control

VPQC9 QB7REL
& >1
VPQC71
VP_BB7_D 1 QB7ITL
VP_BC_17
VP_BC_27
QC9_OP
QC71_OP
EXDU_ES

BB7_D_OP
EXDU_BPB

BC_17_OP
BC_27_OP
EXDU_BC
QB7_EX1

VPQA1
VPQB1
VPQC9
&
VPQB9
VPQC71
VP_BB7_D
VP_BC_17
QA1_CL
QB1_CL
QC9_OP
QB9_CL
QC71_OP
EXDU_ES

BB7_D_OP
EXDU_BPB
BC_17_CL

EXDU_BC

QB7_EX2

IEC04000530 V1 EN-US

417
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Control

VPQA1
VPQB2
& >1
VPQC9
VPQB9
VPQC71
VP_BB7_D
VP_BC_27
QA1_CL
QB2_CL
QC9_OP
QB9_CL
QC71_OP
EXDU_ES

BB7_D_OP
EXDU_BPB
BC_27_CL
EXDU_BC
QB7_EX3
VPQC9
VPQC71
&
QC9_CL
QC71_CL
EXDU_ES
QB7_EX4
VPQB1 QC1REL
VPQB2 QC1ITL
VPQB9 & 1
QC2REL
QB1_OP
QB2_OP QC2ITL
1
QB9_OP
VPQB7
VPQB9 QC9REL
VPVOLT &
QC9ITL
QB7_OP 1
QB9_OP
VOLT_OFF
en04000531.vsd
IEC04000531 V1 EN-US

418
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 12
Control

QB1_OP QB1OPTR
QB1_CL QB1CLTR
VPQB1 VPQB1TR
QB2_OP QB2OPTR
QB2_CL QB2CLTR
VPQB2 VPQB2TR
QB7_OP QB7OPTR
QB7_CL QB7CLTR
VPQB7 VPQB7TR
QB1_OP QB12OPTR
QB2_OP >1 QB12CLTR
VPQB1 1
VPQB12TR
VPQB2 &
en04000532.vsd
IEC04000532 V1 EN-US

12.3.10.5 Signals
PID-3509-INPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 267: ABC_LINE Input signals

Name Type Default Description
QA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in closed position
QB9_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB9 is in open position
QB9_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB9 is in closed position
QB1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in open position
QB1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in closed position
QB2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in open position
QB2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in closed position
QB7_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB7 is in open position
QB7_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB7 is in closed position
QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in open position
QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in closed position
QC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in open position
QC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in closed position
QC9_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC9 is in open position
QC9_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC9 is in closed position
QC11_OP BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in open position
QC11_CL BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in closed position
QC21_OP BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in open position
QC21_CL BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in closed position
QC71_OP BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC71 on busbar WA7 is in open position
QC71_CL BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC71 on busbar WA7 is in closed position
BB7_D_OP BOOLEAN 0 Disconnectors on busbar WA7 except in the own bay are open
BC_12_CL BOOLEAN 0 A bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA1 and
WA2
Table continues on next page

419
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Control

Name Type Default Description

BC_17_OP BOOLEAN 0 No bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA1 and
WA7
BC_17_CL BOOLEAN 0 A bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA1 and
WA7
BC_27_OP BOOLEAN 0 No bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA2 and
WA7
BC_27_CL BOOLEAN 0 A bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA2 and
WA7
VOLT_OFF BOOLEAN 0 There is no voltage on the line and not VT (fuse) failure
VOLT_ON BOOLEAN 0 There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse) failure
VP_BB7_D BOOLEAN 0 Switch status of the disconnectors on busbar WA7 are valid
VP_BC_12 BOOLEAN 0 Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and WA2 are
valid
VP_BC_17 BOOLEAN 0 Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and WA7 are
valid
VP_BC_27 BOOLEAN 0 Status of the bus coupler app. between WA2 and WA7 are
valid
EXDU_ES BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from any bay containing earthing switches
EXDU_BPB BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from any bay with disconnectors on WA7
EXDU_BC BOOLEAN 0 No transmission error from any bus coupler bay
QB9_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB1_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB1_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB1_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB2_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB2_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB2_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB7_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB7
QB7_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB7
QB7_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB7
QB7_EX4 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB7

PID-3509-OUTPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 268: ABC_LINE Output signals

Name Type Description
QA1CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is allowed
QA1CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is forbidden
QB9REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB9 is allowed
QB9ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB9 is forbidden
QB1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB1 is allowed
QB1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB1 is forbidden
QB2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB2 is allowed
QB2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB2 is forbidden
QB7REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB7 is allowed
Table continues on next page

420
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 12
Control

Name Type Description

QB7ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB7 is forbidden
QC1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is allowed
QC1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is forbidden
QC2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is allowed
QC2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is forbidden
QC9REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC9 is allowed
QC9ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC9 is forbidden
QB1OPTR BOOLEAN QB1 is in open position
QB1CLTR BOOLEAN QB1 is in closed position
QB2OPTR BOOLEAN QB2 is in open position
QB2CLTR BOOLEAN QB2 is in closed position
QB7OPTR BOOLEAN QB7 is in open position
QB7CLTR BOOLEAN QB7 is in closed position
QB12OPTR BOOLEAN QB1 or QB2 or both are in open position
QB12CLTR BOOLEAN QB1 and QB2 are not in open position
VPQB1TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed)
VPQB2TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB2 is valid (open or closed)
VPQB7TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB7 is valid (open or closed)
VPQB12TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB1 and QB2 are valid (open or closed)

12.3.11 Interlocking for transformer bay AB_TRAFO IP14149-1 v2

12.3.11.1 Identification
GUID-AD839CAA-531B-43BC-B508-39AED3D0A97D v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Interlocking for transformer bay AB_TRAFO - 3

12.3.11.2 Functionality M13567-3 v7

The interlocking for transformer bay (AB_TRAFO) function is used for a transformer bay
connected to a double busbar arrangement according to figure 222. The function is used when
there is no disconnector between circuit breaker and transformer. Otherwise, the interlocking
for line bay (ABC_LINE) function can be used. This function can also be used in single busbar
arrangements.

421
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Control

WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
QB1 QB2
QC1

QA1
AB_TRAFO
QC2

QC3

QA2
QA2 and QC4 are not
QC4 used in this interlocking

QB3 QB4

en04000515.vsd
IEC04000515 V1 EN-US

Figure 222: Switchyard layout AB_TRAFO

12.3.11.3 Function block M13565-3 v6

AB_TRAFO
QA1_OP QA1CLREL
QA1_CL QA1CLITL
QB1_OP QB1REL
QB1_CL QB1ITL
QB2_OP QB2REL
QB2_CL QB2ITL
QC1_OP QC1REL
QC1_CL QC1ITL
QC2_OP QC2REL
QC2_CL QC2ITL
QB3_OP QB1OPTR
QB3_CL QB1CLTR
QB4_OP QB2OPTR
QB4_CL QB2CLTR
QC3_OP QB12OPTR
QC3_CL QB12CLTR
QC11_OP VPQB1TR
QC11_CL VPQB2TR
QC21_OP VPQB12TR
QC21_CL
BC_12_CL
VP_BC_12
EXDU_ES
EXDU_BC
QA1_EX1
QA1_EX2
QA1_EX3
QB1_EX1
QB1_EX2
QB1_EX3
QB2_EX1
QB2_EX2
QB2_EX3

IEC05000358-2-en.vsd
IEC05000358 V2 EN-US

Figure 223: AB_TRAFO function block

422
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 12
Control

12.3.11.4 Logic diagram M15097-3 v4

AB_TRAFO
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB1_OP
QB1_CL =1 VPQB1
QB2_OP
QB2_CL =1 VPQB2
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
QB3_OP
QB3_CL =1 VPQB3
QB4_OP
QB4_CL =1 VPQB4
QC3_OP
QC3_CL =1 VPQC3
QC11_OP
QC11_CL =1 VPQC11
QC21_OP
QC21_CL =1 VPQC21
VPQB1 QA1CLREL
VPQB2 QA1CLITL
VPQC1 & 1

VPQC2
VPQB3
VPQB4
VPQC3
QA1_EX2
QC3_OP
QA1_EX3
QC1_CL >1
QC2_CL
QC3_CL &
QA1_EX1

en04000538.vsd

IEC04000538 V1 EN-US

VPQA1
VPQB2 QB1REL
& >1
VPQC1 QB1ITL
VPQC2 1
VPQC3
VPQC11
QA1_OP
QB2_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QC11_OP
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX1
VPQB2
VPQC3
&
VP_BC_12
QB2_CL
QC3_OP
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
QB1_EX2
VPQC1
VPQC2
&
VPQC3
VPQC11
QC1_CL
QC2_CL
QC3_CL
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX3

en04000539.vsd

IEC04000539 V1 EN-US

423
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Control

VPQA1
VPQB1 QB2REL
& >1
VPQC1 QB2ITL
VPQC2 1
VPQC3
VPQC21
QA1_OP
QB1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX1
VPQB1
VPQC3
&
VP_BC_12
QB1_CL
QC3_OP
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
QB2_EX2
VPQC1
VPQC2
&
VPQC3
VPQC21
QC1_CL
QC2_CL
QC3_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX3

en04000540.vsd

IEC04000540 V1 EN-US

VPQB1 QC1REL
VPQB2 QC1ITL
& 1
VPQB3
QC2REL
VPQB4
QB1_OP QC2ITL
1
QB2_OP
QB3_OP
QB4_OP
QB1_OP QB1OPTR
QB1_CL QB1CLTR
VPQB1 VPQB1TR
QB2_OP QB2OPTR
QB2_CL QB2CLTR
VPQB2 VPQB2TR
QB1_OP QB12OPTR
QB2_OP >1 QB12CLTR
VPQB1 1
VPQB12TR
VPQB2 &
en04000541.vsd

IEC04000541 V1 EN-US

12.3.11.5 Signals
PID-3510-INPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 269: AB_TRAFO Input signals

Name Type Default Description
QA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in closed position
QB1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in open position
QB1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in closed position
QB2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in open position
QB2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in closed position
QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in open position
QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in closed position
QC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in open position
QC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in closed position
QB3_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB3 is in open position
Table continues on next page

424
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 12
Control

Name Type Default Description

QB3_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB3 is in closed position
QB4_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB4 is in open position
QB4_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB4 is in closed position
QC3_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in open position
QC3_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in closed position
QC11_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC11 on busbar WA1 is in open position
QC11_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC11 on busbar WA1 is in closed position
QC21_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC21 on busbar WA2 is in open position
QC21_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC21 on busbar WA2 is in closed position
BC_12_CL BOOLEAN 0 A bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA1 and
WA2
VP_BC_12 BOOLEAN 0 Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and WA2 are
valid
EXDU_ES BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from any bay containing earthing switches
EXDU_BC BOOLEAN 0 No transmission error from any bus coupler bay
QA1_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QA1
QA1_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QA1
QA1_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QA1
QB1_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB1_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB1_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB2_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB2_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB2_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2

PID-3510-OUTPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 270: AB_TRAFO Output signals

Name Type Description
QA1CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is allowed
QA1CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is forbidden
QB1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB1 is allowed
QB1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB1 is forbidden
QB2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB2 is allowed
QB2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB2 is forbidden
QC1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is allowed
QC1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is forbidden
QC2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is allowed
QC2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is forbidden
QB1OPTR BOOLEAN QB1 is in open position
QB1CLTR BOOLEAN QB1 is in closed position
QB2OPTR BOOLEAN QB2 is in open position
QB2CLTR BOOLEAN QB2 is in closed position
QB12OPTR BOOLEAN QB1 or QB2 or both are in open position
Table continues on next page

425
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Control

Name Type Description

QB12CLTR BOOLEAN QB1 and QB2 are not in open position
VPQB1TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed)
VPQB2TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB2 is valid (open or closed)
VPQB12TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB1 and QB2 are valid (open or closed)

12.3.12 Position evaluation POS_EVAL GUID-F20A8939-E91E-44F6-920C-083E5D3FCDFD v2

12.3.12.1 Identification
GUID-3C4B9379-C861-406C-9295-0309014D548E v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Position evaluation POS_EVAL - -

12.3.12.2 Functionality GUID-C3D07B40-FF01-45C5-A083-EED5643A5FCC v4

Position evaluation (POS_EVAL) function converts the input position data signal POSITION,
consisting of value, time and signal status, to binary signals OPENPOS or CLOSEPOS.

The output signals are used by other functions in the interlocking scheme.

12.3.12.3 Function block GUID-B5EF4A28-9C9F-4558-8CD6-453FB480314B v2

POS_EVAL
POSITION OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS

IEC09000079_1_en.vsd
IEC09000079 V1 EN-US

Figure 224: POS_EVAL function block

12.3.12.4 Logic diagram GUID-F0EF8D38-031B-4A8E-BD7D-60314F5DCD59 v2

POS_EVAL
Position including quality POSITION OPENPOS
Open/close position of
CLOSEPOS switch device

IEC08000469-1-en.vsd
IEC08000469-1-EN V1 EN-US

Only the value, open/close, and status is used in this function. Time information is not used.

Input position (Value) Signal quality Output OPENPOS Output CLOSEPOS

0 (Breaker intermediate) Good 0 0
1 (Breaker open) Good 1 0
2 (Breaker closed) Good 0 1
3 (Breaker faulty) Good 0 0
Any Invalid 0 0
Any Oscillatory 0 0

426
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 12
Control

12.3.12.5 Signals
PID-3555-INPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 271: POS_EVAL Input signals

Name Type Default Description
POSITION INTEGER 0 Position status including quality

PID-3555-OUTPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 272: POS_EVAL Output signals

Name Type Description
OPENPOS BOOLEAN Open position
CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN Close position

12.4 Apparatus control APC IP14560-1 v2

12.4.1 Functionality M13444-3 v14

The apparatus control functions are used for control and supervision of circuit breakers,
disconnectors and earthing switches within a bay. Permission to operate is given after
evaluation of conditions from other functions such as interlocking, synchrocheck, operator
place selection and external or internal blockings.

The complete apparatus control function is not included in this product, and
the information below is included for understanding of the principle for the use
of QCBAY, LOCREM, LOCREMCTRL, SCILO, SCSWI, SXCBR.

Apparatus control features:

• Select-Execute principle to give high reliability

• Selection function to prevent simultaneous operation
• Selection and supervision of operator place
• Command supervision
• Block/deblock of operation
• Block/deblock of updating of position indications
• Substitution of position and quality indications
• Overriding of interlocking functions
• Overriding of synchrocheck
• Operation counter
• Suppression of mid position

Two types of command models can be used:

• Direct with normal security

• SBO (Select-Before-Operate) with enhanced security

Normal security means that only the command is evaluated and the resulting position is not
supervised. Enhanced security means that the command is evaluated with an additional
supervision of the status value of the control object. The command sequence with enhanced
security is always terminated by a CommandTermination service primitive and an AddCause
telling if the command was successful or if something went wrong.

427
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Control

Control operation can be performed from the local HMI with authority control if so defined.

12.4.2 Operation principle M13423-4 v7

A bay can handle, for example a power line, a transformer, a reactor, or a capacitor bank. The
different primary apparatuses within the bay can be controlled via the apparatus control
functions directly by the operator or indirectly by automatic sequences.

Because a primary apparatus can be allocated to many functions within a Substation

Automation system, the object-oriented approach with a function block that handles the
interaction and status of each process object ensures consistency in the process information
used by higher-level control functions.

Primary apparatuses such as breakers and disconnectors are controlled and supervised by one
function block (SCSWI) each. Because the number and type of signals used for the control of a
breaker respectively a disconnector are almost the same, the same function block type is used
to handle these two types of apparatuses.

The SCSWI function block is connected either to an SXCBR function block (for circuit breakers)
or to an SXSWI function block (for disconnectors and earthing switches). The physical process
in the switchyard is connected to these two function blocks via binary inputs and outputs.

Four types of function blocks are available to cover most of the control and supervision within
the bay. These function blocks are interconnected to form a control function reflecting the
switchyard configuration. The total number used depends on the switchyard configuration.
These four types are:

• Bay control QCBAY

• Switch controller SCSWI
• Circuit breaker SXCBR
• Circuit switch SXSWI

The functions Local Remote (LOCREM) and Local Remote Control (LOCREMCTRL), to handle
the local/remote switch, and the functions Bay reserve (QCRSV) and Reservation input (RESIN),
for the reservation function, also belong to the apparatus control function. The principles of
operation, function blocks, input and output signals and setting parameters for all these
functions are described below.

12.4.3 Error handling GUID-6C31D291-74E8-46A3-8FC2-D3959C2458A5 v7

Depending on the error that occurs during the command sequence the error signal will be set
with a value. Table 273 describes the cause values given on local HMI. The translation to
AddCause values specified in IEC 61850-8-1 is shown in Table 274. For IEC 61850-8-1 edition 2
only addcauses defined in the standard are used, for edition 1 also a number of vendor specific
causes are used. The values are available in the command response to commands from IE
C61850-8-1 clients. An output L_CAUSE on the function block for Switch controller (SCSWI) and
Circuit breaker (SXCBR) indicates the value of the cause during the latest command if the
function specific command evaluation has been started. The causes that are not always
reflected on the output L_CAUSE, with description of the typical reason are listed in table 275.

428
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 12
Control

Table 273: Values for "cause" signal

Cause Name Description Supported
number
0 None Control action successfully executed X
1 Not-supported Given for Cancel request with Direct Control in Ready state X
2 Blocked-by-switching- Not successful since one of the downstream Loc switches X
hierarchy like in CSWI has the value TRUE
3 Select-failed Cancelled due to an unsuccessful selection (select service) X
4 Invalid-position Control action is aborted due to invalid switch position (Pos X
in XCBR)
5 Position-reached Switch is already in the intended position (Pos in XCBR) X
6 Parameter-change-in- Control action is blocked due to running parameter change X
execution
7 Step-limit Control action is blocked, because tap changer has reached X
the limit (EndPosR or EndPosL in YLTC)
8 Blocked-by-Mode Control action is blocked, because the LN (CSWI or XCBR) is X
in a mode (Mod) which doesn’t allow any switching
9 Blocked-by-process Control action is blocked due to some external event at X
process level that prevents a successful operation, for
example blocking indication (EEHealth in XCBR)
10 Blocked-by- Control action is blocked due to interlocking of switching X
interlocking devices (in CILO attribute EnaOpn.stVal=”FALSE” or
EnaCls.stVal=”FALSE”
11 Blocked-by- Control action with synchrocheck is aborted due to exceed X
synchrocheck of time limit and missing synchronism condition
12 Command-already-in- Control, select or cancel service is rejected, because control X
execution action is already running
13 Blocked-by-health Control action is blocked due to some internal event that X
prevents a successful operation (Health)
14 1-of-n-control Control action is blocked because another control action in X
a domain (for example, substation) is already running (in
any XCBR of that domain, the DPC.stSeld=”TRUE”)
15 Abortion-by-cancel Control action is aborted due to cancel service X
16 Time-limit-over Control action is terminated due to exceed of some time X
limit
17 Abortion-by-trip Control action is aborted due to a trip (PTRC with X
ACT.general=”TRUE”)
18 Object-not-selected Control action is rejected, because control object was not X
selected
19 Object-already- Select action is not executed because the addressed object X
selected is already selected
20 No-access-authority Control action is blocked due to lack of access authority X
21 Ended-with- Control action executed but the end position has overshoot
overshoot
22 Abortion-due-to- Control action is aborted due to deviation between the
deviation command value and the measured value
23 Abortion-by- Control action is aborted due to the loss of connection with
communication-loss the client that issued the control
24 Blocked-by-command Control action is blocked due to the data attribute X
CmdBlk.stVal is TRUE
26 Inconsistent- The parameters between successive control services are X
parameters not consistent, for example the ctlNum of Select and
Operate service are different
Table continues on next page

429
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Control

Cause Name Description Supported

number
27 Locked-by-other- Another client has already reserved the object X
client
-22 Wrong-Ctl-model Command from client uses wrong control model X
-23 Blocked-by-command Blocked by command X
-24 Blocked-for-open- Blocked for Open command X
cmd
-25 Blocked-for-close- Blocked for Close Command X
cmd
-30 Long-operation-time Operation time too long X
-31 Switch-not-start- Switch did not start moving X
moving
-32 Persistent- Switch stopped in intermediate state X
intermediate-state
-33 Switch-returned-to- Switch returned to the initial position X
init-pos
-34 Switch-in-bad-state Switch is in a bad position state X
-35 Not-expected-final- Switch did not reach the expected final position X
position

Table 274: Translation of cause values for IEC 61850 edition 2 and edition 1
Internal Cause AddCause in IEC 61850-8-1 Name
Number
Ed 2 Ed 1
0 25 0 None
1 1 1 Not-supported
2 2 2 Blocked-by-switching-hierarchy
3 3 3 Select-failed
4 4 4 Invalid-position
5 5 5 Position-reached
6 6 6 Parameter-change-in-execution
7 7 7 Step-limit
8 8 8 Blocked-by-Mode
9 9 9 Blocked-by-process
10 10 10 Blocked-by-interlocking
11 11 11 Blocked-by-synchrocheck
12 12 12 Command-already-in-execution
13 13 13 Blocked-by-health
14 14 14 1-of-n-control
15 15 1 Abortion-by-cancel
16 16 16 Time-limit-over
17 17 17 Abortion-by-trip
18 18 18 Object-not-selected
19 19 3 Object-already-selected
20 20 3 No-access-authority
Table continues on next page

430
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 12
Control

Internal Cause AddCause in IEC 61850-8-1 Name

Number
Ed 2 Ed 1
24 24 -23 Blocked-by-command
26 26 6 Inconsistent-parameters
27 27 12 Locked-by-other-client
-22 0 -22 Wrong-Ctl-model
-23 24 -23 Blocked-by-command
-24 9 -24 Blocked-for-open-cmd
-25 9 -25 Blocked-for-close-cmd
-30 16 -30 Long-operation-time
-31 16 -31 Switch-not-start-moving
-32 4 -32 Persistent-intermediate-state
-33 22 -33 Switch-returned-to-init-pos
-34 4 -34 Switch-in-bad-state
-35 22 -35 Not-expected-final-position

Table 275: Cause values not reflected on the output L_CAUSE

Cause number Cause description Conditions
3 Select-failed Canceled due to an unsuccessful selection
(select service)
8 Blocked-by-Mode Control action is blocked because the LN
(CSWI) is in a mode (Mod) which doesn’t allow
any switching or does not match the mode of
the command.
12 Command-already-in-execution Control, select or cancel service is rejected
because control action is already running.
13 Blocked-by-health Control action is blocked due to some internal
event that prevents a successful operation
(Health).
16 Time-limit-over Control action is terminated due to exceed of
some time limit.
18 Object-not-selected Control action is rejected because control
object was not selected.
19 Object-already-selected Select action is not executed because the
addressed object is already selected.
20 No-access-authority Control action is blocked due to lack of access
authority.
26 Inconsistent-parameters The parameters between successive control
services are not consistent, for example the
ctlNum of Select and Operate service are
different.
27 Locked-by-other-client Another client has already reserved the object.

12.4.4 Bay control QCBAY IP15597-1 v2

431
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Control

12.4.4.1 Functionality M13447-3 v7

The Bay control QCBAY function is used together with Local remote and local remote control
functions to handle the selection of the operator place per bay. QCBAY also provides blocking
functions that can be distributed to different apparatuses within the bay.

12.4.4.2 Function block M13469-3 v4

QCBAY
LR_OFF PSTO
LR_LOC UPD_BLKD
LR_REM CMD_BLKD
LR_VALID LOC
BL_UPD STA
BL_CMD REM

IEC10000048-2-en.vsd
IEC10000048 V2 EN-US

Figure 225: QCBAY function block

12.4.4.3 Signals
PID-4086-INPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 276: QCBAY Input signals

Name Type Default Description
LR_OFF BOOLEAN 0 External Local/Remote switch is in Off position
LR_LOC BOOLEAN 0 External Local/Remote switch is in Local position
LR_REM BOOLEAN 0 External Local/Remote switch is in Remote position
LR_VALID BOOLEAN 0 Data representing the L/R switch position is valid
BL_UPD BOOLEAN 0 Steady signal to block the position updates
BL_CMD BOOLEAN 0 Steady signal to block the command

PID-4086-OUTPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 277: QCBAY Output signals

Name Type Description
PSTO INTEGER Value for the operator place allocation
UPD_BLKD BOOLEAN Update of position is blocked
CMD_BLKD BOOLEAN Function is blocked for commands
LOC BOOLEAN Local operation allowed
STA BOOLEAN Station operation allowed
REM BOOLEAN Remote operation allowed

432
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 12
Control

12.4.4.4 Settings
PID-4086-SETTINGS v5

Table 278: QCBAY Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
AllPSTOValid Priority - - Priority Override Priority of originators,
No priority commands from both local, station
and remote are allowed
RemoteIncStation No - - No Both Station and Remote control are
Yes allowed but not Local when local
remote switch is in remote

12.4.4.5 Operation principle

M13446-4 v7
The function sends information about the Permitted Source To Operate (PSTO) and blocking
conditions to other functions within the bay for example, switch control functions and voltage
control functions. The functionality of the Bay control (QCBAY) function is mainly described by
the LLN0 node in the IEC 61850-8-1 edition 2 standard, applied to one bay. In IEC 61850 edition
1 the functionality is not described by the LLN0 node or any other node, therefore the Bay
control function is represented as a vendor specific node in edition 1.

Local panel switch M13446-7 v7

The local panel switch is a switch that defines the operator place selection. The switch
connected to this function can have three positions (remote/local/off). The positions are here
defined so that remote means that operation is allowed from station and/or remote level and
local means that operation is allowed from the IED level. The local/remote switch is also on the
control/protection IED itself, which means that the position of the switch and its validity
information are connected internally, not via I/O boards. When the switch is mounted
separately from the IED the signals are connected to the function via I/O boards.

When the local panel switch (or LHMI selection, depending on the set source to select this) is in
Off position, all commands from remote and local level will be ignored. If the position for the
local/remote switch is not valid the PSTO output will always be set to faulty state (3), which
means no possibility to operate.

To adapt the signals from the local HMI or from an external local/remote switch, the function
blocks LOCREM and LOCREMCTRL are needed and connected to QCBAY.

Permitted Source To Operate (PSTO) M13446-16 v8

The actual state of the operator place is presented by the value of the Permitted Source To
Operate, PSTO signal. The PSTO value is evaluated from the local/remote switch position
according to Table 279. In addition, there are two parameters that affect the value of the PSTO
signal.

If the parameter AllPSTOValid is set and LR-switch position is in Local or Remote state, the
PSTO value is set to 5 (all), that is, it is permitted to operate from both local and remote level
without any priority. When the external panel switch is in Off position the PSTO value shows
the actual state of the switch that is, 0. In this case it is not possible to control anything

If the parameter RemoteIncStation is set and the LR-switch position is in Remote state, the
PSTO value is set to 2 (Station or Remote), that is, it is permitted to operate from both station
and remote level without any priority.

433
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Control

Table 279: PSTO values for different Local panel switch positions
Local panel PSTO AllPSTOValid RemoteInc LocSta.CtlV Possible
switch value (setting Station al locations that
positions parameter) (setting (command) shall be able
parameter) to operate
0 = Off 0 - - - Not possible
to operate
1 = Local 1 Priority - - Local Panel
1 = Local 5 No priority - - Local or
Remote level
without any
priority
2 = Remote 6 Priority No TRUE Station level
2 = Remote 7 Priority No FALSE Remote level
2 = Remote 2 Priority Yes - Station or
Remote level
2 = Remote 5 No priority - - Local,
Station or
Remote level
without any
priority
3 = Faulty 3 - - - Not possible
to operate

Blockings M13446-50 v4
The blocking states for position indications and commands are intended to provide the
possibility for the user to make common blockings for the functions configured within a
complete bay.

The blocking facilities provided by the bay control function are the following:

• Blocking of position indications, BL_UPD. This input will block all inputs related to
apparatus positions for all configured functions within the bay.
• Blocking of commands, BL_CMD. This input will block all commands for all configured
functions within the bay.
• Blocking of function, BLOCK. If the BLOCK signal is set, it means that the function is
active, but no outputs are generated, no reporting, control commands are rejected and
functional and configuration data is visible.

The switching of the Local/Remote switch requires at least system operator level. The
password will be requested at an attempt to operate if authority levels have been defined in
the IED. Otherwise the default authority level, SuperUser, can handle the control without
LogOn. The users and passwords are defined with the IED Users tool in PCM600.

12.4.5 Local/Remote switch LOCREM IP16319-1 v3

M17086-3 v8
The signals from the local HMI or from an external local/remote switch are connected via the
function blocks LOCREM and LOCREMCTRL to the Bay control QCBAY function block. The
parameter ControlMode in function block LOCREM is set to choose if the switch signals are
coming from the local HMI or from an external hardware switch connected via binary inputs.

434
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 12
Control

12.4.5.1 Function block M17088-3 v3

LOCREM
CTRLOFF OFF
LOCCTRL LOCAL
REMCTRL REMOTE
LHMICTRL VALID

IEC05000360-2-en.vsd
IEC05000360 V2 EN-US

Figure 226: LOCREM function block

LOCREMCTRL
PSTO1 HMICTR1
PSTO2 HMICTR2
PSTO3 HMICTR3
PSTO4 HMICTR4
PSTO5 HMICTR5
PSTO6 HMICTR6
PSTO7 HMICTR7
PSTO8 HMICTR8
PSTO9 HMICTR9
PSTO10 HMICTR10
PSTO11 HMICTR11
PSTO12 HMICTR12

IEC05000361-2-en.vsd
IEC05000361 V2 EN-US

Figure 227: LOCREMCTRL function block

12.4.5.2 Signals
PID-3944-INPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 280: LOCREM Input signals

Name Type Default Description
CTRLOFF BOOLEAN 0 Disable control
LOCCTRL BOOLEAN 0 Local in control
REMCTRL BOOLEAN 0 Remote in control
LHMICTRL INTEGER 0 LHMI control

PID-3944-OUTPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 281: LOCREM Output signals

Name Type Description
OFF BOOLEAN Control is disabled
LOCAL BOOLEAN Local control is activated
REMOTE BOOLEAN Remote control is activated
VALID BOOLEAN Outputs are valid

PID-3943-INPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 282: LOCREMCTRL Input signals

Name Type Default Description
PSTO1 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 1
PSTO2 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 2
PSTO3 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 3
PSTO4 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 4
Table continues on next page

435
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Control

Name Type Default Description

PSTO5 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 5
PSTO6 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 6
PSTO7 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 7
PSTO8 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 8
PSTO9 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 9
PSTO10 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 10
PSTO11 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 11
PSTO12 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 12

PID-3943-OUTPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 283: LOCREMCTRL Output signals

Name Type Description
HMICTR1 INTEGER Bitmask output 1 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR2 INTEGER Bitmask output 2 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR3 INTEGER Bitmask output 3 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR4 INTEGER Bitmask output 4 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR5 INTEGER Bitmask output 5 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR6 INTEGER Bitmask output 6 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR7 INTEGER Bitmask output 7 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR8 INTEGER Bitmask output 8 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR9 INTEGER Bitmask output 9 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR10 INTEGER Bitmask output 10 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR11 INTEGER Bitmask output 11 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR12 INTEGER Bitmask output 12 to local remote LHMI input

12.4.5.3 Settings
PID-3944-SETTINGS v4

Table 284: LOCREM Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ControlMode Internal LR-switch - - Internal LR- Control mode for internal/external LR-
External LR- switch switch
switch

PID-3943-SETTINGS v1

12.4.5.4 Operation principle M17087-3 v7

The function block Local remote (LOCREM) handles the signals coming from the local/remote
switch. The connections are seen in Figure 228, where the inputs on function block LOCREM
are connected to binary inputs if an external switch is used. When the local HMI is used, the
inputs are not used. The switching between external and local HMI source is done through the
parameter ControlMode. The outputs from the LOCREM function block control the output
PSTO (Permitted Source To Operate) on Bay control (QCBAY).

436
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 12
Control

LOCREM QCBAY
CTRLOFF OFF LR_ OFF PSTO
LOCCTRL LOCAL LR_ LOC UPD_ BLKD
REMCTRL REMOTE LR_ REM CMD_ BLKD
LHMICTRL VALID LR_ VALID LOC
BL_ UPD STA
BL_ CMD REM

LOCREM QCBAY
CTRLOFF OFF LR_ OFF PSTO
LOCCTRL LOCAL LR_ LOC UPD_ BLKD
REMCTRL REMOTE LR_ REM CMD_ BLKD
LHMICTRL VALID LR_ VALID LOC
BL_ UPD STA
BL_ CMD REM

LOCREMCTRL
PSTO1 HMICTR1
PSTO2 HMICTR2
PSTO3 HMICTR3
PSTO4 HMICTR4
PSTO5 HMICTR5
PSTO6 HMICTR6
PSTO7 HMICTR7
PSTO8 HMICTR8
PSTO9 HMICTR9
PSTO 10 HMICTR 10
PSTO 11 HMICTR 11
PSTO 12 HMICTR 12

IEC10000052-1-en.vsd
IEC10000052 V2 EN-US

Figure 228: Configuration for the local/remote handling for a local HMI with two bays and
two screen pages
If the IED contains control functions for several bays, the local/remote position can be
different for the included bays. When the local HMI is used the position of the local/remote
switch can be different depending on which single line diagram screen page that is presented
on the local HMI. The function block Local remote control (LOCREMCTRL) controls the
presentation of the LEDs for the local/remote position to applicable bay and screen page.

The switching of the local/remote switch requires at least system operator level. The
password will be requested at an attempt to operate if authority levels have been defined in
the IED. Otherwise the default authority level, SuperUser, can handle the control without
LogOn. The users and passwords are defined with the IED Users tool in PCM600.

12.4.6 Switch controller SCSWI IP15603-1 v2

12.4.6.1 Functionality M13486-3 v7

The Switch controller (SCSWI) initializes and supervises all functions to properly select and
operate switching primary apparatuses. The Switch controller may handle and operate on one
three-phase device or up to three one-phase devices.

437
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Control

12.4.6.2 Function block M13482-3 v5

SCSWI
BLOCK EXE_OP
PSTO EXE_CL
L_SEL SEL_OP
L_OPEN SEL_CL
L_CLOSE SELECTED
AU_OPEN RES_RQ
AU_CLOSE START_SY
BL_CMD CANC_SY
RES_GRT POSITION
RES_EXT OPENP OS
SY_INPRO CLOSEPOS
SYNC_OK POLEDISC
EN_OPEN CMD_BLK
EN_CLOSE L_CAUSE
XPOSL1* POS_INTR
XPOSL2* XEXINF
XPOSL3*
IEC05000337-6-en.vsdx
IEC05000337 V6 EN-US

Figure 229: SCSWI function block

12.4.6.3 Signals
PID-6500-INPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 285: SCSWI Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
PSTO INTEGER 2 Operator place selection
L_SEL BOOLEAN 0 Select signal from local panel
L_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open signal from local panel
L_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Close signal from local panel
AU_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Used for local automation function
AU_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Used for local automation function
BL_CMD BOOLEAN 0 Steady signal for block of the command
RES_GRT BOOLEAN 0 Positive acknowledge that all reservations are made
RES_EXT BOOLEAN 0 Reservation is made externally
SY_INPRO BOOLEAN 0 Synchronizing function in progress
SYNC_OK BOOLEAN 0 Closing is permitted at set to true by the synchrocheck
EN_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Enables open operation
EN_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Enables close operation
XPOSL1 GROUP - Group signal from XCBR/XSWI per phase
SIGNAL
XPOSL2 GROUP - Group signal from XCBR/XSWI per phase
SIGNAL
XPOSL3 GROUP - Group signal from XCBR/XSWI per phase
SIGNAL

438
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 12
Control

PID-6500-OUTPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 286: SCSWI Output signals

Name Type Description
EXE_OP BOOLEAN Execute command for open direction
EXE_CL BOOLEAN Execute command for close direction
SEL_OP BOOLEAN Selected for open command
SEL_CL BOOLEAN Selected for close command
SELECTED BOOLEAN Select conditions are fulfilled
RES_RQ BOOLEAN Request signal to the reservation function
START_SY BOOLEAN Starts the external synchronizing function
CANC_SY BOOLEAN Cancels the external synchronizing function, started through
START_SY
POSITION INTEGER Position indication
OPENPOS BOOLEAN Open position indication
CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN Closed position indication
POLEDISC BOOLEAN The positions for poles L1-L3 are not equal after a set time
CMD_BLK BOOLEAN Commands are blocked
L_CAUSE INTEGER Latest value of the error indication during command
POS_INTR BOOLEAN Stopped in intermediate position
XOUT BOOLEAN Execution information to XCBR/XSWI

GUID-7DABB496-EABE-48A4-8078-7ED5D6D4FE14 v1

AU_OPEN and AU_CLOSE are used to issue automated commands as e.g. for
load shedding for opening respectively closing to the SCSWI function. They
work without regard to how the operator place selector, PSTO, is set. In order
to have effect on the outputs EXE_OP and EXE_CL, the corresponding enable
input, EN_OPEN respectively EN_CLOSE must be set, and that no interlocking is
active.

L_SEL, L_OPEN and L_CLOSE are used for local command sequence connected
to binary inputs. In order to have effect, the operator place selector, PSTO,
must be set to local or to remote with no priority. If the control model used is
Select before operate, Also the corresponding enable input must be set, and no
interlocking is active. The L_SEL input must be set before L_OPEN or L_CLOSE
is operated, if the control model is Select before operate.

439
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Control

12.4.6.4 Settings
PID-6500-SETTINGS v3

Table 287: SCSWI Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CtlModel Dir Norm - - SBO Enh Specifies control model type
SBO Enh
PosDependent Always permitted - - Always Permission to operate depending on
Not perm at permitted the position
00/11
tSelect 0.00 - 600.00 s 0.01 30.00 Maximum time between select and
execute signals
tResResponse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Allowed time from reservation request
to reservation granted
tSynchrocheck 0.00 - 600.00 s 0.01 10.00 Allowed time for synchrocheck to fulfil
close conditions
tSynchronizing 0.00 - 600.00 s 0.01 0.00 Supervision time to get the signal
synchronizing in progress
tExecutionFB 0.00 - 600.00 s 0.01 30.00 Maximum time from command
execution to termination
tPoleDiscord 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 2.000 Allowed time to have discrepancy
between the poles
SuppressMidPos Off - - On Mid-position is suppressed during the
On time tIntermediate
InterlockChk Sel & Op phase - - Sel & Op phase Selection if interlock check should be
Op phase done in select phase

12.4.6.5 Operation principle

M13484-4 v4
The Switch controller (SCSWI) is provided with verification checks for the select - execute
sequence, that is, checks the conditions prior each step of the operation are fulfilled. The
involved functions for these condition verifications are interlocking, reservation, blockings and
synchrocheck.

Control handling M13484-6 v6

.
Two types of control models can be used. The two control models are "direct with normal
security" and "SBO (Select-Before-Operate) with enhanced security". The parameter CtlModel
defines which one of the two control models is used. The control model "direct with normal
security" does not require a select whereas, the "SBO with enhanced security" command model
requires a select before execution. The command sequence for a command with control mode
SBO with enhanced security is shown in figure 230, with control mode direct with normal
security is shown in figure 231.

440
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 12
Control

Reservation SXCBR /
Client SCSWI
logic SXSWI
select

selectAck/AddCause = 0

RES_RQ = TRUE

tReservation
Response

tSelect
RES_GRT = TRUE

SELECTED = TRUE

requestedPosition = 10

opRcvd = TRUE
EXE_CL

opOK = TRUE, tOpOk

operateAck/AddCause = 0
operateAck/AddCause = 0
tExecutionFB

POSITION = 00, timeStamp

POSITION = 00, timeStamp
POSITION = 10, timeStamp
cmdTermination/
AddCause = 0
POSITION = 10, timeStamp
cmdTermination/AddCause = 0

RES_RQ = FALSE

RES_GRT = FALSE

SELECTED = FALSE

IEC15000416-1-EN.vsdx

IEC15000416 V1 EN-US

Figure 230: Example of command sequence for a successful close command when the
control model SBO with enhanced security is used

Reservation SwitchCtrl Switch

client
core core core

requestedPosition = 10

opRcvd = TRUE

RES_RQ
tReservation
Response

RES_GRT = TRUE
EXE_CL

opOK = TRUE, tOpOk

operateAck/AddCause = 0 operateAck/AddCause = 0

POSITION = 00, timeStamp POSITION = 00, timeStamp

POSITION = 10, timeStamp

cmdTermination/
POSITION = 10, timeStamp AddCause = 0

RES_RQ = FALSE

RES_GRT = FALSE

IEC15000417-1-en.vsdx

IEC15000417 V1 EN-US

Figure 231: Example of command sequence for a successful close command when the
control model direct with normal security is used
Normal security means that only the command is evaluated and the resulting position is not
supervised. Enhanced security means that the command sequence is supervised in three
steps, the selection, command evaluation and the supervision of position. Each step ends up
with a pulsed signal to indicate that the respective step in the command sequence is finished.
If an error occurs in one of the steps in the command sequence, the sequence is terminated.
The last error (L_CAUSE) can be read from the function block and used for example at
commissioning.

441
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Control

There is no relation between the command direction and the actual position.
For example, if the switch is in close position it is possible to execute a close
command.

Before an execution command, an evaluation of the position is done. If the parameter

PosDependent is true and the position is in intermediate state or in bad state no execution
command is sent. If the parameter is false the execution command is sent independent of the
position value.

Evaluation of position M13484-14 v4

The position output from the switches (SXCBR or SXSWI) is connected to the switch controller
SCSWI. The XPOS1, XPOS2 and XPOS3 input signals receive the position, time stamps and
quality attributes of the position which is used for further evaluation.

In the case when there are three one-phase switches connected to the switch control function,
the switch control will "merge" the position of the three switches to the resulting three-phase
position. In the case when the position differ between the one-phase switches, following
principles will be applied:

All switches in open position: switch control position = open

All switches in close position: switch control position = close
One switch =open, two switches= close (or switch control position = intermediate
inversely):
Any switch in intermediate position: switch control position = intermediate
Any switch in bad state: switch control position = bad state

The time stamp of the output three-phase position from switch control will have the time
stamp of the last changed phase when it reaches the end position. When it goes to
intermediate position or bad state, it will get the time stamp of the first changed phase.

In addition, there is also the possibility that one of the one-phase switches will change
position at any time due to a trip. Such situation is here called pole discordance and is
supervised by this function. In case of a pole discordance situation, that is, the positions of the
one-phase switches are not equal positions for a time longer than the setting tPoleDiscord, an
error signal POLEDISC will be set.

In the supervision phase, the switch controller function evaluates the "cause" values from the
switch modules Circuit breaker (SXCBR)/ Circuit switch (SXSWI). At error the "cause" value with
highest priority is shown.

Blocking principles M13484-37 v5

The blocking signals are normally coming from the bay control function (QCBAY) and via the
IEC 61850 communication from the operator place.

The different blocking possibilities are:

• Block/deblock of command. It is used to block command for operation of position.

• Blocking of function, BLOCK. If the BLOCK signal is set, it means that the function is
active, but no outputs are generated, no reporting, control commands are rejected and
functional and configuration data is visible.

The different block conditions will only affect the operation of this function,
that is, no blocking signals will be "forwarded" to other functions. The above
blocking outputs are stored in a non-volatile memory.

442
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 12
Control

Dependence on Operator place GUID-AB327F15-AF44-4ACC-8FA5-2A52AE4AE090 v2

For commands from communication protocol, such as IEC 61850-8-1 and DNP, and through the
inputs L_SEL, L_OPEN and L_CLOSE, the operator place is evaluated, and only commands from
enabled operator places are accepted, see Table 279. Commands through the inputs L_SEL,
L_OPEN and L_CLOSE are always from the local operator place. For commands through the
inputs AU_OPEN and AU_CLOSE, the operator place is not evaluated, thus also accepted when
the operator place selector is set to Faulty or Off.

Interaction with synchrocheck and synchronizing functions M13484-47 v5

The Switch controller (SCSWI) works in conjunction with the synchrocheck and the
synchronizing function (SESRSYN). It is assumed that the synchrocheck function is
continuously in operation and gives the result to SCSWI. The result from the synchrocheck
function is evaluated during the close execution. If the operator performs an override of the
synchrocheck, the evaluation of the synchrocheck state is omitted. When there is a positive
confirmation from the synchrocheck function, SCSWI will send the close signal EXE_CL to the
switch function Circuit breaker (SXCBR).

When there is no positive confirmation from the synchrocheck function, SCSWI will send a
start signal START_SY to the synchronizing function, which will send the closing command to
SXCBR when the synchronizing conditions are fulfilled, see Figure 232. If no synchronizing
function is included, the timer for supervision of the "synchronizing in progress signal" is set
to 0, which means no start of the synchronizing function. SCSWI will then set the attribute
"blocked-by-synchrocheck" in the "cause" signal. See also the time diagram in Figure 236.

SCSWI SXCBR
EXE_CL
OR CLOSE

SYNC_OK
START_SY
CANC_SY
SY_INPRO
SESRSYN

CLOSECB
Synchro Synchronizing
check function

IEC09000209-2-en.vsd
IEC09000209 V2 EN-US

Figure 232: Example of interaction between SCSWI, SESRSYN (synchrocheck and

synchronizing function) and SXCBR function

Time diagrams M13484-51 v6

The Switch controller (SCSWI) function has timers for evaluating different time supervision
conditions. These timers are explained here.

The timer tSelect is used for supervising the time between the select and the execute
command signal, that is, the time the operator has to perform the command execution after
the selection of the object to operate.

443
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Control

select
execute command
tSelect
timer t1 t1>tSelect, then long-
operation-time in 'cause'
is set

en05000092.vsd
IEC05000092 V1 EN-US

Figure 233: tSelect

The Long-operation-time cause is only given on the output L_CAUSE. It is not

sent on protocols since the selection has already received a positive response,
and no operation has been issued. If an operation is issued after the time out,
the negative response is Object-not-selected.

The parameter tResResponse is used to set the maximum allowed time to make the
reservation, that is, the time between reservation request and the feedback reservation
granted from all bays involved in the reservation function.

select

reservation request RES_RQ

reservation granted RES_GRT

t1>tResResponse, then 1-
tResResponse
of-n-control in 'cause' is
timer t1
set
IEC05000093-2-en.vsd
IEC05000093 V2 EN-US

Figure 234: tResResponse

The timer tExecutionFB supervises the time between the execute command and the command
termination, see Figure 235.

444
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 12
Control

execute command

position L1 open

close

position L2 open

close

position L3 open

close

cmd termination L1

cmd termination L2

cmd termination L3

cmd termination *

position open

close

t1>tExecutionFB, then
tExecutionFB timer long-operation-time in
t1 'cause' is set

* The cmd termination will be delayed one execution sample . APCtExecutionFB=IEC0

5000094=2=en=Original
.vsd
IEC05000094 V2 EN-US

Figure 235: tExecutionFB

The parameter tSynchrocheck is used to define the maximum allowed time between the
execute command and the input SYNC_OK to become true. If SYNC_OK=true at the time the
execute command signal is received, the timer "tSynchrocheck" will not start. The start signal
for the synchronizing is obtained if the synchrocheck conditions are not fulfilled.

The parameter tSynchronizing is used to define the maximum allowed time between the start
signal for synchronizing and the confirmation that synchronizing is in progress.

execute command

SYNC_OK

tSynchrocheck
t1
START_SY

SY_INPRO

tSynchronizing t2>tSynchronizing, then

t2 blocked-by-synchrocheck in
'cause' is set

en05000095.vsd
IEC05000095 V1 EN-US

Figure 236: tSynchroCheck and tSynchronizing

12.4.7 Circuit breaker SXCBR IP15614-1 v3

445
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Control

12.4.7.1 Functionality M13489-3 v6

The purpose of Circuit breaker (SXCBR) is to provide the actual status of positions and to
perform the control operations, that is, pass all the commands to primary apparatuses in the
form of circuit breakers via binary output boards and to supervise the switching operation and
position.

12.4.7.2 Function block M13500-3 v5

SXCBR
BLOCK XPOS
LR_SWI EXE_OP
OPEN EXE_CL
CLOSE SUBSTED
BL_OPEN OP_BLKD
BL_CLOSE CL_BLKD
BL_UPD UPD_BLKD
POSOP EN POSITION
POSCLOSE OPENP OS
CBOPCAP CLOSEPOS
TR_OPEN TR_POS
TR_CLOSE CNT_VAL
RS_CNT L_CAUSE
EEH_WARN EEHEALTH
EEH_ALM CBOPCAP
XIN
IEC05000338-6-en.vsdx
IEC05000338 V6 EN-US

Figure 237: SXCBR function block

12.4.7.3 Signals
PID-6799-INPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 288: SXCBR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
LR_SWI BOOLEAN 0 Local/Remote switch indication from switchyard
OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Pulsed signal used to immediately open the switch
CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Pulsed signal used to immediately close the switch
BL_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal to block the open command
BL_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal to block the close command
BL_UPD BOOLEAN 0 Steady signal for block of the position updating
POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal for open position of apparatus from I/O
POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal for close position of apparatus from I/O
CBOPCAP INTEGER 3 Breaker operating capability 1 = None, 2 = O, 3 = CO, 4 = OCO,
5 = COCO, 6+ = More
TR_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal for open position of truck from I/O
TR_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal for close position of truck from I/O
RS_CNT BOOLEAN 0 Resets the operation counter
EEH_WARN BOOLEAN 0 Warning from external equipment
EEH_ALM BOOLEAN 0 Alarm from external equipment
XIN GROUP - Execution information from CSWI
SIGNAL

446
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 12
Control

PID-6799-OUTPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 289: SXCBR Output signals

Name Type Description
XPOS GROUP SIGNAL Group connection to CSWI for XCBR and XSWI
EXE_OP BOOLEAN Executes the command for open direction
EXE_CL BOOLEAN Executes the command for close direction
SUBSTED BOOLEAN Indication that the position is substituted
OP_BLKD BOOLEAN Indication that the function is blocked for open commands
CL_BLKD BOOLEAN Indication that the function is blocked for close commands
UPD_BLKD BOOLEAN Update of position indication is blocked
POSITION INTEGER Apparatus position indication
OPENPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus open position
CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus closed position
TR_POS INTEGER Truck position indication
CNT_VAL INTEGER Operation counter value
L_CAUSE INTEGER Latest value of the error indication during command
EEHEALTH INTEGER External equipment health. 1=No warning or alarm,
2=Warning, 3=Alarm
CBOPCAP INTEGER Breaker operating capability 1 = None, 2 = O, 3 = CO, 4 = OCO,
5 = COCO, 6+ = More

12.4.7.4 Settings
PID-6799-SETTINGS v3

Table 290: SXCBR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tStartMove 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Supervision time for the apparatus to
move after a command
tIntermediate 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Allowed time for intermediate
position
AdaptivePulse Not adaptive - - Not adaptive Output resets when a new correct end
Adaptive position is reached
tOpenPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Output pulse length for open
command
tClosePulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Output pulse length for close
command
InitialCount 0 - 20000 - 1 0 Initial number of operations (Initial
count value)

12.4.7.5 Operation principle

M13487-4 v6
The Circuit breaker function (SXCBR) is used by other functions such as for example, switch
controller, protection functions, autorecloser function or an IEC 61850 client residing in
another IED or the operator place. This switch function executes commands, evaluates block
conditions and evaluates different time supervision conditions. Only if all conditions indicate a
switch operation to be allowed, the function performs the execution command. In case of
erroneous conditions, the function indicates an appropriate "cause" value, see Table 273.

447
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Control

SXCBR has an operation counter for closing and opening commands. The counter value can be
read remotely from the operator place. The value is reset from local HMI, a binary input or
remotely from the operator place by configuring a signal from the Single Point Generic Control
8 signals (SPC8GAPC) for example. The health of the external equipment, the switch, can be
monitored according to IEC 61850-8-1. The operation counter functionality and the external
equipment health supervision are independent sub-functions of the circuit breaker function.

Local/Remote switch M13487-7 v4

One binary input signal LR_SWI is included in SXCBR to indicate the local/remote switch
position from switchyard provided via the I/O board. If this signal is set to TRUE it means that
change of position is allowed only from switchyard level. If the signal is set to FALSE it means
that command from IED or higher level is permitted. When the signal is set to TRUE all
commands (for change of position) are rejected, even trip commands from protection
functions are rejected. The functionality of the local/remote switch is described in Figure 238.

Local= Operation at
UE switch yard level
TR

From I/O switchLR

FAL
SE
Remote= Operation at
IED or higher level

en05000096.vsd
IEC05000096 V1 EN-US

Figure 238: Local/Remote switch

Blocking principles M13487-12 v5

SXCBR includes several blocking principles. The basic principle for all blocking signals is that
they will affect commands from all other clients for example, switch controller, protection
functions and autoreclosure.

The blocking possibilities are:

• Block/deblock for open command. It is used to block operation for open command.
• Block/deblock for close command. It is used to block operation for close command.
• Update block/deblock of positions. It is used to block the updating of position values.
Other signals related to the position will be reset.
• Blocking of function, BLOCK. If BLOCK signal is set, it means that the function is active,
but no outputs are generated, no reporting, control commands are rejected and
functional and configuration data is visible.

The above blocking outputs are stored in a non-volatile memory.

Substitution M13487-22 v5
The substitution part in SXCBR is used for manual set of the position and quality of the switch.
The typical use of substitution is that an operator enters a manual value because that the real
process value is erroneous for some reason. SXCBR will then use the manually entered value
instead of the value for positions determined by the process.

It is always possible to make a substitution, independently of the position

indication and the status information of the I/O board. When substitution is
enabled, the other signals related to the position follow the substituted
position. The substituted values are stored in a non-volatile memory. If the
function is blocked or blocked for update when the substitution is released, the
position value is kept the same as the last substitution value, but the quality is
changed to "questionable, old data", indicating that the value is old and not
reliable.

448
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 12
Control

When the position of the SXCBR is substituted, its IEC 61850-8-1 data object is
marked as “substituted", in addition to the substituted quality, but the position
quality of the connected SCSWI is not dependent on the substitution indication
in the quality, so it does not show that it is derived from a substituted value.

Time diagrams M13487-28 v4

There are two timers for supervising of the execute phase, tStartMove and tIntermediate.
tStartMove supervises that the primary device starts moving after the execute output pulse is
sent. tIntermediate defines the maximum allowed time for intermediate position. Figure 239
explains these two timers during the execute phase.

EXE_CL AdaptivePulse = TRUE

Close pulse duration

OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

if t1 > tStartMove then

tStartMove timer "switch-not-start-moving"
t1 attribute in 'cause' is set
tStartMove

if t2 > tIntermediate then

tIntermediate timer "persisting-intermediate-state"
t2 attribute in 'cause' is set
tIntermediate

en05000097.vsd

IEC05000097 V1 EN-US

Figure 239: The timers tStartMove and tIntermediate

The timers tOpenPulse and tClosePulse are the length of the execute output pulses to be sent
to the primary equipment. Note that the output pulses for open and close command can have
different pulse lengths. The pulses can also be set to be adaptive with the configuration
parameter AdaptivePulse. Figure 240 shows the principle of the execute output pulse. The
AdaptivePulse parameter will have effect on both execute output pulses.

OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

AdaptivePulse=FALSE
EXE_CL
tClosePulse

AdaptivePulse=TRUE
EXE_CL
tClosePulse
en05000098.vsd
IEC05000098 V1 EN-US

Figure 240: Execute output pulse

449
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Control

If the pulse is set to be adaptive, it is not possible for the pulse to exceed tOpenPulse or
tClosePulse.

The execute output pulses are reset when:

• the new expected final position is reached and the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse
is set to true
• the timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed
• an error occurs due to the switch does not start moving, that is, tStartMove has elapsed.

If the breaker reaches the final position before the execution pulse time has
elapsed, and AdaptivePulse is not true, the function waits for the end of the
execution pulse before telling the activating function that the command is
completed.

There is one exception from the first item above. If the primary device is in open position and
an open command is executed or if the primary device is in closed position and a close
command is executed. In these cases, with the additional condition that the configuration
parameter AdaptivePulse is true, the execute output pulse is always activated and resets when
tStartMove has elapsed. If the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is set to false the
execution output remains active until the pulse duration timer has elapsed.

If the start position indicates bad state (OPENPOS=1 and CLOSEPOS =1) when
a command is executed the execute output pulse resets only when timer
tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed.

An example of when a primary device is open and an open command is executed is shown in
Figure 241 .

OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

EXE_OP AdaptivePulse=FALSE

tOpenPulse

EXE_OP AdaptivePulse=TRUE

tOpenPulse

tStartMove timer

en05000099.vsd
IEC05000099 V1 EN-US

Figure 241: Open command with open position indication

450
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 12
Control

12.4.8 Proxy for signals from switching device via GOOSE XLNPROXY

12.4.8.1 Functionality GUID-11F9CA1C-8E20-489B-822B-34DACC59553A v1

The proxy for signals from switching device via GOOSE (XLNPROXY) gives an internal
representation of the position status and control response for a switch modelled in a breaker
IED. This representation is identical to that of an SXCBR function.

12.4.8.2 Function block GUID-408513CD-A87E-45E8-8E44-24E153947F02 v1

XLNPROXY
BEH* XPOS
BEH_VALID* SELECTED
LOC* OP_BLKD
LOC_VALID* CL_BLKD
BLKOPN* OPENPOS
BLKOPN_V* CLOSEPOS
BLKCLS* CNT_VAL
BLKCLS_V* L_CAUSE
POSVAL* EEHEALTH
POSVAL_V* OPCAP
OPCNT*
OP_CNT_V*
BLK
BLK_VAL
STSELD
STSELD_V
OPRCVD
OPRCVD_V
OPOK
OPOK_VAL
EEHEALTH
EEH_VAL
OPCAP
OPCAP_V
COMMVALID
XIN

IEC16000043-1-en.vsdx
IEC16000043 V1 EN-US

Figure 242: XLNPROXY function block

12.4.8.3 Signals
PID-6712-INPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 291: XLNPROXY Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BEH INTEGER -1 Behaviour
BEH_VLD BOOLEAN 0 Valid data on BEH input
LOC BOOLEAN 0 Local control behaviour
LOC_VLD BOOLEAN 0 Valid data on LOC input
BLKOPN BOOLEAN 0 Block opening
BLKOPN_VLD BOOLEAN 0 Valid data on BLKOPN input
BLKCLS BOOLEAN 0 Block closing
BLKCLS_VLD BOOLEAN 0 Valid data on BLKCLS input
POSVAL INTEGER 0 Switch position, Pos.stVal
POSVAL_VLD BOOLEAN 0 Valid data on POSVAL input
OPCNT INTEGER -1 Operation counter
OPCNT_VLD BOOLEAN 0 Valid data on OPCNT input
BLK BOOLEAN 0 Dynamic blocking of function described by the LN
Table continues on next page

451
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Control

Name Type Default Description

BLK_VLD BOOLEAN 0 Valid data on BLK input
STSELD BOOLEAN 0 The controllable data is in the status "selected”
STSELD_VLD BOOLEAN 0 Valid data on STSELD input
OPRCVD BOOLEAN 0 Operate command for a controllable data object received
OPRCVD_VLD BOOLEAN 0 Valid data on OPRCVD input
OPOK BOOLEAN 0 Operate command for a controllable data object accepted
OPOK_VLD BOOLEAN 0 Valid data on OPOK input
EEHEALTH INTEGER -1 External equipment health
EEHEALTH_VLD BOOLEAN 0 Valid data on EEHEALTH input
OPCAP INTEGER -1 Operating capability
OPCAP_VLD BOOLEAN 0 Valid data on OPCAP input
COMMVALID BOOLEAN 0 Communication valid
XIN GROUP - Execution information from CSWI
SIGNAL

PID-6712-OUTPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 292: XLNPROXY Output signals

Name Type Description
XPOS GROUP SIGNAL Group connection to CSWI
SELECTED BOOLEAN Select conditions are fulfilled
OP_BLKD BOOLEAN Indication that the function is blocked for open commands
CL_BLKD BOOLEAN Indication that the function is blocked for close commands
OPENPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus open position
CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus closed position
CNT_VAL INTEGER Operation counter value
L_CAUSE INTEGER Latest value of the error indication during command
EEHEALTH INTEGER External equipment health. 1=No warning or alarm,
2=Warning, 3=Alarm
OPCAP INTEGER Switch / breaker operating capability

12.4.8.4 Settings
PID-6712-SETTINGS v3

Table 293: XLNPROXY Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SwitchType Circuit Breaker - - Circuit Breaker 0 = CB, 1 = Load Break, 2 =
Load Break Disconnector, 3 = Earthing Switch, 4 =
Disconnector High Speed Earthing Switch
Earthing Switch
HS Earth Switch
tStartMove 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Supervision time for the apparatus to
move after a command
tIntermediate 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Allowed time for intermediate
position

452
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 12
Control

GUID-A4CCC681-D4D8-4534-905D-1D8AD40E923B v1

The default values of the inputs BEH, OPCNT, EEHEALTH and OPCAP are set to
-1 to denote that they are not connected.

12.4.8.5 Operation principle GUID-D2679E0E-ABB5-46F0-AD9C-F6E8E8099534 v1

The proxy for signals from switching device via GOOSE (XLNPROXY) is intended to be used
when the switch (XCBR) is modelled and controlled in a breaker IED or similar unit on the
process bus. XLNPROXY packages the signals from the GOOSE receive function, normally
GOOSEXLNRCV, into the same format as used from SXCBR to SCSWI. It makes a similar
evaluation of the command response as SXCBR when a command is issued from the
connected SCSWI.

12.4.8.6 Position supervision GUID-95C72346-A577-4F0A-8584-8E1593B9B947 v1

XLNPROXY has two outputs for position indication: OPENPOS and CLOSEPOS. Position is a
double point indication and the OPENPOS and CLOSEPOS are binary outputs intended to be
used for condition logics to protection and control functions

Normally, the position outputs, OPENPOS and CLOSEPOS, follow the value of the input
POSVAL. However, if the POSVAL_V input is FALSE, the communication is lost (COMMVALID =
FALSE), or the quality of the position received is bad, the OPENPOS and CLOSEPOS are both
set to FALSE.

12.4.8.7 Command response evaluation GUID-A2CDC1AE-A6F5-478B-B6E5-3442C54212D8 v1

The command evaluation is triggered through the group input XIN that is connected to the
SCSWI function controlling the switch.

If an operation is initiated by the SCSWI, the XLNPROXY function checks if the switch is
blocked for the operation direction and that the position moves to the desired position within
the two time limits tStartMove and tIntermediate. The default values for tStartMove and
tIntermediate are for a breaker. The typical values for a disconnector are:

• tStartMove = 3s
• tIntermediate = 15s

In most cases, tStartMove and tIntermediate can be set to the same values as
in the source XCBR function. However, if the time limits are set very close to the
actual movement times of the apparatus, compensation may be needed for the
communication delays and differences in cycle time of the XLNPROXY function
and the source function. The compensation should be in the range of 0 - 5ms.

When the switch has started moving, it issues a response to the SCSWI function that the
operation has started. If it does not start moving within tStartMove, the command is deemed
as failed, and a cause is raised on the L_CAUSE output and sent to the SCSWI. The different
causes it can identify are listed in order of priority in table 1. The detection of the different
ways of blocking is done while waiting for movement of the switch, but the cause is not given
until the tStartMove has elapsed.

453
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Control

Table 294: Possible cause values from XLNPROXY

Cause No Cause Description Conditions
8 Blocked-by-Mode The BEH input is 5.
2 Blocked-by-switching- The LOC input indicates that only local commands
hierarchy are allowed for the breaker IED function.
-24 Blocked-for-open-cmd The BLKOPN is active indicating that the switch is
blocked for open commands.
-25 Blocked-for-close-cmd The BLKCLS is active indicating that the switch is
blocked for close commands.
9 Blocked-by-process If the Blk input is connected and active indicating
that the switch is dynamically blocked. Or if the
OPCAP input is connected, it indicates that the
operation capability of the switch is not enough to
perform the command.
5 Position-reached Switch is already in the intended position.
-31 Switch-not-start-moving Switch did not start moving within tStartMove.
-32 Persistent-intermediate-state The switch stopped in intermediate state for longer
than tIntermediate.
-33 Switch-returned-to-init-pos Switch returned to the initial position.
-34 Switch-in-bad-state Switch is in a bad position.
-35 Not-expected-final-position Switch did not reach the expected final position.

The L_CAUSE output keeps its output value until a new command sequence has been started.

If the quality of the position or the communication becomes bad, the command evaluation
replaces the uncertain position value with intermediate position. Thus, as long as the quality is
bad, all commands will result in the cause Persistant-intermediate-state, -32.

If the switch in the merging unit has the behaviour set to Test or Test blocked, when the
IED has the behaviour On or Blocked, all data from the switch is regarded as invalid. Thus, any
command will fail with the cause PersistantiIntermediate-state, -32, and if selection is used for
the switch, all attempts to select the connected SCSWI will fail with the cause Select-failed, 3,
from the SCSWI.

It is possible to speed up the command response for when the command has been started by
the switch in the breaker IED by connecting the inputs OPOK and OPOK_VAL. Then the
blocking check is only done until OPOK is activated and confirmation of that the command has
been started is given to the SCSWI function.

If the inputs STSELD and STSELD_V are connected, the switch in the breaker IED is assumed to
use selection. Then the SCSWI will wait for a selected indication, STSELD input of XLNPROXY,
before accepting selection, this information is transferred to the SCSWI function from the
XLNPROXY through the group connection XPOS. If STSELD is not activated within tSelect of
the SCSWI function, the selection is deemed failed and it gives a negative selection
acknowledgement to the command issuer with the cause Select-failed. Further, if the
communication is lost, or the data received is deemed invalid, the selection will also fail with
cause Select-failed from the SCSWI.

12.5 Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI

presentation SLGAPC SEMOD114936-1 v4

454
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 12
Control

12.5.1 Identification
SEMOD167845-2 v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Logic rotating switch for function SLGAPC - -
selection and LHMI presentation

12.5.2 Functionality SEMOD114908-4 v9

The logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation SLGAPC (or the selector
switch function block) is used to get an enhanced selector switch functionality compared to
the one provided by a hardware selector switch. Hardware selector switches are used
extensively by utilities, in order to have different functions operating on pre-set values.
Hardware switches are however sources for maintenance issues, lower system reliability and
an extended purchase portfolio. The selector switch function eliminates all these problems.

12.5.3 Function block SEMOD114954-4 v6

SLGAPC
BLOCK ^P01
PSTO ^P02
UP ^P03
DOWN ^P04
^P05
^P06
^P07
^P08
^P09
^P10
^P11
^P12
^P13
^P14
^P15
^P16
^P17
^P18
^P19
^P20
^P21
^P22
^P23
^P24
^P25
^P26
^P27
^P28
^P29
^P30
^P31
^P32
SWPOSN

IEC14000005-1-en.vsd
IEC14000005 V1 EN-US

Figure 243: SLGAPC function block

455
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Control

12.5.4 Signals
PID-3544-INPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 295: SLGAPC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
PSTO INTEGER 0 Operator place selection
UP BOOLEAN 0 Binary "UP" command
DOWN BOOLEAN 0 Binary "DOWN" command

PID-3544-OUTPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 296: SLGAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
P01 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 1
P02 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 2
P03 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 3
P04 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 4
P05 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 5
P06 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 6
P07 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 7
P08 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 8
P09 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 9
P10 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 10
P11 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 11
P12 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 12
P13 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 13
P14 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 14
P15 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 15
P16 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 16
P17 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 17
P18 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 18
P19 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 19
P20 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 20
P21 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 21
P22 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 22
P23 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 23
P24 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 24
P25 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 25
P26 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 26
P27 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 27
P28 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 28
P29 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 29
P30 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 30
Table continues on next page

456
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 12
Control

Name Type Description

P31 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 31
P32 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 32
SWPOSN INTEGER Switch position (integer)

12.5.5 Settings
PID-3544-SETTINGS v5

Table 297: SLGAPC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
NrPos 2 - 32 - 1 32 Number of positions in the switch
OutType Pulsed - - Steady Output type, steady or pulse
Steady
tPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Operate pulse duration, in [s]
tDelay 0.000 - s 0.010 0.000 Time delay on the output, in [s]
60000.000
StopAtExtremes Disabled - - Disabled Stop when min or max position is
Enabled reached

12.5.6 Monitored data

PID-3544-MONITOREDDATA v4

Table 298: SLGAPC Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
SWPOSN INTEGER - - Switch position (integer)

12.5.7 Operation principle

SEMOD114931-4 v6
The logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation (SLGAPC) function has
two operating inputs – UP and DOWN. When a signal is received on the UP input, the function
will activate the output next to the present activated output, in ascending order (for example
if the present activated output is P03 and one activates the UP input then the output P04 will
be activated). When a signal is received on the DOWN input, the function will activate the
output next to the present activated output, in descending order (for example if the present
activated output is P03 and one activates the DOWN input then the output P02 will be
activated). Depending on the output settings the output signals can be steady or pulsed. In
case of steady signals, the output will be active till the time it receives next operation of UP/
DOWN inputs. Also, depending on the settings one can have a time delay between the UP or
DOWN activation signal positive front and the output activation.

Besides the inputs visible in the application configuration in the Application Configuration
tool, there are other possibilities that will allow an user to set the desired position directly
(without activating the intermediate positions), either locally or remotely, using a “select
before execute” dialog. One can block the function operation, by activating the BLOCK input.
In this case, the present position will be kept and further operation will be blocked. The
operator place (local or remote) is specified through the PSTO input. If any operation is
allowed the signal INTONE from the Fixed signal function block can be connected. SLGAPC
function block has also an integer value output, that generates the actual position number.

457
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Control

The positions and the block names are fully settable by the user. These names will appear in
the menu, so the user can see the position names instead of a number.

12.5.7.1 Graphical display SEMOD114931-35 v4

There are two possibilities for SLGAPC

• if it is used just for the monitoring, the switches will be listed with their actual position
names, as defined by the user (max. 13 characters).
• if it is used for control, the switches will be listed with their actual positions, but only the
first three letters of the name will be used.

In both cases, the switch full name will be shown, but the user has to redefine it when building
the Graphical Display Editor, under the "Caption". If used for the control, the following
sequence of commands will ensure:

From the graphical display:

Control
Control Single Line Diagram
Measurements Commands
Events
Disturbance records
Settings
Diagnostics
Test
Change to the "Switches" page Reset
of the SLD by left-right arrows. Authorization
Select switch by up-down Language
arrows

../Control/SLD/Switch
O I ../Control/SLD/Switch
SMBRREC control SMBRREC control
WFM Select switch. Press the
WFM
I or O key. A dialog box
Pilot setup appears.
Pilot setup
OFF OFF
Damage control E P: Disc N: Disc Fe
DAL
The pos will not be modified
(outputs will not be activated) until OK Cancel
you press the E-button for O.K.

../Control/SLD/Switch

SMBRREC control
WFM

Pilot setup
OFF

Damage control
DFW

IEC06000421-2-en.vsd
IEC06000421 V2 EN-US

Figure 244: Example 2 on handling the switch from the local HMI.
From the single line diagram on local HMI.

458
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 12
Control

12.6 Selector mini switch VSGAPC SEMOD158754-1 v3

12.6.1 Identification
SEMOD167850-2 v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Selector mini switch VSGAPC - -

12.6.2 Functionality SEMOD158756-5 v8

The Selector mini switch VSGAPC function block is a multipurpose function used for a variety
of applications, as a general purpose switch.

VSGAPC can be controlled from the menu, from a symbol on the single line diagram (SLD) on
the local HMI or from Binary inputs

12.6.3 Function block SEMOD158768-4 v3

VSGAPC
BLOCK BLOCKED
PSTO POSITION
IPOS1 POS1
IPOS2 POS2
CMDPOS12
CMDPOS21

IEC14000066-1-en.vsd
IEC14000066 V1 EN-US

Figure 245: VSGAPC function block

12.6.4 Signals
PID-3829-INPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 299: VSGAPC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
PSTO INTEGER 0 Operator place selection
IPOS1 BOOLEAN 0 Position 1 indicating input
IPOS2 BOOLEAN 0 Position 2 indicating input

PID-3829-OUTPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 300: VSGAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
BLOCKED BOOLEAN The function is active but the functionality is blocked
POSITION INTEGER Position indication, integer
POS1 BOOLEAN Position 1 indication, logical signal
POS2 BOOLEAN Position 2 indication, logical signal
CMDPOS12 BOOLEAN Execute command from position 1 to position 2
CMDPOS21 BOOLEAN Execute command from position 2 to position 1

459
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Control

12.6.5 Settings
PID-3829-SETTINGS v2

Table 301: VSGAPC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
CtlModel Dir Norm - - Dir Norm Specifies the type for control model
SBO Enh according to IEC 61850
Mode Steady - - Pulsed Operation mode
Pulsed
tSelect 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 30.000 Max time between select and execute
signals
tPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Command pulse lenght

12.6.6 Operation principle SEMOD158762-4 v5

Selector mini switch (VSGAPC) function can be used for double purpose, in the same way as
switch controller (SCSWI) functions are used:

• for indication on the single line diagram (SLD). Position is received through the IPOS1 and
IPOS2 inputs and distributed in the configuration through the POS1 and POS2 outputs, or
to IEC 61850 through reporting, or GOOSE.
• for commands that are received via the local HMI or IEC 61850 and distributed in the
configuration through outputs CMDPOS12 and CMDPOS21.
The output CMDPOS12 is set when the function receives a CLOSE command from the local
HMI when the SLD is displayed and the object is chosen.
The output CMDPOS21 is set when the function receives an OPEN command from the local
HMI when the SLD is displayed and the object is chosen.

It is important for indication in the SLD that the a symbol is associated with a
controllable object, otherwise the symbol won't be displayed on the screen. A
symbol is created and configured in GDE tool in PCM600.

The PSTO input is connected to the Local remote switch to have a selection of operators place,
operation from local HMI (Local) or through IEC 61850 (Remote). An INTONE connection from
Fixed signal function block (FXDSIGN) will allow operation from local HMI.

As it can be seen, both indications and commands are done in double-bit representation,
where a combination of signals on both inputs/outputs generate the desired result.

The following table shows the relationship between IPOS1/IPOS2 inputs and the name of the
string that is shown on the SLD. The value of the strings are set in PST.

IPOS1 IPOS2 Name of displayed string Default string value

0 0 PosUndefined P00
1 0 Position1 P01
0 1 Position2 P10
1 1 PosBadState P11

460
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 12
Control

12.7 Generic communication function for Double Point

indication DPGAPC SEMOD55384-1 v4

12.7.1 Identification
GUID-E16EA78F-6DF9-4B37-A92D-5C09827E2297 v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Generic communication function for DPGAPC - -
Double Point indication

12.7.2 Functionality SEMOD55850-5 v7

Generic communication function for Double Point indication (DPGAPC) function block is used
to send double point position indications to other systems, equipment or functions in the
substation through IEC 61850-8-1 or other communication protocols. It is especially intended
to be used in the interlocking station-wide logics.

12.7.3 Function block SEMOD54710-4 v5

IEC13000081 V1 EN-US

Figure 246: DPGAPC function block

12.7.4 Signals SEMOD55883-1 v2

PID-4139-INPUTSIGNALS v12

Table 302: DPGAPC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open indication
CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Close indication
VALID BOOLEAN 0 Valid indication

PID-4139-OUTPUTSIGNALS v11

Table 303: DPGAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
POSITION INTEGER Double point indication

12.7.5 Settings ABBD8E283863 v3

The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

461
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Control

12.7.6 Operation principle SEMOD55861-5 v7

When receiving the input signals, DPGAPC sends the signals over IEC 61850-8-1 to the systems,
equipment or functions that requests and thus subscribes on these signals. To be able to get
the signals into other systems, equipment or functions, one must use other tools, described in
the Engineering manual, and define which function block in which systems, equipment or
functions should receive this information.

More specifically, DPGAPC function reports a combined double point position indication
output POSITION, by evaluating the value and the timestamp attributes of the inputs OPEN
and CLOSE, together with the logical input signal VALID.

When the input signal VALID is active, the values of the OPEN and CLOSE inputs determine the
two-bit integer value of the output POSITION. The timestamp of the output POSITION will have
the latest updated timestamp of the inputs OPEN and CLOSE.

When the input signal VALID is inactive, DPGAPC function forces the position to intermediated
state.

When the value of the input signal VALID changes, the timestamp of the output POSITION will
be updated as the time when DPGAPC function detects the change.

Refer to Table 304 for the description of the input-output relationship in terms of the value
and the quality attributes.

Table 304: Description of the input-output relationship

POSITION
VALID OPEN CLOSE
Value Description
0 - - 0 Intermediate
1 0 0 0 Intermediate
1 1 0 1 Open
1 0 1 2 Closed
1 1 1 3 Bad State

12.8 Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GAPC SEMOD176448-1 v3

12.8.1 Identification
SEMOD176456-2 v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GAPC - -

12.8.2 Functionality SEMOD176462-4 v9

The Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GAPC function block is a collection of 8 single
point commands that can be used for direct commands for example reset of LED's or putting
IED in "ChangeLock" state from remote. In this way, simple commands can be sent directly to
the IED outputs, without confirmation. Confirmation (status) of the result of the commands is
supposed to be achieved by other means, such as binary inputs and SPGAPC function blocks.
The commands can be pulsed or steady with a settable pulse time.

462
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 12
Control

12.8.3 Function block SEMOD176479-4 v5

SPC8GAPC
BLOCK ^OUT1
PSTO ^OUT2
^OUT3
^OUT4
^OUT5
^OUT6
^OUT7
^OUT8

IEC07000143-3-en.vsd
IEC07000143 V3 EN-US

Figure 247: SPC8GAPC function block

12.8.4 Signals
PID-3575-INPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 305: SPC8GAPC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Blocks the function operation
PSTO INTEGER 1 Operator place selection

PID-3575-OUTPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 306: SPC8GAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT1 BOOLEAN Command output 1
OUT2 BOOLEAN Command output 2
OUT3 BOOLEAN Command output 3
OUT4 BOOLEAN Command output 4
OUT5 BOOLEAN Command output 5
OUT6 BOOLEAN Command output 6
OUT7 BOOLEAN Command output 7
OUT8 BOOLEAN Command output 8

12.8.5 Settings
PID-3575-SETTINGS v5

Table 307: SPC8GAPC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
PulseMode1 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for
Latched output 1
tPulse1 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Pulse time output 1
PulseMode2 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for
Latched output 2
tPulse2 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Pulse time output 2
PulseMode3 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for
Latched output 3
Table continues on next page

463
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tPulse3 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Pulse time output 3
PulseMode4 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for
Latched output 4
tPulse4 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Pulse time output 4
PulseMode5 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for
Latched output 5
tPulse5 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Pulse time output 5
PulseMode6 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for
Latched output 6
tPulse6 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Pulse time output 6
PulseMode7 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for
Latched output 7
tPulse7 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Pulse time output 7
PulseMode8 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for
Latched output 8
tPulse8 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Pulse time output 8

12.8.6 Operation principle SEMOD176471-4 v7

The PSTO input selects the operator place (LOCAL, REMOTE or ALL). One of the eight outputs
is activated based on the command sent from the operator place selected. The settings
Latchedx and tPulsex (where x is the respective output) will determine if the signal will be
pulsed (and how long the pulse is) or latched (steady). BLOCK will block the operation of the
function – in case a command is sent, no output will be activated.

PSTO is the universal operator place selector for all control functions. Although,
PSTO can be configured to use LOCAL or ALL operator places, only REMOTE
operator place is used in SPC8GAPC function.

12.9 AutomationBits, command function for DNP3.0

AUTOBITS SEMOD158589-1 v3

12.9.1 Identification
GUID-C3BB63F5-F0E7-4B00-AF0F-917ECF87B016 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
AutomationBits, command function
AUTOBITS - -
for DNP3

12.9.2 Functionality SEMOD158591-5 v7

AutomationBits function for DNP3 (AUTOBITS) is used within PCM600 to get into the
configuration of the commands coming through the DNP3 protocol. The AUTOBITS function
plays the same role as functions GOOSEBINRCV (for IEC 61850) and MULTICMDRCV (for LON).

464
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 12
Control

12.9.3 Function block SEMOD158603-4 v3

AUTOBITS
BLOCK ^CMDBIT1
PSTO ^CMDBIT2
^CMDBIT3
^CMDBIT4
^CMDBIT5
^CMDBIT6
^CMDBIT7
^CMDBIT8
^CMDBIT9
^CMDBIT10
^CMDBIT11
^CMDBIT12
^CMDBIT13
^CMDBIT14
^CMDBIT15
^CMDBIT16
^CMDBIT17
^CMDBIT18
^CMDBIT19
^CMDBIT20
^CMDBIT21
^CMDBIT22
^CMDBIT23
^CMDBIT24
^CMDBIT25
^CMDBIT26
^CMDBIT27
^CMDBIT28
^CMDBIT29
^CMDBIT30
^CMDBIT31
^CMDBIT32

IEC09000925-1-en.vsd
IEC09000925 V1 EN-US

Figure 248: AUTOBITS function block

12.9.4 Signals
PID-3776-INPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 308: AUTOBITS Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
PSTO INTEGER 0 Operator place selection

PID-3776-OUTPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 309: AUTOBITS Output signals

Name Type Description
CMDBIT1 BOOLEAN Command out bit 1
CMDBIT2 BOOLEAN Command out bit 2
CMDBIT3 BOOLEAN Command out bit 3
CMDBIT4 BOOLEAN Command out bit 4
CMDBIT5 BOOLEAN Command out bit 5
CMDBIT6 BOOLEAN Command out bit 6
CMDBIT7 BOOLEAN Command out bit 7
CMDBIT8 BOOLEAN Command out bit 8
CMDBIT9 BOOLEAN Command out bit 9
CMDBIT10 BOOLEAN Command out bit 10
Table continues on next page

465
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Control

Name Type Description

CMDBIT11 BOOLEAN Command out bit 11
CMDBIT12 BOOLEAN Command out bit 12
CMDBIT13 BOOLEAN Command out bit 13
CMDBIT14 BOOLEAN Command out bit 14
CMDBIT15 BOOLEAN Command out bit 15
CMDBIT16 BOOLEAN Command out bit 16
CMDBIT17 BOOLEAN Command out bit 17
CMDBIT18 BOOLEAN Command out bit 18
CMDBIT19 BOOLEAN Command out bit 19
CMDBIT20 BOOLEAN Command out bit 20
CMDBIT21 BOOLEAN Command out bit 21
CMDBIT22 BOOLEAN Command out bit 22
CMDBIT23 BOOLEAN Command out bit 23
CMDBIT24 BOOLEAN Command out bit 24
CMDBIT25 BOOLEAN Command out bit 25
CMDBIT26 BOOLEAN Command out bit 26
CMDBIT27 BOOLEAN Command out bit 27
CMDBIT28 BOOLEAN Command out bit 28
CMDBIT29 BOOLEAN Command out bit 29
CMDBIT30 BOOLEAN Command out bit 30
CMDBIT31 BOOLEAN Command out bit 31
CMDBIT32 BOOLEAN Command out bit 32

12.9.5 Settings
PID-3776-SETTINGS v4

Table 310: AUTOBITS Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On

12.9.6 Operation principle SEMOD158597-4 v5

AutomationBits function (AUTOBITS) has 32 individual outputs which each can be mapped as a
Binary Output point in DNP3. The output is operated by a "Object 12" in DNP3. This object
contains parameters for control-code, count, on-time and off-time. To operate an AUTOBITS
output point, send a control-code of latch-On, latch-Off, pulse-On, pulse-Off, Trip or Close. The
remaining parameters will be regarded were appropriate. ex: pulse-On, on-time=100, off-
time=300, count=5 would give 5 positive 100 ms pulses, 300 ms apart.

There is a BLOCK input signal, which will disable the operation of the function, in the same way
the setting Operation: On/Off does. That means that, upon activation of the BLOCK input, all
32 CMDBITxx outputs will be set to 0. The BLOCK acts like an overriding, the function still
receives data from the DNP3 master. Upon deactivation of BLOCK, all the 32 CMDBITxx
outputs will be set by the DNP3 master again, momentarily. For AUTOBITS , the PSTO input

466
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 12
Control

determines the operator place. The command can be written to the block while in “Remote”. If
PSTO is in “Local” then no change is applied to the outputs.

12.10 Single command, 16 signals SINGLECMD SEMOD119849-1 v2

12.10.1 Identification
GUID-2217CCC2-5581-407F-A4BC-266CD6808984 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Single command, 16 signals SINGLECMD - -

12.10.2 Functionality M12446-6 v5

The IEDs can receive commands either from a substation automation system or from the local
HMI. The command function block has outputs that can be used, for example, to control high
voltage apparatuses or for other user defined functionality.

12.10.3 Function block SEMOD116040-4 v2

SINGLECMD
BLOCK ^OUT1
^OUT2
^OUT3
^OUT4
^OUT5
^OUT6
^OUT7
^OUT8
^OUT9
^OUT10
^OUT11
^OUT12
^OUT13
^OUT14
^OUT15
^OUT16

IEC05000698-2-en.vsd
IEC05000698 V3 EN-US

Figure 249: SINGLECMD function block

12.10.4 Signals
PID-6189-INPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 311: SINGLECMD Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block single command function

467
Technical manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Control

PID-6189-OUTPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 312: SINGLECMD Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT1 BOOLEAN Single command output 1
OUT2 BOOLEAN Single command output 2
OUT3 BOOLEAN Single command output 3
OUT4 BOOLEAN Single command output 4
OUT5 BOOLEAN Single command output 5
OUT6 BOOLEAN Single command output 6
OUT7 BOOLEAN Single command output 7
OUT8 BOOLEAN Single command output 8
OUT9 BOOLEAN Single command output 9
OUT10 BOOLEAN Single command output 10
OUT11 BOOLEAN Single command output 11
OUT12 BOOLEAN Single command output 12
OUT13 BOOLEAN Single command output 13
OUT14 BOOLEAN Single command output 14
OUT15 BOOLEAN Single command output 15
OUT16 BOOLEAN Single command output 16

12.10.5 Settings
PID-6189-SETTINGS v5

Table 313: SINGLECMD Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
Steady
Pulsed

12.10.6 Operation principle M12447-3 v3

Single command, 16 signals (SINGLECMD) function has 16 binary output signals. The outputs
can be individually controlled from a substation automation system or from the local HMI.
Each output signal can be given a name with a maximum of 13 characters in PCM600.

The output signals can be of the types Off, Steady, or Pulse. This configuration setting is done
via the local HMI or PCM600 and is common for the whole function block. The length of the
output pulses are 100 ms. In steady mode, SINGLECMD function has a memory to remember
the output values at power interruption of the IED. Also a BLOCK input is available used to
block the updating of the outputs.

The output signals, OUT1 to OUT16, are available for configuration to built-in functions or via
the configuration logic circuits to the binary outputs of the IED.

468
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 13
Scheme communication

Section 13 Scheme communication

13.1 Scheme communication logic for distance or

overcurrent protection ZCPSCH IP15749-1 v3

13.1.1 Identification
M14854-1 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Scheme communication logic for ZCPSCH - 85
distance or overcurrent protection

13.1.2 Functionality M13860-3 v11

To achieve instantaneous fault clearance for all line faults, scheme communication logic is
provided. All types of communication schemes for permissive underreaching, permissive
overreaching, blocking, delta based blocking, unblocking and intertrip are available.

The built-in communication module (LDCM) can be used for scheme communication signaling
when included.

13.1.3 Function block M13866-3 v7

ZCPSCH
I3P* TRIP
U3P* CS
BLOCK CHSTOP
BLKTR CRL
BLKCS LCG
CSBLK
CACC
CSOR
CSUR
CR
CRG
CBOPEN

IEC09000004

IEC09000004 V4 EN-US

Figure 250: ZCPSCH function block

469
Technical manual
Section 13 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Scheme communication

13.1.4 Signals
PID-3766-INPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 314: ZCPSCH Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Current group connection
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Voltage group connection
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Signal for block of trip output from communication logic
BLKCS BOOLEAN 0 Block of carrier send in permissive OR and blocking schemes
CSBLK BOOLEAN 0 Reverse directed distance protection zone signal
CACC BOOLEAN 0 Permissive distance protection zone signal
CSOR BOOLEAN 0 Overreaching distance protection zone signal
CSUR BOOLEAN 0 Underreaching distance protection zone signal
CR BOOLEAN 0 Carrier Signal Received
CRG BOOLEAN 0 Carrier guard signal received
CBOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Indicates that the breaker is open

PID-3766-OUTPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 315: ZCPSCH Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip output
CS BOOLEAN Carrier Send signal
CHSTOP BOOLEAN Stops the blocking signal to remote end
CRL BOOLEAN Carrier signal received or missing carrier guard signal
LCG BOOLEAN Loss of carrier guard signal

13.1.5 Settings
PID-3766-SETTINGS v6

Table 316: ZCPSCH Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
SchemeType Intertrip - - Permissive UR Scheme type
Permissive UR
Permissive OR
Blocking
DeltaBlocking
tCoord 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.035 Co-ordination time for blocking
communication scheme
tSendMin 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Minimum duration of a carrier send
signal

470
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 13
Scheme communication

Table 317: ZCPSCH Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Unblock Off - - Off Operation mode of unblocking logic
NoRestart
Restart
DeltaI 0 - 200 %IB 1 10 Current change level in % of IBase for
fault inception detection
DeltaU 0 - 100 %UB 1 5 Voltage change level in % of UB for
fault inception detection
Delta3I0 0 - 200 %IB 1 10 Zero seq current change level in % of
IBase
Delta3U0 0 - 100 %UB 1 5 Zero seq voltage change level in % of
UBase
tSecurity 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.035 Security timer for loss of carrier guard
detection

Table 318: ZCPSCH Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSelector 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

13.1.6 Operation principle

M13893-3 v4
Depending on whether a reverse or forward directed impedance zone is used to issue the send
signal, the communication schemes are divided into Blocking and Permissive schemes,
respectively.

A permissive scheme is inherently faster and has better security against false tripping than a
blocking scheme. On the other hand, a permissive scheme depends on a received signal for a
fast trip, so its dependability is lower than that of a blocking scheme.

13.1.6.1 Blocking scheme M13893-6 v6

The principle of operation for a blocking scheme is that an overreaching zone is allowed to trip
instantaneously after the settable co-ordination time tCoord has elapsed, when no signal is
received from the remote IED.

The received signal, which shall be connected to CR, is used to not release the zone to be
accelerated to clear the fault instantaneously (after time tCoord). The forward overreaching
zone to be accelerated is connected to the input CACC, see figure 251.

In case of external faults, the blocking signal (CR) must be received before the settable timer
tCoord elapses, to prevent a false trip, see figure 251.

The function can be totally blocked by activating the input BLOCK, block of trip by activating
the input BLKTR, Block of signal send by activating the input BLKCS.

tCoord
CACC
t TRIP
CR AND

en05000512.vsd
IEC05000512 V1 EN-US

Figure 251: Basic logic for trip signal in blocking scheme

471
Technical manual
Section 13 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Scheme communication

Channels for communication in each direction must be available.

13.1.6.2 Delta blocking scheme GUID-22E3BFAC-82E9-4434-B761-AD63BCFC68D5 v2

In order to avoid delays due to carrier coordination times, the initiation of sending of blocking
signal to remote end is done by a fault inception detection element based on delta quantities
of currents and voltages. The delta based fault detection is very fast and if the channel is fast
there is no need for delaying the operation of the remote distance element. The received
blocking signal arrives well before the distance element has started. If the fault is in forward
direction the sending is immediately stopped by a forward directed distance, directional
current or directional earth fault element.

The fault inception detection element detects instantaneous changes in any phase currents or
zero sequence current in combination with a change in the corresponding phase voltage or
zero sequence voltage. The criterion for the fault inception detection is if the change of any
phase voltage and current exceeds the settings DeltaU and DeltaI respectively, or if the change
of zero sequence voltage and zero sequence current exceeds the settings Delta3U0,Delta3I0
respectively. The schemeType is selected as DeltaBlocking.

If the fault inception function has detected a system fault, a block signal CS will be issued and
sent to remote end in order to block the overreaching zones. Different criteria has to be
fulfilled for sending the CS signal:

1. The breaker has to be in closed condition, that is, the input signal CBOPEN is deactivated.
2. A fault inception should have been detected while the carrier send signal is not blocked,
that is, the input signal BLKCS is not activated.

If it is later detected that it was an internal fault that made the function issue the CS signal,
the function will issue a CHSTOP signal to unblock the remote end.

The received signal, which is connected to the CR input, is not used to accelerate the release of
the overreaching zone to clear the fault instantaneously. The overreaching zone to be
accelerated is connected to the input CACC, see Figure 252.

In case of external faults, the blocking signal (CR) must be received before the settable timer
tCoord elapses, to prevent a false trip, see Figure 252.

The function can be totally blocked by activating the input BLOCK, block of trip by activating
the input BLKTR, block of carrier send by activating the input BLKCS.

tCoord
CACC
t TRIP
CR AND

en05000512.vsd
IEC05000512 V1 EN-US

Figure 252: Basic logic for trip signal in delta blocking scheme
Channels for communication in each direction must be available.

13.1.6.3 Permissive underreaching scheme M13893-13 v5

In a permissive underreaching scheme, a forward directed underreach measuring element

(normally zone1) sends a permissive signal CS to the remote end if a fault is detected.in
forward direction. The received signal CR is used to allow an overreaching zone to trip after the
tCoord timer has elapsed. The tCoord in permissive underreaching schemes is normally set to
zero.

The logic for trip signal in permissive scheme is shown in figure 253.

472
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 13
Scheme communication

tCoord
CACC
t TRIP
CR AND

en05000513.vsd
IEC05000513 V1 EN-US

Figure 253: Logic for trip signal in permissive scheme

The permissive underreaching scheme has the same blocking possibilities as mentioned for
blocking scheme.

13.1.6.4 Permissive overreaching scheme M13893-22 v5

In a permissive overreaching scheme, a forward directed overreach measuring element

(normally zone2) sends a permissive signal CS to the remote end if a fault is detected in
forward direction. The received signal CR is used to allow an overreaching zone to trip after the
settable tCoord timer has elapsed. The tCoord in permissive overreaching schemes is normally
set to zero.

The logic for trip signal is the same as for permissive underreaching, as in figure 253.

The permissive overreaching scheme has the same blocking possibilities as mentioned for
blocking scheme.

13.1.6.5 Unblocking scheme M13893-31 v7

In unblocking scheme, the lower dependability in permissive scheme is overcome by using the
loss of guard signal from the communication equipment to locally create a receive signal. It is
common or suitable to use the function when older, less reliable, power-line carrier (PLC)
communication is used.

The unblocking function uses a guard signal CRG, which must always be present, even when no
CR signal is received. The absence of the CRG signal for a time longer than the setting
tSecurity time is used as a CR signal, see figure 254. This also enables a permissive scheme to
operate when the line fault blocks the signal transmission. The CRG signal is only used in
unblocking schemes.

The received signal created by the unblocking function is reset 150 ms after the security timer
has elapsed. When that occurs an output signal LCG is activated for signalling purpose. The
unblocking function is reset 200 ms after that the guard signal is present again.

CR
tSecurity CRL
t >1
1
CRG
200 ms 150 ms
t OR t AND
AND
LCG

en05000746.vsd
IEC05000746 V1 EN-US

Figure 254: Guard singal logic with unblocking scheme and with setting Unblock = Restart

473
Technical manual
Section 13 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Scheme communication

CR
CRL
tSecurity OR
CRG t
1

IEC11000253-1-en.vsd
IEC11000253 V1 EN-US

Figure 255: Guard singal logic with unblocking scheme and with setting Unblock =
NoRestart
The unblocking function can be set in three operation modes (setting Unblock):

Off The unblocking function is out of operation

No restart Communication failure shorter than tSecurity will be ignored
If CRG disappears a CRL signal will be transferred to the trip logic
There will not be any information in case of communication failure (LCG)
Restart Communication failure shorter than tSecurity will be ignored
It sends a defined (150 ms) CRL after the disappearance of the CRG signal
The function will activate LCG output in case of communication failure
If the communication failure comes and goes (<200 ms) there will not be
recurrent signalling

13.1.6.6 Intertrip scheme M13893-36 v4

In the direct intertrip scheme, the send signal CS is sent from an underreaching zone that is
tripping the line.

The received signal CR is directly transferred to a TRIP for tripping without local criteria. The
signal is further processed in the tripping logic.

In case of single-pole tripping in multi-phase systems, a phase selection is performed.

13.1.6.7 Simplified logic diagram M13893-40 v4

The simplified logic diagram for the complete logic is shown in figure 256.

474
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 13
Scheme communication

Unblock =Off

CR

Unblock =
OR CRL
NoRestart AND
CRL
Unblock =
tSecurit
Restart
y
CRG 1 t AND

200 ms 150 ms LCG

AND
t OR AND t

SchemeType =
Intertrip

CSUR
tSendMi
n AND
OR

BLOCK AND
CSBLK OR
CRL

Schemetype =
Permissive UR AND CS
OR

tCoord
AND 25 ms
OR
t TRIP
CACC t

Schemetype =
Permissive OR

CSOR OR AND

AND
tSendMin
OR
AND
SchemeType =
Blocking

BLKCS

AND

IEC05000515-2-en.vsd
IEC05000515 V2 EN-US

Figure 256: Scheme communication logic for distance or overcurrent protection,

simplified logic diagram

13.1.7 Technical data

M16038-1 v12

Table 319: ZCPSCH technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Scheme type Off -
Intertrip
Permissive UR
Permissive OR
Blocking
DeltaBlocking
Operate voltage, Delta U (0–100)% of UBase ±5.0% of ΔU
Operate current, Delta I (0–200)% of IBase ±5.0% of ΔI
Table continues on next page

475
Technical manual
Section 13 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Scheme communication

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate zero sequence voltage, (0–100)% of UBase ±10.0% of Δ3U0
Delta 3U0
Operate zero sequence current, (0–200)% of IBase ±10.0% of Δ3I0
Delta 3I0
Co-ordination time for blocking (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±10 ms whichever is
communication scheme greater
Minimum duration of a carrier (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±10 ms whichever is
send signal greater
Security timer for loss of guard (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±10 ms whichever is
signal detection greater
Operation mode of unblocking Off -
logic NoRestart
Restart

13.2 Phase segregated scheme communication logic for

distance protection ZC1PPSCH SEMOD141690-1 v2

13.2.1 Identification
SEMOD141699-2 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Phase segregated Scheme ZC1PPSCH - 85
communication logic for distance
protection

13.2.2 Functionality SEMOD141686-4 v3

Communication between line ends is used to achieve fault clearance for all faults on a power
line. All possible types of communication schemes for example, permissive underreach,
permissive overreach and blocking schemes are available. To manage problems with
simultaneous faults on parallel power lines phase segregated communication is needed. This
will then replace the standard Scheme communication logic for distance or Overcurrent
protection (ZCPSCH) on important lines where three communication channels (in each
subsystem) are available for the distance protection communication.

The main purpose of the Phase segregated scheme communication logic for distance
protection (ZC1PPSCH) function is to supplement the distance protection function such that:

• fast clearance of faults is also achieved at the line end for which the faults are on the part
of the line not covered by its underreaching zone.
• correct phase selection can be maintained to support single-pole tripping for faults
occurring anywhere on the entire length of a double circuit line.

To accomplish this, three separate communication channels, that is, one per phase, each
capable of transmitting a signal in each direction is required.

ZC1PPSCH can be completed with the current reversal and WEI logic for phase segregated
communication, when found necessary in Blocking and Permissive overreaching schemes.

476
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 13
Scheme communication

13.2.3 Function block SEMOD155566-4 v2

ZC1PPSCH
BLOCK TRIP
BLKTR TRL1
BLKTRL1 TRL2
BLKTRL2 TRL3
BLKTRL3 CSL1
CACCL1 CSL2
CACCL2 CSL3
CACCL3 CSMPH
CSURL1 CRLL1
CSURL2 CRLL2
CSURL3 CRLL3
CSORL1
CSORL2
CSORL3
CSBLKL1
CSBLKL2
CSBLKL3
BLKCSL1
BLKCSL2
BLKCSL3
CRL1
CRL2
CRL3
CRMPH

IEC06000427-2-en.vsd
IEC06000427 V2 EN-US

Figure 257: ZC1PPSCH function block

13.2.4 Signals
PID-3523-INPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 320: ZC1PPSCH Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Common signal for block of trip output from communication
logic in all phases
BLKTRL1 BOOLEAN 0 Signal for block of trip output from communication logic in
Phase L1
BLKTRL2 BOOLEAN 0 Signal for block of trip output from communication logic in
Phase L2
BLKTRL3 BOOLEAN 0 Signal for block of trip output from communication logic in
Phase L3
CACCL1 BOOLEAN 0 Accelerated Distance protection zone start in Phase L1
CACCL2 BOOLEAN 0 Accelerated Distance protection zone signal in Phase L2
CACCL3 BOOLEAN 0 Accelerated Distance protection zone signal in Phase L3
CSURL1 BOOLEAN 0 Underreaching distance protection zone signal in Phase L1
CSURL2 BOOLEAN 0 Underreaching distance protection zone signal in Phase L2
CSURL3 BOOLEAN 0 Underreaching distance protection zone signal in Phase L3
CSORL1 BOOLEAN 0 Overreaching distance protection zone signal in Phase L1
CSORL2 BOOLEAN 0 Overreaching distance protection zone signal in Phase L2
CSORL3 BOOLEAN 0 Overreaching distance protection zone signal in Phase L3
CSBLKL1 BOOLEAN 0 Reverse directed distance protection zone signal in Phase L1
CSBLKL2 BOOLEAN 0 Reverse directed distance protection zone signal in Phase L2
CSBLKL3 BOOLEAN 0 Reverse directed distance protection zone signal in Phase L3
BLKCSL1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of carrier send in POR and Blocking schemes in Phase L1
Table continues on next page

477
Technical manual
Section 13 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Scheme communication

Name Type Default Description

BLKCSL2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of carrier send in POR and Blocking schemes in Phase
L2
BLKCSL3 BOOLEAN 0 Block of carrier send in POR and Blocking schemes in Phase
L3
CRL1 BOOLEAN 0 Carrier signal received in Phase L1
CRL2 BOOLEAN 0 Carrier signal received in Phase L2
CRL3 BOOLEAN 0 Carrier signal received in Phase L3
CRMPH BOOLEAN 0 Carrier Signal received for multiphase fault

PID-3523-OUTPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 321: ZC1PPSCH Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip output in any of the phase
TRL1 BOOLEAN Trip output in Phase L1
TRL2 BOOLEAN Trip output in Phase L2
TRL3 BOOLEAN Trip output in Phase L3
CSL1 BOOLEAN Carrier Send in phase L1
CSL2 BOOLEAN Carrier Send in phase L2
CSL3 BOOLEAN Carrier Send in phase L3
CSMPH BOOLEAN carrier Send for multi phase fault
CRLL1 BOOLEAN Carrier signal received in Phase L1
CRLL2 BOOLEAN Carrier signal received in Phase L2
CRLL3 BOOLEAN Carrier signal received in Phase L3

13.2.5 Settings
PID-3523-SETTINGS v4

Table 322: ZC1PPSCH Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation On / Off
On
Scheme Type Off - - Permissive UR Scheme type
Intertrip
Permissive UR
Permissive OR
Blocking
tCoord 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Trip coordinate time
tSendMin 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Minimum duration of Carrier Send
signal

13.2.6 Operation principle

SEMOD141705-4 v2
Depending on whether a reverse or forward directed impedance zone is used to issue the send
signal, the communication schemes are divided into Blocking and Permissive schemes,
respectively.

478
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 13
Scheme communication

A permissive scheme is inherently faster and has better security against false tripping than a
blocking scheme. On the other hand, a permissive scheme depends on a received signal for a
fast trip, so its dependability is lower than that of a blocking scheme.

The Phase segregated scheme communication logic for distance protection (ZC1PPSCH)
function is a logical function built-up from logical elements. It is a supplementary function to
the distance protection, requiring for its operation inputs from the distance protection and
the communication equipment.

The type of communication-aided scheme to be used can be selected by way of the settings.

The ability to select which distance protection zone is assigned to which input of ZC1PPSCH
makes this logic able to support practically any scheme communication requirements
regardless of their basic operating principle. The outputs to initiate tripping and sending of
the teleprotection signal are given in accordance with the type of communication-aided
scheme selected and the zone(s) and phase(s) of the distance protection which have operated.

When power line carrier communication channels are used for permissive schemes
communication, unblocking logic which uses the loss of guard signal as a receive criteria is
provided. This logic compensates for the lack of dependability due to the transmission of the
command signal over the faulted line.

13.2.6.1 Blocking scheme SEMOD141705-12 v2

The principle of operation for a blocking scheme is that an overreaching zone is allowed to trip
instantaneously after the settable co-ordination time tCoord has elapsed, when no signal is
received from the remote IED. The received signal (sent by a reverse looking element in the
remote IED), which shall be connected to CRLx, is used to not release the zone to be
accelerated to clear the fault instantaneously (after time tCoord). The overreaching zone to be
accelerated is connected to the input CACCLx, see figure 258. In case of external faults, the
blocking signal (CRLx) must be received before the settable timer tCoord elapses, to prevent
an unneccesary trip, see figure 258.

ZC1PPSCH can be totally blocked by activating the input BLOCK, block of trip is achieved by
activating the input BLKTRLx, Block of carrier send is done by activating the input BLKCSLx.

tCoord 25 ms
CACCLx
t t TRLx
CRLx AND

IEC06000310_2_en.vsd
IEC06000310 V2 EN-US

Figure 258: Basic logic for trip carrier in one phase of a blocking scheme

13.2.6.2 Permissive underreach scheme SEMOD141705-18 v1

In a permissive underreach scheme, a forward directed underreach measuring element

(normally zone1) sends a permissive signal CSLx to the remote end if a fault is detected in
forward direction. The received signal CRLx is used to allow an overreaching zone (connected
to CACCLx) to trip after the tCoord timer has elapsed. The tCoord is in permissive underreach
schemes normally set to zero. The logic for trip carrier in permissive scheme is shown in
figure 259. Three channels for communication in each direction must be available.

479
Technical manual
Section 13 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Scheme communication

tCoord 25 ms
CACCLx t t TRLx
CRLx AND

IEC07000088_2_en.vsd
IEC07000088 V2 EN-US

Figure 259: Basic logic for trip carrier in one phase of a permissive underreach scheme

13.2.6.3 Permissive overreach scheme SEMOD141705-26 v1

In a permissive overreach scheme, a forward directed overreach measuring element (normally

zone2) sends a permissive signal CSLx to the remote end if a fault is detected in forward
direction. The received signal CRLx is used to allow an overreaching zone to trip after the
settable tCoord timer has elapsed. The tCoord is in permissive overreach schemes normally
set to zero. The logic for trip carrier is the same as for permissive underreach, see figure 258.

The permissive overreach scheme has the same blocking possibilities as mentioned for
blocking scheme above. The blocking inputs are activated from the current reversal logic when
this function is included.

Three channels for communication in each direction must be available.

13.2.6.4 Unblocking scheme SEMOD141705-31 v2

In an unblocking scheme, the lower dependability in permissive scheme is overcome by using

the loss of guard signal from the communication equipment to locally create a carrier receive
signal. It is common or suitable to use the function when older, less reliable, power-line carrier
(PLC) communication is used. As phase segregated communication schemes uses phases
individually and the PLC is typically connected single-phase or phase-to-phase it is not
possible to evaluate which of the phases to release and the unblocking scheme has thus not
been supported.

13.2.6.5 Intertrip scheme SEMOD141705-34 v1

In the direct intertrip scheme, the carrier send signal CS is sent from an underreaching zone
that is tripping the line.

The received signal per phase is directly transferred to the trip function block for tripping
without local criteria. The signal is not further processed in the phase segregated
communication logic. In case of single-pole tripping the phase selection and logic for tripping
the three phases is performed in the trip function block.

13.2.6.6 Simplified logic diagram SEMOD141705-38 v2

The simplified logic diagram for one phase is shown in figure 260.

480
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 13
Scheme communication

SchemeType =
Intertrip

CSURLx

tSendMin AND
OR

BLOCK
AND
CSBLKLx OR
CRLx

Scheme Type =
Permissive UR AND CSLx
OR

tCoord
25 ms
AND t TRLx
OR t
CACCLx

Scheme Type =
Permissive OR

CSORLx OR AND

AND

tSendMin
OR

AND
Scheme Type =
Blocking
BLKCSx

AND

CSL1
CSL2 AND

CSL2
OR CSMPH
CSL3 AND

CSL3
CSL1 AND

CSL1
CSL2 GENERAL
OR
CSL3

IEC06000311_2_en.vsd
IEC06000311 V2 EN-US

Figure 260: Simplified logic diagram for one phase

481
Technical manual
Section 13 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Scheme communication

13.2.7 Technical data

SEMOD166936-2 v7

Table 323: ZC1PPSCH technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Scheme type Intertrip -
Permissive UR
Permissive OR
Blocking
Co-ordination time for blocking (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is
communication scheme greater
Minimum duration of a carrier (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is
send signal greater

13.3 Current reversal and Weak-end infeed logic for

distance protection 3-phase ZCRWPSCH IP15751-1 v4

13.3.1 Identification
M15073-1 v5

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Current reversal and weak-end ZCRWPSCH - 85
infeed logic for distance protection
3-phase

13.3.2 Functionality M13896-3 v14

The ZCRWPSCH function provides the current reversal and weak end infeed logic functions
that supplement the standard scheme communication logic. It is not suitable for standalone
use as it requires inputs from the distance protection functions and the scheme
communications function included within the terminal.

On detection of a current reversal, the current reversal logic provides an output to block the
sending of the teleprotection signal to the remote end, and to block the permissive tripping at
the local end. This blocking condition is maintained long enough to ensure that no unwanted
operation will occur as a result of the current reversal.

On verification of a weak end infeed condition, the weak end infeed logic provides an output
for sending the received teleprotection signal back to the remote sending end and other
output(s) for local tripping. For terminals equipped for single- and two-pole tripping, outputs
for the faulted phase(s) are provided. Undervoltage detectors are used to detect the faulted
phase(s).

482
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 13
Scheme communication

13.3.3 Function block SEMOD53507-9 v6

ZCRWPSCH
U3P* IRVL
BLOCK TRWEI
IRVBLK TRWEIL1
IRV TRWEIL2
WEIBLK1 TRWEIL3
WEIBLK2 ECHO
VTSZ
CBOPEN
CRL

IEC06000287-2-en.vsd
IEC06000287 V2 EN-US

Figure 261: ZCRWPSCH function block

13.3.4 Signals
PID-3521-INPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 324: ZCRWPSCH Input signals

Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
IRVBLK BOOLEAN 0 Block of current reversal function
IRV BOOLEAN 0 Activation of current reversal logic
WEIBLK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of WEI logic
WEIBLK2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of WEI logic due to operation of other protections
VTSZ BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip from WEI logic through fuse-failure function
CBOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip from WEI logic by an open breaker
CRL BOOLEAN 0 POR Carrier receive for WEI logic

PID-3521-OUTPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 325: ZCRWPSCH Output signals

Name Type Description
IRVL BOOLEAN Operation of current reversal logic
TRWEI BOOLEAN Trip signal from weak end infeed logic
TRWEIL1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from weak end infeed logic in phase L1
TRWEIL2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from weak end infeed logic in phase L2
TRWEIL3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from weak end infeed logic in phase L3
ECHO BOOLEAN Carrier send by WEI logic

483
Technical manual
Section 13 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Scheme communication

13.3.5 Settings
PID-3521-SETTINGS v7

Table 326: ZCRWPSCH Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CurrRev Off - - Off Operating mode of Current Reversal
On Logic
tPickUpRev 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Pickup time for current reversal logic
tDelayRev 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.060 Time Delay to prevent Carrier send
and local trip
WEI Off - - Off Operating mode of WEI logic
Echo
Echo & Trip
tPickUpWEI 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.010 Coordination time for the WEI logic
UPP< 10 - 90 %UB 1 70 Phase to Phase voltage for detection
of fault condition
UPN< 10 - 90 %UB 1 70 Phase to Neutral voltage for detection
of fault condition

Table 327: ZCRWPSCH Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

13.3.6 Operation principle

13.3.6.1 Current reversal logic M16679-3 v9

The current reversal logic can be enabled by setting the parameter CurrRev = On. The current
reversal logic uses a reverse zone connected to the input IRV to recognize the fault on the
parallel line in any of the phases.When the reverse zone has been activated (even if only for a
short time), it prevents sending of a communication signal and tripping through the scheme
communication logic after a settable time tPickUpRev. The prevention will last for tPickUpRev
+ 10 ms + tDelayRev after the IREV reset. This makes it possible for the receive signal to reset
before the carrier-aided trip signal is activated due to the current reversal by the forward
directed zone. The logic diagram for current reversal is shown in Figure 262.

BLOCK

IRVBLK
tDelayRev
tPickUpRev 10 ms tPickUpRev IRVL
IRV AND t
t t t

CurrRev = On

IEC05000122-4-en.vsd
IEC05000122 V4 EN-US

Figure 262: Simplified logic diagram for current reversal

By connecting the output signal IRVL to input BLKCS in the ZCPSCH function, the sending of
the signal CS from the overreaching zone connected to CSOR in ZCPSCH will be blocked. By

484
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 13
Scheme communication

connecting IRVL to input BLKTR in the ZCPSCH function, the TRIP output from the ZCPSCH
function will be blocked.

The function has an internal 10 ms drop-off timer which will secure that the current reversal
logic will be activated for short input signals even if the pick-up timer is set to zero.

13.3.6.2 Weak-end infeed logic M16679-8 v10

The weak-end infeed logic (WEI) function sends back (echoes) the received signal under the
condition that no fault has been detected on the weak-end by different fault detection
elements (distance protection in forward or reverse direction).

The WEI function returns the received signal, shown in Figure 263, when:

• The setting parameter WEI is set to either Echo or Echo & Trip.
• No active signal present on the input BLOCK.
• The functional input CRL is active for a time longer than the tPickUpWei setting. This input
is usually connected to the CRL output on the scheme communication logic ZCPSCH.
• The WEI function is not blocked by the active signal connected to the WEIBLK1 functional
input or to the VTSZ functional input. The later is usually configured to the VTSZ
functional output of the fuse-failure function.
• No active signal has been present for at least 200 ms on the WEIBLK2 functional input. An
OR combination of all fault detection functions (not undervoltage) as present within the
IED is usually used for this purpose.
• The weak-end infeed logic also echoes the received permissive signal when local breaker
opens, CBOPEN prior to faults appeared at the end of line.

BLOCK
VTSZ
WEIBLK1 OR

tPickUpWEI
CRL AND 50 ms 200 ms
t AND
OR t t
ECHO
200 ms AND
WEIBLK2
t

AND

OR
1500 ms
CBOPEN
t

WEI = Echo

IEC05000123-3-en.vsd
IEC05000123 V3 EN-US

Figure 263: Simplified logic diagram for weak-end infeed logic — Echo
When an echo function is used in both IEDs (should generally be avoided), a spurious signal can
be looped round by the echo logics. To avoid a continuous lock-up of the system, the duration
of the echoed signal is limited to 200 ms.

An undervoltage criteria is used as an additional tripping criteria, when the tripping of the
local breaker is selected, setting WEI = Echo&Trip. With this setting the Echo and Trip are
working in parallel as in logic shown in Figure 264.

485
Technical manual
Section 13 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Scheme communication

BLOCK
VTSZ
WEIBLK1 OR
tPickUpWEI
CRL AND 50 ms 200 ms
t AND ECHO
OR t t AND
200 ms
WEIBLK2
t

AND

1500 ms
OR
CBOPEN
t
AND

U3P*
UL1<UPN<
UL2 < UPN<
UL3 < UPN<
UPN< 100 ms
OR
AND t
TRWEI
OR

15 ms
TRWEIL1
U3P*
AND t
UL1L2 <UPP< OR
UL2L3 < UPP<
UL3L1 < UPP<
15 ms
UPP< TRWEIL2
AND t
OR

15 ms
OR TRWEIL3
AND t

WEI = Echo & Trip

IEC00000551-TIFF V4 EN-US IEC00000551-TIFF.vsd

Figure 264: Simplified logic diagram for weak-end infeed logic — Echo&Trip

13.3.7 Technical data

M16039-1 v15

Table 328: ZCRWPSCH technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Detection level phase-to- (10-90)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
neutral voltage
Detection level phase-to- (10-90)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
phase voltage
Operate time for current (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is
reversal logic greater
Delay time for current reversal (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is
greater
Coordination time for weak- (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is
end infeed logic greater

486
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 13
Scheme communication

13.4 Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for phase

segregated communication ZC1WPSCH SEMOD155635-1 v2

13.4.1 Identification
SEMOD156467-2 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Current reversal and weak-end ZC1WPSCH - 85
infeed logic for phase segregated
communication

13.4.2 Functionality SEMOD156473-5 v3

Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for phase segregated communication (ZC1WPSCH)
function is used to prevent unwanted operations due to current reversal when using
permissive overreach protection schemes in application with parallel lines where the overreach
from the two ends overlaps on the parallel line.

The weak-end infeed logic is used in cases where the apparent power behind the protection
can be too low to activate the distance protection function. When activated, received carrier
signal together with local undervoltage criteria and no reverse zone operation gives an
instantaneous trip. The received signal is also echoed back to accelerate the sending end.

13.4.3 Function block SEMOD157994-5 v2

ZC1WPSCH
U3P* TRPWEI
BLOCK TRPWEIL1
BLKZ TRPWEIL2
CBOPEN TRPWEIL3
CRL1 IRVOP
CRL2 IRVOPL1
CRL3 IRVOPL2
IRVL1 IRVOPL3
IRVL2 ECHO
IRVL3 ECHOL1
IRVBLKL1 ECHOL2
IRVBLKL2 ECHOL3
IRVBLKL3
WEIBLK
WEIBLKL1
WEIBLKL2
WEIBLKL3
WEIBLKOP
WEIBLKO1
WEIBLKO2
WEIBLKO3

IEC06000477-2-en.vsd
IEC06000477 V2 EN-US

Figure 265: ZC1WPSCH function block

487
Technical manual
Section 13 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Scheme communication

13.4.4 Signals
PID-3524-INPUTSIGNALS v8

Table 329: ZC1WPSCH Input signals

Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Voltage
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKZ BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip from WEI logic by the fuse-failure function
CBOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip from WEI logic by an open breaker
CRL1 BOOLEAN 0 Carrier receive for WEI logic in Phase L1
CRL2 BOOLEAN 0 Carrier receive for WEI logic in Phase L2
CRL3 BOOLEAN 0 Carrier receive for WEI logic in Phase L3
IRVL1 BOOLEAN 0 Activation of current reversal logic in Phase L1
IRVL2 BOOLEAN 0 Activation of current reversal logic in Phase L2
IRVL3 BOOLEAN 0 Activation of current reversal logic in phase L3
IRVBLKL1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of current reversal function in Phase L1
IRVBLKL2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of current reversal function in Phase L2
IRVBLKL3 BOOLEAN 0 Block of current reversal function in Phase L3
WEIBLK BOOLEAN 0 Block of WEI logic
WEIBLKL1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of WEI logic in Phase L1
WEIBLKL2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of WEI logic in Phase L2
WEIBLKL3 BOOLEAN 0 Block of WEI logic in Phase L3
WEIBLKOP BOOLEAN 0 Block of WEI logic due to operation of other protection
WEIBLKO1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of WEI logic in Phase L1 due to operation of other
protection
WEIBLKO2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of WEI logic in Phase L2 due to operation of other
protections
WEIBLKO3 BOOLEAN 0 Block of WEI logic in Phase L3 due to operation of other
protections

PID-3524-OUTPUTSIGNALS v8

Table 330: ZC1WPSCH Output signals

Name Type Description
TRPWEI BOOLEAN Trip of WEI logic
TRPWEIL1 BOOLEAN Trip of WEI logic in Phase L1
TRPWEIL2 BOOLEAN Trip of WEI logic in Phase L2
TRPWEIL3 BOOLEAN Trip of WEI logic in Phase L3
IRVOP BOOLEAN Operation of current reversal logic
IRVOPL1 BOOLEAN Operation of current reversal logic in Phase L1
IRVOPL2 BOOLEAN Operation of current reversal logic in Phase L2
IRVOPL3 BOOLEAN Operation of current reversal logic in Phase L3
ECHO BOOLEAN Carrier Send by WEI logic
ECHOL1 BOOLEAN Carrier Send by WEI logic in Phase L1
ECHOL2 BOOLEAN Carrier Send by WEI logic in Phase L2
ECHOL3 BOOLEAN Carrier Send by WEI logic in Phase L3

488
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 13
Scheme communication

13.4.5 Settings
PID-3524-SETTINGS v7

Table 331: ZC1WPSCH Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
OperCurrRev Off - - Off Operating mode of Current Reversal
On Logic
tPickUpRev 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Pickup time for current reversal logic
tDelayRev 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.060 Time Delay to prevent Carrier send
and local trip
OperationWEI Off - - Off Operating mode of WEI logic
Echo
Echo & Trip
UPE< 10 - 90 %UB 1 70 Phase to Earth voltage for detection
of fault condition
UPP< 10 - 90 %UB 1 70 Phase to Phase voltage for detection
of fault condition
tPickUpWEI 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.010 Coordination time for the WEI logic

Table 332: ZC1WPSCH Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

13.4.6 Operation principle

13.4.6.1 Current reversal logic SEMOD156478-5 v3

The current reversal logic can be enabled by setting the parameter OperCurrRev = On. The
current reversal logic uses a reverse zone connected to the input IRVLx to recognize the fault
on the parallel line in any of the phases. When the reverse zone has been activated for a certain
settable time tPickUpRev, it prevents sending communication signal and activation of trip
signal for a predefined time tDelayRev. This makes it possible for the receive signal to reset
before the trip signal is activated due to the current reversal by the forward directed zone. The
logic diagram for current reversal is shown in Figure 266.

BLOCK

IRVBLKLx
tDelayRev
tPickUpRev 10 ms tPickUpRev IRVOPLx
IRVLx & t
t t t

operCurrRev=On

IEC06000474-3-en.vsd
IEC06000474 V3 EN-US

Figure 266: Simplified logic diagram for current reversal

The prevention of sending carrier send signal CSLx and activating the TRIPLx in the Scheme
communication logic for distance or Overcurrent protection (ZCPSCH) is carried out by
connecting the IRVOPLx signal to input BLOCKLx in ZCPSCH function.

489
Technical manual
Section 13 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Scheme communication

The Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for phase segregated communication
(ZC1WPSCH) function has an internal 10 ms drop-off timer which secure that the current
reversal logic will be activated for short input signals even if the pickup timer is set to zero.

13.4.6.2 Weak end infeed logic GUID-CBFC8E60-748A-49F6-AF73-563E7CFC0653 v3

The WEI function sends back (echoes) the received carrier signal under the condition that no
fault has been detected at the weak end by different fault detection elements (distance
protection in forward and reverse direction).

BLOCK
BLKZ
WEIBLKLx 1 ECHOLx-contd
&
tPickUpWEI
CRLx & 50 ms 200 ms
t &
1 t t
ECHOLx
200 ms &
WEIBLKOx
t

&

1
1500 ms
CBOPEN
t

OperationWEI=Echo

IEC07000085-3-en.vsd
IEC07000085 V3 EN-US

Figure 267: Simplified logic for weak-end infeed logic — Echo

The WEI function returns the received carrier signal, shown in Figure 267, when:

• No active signal present on the input BLOCK.

• The input CRLx is active. This input is usually connected to the CRLx output on the scheme
communication logic for distance or Overcurrent protection (ZCPSCH).
• The WEI function is not blocked by the active signal connected to the WEIBLKLx input or to
the BLKZ input. The latter is usually configured to the STGEN output of the fuse-failure
function.
• No active signal has been present for at least 200 ms on the WEIBLKOx input. An OR
combination of all fault detection functions (not undervoltage) as present within the IED
is usually used for this purpose.
• The weak-end infeed logic also echoes the received permissive signal when local breaker
opens, CBOPEN prior to faults appeared at the end of line.

When an echo function is used in both the IEDs on the protected line (should generally be
avoided), a spurious signal can be looped round by the echo logics. To avoid a continuous lock-
up of the system, the duration of the echoed signal is limited to 200 ms.

An undervoltage criteria is used as an additional tripping criteria when the tripping of the local
breaker is selected. Setting OperationWEI = Echo &Trip together with the WEI function and
ECHOLx, trip signal TRPWEIx has been issued by the echo and trip logic which is described in
Figure 268.

490
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 13
Scheme communication

ECHOLx- contd

CBOPEN

U3P*
100 ms
=1
& t
Undervoltage TRPWEI
detection =1
UPE<

15 ms
UPP< TRPWEI1
& t

OperationWEI= Echo & Trip

15 ms
TRPWEI2
& t

15 ms
TRPWEI3
& t

IEC13000278-1-en.vsd
IEC13000278 V1 EN-US

Figure 268: Simplified logic diagram for weak-end infeed logic – Echo & Trip

13.4.7 Technical data

SEMOD166938-2 v6

Table 333: ZC1WPSCH technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Detection level phase to (10-90)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
neutral voltage
Detection level phase to (10-90)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
phase voltage
Reset ratio <105% at (20-90)% of UBase -
Operate time for current (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is
reversal greater
Delay time for current reversal (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is
greater
Coordination time for weak- (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is
end infeed logic greater

13.5 Local acceleration logic ZCLCPSCH SEMOD52894-1 v4

13.5.1 Identification
M14860-1 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Local acceleration logic ZCLCPSCH - -

13.5.2 Functionality M13823-3 v6

To achieve fast clearing of faults on the whole line, when no communication channel is
available, local acceleration logic ZCLCPSCH can be used. This logic enables fast fault clearing
and re-closing during certain conditions, but naturally, it can not fully replace a communication
channel.

The logic can be controlled either by the autorecloser (zone extension) or by the loss-of-load
current (loss-of-load acceleration).

491
Technical manual
Section 13 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Scheme communication

13.5.3 Function block M13816-3 v4

ZCLCPSCH
I3P* TRZE
BLOCK TRLL
ARREADY
NDST
EXACC
BC
LLACC

IEC13000307-1-en.vsd
IEC13000307 V1 EN-US

Figure 269: ZCLCPSCH function block

13.5.4 Signals
PID-3511-INPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 334: ZCLCPSCH Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
ARREADY BOOLEAN 0 Autoreclosure ready, releases function used for fast trip
NDST BOOLEAN 0 Non directional criteria used to prevent instantaneous trip
EXACC BOOLEAN 0 Connected to function used for tripping at zone extension
BC BOOLEAN 0 Breaker Close
LLACC BOOLEAN 0 Connected to function used for tripping at loss of load

PID-3511-OUTPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 335: ZCLCPSCH Output signals

Name Type Description
TRZE BOOLEAN Trip by zone extension
TRLL BOOLEAN Trip by loss of load

13.5.5 Settings
PID-3511-SETTINGS v6

Table 336: ZCLCPSCH Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
LoadCurr 1 - 100 %IB 1 10 Load current before disturbance in %
of IBase
LossOfLoad Off - - Off Enable/Disable operation of Loss of
On load.
ZoneExtension Off - - Off Enable/Disable operation of Zone
On extension
MinCurr 1 - 100 %IB 1 5 Lev taken as curr loss due to remote
CB trip in % of IBase
Table continues on next page

492
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 13
Scheme communication

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tLowCurr 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay on pick-up for MINCURR
value
tLoadOn 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay on pick-up for load current
release
tLoadOff 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.300 Time delay on drop off for load
current release

Table 337: ZCLCPSCH Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

13.5.6 Operation principle

13.5.6.1 Zone extension M13819-3 v2

The overreaching zone is connected to the input EXACC. For this reason, configure the
ARREADY functional input to a READY functional output of a used autoreclosing function or via
the selected binary input to an external autoreclosing device, see figure 270.

This will allow the overreaching zone to trip instantaneously.

IEC05000157 V1 EN-US

Figure 270: Simplified logic diagram for local acceleration logic

After the autorecloser initiates the close command and remains in the reclaim state, there will
be no ARREADY signal, and the protection will trip normally with step distance time functions.

In case of a fault on the adjacent line within the overreaching zone range, an unwanted
autoreclosing cycle will occur. The step distance function at the reclosing attempt will prevent
an unwanted retrip when the breaker is reclosed.

On the other hand, at a persistent line fault on line section not covered by instantaneous zone
(normally zone 1) only the first trip will be "instantaneous".

The function will be blocked if the input BLOCK is activated (common with loss-of-load
acceleration).

13.5.6.2 Loss-of-Load acceleration M13819-9 v5

When the "acceleration" is controlled by a loss-of-load, the overreaching zone used for
"acceleration" connected to input LLACC is not allowed to trip "instantaneously" during normal

493
Technical manual
Section 13 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Scheme communication

non-fault system conditions. When all three-phase currents have been above the set value
MinCurr for more than setting tLowCurr, an overreaching zone will be allowed to trip
"instantaneously" during a fault condition when one or two of the phase currents will become
low due to a three-phase trip at the opposite IED, see figure 271. The current measurement is
performed internally and the internal STILL signal becomes logical one under the described
conditions. The load current in a healthy phase is in this way used to indicate the tripping at
the opposite IED. Note that this function will not operate in case of three-phase faults,
because none of the phase currents will be low when the opposite IED is tripped.

IEC05000158 V1 EN-US

Figure 271: Loss-of-load acceleration - simplified logic diagram

Breaker closing signals can if decided be connected to block the function during normal
closing.
M13819-14 v2

13.6 Direct transfer trip logic GUID-F6AE5927-D93F-4CAD-A6C6-445720C806D8 v1

13.6.1 Introduction GUID-40B4D8B0-2B57-4E0B-BC85-CB611E8EFBFE v1

Direct transfer trip (DTT) logic is used together with Line distance protection function or other
type of line protection. One typical example for use of transfer trip is given below. When Line
distance protection function is extended to cover power lines feeding the transformer directly
and there is a fault in transformer differential area, the transformer differential protection
operates faster than line protection. A trip command is sent to the remote end of the line. On
remote end, before sending a trip command to the circuit breaker, the certainty of a fault
condition is ensured by checking local criterion in DTT logic.

CR CS TRIP
TRIP
DTT IDIFF>

Xsource VT1

~ CT1
Line
CT2 CT3
Source Power Load
Transformer

en03000120.vsd
IEC03000120 V1 EN-US

Figure 272: Direct transfer trip

On receiving the CR signal from remote end, Direct transfer trip logic needs to check
additional local criterion, before sending the trip signal to circuit breaker.

DTT logic can be handled in the following separate application functions:

494
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 13
Scheme communication

1. Low active power and power factor protection LAPPGAPC

2. Sudden change in current variation SCCVPTOC
3. Compensated over and undervoltage protection COUVGAPC
4. Carrier receive logic LCCRPTRC
5. Zero sequence overvoltage protection LCZSPTOV
6. Negative sequence overvoltage protection LCNSPTOV
7. Zero sequence overcurrent protection LCZSPTOC
8. Negative sequence overcurrent protection LCNSPTOC
9. Three-phase overcurrent LCP3PTOC
10. Three-phase undercurrent LCP3PTUC

A composite scheme of these functions must be configured in PCM600 configuration tool, to

make a complete DTT scheme as shown in Figure 273. The different individual local criteria
functions can also be used as direct tripping protections, normally with a time delay.

CR1

CR2

Impedance protection
Low impedance protection

Breaker Failure Backup trip of breaker failure

protection

Three phase overcurrent

CarrierReceiveLogic

LCCRPTRC
Three phase undercurrent
U3P
CR1

CB Trip output
CR2
Zero sequence overcurrent
protection

LocalCheck
Analog input

Negative sequence overcurrent

protection OR

Zero sequence overvoltage

protection
I3P

Negative sequence overvoltage

protection

Compensated over and

undervoltage protection

Low active power and power

factor protection

Sudden change in current

variation

IEC09000773-1-en.vsd
IEC09000773 V1 EN-US

Figure 273: Direct transfer trip scheme

13.6.2 Low active power and power factor protection LAPPGAPC GUID-585236C8-583C-4415-9820-A1DD038EA995 v1

495
Technical manual
Section 13 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Scheme communication

13.6.2.1 Identification
GUID-6F3FADD8-8974-4874-8A43-642C1D540D3E v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Low active power and power factor LAPPGAPC - 37_55
protection

13.6.2.2 Functionality GUID-25A2A94F-09FE-4552-89F8-CF22632A7A0D v2

Low active power and power factor protection (LAPPGAPC) function measures power flow. It
can be used for protection and monitoring of:

• phase wise low active power

• phase wise low power factor
• phase wise reactive power and apparent power as service values

Following features are available:

• Definite time stage for low active power protection

• Definite time stage for low power factor protection
• Individual enabling of Low active power and Low power factor functions
• Low active power trip with 2 selection modes '1 out of 3' and '2 out of 3'
• Phase wise calculated values of apparent power, reactive power, active power and power
factor are available as service values
• Insensitive to small variations in voltage and current

13.6.2.3 Function block GUID-CB3033A2-D2AD-42CE-AAAE-1918A8A2861C v1

LAPPGAPC
I3P* TRLAP
U3P* TRLPF
BLOCK TRLPFL1
BLKTR TRLPFL2
TRLPFL3
STLAP
STLPF
STLAPL1
STLAPL2
STLAPL3
STLPFL1
STLPFL2
STLPFL3

IEC09000763-1-en.vsd
IEC09000763 V1 EN-US

Figure 274: LAPPGAPC function block

496
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 13
Scheme communication

13.6.2.4 Signals
PID-3520-INPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 338: LAPPGAPC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block all trip signals of the funtction

PID-3520-OUTPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 339: LAPPGAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRLAP BOOLEAN Trip low active power
TRLPF BOOLEAN Trip low power factor
TRLPFL1 BOOLEAN Trip low power factor phase 1
TRLPFL2 BOOLEAN Trip low power factor phase 2
TRLPFL3 BOOLEAN Trip low power factor phase 3
STLAP BOOLEAN Start low active power
STLPF BOOLEAN Start low power factor
STLAPL1 BOOLEAN Start low active power phase 1
STLAPL2 BOOLEAN Start low active power phase 2
STLAPL3 BOOLEAN Start low active power phase 3
STLPFL1 BOOLEAN Start low power factor phase 1
STLPFL2 BOOLEAN Start low power factor phase 2
STLPFL3 BOOLEAN Start low power factor phase 3

13.6.2.5 Settings
PID-3520-SETTINGS v5

Table 340: LAPPGAPC Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
OperationLAP Off - - Off Operation low active power Off/On
On
OpMode 2 out of 3 - - 2 out of 3 Trip mode low active power 2out of 3
1 out of 3 or 1 out of 3
LAP< 2.0 - 100.0 %SB 0.1 5.0 3 Phase start value for low active
power in % of SBase
tOpLAP 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.010 Time delay to operate for low active
power
Table continues on next page

497
Technical manual
Section 13 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Scheme communication

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

OperationLPF Off - - Off Operation low power factor Off/On
On
LPF< 0.00 - 1.00 - 0.01 0.40 Start value for low power factor
tOpLPF 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.010 Time delay to operate for low power
factor

Table 341: LAPPGAPC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
UGenZeroDb 0.0 - 100.0 %UB 0.1 30.0 Zero point Clamping in % of UBase
IGenZeroDb 0.0 - 100.0 %IB 0.1 3.0 Zero point clamping in % of IBase

Table 342: LAPPGAPC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

13.6.2.6 Monitored data

PID-3520-MONITOREDDATA v5

Table 343: LAPPGAPC Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
SL1 REAL - MVA Apparent power for phase 1
SL2 REAL - MVA Apparent power for phase 2
SL3 REAL - MVA Apparent power for phase 3
PL1 REAL - MW Active power for phase 1
PL2 REAL - MW Active power for phase 2
PL3 REAL - MW Active power for phase 3
QL1 REAL - MVAr Reactive power for phase 1
QL2 REAL - MVAr Reactive power for phase 2
QL3 REAL - MVAr Reactive power for phase 3
PFL1 REAL - - Power factor phase 1
PFL2 REAL - - Power factor phase 2
PFL3 REAL - - Power factor phase 3

13.6.2.7 Operation principle GUID-FF753775-9D02-4CC6-AD0C-7ED1693F6372 v2

Low active power and low power factor protection (LAPPGAPC) calculates power and power
factor from voltage and current values. Trip signal must be set independently for low active
power and low power factor condition after definite time delay.

Active power calculation

LAPPGAPC calculates single phase complex power of L1, L2 and L3 loop by following equations.
From this complex apparent power, the real and imaginary parts can be respective active and
reactive power values of respective phases. All the apparent power values given out of the

498
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 13
Scheme communication

function are absolute values. The active power is the real part of the calculated apparent
power.

S L1 = U L1 × I L1
EQUATION2243 V1 EN-US (Equation 68)

S L2 = U L2 × IL2
EQUATION2244 V1 EN-US (Equation 69)

S L3 = U L3 × I L3
EQUATION2245 V1 EN-US (Equation 70)

Power factor calculation

Power factor is a ratio of active power to apparent power. The function calculates power
factor from the calculated values of active power and apparent power of L1, L2 and L3 loop by
following equation:

PL1
pf L1 =
S L1
EQUATION2246 V1 EN-US (Equation 71)

PL 2
pf L 2 =
SL2
EQUATION2247 V1 EN-US (Equation 72)

PL 3
pf L 3 =
SL3
EQUATION2248 V1 EN-US (Equation 73)

Active power trip mode

The low active power functionality has a trip mode setting. According to this setting, trip is
activated if the low active power is detected in one out of three phases or two out of three
phases respectively. These two modes are user settable through setting OpMode.

Zero clamping filtering

The function will do zero clamping to disable the calculation if the current and voltage values
of a particular phase are less than 30% of UBase for voltage and 3% of IBase for current value.

Calculation

The active power setting value used for detection of under power must be given as a three-
phase value. The design starts to calculate internally the per phase value from this setting and
detect phase wise under power condition individually. The power factor start value is common
for all the three phases.

Phase wise analog values apparent power, active power, reactive power and power factor are
available as service values.

499
Technical manual
Section 13 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Scheme communication

STLAPLx

P < LAP<
I3P TRLAP
t
Calculation P and
pf
U3P

STLPFLx

pf < pf<
TRLPFLx
t

IEC10000011-1-en.vsd
IEC10000011 V1 EN-US

Figure 275: Logic diagram of Low active power and low power factor protection
(LAPPGAPC)

13.6.2.8 Technical data

GUID-B5714FAE-A87D-4C2D-A167-6CB3522CE1D5 v4

Table 344: LAPPGAPC technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, low active power (2.0-100.0)% of SBase ±1.0% of Sr

Reset ratio, low active power <105% -

Operate value, low power factor 0.00-1.00 ±0.02
Independent time delay to operate (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is
for low active power at 1.2 to 0.8 x greater
Pset

Independent time delay to operate (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is

for low power factor at 1.2 to 0.8 x greater
PFset

Critical impulse time, low active 10 ms typically at 1.2 to 0.8 x Pset -

power
Impulse margin time, low active 10 ms typically -
power

13.6.3 Compensated over and undervoltage protection COUVGAPC GUID-41C1AD2A-3E57-40A9-9039-F159A3CE3DF8 v1

13.6.3.1 Identification
GUID-F5F76C4D-DD25-4695-9FF1-6B45C696CC5E v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Compensated over and undervoltage COUVGAPC - 59_27
protection

500
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 13
Scheme communication

13.6.3.2 Functionality GUID-229EB419-0903-46FA-9192-BBB35725C841 v2

Compensated over and undervoltage protection (COUVGAPC) function calculates the remote
end voltage of the transmission line utilizing local measured voltage, current and with the help
of transmission line parameters, that is, line resistance, reactance, capacitance and local shunt
reactor. For protection of long transmission line for in zone faults, COUVGAPCcan be
incorporated with local criteria within direct transfer trip logic to ensure tripping of the line
only under abnormal conditions.

13.6.3.3 Function block GUID-7A5D719C-3C29-43A8-B213-9FDABB4B05E6 v1

COUVGAPC
I3P* TRUV
U3P* TROV
BLOCK TRUVL1
BLKTR TRUVL2
SWIPOS TRUVL3
TROVL1
TROVL2
TROVL3
STUV
STOV
STUVL1
STUVL2
STUVL3
STOVL1
STOVL2
STOVL3

IEC09000764-1-en.vsd
IEC09000764 V1 EN-US

Figure 276: COUVGAPC function block

13.6.3.4 Signals
PID-3480-INPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 345: COUVGAPC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of the function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all operate outputs
SWIPOS BOOLEAN 1 Local shunt reactor connected or not

PID-3480-OUTPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 346: COUVGAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRUV BOOLEAN Common trip signal for compensated under voltage
TROV BOOLEAN Common trip signal for compensated over voltage
TRUVL1 BOOLEAN Trip signal for compensated under voltage of phase 1
TRUVL2 BOOLEAN Trip signal for compensated under voltage of phase 2
TRUVL3 BOOLEAN Trip signal for compensated under voltage of phase 3
Table continues on next page

501
Technical manual
Section 13 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Scheme communication

Name Type Description

TROVL1 BOOLEAN Trip signal for compensated over voltage of phase 1
TROVL2 BOOLEAN Trip signal for compensated over voltage of phase 2
TROVL3 BOOLEAN Trip signal for compensated over voltage of phase 3
STUV BOOLEAN Common start signal for compensated under voltage
STOV BOOLEAN Common start signal for compensated over voltage
STUVL1 BOOLEAN Start signal for compensated under voltage of phase 1
STUVL2 BOOLEAN Start signal for compensated under voltage of phase 2
STUVL3 BOOLEAN Start signal for compensated under voltage of phase 3
STOVL1 BOOLEAN Start signal for compensated over voltage of phase 1
STOVL2 BOOLEAN Start signal for compensated over voltage of phase 2
STOVL3 BOOLEAN Start signal for compensated over voltage of phase 3

13.6.3.5 Settings
PID-3480-SETTINGS v6

Table 347: COUVGAPC Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
OperationUV Off - - On Operation compensated under
On voltage Off/On
U< 1 - 100 %UB 1 70 Compensated under voltage level in %
of UBase
tUV 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Time delay to trip under voltage
OperationOV Off - - On Operation compensated over voltage
On Off/On
U> 1 - 200 %UB 1 120 Compensated over voltage level in %
of UBase
tOV 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Time delay to trip over voltage

Table 348: COUVGAPC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
HystAbs 0.0 - 50.0 %UB 0.1 0.5 Hysteresis absolute for compensated
over/under voltage in % of UBase

Table 349: COUVGAPC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups
R1 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm 0.01 5.00 Positive sequence resistance per
phase for the line in ohm
X1 0.01 - 3000.00 Ohm 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactance per
phase for the line in ohm
Table continues on next page

502
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 13
Scheme communication

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Xc 1.00 - 10000.00 Ohm 0.01 1000.00 Half of equivalent capacitive
reactance per phase in ohm
EnShuntReactor Off - - On Enable setting if shunt reactor
On connected in line
Xsh 1.00 - 10000.00 Ohm 0.01 1500.00 Per phase reactance of local Shunt
Reactor in ohm

13.6.3.6 Monitored data

PID-3480-MONITOREDDATA v6

Table 350: COUVGAPC Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
CMPUL1 REAL - kV Compensated voltage of phase 1
CMPUL2 REAL - kV Compensated voltage of phase 2
CMPUL3 REAL - kV Compensated voltage of phase 3

13.6.3.7 Operation principle GUID-F0E1BCC7-2010-4B48-9A6F-9A2D92107AD8 v2

Compensated over and undervoltage protection (COUVGAPC) function is phase segregated

and mainly used for local criteria check in Direct transfer trip. The principle is to utilize local
measured voltage and current to calculate the voltage at the remote end of the line.

The main measured inputs to COUVGAPC are three-phase voltage and current signals.
COUVGAPCuses line resistance, reactance and line charging capacitance to calculate the
remote end voltage. It also takes the input for local shunt reactor, connected at the line side of
the line breaker, reactance value. The calculated voltage is referred to as compensated voltage.

STOV

TROV
Over voltage

U3P STOVLx
comparator
I3P TRIPOVLx
t
Compensated
SWIPOS voltage calculation STUVLx
EnShuntReactor &
TRIPUVLx
Under voltage t
TRUV
comparator
STUV

IEC09000782-1-en.vsd
IEC09000782 V1 EN-US

Figure 277: Logic diagram of Compensated over and undervoltage protection

(COUVGAPC)
The formula used for calculation of compensated voltage is as follows:

Uremote = Ulocal – (Ilocal – j x Ulocal/Xsr + j x Ulocal/Xcp) x Zsetting

503
Technical manual
Section 13 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Scheme communication

Where:
Uremote calculated voltage at the opposite side of line

Ulocal measured local voltage

Ilocal measured local current

Xsr reactance of local line connected shunt reactor, if applicable

Xcp half of equivalent reactance of line distributed capacitor

Above calculated compensated voltage is compared to preset over and under voltage levels
set as percentage of base voltage UBase. If the calculated voltage exceeds setting in any
phase, COUVGAPC generates start and trip signals for that phase and common start and trip
signals. Independent enabling for overvoltage and undervoltage are available with definite
time delay. If shunt reactor is not present in the system, COUVGAPC does not include any
effect of shunt reactor while calculating the compensated voltage. This shunt reactor
calculation is enabled when both input SWIPOS is 1 and setting parameter EnShuntReactor is
On. Run time change in EnShuntReactor setting parameter restarts the IED and SWIPOS input
signal is used to enable/disable the shunt reactor calculations.

Calculations

• All resistance and reactance considered in compensated voltage calculation are primary
side values.
• Calculation of shunt reactor reactance in ohms from given MVAr rating:

2
UN
X sr =
QN
EQUATION2249 V1 EN-US (Equation 74)

Where:
UN line to line voltage

QN is total three phase MVAr of shunt reactor

• If total line capacitance (Ctotal) is known then half line capacitive reactance:

2
X cp =
wCtotal
EQUATION2250 V1 EN-US (Equation 75)

and if total line capacitive reactance XcTotal is known:

X cp = 2 X cTotal
EQUATION2251 V1 EN-US (Equation 76)

Compensated voltage for all three phases is available as service values.

504
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 13
Scheme communication

13.6.3.8 Technical data

GUID-D9EADF1B-5FC7-4FDB-BF38-95BDBC4D7C3D v4

Table 351: COUVGAPC technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, undervoltage (1-100)% of UBase ±0,5% of Ur

Absolute hysteresis (0.00–50.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur

±0.5% of U at U > Ur

Critical impulse time, 10 ms typically at 1.2 to 0.8x Uset -

undervoltage
Impulse margin time, 15 ms typically -
undervoltage
Operate value, overvoltage (1-200)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U≤Ur
± 0.5% of U at U>Ur

Critical impulse time, 10 ms typically at 0.8 to 1.2 x Uset -

overvoltage
Impulse margin time, 15 ms typically -
overvoltage
Independent time delay for (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is
undervoltage functionality at greater
1.2 to 0.8 x Uset

Independent time delay for (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is

overvoltage functionality at 0.8 greater
to 1.2 x Uset

13.6.4 Sudden change in current variation SCCVPTOC GUID-61E9C823-5313-4682-93CB-2BA6AC0A0640 v1

13.6.4.1 Identification
GUID-3B6E6472-8153-4D8F-874B-DF68891296C8 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Sudden change in current variation SCCVPTOC - 51

13.6.4.2 Functionality GUID-413851A9-5EB7-4C48-8F5D-E30E470EFFAF v2

Sudden change in current variation (SCCVPTOC) function is a fast way of finding any
abnormality in line currents. When there is a fault in the system, the current changes faster
than the voltage. SCCVPTOC finds abnormal condition based on phase-to-phase current
variation. The main application is as a local criterion to increase security when transfer trips
are used.

505
Technical manual
Section 13 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Scheme communication

13.6.4.3 Function block GUID-98592177-56F1-400E-AE03-02D33C12B94E v1

SCCVPTOC
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
BLKTR

IEC09000765-1-en.vsd
IEC09000765 V1 EN-US

Figure 278: SCCVPTOC function block

13.6.4.4 Signals
PID-3585-INPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 352: SCCVPTOC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase to phase current samples group
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block trip signals

PID-3585-OUTPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 353: SCCVPTOC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal
START BOOLEAN Common start signal

13.6.4.5 Settings
PID-3585-SETTINGS v5

Table 354: SCCVPTOC Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
I> 5 - 100 %IB 1 20 Fixed threshold setting in % of IBase
tHold 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.500 Hold time for operate signals

Table 355: SCCVPTOC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tDelay 0.000 - 0.005 s 0.001 0.002 Time delay for start and trip signals

Table 356: SCCVPTOC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

506
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 13
Scheme communication

13.6.4.6 Operation principle GUID-53346F67-4CF8-4E74-83AD-5DF32DECAA0A v2

Sudden change in current variation (SCCVPTOC) function calculates the variation in phase-to-
phase current and gives the START output when this variation crosses the sum of start level
and float threshold for a time of tDelay. The variation is calculated for all the three phase-to-
phase currents.

The variation in the current is calculated using the following equation:

Di = i ( t ) - 2 × i ( t - T ) + i ( t - 2T )
EQUATION2252 V1 EN-US

Where:
i(t) Amplitude of the current at the present instant
i(t-T) Amplitude of the current at the instant exactly one cycle time before
i(t-2T) Amplitude of the current at the instant exactly two cycle time before

Criteria:

Di > i (1.8 × DIT + I >)

EQUATION2253 V1 EN-US (Equation 77)

I>: start level

It is the full-circle integral of the phase-to-phase current variation

1 2T -1
DIT = å Di ( t - n )
T n =T
EQUATION2254 V1 EN-US (Equation 78)

T: the count of the sampling value in one cycle

If the above criteria becomes true for a time of tDelay, then respective START output is
activated provided the BLOCK input is false, and the respective TRIP outputs is activated for
the time of tHold provided the BLKTR and BLOCK input is false.

13.6.4.7 Technical data

GUID-4BF21D95-4517-424E-BC23-6156EA0E253C v4

Table 357: SCCVPTOC technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, overcurrent (5-100)% of IBase ±2.0% of Ir

Hold time for operate signal at 0 to (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is

2 x Iset greater

13.6.5 Carrier receive logic LCCRPTRC GUID-13BF45AF-B04C-4C6D-B59D-79A51241C449 v1

507
Technical manual
Section 13 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Scheme communication

13.6.5.1 Identification
GUID-D420E532-37DC-442F-B847-8F73EE8527A7 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Carrier receive logic LCCRPTRC - 94

13.6.5.2 Functionality GUID-79AB9B9E-9200-44D7-B4EE-57C9E7BB74A9 v2

In Direct transfer trip (DTT) scheme, the received CR signal gives the trip to the circuit breaker
after checking certain local criteria functions in order to increase the security of the overall
tripping functionality. Carrier receive logic (LCCRPTRC) function gives final trip output of the
DTT scheme.

Features:

• Carrier redundancy to ensure security in DTT scheme

• Blocking function output on CR Channel Error
• Phase wise trip outputs

13.6.5.3 Function block GUID-B90E2B88-8C17-4B9C-8BC0-E3194559A4D1 v1

LCCRPTRC
BLOCK TRIP
LOCTR TRL1
LOCTRL1 TRL2
LOCTRL2 TRL3
LOCTRL3
CHERR1
CHERR2
CR1
CR2

IEC09000766-1-en.vsd
IEC09000766 V1 EN-US

Figure 279: LCCRPTRC function block

13.6.5.4 Signals
PID-3481-INPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 358: LCCRPTRC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
LOCTR BOOLEAN 0 Local common trip signal coming from DTT
LOCTRL1 BOOLEAN 0 Local trip signal for phase 1 coming from DTT
LOCTRL2 BOOLEAN 0 Local trip signal for phase 2 coming from DTT
LOCTRL3 BOOLEAN 0 Local trip signal for phase 3 coming from DTT
CHERR1 BOOLEAN 0 Channel error indication flag for carrier receive 1
CHERR2 BOOLEAN 0 Channel error indication flag for carrier receive 2
CR1 BOOLEAN 0 Carrier receive 1
CR2 BOOLEAN 0 Carrier receive 2

508
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 13
Scheme communication

PID-3481-OUTPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 359: LCCRPTRC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip
TRL1 BOOLEAN Trip phase 1
TRL2 BOOLEAN Trip phase 2
TRL3 BOOLEAN Trip phase 3

13.6.5.5 Settings
PID-3481-SETTINGS v4

Table 360: LCCRPTRC Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
ChMode 2 Out Of 2 - - 2 Out Of 2 Setting to select 1/2 or 2/2 mode
1 Out Of 2
tOperate 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Time delay to operate

13.6.5.6 Operation principle GUID-203F41ED-D08B-41E1-AF54-DFFBECCE1F06 v2

The functionality of the Carrier receive logic (LCCRPTRC) is to release the TRIP signal for DTT
scheme based on the LOCTRL1, LOCTRL2, LOCTRL3, and LOCTR signals coming from local
criterion, and the Carrier receive signals CR1 and CR2. There are two modes of operation 1 out
of 2 and 2 out of 2. In the case of the 1 out of 2 mode if any one of the carrier signal is received
then the trip signals will be released, and in 2 out of 2 mode both the CRs should be high to
release trip signal. If any one of the channel error signals is high in 2 out of 2 mode, then logic
automatically switches to 1 out of 2 mode after a time delay of 200 ms. After switching to 1/2
mode under channel error condition and if channel error gets cleared the mode will switch
back only after a time delay of 200 ms.

If the input channel error signal is high then the respective carrier receive signal will be
blocked.

The complete function can be blocked by setting the BLOCK input high.

13.6.5.7 Technical data

GUID-C99E063D-B377-40D5-8481-9F46D4166AED v3

Table 361: LCCRPTRC technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operation mode 1 Out Of 2 -
2 Out Of 2
Independent time delay (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is
greater

13.6.6 Negative sequence overvoltage protection LCNSPTOV GUID-F15A69BA-58B1-4F3E-AE12-11FF71B96021 v1

509
Technical manual
Section 13 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Scheme communication

13.6.6.1 Identification
GUID-C0F8D64B-FBCD-4115-9A5A-23B252CB7E45 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Negative sequence overvoltage LCNSPTOV - 47
protection

13.6.6.2 Functionality GUID-C5CBB6A2-780D-4008-98E3-455A404D32CB v2

Negative sequence components are present in all types of fault condition. Negative sequence
voltage and current get high values during unsymmetrical faults.

13.6.6.3 Function block GUID-F0F40881-AF96-45C4-8157-7EE6DE60C23A v1

LCNSPTOV
U3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
BLKTR

IEC09000767-1-en.vsd
IEC09000767 V1 EN-US

Figure 280: LCNSPTOV Function block

13.6.6.4 Signals
PID-3618-INPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 362: LCNSPTOV Input signals

Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block overall function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block trip output

PID-3618-OUTPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 363: LCNSPTOV Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip signal for negative sequence over voltage
START BOOLEAN Start signal for negative sequence over voltage

13.6.6.5 Settings
PID-3618-SETTINGS v5

Table 364: LCNSPTOV Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
U2> 1 - 200 %UB 1 10 Negative sequence over voltage start
value in % of UBase
tU2 0.000 - 120.000 s 0.001 2.000 Time delay to operate

510
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 13
Scheme communication

Table 365: LCNSPTOV Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

13.6.6.6 Monitored data

PID-3618-MONITOREDDATA v5

Table 366: LCNSPTOV Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
U2 REAL - kV Neagative sequence voltage value

13.6.6.7 Operation principle GUID-ADD0FC96-B81F-458D-AEA3-94C374128FB0 v2

Negative sequence over voltage protection (LCNSPTOV) is a definite time stage comparator
function. The negative sequence input voltage from the SMAI block is connected as input to
the function through a group connection U3P in PCM600. This voltage is compared against the
preset value and a start signal will be set high if the input negative sequence voltage is greater
than the preset value U2>. Trip signal will be set high after a time delay setting of tU2. There is
a BLOCK input which will block the complete function. BLKTR will block the trip output. The
negative sequence voltage is also available as service value output U2.

13.6.6.8 Technical data

GUID-122A206E-27D2-4D15-AD5A-86B68F1ED559 v4

Table 367: LCNSPTOV technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, negative sequence (1-200)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U≤Ur
overvoltage ±0.5% of U at U>Ur

Reset ratio, negative sequence >95% at (10–200)% of UBase -

overvoltage
Operate time, start at 0 to 2 x Min. = 15 ms -
Uset Max. = 30 ms

Reset time, start at 2 to 0 x Uset Min. = 15 ms -

Max. = 30 ms
Critical impulse time, negative 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset -
sequence overvoltage
Impulse margin time, negative 15 ms typically -
sequence overvoltage
Independent time delay to (0.000-120.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is
operate at 0 to 1.2 x Uset greater

13.6.7 Zero sequence overvoltage protection LCZSPTOV GUID-5179ADF5-7A85-4B95-972F-F55566B46709 v1

511
Technical manual
Section 13 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Scheme communication

13.6.7.1 Identification
GUID-0D2A007F-167A-4534-A41B-22C107FEAC46 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Zero sequence overvoltage LCZSPTOV - 59N
protection

13.6.7.2 Functionality GUID-4CF3EC6A-D286-4808-929B-C9302418E4ED v2

Zero sequence components are present in all abnormal conditions involving earth. They can
reach considerably high values during earth faults.

13.6.7.3 Function block GUID-7764289A-A859-4C02-A9A1-B8F963F65138 v1

LCZSPTOV
U3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
BLKTR

IEC09000768-1-en.vsd
IEC09000768 V1 EN-US

Figure 281: LCZSPTOV function block

13.6.7.4 Signals
PID-3631-INPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 368: LCZSPTOV Input signals

Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block overall function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block TRIP output

PID-3631-OUTPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 369: LCZSPTOV Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN TRIP signal for zero sequence over voltage protection
START BOOLEAN Start signal for zero sequence over voltage protection

13.6.7.5 Settings
PID-3631-SETTINGS v5

Table 370: LCZSPTOV Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
3U0> 1 - 200 %UB 1 10 Zero sequence voltage start value in %
of UBase
t3U0 0.000 - 120.000 s 0.001 2.000 Time delay to operate

512
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 13
Scheme communication

Table 371: LCZSPTOV Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

13.6.7.6 Monitored data

PID-3631-MONITOREDDATA v5

Table 372: LCZSPTOV Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
3U0 REAL - kV Zero sequence voltage value

13.6.7.7 Operation principle GUID-901A8A6C-A68B-47CB-9C41-BB0E0BDF7EF8 v2

Zero sequence over voltage protection (LCZSPTOV) is a definite time stage comparator
function. The zero sequence input voltage from the SMAI block is connected as input to the
function through a group connection U3P in PCM600. This voltage is compared against the
preset value and a start signal will be set high if the input zero sequence voltage is greater
than the preset value 3U0>. Trip signal will be set high after a time delay setting of t3U0.
BLOCK input will block the complete function. BLKTR will block the trip output. The zero
sequence voltage will be available as service value output as 3U0.

13.6.7.8 Technical data

GUID-7A8E7F49-F079-42A0-8685-20288FAD5982 v4

Table 373: LCZSPTOV technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, zero sequence (1-200)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur
overvoltage ±0.5% of U at U > Ur

Reset ratio, zero sequence >95% at (10–200)% of UBase -

overvoltage
Operate time, start at 0 to 2 x Uset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Reset time, start at 2 to 0 x Uset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Critical impulse time, zero sequence 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset -
overvoltage
Impulse margin time, zero sequence 15 ms typically -
overvoltage
Independent time delay to operate (0.000-120.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is
at 0 to 1.2 x Uset greater

13.6.8 Negative sequence overcurrent protection LCNSPTOC GUID-0593B07A-4F76-4F92-92E9-EB30FC836ABE v1

513
Technical manual
Section 13 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Scheme communication

13.6.8.1 Identification
GUID-EDC20AC7-540D-43DE-8ABF-7A463E115950 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Negative sequence overcurrent LCNSPTOC - 46
protection

13.6.8.2 Functionality GUID-C4F99554-88BC-4F11-9EFE-91BCA6ED1261 v2

Negative sequence components are present in all types of fault condition. They can reach
considerably high values during abnormal operation.

13.6.8.3 Function block GUID-199CCB09-A4D0-4147-9BBD-5D1ADF85CA2F v1

LCNSPTOC
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
BLKTR

IEC09000769-1-en.vsd
IEC09000769 V1 EN-US

Figure 282: LCNSPTOC Function block

13.6.8.4 Signals
PID-3617-INPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 374: LCNSPTOC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block overall function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block trip signal

PID-3617-OUTPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 375: LCNSPTOC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip signal negative sequence over current protection
START BOOLEAN Start signal for negative sequence over current protection

13.6.8.5 Settings
PID-3617-SETTINGS v5

Table 376: LCNSPTOC Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
I2> 3 - 2500 %IB 1 100 Negative sequence over current start
value in % of IBase
tI2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay to operate

514
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 13
Scheme communication

Table 377: LCNSPTOC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

13.6.8.6 Monitored data

PID-3617-MONITOREDDATA v4

Table 378: LCNSPTOC Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
I2 REAL - A Neagative sequence current value

13.6.8.7 Operation principle GUID-C7D22C1D-2441-4C7B-938B-E7B47559D3C5 v2

Negative sequence overcurrent protection (LCNSPTOC) is a definite time stage comparator

function. The negative sequence input current from the SMAI block is connected as input to
the function through a group connection I3P in PCM600. This current is compared against the
preset value and a start signal will be set high if the input negative sequence current is greater
than the preset value I2>. Trip signal will be set high after a time delay setting of tI2. BLOCK
input will block the complete function. BLKTR will block the trip output. The negative sequence
current is available as service value output I2.

13.6.8.8 Technical data

GUID-0E964441-43DE-43B6-B454-485FBBF66B5C v4

Table 379: LCNSPTOC technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, negative sequence (3 - 2500)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
overcurrent ±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio, negative sequence >95% at (50–2500)% of IBase -

overcurrent
Operate time, start at 0 to 2 x Iset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 25 ms
Reset time, start at 2 to 0 x Iset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 25 ms
Operate time, start at 0 to 10 x Iset Min. = 10 ms -
Max. = 20 ms
Reset time, start at 10 to 0 x Iset Min. = 20 ms -
Max. = 35 ms
Critical impulse time, negative 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -
sequence overcurrent 2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset

Impulse margin time, negative 15 ms typically -

sequence overcurrent
Independent time delay at 0 to 2 x (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms, whichever is
Iset greater

Transient overreach, start function <5% at τ = 100 ms -

13.6.9 Zero sequence overcurrent protection LCZSPTOC GUID-6F355F11-2863-4E05-A72C-FB4D6A1A6C0F v1

515
Technical manual
Section 13 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Scheme communication

13.6.9.1 Identification
GUID-581BA9F0-7886-4E46-84B6-37E8B6962934 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Zero sequence overcurrent LCZSPTOC - 51N
protection

13.6.9.2 Functionality GUID-F0C38DA1-2F39-46DE-AFFE-F919E6CF4A57 v2

Zero sequence components are present in all abnormal conditions involving earth. They have a
considerably high value during earth faults.

13.6.9.3 Function block GUID-2EBCFED9-1980-4B9C-A27B-BFB07B279B5C v1

LCZSPTOC
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
BLKTR

IEC09000770-1-en.vsd
IEC09000770 V1 EN-US

Figure 283: LCZSPTOC Function block

13.6.9.4 Signals
PID-3632-INPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 380: LCZSPTOC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block overall function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block trip output

PID-3632-OUTPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 381: LCZSPTOC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip signal for zero sequence over current protection
START BOOLEAN Start signal for zero sequence over current protection

13.6.9.5 Settings
PID-3632-SETTINGS v5

Table 382: LCZSPTOC Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
3I0> 3 - 2500 %IB 1 100 Zero sequence over current start value
in % of IBase
t3I0 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay to operate

516
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 13
Scheme communication

Table 383: LCZSPTOC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

13.6.9.6 Monitored data

PID-3632-MONITOREDDATA v4

Table 384: LCZSPTOC Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
3I0 REAL - A Zero sequence current value

13.6.9.7 Operation principle GUID-AAB75539-3C71-4B32-97DA-4D1D349B25E5 v2

Zero sequence overcurrent protection (LCZSPTOC) is a definite time stage comparator

function. The zero sequence input current from the SMAI block is connected as input to the
function through a group connection I3P in PCM600. This current is compared against the
preset value and a start signal will be set high if the input zero sequence current is greater
than the preset value 3I0>. Trip signal will be set high after a time delay setting of t3I0. BLOCK
input will block the complete function. BLKTR will block the trip output. The zero sequence
current is available as service value output 3I0.

13.6.9.8 Technical data

GUID-9F739808-04CA-4988-ABBC-1A444297FDB5 v4

Table 385: LCZSPTOC technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, zero sequence (3-2500)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I≤Ir
overcurrent ±1.0% of I at I>Ir

Reset ratio, zero sequence >95% at (50–2500)% of IBase -

overcurrent
Operate time, start at 0 to 2 x Iset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Reset time, start at 2 to 0 x Iset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Operate time, start at 0 to 10 x Iset Min. = 10 ms -
Max. = 20 ms
Reset time, start at 10 to 0 x Iset Min. = 20 ms -
Max. = 35 ms
Critical impulse time, zero 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -
sequence overcurrent 2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset

Impulse margin time, zero 15 ms typically -

sequence overcurrent
Independent time delay at 0 to 2 x (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is
Iset greater

13.6.10 Three phase overcurrent LCP3PTOC GUID-510F1FCE-39ED-4B44-89D0-338B085DD8C3 v1

517
Technical manual
Section 13 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Scheme communication

13.6.10.1 Identification
GUID-5FBC4309-C8FB-4CDF-A4D6-84E3A89C81B7 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Three phase overcurrent LCP3PTOC - 51

13.6.10.2 Functionality GUID-AC4FF35E-5D86-421E-82C7-93F600E9F453 v2

Three phase overcurrent (LCP3PTOC) is designed for overcurrent conditions.

Features:

• Phase wise start and trip signals

• Overcurrent protection
• Phase wise RMS current is available as service values
• Single definite time stage trip function.

13.6.10.3 Function block GUID-CBFCC6B5-F239-4AE1-BDCC-0D192127579D v1

LCP3PTOC
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK TRL1
BLKTR TRL2
TRL3
START
STL1
STL2
STL3

IEC09000771-1-en.vsd
IEC09000771 V1 EN-US

Figure 284: LCP3PTOC Function block

13.6.10.4 Signals
PID-3672-INPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 386: LCP3PTOC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block all binary outputs by resetting timers
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block trip of the function

PID-3672-OUTPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 387: LCP3PTOC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal
TRL1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L1
TRL2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L2
TRL3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L3
Table continues on next page

518
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 13
Scheme communication

Name Type Description

START BOOLEAN Common start signal
STL1 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L1
STL2 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L2
STL3 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L3

13.6.10.5 Settings
PID-3672-SETTINGS v5

Table 388: LCP3PTOC Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation On / Off
On
IOC> 5 - 2500 %IB 1 1000 Start value for 3 phase over current in
% of IBase
tOC 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Time delay to operate

Table 389: LCP3PTOC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

13.6.10.6 Monitored data

PID-3672-MONITOREDDATA v5

Table 390: LCP3PTOC Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IL1 REAL - A Current RMS value for phase L1
IL2 REAL - A Current RMS value for phase L2
IL3 REAL - A Current RMS value for phase L3

13.6.10.7 Operation principle GUID-ED4F48A8-91AF-4123-94DA-C50E957931DC v2

Three phase overcurrent (LCP3PTOC) is used for detecting over current conditions. LCP3PTOC
starts when the current exceeds the set limit IOC>. It operates with definite time (DT)
characteristics, that is, the function operates after a predefined time tOC and resets when the
fault current disappears. The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block
the function output, timer or the function itself, if desired.

519
Technical manual
Section 13 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Scheme communication

13.6.10.8 Technical data

GUID-C4ACE306-2A54-483D-B247-A479D48CBF5F v4

Table 391: LCP3PTOC technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, overcurrent (5-2500)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio, overcurrent > 95% at (50-2500)% of IBase -

Start time at 0 to 2 x Iset Min. = 10 ms -
Max. = 25 ms
Reset time at 2 to 0 x Iset Min. = 20 ms -
Max. = 35 ms
Critical impulse time, overcurrent 5 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -
2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset

Impulse margin time, overcurrent 10 ms typically -

Independent time delay to operate (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is
at 0 to 2 x Iset greater

13.6.11 Three phase undercurrent LCP3PTUC GUID-E8EAE24D-4B69-43DC-BCFC-C4AC63AA66AB v1

13.6.11.1 Identification
GUID-51A4DEE2-C549-483B-9BDD-8F79AD4CFE23 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Three phase undercurrent LCP3PTUC - 37

13.6.11.2 Functionality GUID-E8EA5CE8-ED7A-4FA3-9DAC-83227D53387F v2

Three phase undercurrent function (LCP3PTUC) is designed for detecting loss of load
conditions.

Features:

• Phase wise start and trip signals

• Phase wise RMS current is available as service values
• Single definite time stage trip function

520
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 13
Scheme communication

13.6.11.3 Function block GUID-432A180E-CBB4-4928-A898-0748C34D3527 v1

LCP3PTUC
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK TRL1
BLKTR TRL2
TRL3
START
STL1
STL2
STL3

IEC09000772-1-en.vsd
IEC09000772 V1 EN-US

Figure 285: LCP3PTUC Function block

13.6.11.4 Signals
PID-3673-INPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 392: LCP3PTUC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block all binary outputs by resetting timers
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block trip of the function

PID-3673-OUTPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 393: LCP3PTUC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal
TRL1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L1
TRL2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L2
TRL3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L3
START BOOLEAN Common start signal
STL1 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L1
STL2 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L2
STL3 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L3

13.6.11.5 Settings
PID-3673-SETTINGS v5

Table 394: LCP3PTUC Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation On / Off
On
IUC< 1.00 - 100.00 %IB 0.01 50.00 Start value for 3 phase under current
in % of IBase
tUC 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay to operate

521
Technical manual
Section 13 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Scheme communication

Table 395: LCP3PTUC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

13.6.11.6 Monitored data

PID-3673-MONITOREDDATA v5

Table 396: LCP3PTUC Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IL1 REAL - A Current RMS value for phase L1
IL2 REAL - A Current RMS value for phase L2
IL3 REAL - A Current RMS value for phase L3

13.6.11.7 Operation principle GUID-B13D3F9D-358E-4E6C-BD72-A44B00B27BC0 v2

Three phase undercurrent (LCP3PTUC) is used for detecting sudden load loss which is
considered as fault condition. LCP3PTUC starts when the current is less than the set limit
IUC<. It operates with definite time (DT) characteristics, that is, the function operates after a
predefined time tUC and resets when the load current restores. The function contains a
blocking functionality. It is possible to block the function output, timer or the function itself, if
desired.

13.6.11.8 Technical data

GUID-CE2C6F0A-DF49-4AAF-80F0-9CDCBB08E755 v4

Table 397: LCP3PTUC technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, undercurrent (1.00-100.00)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir

Reset ratio, undercurrent < 105% at (50.00-100.00)% of IBase -

Start time at 2 to 0 x Iset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Reset time at 0 to 2 x Iset Min. = 10 ms -
Max. = 25 ms
Critical impulse time, undercurrent 10 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset -

Impulse margin time, 10 ms typically -

undercurrent
Independent time delay to operate (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms whichever is
at 2 to 0 x Iset greater

522
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 14
Logic

Section 14 Logic

14.1 Tripping logic SMPPTRC IP14576-1 v4

14.1.1 Identification
SEMOD56226-2 v6

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Tripping logic SMPPTRC 94

I->O

SYMBOL-K V1 EN-US

14.1.2 Functionality M12275-3 v10

A function block for protection tripping is always provided as basic for each circuit breaker
involved in the tripping of the fault. It provides a settable pulse prolongation to ensure a trip
pulse of sufficient length, as well as all functionality necessary for correct co-operation with
autoreclosing functions.

The trip function block also includes a settable latch functionality for evolving faults and
breaker lock-out.

14.1.3 Function block M12638-3 v6

SMPPTRC
BLOCK TRIP
BLKLKOUT TRL1
TRIN TRL2
TRINL1 TRL3
TRINL2 TR1P
TRINL3 TR2P
PSL1 TR3P
PSL2 CLLKOUT
PSL3
1PTRZ
1PTREF
P3PTR
SETLKOUT
RSTLKOUT

IEC05000707-2-en.vsd
IEC05000707 V2 EN-US

Figure 286: SMPPTRC function block

523
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Logic

14.1.4 Signals
PID-3556-INPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 398: SMPPTRC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKLKOUT BOOLEAN 0 Blocks circuit breaker lockout output (CLLKOUT)
TRIN BOOLEAN 0 Trip all phases
TRINL1 BOOLEAN 0 Trip phase 1
TRINL2 BOOLEAN 0 Trip phase 2
TRINL3 BOOLEAN 0 Trip phase 3
PSL1 BOOLEAN 0 Functional input for phase selection in phase L1
PSL2 BOOLEAN 0 Functional input for phase selection in phase L2
PSL3 BOOLEAN 0 Functional input for phase selection in phase L3
1PTRZ BOOLEAN 0 Zone Trip with a separate phase selection
1PTREF BOOLEAN 0 Single phase DEF Trip for separate phase selection
P3PTR BOOLEAN 0 Prepare all tripping to be three-phase
SETLKOUT BOOLEAN 0 Input for setting the circuit breaker lockout function
RSTLKOUT BOOLEAN 0 Input for resetting the circuit breaker lockout function

PID-3556-OUTPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 399: SMPPTRC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General trip output signal
TRL1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L1
TRL2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L2
TRL3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L3
TR1P BOOLEAN Tripping single-pole
TR2P BOOLEAN Tripping two-pole
TR3P BOOLEAN Tripping three-pole
CLLKOUT BOOLEAN Circuit breaker lockout output (set until reset)

14.1.5 Settings
PID-3556-SETTINGS v2

Table 400: SMPPTRC Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
Program 3 phase - - 1ph/3ph Three ph; single or three ph; single,
1ph/3ph two or three ph trip
1ph/2ph/3ph
tTripMin 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Minimum duration of trip output
signal
tWaitForPHS 0.020 - 0.500 s 0.001 0.050 Secures 3-pole trip when phase
selection failed

524
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 14
Logic

Table 401: SMPPTRC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
TripLockout Off - - Off On: activate output (CLLKOUT) and
On trip latch, Off: only outp
AutoLock Off - - Off On: lockout from input (SETLKOUT)
On and trip, Off: only inp

14.1.6 Operation principle M12255-3 v10.1.1

The duration of a trip output signal from tripping logic common 3-phase output SMPPTRC is
settable (tTripMin). The pulse length should be long enough to secure the breaker opening.

For three-phase tripping logic common 3-phase output, SMPPTRC has a single input (TRIN)
through which all trip output signals from the protection functions within the IED, or from
external protection functions via one or more of the IEDs binary inputs, are routed. It has a
single trip output (TRIP) for connection to one or more of the IEDs binary outputs, as well as to
other functions within the IED requiring this signal.

BLOCK
tTripMin TRIP
TRIN OR
AND t

Operation Mode = On

Program = 3 phase

IEC10000266-1-en.vsd
IEC10000266 V1 EN-US

Figure 287: Simplified logic diagram for three phase trip

SMPPTRC function for single-phase and two-phase tripping has additional phase segregated
inputs for this, as well as inputs for faulted phase selection. The latter inputs enable single-
phase and two-phase tripping for those functions which do not have their own phase selection
capability, and therefore which have just a single trip output and not phase segregated trip
outputs for routing through the phase segregated trip inputs of the expanded SMPPTRC
function. Examples of such protection functions are the residual overcurrent protections. The
expanded SMPPTRC function has two inputs for these functions, one for impedance tripping
(for example, carrier-aided tripping commands from the scheme communication logic), and
one for earth fault tripping (for example, tripping output from a residual overcurrent
protection).

Additional logic, including a timer tWaitForPHS, secures a three-phase trip command for these
protection functions in the absence of the required phase selection signals.

The expanded SMPPTRC function has three trip outputs TRL1, TRL2, TRL3 (besides the trip
output TRIP), one per phase, for connection to one or more of the IEDs binary outputs, as well
as to other functions within the IED requiring these signals. There are also separate output
signals indicating single-phase, two-phase or three-phase trip. These signals are important for
cooperation with the autorecloser SMBRREC function.

The expanded SMPPTRC function is equipped with logic which secures correct operation for
evolving faults as well as for reclosing on to persistent faults. A special input is also provided
which disables single- phase and two-phase tripping, forcing all tripping to be three-phase.

In multi-breaker arrangements, one SMPPTRC function block is used for each breaker. This can
be the case if single pole tripping and autoreclosing is used.

525
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Logic

The breaker close lockout function can be activated from an external trip signal from another
protection function via input (SETLKOUT) or internally at a three-phase trip, if desired.

It is possible to lockout seal in the tripping output signals or use blocking of closing only the
choice is by setting TripLockout.

14.1.6.1 Logic diagram M12258-7 v5.1.1

TRINL1

TRINL2
OR
TRINL3

1PTRZ OR
1PTREF
OR
TRIN RSTTRIP
AND
Program = 3 phase

IEC05000517-3-en.vsd
IEC05000517 V3 EN-US

Figure 288: Three-phase front logic — simplified logic diagram

TRIN

TRINL1

PSL1 L1TRIP
OR
AND

TRINL2

PSL2 L2TRIP
OR
AND

TRINL3

PSL3 L3TRIP
OR
AND

OR

OR OR

- loop
l-oop
OR
AND
AND
AND
1 PTREF AND tWaitForPHS
1 PTRZ OR t

IEC10000056-3-en.vsd

IEC10000056 V3 EN-US

Figure 289: Phase segregated front logic

526
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 14
Logic

tTripMin

tEvolvingFault

tTripMin

tEvolvingFault

tTripMin

tEvolvingFault

IEC05000519-3-en.vsdx

IEC05000519-WMF V3 EN-US

Figure 290: Additional logic for the 1ph/3ph operating mode

527
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Logic

BLOCK
tTripMin

tEvolvingFault

tTripMin

tEvolvingFault

tTripMin

tEvolvingFault

IEC05000520-4-en.vsdx

IEC05000520-WMF V4 EN-US

Figure 291: Additional logic for the 1ph/2ph/3ph operating mode

IEC05000521-3.vsd

IEC05000521-WMF V3 EN-US

Figure 292: Final tripping circuits

528
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 14
Logic

14.1.7 Technical data

M12380-1 v10

Table 402: SMPPTRC technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Trip action 3-ph, 1/3-ph, 1/2/3-ph -
Minimum trip pulse length (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater
3-pole trip delay (0.020-0.500) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater
Evolving fault delay (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater

Table 403: Number of SMPPTRC instances

Function Quantity with cycle time
3 ms
SMPPTRC 6

14.2 Trip matrix logic TMAGAPC IP15121-1 v4

14.2.1 Identification
SEMOD167882-2 v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Trip matrix logic TMAGAPC - -

14.2.2 Functionality M15321-3 v11

The trip matrix logic TMAGAPC function is used to route trip signals and other logical output
signals to different output contacts on the IED.

The trip matrix logic function has 3 output signals and these outputs can be connected to
physical tripping outputs according to the specific application needs for settable pulse or
steady output.

529
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Logic

14.2.3 Function block SEMOD54400-4 v6

TMAGAPC
BLOCK OUTPUT1
BLK1 OUTPUT2
BLK2 OUTPUT3
BLK3
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32

IEC13000197-1-en.vsd
IEC13000197 V1 EN-US

Figure 293: TMAGAPC function block

14.2.4 Signals
PID-4125-INPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 404: TMAGAPC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of output 1
BLK2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of output 2
BLK3 BOOLEAN 0 Block of output 3
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 6
INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 7
INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 8
INPUT9 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 9
INPUT10 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 10
Table continues on next page

530
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 14
Logic

Name Type Default Description

INPUT11 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 11
INPUT12 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 12
INPUT13 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 13
INPUT14 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 14
INPUT15 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 15
INPUT16 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 16
INPUT17 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 17
INPUT18 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 18
INPUT19 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 19
INPUT20 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 20
INPUT21 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 21
INPUT22 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 22
INPUT23 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 23
INPUT24 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 24
INPUT25 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 25
INPUT26 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 26
INPUT27 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 27
INPUT28 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 28
INPUT29 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 29
INPUT30 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 30
INPUT31 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 31
INPUT32 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 32

PID-4125-OUTPUTSIGNALS v7

Table 405: TMAGAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
OUTPUT1 BOOLEAN OR function betweeen inputs 1 to 16
OUTPUT2 BOOLEAN OR function between inputs 17 to 32
OUTPUT3 BOOLEAN OR function between inputs 1 to 32

14.2.5 Settings
PID-4125-SETTINGS v7

Table 406: TMAGAPC Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
PulseTime 0.050 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Output pulse time
OnDelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Output on delay time
OffDelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Output off delay time
Table continues on next page

531
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Logic

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

ModeOutput1 Steady - - Steady Mode for output ,1 steady or pulsed
Pulsed
ModeOutput2 Steady - - Steady Mode for output 2, steady or pulsed
Pulsed
ModeOutput3 Steady - - Steady Mode for output 3, steady or pulsed
Pulsed

14.2.6 Operation principle SEMOD52537-5 v8

The trip matrix logic (TMAGAPC) block is provided with 32 input signals and 3 output signals.
The function block incorporates internal logic OR gates in order to provide grouping of
connected input signals to the three output signals from the function block.

Internal built-in OR logic is made in accordance with the following three rules:

1. when any one of first 16 inputs signals (INPUT1 to INPUT16) has logical value 1 the first
output signal (OUTPUT1) will get logical value 1.
2. when any one of second 16 inputs signals (INPUT17 to INPUT32) has logical value 1 the
second output signal (OUTPUT2) will get logical value 1.
3. when any one of all 32 input signals (INPUT1 to INPUT32) has logical value 1 the third
output signal (OUTPUT3) will get logical value 1.

By use of the settings ModeOutput1, ModeOutput2, ModeOutput3, PulseTime, OnDelay and

OffDelay the behavior of each output can be customized. The OnDelay is always active and will
delay the input to output transition by the set time. The ModeOutput for respective output
decides whether the output shall be steady with an drop-off delay as set by OffDelay or if it
shall give a pulse with duration set by PulseTime. Note that for pulsed operation and that the
inputs are connected in an OR-function, a new pulse will only be given on the output if all
related inputs are reset and then one is activated again. For steady operation the OffDelay will
start when all related inputs have reset. Detailed logical diagram is shown in figure 294

532
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 14
Logic

PulseTime

t
&
ModeOutput1=Pulsed
INPUT 1
OUTPUT 1
Ondelay Offdelay
&
³1
³1 t t
INPUT 16

PulseTime

t
&
ModeOutput2=Pulsed

INPUT 17
OUTPUT 2
Ondelay Offdelay
&
³1
³1 t t
INPUT 32

PulseTime
t
&

ModeOutput3=Pulsed

OUTPUT 3
Ondelay Offdelay
&
³1
³1 t t

IEC09000612-3-en.vsd
IEC09000612 V3 EN-US

Figure 294: Trip matrix internal logic

Output signals from TMAGAPC are typically connected to other logic blocks or directly to
output contacts in the IED. When used for direct tripping of the circuit breaker(s) the pulse
time shall be set to at least 0.150 seconds in order to obtain satisfactory minimum duration of
the trip pulse to the circuit breaker trip coils.

14.2.7 Technical data

GUID-3AB1EE95-51BF-4CC4-99BD-F4ECDAACB75A v1

Table 407: Number of TMAGAPC instances

Function Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
TMAGAPC 6 6 -

14.3 Logic for group alarm ALMCALH GUID-64EA392C-950F-486C-8D96-6E7736B592BF v1

14.3.1 Identification GUID-64EA392C-950F-486C-8D96-6E7736B592BF v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Logic for group alarm ALMCALH - -

14.3.2 Functionality GUID-16E60E27-F7A8-416D-8648-8174AAC49BB5 v3

The group alarm logic function ALMCALH is used to route several alarm signals to a common
indication, LED and/or contact, in the IED.

533
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Logic

14.3.3 Function block GUID-EA192656-71DD-4D44-A1D5-96B1B4937971 v1

ALMCALH
BLOCK ALARM
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16

IEC13000181-1-en.vsd
IEC13000181 V1 EN-US

14.3.4 Signals
PID-4126-INPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 408: ALMCALH Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 6
INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 7
INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 8
INPUT9 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 9
INPUT10 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 10
INPUT11 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 11
INPUT12 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 12
INPUT13 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 13
INPUT14 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 14
INPUT15 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 15
INPUT16 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 16

PID-4126-OUTPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 409: ALMCALH Output signals

Name Type Description
ALARM BOOLEAN OR function betweeen inputs 1 to 16

534
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 14
Logic

14.3.5 Settings
PID-4126-SETTINGS v3

Table 410: ALMCALH Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On

14.3.6 Operation principle GUID-0405BB7B-7EF7-4546-92CD-F703AA0DD9F4 v2

The logic for group alarm ALMCALH block is provided with 16 input signals and one ALARM
output signal. The function block incorporates internal logic OR gate in order to provide
grouping of connected input signals to the output ALARM signal from the function block.

When any one of 16 input signals (INPUT1 to INPUT16) has logical value 1, the ALARM output
signal will get logical value 1.

The function has a drop-off delay of 200 ms when all inputs are reset to provide a steady
signal.

Input 1
200 ms
ALARM
³1 t
Input 16

IEC13000191-1-en.vsd
IEC13000191 V1 EN-US

Figure 295: Group alarm logic

14.3.7 Technical data

GUID-A05AF26F-DC98-4E62-B96B-E75D19F20767 v1

Table 411: Number of ALMCALH instances

Function Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
ALMCALH - - 5

14.4 Logic for group warning WRNCALH

14.4.1 Identification GUID-3EBD3D5B-F506-4557-88D7-DFC0BD21C690 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Logic for group warning WRNCALH - -

14.4.2 Functionality GUID-F7D9A012-3AD4-4D86-BE97-DF2A99BE5383 v3

The group warning logic function WRNCALH is used to route several warning signals to a
common indication, LED and/or contact, in the IED.

535
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Logic

14.4.3 Function block GUID-C909E4FB-3F7A-47F7-8988-36B159E2C7B2 v1

WRNCALH
BLOCK WARNING
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16

IEC13000182-1-en.vsd
IEC13000182 V1 EN-US

14.4.4 Signals
PID-4127-INPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 412: WRNCALH Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 6
INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 7
INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 8
INPUT9 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 9
INPUT10 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 10
INPUT11 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 11
INPUT12 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 12
INPUT13 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 13
INPUT14 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 14
INPUT15 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 15
INPUT16 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 16

PID-4127-OUTPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 413: WRNCALH Output signals

Name Type Description
WARNING BOOLEAN OR function betweeen inputs 1 to 16

536
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 14
Logic

14.4.5 Settings
PID-4127-SETTINGS v3

Table 414: WRNCALH Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On

14.4.6 Operation principle GUID-71C65C20-7B6C-499F-BFCD-E418AA55F7EC v2

The logic for group warning WRNCALH block is provided with 16 input signals and 1 WARNING
output signal. The function block incorporates internal logic OR gate in order to provide
grouping of connected input signals to the output WARNING signal from the function block.

When any one of 16 input signals (INPUT1 to INPUT16) has logical value 1, the WARNING output
signal will get logical value 1.

The function has a drop-off delay of 200 ms when all inputs are reset to provide a steady
signal.

INPUT1
200 ms
WARNING
³1 t
INPUT16

IEC13000192-1-en.vsd
IEC13000192 V1 EN-US

14.4.7 Technical data

GUID-70B7357D-F467-4CF5-9F73-641A82D334F5 v1

Table 415: Number of WRNCALH instances

Function Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
WRNCALH - - 5

14.5 Logic for group indication INDCALH

14.5.1 Identification GUID-3B5D4371-420D-4249-B6A4-5A168920D635 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Logic for group indication INDCALH - -

14.5.2 Functionality GUID-D8D1A4EE-A87F-46C6-8529-277FC1ADA9B0 v3

The group indication logic function INDCALH is used to route several indication signals to a
common indication, LED and/or contact, in the IED.

537
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Logic

14.5.3 Function block GUID-9D89E183-449A-4016-AB83-E57C8DDBA843 v1

INDCALH
BLOCK IND
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16

IEC13000183-1-en.vsd
IEC13000183 V1 EN-US

14.5.4 Signals
PID-4128-INPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 416: INDCALH Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 6
INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 7
INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 8
INPUT9 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 9
INPUT10 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 10
INPUT11 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 11
INPUT12 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 12
INPUT13 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 13
INPUT14 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 14
INPUT15 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 15
INPUT16 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 16

PID-4128-OUTPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 417: INDCALH Output signals

Name Type Description
IND BOOLEAN OR function betweeen inputs 1 to 16

538
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 14
Logic

14.5.5 Settings
PID-4128-SETTINGS v4

Table 418: INDCALH Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On

14.5.6 Operation principle GUID-72B1B4E8-BC6C-4AF7-8B41-058241B944F8 v2

The logic for group indication INDCALH block is provided with 16 input signals and 1 IND
output signal. The function block incorporates internal logic OR gate in order to provide
grouping of connected input signals to the output IND signal from the function block.

When any one of 16 input signals (INPUT1 to INPUT16) has logical value 1, the IND output signal
will get logical value 1.

The function has a drop-off delay of 200 ms when all inputs are reset to provide a steady
signal.

INPUT1
200 ms
IND
³1 t
INPUT16

IEC13000193-1-en.vsd
IEC13000193 V1 EN-US

14.5.7 Technical data

GUID-EAA43288-01A5-49CF-BF5B-9ABF6DC27D85 v1

Table 419: Number of INDCALH instances

Function Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
INDCALH - 5 -

14.6 Basic configurable logic blocks M11396-4 v15

The basic configurable logic blocks do not propagate the time stamp and quality of signals
(have no suffix QT at the end of their function name). A number of logic blocks and timers are
always available as basic for the user to adapt the configuration to the specific application
needs. The list below shows a summary of the function blocks and their features.

These logic blocks are also available as part of an extension logic package with the same
number of instances.

• AND function block. Each block has four inputs and two outputs where one is inverted.

• GATE function block is used for whether or not a signal should be able to pass from the
input to the output.

539
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Logic

• INVERTER function block that inverts one input signal to the output.

• LLD function block. Loop delay used to delay the output signal one execution cycle.

• OR function block. Each block has up to six inputs and two outputs where one is inverted.

• PULSETIMER function block can be used, for example, for pulse extensions or limiting of
operation of outputs, settable pulse time.

• RSMEMORY function block is a flip-flop that can reset or set an output from two inputs
respectively. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted. The memory setting
controls if, after a power interruption, the flip-flop resets or returns to the state it had
before the power interruption. RESET input has priority.

• SRMEMORY function block is a flip-flop that can set or reset an output from two inputs
respectively. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted. The memory setting
controls if, after a power interruption, the flip-flop resets or returns to the state it had
before the power interruption. The SET input has priority.

• TIMERSET function has pick-up and drop-out delayed outputs related to the input signal.
The timer has a settable time delay.

• XOR function block. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted.

14.6.1 AND function block AND IP11013-1 v2

M11453-3 v4
The AND function is used to form general combinatory expressions with boolean variables. The
AND function block has up to four inputs and two outputs. One of the outputs is inverted.

14.6.1.1 Function block

M11452-3 v2

AND
INPUT1 OUT
INPUT2 NOUT
INPUT3
INPUT4

IEC14000071-1-en.vsd
IEC14000071 V1 EN-US

Figure 296: AND function block

14.6.1.2 Signals
PID-3437-INPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 420: AND Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 4

540
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 14
Logic

PID-3437-OUTPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 421: AND Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

14.6.1.3 Technical data

GUID-D1179280-1D99-4A66-91AC-B7343DBA9F23 v1

Table 422: Number of AND instances

Logic block Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
AND 60 60 160

14.6.2 Controllable gate function block GATE IP11021-1 v2

M11489-3 v2
The Controllable gate function block (GATE) is used for controlling if a signal should be able to
pass from the input to the output or not depending on a setting.

14.6.2.1 Function block

M11490-3 v2

GATE
INPUT OUT

IEC04000410-2-en.vsd
IEC04000410 V2 EN-US

Figure 297: GATE function block

14.6.2.2 Signals
PID-3801-INPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 423: GATE Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input to gate

PID-3801-OUTPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 424: GATE Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output from gate

14.6.2.3 Settings
PID-3801-SETTINGS v4

Table 425: GATE Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On

541
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Logic

14.6.2.4 Technical data

GUID-45DF373F-DC39-4E1B-B45B-6B454E8E0E50 v1

Table 426: Number of GATE instances

Logic block Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
GATE 10 10 20

14.6.3 Inverter function block INV IP11011-1 v2

14.6.3.1 Function block

M11445-3 v1

INV
INPUT OUT

IEC04000404_2_en.vsd
IEC04000404 V2 EN-US

Figure 298: INV function block

14.6.3.2 Signals
PID-3803-INPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 427: INV Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input

PID-3803-OUTPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 428: INV Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output

14.6.3.3 Technical data

GUID-0EC4192A-EF03-47C0-AEC1-09B68B411A98 v1

Table 429: Number of INV instances

Logic block Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
INV 90 90 240

14.6.4 Loop delay function block LLD GUID-05D959B5-A55B-437C-8E8F-831A4A357E24 v2

GUID-64B24094-010D-4B8F-8B7B-DDD49499AAE5 v3
The Logic loop delay function block (LLD) function is used to delay the output signal one
execution cycle, that is, the cycle time of the function blocks used.

542
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 14
Logic

14.6.4.1 Function block

GUID-EE44CFDF-C8F7-4870-BD1C-98D9CD91FD97 v4

LLD
INPUT OUT

IEC15000144.vsd
IEC15000144 V1 EN-US

Figure 299: LLD function block

14.6.4.2 Signals
PID-3805-INPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 430: LLD Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input signal

PID-3805-OUTPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 431: LLD Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal delayed one execution cycle

14.6.4.3 Technical data

GUID-B2E6F510-8766-4381-9618-CE02ED71FFB6 v1

Table 432: Number of LLD instances

Logic block Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
LLD 10 10 20

14.6.5 OR function block IP11012-1 v3

M11449-3 v2
The OR function is used to form general combinatory expressions with boolean variables. The
OR function block has up to six inputs and two outputs. One of the outputs is inverted.

14.6.5.1 Function block

M11448-3 v1

OR
INPUT1 OUT
INPUT2 NOUT
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6

IEC04000405_2_en.vsd
IEC04000405 V2 EN-US

Figure 300: OR function block

543
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Logic

14.6.5.2 Signals
PID-3806-INPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 433: OR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 to OR gate
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2 to OR gate
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3 to OR gate
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4 to OR gate
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5 to OR gate
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6 to OR gate

PID-3806-OUTPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 434: OR Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output from OR gate
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output from OR gate

14.6.5.3 Technical data

GUID-35A795D7-A6BD-4669-A023-43C497DBFB01 v2

Table 435: Number of OR instances

Logic block Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
OR 69 60 160

14.6.6 Pulse timer function block PULSETIMER IP11016-1 v2

M11466-3 v3
The pulse (PULSETIMER) function can be used, for example, for pulse extensions or limiting the
operation time of outputs. The PULSETIMER has a settable length. When the input is 1, the
output will be 1 for the time set by the time delay parameter t. Then it returns to 0.

14.6.6.1 Function block

M11465-3 v4

PULSETIMER
INPUT OUT

IEC04000407-3-en.vsd
IEC04000407 V3 EN-US

Figure 301: PULSETIMER function block

14.6.6.2 Signals
PID-3808-INPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 436: PULSETIMER Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input to pulse timer

544
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 14
Logic

PID-3808-OUTPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 437: PULSETIMER Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output from pulse timer

14.6.6.3 Settings
PID-3808-SETTINGS v4

Table 438: PULSETIMER Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
t 0.000 - s 0.001 0.010 Time delay of function
90000.000

14.6.6.4 Technical data

GUID-E05E5FB1-23E7-4816-84F2-1FBFFDFF2B43 v1

Table 439: Number of PULSETIMER instances

Logic block Quantity with cycle time Range or Value Accuracy
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
PULSETIMER 10 10 20 (0.000–90000.000) s ±0.5% ±10 ms

14.6.7 Reset-set with memory function block RSMEMORY GUID-9C93669F-078B-49EA-85B8-C4BB6A434734 v1

GUID-4C804DEA-3C83-4C20-82C6-BAD03BD48242 v4
The Reset-set with memory function block (RSMEMORY) is a flip-flop with memory that can
reset or set an output from two inputs respectively. Each RSMEMORY function block has two
outputs, where one is inverted. The memory setting controls if, after a power interruption, the
flip-flop resets or returns to the state it had before the power interruption. For a Reset-Set
flip-flop, RESET input has higher priority over SET input.

Table 440: Truth table for RSMEMORY function block

RESET SET OUT NOUT
0 0 Last Inverted last
value value
0 1 1 0
1 0 0 1
1 1 0 1

14.6.7.1 Function block

GUID-50D5A4C0-59BF-44DE-86AC-47640ACD35A7 v3

RSMEMORY
SET OUT
RESET NOUT

IEC09000294-1-en.vsd
IEC09000294 V1 EN-US

Figure 302: RSMEMORY function block

545
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Logic

14.6.7.2 Signals
PID-3811-INPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 441: RSMEMORY Input signals

Name Type Default Description
SET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to set
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to reset

PID-3811-OUTPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 442: RSMEMORY Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

14.6.7.3 Settings
PID-3811-SETTINGS v4

Table 443: RSMEMORY Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Memory Off - - On Operating mode of the memory
On function

14.6.7.4 Technical data

GUID-BE6FD540-E96E-4F15-B2A2-12FFAE6C51DB v1

Table 444: Number of RSMEMORY instances

Logic block Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
RSMEMORY 10 10 20

14.6.8 Set-reset with memory function block SRMEMORY IP11020-1 v2

M11485-3 v4
The Set-reset with memory function block (SRMEMORY) is a flip-flop with memory that can set
or reset an output from two inputs respectively. Each SRMEMORY function block has two
outputs, where one is inverted. The memory setting controls if, after a power interruption, the
flip-flop resets or returns to the state it had before the power interruption. The input SET has
priority.

Table 445: Truth table for SRMEMORY function block

SET RESET OUT NOUT
0 0 Last Inverted
value last value
0 1 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 1 1 0

546
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 14
Logic

14.6.8.1 Function block

M11484-3 v2

SRMEMORY
SET OUT
RESET NOUT

IEC04000408_2_en.vsd
IEC04000408 V2 EN-US

Figure 303: SRMEMORY function block

14.6.8.2 Signals
PID-3813-INPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 446: SRMEMORY Input signals

Name Type Default Description
SET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to set
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to reset

PID-3813-OUTPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 447: SRMEMORY Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

14.6.8.3 Settings
PID-3813-SETTINGS v4

Table 448: SRMEMORY Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Memory Off - - On Operating mode of the memory
On function

14.6.8.4 Technical data

GUID-7A0F4327-CA83-4FB0-AB28-7C5F17AE6354 v1

Table 449: Number of SRMEMORY instances

Logic block Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
SRMEMORY 10 10 20

14.6.9 Settable timer function block TIMERSET IP11022-1 v2

M11494-3 v3
The Settable timer function block (TIMERSET) timer has two outputs for the delay of the input
signal at drop-out and at pick-up. The timer has a settable time delay. It also has an Operation
setting On and Off that controls the operation of the timer.

547
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Logic

Input
tdelay
On

Off
tdelay

t
IEC08000289-2-en.vsd

IEC08000289 V2 EN-US

Figure 304: TIMERSET status diagram

14.6.9.1 Function block

M11495-3 v3

TIMERSET
INPUT ON
OFF

IEC04000411-2-en.vsd
IEC04000411 V2 EN-US

Figure 305: TIMERSET function block

14.6.9.2 Signals
PID-3815-INPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 450: TIMERSET Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input to timer

PID-3815-OUTPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 451: TIMERSET Output signals

Name Type Description
ON BOOLEAN Output from timer, pick-up delayed
OFF BOOLEAN Output from timer, drop-out delayed

14.6.9.3 Settings
PID-3815-SETTINGS v4

Table 452: TIMERSET Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
t 0.000 - s 0.001 0.000 Delay for settable timer n
90000.000

548
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 14
Logic

14.6.9.4 Technical data

GUID-C6C98FE0-F559-45EE-B853-464516775417 v1

Table 453: Number of TIMERSET instances

Logic block Quantity with cycle time Range or Value Accuracy
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
TIMERSET 15 15 30 (0.000–90000.000) s ±0.5% ±10 ms

14.6.10 Exclusive OR function block XOR IP11018-1 v2

M11477-3 v4
The exclusive OR function (XOR) is used to generate combinatory expressions with boolean
variables. XOR has two inputs and two outputs. One of the outputs is inverted. The output
signal OUT is 1 if the input signals are different and 0 if they are the same.

Table 454: Truth table for XOR function block

INPUT1 INPUT2 OUT NOUT
0 0 0 1
0 1 1 0
1 0 1 0
1 1 0 1

14.6.10.1 Function block

M11476-3 v1

XOR
INPUT1 OUT
INPUT2 NOUT

IEC04000409-2-en.vsd
IEC04000409 V2 EN-US

Figure 306: XOR function block

14.6.10.2 Signals
PID-3817-INPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 455: XOR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 to XOR gate
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2 to XOR gate

PID-3817-OUTPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 456: XOR Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output from XOR gate
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output from XOR gate

549
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Logic

14.6.10.3 Technical data

GUID-0B07F78C-10BD-4070-AFF0-6EE36454AA03 v1

Table 457: Number of XOR instances

Logic block Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
XOR 10 10 20

14.7 Configurable logic blocks Q/T GUID-0CA6511A-E8BD-416E-9B59-5C6BD98C60B7 v5

The configurable logic blocks QT propagate the time stamp and the quality of the input
signals (have suffix QT at the end of their function name).

The function blocks assist the user to adapt the IEDs' configuration to the specific application
needs. The list below shows a summary of the function blocks and their features.

• ANDQT AND function block. The function also propagates the time stamp and the quality
of input signals. Each block has four inputs and two outputs where one is inverted.

• INDCOMBSPQT combines single input signals to group signal. Single position input is
copied to value part of SP_OUT output. TIME input is copied to time part of SP_OUT
output. Quality input bits are copied to the corresponding quality part of SP_OUT output.

• INDEXTSPQT extracts individual signals from a group signal input. The value part of single
position input is copied to SI_OUT output. The time part of single position input is copied
to TIME output. The quality bits in the common part and the indication part of inputs
signal are copied to the corresponding quality output.

• INVALIDQT function which sets quality invalid of outputs according to a "valid" input.
Inputs are copied to outputs. If input VALID is 0, or if its quality invalid bit is set, all
outputs invalid quality bit will be set to invalid. The time stamp of an output will be set to
the latest time stamp of INPUT and VALID inputs.

• INVERTERQT function block that inverts the input signal and propagates the time stamp
and the quality of the input signal.

• ORQT OR function block that also propagates the time stamp and the quality of the input
signals. Each block has six inputs and two outputs where one is inverted.

• PULSETIMERQT Pulse timer function block can be used, for example, for pulse extensions
or limiting of operation of outputs. The function also propagates the time stamp and the
quality of the input signal.

• RSMEMORYQT function block is a flip-flop that can reset or set an output from two inputs
respectively. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted. The memory setting
controls if the block after a power interruption should return to the state before the
interruption, or be reset. The function also propagates the time stamp and the quality of
the input signal.

• SRMEMORYQT function block is a flip-flop that can set or reset an output from two inputs
respectively. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted. The memory setting
controls if the block after a power interruption should return to the state before the

550
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 14
Logic

interruption, or be reset. The function also propagates the time stamp and the quality of
the input signal.

• TIMERSETQT function has pick-up and drop-out delayed outputs related to the input
signal. The timer has a settable time delay. The function also propagates the time stamp
and the quality of the input signal.

• XORQT XOR function block. The function also propagates the time stamp and the quality
of the input signals. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted.

14.7.1 ANDQT function block GUID-E3023D85-FDCC-4A5F-99B4-64DA7B4AC5BB v5

The ANDQT function is used to form general combinatory expressions with boolean variables.
The ANDQT function block has four inputs and two outputs.

14.7.1.1 Function block GUID-4CEE3C76-A39D-4C33-AD55-88C570210F2B v2

ANDQT
INPUT1 OUT
INPUT2 NOUT
INPUT3
INPUT4

IEC09000297-1-en.vsd
IEC09000297 V1 EN-US

Figure 307: ANDQT function block

14.7.1.2 Signals GUID-4543C4C9-FAE2-4328-8DE2-4A5756A020E9 v1

PID-3800-INPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 458: ANDQT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 4

PID-3800-OUTPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 459: ANDQT Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

551
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Logic

14.7.1.3 Technical data

GUID-23D4121A-4C9A-4072-BBE3-6DB076EDAB79 v1

14.7.2 Single point indication related signals combining function

block INDCOMBSPQT GUID-13C9325D-D3A0-480F-9F3B-738A13E0ECF8 v3

GUID-EEBD65A5-394C-4ECD-BF6F-D556B610FC57 v3
The value of single point input (SP_IN) is copied to the value part of the SP_OUT output. The
TIME input is copied to the time part of the SP_OUT output. State input bits are copied to the
corresponding state part of the SP_OUT output. If the state or value on the SP_OUT output
changes, the Event bit in the state part is toggled.

INDCOMBSPQT can propagate the quality, the value and the time stamps of the signals via IEC
61850.

14.7.2.1 Function block GUID-55B49FC7-8239-4891-BE16-29296A8F40BE v1

INDCOMBSPQT
SP_IN* SP_OUT
TIME*
BLOCKED*
SUBST*
INVALID*
TEST*

IEC15000146.vsd
IEC15000146 V1 EN-US

Figure 308: INDCOMBSPQT function block

14.7.2.2 Signals GUID-4543C4C9-FAE2-4328-8DE2-4A5756A020E9 v1

PID-3792-INPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 460: INDCOMBSPQT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
SP_IN BOOLEAN 0 Single point indication
TIME GROUP 0 Timestamp
SIGNAL
BLOCKED BOOLEAN 0 Blocked for update
SUBST BOOLEAN 0 Substitued
INVALID BOOLEAN 0 Invalid value
TEST BOOLEAN 0 Testmode

PID-3792-OUTPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 461: INDCOMBSPQT Output signals

Name Type Description
SP_OUT BOOLEAN Single point indication

552
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 14
Logic

14.7.2.3 Technical data

GUID-27DF23C0-A0B2-4BB0-80B5-FC7B7F7FE448 v1

14.7.3 Single point input signal attributes converting function block

INDEXTSPQT GUID-9C3D6C45-6B3A-466C-86A1-3DBCD4809B33 v1

GUID-9B700C69-4DAE-434A-BCE6-CE2D1139680A v3
The value part of the single point input signal SI_IN is copied to SI_OUT output. The time part
of single point input is copied to the TIME output. The state bits in the common part and the
indication part of the input signal are copied to the corresponding state output.

INDEXTSPQT can propagate the quality, the value and the time stamps of the signals via IEC
61850.

14.7.3.1 Function block GUID-04AA5209-B919-4161-A585-336CE9618A89 v2

INDEXTSPQT
SI_IN* SI_OUT
TIME
BLOCKED
SUBST
INVALID
TEST

IEC14000067-1-en.vsd
IEC14000067 V1 EN-US

Figure 309: INDEXTSPQT function block

14.7.3.2 Signals GUID-4543C4C9-FAE2-4328-8DE2-4A5756A020E9 v1

PID-3821-INPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 462: INDEXTSPQT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
SI_IN BOOLEAN 0 Single indication

PID-3821-OUTPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 463: INDEXTSPQT Output signals

Name Type Description
SI_OUT BOOLEAN Single indication
TIME GROUP SIGNAL Timestamp of input
BLOCKED BOOLEAN Blocked for update
SUBST BOOLEAN Substituted
INVALID BOOLEAN Invalid value
TEST BOOLEAN Testmode

14.7.3.3 Technical data

GUID-C1E61AE5-22CF-4198-97CF-8C8043EE96D2 v1

14.7.4 Invalid logic function block INVALIDQT GUID-66C6DCEE-1F0E-4EB8-9ADB-97F8B41E53DF v4

Component which sets quality invalid of outputs according to a "valid" input.

553
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Logic

The values of the input signals INPUTx (where 1<x<16) are copied to the outputs OUTPUTx
(where 1<x<16). If the input VALID is 0 or if its quality bit is set invalid, all outputs OUTPUTx
(where 1<x<16) quality bit will be set to invalid. The time stamp of any output OUTPUTx (where
1<x<16) will be set to the latest time stamp of any input and the input VALID.

INVALIDQT can propagate the quality, the value and the time stamps of the signals via IEC
61850.

14.7.4.1 Function block GUID-0BD84306-0965-4702-8D5C-9570A70168EA v1

INVALIDQT
INPUT1 OUTPUT1
INPUT2 OUTPUT2
INPUT3 OUTPUT3
INPUT4 OUTPUT4
INPUT5 OUTPUT5
INPUT6 OUTPUT6
INPUT7 OUTPUT7
INPUT8 OUTPUT8
INPUT9 OUTPUT9
INPUT10 OUTPUT10
INPUT11 OUTPUT11
INPUT12 OUTPUT12
INPUT13 OUTPUT13
INPUT14 OUTPUT14
INPUT15 OUTPUT15
INPUT16 OUTPUT16
VALID

iec08000169.vsd
IEC08000169 V1 EN-US

Figure 310: INVALIDQT function block

14.7.4.2 Signals GUID-4543C4C9-FAE2-4328-8DE2-4A5756A020E9 v1

PID-3822-INPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 464: INVALIDQT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 6
INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 7
INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 8
INPUT9 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 9
INPUT10 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 10
INPUT11 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 11
INPUT12 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 12
INPUT13 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 13
INPUT14 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 14
INPUT15 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 15
INPUT16 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 16
VALID BOOLEAN 1 Inputs are valid or not

554
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 14
Logic

PID-3822-OUTPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 465: INVALIDQT Output signals

Name Type Description
OUTPUT1 BOOLEAN Indication output 1
OUTPUT2 BOOLEAN Indication output 2
OUTPUT3 BOOLEAN Indication output 3
OUTPUT4 BOOLEAN Indication output 4
OUTPUT5 BOOLEAN Indication output 5
OUTPUT6 BOOLEAN Indication output 6
OUTPUT7 BOOLEAN Indication output 7
OUTPUT8 BOOLEAN Indication output 8
OUTPUT9 BOOLEAN Indication output 9
OUTPUT10 BOOLEAN Indication output 10
OUTPUT11 BOOLEAN Indication output 11
OUTPUT12 BOOLEAN Indication output 12
OUTPUT13 BOOLEAN Indication output 13
OUTPUT14 BOOLEAN Indication output 14
OUTPUT15 BOOLEAN Indication output 15
OUTPUT16 BOOLEAN Indication output 16

14.7.4.3 Technical data

GUID-77FEBE9B-0882-4E85-8B1A-7671807BFC02 v1

14.7.5 Inverter function block INVERTERQT GUID-502064E0-FE2F-43C0-AA40-79D058FC3E1C v4

The INVERTERQT function block inverts one binary input signal to the output. It can propagate
the quality, value and the time stamps of the signals via IEC 61850.

14.7.5.1 Function block GUID-06C5C594-E00B-4FD5-8B0F-4ED05DB348B6 v2

INVERTERQT
INPUT OUT

IEC09000299-1-en.vsd
IEC09000299 V1 EN-US

Figure 311: INVERTERQT function block

14.7.5.2 Signals GUID-4543C4C9-FAE2-4328-8DE2-4A5756A020E9 v1

PID-3804-INPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 466: INVERTERQT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input signal

555
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Logic

PID-3804-OUTPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 467: INVERTERQT Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal

14.7.5.3 Technical data

GUID-F25B94C6-9CC9-48A0-A7A3-47627D2B56E2 v1

14.7.6 ORQT function block GUID-F8F8D591-F895-4BCB-ADBD-5F95E7B70FEB v2

GUID-F8AECD9C-83FC-4025-9AB5-809D88122277 v4
The ORQT function block (ORQT) is used to form general combinatory expressions OR with
boolean variables. ORQT function block has up to six inputs and two outputs. One of the
outputs is inverted. It can propagate the quality, value and the timestamps of the signals via
IEC 61850.

14.7.6.1 Function block GUID-BCDFD5F0-4F30-4012-BA49-2E5C2115912E v2

ORQT
INPUT1 OUT
INPUT2 NOUT
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6

IEC09000298-1-en.vsd
IEC09000298 V1 EN-US

Figure 312: ORQT function block

14.7.6.2 Signals GUID-4543C4C9-FAE2-4328-8DE2-4A5756A020E9 v1

PID-3807-INPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 468: ORQT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 6

PID-3807-OUTPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 469: ORQT Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

556
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 14
Logic

14.7.6.3 Technical data

GUID-88B27B3C-26D2-47AF-9878-CC19018171B1 v1

14.7.7 Pulse timer function block PULSETIMERQT GUID-5CB71BD1-58A0-4A06-9207-6DAE389B5288 v2

GUID-D930E5A7-C564-4464-B97F-C72B4801C917 v4
The pulse timer function block (PULSETIMERQT) can be used, for example, for pulse extensions
or for limiting the operation time of the outputs. PULSETIMERQT has a settable output pulse
length.

When the input goes to 1, the output will be 1 for the time set by the time delay parameter t.
Then it returns to 0.

When the output changes value, the time stamp of the output signal is updated.

The supported “quality” state bits are propagated from the input to the output at each
execution cycle. A change of these bits will not lead to an updated time stamp on the output.

PULSETIMERQT can propagate the quality, value and the time stamps of the signals via IEC
61850.

14.7.7.1 Function block GUID-C0490ECF-5C4E-4F17-B628-482694C590D2 v1

PULSETIMERQT
INPUT OUT

IEC15000145.vsd
IEC15000145 V1 EN-US

Figure 313: PULSETIMERQT function block

14.7.7.2 Signals GUID-4543C4C9-FAE2-4328-8DE2-4A5756A020E9 v1

PID-3810-INPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 470: PULSETIMERQT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input signal

PID-3810-OUTPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 471: PULSETIMERQT Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal

14.7.7.3 Settings
PID-3810-SETTINGS v4

Table 472: PULSETIMERQT Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
t 0.000 - s 0.001 0.010 Pulse time length
90000.000

14.7.7.4 Technical data

GUID-61263951-53A8-4113-82B5-3DB3BF0D9449 v1

557
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Logic

14.7.8 Reset/Set function block RSMEMORYQT GUID-095B2670-610E-47AE-A5D3-F3E7C0A56B65 v2

GUID-32A1B759-2ED8-45B3-8385-762167626CE2 v5
The Reset-set function (RSMEMORYQT) is a flip-flop with memory that can reset or set an
output from two inputs respectively. Each RSMEMORYQT function block has two outputs,
where one is inverted. The memory setting controls if, after a power interruption, the flip-flop
resets or returns to the state it had before the power interruption. For a Reset-Set flip-flop,
the RESET input has higher priority than the SET input.

RSMEMORYQT can propagate the quality, the value and the time stamps of the signals via IEC
61850.

Table 473: Truth table for RSMEMORYQT function block

RESET SET OUT NOUT
0 0 Last Inverted last
value value
0 1 1 0
1 0 0 1
1 1 0 1

14.7.8.1 Function block GUID-BDBFD8BA-9253-4277-96D8-0FF7EE93B56E v1

RSMEMORYQT
SET OUT
RESET NOUT

IEC14000069-1-en.vsd
IEC14000069 V1 EN-US

Figure 314: RSMEMORYQT function block

14.7.8.2 Signals GUID-4543C4C9-FAE2-4328-8DE2-4A5756A020E9 v1

PID-3812-INPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 474: RSMEMORYQT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
SET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to set
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to reset

PID-3812-OUTPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 475: RSMEMORYQT Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

558
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 14
Logic

14.7.8.3 Settings
PID-3812-SETTINGS v4

Table 476: RSMEMORYQT Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Memory Off - - On Operating mode of the memory
On function

14.7.8.4 Technical data

GUID-94C803B4-6C5A-4072-AB5C-20DDE98C9A70 v1

14.7.9 Set/Reset function block SRMEMORYQT GUID-D910BA2D-07FA-44C5-A820-E0413AD7FD91 v2

GUID-39060D4B-9AA7-4505-9487-88B2CBC534F0 v5
The Set-reset function (SRMEMORYQT) is a flip-flop with memory that can set or reset an
output from two inputs respectively. Each SRMEMORYQT function block has two outputs,
where one is inverted. The memory setting controls if, after a power interruption, the flip-flop
resets or returns to the state it had before the power interruption. The SET input has priority.

SRMEMORYQT can propagate the quality, the value and the time stamps of the signals via IEC
61850.

Table 477: Truth table for SRMEMORYQT function block

SET RESET OUT NOUT
0 0 Last Inverted
value last value
0 1 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 1 1 0

If Memory parameter is On, the output result is stored in semi-retained memory.

14.7.9.1 Function block GUID-8B04BA86-9685-4E73-9C04-3AE74752CDBF v1

SRMEMORYQT
SET OUT
RESET NOUT

IEC14000070-1-en.vsd
IEC14000070 V1 EN-US

Figure 315: SRMEMORYQT function block

14.7.9.2 Signals GUID-4543C4C9-FAE2-4328-8DE2-4A5756A020E9 v1

PID-3814-INPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 478: SRMEMORYQT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
SET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to set
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to reset

559
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Logic

PID-3814-OUTPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 479: SRMEMORYQT Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

14.7.9.3 Settings
PID-3814-SETTINGS v4

Table 480: SRMEMORYQT Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Memory Off - - On Operating mode of the memory
On function

14.7.9.4 Technical data

GUID-341562FB-6149-495B-8A63-200DF16A5590 v1

14.7.10 Settable timer function block TIMERSETQT GUID-582D9F19-9974-40D6-95EB-7BAD72910748 v2

GUID-3830BCA7-4876-481E-B5AC-2104675232E7 v5
The Settable timer function block (TIMERSETQT) has two outputs for delay of the input signal
at pick-up and drop-out. The timer has a settable time delay (t). It also has an Operation
setting On/Off that controls the operation of the timer.

When the output changes value, the timestamp of the output signal is updated. The supported
“quality” state bits are propagated from the input to the output at each execution cycle. A
change of these bits will not lead to an updated timestamp on the output.

TIMERSETQT can propagate the quality, value and the timestamps of the signals via IEC 61850.

14.7.10.1 Function block GUID-13589BAE-38AE-46A1-8E9F-94BCD1CBCBF1 v1

TIMERSETQT
INPUT ON
OFF

IEC14000068-1-en.vsd
IEC14000068 V1 EN-US

Figure 316: TIMERSETQT function

14.7.10.2 Signals GUID-4543C4C9-FAE2-4328-8DE2-4A5756A020E9 v1

PID-3816-INPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 481: TIMERSETQT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input signal

560
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 14
Logic

PID-3816-OUTPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 482: TIMERSETQT Output signals

Name Type Description
ON BOOLEAN Output signal, pick-up delayed
OFF BOOLEAN Output signal, drop-out delayed

14.7.10.3 Settings
PID-3816-SETTINGS v4

Table 483: TIMERSETQT Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
t 0.000 - s 0.001 0.000 Delay for settable timer n
90000.000

14.7.10.4 Technical data

GUID-B6231B97-05ED-40E8-B735-1E1A50FDB85F v1

14.7.11 Exclusive OR function block XORQT GUID-76ADACC1-A273-4100-BE62-99BCDABFEB7A v2

GUID-62986D87-1690-499E-B8D3-1F51D2DA191E v4
The exclusive OR function (XORQT) function is used to generate combinatory expressions with
boolean variables. XORQT function has two inputs and two outputs. One of the outputs is
inverted. The output signal OUT is 1 if the input signals are different and 0 if they are equal.

Table 484: Truth table for XORQT function block

INPUT1 INPUT2 OUT NOUT
0 0 0 1
0 1 1 0
1 0 1 0
1 1 0 1

XORQT can propagate the quality, value and time stamps of the signals via IEC 61850.

14.7.11.1 Function block GUID-A685524C-DF12-4BA8-A29C-A027CEAC75E5 v2

XORQT
INPUT1 OUT
INPUT2 NOUT

IEC09000300-1-en.vsd
IEC09000300 V1 EN-US

Figure 317: XORQT function block

14.7.11.2 Signals GUID-4543C4C9-FAE2-4328-8DE2-4A5756A020E9 v1

561
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Logic

PID-3818-INPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 485: XORQT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 2

PID-3818-OUTPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 486: XORQT Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

14.7.11.3 Technical data

GUID-1C381E02-6B9E-44DC-828F-8B3EA7EDAA54 v1

14.8 Extension logic package IP11362-1 v2

When extra configurable logic blocks are required, an additional package can be ordered.
GUID-19810098-1820-4765-8F0B-7D585FFC0C78 v6

14.9 Fixed signals FXDSIGN

14.9.1 Identification
SEMOD167904-2 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Fixed signals FXDSIGN - -

14.9.2 Functionality M15322-3 v11

The Fixed signals function FXDSIGN generates nine pre-set (fixed) signals that can be used in
the configuration of an IED, either for forcing the unused inputs in other function blocks to a
certain level/value, or for creating certain logic. Boolean, integer, floating point, string types of
signals are available.

One FXDSIGN function block is included in all IEDs.

562
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 14
Logic

14.9.3 Function block SEMOD54909-4 v4

FXDSIGN
OFF
ON
INTZERO
INTONE
INTALONE
REALZERO
STRNULL
ZEROSMPL
GRP_OFF

IEC05000445-3-en.vsd
IEC05000445 V3 EN-US

Figure 318: FXDSIGN function block

14.9.4 Signals
PID-6191-OUTPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 487: FXDSIGN Output signals

Name Type Description
OFF BOOLEAN Boolean signal fixed off
ON BOOLEAN Boolean signal fixed on
INTZERO INTEGER Integer signal fixed zero
INTONE INTEGER Integer signal fixed one
INTALONE INTEGER Integer signal fixed all ones
REALZERO REAL Real signal fixed zero
STRNULL STRING String signal with no characters
ZEROSMPL GROUP SIGNAL Channel id for zero sample
GRP_OFF GROUP SIGNAL Group signal fixed off

14.9.5 Settings
PID-1325-SETTINGS v11
The function does not have any settings available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED
Manager (PCM600).

14.9.6 Operation principle SEMOD54827-5 v6

There are nine outputs from FXDSIGN function block:

• OFF is a boolean signal, fixed to OFF (boolean 0) value

• ON is a boolean signal, fixed to ON (boolean 1) value
• INTZERO is an integer number, fixed to integer value 0
• INTONE is an integer number, fixed to integer value 1
• INTALONE is an integer value FFFF (hex)
• REALZERO is a floating point real number, fixed to 0.0 value
• STRNULL is a string, fixed to an empty string (null) value
• ZEROSMPL is a channel index, fixed to 0 value
• GRP_OFF is a group signal, fixed to 0 value

563
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Logic

14.10 Boolean 16 to Integer conversion B16I SEMOD175715-1 v1

14.10.1 Identification
SEMOD175721-2 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Boolean 16 to integer conversion B16I - -

SEMOD175725-4 v4
Boolean 16 to integer conversion function B16I is used to transform a set of 16 binary (logical)
signals into an integer.

14.10.2 Function block SEMOD175798-5 v4

B16I
BLOCK OUT
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
IN6
IN7
IN8
IN9
IN10
IN11
IN12
IN13
IN14
IN15
IN16

IEC07000128-2-en.vsd
IEC07000128 V2 EN-US

Figure 319: B16I function block

14.10.3 Signals
PID-3606-INPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 488: B16I Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1
IN2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2
IN3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3
IN4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4
IN5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5
IN6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6
IN7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7
IN8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8
IN9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9
IN10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10
IN11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11
Table continues on next page

564
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 14
Logic

Name Type Default Description

IN12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12
IN13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13
IN14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14
IN15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15
IN16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16

PID-3606-OUTPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 489: B16I Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT INTEGER Output value

14.10.4 Monitored data

PID-3606-MONITOREDDATA v4

Table 490: B16I Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OUT INTEGER - - Output value

14.10.5 Settings ABBD8E283673 v3

The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

14.10.6 Operation principle SEMOD175737-4 v5

The Boolean 16 to integer conversion function (B16I) will transfer a combination of up to 16

binary inputs INx, where 1≤x≤16, to an integer. Each INx represents a value according to the
table below from 0 to 32768. This follows the general formula: INx = 2x-1 where 1≤x≤16. The sum
of all the values on the activated INx will be available on the output OUT as a sum of the integer
values of all the inputs INx that are activated. OUT is an integer. When all INx (where 1≤x≤16)
are activated, that is = Boolean 1, it corresponds to that integer 65535 is available on the
output OUT. The B16I function is designed for receiving up to 16 booleans input locally. If the
BLOCK input is activated, it will freeze the output at the last value.

Values of each of the different OUTx from function block B16I for 1≤x≤16.

The sum of the value on each INx corresponds to the integer presented on the output OUT on
the function block B16I

Name of input Type Default Description Value when Value when

activated deactivated
IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 1 0
IN2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2 2 0
IN3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3 4 0
IN4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4 8 0
IN5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5 16 0
IN6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6 32 0
IN7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7 64 0
Table continues on next page

565
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Logic

Name of input Type Default Description Value when Value when

activated deactivated
IN8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8 128 0
IN9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9 256 0
IN10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10 512 0
IN11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11 1024 0
IN12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12 2048 0
IN13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13 4096 0
IN14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14 8192 0
IN15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15 16384 0
IN16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16 32768 0

The sum of the numbers in column “Value when activated” when all INx (where 1≤x≤16) are
active that is=1; is 65535. 65535 is the highest boolean value that can be converted to an
integer by the B16I function block.

14.10.7 Technical data

GUID-65A2876A-F779-41C4-ACD7-7662D1E7F1F2 v1

Table 491: Number of B16I instances

Function Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
B16I 6 4 8

14.11 Boolean to integer conversion with logical node

representation, 16 bit BTIGAPC SEMOD175753-1 v4

14.11.1 Identification
SEMOD175757-2 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Boolean 16 to integer conversion BTIGAPC - -
with logic node representation

14.11.2 Functionality SEMOD175781-4 v8

Boolean to integer conversion with logical node representation, 16 bit (BTIGAPC) is used to
transform a set of 16 boolean (logical) signals into an integer. The block input will freeze the
output at the last value.

566
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 14
Logic

14.11.3 Function block SEMOD175801-5 v4

BTIGAPC
BLOCK OUT
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
IN6
IN7
IN8
IN9
IN10
IN11
IN12
IN13
IN14
IN15
IN16

IEC13000303-1-en.vsd
IEC13000303 V1 EN-US

Figure 320: BTIGAPC function block

14.11.4 Signals
PID-6944-INPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 492: BTIGAPC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1
IN2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2
IN3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3
IN4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4
IN5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5
IN6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6
IN7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7
IN8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8
IN9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9
IN10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10
IN11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11
IN12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12
IN13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13
IN14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14
IN15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15
IN16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16

PID-6944-OUTPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 493: BTIGAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT INTEGER Output value

567
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Logic

14.11.5 Settings ABBD8E283673 v3

The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

14.11.6 Monitored data

PID-6944-MONITOREDDATA v2

Table 494: BTIGAPC Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OUT INTEGER - - Output value

14.11.7 Operation principle SEMOD158425-4 v6

The Boolean 16 to integer conversion with logic node representation function (BTIGAPC) will
transfer a combination of up to 16 binary inputs INx, where 1≤x≤16, to an integer. Each INx
represents a value according to the table below from 0 to 32768. This follows the general
formula: INx = 2x-1 where 1≤x≤16. The sum of all the values on the activated INx will be available
on the output OUT as a sum of the integer values of all the inputs INx that are activated. OUT
is an integer. When all INx (where 1≤x≤16) are activated, that is = Boolean 1, it corresponds to
that integer 65535 is available on the output OUT. If the BLOCK input is activated, it will freeze
the logical outputs at the last value.

Values of each of the different OUTx from function block BTIGAPC for 1≤x≤16.

The sum of the value on each INx corresponds to the integer presented on the output OUT on
the function block BTIGAPC.

Name of input Type Default Description Value when Value when

activated deactivated
IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 1 0
IN2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2 2 0
IN3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3 4 0
IN4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4 8 0
IN5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5 16 0
IN6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6 32 0
IN7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7 64 0
IN8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8 128 0
IN9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9 256 0
IN10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10 512 0
IN11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11 1024 0
IN12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12 2048 0
IN13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13 4096 0
IN14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14 8192 0
IN15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15 16384 0
IN16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16 32768 0

The sum of the numbers in column “Value when activated” when all INx (where 1≤x≤16) are
active that is=1; is 65535. 65535 is the highest boolean value that can be converted to an
integer by the BTIGAPC function block.

568
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 14
Logic

14.11.8 Technical data

GUID-3820F464-D296-4CAD-8491-F3F997359D79 v1

Table 495: Number of BTIGAPC instances

Function Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
BTIGAPC 4 4 8

14.12 Integer to boolean 16 conversion IB16

14.12.1 Identification
SEMOD167941-2 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Integer to boolean 16 conversion IB16 - -

14.12.2 Functionality SEMOD158373-5 v5

Integer to boolean 16 conversion function IB16 is used to transform an integer into a set of 16
binary (logical) signals.

14.12.3 Function block SEMOD158389-4 v4

IB16
BLOCK OUT1
INP OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
OUT5
OUT6
OUT7
OUT8
OUT9
OUT10
OUT11
OUT12
OUT13
OUT14
OUT15
OUT16

IEC06000501-3-en.vsdx

IEC06000501 V3 EN-US

Figure 321: IB16 function block

14.12.4 Signals
PID-3496-INPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 496: IB16 Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
INP INTEGER 0 Integer Input

569
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Logic

PID-3496-OUTPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 497: IB16 Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1
OUT2 BOOLEAN Output 2
OUT3 BOOLEAN Output 3
OUT4 BOOLEAN Output 4
OUT5 BOOLEAN Output 5
OUT6 BOOLEAN Output 6
OUT7 BOOLEAN Output 7
OUT8 BOOLEAN Output 8
OUT9 BOOLEAN Output 9
OUT10 BOOLEAN Output 10
OUT11 BOOLEAN Output 11
OUT12 BOOLEAN Output 12
OUT13 BOOLEAN Output 13
OUT14 BOOLEAN Output 14
OUT15 BOOLEAN Output 15
OUT16 BOOLEAN Output 16

14.12.5 Setting parameters ABBD8E242451 v3

The function does not have any parameters available in local HMI or Protection and Control IED
Manager (PCM600)

14.12.6 Operation principle SEMOD158385-4 v4

With integer 15 on the input INP the OUT1 = OUT2 = OUT3= OUT4 =1 and the remaining OUTx =
0 for (5≤x≤16).

OUTx represents a value when activated. The value of each of the OUTx is in accordance with
the table IB16_1. When not activated the OUTx has the value 0.

In the above example when integer 15 is on the input INP the OUT1 has a value =1, OUT2 has a
value =2, OUT3 has a value =4 and OUT4 has a value =8. The sum of these OUTx is equal to 1 + 2
+ 4 + 8 = 15.

This follows the general formulae: The sum of the values of all OUTx = 2x-1 where 1≤x≤16 will be
equal to the integer value on the input INP.

The Integer to Boolean 16 conversion function (IB16) will transfer an integer with a value
between 0 to 65535 connected to the input INP to a combination of activated outputs OUTx
where 1≤x≤16. The sum of the values of all OUTx will then be equal to the integer on input INP.
The values of the different OUTx are according to the table below. When an OUTx is not
activated, its value is 0.

When all OUTx where 1≤x≤16 are activated that is = Boolean 1 it corresponds to that integer
65535 is connected to input INP. The IB16 function is designed for receiving the integer input
locally. If the BLOCK input is activated, it will freeze the logical outputs at the last value.

Values of each of the different OUTx from function block IB16 for 1≤x≤16.

570
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 14
Logic

The sum of the value on each INx corresponds to the integer presented on the output OUT on
the function block IB16.

Name of OUTx Type Description Value when Value when

activated deactivated
OUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1 1 0
OUT2 BOOLEAN Output 2 2 0
OUT3 BOOLEAN Output 3 4 0
OUT4 BOOLEAN Output 4 8 0
OUT5 BOOLEAN Output 5 16 0
OUT6 BOOLEAN Output 6 32 0
OUT7 BOOLEAN Output 7 64 0
OUT8 BOOLEAN Output 8 128 0
OUT9 BOOLEAN Output 9 256 0
OUT10 BOOLEAN Output 10 512 0
OUT11 BOOLEAN Output 11 1024 0
OUT12 BOOLEAN Output 12 2048 0
OUT13 BOOLEAN Output 13 4096 0
OUT14 BOOLEAN Output 14 8192 0
OUT15 BOOLEAN Output 15 16384 0
OUT16 BOOLEAN Output 16 32768 0

The sum of the numbers in column “Value when activated” when all OUTx (where x = 1 to 16)
are active that is=1; is 65535. 65535 is the highest integer that can be converted by the IB16
function block.

14.12.7 Technical data

GUID-B45901F4-B163-4696-8220-7F8CAC84D793 v1

Table 498: Number of IB16 instances

Function Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
IB16 6 4 8

14.13 Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node

representation ITBGAPC SEMOD158419-1 v3

14.13.1 Identification
SEMOD167944-2 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Integer to boolean 16 conversion ITBGAPC - -
with logic node representation

571
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Logic

14.13.2 Functionality SEMOD158421-5 v8

Integer to boolean conversion with logic node representation function ITBGAPC is used to
transform an integer which is transmitted over IEC 61850 and received by the function to 16
binary coded (logic) output signals.

ITBGAPC function can only receive remote values over IEC 61850 when the R/L (Remote/Local)
push button on the front HMI, indicates that the control mode for the operator is in position R
(Remote i.e. the LED adjacent to R is lit ), and the corresponding signal is connected to the
input PSTO ITBGAPC function block. The input BLOCK will freeze the output at the last received
value and blocks new integer values to be received and converted to binary coded outputs.

14.13.3 Function block SEMOD158435-4 v4

ITBGAPC
BLOCK OUT1
PSTO OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
OUT5
OUT6
OUT7
OUT8
OUT9
OUT10
OUT11
OUT12
OUT13
OUT14
OUT15
OUT16

IEC14000012-1-en.vsd
IEC14000012 V1 EN-US

Figure 322: ITBGAPC function block

14.13.4 Signals
PID-3627-INPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 499: ITBGAPC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
PSTO INTEGER 1 Operator place selection

PID-3627-OUTPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 500: ITBGAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1
OUT2 BOOLEAN Output 2
OUT3 BOOLEAN Output 3
OUT4 BOOLEAN Output 4
OUT5 BOOLEAN Output 5
OUT6 BOOLEAN Output 6
OUT7 BOOLEAN Output 7
OUT8 BOOLEAN Output 8
OUT9 BOOLEAN Output 9
Table continues on next page

572
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 14
Logic

Name Type Description

OUT10 BOOLEAN Output 10
OUT11 BOOLEAN Output 11
OUT12 BOOLEAN Output 12
OUT13 BOOLEAN Output 13
OUT14 BOOLEAN Output 14
OUT15 BOOLEAN Output 15
OUT16 BOOLEAN Output 16

14.13.5 Settings
GUID-F573CA16-4821-4203-970A-F7D01AF5E63B v1
This function does not have any setting parameters.

14.13.6 Operation principle SEMOD176587-4 v6

An example is used to explain the principle of operation: With integer 15 sent to and received
by the ITBGAPC function on the IEC 61850 the OUTx changes from 0 to 1 on each of the OUT1;
OUT2 OUT3 and OUT4. All other OUTx (5≤x≤16) remains 0. The boolean interpretation of this is
represented by the assigned values of each of the outputs OUT1 = 1; and OUT2 = 2; and OUT3=
4; and OUT4 = 8. The sum of these OUTx (1≤x≤4) is equal to the integer 15 received via the IEC
61850 network. The remaining OUTx = 0 for (5≤x≤16).

OUTx represents a value when activated. The value of each of the OUTx is in accordance with
the Table 501. When not activated the OUTx has the value 0.

The value of each OUTx for 1≤x≤16 (1≤x≤16) follows the general formulae: OUTx = 2x-1 The sum
of the values of all activated OUTx = 2x-1 where 1≤x≤16 will be equal to the integer value
received over IEC 61850 to the ITBGAPC_1 function block.

The Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node representation function (ITBGAPC) will
transfer an integer with a value between 0 to 65535 communicated via IEC 61850 and
connected to the ITBGAPC function block to a combination of activated outputs OUTx where
1≤x≤16. The values represented by the different OUTx are according to Table 501. When an
OUTx is not activated, its value is 0.

The ITBGAPC function is designed for receiving the integer input from a station computer - for
example, over IEC 61850. If the BLOCK input is activated, it will freeze the logical outputs at the
last value.

Table 501: Outputs and their values when activated

Name of OUTx Type Description Value when Value when
activated deactivated
OUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1 1 0
OUT2 BOOLEAN Output 2 2 0
OUT3 BOOLEAN Output 3 4 0
OUT4 BOOLEAN Output 4 8 0
OUT5 BOOLEAN Output 5 16 0
OUT6 BOOLEAN Output 6 32 0
OUT7 BOOLEAN Output 7 64 0
OUT8 BOOLEAN Output 8 128 0
Table continues on next page

573
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Logic

Name of OUTx Type Description Value when Value when

activated deactivated
OUT9 BOOLEAN Output 9 256 0
OUT10 BOOLEAN Output 10 512 0
OUT11 BOOLEAN Output 11 1024 0
OUT12 BOOLEAN Output 12 2048 0
OUT13 BOOLEAN Output 13 4096 0
OUT14 BOOLEAN Output 14 8192 0
OUT15 BOOLEAN Output 15 16384 0
OUT16 BOOLEAN Output 16 32768 0

The sum of the numbers in column “Value when activated” when all OUTx (1≤x≤16) are active
equals 65535. This is the highest integer that can be converted to boolean by the ITBGAPC
function block.

The operator position input (PSTO) determines the operator place. The integer number that is
communicated to the ITBGAPC can only be written to the block while the PSTO is in position
“Remote”. If PSTO is in position ”Off” or ”Local”, then no changes are applied to the outputs.

14.13.7 Technical data

GUID-A339BBA3-8FD0-429D-BB49-809EAC4D53B0 v1

Table 502: Number of ITBGAPC instances

Function Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
ITBGAPC 4 4 8

14.14 Elapsed time integrator with limit transgression and

overflow supervision TEIGAPC

14.14.1 Identification GUID-1913E066-37D1-4689-9178-5B3C8B029815 v3

Function Description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device

identificatio identificatio number
n n
Elapsed time integrator TEIGAPC - -

14.14.2 Functionality GUID-390D7433-0C1C-48B4-9A90-71AA148C3C35 v3

Elapsed Time Integrator (TEIGAPC) function is a function that accumulates the elapsed time
when a given binary signal has been high, see also Figure 323.

574
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 14
Logic

BLOCK
RESET
IN Time Integration ACCTIME
with Retain

q-1

a
OVERFLOW
AND
a>b
999 999 s b

a
WARNING
AND
a>b
tWarning b

a
ALARM
AND
a>b
tAlarm b

q-1 = unit delay IEC13000290-2-en.vsd

IEC13000290 V2 EN-US

Figure 323: TEIGAPC logics

The main features of TEIGAPC

• Applicable to long time integration up to 999 999.9 seconds

• Supervision of overflow
• Possibility to define a warning and an alarm with the resolution of 10 milliseconds
• Retain the integration value
• Possibilities for blocking and reset of the total integrated time
• Report of the integrated time

14.14.3 Function block GUID-6D50A060-7751-405B-AEC1-FAE942EBDA64 v2

TEIGAPC
BLOCK WARNING
IN ALARM
RESET OVERFLOW
ACCTIME

IEC14000014-1-en.vsd
IEC14000014 V1 EN-US

Figure 324: TEIGAPC function block

14.14.4 Signals
PID-4047-INPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 503: TEIGAPC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Freeze the integration and block the other outputs
IN BOOLEAN 0 The input signal that is used to measure the elapsed time,
when its value is high
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset the integration time

575
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Logic

PID-4047-OUTPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 504: TEIGAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
WARNING BOOLEAN Indicator of the integrated time has reached the warning limit
ALARM BOOLEAN Indicator of the integrated time has reached the alarm limit
OVERFLOW BOOLEAN Indicator of the integrated time has reached the overflow
limit
ACCTIME REAL Integrated elapsed time in seconds

14.14.5 Settings
PID-4047-SETTINGS v5

Table 505: TEIGAPC Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
tWarning 1.00 - 999999.99 s 0.01 600.00 Time limit for warning supervision
tAlarm 1.00 - 999999.99 s 0.01 1200.00 Time limit for alarm supervision

14.14.6 Operation principle GUID-04CC8365-DCDE-4DC7-BEF0-6EF8382305DD v3

The elapsed time integrator (TEIGAPC) provides

• time integration, accumulating the elapsed time when a given binary signal has been high
• blocking and reset of the total integrated time
• supervision of limit transgression and overflow, the overflow limit is fixed to 999999.9
seconds
• retaining of the integrated value

Figure 325 describes the simplified logic of the function where the block “Time
Integration“ covers the logics for the first two items listed above while the block
“Transgression Supervision Plus Retain“ contains the logics for the last two.

576
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 14
Logic

Loop Delay

tWarning
OVERFLOW
tAlarm
Transgression Supervision WARNING
Plus Retain
ALARM

BLOCK
RESET ACCTIME
Time Integration
IN

Loop Delay

IEC12000195-4-en.vsd

IEC12000195 V4 EN-US

Figure 325: TEIGAPC Simplified logic

TEIGAPC main functionalities

• integration of the elapsed time when IN has been high

• applicable to long time integration (≤999 999.9 seconds)
• output ACCTIME presents integrated value in seconds
• integrated value is retained in nonvolatile memory
• any retained value with a warning/alarm/overflow is used as initiation value for the
integration following by a restart
• RESET: Reset of the integration value. Consequently all other outputs are also reset
• unconditionally on the input IN value
• reset the value of the nonvolatile memory to zero
• BLOCK: Freeze the integration and block/reset the other outputs
• unconditionally on the signal value
• BLOCK request overrides RESET request
• Monitor and report the conditions of limit transgression
• overflow if output ACCTIME >999999.9 seconds
• alarm if ACCTIME > tAlarm
• warning if ACCTIME > tWarning

The ACCTIME output represents the integrated time in seconds while tOverflow, tAlarm and
tWarning are the time limit parameters in seconds.

tAlarm and tWarning are user settable limits. They are also independent, that is, there is no
check if tAlarm > tWarning.

tAlarm and tWarning are possible to be defined with a resolution of 10 ms, depending on the
level of the defined values for the parameters.

The limit for the overflow supervision is fixed at 999999.9 seconds. The outputs freeze if an
overflow occurs.

14.14.6.1 Operation accuracy GUID-E0772193-9F6E-43DA-B642-2923565E5D4C v3

The accuracy of TEIGAPC depends on essentially three factors

577
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Logic

• function cycle time

• the pulse length
• the number of pulses, that is, the number of rising and falling flank pairs

In principle, a shorter function cycle time, longer integrated time length or more pulses may
lead to reduced accuracy.

14.14.6.2 Memory storage GUID-6FDD6590-30F9-4CC1-AC9D-945544AB8688 v3

The value of the integrated elapsed time is retained in a non-volatile memory.

14.14.7 Technical data

GUID-B258726E-1129-47C9-94F9-BE634A2085FA v3

Table 506: TEIGAPC Technical data

Function Cycle time (ms) Range or value Accuracy
Elapsed time integration 3 0 ~ 999999.9 s ±0.2% or ±20 ms whichever
is greater
8 0 ~ 999999.9 s ±0.2% or ±100 ms
whichever is greater
100 0 ~ 999999.9 s ±0.2% or ±250 ms
whichever is greater

Table 507: Number of TEIGAPC instances

Function Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
TEIGAPC 4 4 4

14.15 Comparator for integer inputs INTCOMP

14.15.1 Identification GUID-5992B0F2-FC1B-4838-9BAB-2D2542BB264D v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Comparison of integer values INTCOMP Int<=>

14.15.2 Functionality GUID-A93564FA-0017-4939-A9C1-095DA0FD9832 v1

The function gives the possibility to monitor the level of integer values in the system relative
to each other or to a fixed value. It is a basic arithmetic function that can be used for
monitoring, supervision, interlocking and other logics.

578
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 14
Logic

14.15.3 Function block GUID-EB28F45B-B1D0-452F-98B4-F96D7FA34069 v1

INTCOMP
INPUT INEQUAL
REF INHIGH
INLOW

IEC15000052-1-en.vsdx
IEC15000052 V1 EN-US

14.15.4 Signals
PID-6503-INPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 508: INTCOMP Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT INTEGER 0 Input value to be compared with reference value
REF INTEGER 0 Reference value to be compared with input value

PID-6503-OUTPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 509: INTCOMP Output signals

Name Type Description
INEQUAL BOOLEAN Input value is equal to the reference value
INHIGH BOOLEAN Input value is higher than the reference value
INLOW BOOLEAN Input value is lower than the reference value

14.15.5 Settings
PID-6503-SETTINGS v5

Table 510: INTCOMP Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
EnaAbs Signed - - Signed Selection for absolute or signed
Absolute comparison
RefSource Set Value - - Set Value Selection for reference value either
Input REF input or setting
SetValue -2000000000 - - 1 100 Set value for reference
2000000000

14.15.6 Operation principle GUID-E9C1B863-ACA7-45C0-91F1-A51FE38755FE v1

The comparison can be done in two ways,

• Between 2 inputs, INPUT and REF

• Between INPUT and the value set by the user SetValue.

The selection of reference value for comparison can be done through setting RefSource. If
RefSource is selected as REF then the reference value for comparison is taken from second
input signal (REF). If RefSource is selected as SetValue then the reference value for comparison
is taken from setting (SetValue).

The comparison can be done either between absolute values or signed values and it depends
on the setting EnaAbs. If EnaAbs is selected as Absolute then both input and reference value is

579
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Logic

converted into absolute values and comparison is done. If EnaAbs is selected as Signed then
the comparison is done without any conversion.

The function has three state outputs high, low and equal to condition. It will check the
following condition and give corresponding outputs.

• If the input is above the reference value then INHIGH will set
• If the input is below the reference value then INLOW will set
• If the input is equal to reference value then INEQUAL will set

EnaAbs
INPUT ABS T a
F INHIGH
a>b
b

a INEQUAL
a=b
b
RefSource

REF ABS T
T
SetValue
F a INLOW
F a<b
b
IEC15000129-3-en.vsdx

IEC15000129 V3 EN-US

Figure 326: Function logic diagram for INTCOMP

14.16 Comparator for real inputs REALCOMP

14.16.1 Identification GUID-0D68E846-5A15-4C2C-91A2-F81A74034E81 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Comparator for real inputs REALCOMP Real<=>

14.16.2 Functionality GUID-E17A88D7-D095-4F36-9CD5-64EBFD2A1DEA v1

The function gives the possibility to monitor the level of real value signals in the system
relative to each other or to a fixed value. It is a basic arithmetic function that can be used for
monitoring, supervision, interlocking and other logics.

14.16.3 Function block GUID-8752DF2A-D131-4461-80C6-C52F9980D228 v1

REALCOMP
INPUT INEQUAL
REF INHIGH
INLOW

IEC15000053-1-en.vsdx
IEC15000053 V1 EN-US

580
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 14
Logic

14.16.4 Signals
PID-6492-INPUTSIGNALS v10

Table 511: REALCOMP Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT REAL 0.000 Input value to be compared with reference value
REF REAL 0.000 Reference value to be compared with input value

PID-6492-OUTPUTSIGNALS v9

Table 512: REALCOMP Output signals

Name Type Description
INEQUAL BOOLEAN Input value is equal to the reference value
INHIGH BOOLEAN Input value is higher than the reference value
INLOW BOOLEAN Input value is lower than the reference value

14.16.5 Settings
PID-6492-SETTINGS v8

Table 513: REALCOMP Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
EnaAbs Signed - - Signed Selection for absolute or signed
Absolute comparison
RefSource Set Value - - Set Value Selection for reference value either
Input REF input or setting
SetValue -999.999 - - 0.001 0.001 Set value for reference
999.999
SetValPrefix milli - - unit Multiplication factor for SetValue
unit
kilo
Mega
Giga
EqualBandHigh 0.10 - 10.00 % 0.01 0.50 Equal band high limit in % of
reference value
EqualBandLow 0.10 - 10.00 % 0.01 0.50 Equal band low limit in % of reference
value

14.16.6 Operation principle GUID-3FA699A8-D076-4E5E-BCB8-C6B7907573D1 v1

The comparison can be done in two ways,

1. Between 2 inputs, INPUT and REF

2. Between INPUT and the value set by the user SetValue

The selection of reference value for comparison can be done through setting RefSource. If
RefSource is selected as REF then the reference value for comparison is taken from second
input signal (REF). If RefSource is selected as SetValue then the reference value for comparison
is taken from setting (SetValue).

Generally the inputs to the function are in SI units, but when the comparison is to be done with
respect to set level, then the user can set a value in any unit out of Milli to Giga range in setting

581
Technical manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Logic

SetValue. The unit can be separately set with setting RefPrefix. Internally the function handles
the reference value for comparator as SetValue*RefPrefix.

Additionally the comparison can be done either between absolute values or signed values and
it depends on the setting EnaAbs. If EnaAbs is selected as Absolute then both input and
reference value is converted into absolute values and comparison is done. If EnaAbs is selected
as Signed then the comparison is done without any conversion.

EnaAbs
INPUT
ABS T
F
High
Comparator
EqualBandHigh INHIGH

RefSource XOR INEQUAL

REF ABS T
T Low
F
SetValue F comparator
INLOW
RefPrefix

EqualBandLow

IEC15000130-1-en.vsdx
IEC15000130 V1 EN-US

Figure 327: Logic diagram for REALCOMP

This function has two settings EqualBandHigh and EqualBandLow to provide margins from
reference value for equal to condition. When the INPUT value is within high and low band,
output INEQUAL will get set.

If the INPUT is above the equal high level margin then output INHIGH will set. Similarly if the
INPUT is below the equal low level margin then output INLOW will set. In order to avoid
oscillations at boundary conditions of equal band low limit and high limit, hysteresis has been
provided

INEQUAL Reset / INHIGH Set INEQUAL Set / INHIGH Reset

EqualBandHigh

Internal
Equal Band REF or SetValue Hysteresis for
equal band

EqualBandLow

INEQUAL Reset / INLOW Set INEQUAL Set / INLOW Reset

IEC15000261-1-en.vsdx

IEC15000261 V1 EN-US

Figure 328: Operation principle of REALCOMP

582
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 14
Logic

When EnaAbs is set as absolute comparison and SetValue is set less than 0.2%
of the set unit then INLOW output will never pickups. During the above
mentioned condition, due to marginal value for avoiding oscillations of
function outputs, the INLOW output will never set.

14.16.7 Technical data

GUID-62792FCB-B436-4034-9A08-C9FF918FF547 v1
REALCOMP function can compare the values from milli value level to giga value level and the
maximum expectable accuracy level from the function is 10 µ.
GUID-3FDD7677-1D86-42AD-A545-B66081C49B47 v1

Table 514: REALCOMP Technical data

Function Accuracy
Operate value, ±0.5% of set value
EqualBandHigh
and EqualBandLow
Reset value, > 0.1% of set RefPrefix
EqualBandHigh
Reset value, < 0.1% of set RefPrefix
EqualBandLow

Table 515: Number of REALCOMP instances

Function Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
REALCOMP 4 4 4

583
Technical manual
584
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 15
Monitoring

Section 15 Monitoring

15.1 Measurements IP14593-1 v3

15.1.1 Identification
SEMOD56123-2 v7

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Measurements CVMMXN -
P, Q, S, I, U, f

SYMBOL-RR V1 EN-US

Phase current measurement CMMXU -

SYMBOL-SS V1 EN-US

Phase-phase voltage measurement VMMXU -

SYMBOL-UU V1 EN-US

Current sequence component CMSQI -

measurement
I1, I2, I0

SYMBOL-VV V1 EN-US

Voltage sequence component VMSQI -

measurement
U1, U2, U0

SYMBOL-TT V1 EN-US

Phase-neutral voltage measurement VNMMXU -

SYMBOL-UU V1 EN-US

15.1.2 Functionality SEMOD54488-4 v11

Measurement functions are used for power system measurement, supervision and reporting
to the local HMI, monitoring tool within PCM600 or to station level for example, via IEC 61850.
The possibility to continuously monitor measured values of active power, reactive power,
currents, voltages, frequency, power factor etc. is vital for efficient production, transmission
and distribution of electrical energy. It provides to the system operator fast and easy overview
of the present status of the power system. Additionally, it can be used during testing and
commissioning of protection and control IEDs in order to verify proper operation and
connection of instrument transformers (CTs and VTs). During normal service by periodic
comparison of the measured value from the IED with other independent meters the proper
operation of the IED analog measurement chain can be verified. Finally, it can be used to verify
proper direction orientation for distance or directional overcurrent protection function.

585
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Monitoring

The available measured values of an IED are depending on the actual hardware
(TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM600.

All measured values can be supervised with four settable limits that is, low-low limit, low limit,
high limit and high-high limit. A zero clamping reduction is also supported, that is, the
measured value below a settable limit is forced to zero which reduces the impact of noise in
the inputs.

Dead-band supervision can be used to report measured signal value to station level when
change in measured value is above set threshold limit or time integral of all changes since the
last time value updating exceeds the threshold limit. Measure value can also be based on
periodic reporting.

Main menu/Measurement/Monitoring/Service values/CVMMXN

The measurement function, CVMMXN, provides the following power system quantities:

• P, Q and S: three phase active, reactive and apparent power

• PF: power factor
• U: phase-to-phase voltage amplitude
• I: phase current amplitude
• F: power system frequency

,
The measuring functions CMMXU, VMMXU and VNMMXU provide physical quantities:

• I: phase currents (amplitude and angle) (CMMXU)

• U: voltages (phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase voltage, amplitude and angle) (VMMXU,
VNMMXU)

The CVMMXN function calculates three-phase power quantities by using fundamental

frequency phasors (DFT values) of the measured current respectively voltage signals. The
measured power quantities are available either, as instantaneously calculated quantities or,
averaged values over a period of time (low pass filtered) depending on the selected settings.

It is possible to calibrate the measuring function above to get better then class 0.5
presentation. This is accomplished by angle and amplitude compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of
rated current and at 100% of rated voltage.

The power system quantities provided, depends on the actual hardware, (TRM)
and the logic configuration made in PCM600.

The measuring functions CMSQI and VMSQI provide sequence component quantities:

• I: sequence currents (positive, zero, negative sequence, amplitude and angle)

• U: sequence voltages (positive, zero and negative sequence, amplitude and angle).

15.1.3 Function block SEMOD130334-4 v6

The available function blocks of an IED are depending on the actual hardware (TRM) and the
logic configuration made in PCM600.

586
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 15
Monitoring

CVMMXN
I3P* S
U3P* S_RANGE
P_INST
P
P_RANGE
Q_INST
Q
Q_RANGE
PF
PF_RANGE
ILAG
ILEAD
U
U_RANGE
I
I_RANGE
F
F_RANGE

IEC10000016-1-en.vsd
IEC10000016 V1 EN-US

Figure 329: CVMMXN function block

CMMXU
I3P* IL1
IL1RANG
IL1ANGL
IL2
IL2RANG
IL2ANGL
IL3
IL3RANG
IL3ANGL

IEC05000699-2-en.vsd
IEC05000699 V2 EN-US

Figure 330: CMMXU function block

VMMXU
U3P* UL12
UL12RANG
UL12ANGL
UL23
UL23RANG
UL23ANGL
UL31
UL31RANG
UL31ANGL

IEC05000701-2-en.vsd
IEC05000701 V2 EN-US

Figure 331: VMMXU function block

CMSQI
I3P* 3I0
3I0RANG
3I0ANGL
I1
I1RANG
I1ANGL
I2
I2RANG
I2ANGL

IEC05000703-2-en.vsd
IEC05000703 V2 EN-US

Figure 332: CMSQI function block

587
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Monitoring

VMSQI
U3P* 3U0
3U0RANG
3U0ANGL
U1
U1RANG
U1ANGL
U2
U2RANG
U2ANGL

IEC05000704-2-en.vsd
IEC05000704 V2 EN-US

Figure 333: VMSQI function block

VNMMXU
U3P* UL1
UL1RANG
UL1ANGL
UL2
UL2RANG
UL2ANGL
UL3
UL3RANG
UL3ANGL

IEC09000850-1-en.vsd
IEC09000850 V1 EN-US

Figure 334: VNMMXU function block

15.1.4 Signals
PID-3584-INPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 516: CVMMXN Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL

PID-3584-OUTPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 517: CVMMXN Output signals

Name Type Description
S REAL Apparent Power magnitude of deadband value
S_RANGE INTEGER Apparent Power range
P_INST REAL Active Power
P REAL Active Power magnitude of deadband value
P_RANGE INTEGER Active Power range
Q_INST REAL Reactive Power
Q REAL Reactive Power magnitude of deadband value
Q_RANGE INTEGER Reactive Power range
PF REAL Power Factor magnitude of deadband value
PF_RANGE INTEGER Power Factor range
ILAG BOOLEAN Current is lagging voltage
ILEAD BOOLEAN Current is leading voltage
U REAL Calculated voltage magnitude of deadband value
U_RANGE INTEGER Calculated voltage range
Table continues on next page

588
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 15
Monitoring

Name Type Description

I REAL Calculated current magnitude of deadband value
I_RANGE INTEGER Calculated current range
F REAL System frequency magnitude of deadband value
F_RANGE INTEGER System frequency range

PID-3760-INPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 518: CMMXU Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL

PID-3760-OUTPUTSIGNALS v6

Table 519: CMMXU Output signals

Name Type Description
IL1 REAL IL1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
IL1RANG INTEGER IL1 Amplitude range
IL1ANGL REAL IL1 Angle, magnitude of reported value
IL2 REAL IL2 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
IL2RANG INTEGER IL2 Amplitude range
IL2ANGL REAL IL2 Angle, magnitude of reported value
IL3 REAL IL3 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
IL3RANG INTEGER IL3 Amplitude range
IL3ANGL REAL IL3 Angle, magnitude of reported value

PID-3767-INPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 520: VMMXU Input signals

Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Group connection abstract block 2
SIGNAL

PID-3767-OUTPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 521: VMMXU Output signals

Name Type Description
UL12 REAL UL12 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
UL12RANG INTEGER UL12 Amplitude range
UL12ANGL REAL UL12 Angle, magnitude of reported value
UL23 REAL UL23 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
UL23RANG INTEGER UL23 Amplitude range
UL23ANGL REAL UL23 Angle, magnitude of reported value
UL31 REAL UL31 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
UL31RANG INTEGER UL31 Amplitude range
UL31ANGL REAL UL31 Angle, magnitude of reported value

589
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Monitoring

PID-3723-INPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 522: CMSQI Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group connection abstract block 3
SIGNAL

PID-3723-OUTPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 523: CMSQI Output signals

Name Type Description
3I0 REAL 3I0 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
3I0RANG INTEGER 3I0 Amplitude range
3I0ANGL REAL 3I0 Angle, magnitude of reported value
I1 REAL I1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
I1RANG INTEGER I1 Amplitude range
I1ANGL REAL I1 Angle, magnitude of reported value
I2 REAL I2 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
I2RANG INTEGER I2 Amplitude range
I2ANGL REAL I2 Angle, magnitude of reported value

PID-3725-INPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 524: VMSQI Input signals

Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Group connection abstract block 4
SIGNAL

PID-3725-OUTPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 525: VMSQI Output signals

Name Type Description
3U0 REAL 3U0 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
3U0RANG INTEGER 3U0 Amplitude range
3U0ANGL REAL 3U0 Angle, magnitude of reported value
U1 REAL U1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
U1RANG INTEGER U1 Amplitude range
U1ANGL REAL U1 Angle, magnitude of reported value
U2 REAL U2 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
U2RANG INTEGER U2 Amplitude range
U2ANGL REAL U2 Angle, magnitude of reported value

PID-3756-INPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 526: VNMMXU Input signals

Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL

590
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 15
Monitoring

PID-3756-OUTPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 527: VNMMXU Output signals

Name Type Description
UL1 REAL UL1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
UL1RANG INTEGER UL1 Amplitude range
UL1ANGL REAL UL1 Angle, magnitude of reported value
UL2 REAL UL2 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
UL2RANG INTEGER UL2 Amplitude range
UL2ANGL REAL UL2 Angle, magnitude of reported value
UL3 REAL UL3 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
UL3RANG INTEGER UL3 Amplitude range
UL3ANGL REAL UL3 Angle, magnitude of reported value

15.1.5 Settings SEMOD130322-4 v6

The available setting parameters of the measurement function (MMXU, MSQI) are depending
on the actual hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM600.

These six functions are not handled as a group, so parameter settings are only available in the
first setting group.

The following terms are used in the Unit and Description columns:

• UBase: Base voltage in primary kV. This voltage is used as reference for voltage setting. It
can be suitable to set this parameter to the rated primary voltage supervised object.
• IBase: Base current in primary A. This current is used as reference for current setting. It
can be suitable to set this parameter to the rated primary current of the supervised
object.
• SBase: Base setting for power values in MVA.

PID-3584-SETTINGS v6

Table 528: CVMMXN Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SLowLim 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of SBase
SLowLowLim 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of SBase
SMin 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of SBase
SMax 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of SBase
SRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
PMin -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -200.0 Minimum value in % of SBase
PMax -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of SBase
PRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
QMin -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -200.0 Minimum value in % of SBase
QMax -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of SBase
Table continues on next page

591
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

QRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
PFMin -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 -1.000 Minimum value
PFMax -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 Maximum value
PFRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
UMin 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of UBase
UMax 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of UBase
URepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
IMin 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 5.0 Minimum value in % of IBase
IMax 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of IBase
IRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
FrMin 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 0.000 Minimum value
FrMax 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 70.000 Maximum value
FrRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups
Mode L1, L2, L3 - - L1, L2, L3 Selection of measured current and
Arone voltage
Pos Seq
L1L2
L2L3
L3L1
L1
L2
L3
PowAmpFact 0.000 - 6.000 - 0.001 1.000 Amplitude factor to scale power
calculations
PowAngComp -180.0 - 180.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Angle compensation for phase shift
between measured I & U
k 0.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 0.000 Low pass filter coefficient for power
measurement, U and I

Table 529: CVMMXN Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
SZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of
range
SHiHiLim 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of SBase
SHiLim 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of SBase
Table continues on next page

592
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 15
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

SLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range
(common for all limits)
PDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
PZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of
range
PHiHiLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of SBase
PHiLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of SBase
PLowLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -120.0 Low limit in % of SBase
PLowLowLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -150.0 Low Low limit in % of SBase
PLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range
(common for all limits)
QDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
QZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of
range
QHiHiLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of SBase
QHiLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of SBase
QLowLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -120.0 Low limit in % of SBase
QLowLowLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -150.0 Low Low limit in % of SBase
QLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range
(common for all limits)
PFDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
PFZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of
range
PFHiHiLim -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 High High limit (physical value)
PFHiLim -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 0.800 High limit (physical value)
PFLowLim -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 -0.800 Low limit (physical value)
PFLowLowLim -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 -1.000 Low Low limit (physical value)
PFLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range
(common for all limits)
UDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
UZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of
range
UHiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
UHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of UBase
ULowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of UBase
ULowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of UBase
ULimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range
(common for all limits)
IDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
IZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of
range
IHiHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of IBase
IHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of IBase
Table continues on next page

593
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

ILowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of IBase
ILowLowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of IBase
ILimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range
(common for all limits)
FrDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
FrZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of
range
FrHiHiLim 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 65.000 High High limit (physical value)
FrHiLim 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 63.000 High limit (physical value)
FrLowLim 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 47.000 Low limit (physical value)
FrLowLowLim 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 45.000 Low Low limit (physical value)
FrLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range
(common for all limits)
UGenZeroDb 1 - 100 %UB 1 5 Zero point clamping in % of UBase
IGenZeroDb 1 - 100 %IB 1 5 Zero point clamping in % of IBase
UAmpComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage
at 5% of Ur
UAmpComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage
at 30% of Ur
UAmpComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage
at 100% of Ur
IAmpComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to calibrate current
at 5% of Ir
IAmpComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to calibrate current
at 30% of Ir
IAmpComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to calibrate current
at 100% of Ir
IAngComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Angle calibration for current at 5% of
Ir
IAngComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Angle calibration for current at 30% of
Ir
IAngComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Angle calibration for current at 100%
of Ir

PID-3760-SETTINGS v6

Table 530: CMMXU Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
IL1DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
Operation Off - - Off Operation Mode On / Off
On
IL1Max 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of IBase
IL1RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups
Table continues on next page

594
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 15
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

IL1AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
IL2DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
IL2Max 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of IBase
IL2RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
IL2AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
IL3DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
IL3Max 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of IBase
IL3RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
IL3AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s

Table 531: CMMXU Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
IL1ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
IL1HiHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of IBase
IL1HiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of IBase
IAmpComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to calibrate current
at 5% of Ir
IAmpComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to calibrate current
at 30% of Ir
IL1LowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of IBase
IL1LowLowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of IBase
IAmpComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to calibrate current
at 100% of Ir
IAngComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Angle calibration for current at 5% of
Ir
IL1Min 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of IBase
IAngComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Angle calibration for current at 30% of
Ir
IAngComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Angle calibration for current at 100%
of Ir
IL1LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
IL2ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
IL2HiHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of IBase
IL2HiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of IBase
IL2LowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of IBase
IL2LowLowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of IBase
IL2Min 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of IBase
Table continues on next page

595
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

IL2LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
IL3ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
IL3HiHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of IBase
IL3HiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of IBase
IL3LowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of IBase
IL3LowLowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of IBase
IL3Min 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of IBase
IL3LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits

PID-3767-SETTINGS v5

Table 532: VMMXU Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
UL12DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
Operation Off - - Off Operation Mode On / Off
On
UL12ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
UL12Max 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of UBase
UL12RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups
UL12AnDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
UL23DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
UL2ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
UL23Max 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of UBase
UL23RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
UL23AnDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
UL31DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
UL3ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
UL31Max 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of UBase
UL31RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
UL31AnDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s

596
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 15
Monitoring

Table 533: VMMXU Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
UL12HiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
UL12HiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of UBase
UL12LowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of UBase
UL12LowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of UBase
UAmpComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage
at 100% of Ur
UL12Min 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in in % of UBase
UL12LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
UL23HiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
UL23HiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of UBase
UL23LowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of UBase
UL23LowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of UBase
UL23Min 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of UBase
UL23LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
UL31HiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
UL31HiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of UBase
UL31LowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of UBase
UL31LowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of UBase
UL31Min 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of UBase
UL31LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits

PID-3723-SETTINGS v2

Table 534: CMSQI Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
3I0DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
3I0ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
3I0Min 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of IBase
3I0Max 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of IBase
3I0RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups
3I0LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
3I0AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
Operation Off - - Off Operation Mode On / Off
On
3I0AngMin -180.000 - Deg 0.001 -180.000 Minimum value
180.000
Table continues on next page

597
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

3I0AngMax -180.000 - Deg 0.001 180.000 Maximum value
180.000
3I0AngRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
I1DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
I1ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
I1Min 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of IBase
I1Max 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of IBase
I1RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
I1AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
I1AngMax -180.000 - Deg 0.001 180.000 Maximum value
180.000
I1AngRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
I2DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
I2ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
I2Min 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of IBase
I2Max 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of IBase
I2RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
I2LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
I2AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
I2AngMin -180.000 - Deg 0.001 -180.000 Minimum value
180.000
I2AngRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband

Table 535: CMSQI Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
3I0HiHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of IBase
3I0HiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of IBase
3I0LowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of IBase
3I0LowLowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of IBase
3I0AngZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 0 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of
range
I1HiHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of IBase
I1HiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of IBase
I1LowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of IBase
Table continues on next page

598
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 15
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

I1LowLowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of IBase
I1LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
I1AngZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 0 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of
range
I1AngMin -180.000 - Deg 0.001 -180.000 Minimum value
180.000
I2HiHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of IBase
I2HiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of IBase
I2LowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of IBase
I2LowLowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of IBase
I2AngZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 0 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of
range
I2AngMax -180.000 - Deg 0.001 180.000 Maximum value
180.000

PID-3725-SETTINGS v3

Table 536: VMSQI Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
3U0DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
3U0ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
3U0Min 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of UBase
3U0Max 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of UBase
3U0RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups
3U0LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
3U0AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
Operation Off - - Off Operation Mode On / Off
On
3U0AngZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 0 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of
range
3U0AngMin -180.000 - Deg 0.001 -180.000 Minimum value
180.000
3U0AngMax -180.000 - Deg 0.001 180.000 Maximum value
180.000
3U0AngRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
U1DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
U1ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
U1Min 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of UBase
U1Max 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of UBase
Table continues on next page

599
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

U1RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
U1LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
U1AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
U2DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
U2ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
U2Min 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of UBase
U2Max 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of UBase
U2RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
U2LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
U2AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
U2AngMin -180.000 - Deg 0.001 -180.000 Minimum value
180.000
U2AngMax -180.000 - Deg 0.001 180.000 Maximum value
180.000
U2AngRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
UAmpPreComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to pre-calibrate
voltage at 5% of Ur
UAmpPreComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to pre-calibrate
voltage at 30% of Ur
UAmpPreComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to pre-calibrate
voltage at 100% of Ur

Table 537: VMSQI Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
3U0HiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
3U0HiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of UBase
3U0LowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of UBase
3U0LowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of UBase
U1HiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
U1HiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of UBase
U1LowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of UBase
U1LowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of UBase
U1AngZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 0 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of
range
U1AngMin -180.000 - Deg 0.001 -180.000 Minimum value
180.000
U1AngMax -180.000 - Deg 0.001 180.000 Maximum value
180.000
Table continues on next page

600
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 15
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

U1AngRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
U2HiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
U2HiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of UBase
U2LowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of UBase
U2LowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of UBase
U2AngZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 0 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of
range

PID-3756-SETTINGS v5

Table 538: VNMMXU Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
UL1DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
Operation Off - - Off Operation Mode On / Off
On
UL1ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
UL1Max 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of UBase
UL1RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups
UL1LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
UL1AnDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
UL2DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
UL2ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
UL2Max 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of UBase
UL2RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
UL2LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
UL2AnDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
UL3DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
UL3ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
UL3Max 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of UBase
UL3RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
UL3LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
UL3AnDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s

601
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Monitoring

Table 539: VNMMXU Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
UL1HiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
UL1HiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of UBase
UL1LowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of UBase
UL1LowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of UBase
UAmpComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage
at 100% of Ur
UL1Min 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of UBase
UL2HiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
UL2HiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of UBase
UL2LowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of UBase
UL2LowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of UBase
UL2Min 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of UBase
UL3HiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
UL3HiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of UBase
UL3LowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of UBase
UL3LowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of UBase
UL3Min 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of UBase

15.1.6 Monitored data

PID-3584-MONITOREDDATA v5

Table 540: CVMMXN Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
S REAL - MVA Apparent Power magnitude of
deadband value
P REAL - MW Active Power magnitude of deadband
value
Q REAL - MVAr Reactive Power magnitude of
deadband value
PF REAL - - Power Factor magnitude of deadband
value
U REAL - kV Calculated voltage magnitude of
deadband value
I REAL - A Calculated current magnitude of
deadband value
F REAL - Hz System frequency magnitude of
deadband value

602
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 15
Monitoring

PID-3760-MONITOREDDATA v6

Table 541: CMMXU Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IL1 REAL - A IL1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported
value
IL1ANGL REAL - deg IL1 Angle, magnitude of reported value
IL2 REAL - A IL2 Amplitude, magnitude of reported
value
IL2ANGL REAL - deg IL2 Angle, magnitude of reported
value
IL3 REAL - A IL3 Amplitude, magnitude of reported
value
IL3ANGL REAL - deg IL3 Angle, magnitude of reported
value

PID-3767-MONITOREDDATA v5

Table 542: VMMXU Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
UL12 REAL - kV UL12 Amplitude, magnitude of
reported value
UL12ANGL REAL - deg UL12 Angle, magnitude of reported
value
UL23 REAL - kV UL23 Amplitude, magnitude of
reported value
UL23ANGL REAL - deg UL23 Angle, magnitude of reported
value
UL31 REAL - kV UL31 Amplitude, magnitude of
reported value
UL31ANGL REAL - deg UL31 Angle, magnitude of reported
value

PID-3723-MONITOREDDATA v2

Table 543: CMSQI Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
3I0IMAG REAL - - 3I0 Amplitude, magnitude of
instantaneous value
3I0 REAL - A 3I0 Amplitude, magnitude of reported
value
3I0ANGIM REAL - - 3I0 Angle, magnitude of
instantaneous value
3I0ANGL REAL - deg 3I0 Angle, magnitude of reported
value
I1IMAG REAL - - I1 Amplitude, magnitude of
instantaneous value
I1 REAL - A I1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported
value
I1ANGIM REAL - - I1 Angle, magnitude of instantaneous
value
I1ANGL REAL - deg I1 Angle, magnitude of reported value
Table continues on next page

603
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Monitoring

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

I2IMAG REAL - - I2 Amplitude, magnitude of
instantaneous value
I2 REAL - A I2 Amplitude, magnitude of reported
value
I2ANGIM REAL - - I2 Angle, magnitude of instantaneous
value
I2ANGL REAL - deg I2 Angle, magnitude of reported value

PID-3725-MONITOREDDATA v3

Table 544: VMSQI Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
3U0IMAG REAL - - 3U0 Amplitude, magnitude of
instantaneous value
3U0 REAL - kV 3U0 Amplitude, magnitude of
reported value
3U0ANGIM REAL - - 3U0 Angle, magnitude of
instantaneous value
3U0ANGL REAL - deg 3U0 Angle, magnitude of reported
value
U1IMAG REAL - - U1 Amplitude, magnitude of
instantaneous value
U1 REAL - kV U1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported
value
U1ANGIM REAL - - U1 Angle, magnitude of instantaneous
value
U1ANGL REAL - deg U1 Angle, magnitude of reported value
U2IMAG REAL - - U2 Amplitude, magnitude of
instantaneous value
U2 REAL - kV U2 Amplitude, magnitude of reported
value
U2ANGIM REAL - - U2 Angle, magnitude of instantaneous
value
U2ANGL REAL - deg U2 Angle, magnitude of reported value

PID-3756-MONITOREDDATA v5

Table 545: VNMMXU Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
UL1 REAL - kV UL1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported
value
UL1ANGL REAL - deg UL1 Angle, magnitude of reported
value
UL2 REAL - kV UL2 Amplitude, magnitude of
reported value
UL2ANGL REAL - deg UL2 Angle, magnitude of reported
value
UL3 REAL - kV UL3 Amplitude, magnitude of
reported value
UL3ANGL REAL - deg UL3 Angle, magnitude of reported
value

604
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 15
Monitoring

15.1.7 Operation principle

15.1.7.1 Measurement supervision SEMOD54417-130 v3

The protection, control, and monitoring IEDs have functionality to measure and further
process information for currents and voltages obtained from the pre-processing blocks. The
number of processed alternate measuring quantities depends on the type of IED and built-in
options.

The information on measured quantities is available for the user at different locations:

• Locally by means of the local HMI

• Remotely using the monitoring tool within PCM600 or over the station bus
• Internally by connecting the analogue output signals to the Disturbance Report function

Phase angle reference SEMOD54417-303 v5

All phase angles are presented in relation to a defined reference channel. The General setting
parameter PhaseAngleRef defines the reference, see section "Analog inputs".

Zero point clamping SEMOD54417-137 v4

Measured value below zero point clamping limit is forced to zero. This allows the noise in the
input signal to be ignored. The zero point clamping limit is a general setting (XZeroDb where X
equals S, P, Q, PF, U, I, F, IL1-3, UL1-3, UL12-31, I1, I2, 3I0, U1, U2 or 3U0). Observe that this
measurement supervision zero point clamping might be overridden by the zero point clamping
used for the measurement values within CVMMXN.

Continuous monitoring of the measured quantity SEMOD54417-140 v4

Users can continuously monitor the measured quantity available in the function block by
means of four defined operating thresholds, see figure 335. The monitoring has two different
modes of operating:

• Overfunction, when the measured current exceeds the High limit (XHiLim) or High-high
limit (XHiHiLim) pre-set values
• Underfunction, when the measured current decreases under the Low limit (XLowLim) or
Low-low limit (XLowLowLim) pre-set values.

X_RANGE is illustrated in figure 335.

605
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Monitoring

X_RANGE = 3
High-high limit

X_RANGE= 1 Hysteresis
High limit

X_RANGE=0

X_RANGE=0 t

Low limit

X_RANGE=2

Low-low limit
X_RANGE=4

IEC05000657-2-en.vsdx

IEC05000657 V2 EN-US

Figure 335: Presentation of operating limits

Each analogue output has one corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE). The output
signal is an integer in the interval 0-4 (0: Normal, 1: High limit exceeded, 3: High-high limit
exceeded, 2: below Low limit and 4: below Low-low limit). The output may be connected to a
measurement expander block (XP (RANGE_XP)) to get measurement supervision as binary
signals.

The logical value of the functional output signals changes according to figure 335.

The user can set the hysteresis (XLimHyst), which determines the difference between the
operating and reset value at each operating point, in wide range for each measuring channel
separately. The hysteresis is common for all operating values within one channel.

Actual value of the measured quantity SEMOD54417-150 v3

The actual value of the measured quantity is available locally and remotely. The measurement
is continuous for each measured quantity separately, but the reporting of the value to the
higher levels depends on the selected reporting mode. The following basic reporting modes
are available:

• Cyclic reporting (Cyclic)

• Amplitude dead-band supervision (Dead band)
• Integral dead-band supervision (Int deadband)

Cyclic reporting SEMOD54417-158 v3

The cyclic reporting of measured value is performed according to chosen setting (XRepTyp).
The measuring channel reports the value independent of amplitude or integral dead-band
reporting.

In addition to the normal cyclic reporting the IED also report spontaneously when measured
value passes any of the defined threshold limits.

606
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 15
Monitoring

Y
Value Reported Value Reported
Value Reported Value Reported
(1st)

Y3 Value Reported
Y2 Y4

Y1 Y5

t (*) t (*) t (*) t (*)

t
Value 1

Value 2

Value 3

Value 4

Value 5
(*)Set value for t: XDbRepInt IEC05000500-2-en.vsdx

IEC05000500 V2 EN-US

Figure 336: Periodic reporting

Amplitude dead-band supervision SEMOD54417-163 v6

If a measuring value is changed, compared to the last reported value, and the change is larger
than the ±ΔY pre-defined limits that are set by user (XDbRepInt), then the measuring channel
reports the new value to a higher level. This limits the information flow to a minimum
necessary. Figure 337 shows an example with the amplitude dead-band supervision. The
picture is simplified: the process is not continuous but the values are evaluated with a time
interval of one execution cycle from each other.

607
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Monitoring

Value Reported
Y

Value Reported Value Reported

Value Reported
(1st)
Y3 Y
Y
Y2 Y
Y
Y
Y
Y1

IEC99000529-2-en.vsdx

IEC99000529 V2 EN-US

Figure 337: Amplitude dead-band supervision reporting

After the new value is reported, the ±ΔY limits for dead-band are automatically set around it.
The new value is reported only if the measured quantity changes more than defined by the ±ΔY
set limits.

Integral dead-band reporting SEMOD54417-167 v4

The measured value is reported if the time integral of all changes exceeds the pre-set limit
(XDbRepInt), figure 338, where an example of reporting with integral dead-band supervision is
shown. The picture is simplified: the process is not continuous but the values are evaluated
with a time interval of one execution cycle from each other.

The last value reported, Y1 in figure 338 serves as a basic value for further measurement. A
difference is calculated between the last reported and the newly measured value and is
multiplied by the time increment (discrete integral). The absolute values of these integral
values are added until the pre-set value is exceeded. This occurs with the value Y2 that is
reported and set as a new base for the following measurements (as well as for the values Y3,
Y4 and Y5).

The integral dead-band supervision is particularly suitable for monitoring signals with small
variations that can last for relatively long periods.

608
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 15
Monitoring

Y A1 >=
A >= pre-set value
A2 >=
pre-set value pre-set value
Y3 A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 >=
pre-set value
Y2 A1 A2
A4 A6
Value Reported Y4 A3 A5 A7
Value
(1st) Value
A Reported Y5
Reported Value
Reported Value
Y1 Reported

t
IEC99000530-2-en.vsdx

IEC99000530 V2 EN-US

Figure 338: Reporting with integral dead-band supervision

15.1.7.2 Measurements CVMMXN SEMOD54417-172 v3

Mode of operation SEMOD54417-174 v6

The measurement function must be connected to three-phase current and three-phase voltage
input in the configuration tool (group signals), but it is capable to measure and calculate
above mentioned quantities in nine different ways depending on the available VT inputs
connected to the IED. The end user can freely select by a parameter setting, which one of the
nine available measuring modes shall be used within the function. Available options are
summarized in the following table:

Set value Formula used for complex, Formula used for voltage Comment
for three-phase power calculation and current magnitude
parameter calculation
“Mode”
1 L1, L2, L3 Used when three phase-to-
* * *
S = U L1 × I L1 + U L 2 × I L 2 + U L 3 × I L 3 U = ( U L1 + U L 2 + U L 3 ) / 3 earth voltages are available
EQUATION1385 V1 EN-US (Equation 79) I = ( I L1 + I L 2 + I L 3 ) / 3

EQUATION1386 V1 EN-US (Equation 80)

2 Arone Used when three two
S = U L1 L 2 × I L*1 - U L 2 L 3 × I L* 3 U = ( U L1 L 2 + U L 2 L 3 ) / 2 phase-to-phase voltages
are available
(Equation 81)
EQUATION1387 V1 EN-US
I = ( I L1 + I L 3 ) / 2
EQUATION1388 V1 EN-US (Equation 82)
3 PosSeq Used when only
S = 3 × U PosSeq × I PosSeq
*
U = 3 × U PosSeq symmetrical three phase
power shall be measured
(Equation 83)
EQUATION1389 V1 EN-US
I = I PosSeq
EQUATION1390 V1 EN-US (Equation 84)
Table continues on next page

609
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Monitoring

Set value Formula used for complex, Formula used for voltage Comment
for three-phase power calculation and current magnitude
parameter calculation
“Mode”
4 L1L2 Used when only UL1L2
S = U L1 L 2 × ( I L*1 - I L* 2 ) U = U L1 L 2 phase-to-phase voltage is
available
(Equation 85)
I = ( I L1 + I L 2 ) / 2
EQUATION1391 V1 EN-US

EQUATION1392 V1 EN-US (Equation 86)

5 L2L3 Used when only UL2L3
S = U L 2 L 3 × ( I L* 2 - I L* 3 ) U = U L2 L3 phase-to-phase voltage is
available
(Equation 87)
I = ( I L2 + I L3 ) / 2
EQUATION1393 V1 EN-US

EQUATION1394 V1 EN-US (Equation 88)

6 L3L1 Used when only UL3L1
S = U L 3 L1 × ( I L* 3 - I L*1 ) U = U L 3 L1 phase-to-phase voltage is
available
(Equation 89)
I = ( I L 3 + I L1 ) / 2
EQUATION1395 V1 EN-US

EQUATION1396 V1 EN-US (Equation 90)

7 L1 Used when only UL1 phase-
S = 3 × U L1 × I L*1 U = 3 × U L1 to-earth voltage is
available
(Equation 91)
I = I L1
EQUATION1397 V1 EN-US

EQUATION1398 V1 EN-US (Equation 92)

8 L2 Used when only UL2 phase-
S = 3 × U L 2 × I L* 2 U = 3 × U L2 to-earth voltage is
available
(Equation 93)
I = IL2
EQUATION1399 V1 EN-US

EQUATION1400 V1 EN-US (Equation 94)

9 L3 Used when only UL3 phase-
S = 3 × U L 3 × I L* 3 U = 3 × U L3 to-earth voltage is
available
(Equation 95)
I = I L3
EQUATION1401 V1 EN-US

EQUATION1402 V1 EN-US (Equation 96)

* means complex conjugated value

It shall be noted that only in the first two operating modes that is, 1 & 2 the measurement
function calculates exact three-phase power. In other operating modes that is, from 3 to 9 it
calculates the three-phase power under assumption that the power system is fully
symmetrical. Once the complex apparent power is calculated then the P, Q, S, & PF are
calculated in accordance with the following formulas:

P = Re( S )
EQUATION1403 V1 EN-US (Equation 97)

Q = Im( S )
EQUATION1404 V1 EN-US (Equation 98)

610
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 15
Monitoring

S = S = P2 + Q2
EQUATION1405 V1 EN-US (Equation 99)

PF = cosj = P
S
EQUATION1406 V1 EN-US (Equation 100)

Additionally to the power factor value the two binary output signals from the function are
provided which indicates the angular relationship between current and voltage phasors. Binary
output signal ILAG is set to one when current phasor is lagging behind voltage phasor. Binary
output signal ILEAD is set to one when current phasor is leading the voltage phasor.

Each analogue output has a corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE). The output
signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement supervision".

Calibration of analog inputs SEMOD54417-293 v4

Measured currents and voltages used in the CVMMXN function can be calibrated to get class
0.5 measuring accuracy. This is achieved by amplitude and angle compensation at 5, 30 and
100% of rated current and voltage. The compensation below 5% and above 100% is constant
and linear in between, see example in figure 339.

IEC05000652 V2 EN-US

Figure 339: Calibration curves

The first current and voltage phase in the group signals will be used as reference and the
amplitude and angle compensation will be used for related input signals.

Low pass filtering SEMOD54417-233 v3

In order to minimize the influence of the noise signal on the measurement it is possible to
introduce the recursive, low pass filtering of the measured values for P, Q, S, U, I and power

611
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Monitoring

factor. This will make slower measurement response to the step changes in the measured
quantity. Filtering is performed in accordance with the following recursive formula:

X = k × X Old + (1 - k ) × X Calculated
EQUATION1407 V1 EN-US (Equation 101)

where:
X is a new measured value (that is P, Q, S, U, I or PF) to be given out from the function
XOld is the measured value given from the measurement function in previous execution cycle

XCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle

k is settable parameter by the end user which influence the filter properties

Default value for parameter k is 0.00. With this value the new calculated value is immediately
given out without any filtering (that is, without any additional delay). When k is set to value
bigger than 0, the filtering is enabled. Appropriate value of k shall be determined separately
for every application. Some typical value for k =0.14.

Zero point clamping SEMOD54417-250 v5

In order to avoid erroneous measurements when either current or voltage signal is not
present, it is possible for the end user to set the amplitudeIGenZeroDb level for current and
voltage measurement UGenZeroDb is forced to zero. When either current or voltage
measurement is forced to zero automatically the measured values for power (P, Q and S) and
power factor are forced to zero as well. Since the measurement supervision functionality,
included in CVMMXN, is using these values the zero clamping will influence the subsequent
supervision (observe the possibility to do zero point clamping within measurement
supervision, see section "Measurement supervision").

Compensation facility SEMOD54417-253 v5

In order to compensate for small amplitude and angular errors in the complete measurement
chain (CT error, VT error, IED input transformer errors and so on.) it is possible to perform on
site calibration of the power measurement. This is achieved by setting the complex constant
which is then internally used within the function to multiply the calculated complex apparent
power S. This constant is set as amplitude (setting parameter PowAmpFact, default value
1.000) and angle (setting parameter PowAngComp, default value 0.0 degrees). Default values
for these two parameters are done in such way that they do not influence internally calculated
value (complex constant has default value 1). In this way calibration, for specific operating
range (for example, around rated power) can be done at site. However, to perform this
calibration it is necessary to have an external power meter with high accuracy class available.

Directionality SEMOD54417-256 v6
If CT earthing parameter is set as described in section "Analog inputs", active and reactive
power will be measured always towards the protected object. This is shown in the following
figure 340.

612
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 15
Monitoring

Busbar

IED

P Q

Protected
Object
IEC09000038-1-en.vsd
IEC09000038-1-EN V1 EN-US

Figure 340: Internal IED directionality convention for P & Q measurements

Practically, it means that active and reactive power will have positive values when they flow
from the busbar towards the protected object and they will have negative values when they
flow from the protected object towards the busbar.

In some application, for example, when power is measured on the secondary side of the power
transformer it might be desirable, from the end client point of view, to have actually opposite
directional convention for active and reactive power measurements. This can be easily
achieved by setting parameter PowAngComp to value of 180.0 degrees. With such setting the
active and reactive power will have positive values when they flow from the protected object
towards the busbar.

Frequency SEMOD54417-261 v2
Frequency is actually not calculated within measurement block. It is simply obtained from the
pre-processing block and then just given out from the measurement block as an output.

15.1.7.3 Phase current measurement CMMXU SEMOD54417-264 v6

The Phase current measurement (CMMXU) function must be connected to three-phase current
input in the configuration tool to be operable. Currents handled in the function can be
calibrated to get better then class 0.5 measuring accuracy for internal use, on the outputs and
IEC 61850. This is achieved by amplitude and angle compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated
current. The compensation below 5% and above 100% is constant and linear in between, see
figure 339.

Phase currents (amplitude and angle) are available on the outputs and each amplitude output
has a corresponding supervision level output (ILx_RANG). The supervision output signal is an
integer in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement supervision".

613
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Monitoring

15.1.7.4 Phase-phase and phase-neutral voltage measurements VMMXU, VNMMXU SEMOD54417-268 v5

The voltage function must be connected to three-phase voltage input in the configuration tool
to be operable. Voltages are handled in the same way as currents when it comes to class 0.5
calibrations, see above.

The voltages (phase or phase-phase voltage, amplitude and angle) are available on the outputs
and each amplitude output has a corresponding supervision level output (ULxy_RANG). The
supervision output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement
supervision".

15.1.7.5 Voltage and current sequence measurements VMSQI, CMSQI SEMOD54417-299 v6

The measurement functions must be connected to three-phase current (CMSQI) or voltage

(VMSQI) input in the configuration tool to be operable. No outputs, other than X_RANG, are
calculated within the measuring blocks and it is not possible to calibrate the signals. Input
signals are obtained from the pre-processing block and transferred to corresponding output.

Positive, negative and three times zero sequence quantities are available on the outputs
(voltage and current, amplitude and angle). Each amplitude output has a corresponding
supervision level output (X_RANGE). The output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see
section "Measurement supervision".

15.1.8 Technical data

M12386-1 v14.1.1

Table 546: CVMMXN technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Frequency (0.95-1.05) x fr ±2.0 mHz

Voltage (10 to 300) V ±0.3% of U at U≤ 50 V

±0.2% of U at U> 50 V
Current (0.1-4.0) x Ir ±0.8% of I at 0.1 x Ir< I < 0.2 x Ir
± 0.5% of I at 0.2 x Ir< I < 0.5 x Ir
±0.2% of I at 0.5 x Ir< I < 4.0 x Ir

Active power, P (10 to 300) V ±0.5% of Sr at S ≤0.5 x Sr

(0.1-4.0) x Ir ±0.5% of S at S > 0.5 x Sr

(100 to 220) V ±0.2% of P

(0.5-2.0) x Ir
cos φ> 0.7
Reactive power, Q (10 to 300) V ±0.5% of Sr at S ≤0.5 x Sr
(0.1-4.0) x Ir ±0.5% of S at S > 0.5 x Sr

(100 to 220) V ±0.2% of Q

(0.5-2.0) x Ir
cos φ< 0.7
Apparent power, S (10 to 300) V ±0.5% of Sr at S ≤0.5 x Sr
(0.1-4.0) x Ir ±0.5% of S at S >0.5 x Sr

(100 to 220) V ±0.2% of S

(0.5-2.0) x Ir

Power factor, cos (φ) (10 to 300) V <0.02

(0.1-4.0) x Ir

(100 to 220) V <0.01

(0.5-2.0) x Ir

614
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 15
Monitoring

GUID-5E04B3F9-E1B7-4974-9C0B-DE9CD4A2408F v5

Table 547: CMMXU technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Current at symmetrical load (0.1-4.0) × Ir ±0.3% of Ir at I ≤ 0.5 × Ir
±0.3% of I at I > 0.5 × Ir

Phase angle at symmetrical (0.1-4.0) × Ir ±1.0 degrees at 0.1 × Ir < I ≤ 0.5 × Ir

load ±0.5 degrees at 0.5 × Ir < I ≤ 4.0 × Ir

GUID-374C2AF0-D647-4159-8D3A-71190FE3CFE0 v4

Table 548: VMMXU technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Voltage (10 to 300) V ±0.5% of U at U ≤ 50 V
±0.2% of U at U > 50 V
Phase angle (10 to 300) V ±0.5 degrees at U ≤ 50 V
±0.2 degrees at U > 50 V

GUID-9B8A7FA5-9C98-4CBD-A162-7112869CF030 v4

Table 549: CMSQI technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Current positive sequence, I1 (0.1–4.0) × Ir ±0.3% of Ir at I ≤ 0.5 × Ir
Three phase settings ±0.3% of I at I > 0.5 × Ir

Current zero sequence, 3I0 (0.1–1.0) × Ir ±0.3% of Ir at I ≤ 0.5 × Ir

Three phase settings ±0.3% of I at I > 0.5 × Ir

Current negative sequence, I2 (0.1–1.0) × Ir ±0.3% of Ir at I ≤ 0.5 × Ir

Three phase settings ±0.3% of I at I > 0.5 × Ir

Phase angle (0.1–4.0) × Ir ±1.0 degrees at 0.1 × Ir < I ≤ 0.5 × Ir

±0.5 degrees at 0.5 × Ir < I ≤ 4.0 × Ir

GUID-47094054-A828-459B-BE6A-D7FA1B317DA7 v6

Table 550: VMSQItechnical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Voltage positive sequence, U1 (10 to 300) V ±0.5% of U at U ≤ 50 V
±0.2% of U at U > 50 V
Voltage zero sequence, 3U0 (10 to 300) V ±0.5% of U at U ≤ 50 V
±0.2% of U at U > 50 V
Voltage negative sequence, U2 (10 to 300) V ±0.5% of U at U ≤ 50 V
±0.2% of U at U > 50 V
Phase angle (10 to 300) V ±0.5 degrees at U ≤ 50 V
±0.2 degrees at U > 50 V

GUID-ED634B6D-9918-464F-B6A4-51B78129B819 v5

Table 551: VNMMXU technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Voltage (5 to 175) V ±0.5% of U at U ≤ 50 V
±0.2% of U at U > 50 V
Phase angle (5 to 175) V ±0.5 degrees at U ≤ 50 V
±0.2 degrees at U > 50 V

615
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Monitoring

15.2 Gas medium supervision SSIMG GUID-358AD8F8-AE06-4AEA-9969-46E5299D5B4B v3

15.2.1 Identification
GUID-AD96C26E-C3E5-4B21-9ED6-12E540954AC3 v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Gas medium supervision SSIMG - 63

15.2.2 Functionality GUID-0692CD0D-F33E-4370-AC91-B216CAAAFC28 v5

Gas medium supervision SSIMG is used for monitoring the circuit breaker condition. Binary
information based on the gas pressure in the circuit breaker is used as input signals to the
function. In addition, the function generates alarms based on received information.

15.2.3 Function block

GUID-94B75A6D-973D-4F1F-8643-F2128AD31CC4 v3

SSIMG
BLOCK PRESSURE
BLK_ALM PRES_ALM
PRESSURE PRES_LO
TEMP TEMP
PRES_ALM TEMP_ALM
PRES_LO TEMP_LO
SET_P_LO
SET_T_LO
RESET_LO

IEC09000129-1-en.vsd
IEC09000129 V1 EN-US

Figure 341: SSIMG function block

15.2.4 Signals
GUID-89749F71-CAEB-4A57-A1F0-148CCF68E97E v2

PID-3703-INPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 552: SSIMG Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLK_ALM BOOLEAN 0 Block all the alarms
PRESSURE REAL 0.0 Pressure input from CB
TEMP REAL 0.0 Temperature of the insulation medium from CB
PRES_ALM BOOLEAN 0 Pressure alarm signal
PRES_LO BOOLEAN 0 Pressure lockout signal
SET_P_LO BOOLEAN 0 Set pressure lockout
SET_T_LO BOOLEAN 0 Set temperature lockout
RESET_LO BOOLEAN 0 Reset pressure and temperature lockout

616
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 15
Monitoring

PID-3703-OUTPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 553: SSIMG Output signals

Name Type Description
PRESSURE REAL Pressure service value
PRES_ALM BOOLEAN Pressure below alarm level
PRES_LO BOOLEAN Pressure below lockout level
TEMP REAL Temperature of the insulation medium
TEMP_ALM BOOLEAN Temperature above alarm level
TEMP_LO BOOLEAN Temperature above lockout level

15.2.5 Settings
PID-3703-SETTINGS v5

Table 554: SSIMG Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
PressAlmLimit 1.00 - 100.00 - 0.01 5.00 Alarm setting for pressure
PressLOLimit 1.00 - 100.00 - 0.01 3.00 Pressure lockout setting
TempAlarmLimit -40.00 - 200.00 - 0.01 30.00 Temperature alarm level setting of the
medium
TempLOLimit -40.00 - 200.00 - 0.01 30.00 Temperature lockout level of the
medium
tPressureAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for pressure alarm
tPressureLO 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for pressure lockout
indication
tTempAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for temperature alarm
tTempLockOut 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for temperture lockout
tResetPressAlm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for pressure alarm
tResetPressLO 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for pressure lockout
tResetTempLO 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for temperture
lockout
tResetTempAlm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for temperture alarm

15.2.6 Operation principle GUID-359458EA-FFAA-4A44-A8E8-9469CA069C80 v6

Gas medium supervision SSIMG is used to monitor the gas pressure in the circuit breaker.
Binary inputs of gas density PRES_ALM, PRES_LO, and gas pressure signal PRESSURE, are
taken into account to initiate the alarms PRES_ALM and PRES_LO. When PRESSURE is less than
PressAlmLimit or binary signal from CB PRES_ALM is high then the gas pressure alarm,
PRES_ALM will be initiated. Similarly, if pressure input PRESSURE is less than PressLOLimit or
binary signal from CB PRES_LO is high or temperature input TEMP is above lockout level
TempLOLimit then the gas pressure lockout, PRES_LO will be initiated.

There may be sudden change in pressure of the gas for a very small time, for which the
function need not to initiate any alarm. That is why two time delays tPressureAlarm or
tPressureLO have been included. If the pressure goes below the settings for more than these
time delays, then only the corresponding alarm PRES_ALM or lockout PRES_LO will be initiated.
The SET_P_LO binary input is used for setting the gas pressure lockout. The PRES_LO output

617
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Monitoring

retains the last value until it is reset by using the binary input RESET_LO. Hysteresis type
comparators have been used with the setting for relative and absolute hysteresis. The binary
input BLK_ALM can be used to block the alarms, and the BLOCK input can block both alarms
and the lockout indication.

Temperature of the medium is available from the input signal of temperature. The signal is
monitored to detect high temperature.

When temperature input TEMP is greater than TempAlarmLimit, then temperature alarm
TEMP_ALM will be initiated. Similarly, if temperature input TEMP is greater than TempLOLimit,
then TEMP_LO will be initiated.

There may be sudden change in temperature of the medium for a very small time, for which the
function need not to initiate any alarm. That is why two time delays tTempAlarm or
tTempLockOut have been included. If the temperature goes above the settings for more than
these time delays, then only the corresponding alarm TEMP_ALM or lockout TEMP_LO will be
initiated. The SET_T_LO binary input is used for setting the temperature lockout. The
TEMP_LO output retains the last value until it is reset by using the binary input RESET_LO.
Hysteresis type comparators have been used with the setting for relative and absolute
hysteresis. The binary input BLK_ALM can be used to block the alarms, and the BLOCK input
can block both alarms and the lockout indication.

15.2.7 Technical data

GUID-F034B396-6600-49EF-B0A5-8ED96766A6A0 v6

Table 555: SSIMG Technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Pressure alarm level 1.00-100.00 ±10.0% of set value
Pressure lockout level 1.00-100.00 ±10.0% of set value
Temperature alarm level -40.00-200.00 ±2.5% of set value
Temperature lockout level -40.00-200.00 ±2.5% of set value
Time delay for pressure alarm (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is
greater
Reset time delay for pressure (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is
alarm greater
Time delay for pressure lockout (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is
greater
Time delay for temperature alarm (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is
greater
Reset time delay for temperature (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is
alarm greater
Time delay for temperature (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is
lockout greater

15.3 Liquid medium supervision SSIML GUID-37669E94-4830-4C96-8A67-09600F847F23 v3

15.3.1 Identification
GUID-4CE96EF6-42C6-4F2E-A190-D288ABF766F6 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Liquid medium supervision SSIML - 71

618
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 15
Monitoring

15.3.2 Functionality GUID-3B1A665F-60A5-4343-85F4-AD9C066CBE8D v5

Liquid medium supervision SSIML is used for monitoring the circuit breaker condition. Binary
information based on the oil level in the circuit breaker is used as input signals to the function.
In addition, the function generates alarms based on received information.

15.3.3 Function block GUID-AC82A86C-495D-4CBD-9BF9-3CC760591AA9 v3

SSIML
BLOCK LEVEL
BLK_ALM LVL_ALM
LEVEL LVL_LO
TEMP TEMP
LVL_ALM TEMP_ALM
LEVEL_LO TEMP_LO
SET_L_LO
SET_T_LO
RESET_LO

IEC09000128-1-en.vsd
IEC09000128 V1 EN-US

Figure 342: SSIML function block

15.3.4 Signals
GUID-0C378BB3-2104-417F-94B5-16EFC55151FE v2

PID-3706-INPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 556: SSIML Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLK_ALM BOOLEAN 0 Block all the alarms
LEVEL REAL 0.0 Level input from CB
TEMP REAL 0.0 Temperature of the insulation medium from CB
LVL_ALM BOOLEAN 0 Level alarm signal
LEVEL_LO BOOLEAN 0 Level lockout signal
SET_L_LO BOOLEAN 0 Set level lockout
SET_T_LO BOOLEAN 0 Set temperature lockout
RESET_LO BOOLEAN 0 Reset level and temperature lockout

PID-3706-OUTPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 557: SSIML Output signals

Name Type Description
LEVEL REAL Level service value
LVL_ALM BOOLEAN Level below alarm level
LVL_LO BOOLEAN Level below lockout level
TEMP REAL Temperature of the insulation medium
TEMP_ALM BOOLEAN Temperature above alarm level
TEMP_LO BOOLEAN Temperature above lockout level

619
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Monitoring

15.3.5 Settings
PID-3706-SETTINGS v5

Table 558: SSIML Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
LevelAlmLimit 1.00 - 100.00 - 0.01 5.00 Alarm setting for level
LevelLOLimit 1.00 - 100.00 - 0.01 3.00 Level lockout setting
TempAlarmLimit -40.00 - 200.00 - 0.01 30.00 Temperature alarm level setting of the
medium
TempLOLimit -40.00 - 200.00 - 0.01 30.00 Temperature lockout level of the
medium
tLevelAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for level alarm
tLevelLockOut 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for level lockout indication
tTempAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for temperature alarm
tTempLockOut 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for temperture lockout
tResetLevelAlm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for level alarm
tResetLevelLO 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for level lockout
tResetTempLO 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for temperture
lockout
tResetTempAlm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for temperture alarm

15.3.6 Operation principle GUID-F4340B59-90D0-4EA7-9FD8-F21D425C884A v6

Liquid medium supervision SSIML is used to monitor the oil level in the circuit breaker. Binary
inputs of oil level LVL_ALM, LEVEL_LO and oil level signal LEVEL are taken into account to
initiate the alarms LVL_ALM and LVL_LO. When LEVEL is less than LevelAlmLimit or binary
signal from CB LVL_ALM is high, then the oil level indication alarm, LVL_ALM will be initiated.
Similarly, if oil level input LEVEL is less than LevelLOLimit or binary signal from CB LVL_LO is
high or temperature input TEMP is above lockout level TempLOLimit, then the oil level
indication lockout, LVL_LO will be initiated.

There may be sudden change in oil level for a very small time, for which the function need not
to initiate any alarm. That is why two time delays tLevelAlarm or tLevelLockOut have been
included. If the oil level goes below the settings for more than these time delays, then only the
corresponding alarm LVL_ALM or lockout LVL_LO will be initiated. The SET_L_LO binary input
is used for setting the gas pressure lockout. The LVL_LO output retains the last value until it is
reset by using the binary input RESET_LO. Hysteresis type comparators have been used with
the setting for relative and absolute hysteresis. The binary input BLK_ALM can be used for
blocking the alarms, and the BLOCK input can block both alarms and the lockout indication.

Temperature of the medium is available from the input signal of temperature. The signal is
monitored to detect high temperature.

When temperature input TEMP is greater than TempAlarmLimit, then temperature alarm
TEMP_ALM will be initiated. Similarly, if temperature input TEMP is greater than TempLOLimit,
then TEMP_LO will be initiated.

There may be sudden change in temperature of the medium for a very small time, for which the
function need not to initiate any alarm. That is why two time delays tTempAlarm or
tTempLockOuthave been included. If the temperature goes above the settings for more than
these time delays, then only the corresponding alarm TEMP_ALM or lockout TEMP_LO will be

620
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 15
Monitoring

initiated. The SET_T_LO binary input is used for setting the temperature lockout. The
TEMP_LO output retains the last value until it is reset by using the binary input RESET_LO.
Hysteresis type comparators have been used with the setting for relative and absolute
hysteresis. The binary input BLK_ALM can be used for blocking the alarms, and the BLOCK
input can block both alarms and the lockout indication.

15.3.7 Technical data

GUID-83B0F607-D898-403A-94FD-7FE8D45C73FF v6

Table 559: SSIMLTechnical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Oil alarm level 1.00-100.00 ±10.0% of set value
Oil lockout level 1.00-100.00 ±10.0% of set value
Temperature alarm level -40.00-200.00 ±2.5% of set value
Temperature lockout level -40.00-200.00 ±2.5% of set value
Time delay for oil alarm (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is
greater
Reset time delay for oil alarm (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is
greater
Time delay for oil lockout (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is
greater
Time delay for temperature alarm (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is
greater
Reset time delay for temperature (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is
alarm greater
Time delay for temperature (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is
lockout greater

15.4 Breaker monitoring SSCBR

15.4.1 Identification GUID-0FC081B2-0BC8-4EB8-9529-B941E51F18EE v7

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Breaker monitoring SSCBR - -

15.4.2 Functionality GUID-E1FD74C3-B9B6-4E11-AA1B-7E7F822FB4DD v10

The breaker monitoring function SSCBR is used to monitor different parameters of the breaker
condition. The breaker requires maintenance when the number of operations reaches a
predefined value. For a proper functioning of the circuit breaker, it is essential to monitor the
circuit breaker operation, spring charge indication or breaker wear, travel time, number of
operation cycles and estimate the accumulated energy during arcing periods.

621
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Monitoring

15.4.3 Function block GUID-B002ED61-5092-4E9E-AEB6-E4A4310BDAF2 v11

SSCBR
I3P* OPENPOS
BLOCK CLOSEPOS
BLKALM INVDPOS
TRIND TRCMD
POSOPEN TRVTOPAL
POSCLOSE TRVTCLAL
PRESALM OPERALM
PRESLO OPERLO
SPRCHRST CBLIFEAL
SPRCHRD MONALM
RSTCBWR IPOWALPH
RSTTRVT IPOWLOPH
RSTIPOW SPCHALM
RSTSPCHT GPRESALM
GPRESLO

IEC13000231-2-en.vsd
IEC13000231 V2 EN-US

Figure 343: SSCBR function block

15.4.4 Signals
PID-3267-INPUTSIGNALS v9

Table 560: SSCBR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block all the alarm and lockout indication
BLKALM BOOLEAN 0 Block all the alarms
TRIND BOOLEAN 0 Trip command from trip circuit
POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal for open position of apparatus from I/O
POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal for close position of apparatus from I/O
PRESALM BOOLEAN 0 Pressure alarm indication from CB
PRESLO BOOLEAN 0 Pressure lockout indication from CB
SPRCHRST BOOLEAN 0 CB spring charging started indication signal
SPRCHRD BOOLEAN 0 CB spring charged indication signal
RSTCBWR BOOLEAN 0 Reset of CB remaining life and operation counter
RSTTRVT BOOLEAN 0 Reset of CB closing and opening travel times
RSTIPOW BOOLEAN 0 Reset of accumulated I^CurrExponent
RSTSPCHT BOOLEAN 0 Reset of CB spring charging time

PID-3267-OUTPUTSIGNALS v9

Table 561: SSCBR Output signals

Name Type Description
OPENPOS BOOLEAN CB is in open position
CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN CB is in closed position
INVDPOS BOOLEAN CB is in Invalid Position
TRCMD BOOLEAN Open command issued to CB
TRVTOPAL BOOLEAN CB open travel time exceeded set value
TRVTCLAL BOOLEAN CB close travel time exceeded set value
Table continues on next page

622
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 15
Monitoring

Name Type Description

OPERALM BOOLEAN Number of CB operations exceeds alarm limit
OPERLO BOOLEAN Number of CB operations exceeds lockout limit
CBLIFEAL BOOLEAN Remaining life of CB reduced to Life alarm level
MONALM BOOLEAN CB 'not operated for long time' alarm
IPOWALPH BOOLEAN Accum I^CurrExponent integr over CB open travel time
exceeds alarm limit
IPOWLOPH BOOLEAN Accum I^CurrExponent integr over CB open travel time
exceeds lockout limit
SPCHALM BOOLEAN Spring charging time has crossed the set value
GPRESALM BOOLEAN Pressure below alarm level
GPRESLO BOOLEAN Pressure below lockout level

15.4.5 Settings
PID-3267-SETTINGS v9

Table 562: SSCBR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups
PhSel Phase L1 - - Phase L1 Phase selection
Phase L2
Phase L3
RatedOperCurr 100.00 - 5000.00 A 0.01 1000.00 Rated operating current of the
breaker
OperNoRated 1 - 99999 - 1 10000 Number of operations possible at
rated current
RatedFltCurr 500.00 - 99999.99 A 0.01 5000.00 Rated fault current of the breaker
OperNoFault 1 - 10000 - 1 1000 Number of operations possible at
rated fault current
tTrOpenAlm 0.000 - 0.200 s 0.001 0.040 Alarm level for open travel time
tTrCloseAlm 0.000 - 0.200 s 0.001 0.040 Alarm level for close travel time
OperAlmLevel 0 - 9999 - 1 200 Alarm level for number of operations
OperLOLevel 0 - 9999 - 1 300 Lockout level for number of
operations
AccSelCal Aux Contact - - Trip Signal Accumulated energy calculation
Trip Signal selection
CurrExponent 0.50 - 3.00 - 0.01 2.00 Current exponent value used for
energy calculation
AccStopCurr 5.00 - 100.00 %IB 0.01 10.00 RMS current level below which energy
accumulation stops
AlmAccCurrPwr 0.00 - 20000.00 - 0.01 2500.00 Alarm level for accumulated
I^CurrExponent integrated over CB
open travel time
LOAccCurrPwr 0.00 - 20000.00 - 0.01 2500.00 Lockout level for accumulated
I^CurrExponent integrated over CB
open travel time
Table continues on next page

623
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

SpChAlmTime 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 1.00 Alarm level for spring charging time
InitCBRemLife 1 - 99999 - 1 10000 Initial value for remaining life
estimates
InactiveAlDays 0 - 9999 Day 1 2000 Alarm level for inactive days counter

Table 563: SSCBR Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
OpenTimeCorr -0.100 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.010 Correction for open travel time
CloseTimeCorr -0.100 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.010 Correction for close travel time
DirCoef -3.00 - -0.50 - 0.01 -1.50 Directional coefficient for CB life
calculation
CBLifeAlmLevel 1 - 99999 - 1 5000 Alarm level for CB remaining life
ContTrCorr -0.010 - 0.010 s 0.001 0.005 Correction for time difference in
auxiliary and main contacts open time
OperTimeDelay 0.000 - 0.200 s 0.001 0.020 Time delay between change of status
of trip output and start of main
contact separation
tDGasPresAlm 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 0.10 Time delay for gas pressure alarm
tDGasPresLO 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 0.10 Time delay for gas pressure lockout
InitCounterVal 0 - 9999 - 1 0 Initial value for number of operations
InitAccCurrPwr 0.00 - 9999.99 - 0.01 0.00 Initial value for accum I^CurrExponent
integr over CB open travel time value
InitInactDays 0 - 9999 Day 1 0 Initial value for inactive days
InactiveAlHrs 0 - 23 Hour 1 0 Alarm time for inactive days counter in
hours

15.4.6 Monitored data

PID-3267-MONITOREDDATA v6

Table 564: SSCBR Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
TTRVOP REAL - ms Travel time of the CB during opening
operation
TTRVCL REAL - ms Travel time of the CB during closing
operation
NOOPER INTEGER - - Number of CB operation cycle
CBLIFEPH INTEGER - - CB Remaining life of respective phase
INADAYS INTEGER - - The number of days CB has been
inactive
IPOWPH REAL - - Accumulated I^CurrExponent
integrated over CB open travel time
SPCHT REAL - s The charging time of the CB spring

624
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 15
Monitoring

15.4.7 Operation principle GUID-3902D69C-1858-40DD-AD63-C33C381697BA v12

The breaker monitoring function includes metering and monitoring subfunctions. The
subfunctions can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The corresponding
parameter values are On and Off.

The operation of the subfunctions is described by the module diagram as shown in figure 344.
All the modules in the diagram are explained in subsequent sections.

625
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Monitoring

I3P-ILRMSPH
POSCLOSE TTRVOP
POSOPEN CB Contact Travel TTRVCL
BLOCK Time TRVTOPAL
BLKALM TRVTCLAL
RSTTRVT

OPENPOS

CB Status CLOSEPOS
INVDPOS

CBLIFEAL
Remaining Life of CB
CBLIFEPH
RSTCBWR

TRCMD

Accumulated IPOWALPH
energy
I3P-IL IPOWLOPH
TRIND
IPOWPH
RSTIPOW

CB Operation OPERALM
Cycles NOOPER

CB Operation MONALM
Monitoring INADAYS

SPCHALM
SPRCHRST CB Spring Charge SPCHT
SPRCHRD Monitoring
RSTSPCHT

CB Gas Pressure GPRESALM

PRESALM Indication GPRESLO
PRESLO
IEC12000624-3-en.vsd
IEC12000624 V3 EN-US

Figure 344: Functional module diagram of breaker monitoring

626
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 15
Monitoring

15.4.7.1 Circuit breaker contact travel time GUID-3AF0EE8D-AA8E-4F83-9916-61B5D0D6B05B v12

The circuit breaker contact travel time subfunction calculates the breaker contact travel time
for opening and closing operations. The operation of the breaker contact travel time
measurement is described in figure345.

POSCLOSE TTRVOP
Contact travel
POSOPEN time TTRVCL
calculation
RSTTRVT

TRVTOPAL
Alarm limit
BLOCK check TRVTCLAL
BLKALM
IEC12000615-2-en.vsd
IEC12000615 V2 EN-US

Figure 345: Functional module diagram for circuit breaker contact travel time

Contact travel time calculation

The contact travel time of the breaker is calculated from the time between the state of change
of auxiliary contacts. The opening travel time is measured between the opening of the
POSCLOSE and closing of the POSOPEN auxiliary contacts. Similarly, the closing travel time is
measured between the opening of the POSOPEN and closing of the POSCLOSE auxiliary
contacts. A compensation factor has been added to consider the time difference between
auxiliary contact operation and the actual physical opening of the breaker main contact.

Main Contact
1

0
POSCLOSE

POSOPEN
1

t1 tOpen t2 t3 tClose t4

tTravelOpen = tOpen + t1 + t2 tTravelClose = tClose + t3 + t4

IEC12000616_2_en.vsd

IEC12000616 V2 EN-US

Figure 346: Travel time calculation

There is a time difference t1 between the start of the main contact opening and the opening of
the POSCLOSE auxiliary contact. Similarly, there is a time difference t2 between the time when
the POSOPEN auxiliary contact opens and the main contact is completely open. Therefore, a
correction factor needs to be added to get the actual opening time. This factor is added with
the OpenTimeCorr (t1+t2) setting. The closing time is calculated by adding the value set with
the CloseTimeCorr (t3+t4) setting to the measured closing time.

The last measured opening travel time (TTRVOP) and the closing travel time (TTRVCL) are given
as service values.

The values can be reset using the Clear menu on the LHMI or by activation the input RSTCBWR.

627
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Monitoring

Alarm limit check

When the measured opening travel time is longer than the value set in the tTrOpenAlm setting,
the TRVTOPAL output is activated. Similarly, when the measured closing travel time is longer
than the value set in the tTrCloseAlm setting, the TRVTCLAL output is activated.

It is also possible to block the TRVTCLAL and TRVTOPAL alarm signals by activating the BLKALM
input.

15.4.7.2 Circuit breaker status GUID-390A1250-B258-4023-9A7D-0D7E19E13A6C v12

The circuit breaker status subfunction monitors the position of the circuit breaker, that is,
whether the breaker is in the open, closed or error position. The operation is described in
figure 347.

Phase current
I3P-ILRMSPH
check

OPENPOS
Contact
POSCLOSE position CLOSEPOS
indicator
POSOPEN INVDPOS

IEC12000613-3-en.vsd
IEC12000613 V3 EN-US

Figure 347: Functional module diagram for monitoring circuit breaker status

Phase current check

The module compares the phase current I3P-ILRMSPH to the AccStopCurr setting. If the
current in the selected phase exceeds the set level, it is reported to the contact position
indicator module as closed circuit breaker.

Contact position indicator

The circuit breaker status is open when the auxiliary input contact POSCLOSE is low, the
POSOPEN input is high and the phase current is less than the setting AccStopCurr value. The
circuit breaker is closed when the POSOPEN input is low and the POSCLOSE input is high. The
breaker is in the error state if both auxiliary contacts have the same value or if the auxiliary
input contact POSCLOSE is low and the POSOPEN input is high but the current is above the
setting AccStopCurr.

The status of the breaker is indicated with the binary outputs OPENPOS, CLOSEPOS and
INVDPOS for open, closed and error position respectively.

15.4.7.3 Remaining life of circuit breaker GUID-C347406A-2B6F-42BD-B70B-51489AB51EAE v12

The Remaining life of circuit breaker subfunction is used to give an indication on the wear and
tear of the circuit breaker. Every time the breaker operates, the life of the circuit breaker
reduces due to wear. The breaker wear depends on the interrupted current. The remaining life
of the breaker is estimated from the circuit breaker trip curve provided by the manufacturer.
The remaining life is decreased by at least one when the circuit breaker is opened. The
operation of the remaining life of circuit breaker subfunction is described in figure 348.

628
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 15
Monitoring

I3P-ILRMSPH
CB remaining CBLIFEPH
POSCLOSE life estimation

RSTCBWR

Alarm limit
BLOCK CBLIFEAL
Check
BLKALM

IEC12000620-3-en.vsd
IEC12000620 V3 EN-US

Figure 348: Functional module diagram for estimating the life of the circuit breaker

Circuit breaker remaining life estimation

If the interrupted current is less than the rated operating current set using the RatedOperCurr
setting, the remaining operations of the breaker are reduced by one operation. If the
interrupted current is more than the rated fault current set using the RatedFltCurr setting, the
remaining operations of the circuit breaker are reduced by the set OperNoRated divided by the
set OperNoFault value. If the tripping current is between these two values, the remaining life
of the circuit breaker is calculated based on the maintenance curve equation given by the
manufacturer. The OperNoRated parameter sets the number of operations the breaker can
perform at the rated current. The OperNoFault parameter sets the number of operations the
breaker can perform at the rated fault current.

Alarm limit check

When the remaining life of a circuit breaker phase drops below the CBLifeAlmLevel setting, the
life alarm CBLIFEAL is activated.

It is possible to deactivate the CBLIFEAL alarm signal by activating the binary input BLKALM.

The old circuit breaker operation counter value can be used by adding the value to the
InitCBRemLife parameter. The value can be reset using the Clear menu from LHMI or by
activating the input RSTCBWR.

15.4.7.4 Accumulated energy GUID-0163FF0F-6E18-4CDC-87AA-578304E0872E v11

The Accumulated energy subfunction calculates the accumulated energy (Iyt) based on current
samples, where the setting CurrExponent (y) ranges from 0.5 to 3.0. The operation is
described in figure 349.

The TRCMD output is enabled when either of the trip indications from the trip coil circuit TRIND
is high or the breaker status is OPENPOS.

I3P-IL
TRCMD
I3P-ILRMSPH Accumulated
POSCLOSE energy
calculation IPOWPH
TRIND

LRSTIPOW

IPOWALPH
Alarm limit
BLOCK Check IPOWLOPH
BLKALM

IEC12000619-3-en.vsd
IEC12000619 V3 EN-US

Figure 349: Functional module diagram for estimating accumulated energy

629
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Monitoring

Accumulated energy calculation

Accumulated energy can be calculated either with TRIND or POSCLOSE by selecting the
AccSelCal parameter value accordingly.

The calculation is initiated with the POSCLOSE or TRIND input events. It ends when the RMS
current is lower than the AccStopCurr setting.

The ContTrCorr setting is used to determine the accumulated energy in relation to the time
the main contact opens. If the setting is positive, the calculation of energy starts after the
auxiliary contact has opened and the delay equal to the value of the ContTrCorr setting has
passed. When the setting is negative, the calculation starts in advance by the correction time
in relation to when the auxiliary contact opened.

Main Contact Main Contact

close close

open open
POSCLOSE 1 POSCLOSE 1

0 0

Energy Energy
Accumulation Accumulation
starts starts

ContTrCorr ContTrCorr
(Negative) (Positive)
IEC12000618_1_en.vsd
IEC12000618 V1 EN-US

Figure 350: Significance of correction factor setting

Accumulated energy can also be calculated by using the change of state of the trip output.
TRIND is used to get the instance of the trip output and the time delay between the trip
initiation and the opening of the main contact is introduced by the setting OperTimeDelay.

The accumulated energy output IPOWPH is provided as a service value. The value can be reset
by enabling RSTIPOW through LHMI or by activating the input RSTIPOW.

Alarm limit check

The IPOWALPH alarm is activated when the accumulated energy exceeds the set value
AlmAccCurrPwr.

IPOWLOPH is activated when the accumulated energy exceeds the limit of the LOAccCurrPwr
setting.

The IPOWALPH and IPOWLOPH outputs can be blocked by activating the binary input BLKALM.

15.4.7.5 Circuit breaker operation cycles GUID-D3481D26-2E42-455E-8DB2-91538421F3B1 v9

The circuit breaker operation cycles subfunction counts the number of closing-opening
sequences of the breaker. The operation counter value is updated after each closing-opening
sequence. The operation is described in figure351.

630
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 15
Monitoring

POSCLOSE
Operation
POSOPEN NOOPER
counter
RSTCBWR

OPERALM
Alarm limit
BLOCK
Check
OPERLO
BLKALM
IEC12000617 V2 EN-US

Figure 351: Functional module diagram for circuit breaker operation cycles

Operation counter
The operation counter counts the number of operations based on the state of change of the
auxiliary contact inputs POSCLOSE and POSOPEN.

The number of operations NOOPER is given as a service value. The old circuit breaker
operation counter value can be used by adding the value to the InitCounterVal parameter and
can be reset by Clear CB wear in the Clear menu on the LHMI or activating the input RSTCBWR.

Alarm limit check

OPERALM is generated when the number of operations exceeds the set value of the
OperAlmLevel threshold setting.

If the number of operations increases and exceeds the limit value set with the OperLOLevel
setting, the OPERLO output is activated.

The binary outputs OPERALM and OPERALO are deactivated when the BLKALM input is activated.

15.4.7.6 Circuit breaker operation monitoring GUID-6DAE4C6B-BD66-49CD-817D-08E4EBF47DE0 v9

The circuit breaker operation monitoring subfunction indicates the inactive days of the circuit
breaker and gives an alarm when the number of days exceed the set level. The operation of the
circuit breaker operation monitoring is shown in figure 352.

POSCLOSE
Inactive timer INADAYS
POSOPEN

Alarm limit MONALM

BLOCK
Check
BLKALM
IEC12000614 V2 EN-US

Figure 352: Functional module diagram for circuit breaker operation monitoring

Inactive timer
The Inactive timer module calculates the number of days the circuit breaker has remained in
the same open or closed state. The value is calculated by monitoring the states of the POSOPEN
and POSCLOSE auxiliary contacts.

The number of inactive days INADAYS is available as a service value. The initial number of
inactive days is set using the InitInactDays parameter.

631
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Monitoring

Alarm limit check

MONALM is initiated when the number of inactive days and hours exceed the limit value defined
by the InactiveAlDays and InactivAlHrs setting. The alarm signal MONALM can be blocked by
activating the binary input BLKALM.

15.4.7.7 Circuit breaker spring charge monitoring GUID-F850A940-7890-4C37-8B31-6C7D5B30E582 v10

The circuit breaker spring charge monitoring subfunction calculates the spring charging time.
The operation is described in figure 353.

SPRCHRST
Spring charging
SPRCHRD time SPCHT
measurement
RSTSPCHT

Alarm limit
BLOCK SPCHALM
Check
BLKALM
IEC12000621 V2 EN-US

Figure 353: Functional module diagram for circuit breaker spring charge indication

Spring charging time measurement

The binary input SPRCHRST indicates the start of circuit breaker spring charging time.
SPRCHRD indicates that the circuit breaker spring is charged. The spring charging time is
calculated from the difference of these two signal timings. Spring charging indication is
described in figure 353.

The last measured spring charging time SPCHT is provided as a service value. The spring
charging time SPCHT can be reset on the LHMI or by activating the input RSTSPCHT.

Alarm limit check

If the time taken by the spring to charge is more than the value set with the SpChAlmTime
setting, the subfunction generates the SPCHALM alarm.

It is possible to block the SPCHALM alarm signal by activating the BLKALM binary input.

15.4.7.8 Circuit breaker gas pressure indication GUID-9D070D52-B499-4D45-9195-60181819184E v10

The circuit breaker gas pressure indication subfunction monitors the gas pressure inside the
arc chamber. The operation is described in figure 354.

PRESALM
tDGasPresAlm
BLOCK AND t GPRESALM

BLKALM

tDGasPresLO
PRESLO AND t GPRESLO
IEC12000622 V3 EN-US

Figure 354: Functional module diagram for circuit breaker gas pressure indication
When the PRESALM binary input is activated, the GPRESALM output is activated after a time
delay set with the tDGasPresAlm setting. The GPRESALM alarm can be blocked by activating the
BLKALM input.

632
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 15
Monitoring

If the pressure drops further to a very low level, the PRESLO binary input goes high, activating
the lockout alarm GPRESLO after a time delay set with the tDGasPresLO setting. The GPRESLO
alarm can be blocked by activating the BLKALM input.

The binary input BLOCK can be used to block the function. The activation of the BLOCK input
deactivates all outputs and resets internal timers. The alarm signals from the function can be
blocked by activating the binary input BLKALM.

15.4.8 Technical data

GUID-B6799420-D726-460E-B02F-C7D4F1937432 v9

Table 565: SSCBR Technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Alarm level for open and close (0 – 200) ms ±3 ms
travel time
Alarm level for number of (0 – 9999) -
operations
Independent time delay for spring (0.00 – 60.00) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is
charging time alarm greater
Independent time delay for gas (0.00 – 60.00) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is
pressure alarm greater
Independent time delay for gas (0.00 – 60.00) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is
pressure lockout greater
CB Contact Travel Time, opening ±3 ms
and closing
Remaining Life of CB ±2 operations
Accumulated Energy ±1.0% or ±0.5 whichever is greater

15.5 Event function EVENT SEMOD120002-1 v2

15.5.1 Identification
SEMOD167950-2 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Event function EVENT -
S00946 V1 EN-US

15.5.2 Functionality M12805-6 v10

When using a Substation Automation system with LON or SPA communication, time-tagged
events can be sent at change or cyclically from the IED to the station level. These events are
created from any available signal in the IED that is connected to the Event function (EVENT).
The EVENT function block is used for LON and SPA communication.

Analog and double indication values are also transferred through the EVENT function.

633
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Monitoring

15.5.3 Function block SEMOD116030-4 v2

EVENT
BLOCK
^INPUT1
^INPUT2
^INPUT3
^INPUT4
^INPUT5
^INPUT6
^INPUT7
^INPUT8
^INPUT9
^INPUT10
^INPUT11
^INPUT12
^INPUT13
^INPUT14
^INPUT15
^INPUT16

IEC05000697-2-en.vsd
IEC05000697 V2 EN-US

Figure 355: EVENT function block

15.5.4 Signals IP11335-1 v2

PID-4145-INPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 566: EVENT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
INPUT1 GROUP 0 Input 1
SIGNAL
INPUT2 GROUP 0 Input 2
SIGNAL
INPUT3 GROUP 0 Input 3
SIGNAL
INPUT4 GROUP 0 Input 4
SIGNAL
INPUT5 GROUP 0 Input 5
SIGNAL
INPUT6 GROUP 0 Input 6
SIGNAL
INPUT7 GROUP 0 Input 7
SIGNAL
INPUT8 GROUP 0 Input 8
SIGNAL
INPUT9 GROUP 0 Input 9
SIGNAL
INPUT10 GROUP 0 Input 10
SIGNAL
INPUT11 GROUP 0 Input 11
SIGNAL
INPUT12 GROUP 0 Input 12
SIGNAL
INPUT13 GROUP 0 Input 13
SIGNAL
Table continues on next page

634
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 15
Monitoring

Name Type Default Description

INPUT14 GROUP 0 Input 14
SIGNAL
INPUT15 GROUP 0 Input 15
SIGNAL
INPUT16 GROUP 0 Input 16
SIGNAL

15.5.5 Settings IP11336-1 v2

PID-4145-SETTINGS v4

Table 567: EVENT Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SPAChannelMask Off - - Off SPA channel mask
Channel 1-8
Channel 9-16
Channel 1-16
LONChannelMask Off - - Off LON channel mask
Channel 1-8
Channel 9-16
Channel 1-16
EventMask1 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 1
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask2 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 2
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask3 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 3
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask4 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 4
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask5 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 5
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask6 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 6
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask7 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 7
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
Table continues on next page

635
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

EventMask8 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 8
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask9 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 9
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask10 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 10
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask11 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 11
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask12 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 12
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask13 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 13
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask14 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 14
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask15 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 15
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask16 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 16
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
MinRepIntVal1 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 1
MinRepIntVal2 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 2
MinRepIntVal3 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 3
MinRepIntVal4 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 4
MinRepIntVal5 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 5
MinRepIntVal6 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 6
MinRepIntVal7 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 7
MinRepIntVal8 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 8
MinRepIntVal9 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 9
MinRepIntVal10 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 10
MinRepIntVal11 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 11
Table continues on next page

636
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 15
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

MinRepIntVal12 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 12
MinRepIntVal13 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 13
MinRepIntVal14 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 14
MinRepIntVal15 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 15
MinRepIntVal16 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 16

15.5.6 Operation principle M12807-6 v5

The main purpose of the Event function (EVENT) is to generate events when the state or value
of any of the connected input signals is in a state, or is undergoing a state transition, for which
event generation is enabled.

Each EVENT function has 16 inputs INPUT1 - INPUT16. Each input can be given a name from the
Application Configuration tool. The inputs are normally used to create single events, but are
also intended for double indication events.

The EVENT function also has an input BLOCK to block the generation of events.

Events that are sent from the IED can originate from both internal logical signals and binary
input channels. The internal signals are time-tagged in the main processing module, while the
binary input channels are time-tagged directly on the input module. Time-tagging of the
events that are originated from internal logical signals have a resolution corresponding to the
execution cycle-time of the source application. Time-tagging of the events that are originated
from binary input signals have a resolution of 1 ms.

The outputs from the EVENT function are formed by the reading of status, events and alarms
by the station level on every single input. The user-defined name for each input is intended to
be used by the station level.

All events according to the event mask are stored in a buffer, which contains up to 1000
events. If new events appear before the oldest event in the buffer is read, the oldest event is
overwritten and an overflow alarm appears.

Events are produced according to set event masks. The event masks are treated commonly for
both the LON and SPA communication. An EventMask can be set individually for each input
channel. These settings are available:

• NoEvents
• OnSet
• OnReset
• OnChange
• AutoDetect

It is possible to define which part of the EVENT function generates the events. This can be
performed individually for communication types SPAChannelMask and LONChannelMask. For
each communication type these settings are available:

• Off
• Channel 1-8
• Channel 9-16
• Channel 1-16

For LON communication, events are normally sent to station level at change. It is also possible
to set a time for cyclic sending of the events individually for each input channel.

637
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Monitoring

To protect the SA system from signals with a high change rate that can easily saturate the
EVENT function or the communication subsystems behind it, a quota limiter is implemented. If
an input creates events at a rate that completely consume the granted quota then further
events from the channel will be blocked. This block will be removed when the input calms down
and the accumulated quota reach 66% of the maximum burst quota. The maximum burst
quota per input channel is 45 events per second.

15.6 Disturbance report DRPRDRE IP14584-1 v2

15.6.1 Identification
M16055-1 v7

Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification device number
Disturbance report DRPRDRE - -
Disturbance report A1RADR - A4RADR - -
Disturbance report B1RBDR - B8RBDR - -

15.6.2 Functionality M12153-3 v11.1.1

Complete and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/or in the secondary
system together with continuous event-logging is accomplished by the disturbance report
functionality.

Disturbance report DRPRDRE, always included in the IED, acquires sampled data of all selected
analog input and binary signals connected to the function block with a, maximum of 40 analog
and 128 binary signals.

The Disturbance report functionality is a common name for several functions:

• Event list
• Indications
• Event recorder
• Trip value recorder
• Disturbance recorder
• Fault locator

The Disturbance report function is characterized by great flexibility regarding configuration,

starting conditions, recording times, and large storage capacity.

A disturbance is defined as an activation of an input to the AnRADR or BnRBDR function blocks,

which are set to trigger the disturbance recorder. All connected signals from start of pre-fault
time to the end of post-fault time will be included in the recording.

Every disturbance report recording is saved in the IED in the standard Comtrade format as a
reader file HDR, a configuration file CFG, and a data file DAT. The same applies to all events,
which are continuously saved in a ring-buffer. The local HMI is used to get information about
the recordings. The disturbance report files may be uploaded to PCM600 for further analysis
using the disturbance handling tool.

638
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 15
Monitoring

15.6.3 Function block IP806-1 v1

M12510-3 v3

DRPRDRE
DRPOFF
RECSTART
RECMADE
CLEARED
MEMUSED

IEC05000406-3-en.vsd
IEC05000406 V3 EN-US

Figure 356: DRPRDRE function block

SEMOD54837-4 v4

A1RADR
^GRP INPUT1
^GRP INPUT2
^GRP INPUT3
^GRP INPUT4
^GRP INPUT5
^GRP INPUT6
^GRP INPUT7
^GRP INPUT8
^GRP INPUT9
^GRP INPUT10

IEC05000430-4-en.vsdx

IEC05000430 V4 EN-US

Figure 357: A1RADR function block example for A1RADR-A3RADR

SEMOD54843-4 v3

A4RADR
^INPUT31
^INPUT32
^INPUT33
^INPUT34
^INPUT35
^INPUT36
^INPUT37
^INPUT38
^INPUT39
^INPUT40

IEC05000431-3-en.vsd
IEC05000431 V3 EN-US

Figure 358: A4RADR function block, derived analog inputs

SEMOD54845-4 v5

B1RBDR
^INPUT1
^INPUT2
^INPUT3
^INPUT4
^INPUT5
^INPUT6
^INPUT7
^INPUT8
^INPUT9
^INPUT10
^INPUT11
^INPUT12
^INPUT13
^INPUT14
^INPUT15
^INPUT16

IEC05000432-3-en.vsd
IEC05000432 V3 EN-US

Figure 359: B1RBDR function block, binary inputs, example for B1RBDR - B8RBDR

639
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Monitoring

15.6.4 Signals
PID-3949-OUTPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 568: DRPRDRE Output signals

Name Type Description
DRPOFF BOOLEAN Disturbance report function turned off
RECSTART BOOLEAN Disturbance recording started
RECMADE BOOLEAN Disturbance recording made
CLEARED BOOLEAN All disturbances in the disturbance report cleared
MEMUSED BOOLEAN More than 80% of memory used

PID-4014-INPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 569: A1RADR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
GRPINPUT1 GROUP - Group signal for input 1
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT2 GROUP - Group signal for input 2
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT3 GROUP - Group signal for input 3
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT4 GROUP - Group signal for input 4
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT5 GROUP - Group signal for input 5
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT6 GROUP - Group signal for input 6
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT7 GROUP - Group signal for input 7
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT8 GROUP - Group signal for input 8
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT9 GROUP - Group signal for input 9
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT10 GROUP - Group signal for input 10
SIGNAL

GUID-D025D5D9-A0F3-4A00-891A-63AD5F609A77 v1
A2RADR and A3RADR functions have the same input signal specifications as A1RADR but with
different numbering:

• A2RADR: GRPINPUT11 to GRPINPUT20 (group signal for inputs 11 to 20)

• A3RADR: GRPINPUT21 to GRPINPUT30 (group signal for inputs 21 to 30)

PID-4017-INPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 570: A4RADR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT31 REAL 0 Analog channel 31
INPUT32 REAL 0 Analog channel 32
INPUT33 REAL 0 Analog channel 33
INPUT34 REAL 0 Analog channel 34
Table continues on next page

640
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 15
Monitoring

Name Type Default Description

INPUT35 REAL 0 Analog channel 35
INPUT36 REAL 0 Analog channel 36
INPUT37 REAL 0 Analog channel 37
INPUT38 REAL 0 Analog channel 38
INPUT39 REAL 0 Analog channel 39
INPUT40 REAL 0 Analog channel 40

PID-3798-INPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 571: B1RBDR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 6
INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 7
INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 8
INPUT9 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 9
INPUT10 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 10
INPUT11 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 11
INPUT12 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 12
INPUT13 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 13
INPUT14 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 14
INPUT15 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 15
INPUT16 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 16

GUID-D3A8067F-80F8-4174-BD2D-4C43F4B99020 v2
B2RBDR to B8RBDR functions have the same input signal specifications as B1RBDR but with
different numbering:

• B2RBDR: INPUT17 to INPUT32 (binary channels 17 to 32)

• B3RBDR: INPUT33 to INPUT48 (binary channels 33 to 48)
• B4RBDR: INPUT49 to INPUT64 (binary channels 49 to 64)
• B5RBDR: INPUT65 to INPUT80 (binary channels 65 to 80)
• B6RBDR: INPUT81 to INPUT96 (binary channels 81 to 96)
• B7RBDR: INPUT97 to INPUT112 (binary channels 97 to 112)
• B8RBDR: INPUT113 to INPUT128 (binary channels 113 to 128)

641
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Monitoring

15.6.5 Settings
PID-3949-SETTINGS v2

Table 572: DRPRDRE Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
PreFaultRecT 0.05 - 9.90 s 0.01 0.10 Pre-fault recording time
PostFaultRecT 0.1 - 10.0 s 0.1 0.5 Post-fault recording time
TimeLimit 0.5 - 10.0 s 0.1 1.0 Fault recording time limit
PostRetrig Off - - Off Post-fault retrig enabled (On) or not
On (Off)
MaxNoStoreRec 10 - 100 - 1 100 Maximum number of stored
disturbances
ZeroAngleRef 1 - 30 Ch 1 1 Trip value recorder, phasor reference
channel
OpModeTest Off - - Off Operation mode during test mode
On

PID-4014-SETTINGS v5

Table 573: A1RADR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation01 Off - - Off Operation On/Off
On
Operation02 Off - - Off Operation On/Off
On
Operation03 Off - - Off Operation On/Off
On
Operation04 Off - - Off Operation On/Off
On
Operation05 Off - - Off Operation On/Off
On
Operation06 Off - - Off Operation On/Off
On
Operation07 Off - - Off Operation On/Off
On
Operation08 Off - - Off Operation On/Off
On
Operation09 Off - - Off Operation On/Off
On
Operation10 Off - - Off Operation On/Off
On

642
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 15
Monitoring

Table 574: A1RADR Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
NomValue01 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 1
UnderTrigOp01 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 1 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe01 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel
1 in % of signal
OverTrigOp01 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog
On channel 1 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe01 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 1
in % of signal
NomValue02 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 2
UnderTrigOp02 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 2 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe02 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel
2 in % of signal
OverTrigOp02 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog
On channel 2 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe02 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 2
in % of signal
NomValue03 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 3
UnderTrigOp03 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 3 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe03 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel
3 in % of signal
OverTrigOp03 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog
On channel 3 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe03 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Overtrigger level for analog channel 3
in % of signal
NomValue04 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 4
UnderTrigOp04 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 4 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe04 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel
4 in % of signal
OverTrigOp04 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog
On channel 4 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe04 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 4
in % of signal
NomValue05 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 5
UnderTrigOp05 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 5 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe05 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel
5 in % of signal
OverTrigOp05 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog
On channel 5 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe05 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 5
in % of signal
NomValue06 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 6
UnderTrigOp06 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 6 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe06 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel
6 in % of signal
Table continues on next page

643
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

OverTrigOp06 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog
On channel 6 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe06 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 6
in % of signal
NomValue07 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 7
UnderTrigOp07 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 7 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe07 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel
7 in % of signal
OverTrigOp07 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog
On channel 7 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe07 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 7
in % of signal
NomValue08 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 8
UnderTrigOp08 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 8 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe08 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel
8 in % of signal
OverTrigOp08 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog
On channel 8 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe08 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 8
in % of signal
NomValue09 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 9
UnderTrigOp09 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 9 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe09 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel
9 in % of signal
OverTrigOp09 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog
On channel 9 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe09 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 9
in % of signal
NomValue10 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 10
UnderTrigOp10 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 10 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe10 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel
10 in % of signal
OverTrigOp10 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog
On channel 10 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe10 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel
10 in % of signal

GUID-E05EEC82-CB90-4E73-B9C9-4C16FD95FCBF v1
A2RADR to A4RADR functions have the same Non group settings (basic) as A1RADR but with
different numbering:

• A2RADR: Operation11 to Operation20

• A3RADR: Operation21 to Operation30
• A4RADR: Operation31 to Operation40

A2RADR to A4RADR functions have the same Non group settings (advanced) as A1RADR but
with different numbering (examples given in brackets):

644
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 15
Monitoring

• A2RADR: 11 to 20 (NomValue11, nominal value for analog channel 11)

• A3RADR: 21 to 30 (NomValue21, nominal value for analog channel 21)
• A4RADR: 31 to 40 (NomValue31, nominal value for analog channel 31)

PID-3798-SETTINGS v4

Table 575: B1RBDR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
TrigDR01 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED01 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 1
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR02 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED02 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 2
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR03 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED03 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 3
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR04 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED04 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 4
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR05 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED05 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 5
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR06 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED06 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 6
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR07 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED07 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 7
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR08 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED08 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 8
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR09 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
Table continues on next page

645
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

SetLED09 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 9
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR10 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED10 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 10
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR11 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED11 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 11
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR12 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED12 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 12
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR13 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED13 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 13
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR14 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED14 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 14
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR15 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED15 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 15
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR16 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED16 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 16
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
FunType1 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 1 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo1 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary
channel 1 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType2 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 2 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo2 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary
channel 2 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType3 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 3 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
Table continues on next page

646
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 15
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

InfNo3 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary
channel 3 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType4 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 4
(IEC -60870-5-103)
InfNo4 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary
channel 4 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType5 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 5 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo5 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary
channel 5 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType6 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 6
(IEC -60870-5-103)
InfNo6 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary
channel 6 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType7 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 7 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo7 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary
channel 7 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType8 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 8
(IEC -60870-5-103)
InfNo8 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary
channel 8 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType9 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 9
(IEC -60870-5-103)
InfNo9 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary
channel 9 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType10 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 10
(IEC -60870-5-103)
InfNo10 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary
channel 10 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType11 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 11
(IEC -60870-5-103)
InfNo11 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary
channel 11 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType12 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 12
(IEC -60870-5-103)
InfNo12 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary
channel 12 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType13 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 13
(IEC -60870-5-103)
InfNo13 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary
channel 13 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType14 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 14
(IEC -60870-5-103)
InfNo14 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary
channel 14 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType15 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 15
(IEC -60870-5-103)
InfNo15 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary
channel 15 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType16 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 16
(IEC -60870-5-103)
InfNo16 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary
channel 16 (IEC -60870-5-103)

647
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Monitoring

Table 576: B1RBDR Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
TrigLevel01 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 1
IndicationMa01 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 1
Show
TrigLevel02 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 2
IndicationMa02 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 2
Show
TrigLevel03 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 3
IndicationMa03 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 3
Show
TrigLevel04 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 4
IndicationMa04 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 4
Show
TrigLevel05 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 5
IndicationMa05 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 5
Show
TrigLevel06 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 6
IndicationMa06 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 6
Show
TrigLevel07 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 7
IndicationMa07 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 7
Show
TrigLevel08 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 8
IndicationMa08 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 8
Show
TrigLevel09 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 9
IndicationMa09 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 9
Show
TrigLevel10 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 10
IndicationMa10 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 10
Show
TrigLevel11 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 11
IndicationMa11 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 11
Show
TrigLevel12 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 12
IndicationMa12 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 12
Show
TrigLevel13 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 13
Table continues on next page

648
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 15
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

IndicationMa13 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 13
Show
TrigLevel14 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 14
IndicationMa14 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 14
Show
TrigLevel15 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 15
IndicationMa15 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 15
Show
TrigLevel16 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 16
IndicationMa16 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 16
Show

GUID-8702C5B9-05A3-4E61-8952-C66483FFDFE2 v2
B2RBDR to B8RBDR functions have the same Non group settings (basic) as B1RBDR but with
different numbering (examples given in brackets):

• B2RBDR: 17 to 32 (SetLED17, set LED on HMI for binary channel 17)

• B3RBDR: 33 to 48 (SetLED33, set LED on HMI for binary channel 33)
• B4RBDR: 49 to 64 (SetLED49, set LED on HMI for binary channel 49)
• B5RBDR: 65 to 80 (SetLED65, set LED on HMI for binary channel 65)
• B6RBDR: 81 to 96 (SetLED81, set LED on HMI for binary channel 81)
• B7RBDR: 97 to 112 (SetLED97, set LED on HMI for binary channel 97)
• B8RBDR: 113 to 128 (SetLED113, set LED on HMI for binary channel 113)

B2RBDR to B8RBDR functions have the same Non group settings (advanced) as B1RBDR but
with different numbering (examples given in brackets):

• B2RBDR: 17 to 32 (IndicationMa17, indication mask for binary channel 17)

• B3RBDR: 33 to 48 (IndicationMa33, indication mask for binary channel 33)
• B4RBDR: 49 to 64 (IndicationMa49, indication mask for binary channel 49)
• B5RBDR: 65 to 80 (IndicationMa65, indication mask for binary channel 65)
• B6RBDR: 81 to 96 (IndicationMa81, indication mask for binary channel 81)
• B7RBDR: 97 to 112 (IndicationMa97, indication mask for binary channel 97)
• B8RBDR: 113 to 128 (IndicationMa113, indication mask for binary channel 113)

15.6.6 Monitored data

PID-3949-MONITOREDDATA v2

Table 577: DRPRDRE Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
MemoryUsed INTEGER - % Memory usage (0-100%)
UnTrigStatCh1 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 1
activated
OvTrigStatCh1 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 1
activated
UnTrigStatCh2 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 2
activated
OvTrigStatCh2 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 2
activated
Table continues on next page

649
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Monitoring

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

UnTrigStatCh3 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 3
activated
OvTrigStatCh3 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 3
activated
UnTrigStatCh4 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 4
activated
OvTrigStatCh4 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 4
activated
UnTrigStatCh5 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 5
activated
OvTrigStatCh5 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 5
activated
UnTrigStatCh6 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 6
activated
OvTrigStatCh6 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 6
activated
UnTrigStatCh7 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 7
activated
OvTrigStatCh7 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 7
activated
UnTrigStatCh8 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 8
activated
OvTrigStatCh8 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 8
activated
UnTrigStatCh9 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 9
activated
OvTrigStatCh9 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 9
activated
UnTrigStatCh10 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 10
activated
OvTrigStatCh10 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 10
activated
UnTrigStatCh11 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 11
activated
OvTrigStatCh11 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 11
activated
UnTrigStatCh12 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 12
activated
OvTrigStatCh12 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 12
activated
UnTrigStatCh13 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 13
activated
OvTrigStatCh13 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 13
activated
UnTrigStatCh14 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 14
activated
OvTrigStatCh14 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 14
activated
UnTrigStatCh15 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 15
activated
OvTrigStatCh15 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 15
activated
Table continues on next page

650
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 15
Monitoring

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

UnTrigStatCh16 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 16
activated
OvTrigStatCh16 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 16
activated
UnTrigStatCh17 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 17
activated
OvTrigStatCh17 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 17
activated
UnTrigStatCh18 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 18
activated
OvTrigStatCh18 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 18
activated
UnTrigStatCh19 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 19
activated
OvTrigStatCh19 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 19
activated
UnTrigStatCh20 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 20
activated
OvTrigStatCh20 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 20
activated
UnTrigStatCh21 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 21
activated
OvTrigStatCh21 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 21
activated
UnTrigStatCh22 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 22
activated
OvTrigStatCh22 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 22
activated
UnTrigStatCh23 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 23
activated
OvTrigStatCh23 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 23
activated
UnTrigStatCh24 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 24
activated
OvTrigStatCh24 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 24
activated
UnTrigStatCh25 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 25
activated
OvTrigStatCh25 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 25
activated
UnTrigStatCh26 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 26
activated
OvTrigStatCh26 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 26
activated
UnTrigStatCh27 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 27
activated
OvTrigStatCh27 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 27
activated
UnTrigStatCh28 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 28
activated
OvTrigStatCh28 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 28
activated
Table continues on next page

651
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Monitoring

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

UnTrigStatCh29 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 29
activated
OvTrigStatCh29 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 29
activated
UnTrigStatCh30 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 30
activated
OvTrigStatCh30 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 30
activated
UnTrigStatCh31 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 31
activated
OvTrigStatCh31 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 31
activated
UnTrigStatCh32 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 32
activated
OvTrigStatCh32 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 32
activated
UnTrigStatCh33 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 33
activated
OvTrigStatCh33 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 33
activated
UnTrigStatCh34 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 34
activated
OvTrigStatCh34 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 34
activated
UnTrigStatCh35 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 35
activated
OvTrigStatCh35 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 35
activated
UnTrigStatCh36 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 36
activated
OvTrigStatCh36 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 36
activated
UnTrigStatCh37 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 37
activated
OvTrigStatCh37 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 37
activated
UnTrigStatCh38 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 38
activated
OvTrigStatCh38 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 38
activated
UnTrigStatCh39 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 39
activated
OvTrigStatCh39 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 39
activated
UnTrigStatCh40 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 40
activated
OvTrigStatCh40 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 40
activated
FaultNumber INTEGER - - Disturbance fault number

652
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 15
Monitoring

15.6.7 Operation principle

M12155-6 v13
Disturbance report DRPRDRE is a common name for several functions to supply the operator,
analysis engineer, and so on, with sufficient information about events in the system.

The functions included in the disturbance report are:

• Event list (EL)

• Indications (IND)
• Event recorder (ER)
• Trip value recorder (TVR)
• Disturbance recorder (DR)
• Fault locator (FL)
• Settings information

Figure 360 shows the relations between Disturbance Report, included functions and function
blocks. Event list (EL), Event recorder (ER) and Indications (IND) uses information from the
binary input function blocks (BxRBDR).Trip value recorder (TVR) uses analog information from
the analog input function blocks (AxRADR) which is used by FL after estimation by TVR.
Disturbance recorder DRPRDRE acquires information from both AxRADR and BxRBDR.

AxRADR Disturbance Report

DRPRDRE FL
Analog signals
Trip value rec Fault locator

BxRBDR Disturbance
recorder

Binary signals

Event list

Event recorder

Indications

IEC09000336-3-en.vsdx

IEC09000336 V3 EN-US

Figure 360: Disturbance report functions and related function blocks

The whole disturbance report can contain information for a number of recordings, each with
the data coming from all the parts mentioned above. The event list function is working
continuously, independent of disturbance triggering, recording time, and so on. Settings
information function contains all the visible settings, parameter information of components
configured in ACT, runtime status and IEC61850 behavior that is added to the disturbance
record header file. These settings information is recorded in XML format and then grouped for
each function instance in the HDR file. The function, setting names and Enum values are same
as in the HMI and can be translated to the selected HMI language. All setting values are
updated along with the units. If the setting values are related to the global base value, then the

653
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Monitoring

setting value is scaled and updated with corresponding global base unit. All information in the
disturbance report is stored in non-volatile flash memories. This implies that no information is
lost in case of loss of auxiliary power. Each report will get an identification number in the
interval from 0-999.

Disturbance report

Record no. N Record no. N+1 Record no. N+100

General dist. Trip Event Disturbance

Indications Fault locator Event list
information values recordings recording

en05000125.vsd
IEC05000125 V1 EN-US

Figure 361: Disturbance report structure

Up to 100 disturbance reports can be stored. If a new disturbance is to be recorded when the
memory is full, the oldest disturbance report is overwritten by the new one. The total
recording capacity for the disturbance recorder is depending of sampling frequency, number
of analog and binary channels and recording time and settings information (refer Figure 363
for the recording times definition). Figure 362 shows the number of recordings versus the
total recording time tested for a typical configuration. In a 50 Hz system, it is possible to
record 100 disturbance recordings where the average recording time for each disturbance
recording file is 3.4 seconds with 40 analog and 96 binary signals in each recording. The
memory limit does not affect the rest of the disturbance recordings report (Event list (EL),
Event recordings (ER), Indications (IND) and Trip value recordings (TVR)).

Number of recordings
100
3,4 s

80 3,4 s 20 analog
96 binary
40 analog
96 binary
60 6,3 s
6,3 s

6,3 s 50 Hz
40
60 Hz
Total recording time

250 300 350 400 s

en05000488.vsd
IEC05000488 V1 EN-US

Figure 362: Example of number of recordings versus the total recording time

The maximum number of recordings depend on each recordings total

recording time. Long recording time will reduce the number of recordings to
less than 100.

654
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 15
Monitoring

The IED flash disk should NOT be used to store any user files. This might cause
disturbance recordings to be deleted due to lack of disk space.

Disturbance information M12155-175 v3

Date and time of the disturbance, the indications, events, fault location and the trip values are
available on the local HMI. To acquire a complete disturbance report the user must use a PC
and - either the PCM600 Disturbance handling tool - or a FTP or MMS (over 61850) client. The
PC can be connected to the IED front, rear or remotely via the station bus (Ethernet ports).

Indications (IND) M12155-87 v5

Indications is a list of signals that were activated during the total recording time of the
disturbance (not time-tagged).

Event recorder (ER) M12155-89 v5

The event recorder may contain a list of up to 150 time-tagged events, which have occurred
during the disturbance. The information is available via the local HMI or PCM600.

Event list (EL) M12155-177 v6

The event list may contain a list of totally 1000 time-tagged events. The list information is
continuously updated when selected binary signals change state. The oldest data is
overwritten. The logged signals may be presented via local HMI or PCM600.

Trip value recorder (TVR) M12155-91 v5

The recorded trip values include phasors of selected analog signals before the fault and during
the fault.

Disturbance recorder (DR) M12155-97 v5

Disturbance recorder records analog and binary signal data before, during and after the fault.

Fault locator (FL) M12155-186 v4

The fault location function calculates the distance to fault.

Time tagging M12155-194 v1

The IED has a built-in real-time calendar and clock. This function is used for all time tagging
within the disturbance report

Recording times M12155-99 v5

Disturbance report DRPRDRE records information about a disturbance during a settable time
frame. The recording times are valid for the whole disturbance report. Disturbance recorder
(DR), event recorder (ER) and indication function register disturbance data and events during
tRecording, the total recording time.

The total recording time, tRecording, of a recorded disturbance is:

tRecording = PreFaultrecT + tFault + PostFaultrecT or PreFaultrecT + TimeLimit, depending on

which criterion stops the current disturbance recording

655
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Monitoring

Trig point
TimeLimit

PreFaultRecT PostFaultRecT

1 2 3

en05000487.vsd
IEC05000487 V1 EN-US

Figure 363: The recording times definition

PreFaultRecT, 1 Pre-fault or pre-trigger recording time. The time before the fault including the operate time
of the trigger. Use the setting PreFaultRecT to set this time.
tFault, 2 Fault time of the recording. The fault time cannot be set. It continues as long as any valid
trigger condition, binary or analog, persists (unless limited by TimeLimit the limit time).
PostFaultRecT, 3 Post fault recording time. The time the disturbance recording continues after all activated
triggers are reset. Use the setting PostFaultRecT to set this time.
TimeLimit Limit time. The maximum allowed recording time after the disturbance recording was
triggered. The limit time is used to eliminate the consequences of a trigger that does not
reset within a reasonable time interval. It limits the maximum recording time of a recording
and prevents subsequent overwriting of already stored disturbances. Use the setting
TimeLimit to set this time.

Analog signals M12155-160 v7

Up to 40 analog signals can be selected for recording by the Disturbance recorder and
triggering of the Disturbance report function. Out of these 40, 30 are reserved for external
analog signals from analog input modules (TRM) and line data communication module (LDCM)
via preprocessing function blocks (SMAI) and summation block (3PHSUM). The last 10 channels
may be connected to internally calculated analog signals available as function block output
signals (mA input signals, phase differential currents, bias currents and so on).

656
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 15
Monitoring

SMAI A1RADR
Block AI3P A2RADR
^GRP2L1 AI1 INPUT1 A3RADR
External
analogue ^GRP2L2 AI2 INPUT2
signals ^GRP2L3 AI3 INPUT3
^GRP2N AI4 INPUT4
Type AIN INPUT5
INPUT6
...

A4RADR

INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
Internal analogue signals INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36

...

INPUT40

IEC10000029-1-en.vsd
IEC10000029 V1 EN-US

Figure 364: Analog input function blocks

The external input signals will be acquired, filtered and skewed and (after configuration)
available as an input signal on the AxRADR function block via the SMAI function block. The
information is saved at the Disturbance report base sampling rate (1000 or 1200 Hz). Internally
calculated signals are updated according to the cycle time of the specific function. If a function
is running at lower speed than the base sampling rate, Disturbance recorder will use the latest
updated sample until a new updated sample is available.

If the IED is preconfigured the only tool needed for analog configuration of the Disturbance
report is the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT, external signal configuration). In case of modification of
a preconfigured IED or general internal configuration the Application Configuration tool within
PCM600 is used.

The preprocessor function block (SMAI) calculates the residual quantities in cases where only
the three phases are connected (AI4-input not used). SMAI makes the information available as
a group signal output, phase outputs and calculated residual output (AIN-output). In situations
where AI4-input is used as an input signal the corresponding information is available on the
non-calculated output (AI4) on the SMAI function block. Connect the signals to the AxRADR
accordingly.

For each of the analog signals, Operation = On means that it is recorded by the disturbance
recorder. The trigger is independent of the setting of Operation, and triggers even if operation
is set to Off. Both undervoltage and overvoltage can be used as trigger conditions. The same
applies for the current signals.

If Operation = Off, no waveform (samples) will be recorded and reported in graph. However,
Trip value, pre-fault and fault value will be recorded and reported. The input channel can still be
used to trig the disturbance recorder.

If Operation = On, waveform (samples) will also be recorded and reported in graph.

The analog signals are presented only in the disturbance recording, but they affect the entire
disturbance report when being used as triggers.

657
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Monitoring

Binary signals M12155-162 v8

Up to 128 binary signals can be selected to be handled by disturbance report. The signals can
be selected from internal logical and binary input signals. A binary signal is selected to be
recorded when:

• the corresponding function block is included in the configuration

• the signal is connected to the input of the function block

Each of the 128 signals can be selected as a trigger of the disturbance report (Operation = On).
A binary signal can be selected to activate the red LED on the local HMI (SetLED = On).

The selected signals are presented in the event recorder, event list and the disturbance
recording. But they affect the whole disturbance report when they are used as triggers. The
indications are also selected from these 128 signals with local HMI IndicationMask = Show/
Hide.

Trigger signals M12155-164 v2

The trigger conditions affect the entire disturbance report, except the event list, which runs
continuously. As soon as at least one trigger condition is fulfilled, a complete disturbance
report is recorded. On the other hand, if no trigger condition is fulfilled, there is no
disturbance report, no indications, and so on. This implies the importance of choosing the
right signals as trigger conditions.

A trigger can be of type:

• Manual trigger
• Binary-signal trigger
• Analog-signal trigger (over/under function)

Manual trigger M12155-167 v4

A disturbance report can be manually triggered from the local HMI, PCM600 or via station bus
(IEC 61850). When the trigger is activated, the manual trigger signal is generated. This feature
is especially useful for testing. Refer to the operator's manual for procedure.

Binary-signal trigger M12155-169 v4

Any binary signal state (logic one or a logic zero) can be selected to generate a trigger
(Triglevel = Trig on 0/Trig on 1). When a binary signal is selected to generate a trigger from a
logic zero, the selected signal will not be listed in the indications list of the disturbance report.

Analog-signal trigger M12155-171 v6

All analog signals are available for trigger purposes, no matter if they are recorded in the
disturbance recorder or not. The settings are OverTrigOp, UnderTrigOp, OverTrigLe and
UnderTrigLe.

The check of the trigger condition is based on peak-to-peak values. When this is found, the
absolute average value of these two peak values is calculated. If the average value is above the
threshold level for an overvoltage or overcurrent trigger, this trigger is indicated with a greater
than (>) sign with the user-defined name.

If the average value is below the set threshold level for an undervoltage or undercurrent
trigger, this trigger is indicated with a less than (<) sign with its name. The procedure is
separately performed for each channel.

This method of checking the analog start conditions gives a function which is insensitive to DC
offset in the signal. The operate time for this start is typically in the range of one cycle, 20 ms
for a 50 Hz network.

All under/over trig signal information is available on the local HMI and PCM600.

658
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 15
Monitoring

Post Retrigger M12155-173 v6

Disturbance report function does not automatically respond to any new trig condition during a
recording, after all signals set as trigger signals have been reset. However, under certain
circumstances the fault condition may reoccur during the post-fault recording, for instance by
automatic reclosing to a still faulty power line.

In order to capture the new disturbance it is possible to allow retriggering (PostRetrig = On)
during the post-fault time. In this case a new, complete recording will start and, during a
period, run in parallel with the initial recording.

When the retrig parameter is disabled (PostRetrig = Off), a new recording will not start until
the post-fault (PostFaultrecT or TimeLimit) period is terminated. If a new trig occurs during
the post-fault period and lasts longer than the proceeding recording a new complete
recording will be started.

Disturbance report function can handle maximum 3 simultaneous disturbance recordings.

15.6.8 Technical data

M12760-1 v9.1.1

Table 578: DRPRDRE technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Pre-fault time (0.05–9.90) s -
Post-fault time (0.1–10.0) s -
Limit time (0.5–10.0) s -
Maximum number of recordings 100, first in - first out -
Time tagging resolution 1 ms See table 745
Maximum number of analog inputs 30 + 10 (external + internally -
derived)
Maximum number of binary inputs 128 -
Maximum number of phasors in the Trip Value 30 -
recorder per recording
Maximum number of indications in a disturbance 96 -
report
Maximum number of events in the Event recording 150 -
per recording
Maximum number of events in the Event list 1000, first in - first out -
Maximum total recording time (3.4 s recording 340 seconds (100 recordings) -
time and maximum number of channels, typical at 50 Hz, 280 seconds (80
value) recordings) at 60 Hz
Sampling rate 1 kHz at 50 Hz -
1.2 kHz at 60 Hz
Recording bandwidth (5-300) Hz -

15.7 Logical signal status report BINSTATREP GUID-E7A2DB38-DD96-4296-B3D5-EB7FBE77CE07 v2

15.7.1 Identification GUID-E0247779-27A2-4E6C-A6DD-D4C31516CA5C v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Logical signal status report BINSTATREP - -

659
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Monitoring

15.7.2 Functionality GUID-A72E490D-01F7-4874-B010-8BDE38391D88 v3

The Logical signal status report (BINSTATREP) function makes it possible for a SPA master to
poll signals from various other functions.

15.7.3 Function block GUID-BA0A5BC3-493B-4FE3-B4A9-14F60A88A22F v2

BINSTATREP
BLOCK OUTPUT1
^INPUT1 OUTPUT2
^INPUT2 OUTPUT3
^INPUT3 OUTPUT4
^INPUT4 OUTPUT5
^INPUT5 OUTPUT6
^INPUT6 OUTPUT7
^INPUT7 OUTPUT8
^INPUT8 OUTPUT9
^INPUT9 OUTPUT10
^INPUT10 OUTPUT11
^INPUT11 OUTPUT12
^INPUT12 OUTPUT13
^INPUT13 OUTPUT14
^INPUT14 OUTPUT15
^INPUT15 OUTPUT16
^INPUT16

IEC09000730-1-en.vsd
IEC09000730 V1 EN-US

Figure 365: BINSTATREP function block

15.7.4 Signals
PID-4144-INPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 579: BINSTATREP Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 6
INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 7
INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 8
INPUT9 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 9
INPUT10 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 10
INPUT11 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 11
INPUT12 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 12
INPUT13 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 13
INPUT14 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 14
INPUT15 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 15
INPUT16 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 16

660
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 15
Monitoring

PID-4144-OUTPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 580: BINSTATREP Output signals

Name Type Description
OUTPUT1 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 1
OUTPUT2 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 2
OUTPUT3 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 3
OUTPUT4 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 4
OUTPUT5 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 5
OUTPUT6 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 6
OUTPUT7 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 7
OUTPUT8 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 8
OUTPUT9 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 9
OUTPUT10 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 10
OUTPUT11 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 11
OUTPUT12 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 12
OUTPUT13 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 13
OUTPUT14 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 14
OUTPUT15 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 15
OUTPUT16 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 16

15.7.5 Settings
PID-4144-SETTINGS v4

Table 581: BINSTATREP Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
t 0.0 - 60.0 s 0.1 10.0 Time delay of function

15.7.6 Operation principle GUID-537921CA-82B9-4A02-BAD1-67E3AC61AE96 v3

The Logical signal status report (BINSTATREP) function has 16 inputs and 16 outputs. The
output status follows the inputs and can be read from the local HMI or via SPA communication.

When an input is set, the respective output is set for a user defined time. If the input signal
remains set for a longer period, the output will remain set until the input signal resets.

INPUTn

OUTPUTn
t t

IEC09000732-1-en.vsd
IEC09000732 V1 EN-US

Figure 366: BINSTATREP logical diagram

661
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Monitoring

15.8 Measured value expander block RANGE_XP SEMOD52451-1 v2

15.8.1 Identification
SEMOD113212-2 v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Measured value expander block RANGE_XP - -

15.8.2 Functionality SEMOD52450-4 v7

The current and voltage measurements functions (CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU and VNMMXU),
current and voltage sequence measurement functions (CMSQI and VMSQI) and IEC 61850
generic communication I/O functions (MVGAPC) are provided with measurement supervision
functionality. All measured values can be supervised with four settable limits: low-low limit,
low limit, high limit and high-high limit. The measure value expander block (RANGE_XP) has
been introduced to enable translating the integer output signal from the measuring functions
to 5 binary signals: below low-low limit, below low limit, normal, above high limit or above
high-high limit. The output signals can be used as conditions in the configurable logic or for
alarming purpose.

15.8.3 Function block SEMOD54336-4 v3

RANGE_XP
RANGE* HIGHHIGH
HIGH
NORMAL
LOW
LOWLOW

IEC05000346-2-en.vsd
IEC05000346 V2 EN-US

Figure 367: RANGE_XP function block

15.8.4 Signals SEMOD53803-1 v2

PID-3819-INPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 582: RANGE_XP Input signals

Name Type Default Description
RANGE INTEGER 0 Measured value range

PID-3819-OUTPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 583: RANGE_XP Output signals

Name Type Description
HIGHHIGH BOOLEAN Measured value is above high-high limit
HIGH BOOLEAN Measured value is between high and high-high limit
NORMAL BOOLEAN Measured value is between high and low limit
LOW BOOLEAN Measured value is between low and low-low limit
LOWLOW BOOLEAN Measured value is below low-low limit

662
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 15
Monitoring

15.8.5 Operation principle SEMOD52462-4 v5

The input signal must be connected to a range output of a measuring function block
(CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU, VNMMXU, CMSQI, VMSQ or MVGAPC). The function block converts
the input integer value to five binary output signals according to table 584.

Table 584: Input integer value converted to binary output signals

Measured supervised below low- between low‐ between low between above high-high limit
value is: low limit low and low and high limit high-high
Output: limit and high limit
LOWLOW High
LOW High
NORMAL High
HIGH High
HIGHHIGH High

15.9 Fault locator LMBRFLO IP14592-1 v2

15.9.1 Identification
M14892-1 v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Fault locator LMBRFLO - -

15.9.2 Functionality M13970-3 v12

The accurate fault locator is an essential component to minimize the outages after a
persistent fault and/or to pin-point a weak spot on the line.

The fault locator is an impedance measuring function giving the distance to the fault in km,
miles or % of line length. The main advantage is the high accuracy achieved by compensating
for load current and for the mutual zero-sequence effect on double circuit lines.

The compensation includes setting of the remote and local sources and calculation of the
distribution of fault currents from each side. This distribution of fault current, together with
recorded load (pre-fault) currents, is used to exactly calculate the fault position. The fault can
be recalculated with new source data at the actual fault to further increase the accuracy.

Especially on heavily loaded long lines, where the source voltage angles can be up to 35-40
degrees apart, the accuracy can be still maintained with the advanced compensation included
in fault locator.

663
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Monitoring

15.9.3 Function block M16684-3 v7

LMBRFLO
PHSELL1* CALCMADE
PHSELL2* FLT_X
PHSELL3* BCD_80
CALCDIST* BCD_40
BCD_20
BCD_10
BCD_8
BCD_4
BCD_2
BCD_1

IEC05000679-4-en.vsd

IEC05000679 V4 EN-US

Figure 368: LMBRFLO function block

15.9.4 Signals
PID-3906-INPUTSIGNALS v1

Table 585: LMBRFLO Input signals

Name Type Default Description
PHSELL1 BOOLEAN 0 Phase selecton L1
PHSELL2 BOOLEAN 0 Phase selecton L2
PHSELL3 BOOLEAN 0 Phase selecton L3
CALCDIST BOOLEAN 0 Do calculate fault distance (release)

PID-3906-OUTPUTSIGNALS v1

Table 586: LMBRFLO Output signals

Name Type Description
CALCMADE BOOLEAN Fault calculation made
FLT_X REAL Reactive distance to fault
BCD_80 BOOLEAN Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 80%
BCD_40 BOOLEAN Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 40%
BCD_20 BOOLEAN Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 20%
BCD_10 BOOLEAN Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 10%
BCD_8 BOOLEAN Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 8%
BCD_4 BOOLEAN Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 4%
BCD_2 BOOLEAN Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 2%
BCD_1 BOOLEAN Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 1%

664
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 15
Monitoring

15.9.5 Settings
PID-3906-SETTINGS v2

Table 587: LMBRFLO Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
R1A 0.001 - 1500.000 Ohm/p 0.001 2.000 Source resistance A (near end)
X1A 0.001 - 1500.000 Ohm/p 0.001 12.000 Source reactance A (near end)
R1B 0.001 - 1500.000 Ohm/p 0.001 2.000 Source resistance B (far end)
X1B 0.001 - 1500.000 Ohm/p 0.001 12.000 Source reactance B (far end)
R1L 0.001 - 1500.000 Ohm/p 0.001 2.000 Positive sequence line resistance
X1L 0.001 - 1500.000 Ohm/p 0.001 12.500 Positive sequence line reactance
R0L 0.001 - 1500.000 Ohm/p 0.001 8.750 Zero sequence line resistance
X0L 0.001 - 1500.000 Ohm/p 0.001 50.000 Zero sequence line reactance
R0M 0.000 - 1500.000 Ohm/p 0.001 0.000 Zero sequence mutual resistance
X0M 0.000 - 1500.000 Ohm/p 0.001 0.000 Zero sequence mutual reactance
LineLengthUnit kilometer - - kilometer Line length unit
miles
LineLength 0.0 - 10000.0 - 0.1 40.0 Length of line

Table 588: LMBRFLO Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
DrepChNoIL1 1 - 30 Ch 1 1 Recorder input number recording
phase current, IL1
DrepChNoIL2 1 - 30 Ch 1 2 Recorder input number recording
phase current, IL2
DrepChNoIL3 1 - 30 Ch 1 3 Recorder input number recording
phase current, IL3
DrepChNoIN 0 - 30 Ch 1 4 Recorder input number recording
residual current, IN
DrepChNoIP 0 - 30 Ch 1 0 Recorder input number recording 3I0
on parallel line
DrepChNoUL1 1 - 30 Ch 1 5 Recorder input number recording
phase voltage, UL1
DrepChNoUL2 1 - 30 Ch 1 6 Recorder input number recording
phase voltage, UL2
DrepChNoUL3 1 - 30 Ch 1 7 Recorder input number recording
phase voltage, UL3
UL1Gain 0.000 - 10.000 - 0.001 1.000 Scale factor for fine tuning of voltage
magnitude L1
UL2Gain 0.000 - 10.000 - 0.001 1.000 Scale factor for fine tuning of voltage
magnitude L2
UL3Gain 0.000 - 10.000 - 0.001 1.000 Scale factor for fine tuning of voltage
magnitude L3

665
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Monitoring

15.9.6 Monitored data

PID-3906-MONITOREDDATA v1

Table 589: LMBRFLO Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
FLT_REL REAL - - Distance to fault, relative
FLT_DIST REAL - - Distance to fault in line length unit
FLT_X REAL - Ohm Reactive distance to fault
FLT_R REAL - Ohm Resistive distance to fault
FLT_LOOP INTEGER 1=L1-N - Fault loop
2=L2-N
3=L3-N
4=L1-L2
5=L2-L3
6=L3-L1
7=Others

15.9.7 Operation principle

M14982-4 v7
The Fault locator (LMBRFLO) in the IED is an essential complement to other monitoring
functions, since it measures and indicates the distance to the fault with high accuracy.

When calculating distance to fault, pre-fault and fault phasors of currents and voltages are
selected from the Trip value recorder data, thus the analog signals used by the fault locator
must be among those connected to the disturbance report function. The analog configuration
(channel selection) is performed using the parameter setting tool within PCM600.

The calculation algorithm considers the effect of load currents, double-end infeed and
additional fault resistance.

R0L+jX0L
R1L+jX1L

R1A+jX1A R1B+jX1B
Z0m=Z0m+jX0m

R0L+jX0L
R1L+jX1L
DRPRDRE
LMBRFLO

IEC05000045_2_en.vsd
IEC05000045 V2 EN-US

Figure 369: Simplified network configuration with network data, required for settings of
the fault location-measuring function
If source impedance in the near and far end of the protected line have changed in a significant
manner relative to the set values at fault location calculation time (due to exceptional
switching state in the immediate network, power generation out of order, and so on), new
values can be entered via the local HMI and a recalculation of the distance to the fault can be
ordered using the algorithm described below. It’s also possible to change fault loop. In this
way, a more accurate location of the fault can be achieved.

The function indicates the distance to the fault as a percentage of the line length, in kilometers
or miles according to the setting LineLengthUnit. The fault location is stored as a part of the

666
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 15
Monitoring

disturbance report information (ER, DR, IND, TVR and FL) and managed via the local HMI or
PCM600.

15.9.7.1 Measuring Principle M14983-4 v2

For transmission lines with voltage sources at both line ends, the effect of double-end infeed
and additional fault resistance must be considered when calculating the distance to the fault
from the currents and voltages at one line end. If this is not done, the accuracy of the
calculated figure will vary with the load flow and the amount of additional fault resistance.

The calculation algorithm used in the fault locator in compensates for the effect of double-end
infeed, additional fault resistance and load current.

M14983-5 v1

15.9.7.2 Accurate algorithm for measurement of distance to fault M14983-7 v5

Figure 370 shows a single-line diagram of a single transmission line, that is fed from both ends
with source impedances ZA and ZB. Assume that the fault occurs at a distance F from IED A on
a line with the length L and impedance ZL. The fault resistance is defined as RF. A single-line
model is used for better clarification of the algorithm.

A B
ZA IA pZL IB (1-p).ZL ZB

IF

UA RF

xx01000171.vsd
IEC01000171 V1 EN-US

Figure 370: Fault on transmission line fed from both ends

From figure 370 it is evident that:

U A = I A × p × Z L + IF × R F
EQUATION95 V1 EN-US (Equation 102)

Where:
IA is the line current after the fault, that is, pre-fault current plus current change due to the fault,

IF is the fault current and

p is a relative distance to the fault

The fault current is expressed in measurable quantities by:

667
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Monitoring

IF A
IF = --------
DA
EQUATION96 V1 EN-US (Equation 103)

Where:
IFA is the change in current at the point of measurement, IED A and

DA is a fault current-distribution factor, that is, the ratio between the fault current at line end A and the
total fault current.

For a single line, the value is equal to:

( 1 – p ) × Z L + ZB
DA = -----------------------------------------
Z A + Z L + ZB
EQUATION97 V1 EN-US (Equation 104)

Thus, the general fault location equation for a single line is:

I FA
U A = I A × p × Z L + -------- × R F
DA
EQUATION98 V1 EN-US (Equation 105)

Table 590: Expressions for UA, IA and IFA for different types of faults

Fault type: UA IA IFA

L1-N UL1A IL1A + KN x INA 3
--- ´ D ( I L 1 A – I 0A )
2
EQUATION110 V1 EN-US

L2-N UL2A IL2A + KN x INA

3
--- ´ D ( I L2A – I 0A )
2
EQUATION111 V1 EN-US

L3-N UL3A IL3A + KN x INA

3
--- ´ D ( I L3A – I0A )
2
EQUATION112 V1 EN-US

L1-L2-L3, L1-L2,L1-L2- UL1A-UL2A IL1A - IL2A

DIL 1 L 2 A
N
EQUATION113 V1 EN-US

L2-L3, L2-L3-N UL2A-UL3A IL2A - IL3A DIL2L3A

EQUATION114 V1 EN-US

L3-L1, L3-L1-N UL3A-UL1A IL3A - IL1A

DIL3L1A
EQUATION115 V1 EN-US

The KN complex quantity for zero-sequence compensation for the single line is equal to:

Z0L – Z 1L
K N = ------------------------
3 × Z1L
EQUATION99 V1 EN-US (Equation 106)

DI is the change in current, that is the current after the fault minus the current before the fault.

In the following, the positive sequence impedance for ZA, ZB and ZL is inserted into the
equations, because this is the value used in the algorithm.

668
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 15
Monitoring

For double lines, the fault equation is:

I FA
U A = I A × p × Z 1L + -------- × RF + I 0P × Z 0M
DA
EQUATION100 V1 EN-US (Equation 107)

Where:
I0P is a zero sequence current of the parallel line,

Z0M is a mutual zero sequence impedance and

DA is the distribution factor of the parallel line, which is:

( 1 – p ) × ( ZA + ZA L + ZB ) + Z B
DA = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
2 × ZA + Z L + 2 × Z B
EQUATION101 V1 EN-US (Equation 108)

The KN compensation factor for the double line becomes:

Z0L – Z 1L Z 0M I 0P
K N = ----------------------- - × -------
- + ----------------
3 × Z1L 3 × Z1L I 0A
EQUATION102 V1 EN-US (Equation 109)

From these equations it can be seen, that, if Z0m = 0, then the general fault location equation
for a single line is obtained. Only the distribution factor differs in these two cases.

Because the DA distribution factor according to equation 105 or 107 is a function of p, the
general equation 107 can be written in the form:

2
p – p × K1 + K2 – K3 × RF = 0
EQUATION103 V1 EN-US (Equation 110)

Where:

UA ZB
K 1 = ---------------
- + --------------------------
-+1
I A × ZL Z L + ZA DD

EQUATION104 V1 EN-US (Equation 111)

UA ZB
K2 = --------------- × æè --------------------------- + 1öø
IA × Z L Z L + Z A DD

EQUATION105 V1 EN-US (Equation 112)

I F A æ Z A + ZB
- × --------------------------- + 1ö
K 3 = ---------------
I A × Z L è Z 1 + ZA DD ø
EQUATION106 V1 EN-US (Equation 113)

and:

669
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Monitoring

• ZADD = ZA + ZB for parallel lines.

• IA, IFA and UA are given in the above table.
• KN is calculated automatically according to equation 109.
• ZA, ZB, ZL, Z0L and Z0M are setting parameters.

For a single line, Z0M = 0 and ZADD = 0. Thus, equation 110 applies to both single and parallel
lines.

Equation 110 can be divided into real and imaginary parts:

2
p – p × Re ( K 1 ) + Re ( K 2 ) – R F × Re ( K 3 ) = 0
EQUATION107 V1 EN-US (Equation 114)

– p × Im × ( K1 ) + Im × ( K 2 ) – R F × Im × ( K3 ) = 0
EQUATION108 V1 EN-US (Equation 115)

If the imaginary part of K3 is not zero, RF can be solved according to equation 115, and then
inserted to equation 114. According to equation 114, the relative distance to the fault is solved
as the root of a quadratic equation.

Equation 114 gives two different values for the relative distance to the fault as a solution. A
simplified load compensated algorithm, which gives an unequivocal figure for the relative
distance to the fault, is used to establish the value that should be selected.

If the load compensated algorithms according to the above do not give a reliable solution, a
less accurate, non-compensated impedance model is used to calculate the relative distance to
the fault.

15.9.7.3 The non-compensated impedance model M14983-121 v3

In the non-compensated impedance model, IA line current is used instead of IFA fault current:

U A = p × Z 1 L × IA + R F × IA
EQUATION109 V1 EN-US (Equation 116)

Where:
IA is according to table 590.

The accuracy of the distance-to-fault calculation, using the non-compensated impedance

model, is influenced by the pre-fault load current. So, this method is only used if the load
compensated models do not function.

15.9.7.4 IEC 60870-5-103 M14983-135 v2

The communication protocol IEC 60870-5-103 may be used to poll fault location information
from the IED to a master (that is station HSI). There are two outputs that must be connected
to appropriate inputs on the function block I103StatFltDis, FLTDISTX gives distance to fault
(reactance, according the standard) and CALCMADE gives a pulse (100 ms) when a result is
obtainable on FLTDISTX output.

670
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 15
Monitoring

15.9.8 Technical data

M14987-1 v6

Table 591: LMBRFLO technical data

Function Value or range Accuracy
Reactive and resistive reach (0.001-1500.000) Ω/phase ±2.0% static accuracy
Conditions:
Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir

Phase selection According to input signals -

Maximum number of fault 100 -
locations

15.10 Limit counter L4UFCNT GUID-22E141DB-38B3-462C-B031-73F7466DD135 v1

15.10.1 Identification

15.10.1.1 Identification GUID-F3FB7B33-B189-4819-A1F0-8AC7762E9B7E v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Limit counter L4UFCNT -

15.10.2 Functionality GUID-13157EAB-1686-4D2E-85DF-EC89768F3572 v5

The 30 limit counter L4UFCNT provides a settable counter with four independent limits where
the number of positive and/or negative flanks on the input signal are counted against the
setting values for limits. The output for each limit is activated when the counted value reaches
that limit.

Overflow indication is included for each up-counter.

15.10.3 Operation principle

GUID-4D58423F-329C-4553-9FAF-E55A368849A5 v2
Limit counter (L4UFCNT) counts the number of positive and/or negative flanks on the binary
input signal depending on the function settings. L4UFCNT also checks if the accumulated
value is equal or greater than any of its four settable limits. The four limit outputs will be
activated relatively on reach of each limit and remain activated until the reset of the function.
Moreover, the content of L4UFCNT is stored in flash memory and will not be lost at an auxiliary
power interruption.

15.10.3.1 Design GUID-B643C994-D0BA-4BE9-BACB-ADEA0197CAE4 v1

Figure 371 illustrates the general logic diagram of the function.

671
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Monitoring

BLOCK

INPUT
Operation
Counter
RESET
VALUE
Overflow
CountType Detection OVERFLOW

OnMaxValue

Limit LIMIT1 … 4
MaxValue Check

CounterLimit1...4

Error ERROR
Detection
InitialValue

IEC12000625_1_en.vsd
IEC12000625 V1 EN-US

Figure 371: Logic diagram

The counter can be initialized to count from a settable non-zero value after reset of the
function. The function has also a maximum counted value check. The three possibilities after
reaching the maximum counted value are:

• Stops counting and activates a steady overflow indication for the next count
• Rolls over to zero and activates a steady overflow indication for the next count
• Rolls over to zero and activates a pulsed overflow indication for the next count

The pulsed overflow output lasts up to the first count after rolling over to zero, as illustrated in
figure 372.

Overflow indication

Actual value ... Max value -1® Max value ® Max value +1 ® Max value +2 ® Max value +3 ...

Counted value ... Max value -1 ® Max value ® 0 ® 1 ® 2 ...

IEC12000626_1_en.vsd
IEC12000626 V1 EN-US

Figure 372: Overflow indication when OnMaxValue is set to rollover pulsed

The Error output is activated as an indicator of setting the counter limits and/or initial value
setting(s) greater than the maximum value. The counter stops counting the input and all the
outputs except the error output remains at zero state. The error condition remains until the
correct settings for counter limits and/or initial value setting(s) are applied.

The function can be blocked through a block input. During the block time, input is not counted
and outputs remain in their previous states. However, the counter can be initialized after reset
of the function. In this case the outputs remain in their initial states until the release of the
block input.

672
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 15
Monitoring

15.10.3.2 Reporting GUID-7DF874A7-F7DA-48DD-8760-5E4CF05FD870 v1

The content of the counter can be read on the local HMI.

Reset of the counter can be performed from the local HMI or via a binary input.

Reading of content and resetting of the function can also be performed remotely, for example
from a IEC 61850 client. The value can also be presented as a measurement on the local HMI
graphical display.

15.10.4 Function block GUID-C90E7375-F3CC-414A-93FC-9AC4A9156FFC v1

L4UFCNT
BLOCK ERROR
INPUT OVERFLOW
RESET LIMIT1
LIMIT2
LIMIT3
LIMIT4
VALUE

IEC12000029-1-en.vsd
IEC12000029 V1 EN-US

Figure 373: L4UFCNT function block

15.10.5 Signals
PID-3553-INPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 592: L4UFCNT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input for counter
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset of function

PID-3553-OUTPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 593: L4UFCNT Output signals

Name Type Description
ERROR BOOLEAN Error indication on counter limit and/or initial value settings
OVERFLOW BOOLEAN Overflow indication on count of greater than MaxValue
LIMIT1 BOOLEAN Counted value is larger than or equal to CounterLimit1
LIMIT2 BOOLEAN Counted value is larger than or equal to CounterLimit2
LIMIT3 BOOLEAN Counted value is larger than or equal to CounterLimit3
LIMIT4 BOOLEAN Counted value is larger than or equal to CounterLimit4
VALUE INTEGER Counted value

673
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Monitoring

15.10.6 Settings
PID-3553-SETTINGS v5

Table 594: L4UFCNT Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
CountType Positive edge - - Positive edge Select counting on positive and/or
Negative edge negative flanks
Both edges
CounterLimit1 1 - 65535 - 1 100 Value of the first limit
CounterLimit2 1 - 65535 - 1 200 Value of the second limit
CounterLimit3 1 - 65535 - 1 300 Value of the third limit
CounterLimit4 1 - 65535 - 1 400 Value of the fourth limit
MaxValue 1 - 65535 - 1 500 Maximum count value
OnMaxValue Stop - - Stop Select if counter stops or rolls over
Rollover Steady after reaching maxValue with steady
Rollover Pulsed or pulsed overflow flag
InitialValue 0 - 65535 - 1 0 Initial count value after reset of the
function

15.10.7 Monitored data

PID-3553-MONITOREDDATA v4

Table 595: L4UFCNT Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
VALUE INTEGER - - Counted value

15.10.8 Technical data

GUID-C43B8654-60FE-4E20-8328-754C238F4AD0 v2

Table 596: L4UFCNTtechnical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Counter value 0-65535 -
Max. count up speed 30 pulses/s (50% duty cycle) -

15.11 Running hour-meter TEILGAPC

15.11.1 Identification GUID-3F9EF4FA-74FA-4D1D-88A0-E948B722B64F v1

Function Description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device

identification identification number
Running hour-meter TEILGAPC - -

674
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 15
Monitoring

15.11.2 Functionality GUID-464FB24F-B367-446C-963A-A14841943B87 v2

The Running hour-meter (TEILGAPC) function is a function that accumulates the elapsed time
when a given binary signal has been high, see also figure 374.

BLOCK
RESET
IN Time Accumulation ACC_HOUR
ADDTIME with Retain
ACC_DAY
tAddToTime

q-1

OVERFLOW
a
&
a>b
99 999.9 h b

WARNING
a
&
a>b
tWarning b

ALARM
a
&
a>b
tAlarm b

q-1 = unit delay IEC15000321-1-en.vsd

IEC15000321 V1 EN-US

Figure 374: TEILGAPC logics

The main features of TEILGAPC are:

• Applicable to very long time accumulation (≤ 99999.9 hours)

• Supervision of limit transgression conditions and rollover/overflow
• Possibility to define a warning and alarm with the resolution of 0.1 hours
• Retain any saved accumulation value at a restart
• Possibilities for blocking and reset
• Possibility for manual addition of accumulated time
• Reporting of the accumulated time

15.11.3 Function block GUID-D0E9688B-C9D9-44B7-BD95-81132CCA5E4F v1

TEILGAPC
BLOCK ALARM
IN WARNING
ADDTIME OVERFLOW
RESET ACC_HOUR
ACC_DAY

IEC15000323.vsdx

IEC15000323 V1 EN-US

Figure 375: TEILGAPC function block

675
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Monitoring

15.11.4 Signals
PID-6998-INPUTSIGNALS v1

Table 597: TEILGAPC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Freeze the accumulation and block the outputs
IN BOOLEAN 0 The input signal that is used to measure the elapsed time,
when its value is high
ADDTIME BOOLEAN 0 Add time to the accumulation
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset accumulated time

PID-6998-OUTPUTSIGNALS v1

Table 598: TEILGAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
ALARM BOOLEAN Indicator that accumulated time has reached alarm limit
WARNING BOOLEAN Indicator that accumulated time has reached warning limit
OVERFLOW BOOLEAN Indicator that accumulated time has reached overflow limit
ACC_HOUR REAL Accumulated time in hours
ACC_DAY REAL Accumulated time in days

15.11.5 Settings
PID-6998-SETTINGS v1

Table 599: TEILGAPC Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
tAlarm 1.0 - 99999.9 Hour 0.1 90000.0 Time limit for alarm supervision
tWarning 1.0 - 99999.9 Hour 0.1 50000.0 Time limit for warning supervision
tAddToTime 0.0 - 99999.9 Hour 0.1 0.0 Time to add to the accumulation

15.11.6 Operation principle GUID-C7F91D4E-5942-4006-B7C8-4F499E7DC49D v3

Figure 376 describes the simplified logic of the function.

676
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 15
Monitoring

Loop Delay

tWarning
OVERFLOW
tAlarm
Transgression Supervision WARNING
Plus Retain
ALARM

BLOCK
RESET ACC_HOUR
Time Accumulation
IN
ADDTIME ACC_DAY

tAddToTime

Loop Delay

IEC15000322.vsd

IEC15000322 V1 EN-US

Figure 376: TEILGAPC Simplified logic

TEILGAPC main functionalities

• IN: Accumulation of the elapsed time when input IN is high

• applicable to very long time accumulation (≤99999.9 hours)
• output ACC_HOUR presents accumulated value in hours and ACC_DAY presents
accumulated value in days
• accumulated value is retained in a non-volatile memory
• any retained value is used as initiation value for the integration following by a restart
• RESET: Reset of the accumulated value. Consequently all other outputs are also reset
• independent of the input IN value
• reset the value of the nonvolatile memory to zero.
Note that the nonvolatile memory will not reset to zero if the input IN is high during
the reset.
• reset can be made by activation of input RESET or from LHMI or with IEC 61850
command
• ADDTIME: Manually add time to the currently accumulated time
• the amount of time to be added is defined by a setting tAddToTime
• time is added through activation of input ADDTIME or from LHMI or with IEC 61850
command
• BLOCK: Freeze the accumulation and block/reset the other outputs
• independent of the input IN value
• BLOCK request overrides RESETrequest
• Monitor and report the conditions of limit transgression
• overflow if output ACC_HOUR > 99 999.9 hours
• alarm if output ACC_HOUR > tAlarm
• warning if output ACC_HOUR > tWarning

The ACC_HOURoutput represents the accumulated time in hours and the ACC_DAY output
represents the accumulated time in days.

tAlarm and tWarning are user settable time limit parameters in hours. They are also
independent of each other, that is, there is no check if tAlarm > tWarning.

677
Technical manual
Section 15 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Monitoring

tAddToTime is a user settable time parameter in hours.

tAlarm, tWarning and tAddToTime are possible to be defined with a resolution of 0.1 hours (6
minutes).

The limit for the overflow supervision is fixed at 99999.9 hours. The outputs will reset and the
accumulated time will reset and start from zero if an overflow occurs.

15.11.6.1 Operation accuracy GUID-B6FBEFD7-17C8-41C6-B5D5-32E1205E6752 v1

The accuracy of TEILGAPC depends on essentially two factors

• the pulse length

• the number of pulses, that is, the number of rising and falling flank pairs

In principle, more pulses may lead to reduced accuracy.

15.11.6.2 Memory storage GUID-B49698FF-0AB2-4792-A7CB-5534313B6CA0 v1

The value of the accumulated time is retained in a non-volatile memory,

• at every falling edge of the input IN

• at every even 12 hours, after a rising edge of the input IN
• after a manual addition of time

Consequently in case of a power failure, there is a risk of losing the difference in time between
actual time and last time stored in the non-volatile memory.

15.11.7 Technical data

GUID-F5E124E3-0B85-41AC-9830-A2362FD289F2 v1

Table 600: TEILGAPC Technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Time limit for alarm supervision, (0 - 99999.9) hours ±0.1% of set value
tAlarm
Time limit for warning supervision, (0 - 99999.9) hours ±0.1% of set value
tWarning
Time limit for overflow supervision Fixed to 99999.9 hours ±0.1%

678
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 16
Metering

Section 16 Metering

16.1 Pulse-counter logic PCFCNT IP14600-1 v3

16.1.1 Identification
M14879-1 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Pulse-counter logic PCFCNT -

S00947 V1 EN-US

16.1.2 Functionality M13394-3 v7

Pulse-counter logic (PCFCNT) function counts externally generated binary pulses, for instance
pulses coming from an external energy meter, for calculation of energy consumption values.
The pulses are captured by the binary input module and then read by the PCFCNT function. A
scaled service value is available over the station bus. The special Binary input module with
enhanced pulse counting capabilities must be ordered to achieve this functionality.

16.1.3 Function block M13400-3 v5

PCFCNT
BLOCK INVALID
READ_VAL RESTART
BI_PULSE* BLOCKED
RS_CNT NEW_VAL
SCAL_VAL

IEC14000043-1-en.vsd
IEC09000335 V3 EN-US

Figure 377: PCFCNT function block

16.1.4 Signals
PID-3830-INPUTSIGNALS v1

Table 601: PCFCNT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
READ_VAL BOOLEAN 0 Initiates an additional pulse counter reading
BI_PULSE BOOLEAN 0 Connect binary input channel for metering
RS_CNT BOOLEAN 0 Resets pulse counter value

679
Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Metering

PID-3830-OUTPUTSIGNALS v1

Table 602: PCFCNT Output signals

Name Type Description
INVALID BOOLEAN The pulse counter value is invalid
RESTART BOOLEAN The reported value does not comprise a complete integration
cycle
BLOCKED BOOLEAN The pulse counter function is blocked
NEW_VAL BOOLEAN A new pulse counter value is generated
SCAL_VAL REAL Scaled value with time and status information

16.1.5 Settings
PID-3830-SETTINGS v1

Table 603: PCFCNT Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
EventMask NoEvents - - NoEvents Report mask for analog events from
ReportEvents pulse counter
CountCriteria Off - - RisingEdge Pulse counter criteria
RisingEdge
Falling edge
OnChange
Scale 1.000 - - 0.001 1.000 Scaling value for SCAL_VAL output to
90000.000 unit per counted value
Quantity Count - - Count Measured quantity for SCAL_VAL
ActivePower output
ApparentPower
ReactivePower
ActiveEnergy
ApparentEnergy
ReactiveEnergy
tReporting 0 - 3600 s 1 60 Cycle time for reporting of counter
value

16.1.6 Monitored data

PID-3830-MONITOREDDATA v1

Table 604: PCFCNT Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
CNT_VAL INTEGER - - Actual pulse counter value
SCAL_VAL REAL - - Scaled value with time and status
information

16.1.7 Operation principle IP14087-1 v2

M13397-3 v5
The registration of pulses is done for positive transitions (0->1) on one of the 16 binary input
channels located on the Binary Input Module (BIM). Pulse counter values are sent to the station
HMI with predefined cyclicity without reset.

680
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 16
Metering

The reporting time period can be set in the range from 1 second to 60 minutes and is
synchronized with absolute system time. Interrogation of additional pulse counter values can
be done with a command (intermediate reading) for a single counter. All active counters can
also be read by the LON General Interrogation command (GI) or IEC 61850.

Pulse-counter logic (PCFCNT) function in the IED supports unidirectional incremental counters.
That means only positive values are possible. The counter uses a 32 bit format, that is, the
reported value is a 32-bit, signed integer with a range 0...+2147483647. The counter is reset at
initialization of the IED.

The reported value to station HMI over the station bus contains Identity, Scaled Value (pulse
count x scale), Time, and Pulse Counter Quality. The Pulse Counter Quality consists of:

• Invalid (board hardware error or configuration error)

• Wrapped around
• Blocked
• Adjusted

The transmission of the counter value by SPA can be done as a service value, that is, the value
frozen in the last integration cycle is read by the station HMI from the database. PCFCNT
updates the value in the database when an integration cycle is finished and activates the
NEW_VAL signal in the function block. This signal can be connected to an Event function block,
be time tagged, and transmitted to the station HMI. This time corresponds to the time when
the value was frozen by the function.

The pulse-counter logic function requires a binary input card, BIMp, that is
specially adapted to the pulse-counter logic function.

M13399-3 v9
Figure 378 shows the pulse-counter logic function block with connections of the inputs and
outputs.

SingleCmdFunc PulseCounter EVENT

OUTx BLOCK
INVALID INPUT1
SingleCmdFunc Pulse RESTART INPUT2
OUTx INPUT OUT READ_VAL
Pulse length >1s BLOCKED INPUT3
I/O-module NEW_VAL INPUT4
BI_PULSE
”Reset counter” RS_CNT
NAME
SCAL_VAL IEC EVENT

SMS settings Database

1.Operation = Off/On Pulse counter value:
2.tReporting = 0s...60min 0...2147483647
3.Event Mask = No Events/Report Events
4.Scale = 1-90000
en05000744.vsd
IEC05000744 V1 EN-US

Figure 378: Overview of the pulse-counter logic function

The BLOCK and READ_VAL inputs can be connected to Single Command logics, which are
intended to be controlled either from the station HMI or/and the local HMI. As long as the
BLOCK signal is set, the pulse counter is blocked. The signal connected to READ_VAL performs
one additional reading per positive flank. The signal must be a pulse with a length >1 second.

The BI_PULSE input is connected to the used input of the function block for the Binary Input
Module (BIM).

681
Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Metering

The RS_CNT input is used for resetting the counter.

Each pulse-counter logic function block has four binary output signals that can be connected
to an Event function block for event recording: INVALID, RESTART, BLOCKED and NEW_VAL.
The SCAL_VAL signal can be connected to the IEC Event function block.

The INVALID signal is a steady signal and is set if the Binary Input Module, where the pulse
counter input is located, fails or has wrong configuration.

The RESTART signal is a steady signal and is set when the reported value does not comprise a
complete integration cycle. That is, in the first message after IED start-up, in the first message
after deblocking, and after the counter has wrapped around during last integration cycle.

The BLOCKED signal is a steady signal and is set when the counter is blocked. There are two
reasons why the counter is blocked:

• The BLOCK input is set, or

• The Binary Input Module, where the counter input is situated, is inoperative.

The NEW_VAL signal is a pulse signal. The signal is set if the counter value was updated since
last report.

Note, the pulse is short, one cycle.

The SCAL_VAL signal consists of scaled value (according to parameter Scale), time and status
information.

16.1.8 Technical data IP14092-1 v1

M13404-2 v5

Table 605: PCFCNT technical data

Function Setting range Accuracy
Input frequency See Binary Input Module (BIM) -
Cycle time for report of (1–3600) s -
counter value

16.2 Function for energy calculation and demand handling

ETPMMTR SEMOD153638-1 v2

16.2.1 Identification
SEMOD175537-2 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Function for energy calculation and ETPMMTR W_Varh -
demand handling

682
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 16
Metering

16.2.2 Functionality GUID-6898E29B-DA70-421C-837C-1BBED8C63A7A v2

Measurements function block (CVMMXN) can be used to measure active as well as reactive
power values. Function for energy calculation and demand handling (ETPMMTR) uses
measured active and reactive power as input and calculates the accumulated active and
reactive energy pulses, in forward and reverse direction. Energy values can be read or
generated as pulses. Maximum demand power values are also calculated by the function. This
function includes zero point clamping to remove noise from the input signal. As output of this
function: periodic energy calculations, integration of energy values, calculation of energy
pulses, alarm signals for limit violation of energy values and maximum power demand, can be
found.

The values of active and reactive energies are calculated from the input power values by
integrating them over a selected time tEnergy. The integration of active and reactive energy
values will happen in both forward and reverse directions. These energy values are available as
output signals and also as pulse outputs. Integration of energy values can be controlled by
inputs (STARTACC and STOPACC) and EnaAcc setting and it can be reset to initial values with
RSTACC input.

The maximum demand for active and reactive powers are calculated for the set time interval
tEnergy and these values are updated every minute through output channels. The active and
reactive maximum power demand values are calculated for both forward and reverse direction
and these values can be reset with RSTDMD input.

16.2.3 Function block SEMOD175502-4 v5

ETPMMTR
P* ACCINPRG
Q* EAFPULSE
STARTACC EARPULSE
STOPACC ERFPULSE
RSTACC ERRPULSE
RSTDMD EAFALM
EARALM
ERFALM
ERRALM
EAFACC
EARACC
ERFACC
ERRACC
MAXPAFD
MAXPARD
MAXPRFD
MAXPRRD

IEC14000019-1-en.vsd
IEC14000019 V1 EN-US

Figure 379: ETPMMTR function block

16.2.4 Signals
PID-3843-INPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 606: ETPMMTR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
P REAL 0 Measured active power
Q REAL 0 Measured reactive power
STARTACC BOOLEAN 0 Start to accumulate energy values
STOPACC BOOLEAN 0 Stop to accumulate energy values.
RSTACC BOOLEAN 0 Reset of accumulated enery reading
RSTDMD BOOLEAN 0 Reset of maximum demand reading

683
Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Metering

PID-3843-OUTPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 607: ETPMMTR Output signals

Name Type Description
ACCINPRG BOOLEAN Accumulation of energy values in progress
EAFPULSE BOOLEAN Accumulated forward active energy pulse
EARPULSE BOOLEAN Accumulated reverse active energy pulse
ERFPULSE BOOLEAN Accumulated forward reactive energy pulse
ERRPULSE BOOLEAN Accumulated reverse reactive energy pulse
EAFALM BOOLEAN Alarm for active forward energy exceed limit in set interval
EARALM BOOLEAN Alarm for active reverse energy exceed limit in set interval
ERFALM BOOLEAN Alarm for reactive forward energy exceed limit in set interval
ERRALM BOOLEAN Alarm for reactive reverse energy exceed limit in set interval
EAFACC REAL Accumulated forward active energy value in Ws
EARACC REAL Accumulated reverse active energy value in Ws
ERFACC REAL Accumulated forward reactive energy value in VArS
ERRACC REAL Accumulated reverse reactive energy value in VArS
MAXPAFD REAL Maximum forward active power demand value for set interval
MAXPARD REAL Maximum reverse active power demand value for set interval
MAXPRFD REAL Maximum forward reactive power demand value for set
interval
MAXPRRD REAL Maximum reactive power demand value in reverse direction

16.2.5 Settings
PID-3843-SETTINGS v5

Table 608: ETPMMTR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
EnaAcc Off - - Off Activate the accumulation of energy
On values
tEnergy 1 Minute - - 1 Minute Time interval for energy calculation
5 Minutes
10 Minutes
15 Minutes
30 Minutes
60 Minutes
180 Minutes
tEnergyOnPls 0.100 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Energy accumulated pulse ON time in
secs
tEnergyOffPls 0.100 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.500 Energy accumulated pulse OFF time in
secs
EAFAccPlsQty 0.001 - 10000.000 MWh 0.001 100.000 Pulse quantity for active forward
accumulated energy value
EARAccPlsQty 0.001 - 10000.000 MWh 0.001 100.000 Pulse quantity for active reverse
accumulated energy value
ERFAccPlsQty 0.001 - 10000.000 MVArh 0.001 100.000 Pulse quantity for reactive forward
accumulated energy value
ERRAccPlsQty 0.001 - 10000.000 MVArh 0.001 100.000 Pulse quantity for reactive reverse
accumulated energy value

684
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 16
Metering

Table 609: ETPMMTR Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
EALim 0.001 - MWh 0.001 1000000.000 Active energy limit
10000000000.00
0
ERLim 0.001 - MVArh 0.001 1000.000 Reactive energy limit
10000000000.00
0
EnZeroClamp Off - - On Enable of zero point clamping
On detection function
LevZeroClampP 0.001 - 10000.000 MW 0.001 10.000 Zero point clamping level at active
Power
LevZeroClampQ 0.001 - 10000.000 MVAr 0.001 10.000 Zero point clamping level at reactive
Power
DirEnergyAct Forward - - Forward Direction of active energy flow
Reverse Forward/Reverse
DirEnergyReac Forward - - Forward Direction of reactive energy flow
Reverse Forward/Reverse
EAFPrestVal 0.000 - MWh 0.001 0.000 Preset Initial value for forward active
100000000.000 energy
EARPrestVal 0.000 - MWh 0.001 0.000 Preset Initial value for reverse active
100000000.000 energy
ERFPresetVal 0.000 - MVArh 0.001 0.000 Preset Initial value for forward
100000000.000 reactive energy
ERRPresetVal 0.000 - MVArh 0.001 0.000 Preset Initial value for reverse reactive
100000000.000 energy

16.2.6 Monitored data

PID-3843-MONITOREDDATA v3

Table 610: ETPMMTR Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
EAFACC REAL - MWh Accumulated forward active energy
value in Ws
EARACC REAL - MWh Accumulated reverse active energy
value in Ws
ERFACC REAL - MVArh Accumulated forward reactive energy
value in VArS
ERRACC REAL - MVArh Accumulated reverse reactive energy
value in VArS
MAXPAFD REAL - MW Maximum forward active power
demand value for set interval
MAXPARD REAL - MW Maximum reverse active power
demand value for set interval
MAXPRFD REAL - MVAr Maximum forward reactive power
demand value for set interval
MAXPRRD REAL - MVAr Maximum reactive power demand
value in reverse direction

685
Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Metering

16.2.7 Operation principle GUID-4A46757C-EC5D-4BCE-9D09-C8152B062CE1 v3

The instantaneous output values of active and reactive power from the Measurements
function CVMMXN are used and integrated over a selected time tEnergy to measure the
integrated energy. Figure 380 shows the overall functionality of the energy calculation and
demand handling function ETPMMTR.

MAXPAFD
RSTDMD
MAXPARD
MAXPRFD
P
MAXPRRD
Zero Clamping Maximum Power
EAFALM
Detection Demand Calculation
Q EARALM
ERFALM
ERRALM

ACCINPRG
EAFPULSE
EARPULSE
ERFPULSE
Energy Accumulation ERRPULSE
STARTACC
Calculation EAFACC
EARACC
STOPACC
ERFACC
ERRACC
RSTACC

IEC13000185-2-en.vsd
IEC13000185 V2 EN-US

Figure 380: ETPMMTR Functional overview logical diagram

The integration of energy values is enabled by the setting EnaAcc and controlled by the
STARTACC and STOPACC inputs. If the integration is in progress, the output ACCINPRG is high.
Otherwise, it is low. Figure 381 shows the logic of the ACCINPRG output. ACCINPRG is active
when the STARTACC input is active and the EnaAcc setting is enabled. When the RSTACC input
is in the active state, the output ACCINPRG is low even if the integration of energy is enabled.
ACCINPRG is deactivated by activating the STOPACC input.

STOPACC

FALSE
STARTACC T
³1
& F ACCINPRG
EnaAcc &

q-1

RSTACC

q-1 = unit delay IEC13000186-4-en.vsd

IEC13000186 V4 EN-US

Figure 381: ACCINPRG Logic diagram

The accumulated energy values (in MWh and MVArh) are available as service values and also as
pulsed output depending on the ExxAccPlsQty setting, which can be connected to a pulse
counter. Accumulated energy outputs are available for forward as well as reverse direction.
The accumulated energy values can be reset to initial accumulated energy values (ExxPrestVal)
from the local HMI reset menu or with the input signal RSTACC. Figure 382 shows the logic for
integration of energy in active forward direction. Similarly, the integration of energy in active
reverse, reactive forward and reactive reverse is done.

686
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 16
Metering

RSTACC

EAFPrestVal

ACCINPRG

P* (ACTIVE FORWARD)
X
 T
T EAFACC
60.0
F
F

&

q-1

1000 GWh T
-1 F
q 0.0

a
a>b
b
-1
q = unit delay
IEC13000187-5-en.vsdx
IEC13000187 V5 EN-US

Figure 382: Logic for integration of active forward energy

The energy pulses generated by using internally calculated accumulated energy values and
energy per pulse (ExxAccPlsQty) setting. The accumulated energy values are divided by the
energy-per-pulse value to get the number of pulses. The number of pulses can be reset to zero
by activating RSTACC input or by using the local HMI reset menu. The pulse on and off time
duration is set by the settings tEnergyOnPls and tEnergyOffPls. Figure 383 shows the logic for
pulse output generation for the integrated energy in the active forward direction. Similarly, the
pulse generation for integrated energy in the active reverse, reactive forward and reactive
reverse is done.

tEnergyOffPls
EAFACC

a Counter q-1
a>b CU
1000 GWh b CV
Rst
tOff
t
R I q-1

0
÷ X
 R I T
EAFPULSE
a TP
a>b F
b
EAFAccPlsQty ÷ 0
Counter
CU
CV
RSTACC
Rst

q-1

tEnergyOnPls

q-1 = unit delay

IEC13000188-5-en.vsdx
IEC13000188 V5 EN-US

Figure 383: Logic for pulse generation of integrated active forward energy
The maximum demand values for active and reactive power are calculated for the set time
interval tEnergy. The maximum values are updated every minute and stored in a register

687
Technical manual
Section 16 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Metering

available over communication and from outputs MAXPAFD, MAXPARD, MAXPRFD and MAXPRRD for
the active and reactive power forward and reverse direction. When the RSTDMD input is active
from the local HMI reset menu, these outputs are reset to zero. The energy alarm is activated
once the periodic energy value crosses the energy limit ExLim. Figure 384 shows the logic of
alarm for active forward energy exceeds limit and Maximum forward active power demand
value. Similarly, the maximum power calculation and energy alarm outputs in the active
reverse, reactive forward and reactive reverse is implemented.

P (ACTIVE FORWARD)
Average Power
X a EAFALM
tEnergy Calculation a>b
b

EALim

RSTMAXD

0.0 T MAXPAFD
MAX F

q-1
q-1 = unit delay
IEC13000189-4-en.vsd
IEC13000189 V4 EN-US

Figure 384: Logic for maximum power demand calculation and energy alarm

16.2.8 Technical data

16.2.8.1 Technical data GUID-DA0A8AB5-755D-4F35-8C69-FFAA951FE374 v1

Table 611:
Function Range or value Accuracy
Energy metering MWh Export/Import, MVarh Input from MMXU. No extra error
Export/Import at steady load

688
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 17
Station communication

Section 17 Station communication

17.1 Communication protocols M14815-3 v12

Each IED is provided with a communication interface, enabling it to connect to one or many
substation level systems or equipment, either on the Substation Automation (SA) bus or
Substation Monitoring (SM) bus.

Available communication protocols are:

• IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol

• LON communication protocol
• SPA or IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol
• DNP3.0 communication protocol

Several protocols can be combined in the same IED.

17.2 Communication protocol diagnostics GUID-6BC4671F-6D06-4BBD-B1FF-2F03FF16A856 v1

Status of the protocols can be viewed in the LHMI under Main menu/Diagnostics/IED status/
Protocol diagnostics. The diagnostic values are:

Diagnostic value Description

Off Protocol is turned off
Error An error has occured, refer to event list for more
information
Warning Configuration inconsistency. Unable to locate data
point.
Ready Protocol is ready

689
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Station communication

IEC15000400-1-en.vsd
IEC15000400 V1 EN-US

Figure 385: Protocol diagnostic screen in LHMI

17.3 DNP3 protocol GUID-54A54716-23BD-4E7C-8245-DE2B4C75E8DC v1

DNP3 (Distributed Network Protocol) is a set of communications protocols used to

communicate data between components in process automation systems. For a detailed
description of the DNP3 protocol, see the DNP3 Communication protocol manual.

17.4 IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol IP14616-1 v2

17.4.1 Functionality M14787-3 v13

IEC 61850 Ed.1 or Ed.2 can be chosen by a setting in PCM600. The IED is equipped with single
or double optical Ethernet rear ports (order dependent) for IEC 61850-8-1 station bus
communication. The IEC 61850-8-1 communication is also possible from the electrical Ethernet
front port. IEC 61850-8-1 protocol allows intelligent electrical devices (IEDs) from different
vendors to exchange information and simplifies system engineering. IED-to-IED
communication using GOOSE and client-server communication over MMS are supported.
Disturbance recording file (COMTRADE) uploading can be done over MMS or FTP.

The front port shall not be used due to interference.

690
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 17
Station communication

17.4.2 Communication interfaces and protocols GUID-35C845D3-574A-40D1-AEF1-9E0D330E31DE v6

Table 612: Supported station communication interfaces and protocols

Protocol Ethernet Serial
100BASE-FX (ST connector) Glass fiber (ST connector) EIA-485
IEC 61850–8–1 ● - -
DNP3 ● ● ●
IEC 60870-5-103 - ● ●
● = Supported

When double Ethernet ports are activated, make sure that the two ports are
connected to different subnets. For example: Port 1 has IP-address
138.227.102.10 with subnet mask 255.255.255.0 and port 2 has IP-address
138.227.103.10 with subnet mask 255.255.255.0

17.4.3 Settings
PID-6495-SETTINGS v3

Table 613: IEC61850-8-1 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
PortSelGOOSE Front - - LANAB Port selection for GOOSE
LANAB communication
LANCD
PortSelMMS Front - - Any Port selection for MMS
LANAB communication
LANCD
Any
ProtocolEdition Ed 1 - - Ed 1 Protocol Edition
Ed 2
RemoteModControl Off - - Off Remote Mode Control
Maintenance
All levels
AllowSimulation No - - No Allow simulated GOOSE values or
Yes simulated sampled measurand values
IEC61850BufTimEnable Disabled - - Enabled Enable BRC buf time behavior
Enabled
EnableSettings Disabled - - Disabled Enable 61850 Edition 2 setting
Enabled
ResvTms 1 - 3600 s 1 60 Reservation time

691
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Station communication

17.4.4 Technical data IP14434-1 v1

M15031-1 v7

Table 614: Communication protocols

Function Value
Protocol IEC 61850-8-1
Communication speed for the IEDs 100BASE-FX
Protocol IEC 60870–5–103
Communication speed for the IEDs 9600 or 19200 Bd
Protocol DNP3.0
Communication speed for the IEDs 300–19200 Bd
Protocol TCP/IP, Ethernet
Communication speed for the IEDs 100 Mbit/s

17.4.5 Generic communication function for Single Point indication

SPGAPC, SP16GAPC SEMOD55999-1 v4

17.4.5.1 Functionality SEMOD55713-5 v7

Generic communication function for Single Point indication SPGAPC is used to send one single
logical signal to other systems or equipment in the substation.

17.4.5.2 Function block SEMOD54714-4 v4

SPGAPC
BLOCK
^IN

IEC14000021-1-en.vsd
IEC14000021 V1 EN-US

Figure 386: SPGAPC function block

SP16GAPC
BLOCK
^IN1
^IN2
^IN3
^IN4
^IN5
^IN6
^IN7
^IN8
^IN9
^IN10
^IN11
^IN12
^IN13
^IN14
^IN15
^IN16

IEC14000020-1-en.vsd
IEC14000020 V1 EN-US

Figure 387: SP16GAPC function block

692
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 17
Station communication

17.4.5.3 Signals SEMOD55830-1 v2

PID-3780-INPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 615: SPGAPC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
IN BOOLEAN 0 Input status

PID-3781-INPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 616: SP16GAPC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 status
IN2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2 status
IN3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3 status
IN4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4 status
IN5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5 status
IN6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6 status
IN7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7 status
IN8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8 status
IN9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9 status
IN10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10 status
IN11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11 status
IN12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12 status
IN13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13 status
IN14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14 status
IN15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15 status
IN16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16 status

17.4.5.4 Settings ABBD8E283673 v3

The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

17.4.5.5 Monitored data

PID-3780-MONITOREDDATA v3

Table 617: SPGAPC Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OUT GROUP - - Output status
SIGNAL

693
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Station communication

PID-3781-MONITOREDDATA v3

Table 618: SP16GAPC Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OUT1 GROUP - - Output 1 status
SIGNAL
OUT2 GROUP - - Output 2 status
SIGNAL
OUT3 GROUP - - Output 3 status
SIGNAL
OUT4 GROUP - - Output 4 status
SIGNAL
OUT5 GROUP - - Output 5 status
SIGNAL
OUT6 GROUP - - Output 6 status
SIGNAL
OUT7 GROUP - - Output 7 status
SIGNAL
OUT8 GROUP - - Output 8 status
SIGNAL
OUT9 GROUP - - Output 9 status
SIGNAL
OUT10 GROUP - - Output 10 status
SIGNAL
OUT11 GROUP - - Output 11 status
SIGNAL
OUT12 GROUP - - Output 12 status
SIGNAL
OUT13 GROUP - - Output 13 status
SIGNAL
OUT14 GROUP - - Output 14 status
SIGNAL
OUT15 GROUP - - Output 15 status
SIGNAL
OUT16 GROUP - - Output 16 status
SIGNAL
OUTOR GROUP - - Output status logic OR gate for input
SIGNAL 1 to 16

17.4.5.6 Operation principle SEMOD55725-5 v7

Upon receiving a signal at its input, Generic communication function for Single Point
indication (SPGAPC) function sends the signal over IEC 61850-8-1 to the equipment or system
that requests this signal. Additional configuration is needed with PCM600 or IET600 to get the
IEC 61850-8-1 communication established For more information refer to the Engineering
manual.

17.4.6 Generic communication function for Measured Value MVGAPC SEMOD55402-1 v3

694
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 17
Station communication

17.4.6.1 Functionality SEMOD55872-5 v9

Generic communication function for Measured Value MVGAPC function is used to send the
instantaneous value of an analog signal to other systems or equipment in the substation. It
can also be used inside the same IED, to attach a RANGE aspect to an analog value and to
permit measurement supervision on that value.

17.4.6.2 Function block SEMOD54712-4 v4

MVGAPC
BLOCK ^VALUE
^IN RANGE

IEC14000022-1-en.vsd
IEC14000022 V1 EN-US

Figure 388: MVGAPC function block

17.4.6.3 Signals SEMOD55948-1 v2

PID-3779-INPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 619: MVGAPC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
IN REAL 0 Analog input value

PID-3779-OUTPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 620: MVGAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
VALUE REAL Magnitude of deadband value
RANGE INTEGER Range

17.4.6.4 Settings SEMOD55954-1 v2

PID-3779-SETTINGS v5

Table 621: MVGAPC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
BasePrefix micro - - unit Base prefix (multiplication factor)
milli
unit
kilo
Mega
Giga
Tera
MV db 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
MV zeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of
range
MV hhLim -5000.00 - xBase 0.01 900.00 High High limit multiplied with the
5000.00 base prefix (multiplication factor)
MV hLim -5000.00 - xBase 0.01 800.00 High limit multiplied with the base
5000.00 prefix (multiplication factor)
Table continues on next page

695
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Station communication

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

MV lLim -5000.00 - xBase 0.01 -800.00 Low limit multiplied with the base
5000.00 prefix (multiplication factor)
MV llLim -5000.00 - xBase 0.01 -900.00 Low Low limit multiplied with the
5000.00 base prefix (multiplication factor)
MV min -5000.00 - xBase 0.01 -1000.00 Minimum value multiplied with the
5000.00 base prefix (multiplication factor)
MV max -5000.00 - xBase 0.01 1000.00 Maximum value multiplied with the
5000.00 base prefix (multiplication factor)
MV dbType Cyclic - - Dead band Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
MV limHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range
(common for all limits)

17.4.6.5 Monitored data

PID-3779-MONITOREDDATA v5

Table 622: MVGAPC Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
VALUE REAL - - Magnitude of deadband value
RANGE INTEGER 1=High - Range
2=Low
3=High-High
4=Low-Low
0=Normal

17.4.6.6 Operation principle SEMOD55936-5 v7

Upon receiving an analog signal at its input, Generic communication function for Measured
Value (MVGAPC) will give the instantaneous value of the signal and the range, as output values.
Additional configuration is needed with PCM600 or IET600 to get the IEC 61850-8-1
communication established. For more information see the Engineering manual.

17.4.7 IEC 61850-8-1 redundant station bus communication - PRP GUID-FF43A130-7D2D-4BA3-B51C-80398D73228F v3

GUID-00C469E6-00D4-4780-BD0D-426647AB8E0F v3.1.1

Function description LHMI and ACT IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification identification device number
Dual ethernet port PRPSTATUS PRPSTATUS - -
link status
IEC 62439-3 parallel PRP PRP - -
redundancy
protocol

17.4.7.1 Functionality GUID-A90FDBA7-D4D7-4CBD-9F05-13DCC9971779 v5

Redundant station bus communication according to IEC 62439-3 Edition 1 and IEC 62439-3
Edition 2 parallel redundancy protocol (PRP) are available as options when ordering IEDs.
Redundant station bus communication according to IEC 62439-3 uses both port AB and port
CD on the OEM module.

696
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 17
Station communication

17.4.7.2 Function block GUID-876EDB9C-BEF1-4DBE-967D-5BEEEA6AFF38 v3

PRPSTATUS
PRP-A LINK
PRP-A VALID
PRP-B LINK
PRP-B VALID

IEC09000757.vsd
IEC09000757 V2 EN-US

Figure 389: PRPSTATUS function block

17.4.7.3 Signals
PID-4074-OUTPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 623: PRPSTATUS Output signals

Name Type Description
PRP-A LINK BOOLEAN PRP-A Link Status
PRP-A VALID BOOLEAN PRP-A Link Valid
PRP-B LINK BOOLEAN PRP-B Link Status
PRP-B VALID BOOLEAN PRP-B Link Valid

17.4.7.4 Settings
PID-3190-SETTINGS v5

Table 624: PRP Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
PRPMode PRP-0 - - PRP-1 PRP Mode
PRP-1
IPAddress 0 - 18 IP 1 192.168.7.10 IP-Address
Address
IPMask 0 - 18 IP 1 255.255.255.0 IP-Mask
Address

697
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Station communication

17.4.7.5 Monitored data

PID-4074-MONITOREDDATA v4

Table 625: PRPSTATUS Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
AB Beh INTEGER 2=Blocked - AB Link Beh
3=Test
4=Test blocked
5=Off
1=On
CD Beh INTEGER 1=On - CD Link Beh
2=Blocked
3=Test
4=Test blocked
5=Off
PRP Beh INTEGER 2=Blocked - PRP Beh
3=Test
4=Test blocked
5=Off
1=On

17.4.7.6 Principle of operation GUID-545BD854-36AA-4606-B79B-A5FF73B1A4CB v3.1.1

The communication is performed in parallel, that is the same data package is transmitted on
both channels simultaneously. The received package identity from one channel is compared
with data package identity from the other channel, if they are the same, the last package is
discarded.

The PRPSTATUS function block supervise the redundant communication on the two channels.
If no data package has been received on one (or both) channels within the last 10 s, the output
PRP-A LINK and/or PRP-B LINK is set to 0 which indicates an error.

698
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 17
Station communication

Device 1 Device 2

AP1 AP1
PhyPortA PhyPortB PhyPortA PhyPortB

Switch A Switch B

PhyPortA PhyPortB PhyPortA PhyPortB

AP1 AP1

Device 3 Device 4

IEC09000758-4-en.vsd
IEC09000758 V4 EN-US

Figure 390: Redundant station bus

17.5 LON communication protocol IP14420-1 v1

17.5.1 Functionality M11924-3 v5

An optical network can be used within the substation automation system. This enables
communication with the IED through the LON bus from the operator’s workplace, from the
control center and also from other terminals.

LON communication protocol is specified in LonTalkProtocol Specification Version 3 from

Echelon Corporation and is designed for communication in control networks. These networks
are characterized by high speed for data transfer, short messages (few bytes), peer-to-peer
communication, multiple communication media, low maintenance, multivendor equipment,
and low support costs. LonTalk supports the needs of applications that cover a range of
requirements. The protocol follows the reference model for open system interconnection (OSI)
designed by the International Standardization Organization (ISO).

In this document the most common addresses for commands and events are available. For
other addresses, refer to section "Related documents".

It is assumed that the reader is familiar with LON communication protocol in general.

699
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Station communication

17.5.2 Settings IP14441-1 v2

PID-593-SETTINGS v10

Table 626: HORZCOMM Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation
On

PID-4147-SETTINGS v5

Table 627: ADE Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation
On
TimerClass Slow - - Slow Timer class
Normal
Fast
TimeDomain Local without DST - - Local with DST Time domain
Local with DST

17.5.3 Operation principle IP14439-1 v2

M15083-3 v2
The speed of the network depends on the medium and transceiver design. With protection and
control devices, fiber optic media is used, which enables the use of the maximum speed of 1.25
Mbits/s. The protocol is a peer-to-peer protocol where all the devices connected to the
network can communicate with each other. The own subnet and node number are identifying
the nodes (max. 255 subnets, 127 nodes per one subnet).

The LON bus links the different parts of the protection and control system. The measured
values, status information, and event information are spontaneously sent to the higher-level
devices. The higher-level devices can read and write memorized values, setting values, and
other parameter data when required. The LON bus also enables the bay level devices to
communicate with each other to deliver, for example, interlocking information among the
terminals without the need of a bus master.

The LonTalk protocol supports two types of application layer objects: network variables and
explicit messages. Network variables are used to deliver short messages, such as measuring
values, status information, and interlocking/blocking signals. Explicit messages are used to
transfer longer pieces of information, such as events and explicit read and write messages to
access device data.

The benefits achieved from using the LON bus in protection and control systems include direct
communication among all terminals in the system and support for multi-master
implementations. The LON bus also has an open concept, so that the terminals can
communicate with external devices using the same standard of network variables.

Introduction of LON protocol M15083-8 v2

For more information, refer to LON bus, LonWorks Network in Protection and Control, User’s
manual and Technical description.

LON protocol M15083-11 v1

Configuration of LON M15083-13 v3

LON network tool (LNT) is a multi-purpose tool for LonWorks network configuration. All the
functions required for setting up and configuring a LonWorks network, is easily accessible on a
single tool program.

700
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 17
Station communication

Activate LON Communication M15083-16 v3

Activate LON communication in the Parameter Setting tool under Main Menu/Configuration/
Communication/Station communication/ LON/HORZCOMM:1, where Operation must be set
to ON.

Add LON Device Types LNT M15083-19 v3

A new device is added to LON Network Tool from the Device menu or by installing the device
from the ABB LON Device Types package for LNT 505 using SLDT package version 1p2 r04.

LON net address M15083-22 v3

To establish a LON connection, the IED has to be given a unique net address. The net address
consists of a subnet and node number. This is accomplished with the LON Network Tool by
creating one device for each IED.

Vertical communication M15083-25 v1

Vertical communication describes communication between the monitoring devices and
protection and control IEDs. This communication includes sending of changed process data to
monitoring devices as events and transfer of commands, parameter data and disturbance
recorder files. This communication is implemented using explicit messages.

Events and indications M15083-28 v3

Events are sent to the monitoring devices using explicit messages (message code 44H) with
unacknowledged transport service of the LonTalk protocol. When a signal is changed in the
IED, one message with the value, quality and time is transmitted from terminal.

Binary events M15083-31 v5

Binary events are generated in Event function blocks EVENT:1 to EVENT:20 in the IEDs. The
EVENT function blocks have predefined LON addresses. Table 628 shows the LON addresses
to the first input on the EVENT function blocks. Addresses to the other inputs on the EVENT
function block are consecutive after the first input. For example, input 15 on EVENT:17 function
block has the address 1280 + 14 (15-1) = 1294.

For double indications, only the first eight inputs 1–8 must be used. Inputs 9–16 can be used
for other types of events at the same EVENT block.

Three EVENT function blocks EVENT:1 to EVENT:3 running with a fast loop time (3 ms) are
available as basic in the IEDs.. The remaining EVENT function blocks EVENT:4 to EVENT:9 run
with a loop time of 8 ms and EVENT:10 to EVENT:20 run with a loop time of 100 ms. The EVENT
blocks are used to send binary signals, integers, real time values like analogue data from
measuring functions and mA input modules as well as pulse counter signals.

16 pulse counter value function blocks PCFCNT:1 to PCFCNT:16 are available in the IEDs.

The first LON address in every EVENT function block is found in table 628

Table 628: LON adresses for EVENT functions

Function block First LON address in
function block
EVENT:1 1024
EVENT:2 1040
EVENT:3 1056
EVENT:4 1072
EVENT:5 1088
EVENT:6 1104
EVENT:7 1120
EVENT:8 1136
EVENT:9 1152
Table continues on next page

701
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Station communication

Function block First LON address in

function block
EVENT:10 1168
EVENT:11 1184
EVENT:12 1200
EVENT:13 1216
EVENT:14 1232
EVENT:15 1248
EVENT:16 1264
EVENT:17 1280
EVENT:18 1296
EVENT:19 1312
EVENT:20 1328

Event masks M15083-78 v4

Event mask for each input can be set individually from Parameter Setting Tool (PST) under:
Settings/IED settings/ Monitoring / Event Function or via parameter setting tool (PST) as
follows:

• No events
• OnSet, at pick-up of the signal
• OnReset, at drop-out of the signal
• OnChange, at both pick-up and drop-out of the signal
• AutoDetect, the EVENT function makes the reporting decision (reporting criteria for
integers has no semantic, prefer to be set by the user)

Single indication M15083-123 v3

Directly connected binary IO signal via binary input function block (SMBI) is always reported on
change, no changed detection is done in the EVENT function block. Other Boolean signals, for
example a start or a trip signal from a protection function is event masked in the EVENT
function block.

Double indications M15083-126 v3

Double indications can only be reported for the first 8 inputs on an EVENT function block.

• 00 generates an intermediate event with the read status 0

• 01 generates an open event with the read status 1
• 10 generates a close event with the read status 2
• 11 generates an undefined event with the read status 3

Analog value M15083-135 v4

All analog values are reported cyclic. The reporting interval is taken from the connected
function if there is a limit supervised signal. Otherwise it is taken from the EVENT function
block.

Command handling M15083-80 v3

Commands are transferred using transparent SPA-bus messages. The transparent SPA-bus
message is an explicit LON message, which contains an ASCII character message following the
coding rules of the SPA-bus protocol. The message is sent using explicit messages with
message code 41H and using acknowledged transport service.

Both the SPA-bus command messages (R or W) and the reply messages (D, A or N) are sent
using the same message code. It is mandatory that one device sends out only one SPA-bus
message at a time to one node and waits for the reply before sending the next message.

702
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 17
Station communication

For commands from the operator workplace to the IED for apparatus control, That is, the
function blocks type SCSWI 1 to 30, SXCBR 1 to 18 and SXSWI 1 to 24; the SPA addresses are
according to table 629.

Horizontal communication M15083-86 v4

Network variables are used for communication between 500 and 650 series IEDs The
supported network variable type is SNVT_state (NV type 83). SNVT_state is used to
communicate the state of a set of 1 to 16 Boolean values.

Multiple command send function block (MULTICMDSND) is used to pack the information to
one value. This value is transmitted to the receiving node and presented for the application by
a multiple command receive function block (MULTICMDRCV). With horizontal communication,
the input BOUND on MULTICMDSND must be set to 1. There are 10 MULTICMDSND and 60
MULTICMDRCV function blocks available. These function blocks are connected using the LON
network tool (LNT). The tool also defines the service and addressing on LON.

This is an overview for configuring the network variables for the IEDs.

Configuration of LON network variables M15083-92 v3

Configure the Network variables according to the specific application using the LON network
tool (LNT). The following is an example of how to configure network variables concerning, for
example, interlocking between two IEDs.

LON

BAY E1 BAY E3 BAY E4

MULTICMDSND: 7 MULTICMDSND: 9 MULTICMDSND: 9

en05000718.vsd
IEC05000718 V2 EN-US

Figure 391: Examples connections between MULTICMDSND and MULTICMDRCV function

blocks in three IEDs
The network variable connections are done from the NV Connection window. From LNT
window select Connections/ NVConnections/ New.

703
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Station communication

en05000719.vsd
IEC05000719 V1 EN-US

Figure 392: The network variables window in LNT

There are two ways of downloading NV connections. Either the users can use the drag-and-
drop method where they can select all nodes in the device window, drag them to the Download
area in the bottom of the program window and drop them there; or, they can perform it by
selecting the traditional menu, Configuration/ Download.

en05000720.vsd
IEC05000720 V1 EN-US

Figure 393: The download configuration window in LNT

704
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 17
Station communication

Communication ports M15083-97 v4

The serial communication module (SLM) is a mezzanine module placed on the Main Processing
Module (NUM) and is used for LON, SPA, IEC 60870-5-103 and DNP communication.

There are two types of IO connectors: snap-in connectors for plastic fibre cables and ST/
bayonet connectors for glass fibre cables. The SLM can be equipped with either type of
connector or a combination of both connectors. This is identified by a tag.

Connect the incoming optical fibre to the RX receiver input, and the outgoing optical fibre to
the TX transmitter output. Pay special attention to the instructions concerning handling and
connection of fibre cables.
SEMOD116913-2 v2

Table 629: SPA addresses for commands from the operator workplace to the IED for apparatus control
Name Function SPA Description
block address
BL_CMD SCSWI01 1 I 5115 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI02 1 I 5139 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI02 1 I 5161 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI04 1 I 5186 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI05 1 I 5210 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI06 1 I 5234 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI07 1 I 5258 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI08 1 I 5283 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI09 1 I 5307 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI10 1 I 5331 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI11 1 I 5355 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI12 1 I 5379 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI13 1 I 5403 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI14 1 I 5427 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI15 1 I 5451 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI16 1 I 5475 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI17 1 I 5499 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI18 1 I 5523 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI19 1 I 5545 SPA parameters for block
command
Table continues on next page

705
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Station communication

Name Function SPA Description

block address
BL_CMD SCSWI20 1 I 5571 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI21 1 I 5594 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI22 1 I 5619 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI23 1 I 5643 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI24 1 I 5667 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI25 1 I 5691 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI26 1 I 5715 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI27 1 I 5739 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI28 1 I 5763 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI29 1 I 5787 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI30 1 I 5811 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI31 1 I 5835 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI32 1 I 5859 SPA parameters for block
command
CANCEL SCSWI01 1 I 5107 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI02 1 I 5131 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI03 1 I 5153 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI04 1 I 5178 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI05 1 I 5202 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI06 1 I 5226 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI07 1 I 5250 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI08 1 I 5275 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI09 1 I 5299 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI10 1 I 5323 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI11 1 I 5347 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI12 1 I 5371 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI13 1 I 5395 SPA parameters for cancel
command
Table continues on next page

706
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 17
Station communication

Name Function SPA Description

block address
CANCEL SCSWI14 1 I 5419 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI15 1 I 5443 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI16 1 I 5467 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI17 1 I 5491 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI18 1 I 5515 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI19 1 I 5537 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI20 1 I 5563 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI21 1 I 5586 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI22 1 I 5611 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI23 1 I 5635 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI24 1 I 5659 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI25 1 I 5683 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI26 1 I 5707 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI27 1 I 5731 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI28 1 I 5755 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI29 1 I 5779 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI30 1 I 5803 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI31 1 I 5827 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI32 1 I 5851 SPA parameters for cancel
command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI01 1 I 5105 SPA parameters for select
SELECTClose=01, (Open/Close) command
SELOpen+ILO=10, Note: Send select command
SELClose+ILO=11, before operate command
SELOpen+SCO=20,
SELClose+SCO=21,
SELOpen+ILO+SCO=30,
SELClose+ILO+SCO=31
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI02 1 I 5129 SPA parameters for select
SELECTClose=01, so on. (Open/Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI03 1 I 5151 SPA parameters for select
SELECTClose=01, so on. (Open/Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI04 1 I 5176 SPA parameters for select
SELECTClose=01, so on. (Open/Close) command
Table continues on next page

707
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Station communication

Name Function SPA Description

block address
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI05 1 I 5200 SPA parameters for select
SELECTClose=01, so on. (Open/Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI06 1 I 5224 SPA parameters for select
SELECTClose=01, so on. (Open/Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI07 1 I 5248 SPA parameters for select
SELECTClose=01, so on. (Open/Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI08 1 I 5273 SPA parameters for select
SELECTClose=01, so on. (Open/Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI09 1 I 5297 SPA parameters for select
SELECTClose=01, so on. (Open/Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI10 1 I 5321 SPA parameters for select
SELECTClose=01, so on. (Open/Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI11 1 I 5345 SPA parameters for select
SELECTClose=01, so on. (Open/Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI12 1 I 5369 SPA parameters for select
SELECTClose=01, so on. (Open/Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI13 1 I 5393 SPA parameters for select
SELECTClose=01, so on. (Open/Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI14 1 I 5417 SPA parameters for select
SELECTClose=01, so on. (Open/Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI15 1 I 5441 SPA parameters for select
SELECTClose=01, so on. (Open/Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI16 1 I 5465 SPA parameters for select
SELECTClose=01, so on. (Open/Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI17 1 I 5489 SPA parameters for select
SELECTClose=01, so on. (Open/Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI18 1 I 5513 SPA parameters for select
SELECTClose=01, so on. (Open/Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI19 1 I 5535 SPA parameters for select
SELECTClose=01, so on. (Open/Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI20 1 I 5561 SPA parameters for select
SELECTClose=01, so on. (Open/Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI21 1 I 5584 SPA parameters for select
SELECTClose=01, so on. (Open/Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI22 1 I 5609 SPA parameters for select
SELECTClose=01, so on. (Open/Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI23 1 I 5633 SPA parameters for select
SELECTClose=01, so on. (Open/Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI24 1 I 5657 SPA parameters for select
SELECTClose=01, so on. (Open/Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI25 1 I 5681 SPA parameters for select
SELECTClose=01, so on. (Open/Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI26 1 I 5705 SPA parameters for select
SELECTClose=01, so on. (Open/Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI27 1 I 5729 SPA parameters for select
SELECTClose=01, so on. (Open/Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI28 1 I 5753 SPA parameters for select
SELECTClose=01, so on. (Open/Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI29 1 I 5777 SPA parameters for select
SELECTClose=01, so on. (Open/Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI30 1 I 5801 SPA parameters for select
SELECTClose=01, so on. (Open/Close) command
Table continues on next page

708
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 17
Station communication

Name Function SPA Description

block address
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI31 1 I 5825 SPA parameters for select
SELECTClose=01, so on. (Open/Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI32 1 I 5849 SPA parameters for select
SELECTClose=01, so on. (Open/Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI01 1 I 5106 SPA parameters for operate
ExcClose=01, (Open/Close) command
ExcOpen+ILO=10, Note: Send select command
ExcClose+ILO=11, before operate command
ExcOpen+SCO=20,
ExcClose+SCO=21,
ExcOpen+ILO+SCO=30,
ExcClose+ILO+SCO=31
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI02 1 I 5130 SPA parameters for operate
ExcClose=01, so on. (Open/Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI02 1 I 5152 SPA parameters for operate
ExcClose=01, so on. (Open/Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI04 1 I 5177 SPA parameters for operate
ExcClose=01, so on. (Open/Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI05 1 I 5201 SPA parameters for operate
ExcClose=01, so on. (Open/Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI06 1 I 5225 SPA parameters for operate
ExcClose=01, so on. (Open/Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI07 1 I 5249 SPA parameters for operate
ExcClose=01, so on. (Open/Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI08 1 I 5274 SPA parameters for operate
ExcClose=01, so on. (Open/Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI09 1 I 5298 SPA parameters for operate
ExcClose=01, so on. (Open/Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI10 1 I 5322 SPA parameters for operate
ExcClose=01, so on. (Open/Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI11 1 I 5346 SPA parameters for operate
ExcClose=01, so on. (Open/Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI12 1 I 5370 SPA parameters for operate
ExcClose=01, so on. (Open/Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI13 1 I 5394 SPA parameters for operate
ExcClose=01, so on. (Open/Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI14 1 I 5418 SPA parameters for operate
ExcClose=01, so on. (Open/Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI15 1 I 5442 SPA parameters for operate
ExcClose=01, so on. (Open/Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI16 1 I 5466 SPA parameters for operate
ExcClose=01, so on. (Open/Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI17 1 I 5490 SPA parameters for operate
ExcClose=01, so on. (Open/Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI18 1 I 5514 SPA parameters for operate
ExcClose=01, so on. (Open/Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI19 1 I 5536 SPA parameters for operate
ExcClose=01, so on. (Open/Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI20 1 I 5562 SPA parameters for operate
ExcClose=01, so on. (Open/Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI21 1 I 5585 SPA parameters for operate
ExcClose=01, so on. (Open/Close) command
Table continues on next page

709
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Station communication

Name Function SPA Description

block address
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI22 1 I 5610 SPA parameters for operate
ExcClose=01, so on. (Open/Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI23 1 I 5634 SPA parameters for operate
ExcClose=01, so on. (Open/Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI24 1 I 5658 SPA parameters for operate
ExcClose=01, so on. (Open/Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI25 1 I 5682 SPA parameters for operate
ExcClose=01, so on. (Open/Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI26 1 I 5706 SPA parameters for operate
ExcClose=01, so on. (Open/Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI27 1 I 5730 SPA parameters for operate
ExcClose=01, so on. (Open/Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI28 1 I 5754 SPA parameters for operate
ExcClose=01, so on. (Open/Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI29 1 I 5778 SPA parameters for operate
ExcClose=01, so on. (Open/Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI30 1 I 5802 SPA parameters for operate
ExcClose=01, so on. (Open/Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI31 1 I 5826 SPA parameters for operate
ExcClose=01, so on. (Open/Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI32 1 I 5850 SPA parameters for operate
ExcClose=01, so on. (Open/Close) command
Sub Value SXCBR01 2 I 7854 SPA parameter for position to
be substituted
Note: Send the value before
Enable
Sub Value SXCBR02 2 I 7866 SPA parameter for position to
be substituted
Sub Value SXCBR03 2 I 7884 SPA parameter for position to
be substituted
Sub Value SXCBR04 2 I 7904 SPA parameter for position to
be substituted
Sub Value SXCBR05 2 I 7923 SPA parameter for position to
be substituted
Sub Value SXCBR06 2 I 7942 SPA parameter for position to
be substituted
Sub Value SXCBR07 2 I 7961 SPA parameter for position to
be substituted
Sub Value SXCBR08 2 I 7980 SPA parameter for position to
be substituted
Sub Value SXCBR09 3I7 SPA parameter for position to
be substituted
Sub Value SXCBR10 3 I 26 SPA parameter for position to
be substituted
Sub Value SXCBR11 3 I 45 SPA parameter for position to
be substituted
Sub Value SXCBR12 3 I 56 SPA parameter for position to
be substituted
Sub Value SXCBR13 3 I 74 SPA parameter for position to
be substituted
Sub Value SXCBR14 3 I 94 SPA parameter for position to
be substituted
Table continues on next page

710
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 17
Station communication

Name Function SPA Description

block address
Sub Value SXCBR15 3 I 120 SPA parameter for position to
be substituted
Sub Value SXCBR16 3 I 133 SPA parameter for position to
be substituted
Sub Value SXCBR17 3 I 158 SPA parameter for position to
be substituted
Sub Value SXCBR18 3 I 179 SPA parameter for position to
be substituted
Sub Value SXSWI01 3 I 196 SPA parameter for position to
be substituted
Sub Value SXSWI02 3 I 216 SPA parameter for position to
be substituted
Sub Value SXSWI03 3 I 235 SPA parameter for position to
be substituted
Sub Value SXSWI04 3 I 254 SPA parameter for position to
be substituted
Sub Value SXSWI05 3 I 272 SPA parameter for position to
be substituted
Sub Value SXSWI06 3 I 292 SPA parameter for position to
be substituted
Sub Value SXSWI07 3 I 310 SPA parameter for position to
be substituted
Sub Value SXSWI08 3 I 330 SPA parameter for position to
be substituted
Sub Value SXSWI09 3 I 348 SPA parameter for position to
be substituted
Sub Value SXSWI10 3 I 359 SPA parameter for position to
be substituted
Sub Value SXSWI11 3 I 378 SPA parameter for position to
be substituted
Sub Value SXSWI12 3 I 397 SPA parameter for position to
be substituted
Sub Value SXSWI13 3 I 416 SPA parameter for position to
be substituted
Sub Value SXSWI14 3 I 435 SPA parameter for position to
be substituted
Sub Value SXSWI15 3 I 454 SPA parameter for position to
be substituted
Sub Value SXSWI16 3 I 473 SPA parameter for position to
be substituted
Sub Value SXSWI17 3 I 492 SPA parameter for position to
be substituted
Sub Value SXSWI18 3 I 511 SPA parameter for position to
be substituted
Sub Value SXSWI19 3 I 530 SPA parameter for position to
be substituted
Sub Value SXSWI20 3 I 549 SPA parameter for position to
be substituted
Sub Value SXSWI21 3 I 568 SPA parameter for position to
be substituted
Sub Value SXSWI22 3 I 587 SPA parameter for position to
be substituted
Table continues on next page

711
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Station communication

Name Function SPA Description

block address
Sub Value SXSWI23 3 I 606 SPA parameter for position to
be substituted
Sub Value SXSWI24 3 I 625 SPA parameter for position to
be substituted
Sub Value SXSWI25 3 I 644 SPA parameter for position to
be substituted
Sub Value SXSWI26 3 I 663 SPA parameter for position to
be substituted
Sub Value SXSWI27 3 I 682 SPA parameter for position to
be substituted
Sub Value SXSWI28 3 I 701 SPA parameter for position to
be substituted
Sub Enable SXCBR01 2 I 7855 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Note: Send the Value before
Enable
Sub Enable SXCBR02 2 I 7865 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR03 2 I 7885 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR04 2 I 7903 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR05 2 I 7924 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR06 2 I 7941 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR07 2 I 7962 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR08 2 I 7979 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR09 3I8 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR10 3 I 25 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR11 3 I 46 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR12 3 I 55 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR13 3 I 75 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR14 3 I 93 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR15 3 I 121 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR16 3 I 132 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR17 3 I 159 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR18 3 I 178 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI01 3 I 197 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Table continues on next page

712
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 17
Station communication

Name Function SPA Description

block address
Sub Enable SXSWI02 3 I 215 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI03 3 I 234 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI04 3 I 252 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI05 3 I 271 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI06 3 I 290 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI07 3 I 309 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI08 3 I 328 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI09 3 I 347 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI10 3 I 360 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI11 3I 379 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI12 3 I 398 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI13 3 I 417 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI14 3 I 436 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI15 3 I 455 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI16 3 I 474 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI17 3 I 493 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI18 3 I 512 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI19 3 I 531 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI20 3 I 550 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI21 3 I 569 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI22 3 I 588 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI23 3 I 607 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI24 3 I 626 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI25 3 I 645 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI26 3 I 664 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI27 3 I 683 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Table continues on next page

713
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Station communication

Name Function SPA Description

block address
Sub Enable SXSWI28 3 I 702 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Update Block SXCBR01 2 I 7853 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR02 2 I 7864 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR03 2 I 7883 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR04 2 I 7905 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR05 2 I 7922 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR06 2 I 7943 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR07 2 I 7960 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR08 2 I 7981 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR09 3I6 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR10 3 I 27 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR11 3 I 44 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR12 3 I 57 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR13 3 I 73 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR14 3 I 92 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR15 3 I 122 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR16 3 I 131 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR17 3 I 160 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR18 3 I 177 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI01 3 I 198 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI02 3 I 214 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI03 3 I 236 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI04 3 I 253 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI05 3 I 273 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI06 3 I 291 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI07 3 I 311 SPA parameter for update block
command
Table continues on next page

714
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 17
Station communication

Name Function SPA Description

block address
Update Block SXSWI08 3 I 329 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI09 3 I 349 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI10 3 I 358 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI11 3 I 377 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI12 3 I 396 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI13 3 I 415 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI14 3 I 434 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI15 3 I 453 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI16 3 I 472 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI17 3 I 491 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI18 3 I 510 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI19 3 I 529 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI20 3 I 548 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI21 3 I 567 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI22 3 I 586 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI23 3 I 605 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI24 3 I 624 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI25 3 I 643 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI26 3 I 662 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI27 3 I 681 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI28 3 I 700 SPA parameter for update block
command

17.5.4 Technical data IP14442-1 v1

M11927-1 v2

Table 630: LON communication protocol

Function Value
Protocol LON
Communication speed 1.25 Mbit/s

715
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Station communication

17.6 SPA communication protocol IP14614-1 v1

17.6.1 Functionality M11897-3 v5

In this section the most common addresses for commands and events are available. For other
addresses, refer to section "Related documents".

It is assumed that the reader is familiar with the SPA communication protocol in general.

17.6.2 Design M11877-3 v5

Using the rear SPA port for either local or remote communication with a PC requires the
following equipment:

• Optical fibres
• Opto/electrical converter for the PC
• PC

The software needed in the PC, either local or remote, is PCM600.

SPA cannot be used with PCM600.

When communicating between the local HMI and a PC, the only hardware required is a front-
connection cable. Note! SPA cannot be used from LHMI front, except for using "FSTACCS", that
is, Field Service Tool Access.

17.6.3 Settings IP14403-1 v2

PID-6195-SETTINGS v4

Table 631: SPA Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SlaveAddress 1 - 899 - 1 30 Slave address
BaudRate 300 Bd - - 9600 Bd Baudrate on serial line
1200 Bd
2400 Bd
4800 Bd
9600 Bd
19200 Bd
38400 Bd

PID-6194-SETTINGS v4

Table 632: LONSPA Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation
On
SlaveAddress 1 - 899 - 1 30 Slave address

716
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 17
Station communication

17.6.4 Operation principle IP14401-1 v3

M11880-3 v2
The SPA bus uses an asynchronous serial communications protocol (1 start bit, 7 data bits +
even parity, 1 stop bit) with data transfer rate up to 38400 bit/s. For more information on
recommended baud rate for each type of IED, refer to Technical reference manual. Messages
on the bus consist of ASCII characters.

Introduction of SPA protocol M11880-7 v2

The basic construction of the protocol assumes that the slave has no self-initiated need to talk
to the master but the master is aware of the data contained in the slaves and, consequently,
can request required data. In addition, the master can send data to the slave. Requesting by
the master can be performed either by sequenced polling (for example, for event information)
or only on demand.

The master requests slave information using request messages and sends information to the
slave in write messages. Furthermore, the master can send all slaves in common a broadcast
message containing time or other data. The inactive state of bus transmit and receive lines is a
logical "1".

SPA protocol M11880-10 v5

The tables below specify the SPA addresses for reading data from and writing data to an IED
with the SPA communication protocol implemented.

The SPA addresses for the pulse counter values PCFCNT:1 to PCFCNT:16 are found in table 633.

Table 633: SPA addresses for the PCFCNT function

Function block SPA address CNT_VAL SPA address NEW_VAL
PCFCNT:1 6-O-2788 6-O-2787
PCFCNT:2 6-O-2794 6-O-2793
PCFCNT:3 6-O-2800 6-O-2799
PCFCNT:4 6-O-2806 6-O-2805
PCFCNT:5 6-O-2812 6-O-2811
PCFCNT:6 6-O-2818 6-O-2817
PCFCNT:7 6-O-2824 6-O-2823
PCFCNT:8 6-O-2830 6-O-2829
PCFCNT:9 6-O-2836 6-O-2835
PCFCNT:10 6-O-2842 6-O-2841
PCFCNT:11 6-O-2848 6-O-2847
PCFCNT:12 6-O-2854 6-O-2853
PCFCNT:13 6-O-2860 6-O-2859
PCFCNT:14 6-O-2866 6-O-2865
PCFCNT:15 6-O-2872 6-O-2871
PCFCNT:16 6-O-2878 6-O-2877

I/O modules M11880-16 v4

To read binary inputs, the SPA-addresses for the outputs of the I/O-module function block are
used, that is, the addresses for BI1 – BI16. For SPA addresses, refer to section Related
documents in Product Guide.
M11880-35 v1

717
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Station communication

Single command, 16 signals M11880-51 v4

The IEDs can be provided with a function to receive signals either from a substation
automation system or from the local HMI. That receiving function block has 16 outputs that
can be used, for example, to control high voltage apparatuses in switchyards. For local control
functions, the local HMI can also be used.

Single command, 16 signals function consists of three function blocks; SINGLECMD:1 to

SINGLECMD:3 for 16 binary output signals each.

The signals can be individually controlled from the operator station, remote-control gateway,
or from the local HMI on the IED. For Single command, 3 signals function block, SINGLECMD:1
to SINGLECMD:3, the address is for the first output. The other outputs follow consecutively
after the first one. For example, output 7 on the SINGLECMD:2 function block has the 5O533
address.

The SPA addresses for Single command, 16 signals functions SINGLECMD:1 to SINGLECMD:3
are found in table 634.

Table 634: SPA addresses for SINGLECMD function

Function block SPA address CMD Input SPA address CMD output
SINGLECMD1-Cmd1 4-S-4639 5-O-511
SINGLECMD1-Cmd2 4-S-4640 5-O-512
SINGLECMD1-Cmd3 4-S-4641 5-O-513
SINGLECMD1-Cmd4 4-S-4642 5-O-514
SINGLECMD1-Cmd5 4-S-4643 5-O-515
SINGLECMD1-Cmd6 4-S-4644 5-O-516
SINGLECMD1-Cmd7 4-S-4645 5-O-517
SINGLECMD1-Cmd8 4-S-4646 5-O-518
SINGLECMD1-Cmd9 4-S-4647 5-O-519
SINGLECMD1-Cmd10 4-S-4648 5-O-520
SINGLECMD1-Cmd11 4-S-4649 5-O-521
SINGLECMD1-Cmd12 4-S-4650 5-O-522
SINGLECMD1-Cmdt13 4-S-4651 5-O-523
SINGLECMD1-Cmd14 4-S-4652 5-O-524
SINGLECMD1-Cmd15 4-S-4653 5-O-525
SINGLECMD1-Cmd16 4-S-4654 5-O-526
SINGLECMD2-Cmd1 4-S-4672 5-O-527
SINGLECMD2-Cmd2 4-S-4673 5-O-528
SINGLECMD2-Cmdt3 4-S-4674 5-O-529
SINGLECMD2-Cmd4 4-S-4675 5-O-530
SINGLECMD2-Cmd5 4-S-4676 5-O-531
SINGLECMD2-Cmd6 4-S-4677 5-O-532
SINGLECMD2-Cmd7 4-S-4678 5-O-533
SINGLECMD2-Cmd8 4-S-4679 5-O-534
SINGLECMD2-Cmd9 4-S-4680 5-O-535
SINGLECMD2-Cmd10 4-S-4681 5-O-536
SINGLECMD2-Cmd11 4-S-4682 5-O-537
SINGLECMD2-Cmd12 4-S-4683 5-O-538
Table continues on next page

718
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 17
Station communication

Function block SPA address CMD Input SPA address CMD output
SINGLECMD2-Cmd13 4-S-4684 5-O-539
SINGLECMD2-Cmd14 4-S-4685 5-O-540
SINGLECMD2-Cmd15 4-S-4686 5-O-541
SINGLECMD2-Cmd16 4-S-4687 5-O-542
SINGLECMD3-Cmd1 4-S-4705 5-O-543
SINGLECMD3-Cmd2 4-S-4706 5-O-544
SINGLECMD3-Cmd3 4-S-4707 5-O-545
SINGLECMD3-Cmd4 4-S-4708 5-O-546
SINGLECMD3-Cmd5 4-S-4709 5-O-547
SINGLECMD3-Cmd6 4-S-4710 5-O-548
SINGLECMD3-Cmd7 4-S-4711 5-O-549
SINGLECMD3-Cmd8 4-S-4712 5-O-550
SINGLECMD3-Cmd9 4-S-4713 5-O-551
SINGLECMD3-Cmd10 4-S-4714 5-O-552
SINGLECMD3-Cmd11 4-S-4715 5-O-553
SINGLECMD3-Cmd12 4-S-4716 5-O-554
SINGLECMD3-Cmd13 4-S-4717 5-O-555
SINGLECMD3-Cmd14 4-S-4718 5-O-556
SINGLECMD3-Cmd15 4-S-4719 5-O-557
SINGLECMD3-Cmd16 4-S-4720 5-O-558

Figure 394 shows an application example of how the user can, in a simplified way, connect the
command function via the configuration logic circuit in a protection IED for control of a circuit
breaker.

A pulse via the binary outputs of the IED normally performs this type of command control. The
SPA addresses to control the outputs OUT1 – OUT16 in SINGLECMD:1 are shown in table 634.

SINGLECMD PULSETIMER
BLOCK ^OUT1 INPUT OUT To output board, CLOSE
#CD01-CMDOUT1 ^OUT2
#CD01-CMDOUT2 ^OUT3
#CD01-CMDOUT3 ^OUT4
#CD01-CMDOUT4 ^OUT5 AND PULSETIMER
^OUT6 INPUT1 OUT INPUT OUT To output board, OPEN
#CD01-CMDOUT5
^OUT7 INPUT2 NOUT
#CD01-CMDOUT6
#CD01-CMDOUT7 ^OUT8 INPUT3
#CD01-CMDOUT8 ^OUT9 INPUT4
#CD01-CMDOUT9 ^OUT10
#CD01-CMDOUT10 ^OUT11
#CD01-CMDOUT11 ^OUT12
#CD01-CMDOUT12 ^OUT13
#CD01-CMDOUT13 ^OUT14
#CD01-CMDOUT14 ^OUT15
#CD01-CMDOUT15 ^OUT16
#CD01-CMDOUT16

SYNCH OK

IEC05000717-4-en.vsd
IEC05000717 V4 EN-US

Figure 394: Application example showing a simplified logic diagram for control of a
circuit breaker
The MODE input defines if the output signals from SINGLECMD:1 is off, steady or setable pulse
length signals. This is set in Parameter Setting Tool (PST) under: Main Menu/Settings / IED
Settings / Control / Commands / Single Command or via Parameter Setting Tool (PST).

719
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Station communication

Event function EVENT M11880-82 v5

The Event function (EVENT) sends time-tagged events to the station level (for example,
operator workplace) over the station bus. On the station level, events are presented in an
event list. Events can be created from both internal logical signals and binary input channels.
All the internal signals are time tagged in the main processing module, while the binary input
channels are time tagged directly on each I/O module. Events are produced according to a set
of event masks. These masks are treated commonly for both LON and SPA channels. All events
according to the event mask are stored in a buffer which contains up to 1000 events. If new
events appear before the oldest event in the buffer is read, the oldest event is overwritten and
an overflow alarm appears.

Two special signals for event registration purposes are available in the IED: Terminal Restarted
(0E50) and Event buffer overflow (0E51).

Input parameters can be set individually from the Parameter Setting Tool (PST) under: Main
Menu/Settings / IED Settings / Monitoring / Event Function or via the Parameter Setting
Tool (PST) as follows:

• No events
• OnSet, at pick-up of the signal
• OnReset, at drop-out of the signal
• OnChange, at both pick-up and drop-out of the signal
• AutoDetect, the EVENT function makes the reporting decision (reporting criteria for
integers has no semantic, prefer to be set by the user)

For double indications, only the fist eight inputs, 1–8, must be used. Inputs 9–16 can be used
for other types of events in the same EVENT block.

Status and event codes for the EVENT function are found in Table 635.

Table 635: Status and event codes

Single indication1) Double indication

Event block Status Set event Reset Intermed Closed Open Undefined
event iate 00 10 01 11
EVENT:1
Input 1 22O1 22E33 22E32 22E0 22E1 22E2 22E3
Input 2 22O2 22E35 22E34 22E4 22E5 22E6 22E7
Input 3 22O3 22E37 22E36 22E8 22E9 22E10 22E11
Input 4 22O4 22E39 22E38 22E12 22E13 22E14 22E15
Input 5 22O5 22E41 22E40 22E16 22E17 22E18 22E19
Input 6 22O6 22E43 22E42 22E20 22E21 22E22 22E23
Input 7 22O7 22E45 22E44 22E24 22E25 22E26 22E27
Input 8 22O8 22E47 22E46 22E28 22E29 22E30 22E31
Input 9 22O9 22E49 22E48 - - - -
Input 10 22O10 22E51 22E50 - - - -
Input 11 22O11 22E53 22E52 - - - -
Input 12 22O12 22E55 22E54 - - - -
Input 13 22O13 22E57 22E56 - - - -
Input 14 22O14 22E59 22E58 - - - -
Input 15 22O15 22E61 22E60 - - - -
Input 16 22O16 22E63 22E62 - - - -

EVENT:2 230.. 23E.. 23E.. 23E.. 23E.. 23E.. 23E..

EVENT:3 240.. 24E.. 24E.. 24E.. 23E.. 24E.. 24E..
- - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - -
EVENT:20 410.. 41E.. 41E.. 41E.. 41E.. 41E.. 41E..

These values are only applicable if the event mask is masked ≠ OFF.

720
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 17
Station communication

Connection of signals as events M11880-311 v5

Signals coming from different protection and control functions and sent as events to the
station level over the SPA-bus (or LON-bus), are connected to the EVENT function block as
specified in Figure 395.

EVENT
Block BLOCK
ILRANG ^INPUT1
PSTO ^INPUT2
UL12RANG ^INPUT3
UL23RANG ^INPUT4
UL31RANG ^INPUT5
3I0RANG ^INPUT6
3U0RANG ^INPUT7
FALSE ^INPUT8
^INPUT9
^INPUT10
^INPUT11
^INPUT12
^INPUT13
^INPUT14
^INPUT15
^INPUT16

IEC07000065-2-en.vsd
IEC07000065 V2 EN-US

Figure 395: Connection of protection signals for event handling

17.6.4.1 Communication ports M11880-315 v5

The serial communication module (SLM) is a mezzanine module placed on the numeric
processing module (NUM). It is used for LON, SPA, IEC 60870-5-103 and DNP communication.

There are two types of IO connectors: snap-in connector for plastic fibre cables and ST/
bayonet connector for glass fibre cables. The SLM can be equipped with either type or
connector or with a combination of both types of connectors. This is identified with a tag.

Connect the incoming optical fibre to the RX receiver input, and the outgoing optical fibre to
the TX transmitter output. Pay special attention to instructions concerning handling and
connection of fibre cables.

For setting the transfer rate (baud rate) and slave number, please refer to the Application
manual and Commissioning manual respectively.

17.6.5 Technical data IP14404-1 v1

M11901-1 v2

Table 636: SPA communication protocol

Function Value
Protocol SPA
Communication speed 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 or 38400 Bd
Slave number 1 to 899

721
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Station communication

17.7 IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol IP14615-1 v2

17.7.1 Introduction M11910-3 v3

IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol is mainly used when a protection IED communicates
with a third party control or monitoring system. This system must have software that can
interpret the IEC 60870-5-103 communication messages.

17.7.2 Measurands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103MEAS

17.7.2.1 Functionality GUID-557FB587-9127-4D99-B2C6-16445E06F220 v3

103MEAS is a function block that reports all valid measuring types depending on connected
signals.

The set of connected input will control which ASDUs (Application Service Data Units) are
generated.

• 9 Will be generated if at least IL1 is connected. IL2, IL3, UL1, UL2, UL3, P, Q, F are optional
but there can be no holes.
• 3.4 Will be generated if IN and UN are present.
• 3.3 Will be generated if IL2, Ul1L2, P and Q present.
• 3.2 Will be generated if IL2, UL1L2 and P or Q missing.
• 3.1 Will be generated if IL2 present and IL1 missing (otherwise IL2 in 9).

Description for I103MEAS function block:

9 = IL1
3.4 = IN AND UN
3.3 = IL2 AND UL1L2 AND P AND Q
3.2 = IL2 AND UL1L2 AND NOT 3.3
3.1 = IL2 AND NOT (3.2 OR 3.3 OR 9)

17.7.2.2 Identification
GUID-3E1AB624-1B68-4018-B1BA-BC2C811F8F74 v1

Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

name identification device number
Measurands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103MEAS - -

722
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 17
Station communication

17.7.2.3 Function block GUID-EC5F1C83-0F47-4548-86E3-FFE056571241 v2

I103MEAS
BLOCK
IL1
IL2
IL3
IN
UL1
UL2
UL3
UL1L2
UN
P
Q
F

IEC10000287-1-en.vsd
IEC10000287 V1 EN-US

Figure 396: I103MEAS function block

17.7.2.4 Signals
PID-3972-INPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 637: I103MEAS Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of service value reporting
IL1 REAL 0.0 Service value for current phase L1
IL2 REAL 0.0 Service value for current phase L2
IL3 REAL 0.0 Service value for current phase L3
IN REAL 0.0 Service value for residual current IN
UL1 REAL 0.0 Service value for voltage phase L1
UL2 REAL 0.0 Service value for voltage phase L2
UL3 REAL 0.0 Service value for voltage phase L3
UL1L2 REAL 0.0 Service value for voltage phase-phase L1-L2
UN REAL 0.0 Service value for residual voltage UN
P REAL 0.0 Service value for active power
Q REAL 0.0 Service value for reactive power
F REAL 0.0 Service value for system frequency

17.7.2.5 Settings
PID-3972-SETTINGS v3

Table 638: I103MEAS Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type (1-255)
MaxIL1 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Maximum current phase L1
MaxIL2 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Maximum current phase L2
MaxIL3 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Maximum current phase L3
MaxIN 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Maximum residual current IN
MaxUL1 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 230.00 Maximum voltage for phase L1
MaxUL2 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 230.00 Maximum voltage for phase L2
Table continues on next page

723
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Station communication

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

MaxUL3 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 230.00 Maximum voltage for phase L3
MaxUL1-UL2 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Maximum voltage for phase-phase L1-
L2
MaxUN 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 230.00 Maximum residual voltage UN
MaxP 0.00 - 2000.00 MW 0.05 1200.00 Maximum value for active power
MaxQ 0.00 - 2000.00 MVAr 0.05 1200.00 Maximum value for reactive power
MaxF 45.0 - 66.0 Hz 1.0 51.0 Maximum system frequency

17.7.3 Measurands user defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103

I103MEASUSR

17.7.3.1 Functionality GUID-FC9ED4BD-F11C-4BDA-8CDB-3ACF00931D3A v1

I103MEASUSR is a function block with user defined input measurands in monitor direction.
These function blocks include the FunctionType parameter for each block in the private range,
and the Information number parameter for each block.

17.7.3.2 Identification
GUID-A9E21066-354B-453D-8D9B-E86EE31CF5F9 v1

Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

name identification device number
Measurands user defined signals for I103MEASUSR - -
IEC 60870-5-103

17.7.3.3 Function block GUID-C234101E-F9B9-4DB0-874C-C51BB50588CB v1

I103MEASUSR
BLOCK
^INPUT1
^INPUT2
^INPUT3
^INPUT4
^INPUT5
^INPUT6
^INPUT7
^INPUT8
^INPUT9

IEC10000288-1-en.vsd
IEC10000288 V1 EN-US

Figure 397: I103MEASUSR function block

17.7.3.4 Signals
PID-3791-INPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 639: I103MEASUSR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of service value reporting
INPUT1 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 1
INPUT2 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 2
Table continues on next page

724
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 17
Station communication

Name Type Default Description

INPUT3 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 3
INPUT4 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 4
INPUT5 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 5
INPUT6 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 6
INPUT7 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 7
INPUT8 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 8
INPUT9 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 9

17.7.3.5 Settings
PID-3791-SETTINGS v4

Table 640: I103MEASUSR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 25 Function type (1-255)
InfNo 1 - 255 - 1 1 Information number for measurands
(1-255)
MaxMeasur1 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on
10000000000.00 input 1
MaxMeasur2 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on
10000000000.00 input 2
MaxMeasur3 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on
10000000000.00 input 3
MaxMeasur4 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on
10000000000.00 input 4
MaxMeasur5 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on
10000000000.00 input 5
MaxMeasur6 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on
10000000000.00 input 6
MaxMeasur7 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on
10000000000.00 input 7
MaxMeasur8 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on
10000000000.00 input 8
MaxMeasur9 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on
10000000000.00 input 9

17.7.4 Function status auto-recloser for IEC 60870-5-103 I103AR

17.7.4.1 Functionality GUID-7A132276-35A2-402C-9722-6259D65998F5 v1

I103AR is a function block with defined functions for autorecloser indications in monitor
direction. This block includes the FunctionType parameter, and the information number
parameter is defined for each output signal.

725
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Station communication

17.7.4.2 Identification
GUID-7B066282-79D7-480B-BEDE-3C04F0FCBF05 v1

Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

name identification device number
Function status auto-recloser for IEC I103AR - -
60870-5-103

17.7.4.3 Function block GUID-FAC5A3DF-73CB-4A39-A213-5C21ACA05756 v1

I103AR
BLOCK
16_ARACT
128_CBON
130_BLKD

IEC10000289-2-en.vsd
IEC10000289 V2 EN-US

Figure 398: I103AR function block

17.7.4.4 Signals
PID-3973-INPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 641: I103AR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting
16_ARACT BOOLEAN 0 Information number 16, auto-recloser active
128_CBON BOOLEAN 0 Information number 128, circuit breaker on by auto-recloser
130_BLKD BOOLEAN 0 Information number 130, auto-recloser blocked

17.7.4.5 Settings
PID-3973-SETTINGS v4

Table 642: I103AR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type (1-255)

17.7.5 Function status earth-fault for IEC 60870-5-103 I103EF GUID-F23B392E-B55D-4BC3-A0A6-B7992D551092 v1

17.7.5.1 Functionality GUID-13F90E95-7C8C-4DCB-A9D8-2489B66DB81A v2

I103EF is a function block with defined functions for earth fault indications in monitor
direction. This block includes the FunctionType parameter, and the information number
parameter is defined for each output signal.

17.7.5.2 Identification
GUID-033731B7-1B71-4CCC-8356-1C03CBCB23FA v1

Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

name identification device number
Function status earth-fault for IEC I103EF - -
60870-5-103

726
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 17
Station communication

17.7.5.3 Function block GUID-25B47484-2976-4063-BD81-AE02D03B08B0 v1

I103EF
BLOCK
51_EFFW
52_EFREV

IEC10000290-1-en.vsd
IEC10000290 V1 EN-US

Figure 399: I103EF function block

17.7.5.4 Signals
PID-3974-INPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 643: I103EF Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting
51_EFFW BOOLEAN 0 Information number 51, earth-fault forward
52_EFREV BOOLEAN 0 Information number 52, earth-fault reverse

17.7.5.5 Settings
PID-3974-SETTINGS v4

Table 644: I103EF Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 160 Function type (1-255)

17.7.6 Function status fault protection for IEC 60870-5-103

I103FLTPROT

17.7.6.1 Functionality GUID-6D52F442-1592-4BA7-919C-0CD79046CAE5 v1

I103FLTPROT is used for fault indications in monitor direction. Each input on the function
block is specific for a certain fault type and therefore must be connected to a correspondent
signal present in the configuration. For example: 68_TRGEN represents the General Trip of the
device, and therefore must be connected to the general trip signal SMPPTRC_TRIP or
equivalent.

The delay observed in the protocol is the time difference in between the signal that is
triggering the Disturbance Recorder and the respective configured signal to the IEC
60870-5-103 I103FLTPROT.

17.7.6.2 Identification
GUID-55593EC4-7AED-47A0-8311-DB22D013A193 v1

Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

name identification device number
Function status fault protection for I103FLTPROT - -
IEC 60870-5-103

727
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Station communication

17.7.6.3 Function block GUID-F0ED13B8-6B82-4CA7-8F22-C200C33EBB7E v2

I103FLTPROT
BLOCK
64_STL1
65_STL2
66_STL3
67_STIN
68_TRGEN
69_TRL1
70_TRL2
71_TRL3
72_TRBKUP
73_SCL
74_FW
75_REV
76_TRANS
77_RECEV
78_ZONE1
79_ZONE2
80_ZONE3
81_ZONE4
82_ZONE5
84_STGEN
85_BFP
86_MTRL1
87_MTRL2
88_MTRL3
89_MTRN
90_IOC
91_IOC
92_IEF
93_IEF
ARINPROG
FLTLOC

IEC10000291-1-en.vsd
IEC10000291 V1 EN-US

Figure 400: I103FLTPROT function block

17.7.6.4 Signals
PID-3956-INPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 645: I103FLTPROT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting.
64_STL1 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 64, start phase L1
65_STL2 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 65, start phase L2
66_STL3 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 66, start phase L3
67_STIN BOOLEAN 0 Information number 67, start residual current IN
68_TRGEN BOOLEAN 0 Information number 68, trip general
69_TRL1 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 69, trip phase L1
70_TRL2 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 70, trip phase L2
71_TRL3 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 71, trip phase L3
72_TRBKUP BOOLEAN 0 Information number 72, back up trip I>>
73_SCL REAL 0 Information number 73, fault location in ohm
74_FW BOOLEAN 0 Information number 74, forward/line
75_REV BOOLEAN 0 Information number 75, reverse/busbar
76_TRANS BOOLEAN 0 Information number 76, signal transmitted
77_RECEV BOOLEAN 0 Information number 77, signal received
78_ZONE1 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 78, zone 1
Table continues on next page

728
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 17
Station communication

Name Type Default Description

79_ZONE2 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 79, zone 2
80_ZONE3 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 80, zone 3
81_ZONE4 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 81, zone 4
82_ZONE5 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 82, zone 5
84_STGEN BOOLEAN 0 Information number 84, start general
85_BFP BOOLEAN 0 Information number 85, breaker failure
86_MTRL1 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 86, trip measuring system phase L1
87_MTRL2 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 87, trip measuring system phase L2
88_MTRL3 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 88, trip measuring system phase L3
89_MTRN BOOLEAN 0 Information number 89, trip measuring system neutral N
90_IOC BOOLEAN 0 Information number 90, over current trip, stage low
91_IOC BOOLEAN 0 Information number 91, over current trip, stage high
92_IEF BOOLEAN 0 Information number 92, earth-fault trip, stage low
93_IEF BOOLEAN 0 Information number 93, earth-fault trip, stage high
ARINPROG BOOLEAN 0 Autorecloser in progress (SMBRREC- INPROGR)
FLTLOC BOOLEAN 0 Faultlocator faultlocation valid (LMBRFLO-CALCMADE)

17.7.6.5 Settings
PID-3956-SETTINGS v4

Table 646: I103FLTPROT Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 128 Function type (1-255)

17.7.7 IED status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IED

17.7.7.1 Functionality GUID-52AC7D0F-33C5-46FC-983E-5CB4B3517D88 v1

I103IED is a function block with defined IED functions in monitor direction. This block uses
parameter as FunctionType, and information number parameter is defined for each input
signal.

17.7.7.2 Identification
GUID-5EEBE11C-C8E3-4A8A-814F-840E137DB5B5 v1

Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

name identification device number
IED status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IED - -

729
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Station communication

17.7.7.3 Function block GUID-421D5C37-27A5-476A-A7D9-40E70AFDFDC8 v1

I103IED
BLOCK
19_LEDRS
21_TESTM
22_SETCH
23_GRP1
24_GRP2
25_GRP3
26_GRP4

IEC10000292-2-en.vsd
IEC10000292 V2 EN-US

Figure 401: I103IED function block

17.7.7.4 Signals
PID-3975-INPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 647: I103IED Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting
19_LEDRS BOOLEAN 0 Information number 19, reset LEDs
21_TESTM BOOLEAN 0 Information number 21, test mode is active
22_SETCH BOOLEAN 0 Information number 22, setting changed
23_GRP1 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 23, setting group 1 is active
24_GRP2 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 24, setting group 2 is active
25_GRP3 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 25, setting group 3 is active
26_GRP4 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 26, setting group 4 is active

17.7.7.5 Settings
PID-3975-SETTINGS v4

Table 648: I103IED Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type (1-255)

17.7.8 Supervison status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103SUPERV

17.7.8.1 Functionality GUID-E7A28D8D-398E-437C-9B58-AE125BC38058 v1

I103SUPERV is a function block with defined functions for supervision indications in monitor
direction. This block includes the FunctionType parameter, and the information number
parameter is defined for each output signal.

17.7.8.2 Identification
GUID-C8113B08-3586-412C-A750-606159B1E97E v1

Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

name identification device number
Supervison status for IEC I103SUPERV - -
60870-5-103

730
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 17
Station communication

17.7.8.3 Function block GUID-69C2C974-2D64-4174-9F9A-15383C09050D v1

I103SUPERV
BLOCK
32_MEASI
33_MEASU
37_IBKUP
38_VTFF
46_GRWA
47_GRAL

IEC10000293-1-en.vsd
IEC10000293 V1 EN-US

Figure 402: I103SUPERV function block

17.7.8.4 Signals
PID-3976-INPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 649: I103SUPERV Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting
32_MEASI BOOLEAN 0 Information number 32, measurand supervision of I
33_MEASU BOOLEAN 0 Information number 33, measurand supervision of U
37_IBKUP BOOLEAN 0 Information number 37, I high-high back-up protection
38_VTFF BOOLEAN 0 Information number 38, fuse failure VT
46_GRWA BOOLEAN 0 Information number 46, group warning
47_GRAL BOOLEAN 0 Information number 47, group alarm

17.7.8.5 Settings
PID-3976-SETTINGS v4

Table 650: I103SUPERV Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type (1-255)

17.7.9 Status for user defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103

I103USRDEF

17.7.9.1 Functionality GUID-DADC9CE4-2E80-426C-A3B6-A8E8C7AC3CD4 v3

I103USRDEF is a function block with user defined input signals in monitor direction. Each
instance is associated with a Function Type (FUN) and each input signal with an Information
Number (INF). Additionally, all input signals may be defined to use relative time and how to
respond to a GI request.

The user is responsible for assigning a proper FUN value and proper INF values to all
connected inputs. See Settings for details.

731
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Station communication

17.7.9.2 Identification
GUID-474FDF39-CEFC-4370-9393-13BE62159969 v2

Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

name identification device number
Status for user defined signals for I103USRDEF - -
IEC 60870-5-103

17.7.9.3 Function block GUID-B8312E77-514D-4117-BB31-B9907755580C v1

I103USRDEF
BLOCK
^INPUT1
^INPUT2
^INPUT3
^INPUT4
^INPUT5
^INPUT6
^INPUT7
^INPUT8
RT_START

IEC10000294-3-en.vsdx

IEC10000294 V3 EN-US

Figure 403: I103USRDEF function block

17.7.9.4 Signals
PID-6485-INPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 651: I103USRDEF Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal Input 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 6
INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 7
INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 8
RT_START BOOLEAN 0 Trig to set base of relative time

GUID-9E29DE39-EA74-4D62-A2BA-F8E31A3D8757 v2
RT_START registers the positive transition (0->1) of a pulse and sets the time from which
relative time is derived. Relative time is assigned only to inputs where the corresponding
TypNo parameter is set to Relative. The maximum relative time and unit conform to the IEC
60870-5-103 standard.

732
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 17
Station communication

17.7.9.5 Settings
PID-6485-SETTINGS v4

Table 652: I103USRDEF Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 5 Function type (1-255)
InfNo1 1 - 255 - 1 1 Information number for binary input 1
(1-255)
InfNo2 1 - 255 - 1 2 Information number for binary input 2
(1-255)
InfNo3 1 - 255 - 1 3 Information number for binary input 3
(1-255)
InfNo4 1 - 255 - 1 4 Information number for binary input 4
(1-255)
InfNo5 1 - 255 - 1 5 Information number for binary input 5
(1-255)
InfNo6 1 - 255 - 1 6 Information number for binary input 6
(1-255)
InfNo7 1 - 255 - 1 7 Information number for binary input 7
(1-255)
InfNo8 1 - 255 - 1 8 Information number for binary input 8
(1-255)
TypNo1 Absolute - - Absolute Type identification (TYP)
Relative
TypNo2 Absolute - - Absolute Type identification (TYP)
Relative
TypNo3 Absolute - - Absolute Type identification (TYP)
Relative
TypNo4 Absolute - - Absolute Type identification (TYP)
Relative
TypNo5 Absolute - - Absolute Type identification (TYP)
Relative
TypNo6 Absolute - - Absolute Type identification (TYP)
Relative
TypNo7 Absolute - - Absolute Type identification (TYP)
Relative
TypNo8 Absolute - - Absolute Type identification (TYP)
Relative
GiNo1 Excluded - - Included Response and status change (GI)
Included
GiNo2 Excluded - - Included Response and status change (GI)
Included
GiNo3 Excluded - - Included Response and status change (GI)
Included
GiNo4 Excluded - - Included Response and status change (GI)
Included
GiNo5 Excluded - - Included Response and status change (GI)
Included
Table continues on next page

733
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Station communication

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

GiNo6 Excluded - - Included Response and status change (GI)
Included
GiNo7 Excluded - - Included Response and status change (GI)
Included
GiNo8 Excluded - - Included Response and status change (GI)
Included

GUID-86DE9DBA-BE2F-4CC9-B447-1D2D86849EFF v2
The FunctionType parameter associates a particular instance of the function block with a FUN.
Refer to the IEC 60870-5-103 standard for details.

The InfNon parameters are used to associate each individual input signal with a userdefined
INF. Refer to the IEC 60870-5-103 standard for details.

The TypNon parameters determine if messages use absolute or relative time. This adheres to
the TYPE IDENTIFICATION (TYP) message types 1 (time-tagged message) and 2 (time-tagged
message with relative time) of the IEC 60870-5-103 standard.

The GiNon parameters determine whether a message is sent as a part of a GI reply or not.
Refer to the IEC 60870-5-103 standard for details.

17.7.10 Function commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103CMD

17.7.10.1 Functionality GUID-973929FE-292B-42A5-ACF9-BC95E2B16AE1 v2

I103CMD is a command function block in control direction with pre-defined output signals. The
signals are in steady state, not pulsed, and stored in the IED in case of restart.

17.7.10.2 Identification
GUID-CFD43980-0791-40D1-9136-CF4CCC35549A v1

Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

name identification device number
Function commands for IEC I103CMD - -
60870-5-103

17.7.10.3 Function block GUID-C0680812-C488-4546-AA65-F590955DBF0C v1

I103CMD
BLOCK 16-AR
17-DIFF
18-PROT

IEC10000282-1-en.vsd
IEC10000282 V1 EN-US

Figure 404: I103CMD function block

17.7.10.4 Signals
PID-3969-INPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 653: I103CMD Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of commands

734
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 17
Station communication

PID-3969-OUTPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 654: I103CMD Output signals

Name Type Description
16-AR BOOLEAN Information number 16, off/on of autorecloser
17-DIFF BOOLEAN Information number 17, block of differential protection
18-PROT BOOLEAN Information number 18, block of protection

17.7.10.5 Settings
PID-3969-SETTINGS v4

Table 655: I103CMD Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type (1-255)

17.7.11 IED commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IEDCMD

17.7.11.1 Functionality GUID-19AD44B2-21D6-4DB0-AD74-1578DA30C100 v5

I103IEDCMD is a command block in control direction with defined IED functions. All outputs
are pulsed and they are NOT stored. Pulse length is fixed to 400ms.

17.7.11.2 Identification
GUID-0D0B2477-1B0C-48F3-B047-CCF9C7A71856 v1

Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

name identification device number
IED commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IEDCMD - -

17.7.11.3 Function block GUID-52D27CDA-8805-48FA-99BE-2E05A438B0C7 v1

I103IEDCMD
BLOCK 19-LEDRS
23-GRP1
24-GRP2
25-GRP3
26-GRP4

IEC10000283-1-en.vsd
IEC10000283 V1 EN-US

Figure 405: I103IEDCMD function block

17.7.11.4 Signals
PID-3788-INPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 656: I103IEDCMD Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of commands

735
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Station communication

PID-3788-OUTPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 657: I103IEDCMD Output signals

Name Type Description
19-LEDRS BOOLEAN Information number 19, reset LEDs
23-GRP1 BOOLEAN Information number 23, activate setting group 1
24-GRP2 BOOLEAN Information number 24, activate setting group 2
25-GRP3 BOOLEAN Information number 25, activate setting group 3
26-GRP4 BOOLEAN Information number 26, activate setting group 4

17.7.11.5 Settings
PID-3788-SETTINGS v4

Table 658: I103IEDCMD Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 255 Function type (1-255)

17.7.12 Function commands user defined for IEC 60870-5-103

I103USRCMD

17.7.12.1 Functionality GUID-2989EAC8-20BE-46EE-93FE-C70188D0BC89 v1

I103USRCMD is a command block in control direction with user defined output signals. These
function blocks include the FunctionType parameter for each block in the private range, and
the Information number parameter for each output signal.

17.7.12.2 Identification
GUID-9D6D1636-36C6-4C4E-B157-2D827820DDC7 v1

Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

name identification device number
Function commands user defined for I103USRCMD - -
IEC 60870-5-103

17.7.12.3 Function block GUID-5EBEAED5-ABD9-4257-B879-DF7FD9F7805A v1

I103USRCMD
BLOCK ^OUTPUT1
^OUTPUT2
^OUTPUT3
^OUTPUT4
^OUTPUT5
^OUTPUT6
^OUTPUT7
^OUTPUT8

IEC10000284-1-en.vsd
IEC10000284 V1 EN-US

Figure 406: I103USRCMD function block

736
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 17
Station communication

17.7.12.4 Signals
PID-3790-INPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 659: I103USRCMD Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of commands

PID-3790-OUTPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 660: I103USRCMD Output signals

Name Type Description
OUTPUT1 BOOLEAN Command output 1
OUTPUT2 BOOLEAN Command output 2
OUTPUT3 BOOLEAN Command output 3
OUTPUT4 BOOLEAN Command output 4
OUTPUT5 BOOLEAN Command output 5
OUTPUT6 BOOLEAN Command output 6
OUTPUT7 BOOLEAN Command output 7
OUTPUT8 BOOLEAN Command output 8

17.7.12.5 Settings
PID-3790-SETTINGS v4

Table 661: I103USRCMD Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type (1-255)
PulseMode Steady - - Pulsed Pulse mode
Pulsed
PulseLength 0.200 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.400 Pulse length
InfNo_1 1 - 255 - 1 1 Information number for output 1
(1-255)
InfNo_2 1 - 255 - 1 2 Information number for output 2
(1-255)
InfNo_3 1 - 255 - 1 3 Information number for output 3
(1-255)
InfNo_4 1 - 255 - 1 4 Information number for output 4
(1-255)
InfNo_5 1 - 255 - 1 5 Information number for output 5
(1-255)
InfNo_6 1 - 255 - 1 6 Information number for output 6
(1-255)
InfNo_7 1 - 255 - 1 7 Information number for output 7
(1-255)
InfNo_8 1 - 255 - 1 8 Information number for output 8
(1-255)

737
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Station communication

17.7.13 Function commands generic for IEC 60870-5-103 I103GENCMD

17.7.13.1 Functionality GUID-729E9AFD-0468-4BBD-B54A-A6CDCC68A9B2 v3

I103GENCMD is used for transmitting generic commands over IEC 60870-5-103. The function
has two outputs signals CMD_OFF and CMD_ON that can be used to implement double-point
command schemes.

The I103GENCMD component can be configured as either 2 pulsed ON/OFF or 2 steady

ON/OFF outputs. The ON output is pulsed with a command with value 2, while the OFF output
is pulsed with a command value 1. If in steady mode is ON asserted and OFF deasserted with
command 2 and vice versa with command 1. Steady mode is selected by setting
PulseLength=0. The I103GENCMD is retained, and a command in steady mode will be reissued
on restart.

17.7.13.2 Identification
GUID-1933A30C-5214-4116-8CD3-91BD975FACED v1

Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

name identification device number
Function commands generic for IEC I103GENCMD - -
60870-5-103

17.7.13.3 Function block GUID-6EC8453E-0D00-4720-95A6-156C41CA46BB v1

I103GENCMD
BLOCK ^CMD_OFF
^CMD_ON

IEC10000285-1-en.vsd
IEC10000285 V1 EN-US

Figure 407: I103GENCMD function block

17.7.13.4 Signals
PID-3970-INPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 662: I103GENCMD Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of command

PID-3970-OUTPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 663: I103GENCMD Output signals

Name Type Description
CMD_OFF BOOLEAN Command output OFF
CMD_ON BOOLEAN Command output ON

738
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 17
Station communication

17.7.13.5 Settings
PID-3970-SETTINGS v4

Table 664: I103GENCMD Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type (1-255)
PulseLength 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.400 Pulse length
InfNo 1 - 255 - 1 1 Information number for command
output (1-255)

17.7.14 IED commands with position and select for IEC 60870-5-103
I103POSCMD

17.7.14.1 Functionality GUID-1E40B94D-B6A6-42F0-8757-A47B8A3FA3CD v8

I103POSCMD is a transceiver function that monitors activity on its input signals and interprets
any state transition into commands then sent over an established IEC 60870-5-103 link.
Additionally, it listens for general interrogation (GI) requests and replies to those with a GI
response message with the current state of each connected input.

Input POSITION is a double-indication signal, and it is GI enabled. This means that any state
transition, that is to ON, OFF, intermediate and faulty, is reported spontaneously. However,
the intermediate and faulty states may be suppressed by setting the Report Intermediate
Position = Off. See the settings for RS485 and optical serial communication for more
information.

Input SELECT is a single-indication signal, and it is also GI enabled. State transitions to ON and
OFF are reported spontaneously.

When input BLOCK is ON, the function will ignore GI requests and cease all monitoring activity.
Consequently, no transitions will be detected.

The I103POSCMD function is also equipped with three additional commands: Select, Operate
and Cancel. These are hidden in ACT and respond only to the base INF+1, INF+2 and INF+3
respectively. The base INF (Information Number) parameter is an IEC 60870-5-103 identifier
that associates a function in a 103 Master (such as Scada) with its equivalent in the IED.

17.7.14.2 Identification
GUID-ABF81C27-4605-4A15-9CF5-77FF82DE8747 v1

Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

name identification device number
IED commands with position and I103POSCMD - -
select for IEC 60870-5-103

17.7.14.3 Function block GUID-3A31C1F2-1FB5-4DB0-A698-AD3F55738DB1 v1

I103POSCMD
BLOCK
POSITION
SELECT

IEC10000286-1-en.vsd
IEC10000286 V1 EN-US

Figure 408: I103POSCMD function block

739
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Station communication

17.7.14.4 Signals
PID-3971-INPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 665: I103POSCMD Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of command
POSITION INTEGER 0 Position of controllable object
SELECT BOOLEAN 0 Select of controllable object

17.7.14.5 Settings
PID-6597-SETTINGS v4

Table 666: I103POSCMD Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type
InfNo 160 - 236 - 4 160 Information number for command
output

17.7.15 IED commands with position for IEC 60870-5-103

I103POSCMDV

17.7.15.1 Functionality GUID-CF04D9AC-40BE-46A3-A418-77204D2B0F27 v3

I103POSCMDV is a transceiver function that monitors activity on its input signals and
interprets any state transition into commands sent over an established IEC 60870-5-103 link.
Additionally, it listens for general interrogation (GI) requests, and replies to those with a GI
response message with the current state of each connected input.

Input POSITION is a double-indication signal, and it is GI enabled. This means that any state
transition, that is to ON, OFF, intermediate and faulty, is reported spontaneously. However,
the intermediate and faulty states may be suppressed by setting the Report Intermediate
Position = Off. See the settings for RS485 and optical serial communication for more
information.

When input BLOCK is ON, the function ignores GI requests and ceases all monitoring activity.
Consequently, no transitions will be detected.

17.7.15.2 Identification
GUID-2249B679-03E4-43CC-B690-916246FE6A31 v1

Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

name identification device number
IED direct commands with position I103POSCMDV - -
for IEC 60870-5-103

740
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 17
Station communication

17.7.15.3 Function block GUID-031C0F49-BEBD-40FE-A33F-18F1D94BB4B0 v1

I103POSCMDV
BLOCK
POSITION
IEC15000081-2-en.vsdx

IEC15000081 V2 EN-US

Figure 409: I103POSCMDV function block

17.7.15.4 Signals
PID-6578-INPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 667: I103POSCMDV Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of command
POSITION INTEGER 0 Position of controllable object

17.7.15.5 Settings
PID-6578-SETTINGS v5

Table 668: I103POSCMDV Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type
InfNo 160 - 209 - 1 160 Information number for command
output

17.7.16 Operation principle IP14407-1 v3

17.7.16.1 General M11874-3 v5

IEC 60870-5-103 is an unbalanced (master-slave) protocol for coded-bit serial communication

exchanging information with a control system, and with a data transfer rate up to 38400 bit/s.
In IEC terminology, a primary station is a master and a secondary station is a slave. The
communication is based on a point-to-point principle. The master must have software that
can interpret IEC 60870-5-103 communication messages.

Introduction to IEC 60870–5–103 protocol M11874-6 v3

IEC 60870-5-103 protocol functionality consists of the following functions:

• Event handling
• Report of analog service values (measurements)
• Fault location
• Command handling

741
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Station communication

• Autorecloser ON/OFF
• Teleprotection ON/OFF
• Protection ON/OFF
• LED reset
• Characteristics 1 - 4 (Setting groups)
• File transfer (disturbance files)
• Time synchronization

For detailed information about IEC 60870-5-103, refer to the IEC 60870 standard part 5:
Transmission protocols, and to the section 103: Companion standard for the informative
interface of protection equipment.

IEC 60870-5-103 vendor specific implementation M11874-23 v4

The signal and setting tables specify the information types supported by the IEDs with the
communication protocol IEC 60870-5-103 implemented.

The information types are supported when corresponding functions are included in the
protection and control IED.

Be aware of that different cycle times for function blocks must be considered
to ensure correct time stamping.

Commands in control direction M11874-27 v1

Commands in control direction, I103IEDCMD M11874-29 v6
Command block in control direction with defined output signals.

Number of instances: 1

Function type is selected with parameter FunctionType.

Information number is defined for each output signals.

Table 669: I103IEDCMD supported indications

INF Description
19 LED Reset
23 Activate setting group 1
24 Activate setting group 2
25 Activate setting group 3
26 Activate setting group 4

Function commands in control direction, pre-defined I103CMD M11874-53 v6

Function command block in control direction with defined output signals.

Number of instances: 1

Function type is selected with parameter FunctionType.

Information number is defined for each output signals.

742
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 17
Station communication

Table 670: Pre-defined I103CMD supported indications

INF Description
16 Auto-recloser on/off
17 Teleprotection on/off
18 Protection on/off

Function commands in control direction, user-defined, I103USRCMD M11874-72 v6

Function command blocks in control direction with user-defined output signals.

Number of instances: 4

Function type for each function block instance in private range is selected with parameter
FunctionType.

Information number must be selected for each output signal. Default values are 1 - 8.

Table 671: I103USRCMD supported indications

INF 1) Description
1 Output signal 01
2 Output signal 02
3 Output signal 03
4 Output signal 04
5 Output signal 05
6 Output signal 06
7 Output signal 07
8 Output signal 08

1) User defined information number

Status M11874-107 v1
Terminal status indications in monitor direction, I103IED M11874-109 v7
Indication block for status in monitor direction with defined IED functions.

Number of instances: 1

Function type is selected with parameter FunctionType.

Information number is defined for each input signals.

Table 672: I103IED supported functions

INF Description
19 LED reset
21 TestMode
22 Local Parameter setting
23 Setting group 1 active
24 Setting group 2 active
25 Setting group 3 active
26 Setting group 4 active

Function status indications in monitor direction, user-defined, I103USRDEF M11874-137 v7

743
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Station communication

Function indication block in monitor direction with user-defined input signals.

Number of instances: 20

Function type is selected with parameter FunctionType.

Information number is required for each input signal.

Table 673: I103USRDEF Information number default values

INF Description GI TYP COT
11) Input signal 01 x/- 1/2 1,7,(9)

2* Input signal 02 x/- 1/2 1,7,(9)

3* Input signal 03 x/- 1/2 1,7,(9)
4* Input signal 04 x/- 1/2 1,7,(9)
5* Input signal 05 x/- 1/2 1,7,(9)
6* Input signal 06 x/- 1/2 1,7,(9)
7* Input signal 07 x/- 1/2 1,7,(9)
8* Input signal 08 x/- 1/2 1,7,(9)

1) * User defined information number

Supervision indications in monitor direction, I103SUPERV M11874-171 v7

Indication block for supervision in monitor direction with defined functions.

Number of instances: 1

Function type is selected with parameter FunctionType.

Information number is defined for output signals.

Table 674: I103SUPERV supported functions

INF Description TYP GI COT
32 Measurand supervision I 1 Y 1,7,9
33 Measurand supervision U 1 Y 1,7,9
37 I>>back-up operation 1 Y 1,7,9
38 VT fuse failure 1 Y 1,7,9
46 Group warning 1 Y 1,7,9
47 Group alarm 1 Y 1,7,9

Earth fault indications in monitor direction, I103EF M11874-199 v8

Indication block for earth fault in monitor direction with defined functions.

Number of instances: 1

Function type is selected with parameter FunctionType.

Information number is defined for each output signal.

Table 675: I103EF supported indications

INF Description
51 Earth fault forward
52 Earth fault reverse

744
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 17
Station communication

Autorecloser indications in monitor direction, I103AR M11874-363 v6

Indication block for autorecloser in monitor direction with defined functions.

Number of instances: 1

Function type is selected with parameter FunctionType.

Information number is defined for each output signal.

Table 676: I103AR supported indications

INF Description
16 Autorecloser active
128 CB on by Autorecloser
130 Autorecloser blocked

Function status fault protection for IEC 60870-5-103, I103FLTPROT GUID-E9DF9410-F570-4F85-9063-C76D1D4A0668 v5

Number of instances: 1

Function type is selected with parameter FunctionType.

Information number is defined for each input signals.

Table 677: I103FLTPROT supported functions

INF Description TYP GI COT
64 Start phase L1 2 Y 1,7,9
65 Start phase L2 2 Y 1,7,9
66 Start phase L3 2 Y 1,7,9
67 Start residual current IN 2 Y 1,7,9
68 Trip general 2 N 1,7
69 Trip phase L1 2 N 1,7
70 Trip phase L2 2 N 1,7
71 Trip phase L3 2 N 1,7
72 Back up trip I>> 2 N 1,7
73 Fault location in ohm 4 N 1,7
74 Forward/line 2 N 1,7
75 Reverse/busbar 2 N 1,7
76 Signal transmitted 2 N 1,7
77 Signal received 2 N 1,7
78 Zone 1 2 N 1,7
79 Zone 2 2 N 1,7
80 Zone 3 2 N 1,7
81 Zone 4 2 N 1,7
82 Zone 5 2 N 1,7
84 Start general 2 Y 1,7,9
85 Breaker failure 2 N 1,7
86 Trip measuring system phase 2 N 1,7
L1
Table continues on next page

745
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Station communication

INF Description TYP GI COT

87 Trip measuring system phase 2 N 1,7
L2
88 Trip measuring system phase 2 N 1,7
L3
89 Trip measuring system neutral 2 N 1,7
N
90 Over current trip, stage low 2 N 1,7
91 Over current trip, stage high 2 N 1,7
92 Earth-fault trip, stage low 2 N 1,7
93 Earth-fault trip, stage high 2 N 1,7

Measurands M11874-382 v2
Function blocks in monitor direction for input measurands. Typically connected to monitoring
function, for example to power measurement CVMMXN.

Measurands in public range, I103MEAS M11874-385 v8

Number of instances: 1

The IED reports all valid measuring types depending on connected signals.

Upper limit for measured currents, active/reactive-power is 2.4 times rated value.

Upper limit for measured voltages and frequency is 1.2 times rated value.

The upper limit is the maximum value that can be encoded into the ASDU (Application Service
Data Unit). Any value higher than this value will be tagged as OVERFLOW. The factors 1.2 and
2.4 are taken from the 103 standard and require that a rated value to use as base exists, and
then use 1.2 or 2.4 times <rated> as maxVal. You can use 2.4 times rated as maxVal, but as
there is no way to propagate value to client, the use of a scale factor on <rated> does not
make much difference.

You can configure client:client-scaled-max ::= 1.2 * <rated> or client-scaled-

max ::= 1.0 * <maxVal>

If the client has a hard-coded gain of 1.2 * <rated> then client-scaled-max ::= 1.2 times
<maxVal>/1.2

Resolution is <maxVal> / 4095 and hence the lowest possible maxVal yields the best accuracy.

Table 678: I103MEAS supported indications

INF Description
148 IL1
144, 145, IL2
146, 148
148 IL3
147 IN, Neutral current
148 UL1
148 UL2
148 UL3
145, 146 UL1-UL2
147 UN, Neutral voltage
Table continues on next page

746
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 17
Station communication

INF Description
146, 148 P, active power
146, 148 Q, reactive power
148 f, frequency

Measurands in private range, I103MEASUSR M11874-431 v5

Number of instances: 3

Function type parameter for each block in private range.

Information number must be selected for measurands.

Table 679: I103MEASUSR supported indications

INF FUN GI TYP COT Description
*1) *2) No, polled *3) 2,7 Meas1
with CL2
* * No, polled * 2,7 Meas2
with CL2
* * No, polled * 2,7 Meas3
with CL2
* * No, polled * 2,7 Meas4
with CL2
* * No, polled * 2,7 Meas5
with CL2
* * No, polled * 2,7 Meas6
with CL2
* * No, polled * 2,7 Meas7
with CL2
* * No, polled * 2,7 Meas8
with CL2
* * No, polled * 2,7 Meas9
with CL2

1) * User defined information value (PARAM.3)

2) * User defined information value (PARAM.2)
3) 9 = Measurands II, Format = Measurand II (7.3.1.8 in IEC 60870-5-103:1997), semantics per IE is defined by
semantics of connected source.

<Number of information elements> is defined by index of first input not connected.

Example: Input1, Input2, and Input4 are connected, Input3 is not connected.

<Number of information elements> will be 3 (Input3 NOT connected) -1 = 2, that is, only Input1
and Input2 will be transmitted.

Disturbance recordings M11874-467 v7

The following elements are used in the ASDUs (Application Service Data Units) defined in the
standard.

Analog signals, 40-channels: the channel number for each channel has to be specified.
Channels used in the public range are 1 to 8 and with:

• IL1 connected to channel 1 on disturbance function block A1RADR

• IL2 connected to channel 2 on disturbance function block A1RADR
• IL3 connected to channel 3 on disturbance function block A1RADR
• IN connected to channel 4 on disturbance function block A1RADR

747
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Station communication

• UL1E connected to channel 5 on disturbance function block A1RADR

• UL2E connected to channel 6 on disturbance function block A1RADR
• UL3E connected to channel 7 on disturbance function block A1RADR
• UEN connected to channel 8 on disturbance function block A1RADR

Channel number used for the remaining 32 analog signals are numbers in the private range 64
to 95.

Binary signals, 128-channels: for each channel the user can specify a FUNCTION TYPE and an
INFORMATION NUMBER.
M11874-629 v7
Disturbance upload

All analog and binary signals that are recorded with disturbance recorder can be reported to
the master. The last eight disturbances that are recorded are available for transfer to the
master. A successfully transferred disturbance (acknowledged by the master) will not be
reported to the master again.

When a new disturbance is recorded by the IED a list of available recorded disturbances will be
sent to the master, an updated list of available disturbances can be sent whenever something
has happened to disturbances in this list. For example, when a disturbance is deleted (by other
client, for example, SPA) or when a new disturbance has been recorded or when the master has
uploaded a disturbance.

Deviations from the standard

Information sent in the disturbance upload is specified by the standard; however, some of the
information are adapted to information available in disturbance recorder in the IED series.

This section describes all data that is not exactly as specified in the standard.

ASDU23

In ‘list of recorded disturbances’ (ASDU23) an information element named SOF (status of fault)
exists. This information element consists of 4 bits and indicates whether:

• Bit TP: the protection equipment has tripped during the fault
• Bit TM: the disturbance data are currently being transmitted
• Bit TEST: the disturbance data have been recorded during normal operation or test mode.
• Bit OTEV: the disturbance data recording has been initiated by another event than start

The only information that is easily available is test-mode status. The other information is
always set (hard coded) to:

TP Recorded fault with trip. [1]

TM Disturbance data waiting for transmission [0]
OTEV Disturbance data initiated by other events [1]

Another information element in ASDU23 is the FAN (fault number). According to the standard
this is a number that is incremented when a protection function takes action. FAN is equal to
disturbance number, which is incremented for each disturbance.

ASDU26 / ASDU31

When a disturbance has been selected by the master by sending ASDU24, the protection
equipment answers by sending ASDU26, which contains an information element named NOF
(number of grid faults). This number must indicate fault number in the power system,that is, a

748
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 17
Station communication

fault in the power system with several trip and auto-reclosing has the same NOF (while the
FAN must be incremented). NOF is just as FAN, equal to disturbance number.

Interoperability, physical layer M11874-482 v3

Supported
Electrical Interface
EIA RS-485 Yes
number of loads 32
Optical interface
glass fibre Yes
plastic fibre
Transmission speed
9600 bit/s Yes
19200 bit/s Yes
Link Layer
DFC-bit used Yes
Connectors
connector F-SMA No
connector BFOC/2.5 Yes

Interoperability, application layer M11874-524 v3

Supported
Selection of standard ASDUs in monitoring direction
ASDU Yes
1 Time-tagged message Yes
2 Time-tagged message with rel. time Yes
3 Measurands I Yes
4 Time-tagged message with rel. time Yes
5 Identification Yes
6 Time synchronization Yes
8 End of general interrogation Yes
9 Measurands II Yes
10 Generic data No
11 Generic identification No
23 List of recorded disturbances Yes
26 Ready for transm. of disturbance data Yes
27 Ready for transm. of a channel Yes
28 Ready for transm of tags Yes
29 Transmission of tags Yes
30 Transmission fo disturbance data Yes
31 End of transmission Yes
Selection of standard ASDUs in control direction
ASDU Yes
Table continues on next page

749
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Station communication

Supported
6 Time synchronization Yes
7 General interrogation Yes
10 Generic data No
20 General command Yes
21 Generic command Yes
24 Order for disturbance data transmission Yes
25 Acknowledgement for distance data Yes
transmission
Selection of basic application functions
Test mode No
Blocking of monitoring direction Yes
Disturbance data Yes
Private data Yes
Generic services No

17.7.16.2 Communication ports M11874-626 v3

The serial communication module (SLM) is used for SPA/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP and LON
communication. This module is a mezzanine module, and is placed assembled on the
Numerical module (NUM). The serial communication module can have connectors for two
plastic fibre cables (snap-in) or two glass fibre cables (ST, bayonet) or a combination of plastic
and glass fibre. Three different types are available depending on type of fibre.

The incoming optical fibre is connected to the RX receiver input, and the outgoing optical fibre
to the TX transmitter output. When the fibre optic cables are laid out, pay special attention to
the instructions concerning the handling and connection of the optical fibres. The module is
identified with a number on the label on the module.

17.7.17 Technical data IP14417-1 v1

M11921-1 v4

Table 680: IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol

Function Value
Protocol IEC 60870-5-103
Communication speed 9600, 19200 Bd

17.8 Horizontal communication via GOOSE for interlocking

GOOSEINTLKRCV SEMOD173197-1 v2

17.8.1 Functionality GUID-92ECE152-892C-4214-95DE-B92718689434 v2

GOOSE communication can be used for exchanging information between IEDs via the IEC
61850-8-1 station communication bus. This is typically used for sending apparatus position
indications for interlocking or reservation signals for 1-of-n control. GOOSE can also be used to
exchange any boolean, integer, double point and analog measured values between IEDs.

750
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 17
Station communication

17.8.2 Function block SEMOD173210-4 v5

GOOSEINTLKRCV
BLOCK ^RESREQ
^RESGRANT
^APP1_OP
^APP1_CL
APP1VAL
^APP2_OP
^APP2_CL
APP2VAL
^APP3_OP
^APP3_CL
APP3VAL
^APP4_OP
^APP4_CL
APP4VAL
^APP5_OP
^APP5_CL
APP5VAL
^APP6_OP
^APP6_CL
APP6VAL
^APP7_OP
^APP7_CL
APP7VAL
^APP8_OP
^APP8_CL
APP8VAL
^APP9_OP
^APP9_CL
APP9VAL
^APP10_OP
^APP10_CL
APP10VAL
^APP11_OP
^APP11_CL
APP11VAL
^APP12_OP
^APP12_CL
APP12VAL
^APP13_OP
^APP13_CL
APP13VAL
^APP14_OP
^APP14_CL
APP14VAL
^APP15_OP
^APP15_CL
APP15VAL
COMMVALID
TEST

IEC07000048.vsd

IEC07000048 V3 EN-US

Figure 410: GOOSEINTLKRCV function block

17.8.3 Signals SEMOD173205-1 v2

GUID-2DC54788-86AF-4B4B-8E57-A89E30F0C433 v1

Except for the BLOCK input, the rest of the inputs of this GOOSE function block
are used for GOOSE connections. These connections are visible and possible to
make only if Easy GOOSE engineering is enabled. For instructions on how to
enable Easy GOOSE engineering in PCM600, refer to the Engineering Manual.

PID-3784-INPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 681: GOOSEINTLKRCV Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of output signals

751
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Station communication

PID-3784-OUTPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 682: GOOSEINTLKRCV Output signals

Name Type Description
RESREQ BOOLEAN Reservation request
RESGRANT BOOLEAN Reservation granted
APP1_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 1 position is open
APP1_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 1 position is closed
APP1VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 1 position is valid
APP2_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 2 position is open
APP2_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 2 position is closed
APP2VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 2 position is valid
APP3_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 3 position is open
APP3_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 3 position is closed
APP3VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 3 position is valid
APP4_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 4 position is open
APP4_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 4 position is closed
APP4VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 4 position is valid
APP5_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 5 position is open
APP5_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 5 position is closed
APP5VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 5 position is valid
APP6_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 6 position is open
APP6_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 6 position is closed
APP6VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 6 position is valid
APP7_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 7 position is open
APP7_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 7 position is closed
APP7VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 7 position is valid
APP8_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 8 position is open
APP8_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 8 position is closed
APP8VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 8 position is valid
APP9_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 9 position is open
APP9_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 9 position is closed
APP9VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 9 position is valid
APP10_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 10 position is open
APP10_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 10 position is closed
APP10VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 10 position is valid
APP11_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 11 position is open
APP11_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 11 position is closed
APP11VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 11 position is valid
APP12_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 12 position is open
APP12_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 12 position is closed
APP12VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 12 position is valid
APP13_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 13 position is open
APP13_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 13 position is closed
Table continues on next page

752
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 17
Station communication

Name Type Description

APP13VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 13 position is valid
APP14_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 14 position is open
APP14_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 14 position is closed
APP14VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 14 position is valid
APP15_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 15 position is open
APP15_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 15 position is closed
APP15VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 15 position is valid
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication Valid
TEST BOOLEAN Test Output

17.8.4 Settings SEMOD173207-1 v2

PID-3784-SETTINGS v4

Table 683: GOOSEINTLKRCV Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On

17.8.5 Operation principle GUID-7275CFBA-F1FE-496A-A9A1-724139DB2081 v1

The APPxVAL output will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data.

The COMMVALID output will become LOW when the sending IED is under total failure
condition and the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not happen.

The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode.

Data Value Data Valid Comm Valid Test

Incoming data with q=Normal Updated 1 1 0
Incoming data with q=oldData 0 0 1 0
Incoming data with q=Invalid 0 0 1 0
Incoming data with q=test 0 0 1 1
Incoming data with q=test+oldData 0 0 1 1

Receiver in block 0 0 1 0
Receiver in block and communication 0 0 0 0
error
Receiver in test mode and incoming Updated 1 1 0
data with q= Normal
Receiver in test mode and incoming Updated 1 1 1
data with q= Test
Communication Error 0 0 0 0

753
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Station communication

At least one of the inputs of this GOOSE block must be linked either in SMT by
means of a cross or in ACT by means of a GOOSE connection (if easy GOOSE
engineering is enabled) to receive any data. Only those outputs whose source
input is linked/connected will be updated.

The implementation for IEC 61850 quality data handling is restricted to a

simple level. If quality data validity is GOOD then the APPxVAL output will be
HIGH. If quality data validity is INVALID, QUESTIONABLE, OVERFLOW, FAILURE
or OLD DATA then the APPxVAL output will be LOW.

17.9 GOOSE binary receive GOOSEBINRCV SEMOD173158-1 v3

17.9.1 Function block SEMOD173175-4 v2

GOOSEBINRCV
BLOCK ^OUT1
DVALID1
^OUT2
DVALID2
^OUT3
DVALID3
^OUT4
DVALID4
^OUT5
DVALID5
^OUT6
DVALID6
^OUT7
DVALID7
^OUT8
DVALID8
^OUT9
DVALID9
^OUT10
DVALID10
^OUT11
DVALID11
^OUT12
DVALID12
^OUT13
DVALID13
^OUT14
DVALID14
^OUT15
DVALID15
^OUT16
DVALID16
COMMVALID
TEST

IEC07000047.vsd
IEC07000047 V3 EN-US

Figure 411: GOOSEBINRCV function block

17.9.2 Signals SEMOD173166-1 v2

PID-3782-INPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 684: GOOSEBINRCV Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of output signals

754
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 17
Station communication

PID-3782-OUTPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 685: GOOSEBINRCV Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT1 BOOLEAN Binary output 1
DVALID1 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 1
OUT2 BOOLEAN Binary output 2
DVALID2 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 2
OUT3 BOOLEAN Binary output 3
DVALID3 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 3
OUT4 BOOLEAN Binary output 4
DVALID4 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 4
OUT5 BOOLEAN Binary output 5
DVALID5 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 5
OUT6 BOOLEAN Binary output 6
DVALID6 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 6
OUT7 BOOLEAN Binary output 7
DVALID7 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 7
OUT8 BOOLEAN Binary output 8
DVALID8 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 8
OUT9 BOOLEAN Binary output 9
DVALID9 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 9
OUT10 BOOLEAN Binary output 10
DVALID10 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 10
OUT11 BOOLEAN Binary output 11
DVALID11 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 11
OUT12 BOOLEAN Binary output 12
DVALID12 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 12
OUT13 BOOLEAN Binary output 13
DVALID13 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 13
OUT14 BOOLEAN Binary output 14
DVALID14 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 14
OUT15 BOOLEAN Binary output 15
DVALID15 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 15
OUT16 BOOLEAN Binary output 16
DVALID16 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 16
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication Valid
TEST BOOLEAN Test Output

17.9.3 Settings SEMOD173168-1 v2

PID-3782-SETTINGS v4

Table 686: GOOSEBINRCV Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On

755
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Station communication

17.9.4 Operation principle GUID-950F2501-9183-43C0-A193-7D15124F6CCE v2

The DVALIDx output will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data.

The COMMVALID output will become LOW when the sending IED is under total failure
condition and the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not happen.

The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode.

Data Value Data Valid Comm Valid Test

Incoming data with q=Normal Updated 1 1 0
Incoming data with q=oldData 1 0 1 0
Incoming data with q=Invalid 0 0 1 0
Incoming data with q=test 0 0 1 1
Incoming data with q=test+oldData 0 0 1 1

Receiver in block 0 0 1 0
Receiver in block and communication 0 0 0 0
error
Receiver in test mode and incoming Updated 1 1 0
data with q= Normal
Receiver in test mode and incoming Updated 1 1 1
data with q= Test
Communication Error 0 0 0 0

At least one of the inputs of this GOOSE block must be linked either in SMT by
means of a cross or in ACT by means of a GOOSE connection (if easy GOOSE
engineering is enabled) to receive any data. Only those outputs whose source
input is linked/connected will be updated.

The implementation for IEC 61850 quality data handling is restricted to a

simple level. If quality data validity is GOOD then the DVALIDx output will be
HIGH. If quality data validity is INVALID, QUESTIONABLE, OVERFLOW, FAILURE
or OLD DATA then the DVALIDx output will be LOW.

17.10 GOOSE function block to receive a double point value

GOOSEDPRCV

17.10.1 Identification
GUID-8C11DB9A-7844-4E1F-A6BB-D97ECE350FC1 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
GOOSE function block to receive a GOOSEDPRCV - -
double point value

756
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 17
Station communication

17.10.2 Functionality GUID-1D2DBC22-4F04-4809-B34E-8939D442C185 v3

GOOSEDPRCV is used to receive a double point value using IEC 61850 protocol via GOOSE.

17.10.3 Function block GUID-ED277880-FB5D-4630-872F-9F343D449FFE v1

GOOSEDPRCV
BLOCK ^DPOUT
DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST

IEC10000249-1-en.vsd
IEC10000249 V1 EN-US

Figure 412: GOOSEDPRCV function block

17.10.4 Signals
PID-3981-INPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 687: GOOSEDPRCV Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

PID-3981-OUTPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 688: GOOSEDPRCV Output signals

Name Type Description
DPOUT INTEGER Double point output
DATAVALID BOOLEAN Data valid for double point output
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication valid for double point output
TEST BOOLEAN Test output

17.10.5 Settings
PID-3981-SETTINGS v4

Table 689: GOOSEDPRCV Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On

17.10.6 Operation principle GUID-82A1C8A2-827A-40EF-8E58-F573E29E468E v3

The DATAVALID output will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data.

The COMMVALID output will become LOW when the sending IED is under total failure
condition and the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not happen.

The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode.

757
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Station communication

The input of this GOOSE block must be linked in SMT by means of a cross to
receive the double point values.

The implementation for IEC 61850 quality data handling is restricted to a

simple level. If quality data validity is GOOD then the DATAVALID output will be
HIGH. If quality data validity is INVALID, QUESTIONABLE, OVERFLOW, FAILURE
or OLD DATA then the DATAVALID output will be LOW.

17.11 GOOSE function block to receive an integer value

GOOSEINTRCV

17.11.1 Identification
GUID-93A1E81B-1DE8-483A-BB3B-DB771EE66DC1 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
GOOSE function block to receive an GOOSEINTRCV - -
integer value

17.11.2 Functionality GUID-27B1ED7A-C8E8-499E-89C1-C656FB0337F8 v3

GOOSEINTRCV is used to receive an integer value using IEC 61850 protocol via GOOSE.

17.11.3 Function block GUID-56F0C9F7-98F3-4091-B071-53CA5074DC8F v1

GOOSEINTRCV
BLOCK ^INTOUT
DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST

IEC10000250-1-en.vsd
IEC10000250 V1 EN-US

Figure 413: GOOSEINTRCV function block

17.11.4 Signals
PID-2529-INPUTSIGNALS v18

Table 690: GOOSEINTRCV Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

758
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 17
Station communication

PID-2529-OUTPUTSIGNALS v18

Table 691: GOOSEINTRCV Output signals

Name Type Description
INTOUT INTEGER Integer output
DATAVALID BOOLEAN Data valid for integer output
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication valid for integer output
TEST BOOLEAN Test output

17.11.5 Settings
PID-2529-SETTINGS v18

Table 692: GOOSEINTRCV Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On

17.11.6 Operation principle GUID-5BBDF772-3B3E-4F7C-ABE9-18CE3C1A2E2D v3

The DATAVALID output will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data.

The COMMVALID output will become LOW when the sending IED is under total failure
condition and the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not happen.

The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode.

The input of this GOOSE block must be linked in SMT by means of a cross to
receive the integer values.

The implementation for IEC 61850 quality data handling is restricted to a

simple level. If quality data validity is GOOD then the DATAVALID output will be
HIGH. If quality data validity is INVALID, QUESTIONABLE, OVERFLOW, FAILURE
or OLD DATA then the DATAVALID output will be LOW.

17.12 GOOSE function block to receive a measurand value

GOOSEMVRCV

17.12.1 Identification
GUID-B1FFBE08-C823-4A58-9FE0-A9A20DA6BB44 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
GOOSE function block to receive a GOOSEMVRCV - -
measurand value

759
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Station communication

17.12.2 Functionality GUID-759CB016-2B4D-4D98-82E1-592044983D53 v3

GOOSEMVRCV is used to receive measured value using IEC 61850 protocol via GOOSE.

17.12.3 Function block GUID-A0B333CC-AEF4-40EA-B152-364648AB78D3 v1

GOOSEMVRCV
BLOCK ^MVOUT
DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST

IEC10000251-1-en.vsd
IEC10000251 V1 EN-US

Figure 414: GOOSEMVRCV function block

17.12.4 Signals
PID-2530-INPUTSIGNALS v18

Table 693: GOOSEMVRCV Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

PID-2530-OUTPUTSIGNALS v18

Table 694: GOOSEMVRCV Output signals

Name Type Description
MVOUT REAL Measurand value output
DATAVALID BOOLEAN Data valid for measurand value output
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication valid for measurand value output
TEST BOOLEAN Test output

17.12.5 Settings
PID-2530-SETTINGS v18

Table 695: GOOSEMVRCV Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On

17.12.6 Operation principle GUID-7B24A6D3-2E5F-4961-A0A6-86436373809E v4

The DATAVALID output will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data.

The COMMVALID output will become LOW when the sending IED is under total failure
condition and the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not happen.

The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode.

760
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 17
Station communication

The input of this GOOSE block must be linked in SMT by means of a cross to
receive the measured value.

The implementation for IEC 61850 quality data handling is restricted to a

simple level. If quality data validity is GOOD then the DATAVALID output will be
HIGH. If quality data validity is INVALID, QUESTIONABLE, OVERFLOW, FAILURE
or OLD DATA then the DATAVALID output will be LOW.

17.13 GOOSE function block to receive a single point value

GOOSESPRCV

17.13.1 Identification
GUID-F2B30A70-842E-435E-8FAB-B1E58B9C0164 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
GOOSE function block to receive a GOOSESPRCV - -
single point value

17.13.2 Functionality GUID-0C99A106-C131-45D3-9B81-6B188E35EB34 v3

GOOSESPRCV is used to receive a single point value using IEC 61850 protocol via GOOSE.

17.13.3 Function block GUID-A414F31A-323F-4684-BADA-46F9C5E2B0E8 v1

GOOSESPRCV
BLOCK ^SPOUT
DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST

IEC10000248-1-en.vsd
IEC10000248 V1 EN-US

Figure 415: GOOSESPRCV function block

17.13.4 Signals
PID-2527-INPUTSIGNALS v18

Table 696: GOOSESPRCV Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

761
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Station communication

PID-2527-OUTPUTSIGNALS v18

Table 697: GOOSESPRCV Output signals

Name Type Description
SPOUT BOOLEAN Single point output
DATAVALID BOOLEAN Data valid for single point output
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication valid for single point output
TEST BOOLEAN Test output

17.13.5 Settings
PID-2527-SETTINGS v18

Table 698: GOOSESPRCV Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On

17.13.6 Operation principle GUID-0E25A3FB-41BD-4EFE-9CA0-1262B9CD14CD v3

The DATAVALID output will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data.

The COMMVALID output will become LOW when the sending IED is under total failure
condition and the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not happen.

The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode.

The input of this GOOSE block must be linked in SMT by means of a cross to
receive the binary single point values.

The implementation for IEC 61850 quality data handling is restricted to a

simple level. If quality data validity is GOOD then the DATAVALID output will be
HIGH. If quality data validity is INVALID, QUESTIONABLE, OVERFLOW, FAILURE
or OLD DATA then the DATAVALID output will be LOW.

762
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 17
Station communication

17.14 GOOSE VCTR configuration for send and receive

GOOSEVCTRCONF

17.14.1 Identification

17.14.2 Settings

17.15 GOOSE voltage control receiving block

GOOSEVCTRRCV

17.15.1 Identification

17.15.2 Signals

17.16 MULTICMDRCV and MULTICMDSND SEMOD119881-1 v3

GUID-1A6E066C-6399-4D37-8CA5-3074537E48B2 v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Multiple command and receive MULTICMDRCV - -
Multiple command and send MULTICMDSND - -

17.16.1 Functionality M14790-3 v5

The IED provides two function blocks enabling several IEDs to send and receive signals via the
interbay bus. The sending function block, MULTICMDSND, takes 16 binary inputs. LON enables
these to be transmitted to the equivalent receiving function block, MULTICMDRCV, which has
16 binary outputs.

17.16.2 Design SEMOD119958-1 v1

17.16.2.1 General M14792-3 v3

The common behavior for all 16 outputs of the MULTICMDRCV is set to either of two modes:
Steady or Pulse.

• 1 = Steady: This mode simply forwards the received signals to the binary outputs.
• 2 = Pulse: When a received signal transitions from 0 (zero) to 1 (one), a pulse with a
duration of exactly one execution cycle is triggered on the corresponding binary output.
This means that no connected function block may have a cycle time that is higher than the
execution cycle time of the particular MULTICMDRCV instance.

763
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Station communication

17.16.3 Function block SEMOD119978-1 v1

SEMOD119976-5 v2

MULTICMDRCV
BLOCK ERROR
NEWDATA
OUTPUT1
OUTPUT2
OUTPUT3
OUTPUT4
OUTPUT5
OUTPUT6
OUTPUT7
OUTPUT8
OUTPUT9
OUTPUT10
OUTPUT11
OUTPUT12
OUTPUT13
OUTPUT14
OUTPUT15
OUTPUT16
VALID

IEC06000007-2-en.vsd
IEC06000007 V2 EN-US

Figure 416: MULTICMDRCV function block

SEMOD120009-4 v2

MULTICMDSND
BLOCK ERROR
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16

IEC06000008-2-en.vsd
IEC06000008 V2 EN-US

Figure 417: MULTICMDSND function block

17.16.4 Signals SEMOD119963-1 v2

PID-400-INPUTSIGNALS v9

Table 699: MULTICMDRCV Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

PID-399-INPUTSIGNALS v9

Table 700: MULTICMDSND Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3
Table continues on next page

764
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 17
Station communication

Name Type Default Description

INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6
INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7
INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8
INPUT9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9
INPUT10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10
INPUT11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11
INPUT12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12
INPUT13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13
INPUT14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14
INPUT15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15
INPUT16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16

PID-400-OUTPUTSIGNALS v9

Table 701: MULTICMDRCV Output signals

Name Type Description
ERROR BOOLEAN MultiReceive error
NEWDATA BOOLEAN New data is received
OUTPUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1
OUTPUT2 BOOLEAN Output 2
OUTPUT3 BOOLEAN Output 3
OUTPUT4 BOOLEAN Output 4
OUTPUT5 BOOLEAN Output 5
OUTPUT6 BOOLEAN Output 6
OUTPUT7 BOOLEAN Output 7
OUTPUT8 BOOLEAN Output 8
OUTPUT9 BOOLEAN Output 9
OUTPUT10 BOOLEAN Output 10
OUTPUT11 BOOLEAN Output 11
OUTPUT12 BOOLEAN Output 12
OUTPUT13 BOOLEAN Output 13
OUTPUT14 BOOLEAN Output 14
OUTPUT15 BOOLEAN Output 15
OUTPUT16 BOOLEAN Output 16
VALID BOOLEAN Output data is valid

PID-399-OUTPUTSIGNALS v9

Table 702: MULTICMDSND Output signals

Name Type Description
ERROR BOOLEAN MultiSend error

765
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Station communication

17.16.5 Settings SEMOD119927-1 v2

PID-400-SETTINGS v9

Table 703: MULTICMDRCV Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tMaxCycleTime 0.050 - 200.000 s 0.001 11.000 Maximum cycle time between
receptions of input data
tMinCycleTime 0.000 - 200.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum cycle time between
receptions of input data
Mode Steady - - Steady Mode for output signals
Pulsed
tPulseTime 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Pulse length for multi command
outputs

PID-399-SETTINGS v9

Table 704: MULTICMDSND Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tMaxCycleTime 0.000 - 200.000 s 0.001 5.000 Maximum time interval between
transmission of output data
tMinCycleTime 0.000 - 200.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum time interval between
transmission of output data

17.16.6 Operation principle M14793-3 v3

There are 10 instances of the MULTICMDSND function block. The first two are fast (8 ms cycle
time) while the others are slow (100 ms cycle time). Each instance has 16 binary inputs, to
which 16 independent signals can be connected. Connected signals are sent through
MULTICMDSND to the receiving equivalent, MULTICMDRCV, located on a different IED.

The MULTICMDRCV function block has 16 binary outputs, all controlled through the command
block of one or many MULTICMDSND function blocks. There are 60 instances of the
MULTICMDRCV where the first 12 are fast (8 ms), and the others are slow (100 ms).
Additionally, the MULTICMDRCV has a supervision function, which sets the output connector
"VALID" to 0 (zero) if its block does not receive any data within the time defined by
tMaxCycleTime.

LON connections are established using LON network tool (LNT).

17.17 Security events on protocols SECALARM

17.17.1 Security alarm SECALARM GUID-205B0024-DA06-4369-8707-5E1D2D035995 v2

17.17.1.1 Signals
PID-3430-OUTPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 705: SECALARM Output signals

Name Type Description
EVENTID INTEGER EventId of the generated security event
SEQNUMBER INTEGER Sequence number of the generated security event

766
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 17
Station communication

17.17.1.2 Settings
PID-3430-SETTINGS v5

Table 706: SECALARM Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation On/Off
On

17.18 Activity logging parameters ACTIVLOG

17.18.1 Activity logging ACTIVLOG GUID-BED7C3D6-6BE3-4DAC-84B3-92239E819CC0 v1

ACTIVLOG contains all settings for activity logging.

There can be 6 external log servers to send syslog events to. Each server can be configured
with IP address; IP port number and protocol format. The format can be either syslog (RFC
5424) or Common Event Format (CEF) from ArcSight.

17.18.2 Settings
PID-6583-SETTINGS v4

Table 707: ACTIVLOG Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ExtLogSrv1Type Off - - Off External log server 1 type
SYSLOG UDP/IP
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
ExtLogSrv1Port 1 - 65535 - 1 514 External log server 1 port number
ExtLogSrv1IP 0 - 18 IP 1 127.0.0.1 External log server 1 IP-address
Address
ExtLogSrv2Type Off - - Off External log server 2 type
SYSLOG UDP/IP
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
ExtLogSrv2Port 1 - 65535 - 1 514 External log server 2 port number
ExtLogSrv2IP 0 - 18 IP 1 127.0.0.1 External log server 2 IP-address
Address
ExtLogSrv3Type Off - - Off External log server 3 type
SYSLOG UDP/IP
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
ExtLogSrv3Port 1 - 65535 - 1 514 External log server 3 port number
ExtLogSrv3IP 0 - 18 IP 1 127.0.0.1 External log server 3 IP-address
Address
ExtLogSrv4Type Off - - Off External log server 4 type
SYSLOG UDP/IP
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
ExtLogSrv4Port 1 - 65535 - 1 514 External log server 4 port number
ExtLogSrv4IP 0 - 18 IP 1 127.0.0.1 External log server 4 IP-address
Address
Table continues on next page

767
Technical manual
Section 17 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Station communication

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

ExtLogSrv5Type Off - - Off External log server 5 type
SYSLOG UDP/IP
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
ExtLogSrv5Port 1 - 65535 - 1 514 External log server 5 port number
ExtLogSrv5IP 0 - 18 IP 1 127.0.0.1 External log server 5 IP-address
Address
ExtLogSrv6Type Off - - Off External log server 6 type
SYSLOG UDP/IP
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
ExtLogSrv6Port 1 - 65535 - 1 514 External log server 6 port number
ExtLogSrv6IP 0 - 18 IP 1 127.0.0.1 External log server 6 IP-address
Address

768
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 18
Remote communication

Section 18 Remote communication

18.1 Binary signal transfer IP12423-1 v2

18.1.1 Identification
M14849-1 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Binary signal transfer BinSignReceive - -
Binary signal transfer BinSignTransm - -

18.1.2 Functionality SEMOD52522-4 v8

The remote end data communication is used for the transmission of analog values for line
differential protection or for the transmission of only binary signals between IEDs. The binary
signals are freely configurable and can thus be used for any purpose, such as communication
scheme related signals, transfer trip and/or other binary signals between IEDs.

Communication between two IEDs requires that each IED is equipped with a Line Data
Communication Module (LDCM). The LDCM then acts as an interface to 64 kbit/s
communication channels for duplex communication between the IEDs.

The IED can be equipped with up to two short range or medium range LDCMs.

18.1.3 Function block SEMOD171559-1 v1

SEMOD55084-4 v2

LDCMRecBinStat1
COMFAIL
YBIT
NOCARR
NOMESS
ADDRERR
LNGTHERR
CRCERROR
REMCOMF
LOWLEVEL

IEC07000043-2-en.vsd

IEC07000043 V2 EN-US
LDCMRecBinStat2
COMFAIL
YBIT
NOCARR
NOMESS
ADDRERR
LNGTHERR
CRCERROR
TRDELERR
SYNCERR
REMCOMF
REMGPSER
SUBSTITU
LOWLEVEL

IEC07000044-2-en.vsd
IEC07000044 V2 EN-US

Figure 418: LDCMRecBinStat function blocks

769
Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Remote communication

SEMOD55082-4 v2

LDCMRecBinStat3
COMFAIL
YBIT
NOCARR
NOMESS
ADDRERR
LNGTHERR
CRCERROR
TRDELERR
SYNCERR
REMCOMF
REMGPSER
SUBSTITU
LOWLEVEL

IEC05000451-2-en.vsd
IEC05000451 V2 EN-US

Figure 419: LDCMRecBinStat function block

18.1.4 Signals
PID-3872-OUTPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 708: LDCMRecBinStat1 Output signals

Name Type Description
COMFAIL BOOLEAN Detected error in the differential communication
YBIT BOOLEAN Detected error in remote end with incoming message
NOCARR BOOLEAN No carrier is detected in the incoming message
NOMESS BOOLEAN No start and stop flags identified for the incoming message
ADDRERR BOOLEAN Incoming message from non-valid address
LNGTHERR BOOLEAN Wrong length of the incoming message
CRCERROR BOOLEAN Identified error by CRC check in incoming message
REMCOMF BOOLEAN Remote terminal indicates problem with received message
LOWLEVEL BOOLEAN Low signal level on the receive link

PID-4013-OUTPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 709: LDCMRecBinStat2 Output signals

Name Type Description
CH1 STRING Remote communication channel 1
CH2 STRING Remote communication channel 2
CH3 STRING Remote communication channel 3
CH4 STRING Remote communication channel 4
COMFAIL BOOLEAN Detected error in the differential communication
YBIT BOOLEAN Detected error in remote end with incoming message
NOCARR BOOLEAN No carrier is detected in the incoming message
NOMESS BOOLEAN No start and stop flags identified for the incoming message
ADDRERR BOOLEAN Incoming message from non-valid address
LNGTHERR BOOLEAN Wrong length of the incoming message
CRCERROR BOOLEAN Identified error by CRC check in incoming message
TRDELERR BOOLEAN Transmission time is longer than permitted
SYNCERR BOOLEAN Error in echo synchronization
REMCOMF BOOLEAN Remote terminal indicates problem with received message
Table continues on next page

770
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 18
Remote communication

Name Type Description

REMGPSER BOOLEAN Remote terminal indicates problem with GPS synchronization
SUBSTITU BOOLEAN Link error, values are substituted
LOWLEVEL BOOLEAN Low signal level on the receive link

PID-3874-OUTPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 710: LDCMRecBinStat3 Output signals

Name Type Description
CH1 STRING Remote communication channel 1
CH2 STRING Remote communication channel 2
CH3 STRING Remote communication channel 3
CH4 STRING Remote communication channel 4
COMFAIL BOOLEAN Detected error in the differential communication
YBIT BOOLEAN Detected error in remote end with incoming message
NOCARR BOOLEAN No carrier is detected in the incoming message
NOMESS BOOLEAN No start and stop flags identified for the incoming message
ADDRERR BOOLEAN Incoming message from non-valid address
LNGTHERR BOOLEAN Wrong length of the incoming message
CRCERROR BOOLEAN Identified error by CRC check in incoming message
TRDELERR BOOLEAN Transmission time is longer than permitted
SYNCERR BOOLEAN Error in echo synchronization
REMCOMF BOOLEAN Remote terminal indicates problem with received message
REMGPSER BOOLEAN Remote terminal indicates problem with GPS synchronization
SUBSTITU BOOLEAN Link error, values are substituted
LOWLEVEL BOOLEAN Low signal level on the receive link

18.1.5 Settings
PID-3872-SETTINGS v5

Table 711: LDCMRecBinStat1 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ChannelMode Blocked - - Normal Channel mode of LDCM, 0=OFF, 1=ON,
Normal 2=OutOfService
OutOfService
TerminalNo 0 - 255 - 1 0 Terminal number used for line
differential communication
RemoteTermNo 0 - 255 - 1 0 Terminal number on remote terminal
CommSync Slave - - Slave Com Synchronization mode of LDCM,
Master 0=Slave, 1=Master
OptoPower LowPower - - LowPower Transmission power for LDCM,
HighPower 0=Low, 1=High
ComFailAlrmDel 5 - 500 ms 5 100 Time delay before communication
error signal is activated
ComFailResDel 5 - 500 ms 5 100 Reset delay before communication
error signal is reset
InvertPolX21 Off - - Off Invert polarization for X21
On communication

771
Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Remote communication

PID-4013-SETTINGS v5

Table 712: LDCMRecBinStat2 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ChannelMode Blocked - - Normal Channel mode of LDCM, 0=OFF, 1=ON,
Normal 2=OutOfService
OutOfService
TerminalNo 0 - 255 - 1 0 Terminal number used for line
differential communication
RemoteTermNo 0 - 255 - 1 0 Terminal number on remote terminal
DiffSync Echo - - Echo Diff Synchronization mode of LDCM,
GPS 0=ECHO, 1=GPS
GPSSyncErr Block - - Block Operation mode when GPS
Echo synchroniation signal is lost
CommSync Slave - - Slave Com Synchronization mode of LDCM,
Master 0=Slave, 1=Master
OptoPower LowPower - - LowPower Transmission power for LDCM,
HighPower 0=Low, 1=High
TransmCurr CT-GRP1 - - CT-GRP1 Summation mode for transmitted
CT-GRP2 current values
CT-SUM
CT-DIFF1
CT-DIFF2
ComFailAlrmDel 5 - 500 ms 5 100 Time delay before communication
error signal is activated
ComFailResDel 5 - 500 ms 5 100 Reset delay before communication
error signal is reset
RedChSwTime 5 - 500 ms 5 5 Time delay before switching in
redundant channel
RedChRturnTime 5 - 500 ms 5 100 Time delay before switching back
from redundant channel
AsymDelay -20.00 - 20.00 ms 0.01 0.00 Asymmetric delay when
communication use echo synch.
AnalogLatency 2 - 20 - 1 2 Latency between local analogue data
and transmitted
remAinLatency 2 - 20 - 1 2 Analog latency of remote terminal
MaxTransmDelay 0 - 40 ms 1 20 Max allowed transmission delay
CompRange 0-10kA - - 0-25kA Compression range
0-25kA
0-50kA
0-150kA
MaxtDiffLevel 200 - 2000 us 1 600 Maximum time diff for ECHO back-up
DeadbandtDiff 200 - 1000 us 1 300 Deadband for t Diff
InvertPolX21 Off - - Off Invert polarization for X21
On communication

772
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 18
Remote communication

PID-3874-SETTINGS v5

Table 713: LDCMRecBinStat3 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ChannelMode Blocked - - Normal Channel mode of LDCM, 0=OFF, 1=ON,
Normal 2=OutOfService
OutOfService
TerminalNo 0 - 255 - 1 0 Terminal number used for line
differential communication
RemoteTermNo 0 - 255 - 1 0 Terminal number on remote terminal
DiffSync Echo - - Echo Diff Synchronization mode of LDCM,
GPS 0=ECHO, 1=GPS
GPSSyncErr Block - - Block Operation mode when GPS
Echo synchroniation signal is lost
CommSync Slave - - Slave Com Synchronization mode of LDCM,
Master 0=Slave, 1=Master
OptoPower LowPower - - LowPower Transmission power for LDCM,
HighPower 0=Low, 1=High
TransmCurr CT-GRP1 - - CT-GRP1 Summation mode for transmitted
CT-GRP2 current values
CT-SUM
CT-DIFF1
CT-DIFF2
RedundantChann
el
ComFailAlrmDel 5 - 500 ms 5 100 Time delay before communication
error signal is activated
ComFailResDel 5 - 500 ms 5 100 Reset delay before communication
error signal is reset
RedChSwTime 5 - 500 ms 5 5 Time delay before switching in
redundant channel
RedChRturnTime 5 - 500 ms 5 100 Time delay before switching back
from redundant channel
AsymDelay -20.00 - 20.00 ms 0.01 0.00 Asymmetric delay when
communication use echo synch.
AnalogLatency 2 - 20 - 1 2 Latency between local analogue data
and transmitted
remAinLatency 2 - 20 - 1 2 Analog latency of remote terminal
MaxTransmDelay 0 - 40 ms 1 20 Max allowed transmission delay
CompRange 0-10kA - - 0-25kA Compression range
0-25kA
0-50kA
0-150kA
MaxtDiffLevel 200 - 2000 us 1 600 Maximum time diff for ECHO back-up
DeadbandtDiff 200 - 1000 us 1 300 Deadband for t Diff
InvertPolX21 Off - - Off Invert polarization for X21
On communication

773
Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Remote communication

18.1.6 Monitored data

PID-3872-MONITOREDDATA v4

Table 714: LDCMRecBinStat1 Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
CommStatus BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Status of communication link
1=SyncErr
2=No RXD
3=LocalGPSErr
4=RemGPSErr
5=LocAndRemG
PSErr
6=LocalADErr
7=RemADErr
8=LocAndRemA
DErr
9=AddressErr
10=FreqConfErr
11=LatencyConf
Err

PID-4013-MONITOREDDATA v4

Table 715: LDCMRecBinStat2 Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
CommStatus BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Status of communication link
1=SyncErr
2=No RXD
3=LocalGPSErr
4=RemGPSErr
5=LocAndRemG
PSErr
6=LocalADErr
7=RemADErr
8=LocAndRemA
DErr
9=AddressErr
10=FreqConfErr
11=LatencyConf
Err

PID-3874-MONITOREDDATA v4

Table 716: LDCMRecBinStat3 Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
CommStatus BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Status of communication link
1=SyncErr
2=No RXD
3=LocalGPSErr
4=RemGPSErr
5=LocAndRemG
PSErr
6=LocalADErr
7=RemADErr
8=LocAndRemA
DErr
9=AddressErr
10=FreqConfErr
11=LatencyConf
Err

774
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 18
Remote communication

18.1.7 Operation principle M12452-14 v3

The communication is made on standard ITU (CCITT) PCM digital 64 kbit/s channels. It is a
two-way communication where telegrams are sent every 5 ms (same in 50 Hz and 60 Hz),
exchanging information between two IEDs. The format used is C37.94 and one telegram
consists of start and stop flags, address, data to be transmitted, Cyclic Redundancy Check
(CRC) and Yellow bit (which is associated with C37.94).

Start Stop
Information CRC
flag flag

8 bits n x 16 bits 16 bits 8 bits

en01000134.vsd
IEC01000134 V1 EN-US

Figure 420: Data message structure

The start and stop flags are the 0111 1110 sequence (7E hexadecimal), defined in the HDLC
standard. The CRC is designed according to the standard CRC16 definition. The optional
address field in the HDLC frame is not used instead a separate addressing is included in the
data field.

The address field is used for checking that the received message originates from the correct
equipment. There is always a risk that multiplexers occasionally mix the messages up. Each
terminal in the system is given a number. The terminal is then programmed to accept
messages from a specific terminal number. If the CRC function detects a faulty message, the
message is thrown away and not used in the evaluation.

When the communication is used for line differential purpose, the transmitted data consists of
three currents, clock information, trip-, block- and alarm-signals and eight binary signals which
can be used for any purpose. The three currents are represented as sampled values.

When the communication is used exclusively for binary signals, the full data capacity of the
communication channel is used for the binary signal purpose which gives the capacity of 192
signals.

18.2 Transmission of local analog data via LDCM to remote

end, function block LDCMTRN called LDCMTransmit GUID-B057C0DD-4EA8-4F6A-B57C-3395DFB38463 v2

18.2.1 Function block SEMOD171559-1 v1

GUID-05808CF6-34D6-4C76-A7A2-A26E5A96EC44 v2

LDCMTRN
^CT1L1
^CT1L2
^CT1L3
^CT1N
^CT2L1
^CT2L2
^CT2L3
^CT2N

IEC10000017-1-en.vsd
IEC10000017 V1 EN-US

Figure 421: LDCMTRN function block

775
Technical manual
Section 18 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Remote communication

18.2.2 Signals
PID-3823-INPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 717: LDCMTRN Input signals

Name Type Default Description
CT1L1 STRING 0 Input to be used for transmit CT-group1 line L1 to remote end
CT1L2 STRING 0 Input to be used for transmit CT-group1 line L2 to remote end
CT1L3 STRING 0 Input to be used for transmit CT-group1 line L3 to remote end
CT1N STRING 0 Input to be used for transmit CT-group1 neutral N to remote
end
CT2L1 STRING 0 Input to be used for transmit CT-group2 line L1 to remote end
CT2L2 STRING 0 Input to be used for transmit CT-group2 line L2 to remote end
CT2L3 STRING 0 Input to be used for transmit CT-group2 line L3 to remote end
CT2N STRING 0 Input to be used for transmit CT-group2 neutral N to remote
end

776
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 19
Security

Section 19 Security

19.1 Authority check ATHCHCK

19.1.1 Identification
GUID-FBEF319B-94E6-41FB-BB9F-D870E0425128 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Authority check ATHCHCK - -

19.1.2 Functionality SEMOD117051-23 v6

To safeguard the interests of our customers, both the IED and the tools that are accessing the
IED are protected, by means of authorization handling. The authorization handling of the IED
and the PCM600 is implemented at both access points to the IED:

• local, through the local HMI

• remote, through the communication ports

The IED users can be created, deleted and edited with PCM600 IED user management tool.

IEC12000202-2-en.vsd
IEC12000202 V2 EN-US

Figure 422: PCM600 user management tool

777
Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Security

19.1.3 Operation principle GUID-B555EDD0-BAF1-4F0E-9162-BDB3A3468CF2 v8

There are different levels (or types) of users that can access or operate different areas of the
IED and tools functionality. The pre-defined user types are given in Table 718.

Ensure that the user logged on to the IED has the access required when writing
particular data to the IED from PCM600.

The meaning of the legends used in the table:

• R= Read
• W= Write
• - = No access rights

Table 718: Pre-defined user types

Access rights System Protection Design User
Guest Super User SPA Guest Operator Engineer Engineer Administrato
r
Basic setting possibilities R R/W R R/W R/W R/W R
(change setting group, control
settings, limit supervision)
Advanced setting possibilities R R/W R R R/W R/W R
(for example protection
settings)
Basic control possibilities R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R
(process control, no bypass)
Advanced control possibilities R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R
(process control including
interlock trigg)
Basic command handling (for R R/W R R/W R/W R/W R
example clear LEDs, manual
trigg)
Advanced command handling R R/W R R R/W R/W R/W
(for example clear disturbance
record)
Basic configuration possibilities R R/W R R R R/W R/W
(I/O-configuration in SMT)
Advanced configuration R R/W R R R R/W R/W
possibilities (application
configuration including SMT,
GDE and CMT)
File loading (database loading - R/W - - - R/W R/W
from XML-file)
File dumping (database - R/W - - - R/W R/W
dumping to XML-file)
File transfer (FTP file transfer) - R/W - R/W R/W R/W R/W
File transfer (limited) (FTP file R R/W R R/W R/W R/W R/W
transfer)
File Transfer (SPA File Transfer) - R/W - - - R/W -
Table continues on next page

778
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 19
Security

Access rights System Protection Design User

Guest Super User SPA Guest Operator Engineer Engineer Administrato
r
Database access for normal R R/W R R/W R/W R/W R/W
user
User administration (user R R/W R R R R R/W
management – FTP File
Transfer)
User administration (user - R/W - - - - -
management – SPA File
Transfer)

The IED users can be created, deleted and edited only with the IED User Management within
PCM600. The user can only LogOn or LogOff on the local HMI on the IED, there are no users,
groups or functions that can be defined on local HMI.

If the IED is Central Account Management enabled, users can only be created,
deleted or edited in the Central Account Management server. In that case, only
the user rights can be edited using the PCM600 tool. See Cyber Security
Deployment Guidelines manual.

Only characters A - Z, a - z and 0 - 9 should be used in user names and

passwords.
The maximum of characters in a password is 18.

At least one user must be included in the UserAdministrator group to be able to

write users, created in PCM600, to IED.

SEMOD176296-5 v8.1.1
At delivery the default user is the SuperUser. No Log on is required to operate the IED until a
user has been created with the IED User Management..

Once a user is created and downloaded to the IED, that user can perform a Log on, introducing
the password assigned in the tool.

If there is no user created, an attempt to log on will display a message box: “No user defined!”

If one user leaves the IED without logging off, then after the timeout (set in Main menu/
Configuration/HMI/Screen/Display Timeout) elapses, the IED returns to Guest state, when
only reading is possible. The display time out is set to 60 minutes at delivery.

If there are one or more users created with the IED User Management and downloaded into the
IED, then, when a user intentionally attempts a Log on or when the user attempts to perform
an operation that is password protected, the Log on window will appear.

The cursor is focused on the User identity field, so upon pressing the key, the user can
change the user name, by browsing the list of users, with the “up” and “down” arrows. After
choosing the right user name, the user must press the “E” key again. When it comes to
password, upon pressing the key, the following character will show up: “$”. After all the
letters are introduced (passwords are case sensitive) choose OK and press the key again.

If everything is alright at a voluntary Log on, the local HMI returns to the Authorization screen.
If the Log on is OK, when required to change for example a password protected setting, the

779
Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Security

local HMI returns to the actual setting folder. If the Log on has failed, then the Log on window
opens again, until either the user makes it right or presses “Cancel”.

19.1.3.1 Authorization with Central Account Management enabled IED GUID-1A836989-5D89-4F3D-B3A2-3BABCDFFB440 v1

The users, their roles and rights are created, deleted and edited only in the Central Account
Management server (SDM600). However, the user rights can be edited in the IED by using the
PCM600 user tool.

One user can have one or several user roles. By default, the users in Table 719 are created in the
IED, and when creating new users in the SDM600 server, the predefined roles from Table 720
can be used.

At delivery, the IED user has full access as SuperUser when using the LHMI and
as Administrator when using FTP or PCM600 until Central Account
Management is activated.

Table 719: Default users

User name User rights
SuperUser Full rights, only presented in LHMI. LHMI is logged on by default until other users are
defined
Guest Only read rights, only presented in LHMI. LHMI is logged on by default when other users are
defined (same as VIEWER)
Administrator Full rights. Password: Administrator. This user has to be used when reading out
disturbances with third party FTP-client.

Table 720: Predefined user roles according to IEC 62351-8

User roles Role explanation User rights
VIEWER Viewer Can read parameters and browse the menus from LHMI
OPERATOR Operator Can read parameters and browse the menus as well as perform
control actions
ENGINEER Engineer Can create and load configurations and change settings for the IED
and also run commands and manage disturbances
INSTALLER Installer Can load configurations and change settings for the IED
SECADM Security Can change role assignments and security settings. Can deploy
administrator certificates.
SECAUD Security auditor Can view audit logs
RBACMNT RBAC Can change role assignment
management
ADMINISTRATOR Administrator Sum of all rights for SECADM, SECAUD and RBACMNT
rights

This User role is vendor specific and not defined in

IEC 62351–8

Changes in user management settings do not cause an IED reboot.

780
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 19
Security

The PCM600 tool caches the login credentials after successful login for 15
minutes. During that time no more login will be necessary.

The successfully activation of Central Account Management will disable built-in users or
remove all local created users from PCM600.

Management of user credentials and roles is handled on the central Account Management
server e.g. SDM600 The IED employs two strategies to ensure availability of the authentication
system even if there is a problem with the network or authentication server:

• A substation can be equipped with two redundant authentication servers operating in a

hot standby mode.
• If configured by the security administrator, the IED itself maintains a local replica in the
database with selected users. This database is periodically updated with data from the
server and used as fallback if none of the servers are reachable.

Note that not all users in the SDM600 server are part of the replica. There might be users that
are not assigned to any replication group. IED only replicates those users which are part of
replication group configured in the IED.

This replication can be disabled using PCM600 by the security administrator, which means
that the IED will forward login requests to the SDM600 for authorization and in case of
problems with the network users will not be able to log in to the IED.

If user replication has been disabled in a CAM-enabled IED and if

communication with SDM600 is lost, access to that IED will be denied until
communication is re-established.

All communication between the central management and the IEDs is protected using secure
communication. Customers using SDM600 are required to generate and distribute certificates
during the engineering process of the substation. These certificates ensure mutual trust
between IED and for example SDM600, FTP, PCM600 and other system.

Table 721: Authority-related IED functions

Function Description
Authority status This function is an indication function block for user logon activity.
ATHSTAT User denied attempt to logon and user successful logon are reported.
Authority check To safeguard the interests of our customers, both the IED and the tools that are
ATHCHCK accessing the IED are protected, by means of authorization handling. The
authorization handling of the IED and the PCM600 is implemented at both access
points to the IED:

• local, through the local HMI

• remote, through the communication ports

The IED users can be created, deleted and edited only in the CAM server.
Authority This function enables/disables the maintenance menu. It also controls the
management maintenance menu logon time out.
AUTHMAN

For more information on the functions Authority Management (AUTHMAN), Authority Status
(ATHSTAT), and Authority Check (ATHCHCK) functions, refer to chapter “Basic IED functions”
in the Technical Manual.

781
Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Security

19.2 Authority management AUTHMAN

19.2.1 Identification
GUID-7925E6A3-301D-44A5-982F-167805EEA473 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Authority management AUTHMAN - -

19.2.2 AUTHMAN GUID-AF7EDB44-42AA-4D49-BFA0-DA6A9B43973E v1

This function enables/disables the maintenance menu. It also controls the maintenance menu
log on time out.

19.2.3 Settings
PID-4112-SETTINGS v2

Table 722: AUTHMAN Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
MaintMenuDisAuth Disable - - Enable In maintenance menu, disable
Enable authority selection is shown
AuthTimeout 600 - 3600 s 600 600 Authority blocking timeout

19.3 FTP access with password FTPACCS

19.3.1 Identification
GUID-C037D0B0-1AA0-4592-9293-92C7EDED3261 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
FTP access with SSL FTPACCS - -

19.3.2 FTP access with TLS, FTPACCS GUID-9E64EA68-6FA9-4576-B5E9-92E3CC6AA7FD v3

The FTP Client defaults to the best possible security mode when trying to negotiate with TLS.

The automatic negotiation mode acts on configured port number 21 and server features, it
tries to negotiate with explicit TLS via AUTH TLS. If the specified port is any other, it tries to
negotiate in a similar way.

Using FTP without TLS encryption gives the FTP client reduced capabilities. This mode is only
for accessing disturbance recorder data from the IED.

If normal FTP is required to read out disturbance recordings, create a specific

account for this purpose with rights only to do File transfer. The password of
this user will be exposed in clear text on the wire.

782
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 19
Security

19.3.3 Settings
PID-6582-SETTINGS v3

Table 723: FTPACCS Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
PortSelection None - - Any Port selection for communication
Front
LANAB
LANCD
Any
SSLMode FTP+FTPS - - FTPS Support for AUTH TLS/SSL
FTPS
TCPPortFTP 1 - 65535 - 1 21 TCP port for FTP and FTP with Explicit
SSL
PasvPortStart 0 - 65515 - 1 49200 First TCP data port for PASV
PasvPortEnd 0 - 65535 - 1 49232 Last TCP data port for PASV

19.4 Authority status ATHSTAT

19.4.1 Identification
GUID-79C63688-4D7D-4954-AC3C-B9484D084F6F v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Authority status ATHSTAT - -

19.4.2 Functionality SEMOD158529-5 v6

Authority status ATHSTAT function is an indication function block for user log-on activity.

User denied attempt to log-on and user successful log-on are reported.

19.4.3 Function block SEMOD158547-4 v4

ATHSTAT
USRBLKED
LOGGEDON

IEC06000503-2-en.vsd
IEC06000503 V2 EN-US

Figure 423: ATHSTAT function block

19.4.4 Signals
PID-3773-OUTPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 724: ATHSTAT Output signals

Name Type Description
USRBLKED BOOLEAN At least one user is blocked by invalid password
LOGGEDON BOOLEAN At least one user is logged on

783
Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Security

GUID-87CF079A-64C8-46AE-B7E4-A0B2EEAC92E9 v1

The output signal USRBLKED is not valid if the IED is Centralized Account
Management enabled.

19.4.5 Settings GUID-ECE18AA9-15CC-4522-AA31-78C4F0F052E4 v3

The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or in Protection and Control
IED Manager (PCM600)

19.4.6 Operation principle SEMOD158543-4 v5

Authority status (ATHSTAT) function informs about two events related to the IED and the user
authorization:

• the fact that at least one user has tried to log on wrongly into the IED and it was blocked
(the output USRBLKED)
• the fact that at least one user is logged on (the output LOGGEDON)

Whenever one of the two events occurs, the corresponding output (USRBLKED or LOGGEDON)
is activated. The output can for example, be connected on Event (EVENT) function block for
LON/SPA.The signals are also available on IEC 61850 station bus.

19.5 Self supervision with internal event list INTERRSIG IP1721-1 v2

19.5.1 Functionality M11399-3 v7

Self supervision with internal event list function listens and reacts to internal system events,
generated by the different built-in self-supervision elements. The internal events are saved in
an internal event list presented on the LHMI and in PCM600 event viewer tool.

19.5.2 Function block M11402-3 v6

INTERRSIG
FAIL
WARNING
TSYN CERR
RTCERR
STUPBLK

IEC09000787-2-en.vsdx

IEC09000787 V2 EN-US

Figure 424: INTERRSIG function block

784
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 19
Security

19.5.3 Signals IP9674-1 v2

PID-4077-OUTPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 725: INTERRSIG Output signals

Name Type Description
FAIL BOOLEAN Internal fail
WARNING BOOLEAN Internal warning
TSYNCERR BOOLEAN Time synchronization error
RTCERR BOOLEAN Real time clock error
STUPBLK BOOLEAN Application startup block

19.5.4 Settings ABBD8E15533 v3

The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

19.5.5 Operation principle IP11943-1 v2

M11401-3 v12
The self-supervision operates continuously and includes:

• Normal micro-processor watchdog function.

• Checking of digitized measuring signals.
• Other alarms, for example hardware and time synchronization.

The self-supervision function status can be monitored from the local HMI or from the Event
Viewer in PCM600.

Under the Diagnostics menu in the local HMI, the actual information from the self-supervision
function can be reviewed. The information can be found under Main menu/Diagnostics/
Internal events or Main menu/Diagnostics/IED status/General. The information from the
self-supervision function is also available in the Event Viewer in PCM600.

IEC15000414-1-en.vsdx
IEC15000414 V1 EN-US

Figure 425: IED general status in local HM

The self supervision records internal signal changes in an internal event list. A maximum of 40
internal events are stored in a first-in, first-out manner.

785
Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Security

GUID-B481701F-05B4-4B29-83D4-18F13886FEBE V1 EN-US

Figure 426: Self-supervision event list in local HMI

A self-supervision summary can be obtained by means of an output relay with potential free
alarm contact (INTERNAL FAIL) located on the power supply module. This contact is closed
when the IED either does not have auxiliary power, or when one or more error conditions are
present in the IED (for example harware error).

Some output signals are available from the INTERRSIG function block. The signals from this
function block are sent as events via IEC 61850 to the station level of the control system. These
signals can also be connected to binary outputs for signalization via output relays or they can
be used as conditions for other functions if required/desired.

Individual error signals from I/O modules can be obtained from respective module in the
Signal Matrix tool. Error signals from time synchronization can be obtained from the
INTERRSIG function block via two outputs TSYNCERR and RTCERR .

19.5.5.1 Internal signals M11401-173 v11

Self supervision provides several status signals that give information about the internal status
of the IED. For this reason they are also called internal signals. These internal signals , available
on local HMI under Main menu/Diagnostics/IED status/General, can be divided into two
groups.

• Standard signals are always presented in the IED, see table 726.
• Hardware dependent internal signals are collected depending on the hardware
configuration, see table 727.

Table 726: Self-supervision's standard internal signals

Name of signal Description Displayed on Reasons for activation
local HMI as
FAIL Internal Fail Internal fail This signal will be active if one or more of the
status following internal signals are active; LMDERROR,
WATCHDOG, APPERROR, RTEERROR, or any of the HW
dependent signals
WARNING Internal Internal This signal will be active if one or more of the
Warning warning following internal signals are active; RTCERROR,
status IEC61850ERROR
RTCERROR Real Time Real time This signal will be active when there is a hardware
Clock clock error with the real time clock.
status
TIMESYNCHERROR Time Time synch This signal will be active when the source of the time
Synchroniza synchronization is lost, or when the time system has
tion status to make a time reset.
Table continues on next page

786
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 19
Security

Name of signal Description Displayed on Reasons for activation

local HMI as
RTEERROR Runtime Runtime This signal will be active if the Runtime Engine failed to
Execution execution do some actions with the application threads. The
Error status actions can be loading of settings or parameters for
components, changing of setting groups, loading or
unloading of application threads.
IEC61850ERROR IEC 61850 IEC61850 This signal will be active if the IEC 61850 stack did not
Error status succeed in some actions like reading IEC 61850
configuration, startup, for example
DNP3 DNP3 error DNP3 This signal will be active when DNP3 detects any
status configuration error during startup.
LMDERROR LON/Mip SLM301 LON network interface, MIP/DPS, is in an
Device Error unrecoverable error state.
status
APPERROR Runtime Runtime App This signal will be active if one or more of the
Application Error application threads are not in the state that Runtime
Error status Engine expects. The states can be CREATED,
INITIALIZED, RUNNING, for example
SETCHGD Settings Settings This signal will generate an Internal Event to the
changed changed Internal Event list if any settings are changed.
SETGRPCHGD Setting Settings This signal will generate an Internal Event to the
groups changed Internal Event list if any setting groups are changed.
changed

Table 727: Self-supervision's hardware dependent internal signals

Card Name of signal Description Displayed on Reasons for activation
local HMI as
PSM PSM-Error Power PSM1 Activated if the module has a hardware error.
Supply
Module
Error status
BIM BIM-Error Binary In BIMn Activated if the module has a hardware error.
Module n = slot number
Error status
BOM BOM-Error Binary Out BOMn Activated if the module has a hardware error.
Module n = slot number
Error status
IOM IOM-Error In/Out IOMn Activated if the module has a hardware error.
Module n = slot number
Error status
MIM MIM-Error Millampere MIMn Activated if the module has a hardware error.
Input n = slot number
Module
Error status
SOM SOM-Error Static Out SOMn Activated if the module has a hardware error.
Module n = slot number
Error status
NUM NUM-Error Numerical/ NUM30 Activated if the module has a hardware or
CPU Module software error.
Error status
ADM ADM-Error A/D Module ADM32 Activated if the module has a hardware error.
Error status
Table continues on next page

787
Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Security

Card Name of signal Description Displayed on Reasons for activation

local HMI as
LDCM LDCM-Error Line LDCM3nn Activated if the module has a hardware error.
Differential n = slot number
Communica
tion Module
Error status
TRM TRM-Error Transformer TRM40
Module
Error status
TRM TRM-Error Transformer TRM41
Module
Error status

When settings are changed in the IED, the protection and control applications restart in order
to take effect of the changes. During restart, internal events get generated and Runtime App
error will be displayed. These events are only indications and will be for short duration during
the restart.

IED will not be operational during applications restart.

19.5.5.2 Supervision of analog inputs M11401-136 v7

The analog signals to the A/D converter is internally distributed into two different converters,
one with low amplification and one with high amplification.

When the signal is within measurable limits on both channels, a direct comparison of the two
A/D converter channels can be performed. If the validation fails, the CPU will be informed and
an alarm will be given for A/D converter failure.

19.5.6 Technical data IP10272-1 v2

M11963-1 v5

Table 728: Self supervision with internal event list

Data Value
Recording manner Continuous, event controlled
List size 40 events, first in-first out

19.6 ChangeLock function CHNGLCK GUID-E8A1C33A-DD65-42B5-BA13-CFAE40C2C9AD v2

19.6.1 Functionality GUID-00784FC0-B39D-462D-854B-AAF62626DD0A v3

Change lock function CHNGLCK is used to block further changes to the IED configuration and
settings once the commissioning is complete. The purpose is to block inadvertent IED
configuration changes beyond a certain point in time.

The change lock function activation is normally connected to a binary input.

788
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 19
Security

19.6.2 Function block GUID-15AA1D42-912E-4085-8166-33FDC327CEB5 v2

CHNGLCK
LOCK* ACTIVE
OVERRIDE
IEC09000946.vsd

IEC09000946 V2 EN-US

Figure 427: CHNGLCK function block

19.6.3 Signals GUID-1B253577-C81B-40E3-B406-1F6586DCE545 v2

PID-3786-INPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 729: CHNGLCK Input signals

Name Type Default Description
LOCK BOOLEAN 0 Activate change lock

PID-3786-OUTPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 730: CHNGLCK Output signals

Name Type Description
ACTIVE BOOLEAN Change lock active
OVERRIDE BOOLEAN Change lock override

19.6.4 Operation principle GUID-74581AA2-6EB4-4CFA-92DA-90FB89F9A62C v3

The Change lock function (CHNGLCK) is configured using ACT.

The function, when activated, will still allow the following changes of the IED state that does
not involve reconfiguring of the IED:

• Monitoring
• Reading events
• Resetting events
• Reading disturbance data
• Clear disturbances
• Reset LEDs
• Reset counters and other runtime component states
• Control operations
• Set system time
• Enter and exit from test mode
• Change of active setting group

The binary input signal LOCK controlling the function is defined in ACT or SMT:

Binary input Function

1 Activated
0 Deactivated

789
Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Security

19.7 Denial of service DOS

19.7.1 Functionality GUID-407250CA-0076-41E1-AD2D-434077AC3F1D v4

The Denial of service functions (DOSFRNT, DOSLANAB and DOSLANCD) are designed to limit
overload on the IED produced by heavy Ethernet network traffic. The communication facilities
must not be allowed to compromise the primary functionality of the device. All inbound
network traffic will be quota controlled so that too heavy network loads can be controlled.
Heavy network load might for instance be the result of malfunctioning equipment connected
to the network.

19.7.2 Function blocks GUID-A8F084A4-9AD2-41CE-995C-64F034D27FF6 v3

DOSFRNT
LINKUP
WARNING
ALARM

IEC09000749-1-en.vsd
IEC09000749 V1 EN-US

Figure 428: DOSFRNT function block

DOSLANAB
LINKUP
WARNING
ALARM

IEC13000308-1-en.vsd
IEC13000308 V1 EN-US

Figure 429: DOSLANAB function block

DOSLANCD
LINKUP
WARNING
ALARM

IEC13000309-1-en.vsd
IEC13000309 V1 EN-US

Figure 430: DOSLANCD function block

19.7.3 Signals GUID-3C413A40-CC58-46D1-BE86-3A391D6C25D1 v1

PID-5190-OUTPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 731: DOSFRNT Output signals

Name Type Description
LINKUP BOOLEAN Ethernet link status
WARNING BOOLEAN Frame rate is higher than normal state
ALARM BOOLEAN Frame rate is higher than throttle state

PID-5189-OUTPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 732: DOSLANAB Output signals

Name Type Description
LINKUP BOOLEAN Ethernet link status
WARNING BOOLEAN Frame rate is higher than normal state
ALARM BOOLEAN Frame rate is higher than throttle state

790
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 19
Security

PID-5188-OUTPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 733: DOSLANCD Output signals

Name Type Description
LINKUP BOOLEAN Ethernet link status
WARNING BOOLEAN Frame rate is higher than normal state
ALARM BOOLEAN Frame rate is higher than throttle state

19.7.4 Settings GUID-2DD23D7A-007C-4819-8173-6C05399F9C6E v2

The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

19.7.5 Monitored data

PID-5190-MONITOREDDATA v4

Table 734: DOSFRNT Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
State INTEGER 0=Off - Frame rate control state
1=Normal
2=Throttle
3=DiscardLow
4=DiscardAll
5=StopPoll
Quota INTEGER - % Quota level in percent 0-100

PID-5189-MONITOREDDATA v4

Table 735: DOSLANAB Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
DoSStatus INTEGER 0=Off - Frame rate control state
1=Normal
2=Throttle
3=DiscardLow
4=DiscardAll
5=StopPoll
Quota INTEGER - % Quota level in percent 0-100

PID-5188-MONITOREDDATA v4

Table 736: DOSLANCD Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
DoSStatus INTEGER 0=Off - Frame rate control state
1=Normal
2=Throttle
3=DiscardLow
4=DiscardAll
5=StopPoll
Quota INTEGER - % Quota level in percent 0-100

791
Technical manual
Section 19 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Security

19.7.6 Operation principle GUID-94340D4F-4D32-409B-BA1A-BA49A0C3F297 v4

The Denial of service functions (DOSFRNT, DOSLANAB and DOSLANCD) measures the IED load
from communication and, if necessary, limit it for not jeopardizing the IEDs control and
protection functionality due to high CPU load. The function has the following outputs:

• LINKUP indicates the Ethernet link status

• WARNING indicates that communication (frame rate) is higher than normal
• ALARM indicates that the IED limits communication

792
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 20
Basic IED functions

Section 20 Basic IED functions

20.1 Time synchronization TIMESYNCHGEN IP1750-1 v2

20.1.1 Functionality M11344-3 v11

The time synchronization function is used to select a common source of absolute time for the
synchronization of the IED when it is a part of a protection system. This makes it possible to
compare events and disturbance data between all IEDs within a station automation system
and in between sub-stations.

Micro SCADA OPC server should not be used as a time synchronization source.

20.1.2 Settings IP9657-1 v2

SEMOD55141-5 v6
There are two groups of parameter settings related to time:

• System time
• Synchronization

The System time group relates to setting the on/off and start/end of the Daylight Saving Time
(DST) for the local time zone in relation to Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). The
Synchronization group relates to selecting the coarse and fine synchronization sources.

All the settings and parameters related to time are available via Local HMI under Main menu/
Configuration/Time/System time and via PCM600 under IED Configuration/Time.
PID-3966-SETTINGS v5

Table 737: TIMESYNCHGEN Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CoarseSyncSrc Off - - Off Coarse time synchronization source
SPA
LON
SNTP
DNP
IEC103
FineSyncSource Off - - Off Fine time synchronization source
SPA
LON
BIN
GPS
GPS+SPA
GPS+LON
GPS+BIN
SNTP
GPS+SNTP
IRIG-B
GPS+IRIG-B
PPS
SyncMaster Off - - Off Activate IEDas synchronization master
SNTP-Server
Table continues on next page

793
Technical manual
Section 20 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Basic IED functions

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

TimeAdjustRate Slow - - Fast Adjust rate for time synchronization
Fast
HWSyncSrc Off - - Off Hardware time synchronization
GPS source
IRIG-B
PPS
AppSynch NoSynch - - NoSynch Time synchronization mode for
Synch application
SyncAccLevel Class T5 (1us) - - Unspecified Wanted time synchronization accuracy
Class T4 (4us)
Unspecified

GUID-CD154442-0F80-4B69-8C43-22445FD7F865 v1

GPS settings are not supported by 650 due to hardware restrictions.

PID-6188-SETTINGS v4

Table 738: BININPUT Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ModulePosition 3 - 16 - 1 3 Hardware position of IO module for
time synchronization
BinaryInput 1 - 16 - 1 1 Binary input number for time
synchronization
BinDetection PositiveEdge - - PositiveEdge Positive or negative edge detection
NegativeEdge

PID-1935-SETTINGS v18

Table 739: SNTP Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ServerIP-Add 0 - 255 IP 1 0.0.0.0 Server IP-address
Address
RedServIP-Add 0 - 255 IP 1 0.0.0.0 Redundant server IP-address
Address

PID-6212-SETTINGS v3

Table 740: DSTENABLE Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
DST Enable Off - - On Enables or disables the use of
On Daylight Saving Time

794
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 20
Basic IED functions

PID-3967-SETTINGS v5

Table 741: DSTBEGIN Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
MonthInYear January - - March Month in year when daylight time
February starts
March
April
May
June
July
August
September
October
November
December
DayInWeek Sunday - - Sunday Day in week when daylight time starts
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
WeekInMonth Last - - Last Week in month when daylight time
First starts
Second
Third
Fourth
UTCTimeOfDay -24:00 - - 1:00 UTC Time of day in hours when
-23:30 daylight time starts
...
-00:30
00:00
00:30
...
48:00

795
Technical manual
Section 20 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Basic IED functions

PID-3968-SETTINGS v5

Table 742: DSTEND Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
MonthInYear January - - October Month in year when daylight time
February ends
March
April
May
June
July
August
September
October
November
December
DayInWeek Sunday - - Sunday Day in week when daylight time ends
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
WeekInMonth Last - - Last Week in month when daylight time
First ends
Second
Third
Fourth
UTCTimeOfDay -24:00 - - 1:00 UTC Time of day in hours when
-23:30 daylight time ends
...
-00:30
00:00
00:30
...
48:00

796
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 20
Basic IED functions

PID-4138-SETTINGS v4

Table 743: TIMEZONE Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
TimeZone -12:00 - - 1:00 Local time from UTC
-11:00
-10:00
-9:30
-9:00
-8:00
-7:00
-6:00
-5:00
-4:30
-4:00
-3:30
-3:00
-2:00
-1:00
0:00
1:00
2:00
3:00
3:30
4:00
4:30
5:00
5:30
5:45
6:00
6:30
7:00
8:00
8:45
9:00
9:30
10:00
10:30
11:00
11:30
12:00
12:45
13:00
14:00

PID-5187-SETTINGS v4

Table 744: IRIG-B Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SynchType BNC - - Opto Type of synchronization
Opto
TimeDomain LocalTime - - LocalTime Time domain
UTC
Encoding IRIG-B - - IRIG-B Type of encoding
1344
1344TZ
TimeZoneAs1344 MinusTZ - - PlusTZ Time zone as in 1344 standard
PlusTZ

20.1.3 Operation principle IP12360-1 v4

20.1.3.1 General concepts M11346-77 v1

797
Technical manual
Section 20 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Basic IED functions

Time definitions M11346-80 v3

The error of a clock is the difference between the actual time of the clock, and the time the
clock is intended to have. Clock accuracy indicates the increase in error, that is, the time
gained or lost by the clock. A disciplined clock knows its own faults and tries to compensate
for them.

Design of the time system (clock synchronization) GUID-E2B9E81C-5733-4521-B27F-BF33E05CCFB0 v7

The time system is based on software and hardware clocks that run independently from each
other. See figure ""

External
Synchronization
sources Time tagging and general synchronisation

Off
Comm- Protection
LON Events
Time- unication and control
SPA Regulator functions
Min. pulse
(Setting,
SNTP see
SW-time
technical
DNP
reference
IRIG-B manual)
PPS

Synchronization for differential protection

(ECHO-mode)
Off Time-
IRIG-B Regulator HW-time
(fast or slow)
PPS

A/D Diff.- Trans-

converter comm- ducers*
unication

*IEC 61850-9-2

IEC16000002-1-en.vsd

IEC16000002 V1 EN-US

Figure 431: Design of the time system (clock synchronization)

All time tagging is performed by the software clock. When, for example, a status signal is
changed in the protection system of a function based on the free running hardware clock, the
event is time tagged by the software clock when it reaches the event recorder. The hardware
clock can thus run independently.

The echo mode of differential protection is based on the hardware clock. Thus, there is no
need to synchronize the hardware clock and the software clock.

The synchronization of the hardware clock to the software clock is necessary only when IRIG B
00X with optical fibre, IEEE 1344 is used for differential protection. The two clock systems are
synchronized by a special clock synchronization unit with two modes, fast and slow. A special
feature, an automatic fast clock time regulator is used. The automatic fast mode makes the
synchronization time as short as possible during start-up. The fast and slow settings are also
available on the local HMI.

Slow clock synchronization mode

During normal service, a setting with slow synchronization mode is used. This prevents the
hardware clock to make too big time steps, >16µs, emanating from the differential protection
requirement of correct timing.

798
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 20
Basic IED functions

Synchronization principle M11346-83 v4

From a general point of view synchronization can be seen as a hierarchical structure. A
function is synchronized from a higher level and provides synchronization to lower levels.

Synchronization from
a higher level

Function

Optional synchronization of
modules at a lower level

IEC09000342-1-en.vsd
IEC09000342 V1 EN-US

Figure 432: Synchronization principle

A function is said to be synchronized when it periodically receives synchronization messages
from a higher level. As the level decreases, the accuracy of the synchronization decreases as
well. A function can have several potential sources of synchronization, with different maximum
errors. This gives the function the possibility to choose the source with the best quality, and to
adjust its internal clock based on this source. The maximum error of a clock can be defined as:

• The maximum error of the last used synchronization message

• The time since the last used synchronization message
• The rate accuracy of the internal clock in the function.

20.1.3.2 Real-time clock (RTC) operation M11346-57 v2

The IED has a built-in real-time clock (RTC) with a resolution of one second. The clock has a
built-in calendar that handles leap years through 2038.

Real-time clock at power off M11346-60 v2

During power off, the system time in the IED is kept by a capacitor-backed real-time clock that
will provide 35 ppm accuracy for 5 days. This means that if the power is off, the time in the IED
may drift with 3 seconds per day, during 5 days, and after this time the time will be lost
completely.

Real-time clock at startup M11346-63 v4

Time synchronization startup procedure M11346-66 v9

The first message that contains the full time (as for instance LON and SNTP) gives an accurate
time to the IED. After the initial setting of the clock, one of the three following conditions
happens with each of the coming synchronization messages configured as FineSynchSource:

• If the synchronization message, which is similar to the other messages, has an offset
compared to the internal time in the IED, the message is used directly for synchronization,
which means, for adjusting the internal clock to obtain zero offset at the next coming time
message.
• If the synchronization message has a large offset compared to the other messages, a
spike-filter in the IED removes this time-message.
• If the synchronization message has a large offset and the following message also has a
large offset, the spike filter does not act and the offset in the synchronization message is
compared to a threshold that defaults to 500 milliseconds. If the offset is more than the

799
Technical manual
Section 20 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Basic IED functions

threshold, the clock jumps a whole number of seconds so the remaining offset is less than
500ms. The remaining offset is then slowly adjusted with 1000 ppm until the offset is
removed. With an adjustment of 1000ppm it takes 500 seconds to remove an offset of
500 milliseconds.

Synchronization messages configured as coarse are only used for initial setting of the time.
After this has been done, the messages are checked against the internal time and only an
offset of more than 10 seconds resets the time.

Rate accuracy M11346-93 v5

The Rate accuracy is the accuracy of the internal clock while the external time signal is lost. In
the IED, the rate accuracy at cold start is 100 ppm but if the IED is synchronized for a while, the
rate accuracy is approximately 1 ppm if the surrounding temperature is constant. It can take
up to one hour after a cold start of the IED to reach to a stable rate due to the normal
warming-up procedure of the IED.

Time-out on synchronization sources M11346-96 v3

All synchronization interfaces have a time-out, and a configured interface must receive time
synchronization messages regularly in order not to give an error signal (TSYNCERR) that is
reported from the INTERRSIG function block. The time-out is such that one message can be
lost without getting a TSYNCERR, but if more than one message is lost, a TSYNCERR is given.

20.1.3.3 Synchronization alternatives M11346-3 v7

Three main alternatives of external synchronization sources are available. The synchronization
message is applied:

• via any of the communication ports of the IED as a telegram message including date and
time
• as a minute pulse connected to a binary input
• via IRIG-B or PPS

Synchronization via SNTP M11346-33 v6

SNTP provides a ping-pong method of synchronization. A message is sent from an IED to an
SNTP server, and the SNTP server returns the message after filling in a reception time and a
transmission time. SNTP operates via the normal Ethernet network that connects IEDs
together in an IEC 61850 network. For SNTP to operate properly, there must be an SNTP server
present, preferably in the same station. The SNTP synchronization provides an accuracy that
gives +/- 1 ms accuracy for binary inputs. The IED itself can be set as an SNTP-time server.

SNTP provides complete time-information and can be used as both fine and coarse time synch
source. However SNTP shall normally be used as fine synch only. The only reason to use SNTP
as coarse synch is in combination with PPS as fine source. The combination SNTP as both fine
and coarse source shall not be used.

SNTP server requirements GUID-588FCD12-C494-445E-8488-8287B34EFD9A v4

The SNTP server to be used is connected to the local network, that is not more than 4-5
switches or routers away from the IED. The SNTP server is dedicated for its task, or at least
equipped with a real-time operating system, that is not a PC with SNTP server software. The
SNTP server should be stable, that is, either synchronized from a stable source like GPS, or
local without synchronization. Using a local SNTP server without synchronization as primary or
secondary server in a redundant configuration is not recommended.

Synchronization via Serial Communication Module (SLM) M11346-50 v6

On the serial buses (both LON and SPA) two types of synchronization messages are sent.

800
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 20
Basic IED functions

• Coarse message is sent every minute and comprises complete date and time, that is, year,
month, day, hours, minutes, seconds and milliseconds.
• Fine message is sent every second and comprises only seconds and milliseconds.

The SLM module is located on the Numeric processing module (NUM).

Synchronization via binary input M11346-42 v6

The IED accepts minute pulses to a binary input. These minute pulses can be generated from,
for example station master clock. If the station master clock is not synchronized from a world
wide source, time will be a relative time valid for the substation. Both positive and negative
edge on the signal can be accepted. This signal is also considered as a fine time
synchronization signal.

The minute pulse is connected to any channel on any Binary Input Module in the IED. The
electrical characteristic is thereby the same as for any other binary input.

If the objective of synchronization is to achieve a relative time within the substation and if no
station master clock with minute pulse output is available, a simple minute pulse generator
can be designed and used for synchronization of the IEDs. The minute pulse generator can be
created using the logical elements and timers available in the IED.

The definition of a minute pulse is that it occurs one minute after the last pulse. As only the
flanks are detected, the flank of the minute pulse shall occur one minute after the last flank.

Binary minute pulses are checked with reference to frequency.

Pulse data:

• Period time (a) should be 60 seconds.

• Pulse length (b):
• Minimum pulse length should be >50 ms.
• Maximum pulse length is optional.
• Amplitude (c) - please refer to section "Binary input module (BIM)".

Deviations in the period time (a) larger than 50 ms will cause TSYNCERR.

en05000251.vsd
IEC05000251 V1 EN-US

Figure 433: Binary minute pulses

The default time-out-time for a minute pulse is two minutes, and if no valid minute pulse is
received within two minutes a SYNCERR will be given.

If contact bounce occurs, only the first pulse will be detected as a minute pulse. The next
minute pulse will be registered first 60 s - 50 ms after the last contact bounce.

If the minute pulses are perfect, for example, it is exactly 60 seconds between the pulses,
contact bounces might occur 49 ms after the actual minute pulse without effecting the

801
Technical manual
Section 20 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Basic IED functions

system. If contact bounce occurs more than 50 ms, for example, it is less than 59950 ms
between the two most adjacent positive (or negative) flanks, the minute pulse will not be
accepted.

Binary synchronization example M11346-74 v5

An IED is configured to use only binary input for time synchronization, and a valid binary input
is applied to a binary input card. The HMI is used to tell the IED the approximate time, and the
minute pulse is then used to synchronize the IED. Minute pulse means that each pulse occurs
one minute after the previous pulse, so the first pulse is not used at all. The second pulse will
probably be rejected due to the spike filter. The third pulse will give the IED a good time, and
will reset the time so that the fourth pulse will occur on a minute border. After the first three
minutes, the time in the IED will be good if the coarse time is set properly via the HMI or if the
RTC backup still keeps the time since last up-time. If the minute pulse is removed, for example,
for an hour, the internal time will drift by maximum the error rate in the internal clock. If the
minute pulse is returned, the first pulse is automatically rejected. The second pulse will
possibly be rejected due to the spike filter. The third pulse will set the time if the time offset is
more than 500 ms or adjust the time if the time offset is small enough. If the time is set, the
application will be brought to a safe state before the time is set. If the time is adjusted, the
time will reach its destination within one minute.

Synchronization via IRIG-B module M11346-146 v8

IRIG-B is a protocol used only for time synchronization. A clock can provide local time of the
year in this format. The “B” in IRIG-B states that 100 bits per second are transmitted and the
message is sent every second. After IRIG-B there are numbers stating if and how the signal is
modulated and the information transmitted.

To receive IRIG-B there are two connectors in the IRIG-B module, one galvanic BNC connector
and one optical ST connector. IRIG-B 12x messages can be supplied via the galvanic interface,
and IRIG-B 00x messages can be supplied via either the galvanic interface or the optical
interface, where x (in 00x or 12x) means a number in the range of 0-7.

“00” means that a base band is used, and the information can be fed into the IRIG-B module via
the BNC contact or an optical fiber. “12” means that a 1 kHz modulation is used. In this case the
information must go into the module via the BNC connector.

If the x in 00x or 12x is 4, 5, 6 or 7, the time message from IRIG-B contains information of the
year. If the x is 0, 1, 2 or 3, the information contains only the time within the year, and year
information has to be set via PCM600 or local HMI.

The IRIG-B module also takes care of IEEE1344 messages that are sent by IRIG-B clocks, as IRIG-
B previously did not have any year information. IEEE1344 is compatible with IRIG-B and
contains year information and information of the time-zone.

20.1.4 Technical data IP9658-1 v1

M12331-1 v7

Table 745: Time synchronization, time tagging

Function Value
Time tagging resolution, events and sampled measurement values 1 ms
Time tagging error with synchronization once/min (minute pulse ± 1.0 ms typically
synchronization), events and sampled measurement values
Time tagging error with SNTP synchronization, sampled measurement values ± 1.0 ms typically

802
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 20
Basic IED functions

20.2 Parameter setting groups IP1745-1 v1

20.2.1 Functionality M12006-6 v7

Use the six different groups of settings to optimize the IED operation for different power
system conditions. Creating and switching between fine-tuned setting sets, either from the
local HMI or configurable binary inputs, results in a highly adaptable IED that can be applied to
a variety of power system scenarios.

20.2.2 Function block IP9661-1 v1

M12010-3 v3

ACTVGRP
ACTGRP1 GRP1
ACTGRP2 GRP2
ACTGRP3 GRP3
ACTGRP4 GRP4
ACTGRP5 GRP5
ACTGRP6 GRP6
SETCHGD
REMSETEN

IEC05000433-3-en.vsd
IEC05000433 V3 EN-US

Figure 434: ActiveGroup function block

20.2.3 Signals IP14073-1 v2

PID-6558-INPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 746: ACTVGRP Input signals

Name Type Default Description
ACTGRP1 BOOLEAN 0 Selects setting group 1 as active
ACTGRP2 BOOLEAN 0 Selects setting group 2 as active
ACTGRP3 BOOLEAN 0 Selects setting group 3 as active
ACTGRP4 BOOLEAN 0 Selects setting group 4 as active
ACTGRP5 BOOLEAN 0 Selects setting group 5 as active
ACTGRP6 BOOLEAN 0 Selects setting group 6 as active

PID-6558-OUTPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 747: ACTVGRP Output signals

Name Type Description
GRP1 BOOLEAN Setting group 1 is active
GRP2 BOOLEAN Setting group 2 is active
GRP3 BOOLEAN Setting group 3 is active
GRP4 BOOLEAN Setting group 4 is active
GRP5 BOOLEAN Setting group 5 is active
GRP6 BOOLEAN Setting group 6 is active
SETCHGD BOOLEAN Pulse when setting changed
REMSETEN BOOLEAN Settings over IEC 61850 enabled

803
Technical manual
Section 20 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Basic IED functions

20.2.4 Settings IP11026-1 v2

PID-3572-SETTINGS v4

Table 748: SETGRPS Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ActiveSetGrp SettingGroup1 - - SettingGroup1 Active setting group
SettingGroup2
SettingGroup3
SettingGroup4
SettingGroup5
SettingGroup6
MaxNoSetGrp 1-6 - 1 1 Max number of setting groups 1-6

20.2.5 Operation principle M12008-6 v3

M12008-8 v11
Parameter setting groups ActiveGroup function has six functional inputs, each corresponding
to one of the setting groups stored in the IED. Activation of any of these inputs changes the
active setting group. Eight functional output signals are available for configuration purposes,
so that information on the active setting group is always available.

A setting group is selected by using the local HMI, from a front connected personal computer,
remotely from the station control or station monitoring system or by activating the
corresponding input to the ActiveGroup function block.

Each input of the function block can be configured to connect to any of the binary inputs in the
IED. To do this PCM600 must be used.

The external control signals are used for activating a suitable setting group when adaptive
functionality is necessary. Input signals that should activate setting groups must be either
permanent or a pulse exceeding 400 ms.

More than one input may be activated at the same time. In such cases the lower order setting
group has priority. This means that if for example both group four and group two are set to be
activated, group two will be the one activated.

Every time a setting is changed, the output signal SETCHGD is sending a pulse. Activating or
deactivating test mode is made by changing a parameter, consequently this will also cause a
pulse on the SETCHGD output.

The parameter MaxNoSetGrp defines the maximum number of setting groups in use to switch
between.

The output REMSETEN indicates whether setting changes over IEC 61850 are enabled or not.
Per default, this is not enabled, which results in REMSETEN being at a logical low level. If setting
changes via IEC 61850 are enabled, then REMSETEN will be a logical high. The setting changes
over IEC 61850 is enabled with the setting EnableSettings in the IEC 61850-8-1 configuration
under Main menu/Configuration/Communication/Station communication/IEC
61850-8-1/IEC 61850-8-1. Please refer to documentation for IEC 61850 for further details.

Switching can only be done within that number of groups. The number of setting groups
selected to be used will be filtered so only the setting groups used will be shown on the
Parameter Setting Tool.

804
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 20
Basic IED functions

ACTIVATE GROUP 6
ACTIVATE GROUP 5
ACTIVATE GROUP 4
ACTIVATE GROUP 3
ACTIVATE GROUP 2
+RL2 ACTIVATE GROUP 1
ACTVGRP
IOx-Bly1
Æ ACTGRP1 GRP1

IOx-Bly2
Æ ACTGRP2 GRP2

IOx-Bly3 ACTGRP3 GRP3

Æ
IOx-Bly4
Æ ACTGRP4 GRP4

IOx-Bly5
Æ ACTGRP5 GRP5

IOx-Bly6
Æ ACTGRP6 GRP6

SETCHGD

REMSETEN

IEC05000119-3-en.vsd
IEC05000119 V3 EN-US

Figure 435: Connection of the function to external circuits

The above example also includes seven output signals, for confirmation of which group that is
active.

20.3 Test mode functionality TESTMODE IP1647-1 v3

20.3.1 Functionality M4803-3 v10

When entering IED test mode there is an option to block all functions. Active test mode is
indicated by a flashing yellow Start LED on the LHMI. After that, it is possible to unblock
arbitrarily selected functions from the LHMI to perform required tests.

When leaving TESTMODE, all blockings are removed (except for functions that have their block
input active), and the IED resumes normal operation. However, if during TESTMODE operation,
power is removed and later restored, the IED will remain in TESTMODE with the same
protection functions blocked or unblocked as before the power was removed. All testing will
be done with actually set and configured values within the IED. No settings will be changed,
thus mistakes are avoided.

Forcing of binary input and output signals is only possible when the IED is in IED test mode.

20.3.2 Function block SEMOD54888-4 v5

TESTMODE
IED_TEST TEST
IED_TEST
BLOCK
NOEVENT
INPUT
SETTING
IEC61850

IEC14000072-1-en.vsd
IEC09000219 V2 EN-US

Figure 436: TESTMODE function block

805
Technical manual
Section 20 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Basic IED functions

20.3.3 Signals IP9680-1 v2

PID-3995-INPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 749: TESTMODE Input signals

Name Type Default Description
IED_TEST BOOLEAN 0 Activate IED test mode

PID-3995-OUTPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 750: TESTMODE Output signals

Name Type Description
TEST BOOLEAN In test via IED TEST or via LD0 Mode
IED_TEST BOOLEAN IED test mode is active
BLOCK BOOLEAN Active when LD0 is blocked or test blocked
NOEVENT BOOLEAN Event disabled during test mode
INPUT BOOLEAN IED TEST input is active
SETTING BOOLEAN IED test mode setting is On
IEC61850 BOOLEAN Active when LD0 Mode is in Blocked, Test or Test blocked

20.3.4 Settings IP11343-1 v2

PID-6584-SETTINGS v4

Table 751: TESTMODE Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
IEDTestMode Off - - Off Activate IED Test mode
On
EventDisable Off - - Off Event disable during test mode
On
BlockAllFunc Off - - On Block all functions when entering IED
On test mode
CmdTestEd1 Off - - Off Require test bit in command at test
On mode (only for IEC61850 Ed1)

20.3.5 Operation principle IP12116-1 v4

M12015-4 v10
Set the IED in test mode by

• configuration, activating the input SIGNAL on the function block TESTMODE.

• setting TestMode to On in the local HMI, under Main menu/TEST/IED test mode.

While the IED is in test mode, the output ACTIVE of the function block TESTMODE is activated.
The outputs of the function block TESTMODE shows the cause of the “Test mode: being in On”
state. If the input from the configuration (OUTPUT signal is activated) or setting from local
HMI (SETTING signal is activated).

While the IED is in test mode, the yellow Start LED will flash and all functions can be blocked
depending on the configuration of the testmode component. Any function can be unblocked
individually regarding functionality and event signalling.
M11828-3 v8
The deblocking is reseted when exiting test mode.

806
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 20
Basic IED functions

The blocking of a function concerns all output signals from the actual function, so no outputs
will be activated.

If the IED is restarted while set to IED TESTMODE by a binary input all functions
will be temporarily unblocked during startup, which might cause unwanted
operations.

The TESTMODE function block might be used to automatically block functions when a test
handle is inserted in a test switch. A contact in the test switch (RTXP24 contact 29-30) can
supply a binary input which in turn is configured to the TESTMODE function block.

Each of the functions includes the blocking from the TESTMODE function block.

The functions can also be blocked from sending events over IEC 61850 station bus to prevent
filling station and SCADA databases with test events, for example during a commissioning or
maintenance test.

20.4 IED identifiers TERMINALID IP15060-1 v2

20.4.1 Functionality M15324-3 v6

IED identifiers (TERMINALID) function allows the user to identify the individual IED in the
system, not only in the substation, but in a whole region or a country.

Use only characters A-Z, a-z and 0-9 in station, object and unit names.

20.4.2 Settings GUID-3C49A222-FFE4-492B-A96C-9E9965FA2CB4 v2

PID-4034-SETTINGS v4

Table 752: TERMINALID Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
StationName 0 - 18 - 1 Station name Station name
StationNumber 0 - 99999 - 1 0 Station number
ObjectName 0 - 18 - 1 Object name Object name
ObjectNumber 0 - 99999 - 1 0 Object number
UnitName 0 - 18 - 1 Unit name Unit name
UnitNumber 0 - 99999 - 1 0 Unit number
IEDMainFunType 0 - 255 - 1 0 IED main function type for
IEC60870-5-103
TechnicalKey 0 - 16 - 1 AA0B0Q0A0 Technical key (part 1)
0 - 16 - 1 Technical key (part 2)
0 - 16 - 1 Technical key (part 3)
0 - 16 - 1 Technical key (part 4)

807
Technical manual
Section 20 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Basic IED functions

20.5 Product information PRODINF GUID-F67243CA-2429-4118-BBFF-3D62BF55E080 v2

20.5.1 Functionality GUID-D78786E6-C34A-4E63-9D1E-0582C8F1F7E1 v7

The Product identifiers function contains constant data (i.e. not possible to change) that
uniquely identifies the IED:

• ProductVer
• ProductDef
• FirmwareVer
• SerialNo
• OrderingNo
• ProductionDate
• IEDProdType

The settings are visible on the local HMI , under Main menu/Diagnostics/IED status/Product
identifiers and under Main menu/Diagnostics/IED Status/IED identifiers

This information is very helpful when interacting with ABB product support (e.g. during repair
and maintenance).

20.5.2 Settings GUID-168CD792-8811-43B5-8760-74ED82DE17F7 v4

The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

20.5.3 Factory defined settings M11789-39 v10

The factory defined settings are very useful for identifying a specific version and very helpful in
the case of maintenance, repair, interchanging IEDs between different Substation Automation
Systems and upgrading. The factory made settings can not be changed by the customer. They
can only be viewed. The settings are found in the local HMI under Main menu/Diagnostics/IED
status/Product identifiers

The following identifiers are available:

• IEDProdType
• Describes the type of the IED. Example: REL650
• ProductDef
• Describes the release number from the production. Example: 2.1.0
• FirmwareVer
• Describes the firmware version.
• The firmware version can be checked from Main menu/Diagnostics/IED status/
Product identifiers
• Firmware version numbers run independently from the release production numbers.
For every release number there can be one or more firmware versions depending on
the small issues corrected in between releases.
• ProductVer
• Describes the product version. Example: 2.1.0

1 is the Major version of the manufactured product this means, new platform of the product
2 is the Minor version of the manufactured product this means, new functions or new hardware
added to the product

808
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 20
Basic IED functions

3 is the Major revision of the manufactured product this means, functions or hardware is either
changed or enhanced in the product

• IEDMainFunType
• Main function type code according to IEC 60870-5-103. Example: 128 (meaning line
protection).
• SerialNo
• OrderingNo
• ProductionDate

20.6 Signal matrix for binary inputs SMBI SEMOD55793-1 v2

20.6.1 Functionality M15302-3 v5

The Signal matrix for binary inputs (SMBI) function is used within the Application
Configuration Tool (ACT) in direct relation with the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT), see the
application manual to get information about how binary inputs are brought in for one IED
configuration.

20.6.2 Function block M15306-3 v3

SMBI
^VIN1 ^BI1
^VIN2 ^BI2
^VIN3 ^BI3
^VIN4 ^BI4
^VIN5 ^BI5
^VIN6 ^BI6
^VIN7 ^BI7
^VIN8 ^BI8
^VIN9 ^BI9
^VIN10 ^BI10

IEC05000434-2-en.vsd
IEC05000434 V2 EN-US

Figure 437: SMBI function block

20.6.3 Signals SEMOD55814-1 v2

PID-3940-INPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 753: SMBI Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BI1 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input
BI2 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input
BI3 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input
BI4 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input
BI5 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input
BI6 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input
BI7 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input
BI8 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input
BI9 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input
BI10 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input

809
Technical manual
Section 20 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Basic IED functions

PID-3940-OUTPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 754: SMBI Output signals

Name Type Description
BI1 BOOLEAN Binary input 1
BI2 BOOLEAN Binary input 2
BI3 BOOLEAN Binary input 3
BI4 BOOLEAN Binary input 4
BI5 BOOLEAN Binary input 5
BI6 BOOLEAN Binary input 6
BI7 BOOLEAN Binary input 7
BI8 BOOLEAN Binary input 8
BI9 BOOLEAN Binary input 9
BI10 BOOLEAN Binary input 10

20.6.4 Operation principle M15305-3 v5

The Signal matrix for binary inputs (SMBI) function , see figure 437, receives its inputs from the
real (hardware) binary inputs via the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT) or ACT, and makes them
available to the rest of the configuration via its outputs, BI1 to BI10. The inputs and outputs, as
well as the whole block, can be given a user defined name. These names will be represented in
SMT as information which signals shall be connected between physical IO and SMBI function.
The input/output user defined name will also appear on the respective output/input signal.

20.7 Signal matrix for binary outputs SMBO SEMOD55215-1 v2

20.7.1 Functionality M15311-3 v5

The Signal matrix for binary outputs (SMBO) function is used within the Application
Configuration Tool (ACT) in direct relation with the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT), see the
application manual to get information about how binary inputs are sent from one IED
configuration.

20.7.2 Function block SEMOD54860-4 v3

SMBO
BO1 ^BO1
BO2 ^BO2
BO3 ^BO3
BO4 ^BO4
BO5 ^BO5
BO6 ^BO6
BO7 ^BO7
BO8 ^BO8
BO9 ^BO9
BO10 ^BO10

IEC05000439-2-en.vsd
IEC05000439 V2 EN-US

Figure 438: SMBO function block

810
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 20
Basic IED functions

20.7.3 Signals SEMOD55887-1 v2

PID-3831-INPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 755: SMBO Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BO1 BOOLEAN 0 Signal name for BO1 in Signal Matrix Tool
BO2 BOOLEAN 0 Signal name for BO2 in Signal Matrix Tool
BO3 BOOLEAN 0 Signal name for BO3 in Signal Matrix Tool
BO4 BOOLEAN 0 Signal name for BO4 in Signal Matrix Tool
BO5 BOOLEAN 0 Signal name for BO5 in Signal Matrix Tool
BO6 BOOLEAN 0 Signal name for BO6 in Signal Matrix Tool
BO7 BOOLEAN 0 Signal name for BO7 in Signal Matrix Tool
BO8 BOOLEAN 0 Signal name for BO8 in Signal Matrix Tool
BO9 BOOLEAN 0 Signal name for BO9 in Signal Matrix Tool
BO10 BOOLEAN 0 Signal name for BO10 in Signal Matrix Tool

20.7.4 Operation principle SEMOD55864-4 v7

The Signal matrix for binary outputs (SMBO) function , see figure 438, receives logical signal
from the IED configuration, which is transferring to the real (hardware) outputs, via the Signal
Matrix Tool (SMT) or ACT. The inputs in SMBO are BO1 to BO10 and they, as well as the whole
function block, can be tag-named. The name tags will appear in SMT as information which
signals shall be connected between physical IO and the SMBO.

20.8 Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI SEMOD55751-1 v2

20.8.1 Functionality SEMOD55744-4 v10

Signal matrix for analog inputs (SMAI), also known as the preprocessor function block,
analyses the connected four analog signals (three phases and neutral) and calculates all
relevant information from them like the phasor magnitude, phase angle, frequency, true RMS
value, harmonics, sequence components and so on. This information is then used by the
respective functions connected to this SMAI block in ACT (for example protection,
measurement or monitoring functions).

20.8.2 Function block SEMOD55766-1 v2

SEMOD54868-4 v10

SMAI1
BLOCK SPFCOUT
DFTSPFC G1AI3P
REVROT G1AI1
^GRP1L1 G1AI2
^GRP1L2 G1AI3
^GRP1L3 G1AI4
^GRP1N G1N

IEC14000027-1-en.vsd
IEC14000027 V1 EN-US

Figure 439: SMAI1 function block

Figure 439 is an example of SMAI1:n in each of the three task time groups 1, 2 or 3 where:

811
Technical manual
Section 20 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Basic IED functions

• n=1–12 in task group 1

• n=13–24 in task group 2
• n=25–36 in task group 3

The task time defines the execution repetition rate, and is 1, 3 or 8 ms respectively for the
three task time groups.
SEMOD54997-4 v9

SMAI2
BLOCK G2AI3P
REVROT G2AI1
^GRP2L1 G2AI2
^GRP2L2 G2AI3
^GRP2L3 G2AI4
^GRP2N G2N

IEC14000028-1-en.vsd
IEC14000028 V1 EN-US

Figure 440: SMAI2 function block

Figure 440 is an example of SMAI2:n to SMAI12:m in each of the three task time groups 1, 2 or 3
where:

• n=2 and m=12 in task group 1

• n=14 and m=24 in task group 2
• n=26 and m=36 in task group 3

The task time defines the execution repetition rate, and is 3, 8 or 1 ms respectively for the
three task time groups.

20.8.3 Signals SEMOD55773-1 v2

PID-3405-INPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 756: SMAI1 Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block group 1
DFTSPFC REAL 20.0 Number of samples per fundamental cycle used for DFT
calculation
REVROT BOOLEAN 0 Reverse rotation group 1
GRP1L1 STRING - First analog input used for phase L1 or L1-L2 quantity
GRP1L2 STRING - Second analog input used for phase L2 or L2-L3 quantity
GRP1L3 STRING - Third analog input used for phase L3 or L3-L1 quantity
GRP1N STRING - Fourth analog input used for residual or neutral quantity

PID-3405-OUTPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 757: SMAI1 Output signals

Name Type Description
SPFCOUT REAL Number of samples per fundamental cycle from internal DFT
reference function
G1AI3P GROUP SIGNAL Group 1 analog input 3-phase group
G1AI1 GROUP SIGNAL Group 1 analog input 1
G1AI2 GROUP SIGNAL Group 1 analog input 2
G1AI3 GROUP SIGNAL Group 1 analog input 3
G1AI4 GROUP SIGNAL Group 1 analog input 4
G1N GROUP SIGNAL Group parameter for residual sample

812
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 20
Basic IED functions

PID-3406-INPUTSIGNALS v5

Table 758: SMAI2 Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block group 2
REVROT BOOLEAN 0 Reverse rotation group 2
GRP2L1 STRING - First analog input used for phase L1 or L1-L2 quantity
GRP2L2 STRING - Second analog input used for phase L2 or L2-L3 quantity
GRP2L3 STRING - Third analog input used for phase L3 or L3-L1 quantity
GRP2N STRING - Fourth analog input used for residual or neutral quantity

PID-3406-OUTPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 759: SMAI2 Output signals

Name Type Description
G2AI3P GROUP SIGNAL Group 2 analog input 3-phase group
G2AI1 GROUP SIGNAL Group 2 analog input 1
G2AI2 GROUP SIGNAL Group 2 analog input 2
G2AI3 GROUP SIGNAL Group 2 analog input 3
G2AI4 GROUP SIGNAL Group 2 analog input 4
G2N GROUP SIGNAL Group parameter for residual sample

20.8.4 Settings SEMOD55783-1 v2

SEMOD130357-4 v3

Settings DFTRefExtOut and DFTReference shall be set to default value

InternalDFTRef if no VT inputs are available. Internal nominal frequency DFT
reference is then the reference.

813
Technical manual
Section 20 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Basic IED functions

PID-3405-SETTINGS v4

Table 760: SMAI1 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups
DFTRefExtOut InternalDFTRef - - InternalDFTRef DFT reference for external output
DFTRefGrp1
DFTRefGrp2
DFTRefGrp3
DFTRefGrp4
DFTRefGrp5
DFTRefGrp6
DFTRefGrp7
DFTRefGrp8
DFTRefGrp9
DFTRefGrp10
DFTRefGrp11
DFTRefGrp12
External DFT ref
DFTReference InternalDFTRef - - InternalDFTRef DFT reference
DFTRefGrp1
DFTRefGrp2
DFTRefGrp3
DFTRefGrp4
DFTRefGrp5
DFTRefGrp6
DFTRefGrp7
DFTRefGrp8
DFTRefGrp9
DFTRefGrp10
DFTRefGrp11
DFTRefGrp12
External DFT ref
ConnectionType Ph-N - - Ph-N Input connection type
Ph-Ph
AnalogInputType Voltage - - Voltage Analog input signal type
Current

Table 761: SMAI1 Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Negation Off - - Off Negation
NegateN
Negate3Ph
Negate3Ph+N
MinValFreqMeas 5 - 200 % 1 10 Limit for frequency calculation in % of
UBase

814
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 20
Basic IED functions

PID-3406-SETTINGS v4

Table 762: SMAI2 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups
DFTReference InternalDFTRef - - InternalDFTRef DFT reference
DFTRefGrp1
DFTRefGrp2
DFTRefGrp3
DFTRefGrp4
DFTRefGrp5
DFTRefGrp6
DFTRefGrp7
DFTRefGrp8
DFTRefGrp9
DFTRefGrp10
DFTRefGrp11
DFTRefGrp12
External DFT ref
ConnectionType Ph-N - - Ph-N Input connection type
Ph-Ph
AnalogInputType Voltage - - Voltage Analog input signal type
Current

Table 763: SMAI2 Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Negation Off - - Off Negation
NegateN
Negate3Ph
Negate3Ph+N
MinValFreqMeas 5 - 200 % 1 10 Limit for frequency calculation in % of
UBase

20.8.5 Operation principle SEMOD55746-4 v14

Every Signal matrix for analog inputs function (SMAI) can receive four analog signals (three
phases and one neutral or residual value), either voltage or current, see figure 439 and
figure 440. SMAI outputs give information about every aspect of the 3ph analog signals
acquired (phase angle, RMS value, frequency and frequency derivates etc. – 244 values in total).
The BLOCK input will force all outputs to value zero if BLOCK is TRUE (1). However, when the
disturbance recorder is connected to the single-phase outputs of SMAI, the sample data to the
disturbance recorder will not be blocked. The disturbance recorder bypasses SMAI to the
sample data channels.

System phase rotation and frequency are defined using the PhaseRotation and Frequency
settings in the primary system values PRIMVAL function. Logic 1 in the REVROT input to the
SMAI function means that the phase rotation is changed relative to the set PhaseRotation in
PRIMVAL.

The output signal AI1 to AI4 are single phase outputs which directly represent the four inputs
GRPxL1, GRPxL2, GRPxL3 and GRPxN, x=1-12. GxN (x = 1-12) is always calculated residual sum
from the first three inputs. A3P is grouped, three-phase information containing all relevant
information about four connected inputs. Note that all other functions, with a few exceptions,
use this output in configuration. Note that the SMAI function will always calculate the residual
sum of current/voltage if the input GRPxN is not connected in SMT. Applications with a few
exceptions shall always be connected to AI3P.

815
Technical manual
Section 20 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Basic IED functions

20.8.5.1 Frequency values GUID-B494B93C-B5AA-4FD6-8080-8611C34C2AD8 v5

The SMAI function includes a functionality based on the level of positive sequence voltage,
MinValFreqMeas, to validate if the frequency measurement is valid or not. If the positive
sequence voltage is lower than MinValFreqMeas, the function freezes the frequency output
value for 500 ms and after that the frequency output is set to the nominal value. A signal is
available for the SMAI function to prevent operation due to non-valid frequency values.
MinValFreqMeas is set as % of UBase/√3

If SMAI setting ConnectionType is Ph-Ph, at least two of the inputs GRPxL1, GRPxL2 and
GRPxL3, where 1≤x≤12, must be connected in order to calculate the positive sequence voltage.
Note that phase to phase inputs shall always be connected as follows: L1-L2 to GRPxL1, L2-L3
to GRPxL2, L3-L1 to GRPxL3. If SMAI setting ConnectionType is Ph-N, all three inputs GRPxL1,
GRPxL2 and GRPxL3 must be connected in order to calculate the positive sequence voltage.

If only one phase-phase voltage is available and SMAI setting ConnectionType is Ph-Ph, the
user is advised to connect two (not three) of the inputs GRPxL1, GRPxL2 and GRPxL3 to the
same voltage input as shown in figure 441 to make SMAI calculate a positive sequence voltage.

SMAI1
BLOCK SPFCOUT SAPTOF
DFTSPFC G1AI3P U3P* TRIP SAPTOF(1)_TRIP
UL1L2 BLOCK START
REVROT G1AI1
PHASEL1 G1AI2 BLKTRIP BLKDMAGN
^GRP1L1 G1AI4 FREQ
TRM_40.CH7(U) PHASEL2
G1N
^GRP1L2
PHASEL3
^GRP1L3
NEUTRAL
^GRP1N

EC10000060-3-en.vsdx
IEC10000060 V3 EN-US

Figure 441: Connection example

The above described scenario does not work if SMAI setting ConnectionType is
Ph-N. If only one phase-earth voltage is available, the same type of connection
can be used but the SMAI ConnectionType setting must still be Ph-Ph and this
has to be accounted for when setting MinValFreqMeas. If SMAI setting
ConnectionType is Ph-N and the same voltage is connected to all three SMAI
inputs, the positive sequence voltage will be zero and the frequency functions
will not work properly.

The outputs from the above configured SMAI block shall only be used for
Overfrequency protection (SAPTOF), Underfrequency protection (SAPTUF) and
Rate-of-change frequency protection (SAPFRC) due to that all other
information except frequency and positive sequence voltage might be wrongly
calculated.

20.9 Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM SEMOD55968-1 v2

20.9.1 Functionality SEMOD55976-4 v4

Summation block 3 phase function 3PHSUM is used to get the sum of two sets of three-phase
analog signals (of the same type) for those IED functions that might need it.

816
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 20
Basic IED functions

20.9.2 Function block SEMOD54885-4 v3

3PHSUM
BLOCK AI3P
REVROT AI1
^G1AI3P* AI2
^G2AI3P* AI3
AI4

IEC05000441-3-en.vsdx

IEC05000441 V3 EN-US

Figure 442: 3PHSUM function block

20.9.3 Signals SEMOD55989-1 v2

PID-6428-INPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 764: 3PHSUM Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block
BLKGR1 BOOLEAN 0 Block input for group 1
BLKGR2 BOOLEAN 0 Block input for group 2
REVROT BOOLEAN 0 Reverse rotation
G1AI3P GROUP - Group 1 three phase analog input from first SMAI
SIGNAL
G2AI3P GROUP - Group 2 three phase analog input from second SMAI
SIGNAL

PID-6428-OUTPUTSIGNALS v4

Table 765: 3PHSUM Output signals

Name Type Description
SPFCOUT REAL Number of samples per fundamental cycle from internal DFT
reference function
AI3P GROUP SIGNAL Linear combination of two connected three phase inputs
AI1 GROUP SIGNAL Linear combination of input 1 signals from both SMAI blocks
AI2 GROUP SIGNAL Linear combination of input 2 signals from both SMAI blocks
AI3 GROUP SIGNAL Linear combination of input 3 signals from both SMAI blocks
AI4 GROUP SIGNAL Linear combination of input 4 signals from both SMAI blocks

20.9.4 Settings SEMOD55995-1 v2

SEMOD130361-4 v2

Settings DFTRefExtOut and DFTReference shall be set to default value

InternalDFTRef if no VT inputs are available.

817
Technical manual
Section 20 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Basic IED functions

PID-6428-SETTINGS v3

Table 766: 3PHSUM Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups
SummationType Group1+Group2 - - Group1+Group2 Summation type
Group1-Group2
Group2-Group1
-(Group1+Group2)
DFTReference InternalDFTRef - - InternalDFTRef DFT reference
DFTRefGrp1
External DFT ref
DFTRefExtOut InternalDFTRef - - InternalDFTRef DFT reference for external output
DFTRefGrp1
External DFT ref

Table 767: 3PHSUM Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FreqMeasMinVal 5 - 200 % 1 10 Amplitude limit for frequency
calculation in % of UBase

20.9.5 Operation principle SEMOD55749-4 v6

Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM receives the three-phase signals from Signal matrix for
analog inputs function (SMAI). The BLOCK input will reset all the outputs of the function to 0.

20.10 Global base values GBASVAL GUID-2FDB0A2C-10FE-4954-B6E4-9DA2EEEF1668 v1

20.10.1 Identification
GUID-0D5405BE-E669-44C8-A208-3A4C86D39115 v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Global base values GBASVAL - -

20.10.2 Functionality GUID-D58ECA9A-9771-443D-BF84-8EF582A346BF v4

Global base values function (GBASVAL) is used to provide global values, common for all
applicable functions within the IED. One set of global values consists of values for current,
voltage and apparent power and it is possible to have twelve different sets.

This is an advantage since all applicable functions in the IED use a single source of base values.
This facilitates consistency throughout the IED and also facilitates a single point for updating
values when necessary.

Each applicable function in the IED has a parameter, GlobalBaseSel, defining one out of the
twelve sets of GBASVAL functions.

818
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 20
Basic IED functions

20.10.3 Settings GUID-C73A66FB-5D6E-4DC3-B8B5-046AEC2F1FDE v1

PID-4026-SETTINGS v5

Table 768: GBASVAL Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Global base voltage
IBase 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Global base current
SBase 1.00 - 200000.00 MVA 0.05 2000.00 Global base apparent power

20.11 Primary system values PRIMVAL

20.11.1 Identification
GUID-B8B3535D-227B-4151-9E98-BEB85F4D54DE v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Primary system values PRIMVAL - -

20.11.2 Functionality M15288-3 v6

The rated system frequency and phase rotation direction are set under Main menu/
Configuration/ Power system/ Primary Values in the local HMI and PCM600 parameter
setting tree.

20.11.3 Settings
PID-1626-SETTINGS v17

Table 769: PRIMVAL Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Frequency 50.0 - 60.0 Hz 10.0 50.0 Rated system frequency
PhaseRotation Normal=L1L2L3 - - Normal=L1L2L3 System phase rotation
Inverse=L3L2L1

819
Technical manual
820
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 21
IED hardware

Section 21 IED hardware

21.1 Overview IP14270-1 v1

21.1.1 Variants of case size with local HMI display M15024-3 v5

IEC04000458-2-en.psd
IEC04000458 V2 EN-US

Figure 443: 1/2 19” case with local HMI display.

821
Technical manual
Section 21 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
IED hardware

21.1.2 Case from the rear side IP16286-1 v1

M16105-3 v7

Table 770: Designations for 1/2 x 19” casing with 1 TRM slot

Module Rear Positions

PSM X11
BIM, BOM or IOM X31 and X32 etc. to X51
and X52
SLM X301:A, B, C, D
LDCM, IRIG-B or RS485 X302, X303
OEM X311:A, B, C, D
LDCM, IRIG-B or RS485 X312, X313
TRM X401

1MRK002801-AC-2-670-1.2-PG V.3 EN
1MRK002801-AC-2-670-1.2-PG V3 EN-US

21.2 Hardware modules IP14529-1 v1

21.2.1 Overview M11562-3 v7

Table 771: Basic modules

Module Description
Power supply module (PSM) Including a regulated DC/DC converter that supplies auxiliary
voltage to all static circuits.

• An internal fail alarm output is available.

Numerical module (NUM) Module for overall application control. All information is
processed or passed through this module, such as
configuration, settings and communication.
Local Human machine interface (LHMI) The module consists of LED:s, an LCD, a push button
keyboard and an ethernet connector used to connect a PC to
the IED.
Transformer input module (TRM) Transformer module that galvanically separates the internal
circuits from the VT and CT circuits. It has 12 analog inputs.
Analog digital conversion module (ADM) Slot mounted PCB with A/D conversion.

822
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 21
IED hardware

Table 772: Application specific modules

Module Description
Binary input module (BIM) Module with 16 optically isolated binary inputs
Binary output module (BOM) Module with 24 single outputs or 12 double-pole command
outputs including supervision function
Binary I/O module (IOM) Module with 8 optically isolated binary inputs, 10 outputs and
2 fast signalling outputs.
Line data communication modules (LDCM), Modules used for digital communication to remote terminal.
short range, medium range
Serial SPA/LON/IEC 60870-5-103 Used for SPA/LON/IEC 60870–5–103 communication
communication modules (SLM)
Optical ethernet module (OEM) PMC board for IEC 61850 based communication.
IRIG-B Time synchronization module (IRIG-B) Module with 2 inputs. One is used for handling both pulse-
width modulated signals and amplitude modulated signals
and one is used for optical input type ST for PPS time
synchronization.

21.2.2 Numeric processing module (NUM) IP14288-1 v1

21.2.2.1 Introduction M12643-3 v1

The Numeric processing module (NUM), is a CPU-module that handles all protection functions
and logic.

For communication with high speed modules, e.g. analog input modules and high speed serial
interfaces, the NUM is equipped with a Compact PCI bus. The NUM is the compact PCI system
card i.e. it controls bus mastering, clock distribution and receives interrupts.

21.2.2.2 Functionality M12644-3 v3

The NUM, Numeric processing module is a high performance, compact-PCI CPU module. It is
6U high and occupies one slot. Contact with the backplane is via two compact PCI connectors
and an euro connector.

The NUM has one PMC slot (32-bit IEEE P1386.1 compliant) and two PC-MIP slots onto which
mezzanine cards such as SLM or LDCM can be mounted.

To reduce bus loading of the compact PCI bus in the backplane the NUM has one internal PCI
bus for internal resources and the PMC/PC-MIP slots and external PCI accesses through the
backplane are buffered in a PCI/PCI bridge.

The application code and configuration data are stored in flash memory using a flash file
system.

The NUM is equipped with a real time clock. It uses a capacitor for power backup of the real
time clock.

No forced cooling is used on this standard module because of the low power dissipation.

823
Technical manual
Section 21 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
IED hardware

21.2.2.3 Block diagram M12651-3 v1

Compact
Flash Logic

PMC
connector
PC-MIP

connector
UBM
Memory Ethernet

North
bridge

Backplane
PCI-PCI-

connector
bridge

CPU

en04000473.vsd
IEC04000473 V1 EN-US

Figure 444: Numeric processing module block diagram

21.2.3 Power supply module (PSM) IP15594-1 v1

21.2.3.1 Introduction M11595-3 v5

The power supply module is used to provide the correct internal voltages and full isolation
between the IED and the battery system. An internal fail alarm output is available.

21.2.3.2 Design IP14278-1 v1

M6377-3 v2
There are two types of the power supply module. They are designed for different DC input
voltage ranges see table 773. The power supply module contains a built-in, self-regulated
DC/DC converter that provides full isolation between the terminal and the external battery
system.

The DC input is protected against inverse polarity within the rated DC voltage range.

824
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 21
IED hardware

Connection diagram M6377-8 v3

IEC08000476 V2 EN-US

Figure 445: PSM Connection diagram.

21.2.3.3 Technical data SEMOD52801-1 v1

M12286-1 v5

Table 773: PSM - Power supply module

Quantity Rated value Nominal range
Auxiliary DC voltage, EL (input) EL = (24-60) V EL ±20%
EL = (90-250) V EL ±20%
Power consumption 32 W typically -
Auxiliary DC power in-rush < 10 A during 0.1 s -

21.2.4 Local human-machine interface (Local HMI) SEMOD56218-5 v3

Refer to section "Local HMI" for information.

21.2.5 Transformer input module (TRM) IP15581-1 v1

21.2.5.1 Introduction M14875-3 v9

The transformer input module is used to galvanically separate and adapt the secondary
currents and voltages generated by the measuring transformers. The module has twelve
inputs in different combinations of currents and voltage inputs.

Alternative connectors of Ring lug or Compression type can be ordered.

21.2.5.2 Design M14858-3 v8

The transformer module has 12 input transformers, 7 voltage and 5 current input transformers.

TRM variants are available depending on the product. The rated values and channel type of the
current inputs are selected at order.

Transformer input module for measuring should not be used with current
transformers intended for protection purposes, due to limitations in overload
characteristics.

825
Technical manual
Section 21 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
IED hardware

The TRM is connected to the ADM and NUM.

For configuration of the input and output signals, refer to section "Signal matrix for analog
inputs SMAI".

1MRK006501-AF-TRM-IEC-6502P1 V1 EN-US

Figure 446: TRM connection diagram

21.2.5.3 Technical data SEMOD55412-1 v1

M16988-1 v11

Table 774: TRM - Energizing quantities, rated values and limits for protection transformer
Description Value
Frequency
Rated frequency fr 50/60 Hz

Operating range fr ± 10%

Current inputs
Rated current Ir 1 or 5 A

Operating range (0-100) x Ir

Thermal withstand 100 × Ir for 1 s *)

30 × Ir for 10 s
10 × Ir for 1 min
4 × Ir continuously

Dynamic withstand 250 × Ir one half wave

Burden < 20 mVA at Ir = 1 A

< 150 mVA at Ir = 5 A

Table continues on next page

826
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 21
IED hardware

Description Value
*) max. 350 A for 1 s when COMBITEST test switch is included.
Voltage inputs **)
Rated voltage Ur 110 or 220 V

Operating range 0 - 340 V

Thermal withstand 450 V for 10 s
420 V continuously
Burden < 20 mVA at 110 V
< 80 mVA at 220 V
**) all values for individual voltage inputs
Note! All current and voltage data are specified as RMS values at rated frequency

21.2.6 Analog digital conversion module, with time synchronization

(ADM) IP14285-1 v1

21.2.6.1 Introduction M13664-3 v4

The Analog/Digital module has twelve analog inputs, 2 PC-MIP slots and 1 PMC slot. The PC-
MIP slot is used for PC-MIP cards and the PMC slot for PMC cards according to table 775. The
OEM card should always be mounted on the ADM board.

Table 775: PC-MIP cards and PMC cards

PC-MIP cards PMC cards
SR-LDCM SLM
MR-LDCM OEM
IRIG-B
RS485

21.2.6.2 Design M13666-3 v2

The Analog digital conversion module input signals are voltage and current from the
transformer module. Shunts are used to adapt the current signals to the electronic voltage
level. To gain dynamic range for the current inputs, two shunts with separate A\D channels are
used for each input current. In this way a 20 bit dynamic range is obtained with a 16 bit A\D
converter.

Input signals are sampled with a sampling freqency of 5 kHz at 50 Hz system frequency and 6
kHz at 60 Hz system frequency.

The A\D converted signals goes through a filter with a cut off frequency of 500 Hz and are
reported to the numerical module (NUM) with 1 kHz at 50 Hz system frequency and 1,2 kHz at
60 Hz system frequency.

827
Technical manual
Section 21 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
IED hardware

Channel 1
AD1 Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4
AD2
Channel 5
1.2v Channel 6
AD3 Channel 7
Channel 8
Channel 9
AD4 Channel 10
Channel 11
Channel 12

PMC

level shift

PC-MIP
2.5v

PCI to PCI

PC-MIP

en05000474.vsd
IEC05000474 V1 EN-US

Figure 447: The ADM layout

21.2.7 Binary input module (BIM) IP14535-1 v1

21.2.7.1 Introduction M1769-3 v4

The binary input module has 16 optically isolated inputs and is available in two versions, one
standard and one with enhanced pulse counting capabilities on the inputs to be used with the
pulse counter function. The binary inputs are freely programmable and can be used for the
input of logical signals to any of the functions. They can also be included in the disturbance
recording and event-recording functions. This enables extensive monitoring and evaluation of
operation of the IED and for all associated electrical circuits.

828
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 21
IED hardware

21.2.7.2 Design M11586-3 v6

The Binary input module contains 16 optical isolated binary inputs. The voltage level of the
binary input is selected at order.

For configuration of the input signals, refer to section "Signal matrix for binary inputs SMBI".

A signal discriminator detects and blocks oscillating signals. When blocked, a hysteresis
function may be set to release the input at a chosen frequency, making it possible to use the
input for pulse counting. The blocking frequency may also be set.

Well defined input high and input low voltages ensure normal operation at battery supply earth
faults, see figure 448 The figure shows the typical operating characteristics of the binary
inputs of the four voltage levels.

The standard version of binary inputs gives an improved capability to withstand disturbances
and should generally be used when pulse counting is not required. Inputs are debounced by
software.

I/O events are time stamped locally on each module for minimum time deviance and stored by
the event recorder if present.

[V]

300

176
144
88
72
38
32
19
17

24/30V 48/60V 110/125V 220/250V

xx06000391-2-en.vsd
IEC06000391 V2 EN-US

Figure 448: Voltage dependence for the binary inputs

Operation

Operation uncertain

No operation
IEC99000517-ABC V1 EN-US

829
Technical manual
Section 21 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
IED hardware

This binary input module communicates with the Numerical module (NUM).

The design of all binary inputs enables the burn off of the oxide of the relay contact connected
to the input, despite the low, steady-state power consumption, which is shown in figure 449
and 450.

[mA]
50

55 [ms]

en07000104-3.vsd
IEC07000104 V3 EN-US

Figure 449: Approximate binary input inrush current for the standard version of BIM.

[mA]
50

5.5 [ms]

en07000105-1.vsd
IEC07000105 V2 EN-US

Figure 450: Approximate binary input inrush current for the BIM version with enhanced
pulse counting capabilities.

830
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 21
IED hardware

IEC99000503 V3 EN-US

Figure 451: Connection diagram

21.2.7.3 Signals
PID-6435-OUTPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 776: BIM Output signals

Name Type Description
STATUS BOOLEAN Binary input module status
BI1 BOOLEAN Binary input 1 value
BI2 BOOLEAN Binary input 2 value
BI3 BOOLEAN Binary input 3 value
BI4 BOOLEAN Binary input 4 value
BI5 BOOLEAN Binary input 5 value
BI6 BOOLEAN Binary input 6 value
BI7 BOOLEAN Binary input 7 value
BI8 BOOLEAN Binary input 8 value
BI9 BOOLEAN Binary input 9 value
Table continues on next page

831
Technical manual
Section 21 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
IED hardware

Name Type Description

BI10 BOOLEAN Binary input 10 value
BI11 BOOLEAN Binary input 11 value
BI12 BOOLEAN Binary input 12 value
BI13 BOOLEAN Binary input 13 value
BI14 BOOLEAN Binary input 14 value
BI15 BOOLEAN Binary input 15 value
BI16 BOOLEAN Binary input 16 value
OSCWRN BOOLEAN Oscillation warning

21.2.7.4 Settings
PID-3473-SETTINGS v2

Table 777: BIM Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off/On
On
DebounceTime 0.001 - 0.020 s 0.001 0.001 Debounce time for binary inputs
OscBlock 1 - 40 Hz 1 40 Oscillation block limit
OscRelease 1 - 30 Hz 1 30 Oscillation release limit

21.2.7.5 Monitored data

PID-3473-MONITOREDDATA v2

Table 778: BIM Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
STATUS BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Binary input module status
1=Error

21.2.7.6 Technical data SEMOD55338-1 v1

M12576-1 v8.1.1

Table 779: BIM - Binary input module

Quantity Rated value Nominal range
Binary inputs 16 -
DC voltage, RL 24/30 V RL ±20%
48/60 V RL ±20%
110/125 V RL ±20%
220/250 V RL ±20%
Power consumption
24/30 V, 50 mA max. 0.05 W/input -
48/60 V, 50 mA max. 0.1 W/input
110/125 V, 50 mA max. 0.2 W/input
220/250 V, 50 mA max. 0.4 W/input
220/250 V, 110 mA max. 0.5 W/input
Counter input frequency 10 pulses/s max -
Table continues on next page

832
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 21
IED hardware

Quantity Rated value Nominal range

Oscillating signal discriminator Blocking settable 1–40 Hz
Release settable 1–30 Hz
Debounce filter Settable 1–20 ms
Binary input operate time 3 ms -
(Debounce filter set to 0 ms)

Maximum 176 binary input channels may be activated simultaneously with

influencing factors within nominal range.

The stated operate time for functions include the operating time for the binary
inputs and outputs.

M50609-2 v9

Table 780: BIM - Binary input module with enhanced pulse counting capabilities
Quantity Rated value Nominal range
Binary inputs 16 -
DC voltage, RL 24/30 V RL ±20%
48/60 V RL ±20%
110/125 V RL ±20%
220/250 V RL ±20%
Power consumption
24/30 V max. 0.05 W/input -
48/60 V max. 0.1 W/input
110/125 V max. 0.2 W/input
220/250 V max. 0.4 W/input
Counter input frequency 10 pulses/s max -
Balanced counter input frequency 40 pulses/s max -
Oscillating signal discriminator Blocking settable 1–40 Hz
Release settable 1–30 Hz
*Debounce filter Settable 1-20 ms
Binary input operate time 3 ms -
(Debounce filter set to 0 ms)
* Note: For compliance with surge immunity a debounce filter time setting of 5 ms is required.

The stated operate time for functions include the operating time for the binary
inputs and outputs.

21.2.8 Binary output modules (BOM) IP14536-1 v1

21.2.8.1 Introduction M6938-3 v4

The binary output module has 24 independent output relays and is used for trip output or any
signaling purpose.

833
Technical manual
Section 21 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
IED hardware

21.2.8.2 Design M1819-3 v4

The binary output module (BOM) has 24 software supervised output relays. Each pair of relays
have a common power source input to the contacts, see figure 452. This should be considered
when connecting the wiring to the connection terminal on the back of the IED.

The high closing and carrying current capability allows connection directly to breaker trip and
closing coils. If breaking capability is required to manage fail of the breaker auxiliary contacts
normally breaking the trip coil current, a parallel reinforcement is required.

For configuration of the output signals, refer to section "Signal matrix for binary outputs
SMBO".

Output module

xx00000299.vsd

IEC00000299 V1 EN-US

Figure 452: Relay pair example

1 Output connection from relay 1

2 Output signal power source connection
3 Output connection from relay 2

834
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 21
IED hardware

IEC99000505 V4 EN-US

Figure 453: Connection diagram

21.2.8.3 Signals
PID-3439-INPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 781: BOM Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block binary outputs
BO1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 1
BO2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 2
BO3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 3
BO4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 4
BO5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 5
BO6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 6
BO7 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 7
BO8 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 8
BO9 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 9
BO10 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 10
BO11 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 11
BO12 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 12
BO13 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 13
BO14 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 14
Table continues on next page

835
Technical manual
Section 21 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
IED hardware

Name Type Default Description

BO15 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 15
BO16 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 16
BO17 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 17
BO18 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 18
BO19 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 19
BO20 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 20
BO21 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 21
BO22 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 22
BO23 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 23
BO24 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 24

PID-3439-OUTPUTSIGNALS v1

Table 782: BOM Output signals

Name Type Description
STATUS BOOLEAN Binary output part of IOM module status

21.2.8.4 Settings
PID-3439-SETTINGS v2

Table 783: BOM Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off/On
On

21.2.8.5 Monitored data

PID-3439-MONITOREDDATA v2

Table 784: BOM Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
STATUS BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Binary output part of IOM module
1=Error status
BO1VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 1 value
0=0
BO1FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 1 force
1=Forced
BO1 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 1 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO2VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 2 value
0=0
BO2FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 2 force
1=Forced
BO2 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 2 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO3VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 3 value
0=0
Table continues on next page

836
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 21
IED hardware

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

BO3FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 3 force
1=Forced
BO3 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 3 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO4VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 4 value
0=0
BO4FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 4 force
1=Forced
BO4 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 4 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO5VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 5 value
0=0
BO5FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 5 force
1=Forced
BO5 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 5 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO6VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 6 value
0=0
BO6FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 6 force
1=Forced
BO6 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 6 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO7VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 7 value
0=0
BO7FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 7 force
1=Forced
BO7 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 7 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO8VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 8 value
0=0
BO8FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 8 force
1=Forced
BO8 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 8 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO9VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 9 value
0=0
BO9FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 9 force
1=Forced
BO9 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 9 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO10VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 10 value
0=0
BO10FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 10 force
1=Forced
BO10 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 10 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
Table continues on next page

837
Technical manual
Section 21 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
IED hardware

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

BO11VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - nary output 11 value
0=0
BO11FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 11 force
1=Forced
BO11 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 11 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO12VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 12 value
0=0
BO12FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 12 force
1=Forced
BO12 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 12 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO13VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 13 value
0=0
BO13FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 13 force
1=Forced
BO13 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 13 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO14VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 14 value
0=0
BO14FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 14 force
1=Forced
BO14 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 14 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO15VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 15 value
0=0
BO15FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 15 force
1=Forced
BO15 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 15 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO16VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 16 value
0=0
BO16FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 16 force
1=Forced
BO16 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 16 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO17VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 17 value
0=0
B017FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 17 force
1=Forced
BO17 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 17 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO18VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 18 value
0=0
BO18FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 18 force
1=Forced
Table continues on next page

838
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 21
IED hardware

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

BO18 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 18 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO19VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 19 value
0=0
BO19FORCE BOOLEAN 1=Forced - Binary output 19 force
0=Normal
BO19 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 19 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO20VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 20 value
0=0
BO20FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 20 force
1=Forced
BO20 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 20 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO21VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 21 value
0=0
BO21FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 21 force
1=Forced
BO21 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 21 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO22VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 22 value
0=0
BO22FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 22 force
1=Forced
BO22 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 22 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO23VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 23 value
0=0
BO23FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 23 force
1=Forced
BO23 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 23 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO24VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 24 value
0=0
BO24FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - nary output 24 force
1=Forced
BO24 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 24 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked

839
Technical manual
Section 21 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
IED hardware

21.2.8.6 Technical data SEMOD55355-1 v1

M12441-1 v10

Table 785: BOM - Binary output module contact data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2)
Function or quantity Trip and Signal relays
Binary outputs 24
Max system voltage 250 V AC, DC
Min load voltage 24VDC
Test voltage across open contact, 1 min 1000 V rms
Current carrying capacity
Per relay, continuous 8A
Per relay, 1 s 10 A
Per process connector pin, continuous 12 A
Max operations with load 1000
Max operations with no load 10000
Making capacity at inductive load with L/R > 10 ms
0.2 s 30 A
1.0 s 10 A

Breaking capacity for AC, cos j > 0.4 250 V/8.0 A

Breaking capacity for DC with L/R < 40 ms 48 V/1 A

110 V/0.4 A
125 V/0.35 A
220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A
Operating time < 6 ms

Maximum 72 outputs may be activated simultaneously with influencing factors

within nominal range. After 6 ms an additional 24 outputs may be activated.
The activation time for the 96 outputs must not exceed 200 ms. 48 outputs can
be activated during 1 s. Continued activation is possible with respect to current
consumption but after 5 minutes the temperature rise will adversely affect the
hardware life. Maximum two relays per BOM/IOM should be activated
continuously due to power dissipation.

The stated operate time for functions include the operating time for the binary
inputs and outputs.

21.2.9 Binary input/output module (IOM) IP15582-1 v1

21.2.9.1 Introduction M6939-3 v6

The binary input/output module is used when only a few input and output channels are
needed. The ten standard output channels are used for trip output or any signaling purpose.
The two high speed signal output channels are used for applications where short operating
time is essential. Eight optically isolated binary inputs cater for required binary input
information.

840
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 21
IED hardware

21.2.9.2 Design IP10635-1 v1

M1718-3 v3
The binary input/output module is available in two basic versions, one with unprotected
contacts and one with MOV (Metal Oxide Varistor) protected contacts.

Inputs are designed to allow oxide burn-off from connected contacts, and increase the
disturbance immunity during normal protection operate times. This is achieved with a high
peak inrush current while having a low steady-state current, see figure 449. Inputs are
debounced by software.

Well defined input high and input low voltages ensures normal operation at battery supply
earth faults, see figure 448.

The voltage level of the inputs is selected when ordering.

I/O events are time stamped locally on each module for minimum time deviance and stored by
the event recorder if present.
M1898-3 v3
The binary I/O module, IOM, has eight optically isolated inputs and ten output relays. One of
the outputs has a change-over contact. The nine remaining output contacts are connected in
two groups. One group has five contacts with a common and the other group has four
contacts with a common, to be used as single-output channels, see figure 454.

The binary I/O module also has two high speed output channels where a reed relay is
connected in parallel to the standard output relay.

For configuration of the input and output signals, refer to sections "Signal matrix for binary
inputs SMBI" and "Signal matrix for binary outputs SMBO".

The making capacity of the reed relays are limited.

841
Technical manual
Section 21 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
IED hardware

IEC1MRK002801-AA11-UTAN-RAM V2 EN-US

Figure 454: Binary in/out module (IOM), input contacts named XA corresponds to rear
position X31, X41, and so on, and output contacts named XB to rear position
X32, X42, and so on
SEMOD175370-4 v1
The binary input/output module version with MOV protected contacts can for example be
used in applications where breaking high inductive load would cause excessive wear of the
contacts.

The test voltage across open contact is lower for this version of the binary
input/output module.

xx04000069.vsd

IEC04000069 V1 EN-US

Figure 455: IOM with MOV protection, relay example

842
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 21
IED hardware

21.2.9.3 Signals
PID-6434-OUTPUTSIGNALS v3

Table 786: IOMIN Output signals

Name Type Description
STATUS BOOLEAN Binary input part of IOM module status
BI1 BOOLEAN Binary input 1 value
BI2 BOOLEAN Binary input 2 value
BI3 BOOLEAN Binary input 3 value
BI4 BOOLEAN Binary input 4 value
BI5 BOOLEAN Binary input 5 value
BI6 BOOLEAN Binary input 6 value
BI7 BOOLEAN Binary input 7 value
BI8 BOOLEAN Binary input 8 value
OSCWRN BOOLEAN Oscillation warning

PID-4049-INPUTSIGNALS v2

Table 787: IOMOUT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLKOUT BOOLEAN 0 Block binary outputs
BO1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 1
BO2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 2
BO3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 3
BO4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 4
BO5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 5
BO6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 6
BO7 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 7
BO8 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 8
BO9 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 9
BO10 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 10
BO11 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 11
BO12 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 12

21.2.9.4 Settings
PID-4050-SETTINGS v2

Table 788: IOMIN Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Binary input/output module in
On operation (On) or not (Off)
DebounceTime 0.001 - 0.020 s 0.001 0.001 Debounce time for binary inputs
OscBlock 1 - 40 Hz 1 40 Oscillation block limit
OscRelease 1 - 30 Hz 1 30 Oscillation release limit

843
Technical manual
Section 21 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
IED hardware

21.2.9.5 Monitored data

PID-4050-MONITOREDDATA v2

Table 789: IOMIN Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
STATUS BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Binary input part of IOM module
1=Error status

PID-4049-MONITOREDDATA v2

Table 790: IOMOUT Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
BO1VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 1 value
0=0
BO1FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 1 force
1=Forced
BO1 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 1 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO2VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 2 value
0=0
BO2FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 2 force
1=Forced
BO2 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 2 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO3VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 3 value
0=0
BO3FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 3 force
1=Forced
BO3 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 3 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO4VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 4 value
0=0
BO4FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 4 force
1=Forced
BO4 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 4 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO5VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 5 value
0=0
BO5FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 5 force
1=Forced
BO5 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 5 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO6VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 6 value
0=0
BO6FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 6 force
1=Forced
BO6 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 6 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
Table continues on next page

844
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 21
IED hardware

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

BO7VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 7 value
0=0
BO7FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 7 force
1=Forced
BO7 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 7 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO8VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 8 value
0=0
BO8FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 8 force
1=Forced
BO8 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 8 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO9VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 9 value
0=0
BO9FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 9 force
1=Forced
BO9 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 9 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO10VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 10 value
0=0
BO10FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 10 force
1=Forced
BO10 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 10 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO11VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 11 value
0=0
BO11FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 11 force
1=Forced
BO11 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 11 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO12VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 12 value
0=0
BO12FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 12 force
1=Forced
BO12 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 12 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked

845
Technical manual
Section 21 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
IED hardware

21.2.9.6 Technical data IP10636-1 v1

M12573-1 v8.1.1

Table 791: IOM - Binary input/output module

Quantity Rated value Nominal range
Binary inputs 8 -
DC voltage, RL 24/30 V RL ±20%
48/60 V RL ±20%
110/125 V RL ±20%
220/250 V RL ±20%
Power consumption -
24/30 V, 50 mA max. 0.05 W/input
48/60 V, 50 mA max. 0.1 W/input
110/125 V, 50 mA max. 0.2 W/input
220/250 V, 50 mA max. 0.4 W/input
220/250 V, 110 mA max. 0.5 W/input
Counter input frequency 10 pulses/s max
Oscillating signal discriminator Blocking settable 1-40 Hz
Release settable 1-30 Hz
Debounce filter Settable 1-20 ms
Binary input operate time 3 ms -
(Debounce filter set to 0 ms)

Maximum 176 binary input channels may be activated simultaneously with

influencing factors within nominal range.

The stated operate time for functions include the operating time for the binary
inputs and outputs.

M12318-1 v10

Table 792: IOM - Binary input/output module contact data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2)
Function or quantity Trip and signal relays Fast signal relays (parallel
reed relay)
Binary outputs 10 2
Max system voltage 250 V AC, DC 250 V DC
Min load voltage 24VDC —
Test voltage across open contact, 1 min 1000 V rms 800 V DC
Current carrying capacity
Per relay, continuous 8A 8A
Per relay, 1 s 10 A 10 A
Per process connector pin, continuous 12 A 12 A
Making capacity at inductive load with L/R >
10 ms

0.2 s 30 A 0.4 A
1.0 s 10 A 0.4 A
Making capacity at resistive load
220–250 V/0.4 A
0.2 s 30 A 110–125 V/0.4 A
1.0 s 10 A 48–60 V/0.2 A
24–30 V/0.1 A
Table continues on next page

846
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 21
IED hardware

Function or quantity Trip and signal relays Fast signal relays (parallel
reed relay)
Breaking capacity for AC, cos φ > 0.4 250 V/8.0 A 250 V/8.0 A
Breaking capacity for DC with L/R < 40 ms 48 V/1 A 48 V/1 A
110 V/0.4 A 110 V/0.4 A
125 V/0.35 A 125 V/0.35 A
220 V/0.2 A 220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A 250 V/0.15 A
Maximum capacitive load - 10 nF
Max operations with load 1000
Max operations with no load 10000
Operating time < 6 ms <= 1 ms

The stated operate time for functions include the operating time for the binary
inputs and outputs.

M12584-1 v10

Table 793: IOM with MOV and IOM 220/250 V, 110mA - contact data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2)
Function or quantity Trip and Signal relays Fast signal relays (parallel reed relay)
Binary outputs IOM: 10 IOM: 2
Max system voltage 250 V AC, DC 250 V DC
Min load voltage 24VDC -
Test voltage across open 250 V rms 250 V rms
contact, 1 min
Current carrying capacity
Per relay, continuous 8A 8A
Per relay, 1 s 10 A 10 A
Per process connector pin, 12 A 12 A
continuous
Making capacity at inductive
loadwith L/R > 10 ms
0.2 s 30 A 0.4 A
1.0 s 10 A 0.4 A
Making capacity at resistive
load 220–250 V/0.4 A
30 A 110–125 V/0.4 A
0.2 s 10 A 48–60 V/0.2 A
1.0 s 24–30 V/0.1 A
Breaking capacity for AC, cos 250 V/8.0 A 250 V/8.0 A
j > 0.4
Breaking capacity for DC with 48 V/1 A 48 V/1 A
L/R < 40 ms 110 V/0.4 A 110 V/0.4 A
220 V/0.2 A 220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A 250 V/0.15 A
Maximum capacitive load - 10 nF
Max operations with load 1000 -
Max operations with no load 10000 -
Operating time < 6 ms <= 1 ms

847
Technical manual
Section 21 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
IED hardware

The stated operate time for functions include the operating time for the binary
inputs and outputs.

21.2.10 Serial and LON communication module (SLM) IP15583-1 v2

21.2.10.1 Introduction M14933-3 v4

The serial and LON communication module (SLM) is used for SPA, IEC 60870-5-103, DNP3 and
LON communication. The module has two optical communication ports for plastic/plastic,
plastic/glass or glass/glass. One port is used for serial communication (SPA, IEC 60870-5-103
and DNP3 port) and one port is dedicated for LON communication.

21.2.10.2 Design M17126-3 v5

The SLM is a PMC card and it is factory mounted as a mezzanine card on the NUM module.
Three variants of the SLM are available with different combinations of optical fiber connectors,
see figure 456. The plastic fiber connectors are of snap-in type and the glass fiber connectors
are of ST type.

I
EC0500760=1=en=Or
igi
nal
.psd
IEC05000760 V2 EN-US

Figure 456: The SLM variants, component side view

1 Receiver, LON
2 Transmitter, LON
3 Receiver, SPA/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP3
4 Transmitter, SPA/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP3
A Snap in connector for plastic fiber
B ST connector for glass fiber

Observe that when the SLM connectors are viewed from the rear side of the
IED, contact 4 above is in the uppermost position and contact 1 in the lowest
position.

848
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 21
IED hardware

21.2.10.3 Technical data SEMOD117454-1 v1

M12589-1 v4

Table 794: SLM – LON port

Quantity Range or value
Optical connector Glass fiber: type ST
Plastic fiber: type HFBR snap-in
Fiber, optical budget Glass fiber: 11 dB (1000m/3000 ft typically *)
Plastic fiber: 7 dB (10m/35ft typically *)
Fiber diameter Glass fiber: 62.5/125 mm
Plastic fiber: 1 mm
*) depending on optical budget calculation

SEMOD117441-2 v5

Table 795: SLM – SPA/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP3 port

Quantity Range or value
Optical connector Glass fiber: type ST
Plastic fiber: type HFBR snap-in
Fiber, optical budget Glass fiber: 11 dB (1000m/3000ft m typically *)
Plastic fiber: 7 dB (25m/80ft m typically *)
Fiber diameter Glass fiber: 62.5/125 mm
Plastic fiber: 1 mm
*) depending on optical budget calculation

21.2.11 Galvanic RS485 communication module SEMOD174899-1 v1

21.2.11.1 Introduction SEMOD158664-5 v3

The Galvanic RS485 communication module (RS485) is used for DNP3.0 and IEC 60870-5-103
communication. The module has one RS485 communication port. The RS485 is a balanced
serial communication that can be used either in 2-wire or 4-wire connections. A 2-wire
connection uses the same signal for RX and TX and is a multidrop communication with no
dedicated Master or slave. This variant requires however a control of the output. The 4-wire
connection has separated signals for RX and TX multidrop communication with a dedicated
Master and the rest are slaves. No special control signal is needed in this case.

21.2.11.2 Design SEMOD158668-1 v1

SEMOD158670-4 v2
The RS485 is a PMC card and it is factory mounted as a mezzanine card on the NUM module.

RS485 connector pinouts SEMOD158670-10 v1

The arrangement for the pins in the RS485 connector (figure 457) are presented in table 796:

Table 796: The arrangement for the pins

Pin Name 2-wire Name 4-wire Description

1 RS485+ TX+ Receive/transmit high or transmit high
2 RS485– TX– Receive/transmit
3 Term T-Term Termination resistor for transmitter (and receiver in 2–wir
case) (connect to TX+)
Table continues on next page

849
Technical manual
Section 21 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
IED hardware

4 N.A. R-Term Termination resistor for receiver (connect to RX+)

5 N.A. RX– Receive low
6 N.A. RX+ Receive high

Angle
bracket

Screw
1
terminal
X3 2
1
2 RS485
3 PWB
Screw
4
terminal
5
X1
6

Backplane

IEC06000517 V1 EN-US

Figure 457: RS485 connector

• 2-wire: Connect pin 1 to pin 6 and pin 2 to pin 5

• Termination (2-wire): Connect pin 1 to pin 3

• Termination (4-wire): Connect pin 1 to pin 3 and pin 4 to pin 6

Soft ground connector pinouts SEMOD158670-45 v1

A second 2-pole screw connector is used for the connection of IO-ground. It can be used in two
combinations like:

• Unconnected: No ground of the IO-part · .

• Soft grounded: The IO is connected to the GND with an RC net parallel with a MOV

21.2.11.3 Technical data SEMOD158678-1 v1

SEMOD158710-2 v2

Table 797: Galvanic RS485 communication module

Quantity Range or value
Communication speed 2400–19200 bauds
External connectors RS-485 6-pole connector
Soft ground 2-pole connector

850
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 21
IED hardware

21.2.12 Optical ethernet module (OEM) IP15584-1 v1

21.2.12.1 Introduction M16073-3 v6

The optical fast-ethernet module is used for fast and interference-free communication of
synchrophasor data over IEEE C37.118 and/or IEEE 1344 protocols. It is also used to connect an
IED to the communication buses (like the station bus) that use the IEC 61850-8-1 protocol
(port A, B). The module has one or two optical ports with ST connectors.

21.2.12.2 Functionality M14948-3 v4

The Optical Ethernet module (OEM) is used when communication systems according to IEC
61850–8–1 have been implemented.

21.2.12.3 Design M14945-3 v3

The Optical Ethernet module (OEM) is a PMC card and mounted as a mezzanine card on the
ADM. The OEM is a 100BASE-FXmodule and available as a single channel or double channel
unit.

IEC05000472=1=en=Original.vsd
IEC05000472 V3 EN-US

Figure 458: OEM layout, standard PMC format 2 channels

• 1: Transmitter
• 2: Receiver

21.2.12.4 Technical data SEMOD55319-1 v1

SEMOD55310-2 v9

Table 798: OEM - Optical ethernet module

Quantity Rated value
Number of channels 1 or 2 (port A, B for IEC 61850-8-1 / IEEE C37.118)
Standard IEEE 802.3u 100BASE-FX
Type of fiber 62.5/125 mm multimode fibre
Wave length 1300 nm
Optical connector Type ST
Communication speed Fast Ethernet 100 Mbit/s

851
Technical manual
Section 21 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
IED hardware

21.2.13 Line data communication module (LDCM) IP15588-1 v1

21.2.13.1 Introduction SEMOD55651-1 v1

M16028-3 v3
The line data communication module (LDCM) is used for communication between the IEDs
situated at distances <110 km or from the IED to optical to electrical converter with G.703
interface located on a distances <3 km away. The LDCM module sends and rereceives data, to
and from another LDCM module. The IEEE/ANSI standard format is used.

The line data communication module is used for binary signal transfer. The module has one
optical port with ST connectors see figure 459.

Line data communication module LDCM M16075-3 v4

Each module has one optical port, one for each remote end to which the IED communicates.

Alternative cards for Medium range (1310 nm single mode) and Short range (850 nm multi
mode) are available.

Class 1 laser product. Take adequate measures to protect the eyes. Never look
into the laser beam.

21.2.13.2 Design SEMOD55466-4 v2

The LDCM is a PCMIP type II single width format module. The LDCM can be mounted on:

• the ADM
• the NUM

ST
IO-connector

ST

IEC07000087=1=en=Original.vsd
IEC07000087 V2 EN-US

Figure 459: The SR-LDCM layout. PCMIP type II single width format with two PCI
connectors and one I/O ST type connector

852
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 21
IED hardware

C
IEC06000393=1=en=Original.vsd
IEC06000393 V2 EN-US

Figure 460: The MR-LDCM and LR-LDCM layout. PCMIP type II single width format with
two PCI connectors and one I/O FC/PC type connector

21.2.13.3 Technical data SEMOD55324-1 v1

M12756-1 v12

Table 799: Line data communication module

Characteristic Range or value
Type of LDCM Short range (SR) Medium range (MR)
Type of fiber Multi-mode fiber Single-mode fiber
glass 62.5/125 µm glass 9/125 µm

Multi-mode fiber
glass 50/125 µm
Peak Emission Wave length
Nominal 820 nm 1310 nm
Maximum 865 nm 1330 nm
Minimum 792 nm 1290 nm
Optical budget 18.8 dB (typical 26.8 dB (typical
Multi-mode fiber glass 62.5/125 mm distance about 3 distance 80 km/50
km/2 mile *) mile *)
Multi-mode fiber glass 50/125 mm 11.5 dB (typical
distance about 2
km/1 mile *)
Optical connector Type ST Type FC/PC
Protocol C37.94 C37.94
implementation **)
Data transmission Synchronous Synchronous
Transmission rate / Data rate 64 kbit/s 64 kbit/s
Clock source Internal or derived Internal or derived
from received from received
signal signal
*) depending on optical budget calculation
**) C37.94 originally defined just for multi-mode; using same header, configuration and data format as C37.94

853
Technical manual
Section 21 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
IED hardware

21.2.14 IRIG-B time synchronization module IRIG-B SEMOD141102-1 v1

21.2.14.1 Introduction SEMOD141113-4 v7

The IRIG-B time synchronizing module is used for accurate time synchronizing of the IED from
a station clock.

Electrical (BNC) and optical connection (ST) for 0XX and 12X IRIG-B support.

21.2.14.2 Design SEMOD141098-4 v3

The IRIG-B module has two inputs. One input is for the IRIG-B that can handle both a pulse-
width modulated signal (also called unmodulated) and an amplitude modulated signal (also
called sine wave modulated). The other is an optical input type ST for optical pulse-width
modulated signal (IRIG-B 00X).

ST

Y2
A1

IEC06000304=1=en=Original.ai
IEC06000304 V2 EN-US

Figure 461: IRIG-B PC-MIP board with top left ST connector for optical IRIG-B 00X 820 nm
multimode fiber optic signal input and lower left BNC connector for IRIG-B
signal input

21.2.14.3 Settings
PID-5187-SETTINGS v4

Table 800: IRIG-B Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SynchType BNC - - Opto Type of synchronization
Opto
TimeDomain LocalTime - - LocalTime Time domain
UTC
Encoding IRIG-B - - IRIG-B Type of encoding
1344
1344TZ
TimeZoneAs1344 MinusTZ - - PlusTZ Time zone as in 1344 standard
PlusTZ

854
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 21
IED hardware

21.2.14.4 Technical data SEMOD141132-1 v1

SEMOD141136-2 v8

Table 801: IRIG-B

Quantity Rated value
Number of channels IRIG-B 1
Number of optical channels 1
Electrical connector:
Electrical connector IRIG-B BNC
Pulse-width modulated 5 Vpp
Amplitude modulated
– low level 1-3 Vpp
– high level 3 x low level, max 9 Vpp
Supported formats IRIG-B 00x, IRIG-B 12x
Accuracy +/-10μs for IRIG-B 00x and +/-100μs for IRIG-B 12x
Input impedance 100 k ohm
Optical connector:
Optical connector IRIG-B Type ST
Type of fiber 62.5/125 μm multimode fiber
Supported formats IRIG-B 00x
Accuracy +/- 1μs

21.3 Dimensions IP11490-1 v3

21.3.1 Case without rear cover SEMOD53195-1 v1

M2152-3 v5

IEC04000448 V2 EN-US

Figure 462: Case without rear cover

855
Technical manual
Section 21 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
IED hardware

IEC04000464 V2 EN-US

Figure 463: Case without rear cover with 19” rack mounting kit
M2152-11 v3

Case size A B C D E F G H J K
(mm)
6U, 1/2 x 19” 265.9 223.7 201.1 252.9 205.7 190.5 203.7 465.1 187.6 482.6
The H and K dimensions are defined by the 19” rack mounting kit

21.3.2 Case with rear cover SEMOD53199-1 v1

M11985-110 v4

IEC05000501 V2 EN-US

Figure 464: Case with rear cover

856
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 21
IED hardware

IEC05000502 V2 EN-US

Figure 465: Case with rear cover and 19” rack mounting kit

IEC15000448-1-en.vsd
IEC15000448 V1 EN-US

Figure 466: Rear cover case with details

M11985-120 v4

Case size A B C D E F G H J K
(mm)
6U, 1/2 x 19” 265.9 223.7 242.1 255.8 205.7 190.5 203.7 465.1 228.6 482.6
The H and K dimensions are defined by the 19” rack mounting kit.

857
Technical manual
Section 21 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
IED hardware

21.3.3 Flush mounting dimensions M11571-3 v5

IEC04000465 V2 EN-US

Figure 467: Flush mounting

Cut-out dimensions (mm)

Case size
Tolerance A B C D
+/-1 +/-1
6U, 1/2 x 19" 210.1 254.3 4.0-10.0 12.5
E = 188.6 mm without rear protection cover, 229.6 mm with rear protection cover

21.3.4 Side-by-side flush mounting dimensions M11984-3 v6

IEC06000182-2-en.vsd
IEC06000182 V2 EN-US

Figure 468: A 1/2 x 19” size IED side-by-side with RHGS6

858
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 21
IED hardware

D
B
E

F
C
xx05000505.vsd
IEC05000505 V1 EN-US

Figure 469: Panel-cut out dimensions for side-by-side flush mounting

Case size A B C D E F G
(mm) ±1 ±1 ±1 ±1 ±1 ±1 ±1
Tolerance
6U, 1/2 x 19” 214.0 259.3 240.4 190.5 34.4 13.2 6.4 diam

21.3.5 Wall mounting dimensions M11569-3 v4

IEC04000471-2-en.vsd
IEC04000471 V2 EN-US

Figure 470: Wall mounting

Case size (mm) A B C D E

6U, 1/2 x 19” 292.0 267.1 272.8 390.0 243.0

859
Technical manual
Section 21 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
IED hardware

21.4 Mounting alternatives IP11721-1 v1

21.4.1 Flush mounting IP10303-1 v1

21.4.1.1 Overview M11967-3 v4

The flush mounting kit can be used for the 1/2 x 19” case size.

Only a single case can be mounted in each cut-out on the cubicle panel, for class IP54
protection.

Flush mounting cannot be used for side-by-side mounted IEDs when IP54 class
must be fulfilled. Only IP20 class can be obtained when mounting two cases
side-by-side in one (1) cut-out.

To obtain IP54 class protection, an additional factory mounted sealing must be

ordered when ordering the IED.

21.4.1.2 Mounting procedure for flush mounting M11942-2 v4

IEC04000451-2-en.vsd
IEC04000451 V2 EN-US

Figure 471: Flush mounting details.

PosNo Description Quantity Type

1 Sealing strip, used to obtain IP54 - -
class. The sealing strip is factory
mounted between the case and
front plate.
2 Fastener 4 -
Table continues on next page

860
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 21
IED hardware

3 Groove - -
4 Screw, self tapping 4 2.9x9.5 mm
5 Joining point of sealing strip - -
6 Panel - -

21.4.2 19” panel rack mounting IP10313-1 v1

21.4.2.1 Overview SEMOD127656-5 v4

The IED can be mounted in a standard 19” cubicle rack by using a mounting kit consisting of
two mounting angles and their fastening screws.

The mounting angles are reversible which enables mounting of the IED either to the left or the
right side of the cubicle.

A separately ordered rack mounting kit for side-by-side mounted IEDs or IEDs
together with RHGS cases should be selected so that the total size equals 19”.

Use only the screws included in the mounting kit when mounting the plates and
the angles on the IED. Screws with wrong dimension may damage the PCBs
inside the IED.

21.4.2.2 Mounting procedure for 19” panel rack mounting M11948-2 v7

IEC04000452-2-en.vsd
IEC04000452 V2 EN-US

Figure 472: 19” panel rack mounting details

861
Technical manual
Section 21 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
IED hardware

The required torque for the screws is 3.5 Nm.

PosNo Description Quantity Type

1a, 1b Mounting angles, can be mounted 2 -
either to the left or the right side of
the case
2 Screw 8 M4x6
3 Washer 8 M4x6

21.4.3 Wall mounting IP10316-1 v1

21.4.3.1 Overview M11973-3 v5

The IED can be mounted on a wall, a panel or in a cubicle.

When mounting the side plates, use screws that follow the recommended
dimensions. Using screws with other dimensions may damage the PCBs inside
the IED.

If fiber cables are bent too much, the signal can be weakened. Wall mounting is
therefore not recommended for any communication modules with fiber
connection.

862
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 21
IED hardware

21.4.3.2 Mounting procedure for wall mounting M11949-2 v2

2
3
1 4

IEC130 00266-1-en.vsd

IEC13000266 V1 EN-US

Figure 473: Wall mounting details.

PosNo Description Quantity Type

1 Bushing 4 -
2 Screw 8 M4x10
3 Screw 4 M6x12 or
corresponding
4 Mounting bar 2 -
5 Screw 6 M5x8
6 Side plate 2 -

21.4.3.3 How to reach the rear side of the IED M11941-2 v5

The IED can be equipped with a rear protection cover recommended to be used with this type
of mounting. See figure 474.

To reach the rear side of the IED, a free space of 80 mm is required on the unhinged side.

863
Technical manual
Section 21 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
IED hardware

3
1

80 mm 2

IEC06000135-2-en.vsd
IEC06000135 V3 EN-US

Figure 474: How to reach the connectors on the rear side of the IED.

PosNo Description Type

1 Screw M4x10
2 Screw M5x8
3 Rear protection cover (Ordered separately)

21.4.4 Side-by-side 19” rack mounting IP10323-1 v1

21.4.4.1 Overview M11974-3 v2

IED case size 1/2 x 19” and RHGS cases can be mounted side-by-side up to a maximum size of
19”. For side-by-side rack mounting, the side-by-side mounting kit together with the 19” rack
panel mounting kit must be used. The mounting kit has to be ordered separately.

When mounting the plates and the angles on the IED, use screws that follow
the recommended dimensions. Using screws with other dimensions may
damage the PCBs inside the IED.

864
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 21
IED hardware

21.4.4.2 Mounting procedure for side-by-side rack mounting M11955-2 v4

2
1

IEC04000456-2-en.vsd
IEC04000456 V2 EN-US

Figure 475: Side-by-side rack mounting details.

The required torque for the screws is 3.5 Nm.

PosNo Description Quantity Type

1 Mounting plate 2 -
2, 3 Screw 16 M4x6
4 Mounting angle 2 -
5 Washer 16 M4x6

21.4.4.3 IED mounted with a RHGS6 case M11953-3 v3

A 1/2 x 19” size IED can be mounted with a RHGS case (6 or 12). The RHGS case can be used for
mounting a test switch of type RTXP 24. It also has enough space for a terminal base of RX 2
type for mounting of, for example, a DC-switch or two trip IEDs.

865
Technical manual
Section 21 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
IED hardware

1 2 1 2

1 1 1 1

2 2 2 2

3 3 3 3

4 4 4 4

5 5 5 5

6 6 6 6

7 7 7 7

8 8 8 8

IEC06000180-2-en.vsd
IEC06000180 V2 EN-US

Figure 476: IED (1/2 x 19”) mounted with a RHGS6 case containing a test switch module
equipped with only a test switch and a RX2 terminal base

21.4.5 Side-by-side flush mounting IP10329-1 v1

21.4.5.1 Overview M11975-3 v3

If IP54 is required it is not allowed to flush mount side by side mounted cases. If your
application demands side-by-side flush mounting, the side-by-side mounting details kit and
the 19” panel rack mounting kit must be used. The mounting kit has to be ordered separately.
The maximum size of the panel cut out is 19”.

With side-by-side flush mounting installation, only IP class 20 is obtained. To

reach IP class 54, it is required to mount the IEDs separately. For cut out
dimensions of separately mounted IEDs, see section "Flush mounting".

Use only the screws included in the mounting kit when mounting the plates and
the angles on the IED. Screws with wrong dimension may damage the PCBs
inside the IED.

Please contact factory for special add on plates for mounting FT switches on
the side (for 1/2 19" case) or bottom of the relay.

866
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 21
IED hardware

21.4.5.2 Mounting procedure for side-by-side flush mounting M12730-6 v3

1 2

IEC06000181-2-en.vsd
IEC06000181 V2 EN-US

Figure 477: Side-by-side flush mounting details (RHGS6 side-by-side with 1/2 x 19” IED).

PosNo Description Quantity Type

1 Mounting plate 2 -
2, 3 Screw 16 M4x6
4 Mounting angle 2 -

21.5 Technical data IP16276-1 v1

21.5.1 Enclosure IP16278-1 v1

M11778-1 v4

Table 802: Case

Material Steel sheet
Front plate Steel sheet profile with cut-out for HMI
Surface treatment Aluzink preplated steel
Finish Light grey (RAL 7035)

M12327-1 v3

Table 803: Water and dust protection level according to IEC 60529

Front IP40 (IP54 with sealing strip)

Sides, top and bottom IP20
Rear side IP20 with screw compression type
IP10 with ring lug terminals

867
Technical manual
Section 21 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
IED hardware

M11777-1 v4

Table 804: Weight

Case size Weight
6U, 1/2 x 19” £ 10 kg/22 lb
6U, 3/4 x 19” £ 15 kg/33 lb

21.5.2 Electrical safety GUID-2825B541-DD31-4DAF-B5B3-97555F81A1C2 v1

GUID-1CF5B10A-CF8B-407D-8D87-F4B48B43C2B2 v1

Table 805: Electrical safety according to IEC 60255-27

Equipment class I (protective earthed)

Overvoltage category III
Pollution degree 2 (normally only non-conductive pollution occurs except that occasionally a
temporary conductivity caused by condensation is to be expected)

21.5.3 Connection system SEMOD53371-1 v1

SEMOD53376-2 v6

Table 806: CT and VT circuit connectors

Connector type Rated voltage and current Maximum conductor area
Screw compression type 250 V AC, 20 A 4 mm2 (AWG12)
2 x 2.5 mm2 (2 x AWG14)
Terminal blocks suitable for ring lug 250 V AC, 20 A 4 mm2 (AWG12)
terminals

M12583-1 v5

Table 807: Auxiliary power supply connectors

Connector type Rated voltage Maximum conductor area
Screw compression type 250 V AC 2.5 mm2 (AWG14)
2 × 1 mm2 (2 x AWG18)
Terminal blocks suitable for ring lug 300 V AC 3 mm2 (AWG14)
terminals

Table 808: Binary I/O connectors

Connector type Rated voltage Maximum conductor area
Screw compression type 250 V AC 2.5 mm2 (AWG14)
2 × 1 mm2 (2 x AWG18)

868
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 21
IED hardware

21.5.4 Influencing factors SEMOD52785-1 v1

M16705-1 v15

Table 809: Temperature and humidity influence

Parameter Reference value Nominal range Influence
Ambient temperature, +20°C -25°C to +55°C 0.02%/°C
operate value
Relative humidity 10-90% 10-90% -
Operative range 0-95%
Storage temperature - -40°C to +70°C -

Table 810: Auxiliary DC supply voltage influence on functionality during operation

Dependence on Reference value Within nominal Influence
range
Ripple, in DC auxiliary voltage max. 2% 15% of EL 0.01%/%
Operative range Full wave
rectified
Auxiliary voltage dependence, ±20% of EL 0.01%/%
operate value
Interrupted auxiliary DC voltage 24-60 V DC ± 20%

100-250 V DC
Interruption
±20%
interval
0–50 ms No restart
0–∞ s Correct behaviour at power
down
Restart time < 300 s

Table 811: Frequency influence (reference standard: IEC 60255–1)

Dependence on Within nominal range Influence
Frequency dependence, operate value fr ±2.5 Hz for 50 Hz ±1.0%/Hz
fr ±3.0 Hz for 60 Hz

Harmonic frequency dependence (20% 2nd, 3rd and 5th harmonic of fr ±2.0%
content)
Harmonic frequency dependence for 2nd, 3rd and 5th harmonic of fr ±10.0%
distance protection (10% content)
Harmonic frequency dependence for 2nd, 3rd and 5th harmonic of fr ±10.0%
high impedance differential
protection (10% content)
Harmonic frequency dependence for 2nd, 3rd and 5th harmonic of fr ±3.0%
overcurrent protection

869
Technical manual
Section 21 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
IED hardware

Table 812: Frequency influence (reference standard: IEC 60255–1)

Dependence on Within nominal range Influence
Frequency dependence, operate value fr ±2.5 Hz for 50 Hz ±1.0%/Hz
fr ±3.0 Hz for 60 Hz

Frequency dependence for broken fr ±2.5 Hz for 50 Hz ±2.0%/Hz

conductor fr ±3.0 Hz for 60 Hz

Harmonic frequency dependence (20% 2nd, 3rd and 5th harmonic of fr ±1.0%
content)
Harmonic frequency dependence for 2nd, 3rd and 5th harmonic of fr ±10.0%
distance protection (10% content)
Harmonic frequency dependence for 2nd, 3rd and 5th harmonic of fr ±5.0%
high impedance differential
protection (10% content)
Harmonic frequency dependence for 2nd, 3rd and 5th harmonic of fr ±2.0%
broken conductor (20% content)

21.5.5 Type tests according to standard IP16288-1 v1

M16706-1 v13.1.1

Table 813: Electromagnetic compatibility

Test Type test values Reference standards
1 MHz burst disturbance 2.5 kV IEC 60255-26
100 kHz slow damped oscillatory 2.5 kV IEC 61000-4-18, Class III
wave immunity test
Ring wave immunity test, 100 kHz 2-4 kV IEC 61000-4-12, Class IV
Surge withstand capability test 2.5 kV, oscillatory IEEE/ANSI C37.90.1
4.0 kV, fast transient
Electrostatic discharge 15 kV air discharge IEC 60255-26
Direct application 8 kV contact discharge
Indirect application 8 kV contact discharge IEC 61000-4-2, Class IV
Electrostatic discharge 15 kV air discharge IEEE/ANSI C37.90.1
Direct application 8 kV contact discharge
Indirect application 8 kV contact discharge
Fast transient disturbance 4 kV IEC 60255-26, Zone A
2 kV, MIM mA-inputs IEC 60255-26, Zone B
Surge immunity test 2-4 kV, 1.2/50ms high energy IEC 60255-26, Zone A
1-2 kV, BOM and IRF outputs IEC 60255-26, Zone B

Power frequency immunity test 150-300 V, 50 Hz IEC 60255-26, Zone A

Conducted common mode immunity 15 Hz-150 kHz IEC 61000-4-16, Class IV
test
Power frequency magnetic field test 1000 A/m, 3 s IEC 61000-4-8, Class V
100 A/m, cont.
Pulse magnetic field immunity test 1000 A/m IEC 61000–4–9, Class V
Damped oscillatory magnetic field 100 A/m IEC 61000-4-10, Class V
test
Radiated electromagnetic field 20 V/m, 80-1000 MHz IEC 60255-26
disturbance
1.4-2.7 GHz
Table continues on next page

870
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 21
IED hardware

Test Type test values Reference standards

Radiated electromagnetic field 20 V/m IEEE/ANSI C37.90.2
disturbance 80-1000 MHz
10 V/m, 5.1-6.0 GHz EN 50121-5
Conducted electromagnetic field 10 V, 0.15-80 MHz IEC 60255-26
disturbance
Radiated emission 30-5000 MHz IEC 60255-26
Radiated emission 30-5000 MHz IEEE/ANSI C63.4, FCC
Conducted emission 0.15-30 MHz IEC 60255-26

Table 814: Insulation

Test Type test values Reference standard
Dielectric test 2.0 kV AC, 1 min. IEC 60255-27
1.0 kVrms, 1 min.) ANSI C37.90
IEEE 802.3-2015,
Impulse voltage test 5 kV, 1.2/50ms, 0.5 J Environment A
1 kV, 1.2/50 ms 0.5 J
Insulation resistance > 100 MW at 500 VDC

Table 815: Environmental tests

Test Type test value Reference standard
Cold operation test Test Ad for 16 h at -25°C IEC 60068-2-1
Cold storage test Test Ab for 16 h at -40°C IEC 60068-2-1
Dry heat operation test Test Bd for 16 h at +70°C IEC 60068-2-2
Dry heat storage test Test Bb for 16 h at +85°C IEC 60068-2-2
Change of temperature test Test Nb for 5 cycles at -25°C to +70°C IEC 60068-2-14
Damp heat test, steady state Test Ca for 10 days at +40°C and humidity IEC 60068-2-78
93%
Damp heat test, cyclic Test Db for 6 cycles at +25 to +55°C and IEC 60068-2-30
humidity 93 to 95% (1 cycle = 24 hours)

Table 816: CE compliance

Test According to
Immunity EN 60255–26
Emissivity EN 60255–26
Low voltage directive EN 60255–27

Table 817: Mechanical tests

Test Type test values Reference standards
Vibration response test Class II IEC 60255-21-1
Vibration endurance test Class I IEC 60255-21-1
Shock response test Class I IEC 60255-21-2
Shock withstand test Class I IEC 60255-21-2
Bump test Class I IEC 60255-21-2
Seismic test Class II IEC 60255-21-3

871
Technical manual
872
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 22
Labels

Section 22 Labels

22.1 Labels on IED SEMOD168249-4 v3.1.1

Front view of IED

10

9 1

8 2

3
7
5
6

IE C15000506-1-en.vsd
IEC15000506 V1 EN-US

873
Technical manual
Section 22 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Labels

1
1 QR-code containing the complete ordering
code

10 2 Power supply module (PSM)

9
3 mA input module (MIM)
4 Ordering and serial number

8
5 Manufacturer
6 Transformer designations
7
2 7 Transformer input module, rated currents
7 and voltages
8 Optional, customer specific information
6
9 Order number, dc supply voltage and rated
frequency
6
3
10 Product type, description and serial number

IEC15000504-1-en.vsdx
IEC15000504 V1 EN-US

Figure 478: Example of IED label

Rear view of IED

IEC15000573-1-en.vsdx
IEC15000573 V1 EN-US

874
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 22
Labels

1 Warning label
2 Caution label
3 Class 1 laser product label

IEC06000575 V1 EN-US

875
Technical manual
876
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 23
Connection diagrams

Section 23 Connection diagrams GUID-CF4EFFA5-3081-4FC7-9A14-ED127C3C0FDE v4

The connection diagrams are delivered on the IED Connectivity package DVD as part of the
product delivery.

The latest versions of the connection diagrams can be downloaded from

http://www.abb.com/substationautomation.

Connection diagrams for Configured products

650 series ver. 2.1, IEC symbols 1MRK006501-AF

650 series ver. 2.1, ANSI symbols 1MRK006502-AF

Connection diagram, RED650 2.1, A11 1MRK006505-DA

877
Technical manual
878
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 24
Inverse time characteristics

Section 24 Inverse time characteristics

24.1 Application M16686-3 v5

In order to assure time selectivity between different overcurrent protections at different

points in the network different time delays for the different protections are normally used. The
simplest way to do this is to use definite time-lag. In more sophisticated applications current
dependent time characteristics are used. Both alternatives are shown in a simple application
with three overcurrent protections operating in series.

I> I> I>

xx05000129.vsd
IEC05000129 V1 EN-US

Figure 479: Three overcurrent protections operating in series

Stage 3

Time
Stage 2 Stage 2

Stage 1 Stage 1 Stage 1

Fault point
position

en05000130.vsd
IEC05000130 V1 EN-US

Figure 480: Definite time overcurrent characteristics

Time

Fault point
position

en05000131.vsd
IEC05000131 V1 EN-US

Figure 481: Inverse time overcurrent characteristics with inst. function

879
Technical manual
Section 24 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Inverse time characteristics

The inverse time characteristic makes it possible to minimize the fault clearance time and still
assure the selectivity between protections.

To assure selectivity between protections there must be a time margin between the operation
time of the protections. This required time margin is dependent of following factors, in a
simple case with two protections in series:

• Difference between pickup time of the protections to be co-ordinated

• Opening time of the breaker closest to the studied fault
• Reset times of the protections
• Margin dependent of the time delay inaccuracy of the protections

Assume we have the following network case.

A1 B1
Feeder

I> I>

Time axis

t=0 t=t1 t=t2 t=t3

en05000132.vsd
IEC05000132 V1 EN-US

Figure 482: Selectivity steps for a fault on feeder B1

where:
t=0 is The fault occurs
t=t1 is Protection B1 trips

t=t2 is Breaker at B1 opens

t=t3 is Protection A1 resets

In the case protection B1 shall operate without any intentional delay (instantaneous). When the
fault occurs the protections start to detect the fault current. After the time t1 the protection B1
send a trip signal to the circuit breaker. The protection A1 starts its delay timer at the same
time, with some deviation in time due to differences between the two protections. There is a
possibility that A1 will start before the trip is sent to the B1 circuit breaker. At the time t2 the
circuit breaker B1 has opened its primary contacts and thus the fault current is interrupted.
The breaker time (t2 - t1) can differ between different faults. The maximum opening time can
be given from manuals and test protocols. Still at t2 the timer of protection A1 is active. At
time t3 the protection A1 is reset, that is the timer is stopped.

In most applications it is required that the times shall reset as fast as possible when the
current fed to the protection drops below the set current level, the reset time shall be
minimized. In some applications it is however beneficial to have some type of delayed reset
time of the overcurrent function. This can be the case in the following applications:

880
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 24
Inverse time characteristics

• If there is a risk of intermittent faults. If the current IED, close to the faults, starts and
resets there is a risk of unselective trip from other protections in the system.
• Delayed resetting could give accelerated fault clearance in case of automatic reclosing to
a permanent fault.
• Overcurrent protection functions are sometimes used as release criterion for other
protection functions. It can often be valuable to have a reset delay to assure the release
function.

24.2 Principle of operation IP15777-1 v2

24.2.1 Mode of operation M16687-3 v7

The function can operate in a definite time-lag mode or in a current definite inverse time
mode. For the inverse time characteristic both ANSI and IEC based standard curves are
available. Also programmable curve types are supported via the component inputs: p, A, B, C
pr, tr, and cr.

Different characteristics for reset delay can also be chosen.

If current in any phase exceeds the set start current value (here internal signal startValue), a
timer, according to the selected operating mode, is started. The component always uses the
maximum of the three phase current values as the current level used in timing calculations.

In case of definite time-lag mode the timer will run constantly until the time is reached or until
the current drops below the reset value (start value minus the hysteresis) and the reset time
has elapsed.

For definite time delay curve ANSI/IEEE Definite time or IEC Definite time are chosen.

The general expression for inverse time curves is according to equation 117.

æ ö
ç A
÷
t[ s ] = ç + B÷×k
ç æ i öp ÷
çç ÷ -C ÷
è è in > ø ø
EQUATION1189 V1 EN-US (Equation 117)

where:
p, A, B, C are constants defined for each curve type,
in> is the set start current for step n,
k is set time multiplier for step n and
i is the measured current.

For inverse time characteristics a time will be initiated when the current reaches the set start
level. From the general expression of the characteristic the following can be seen:

881
Technical manual
Section 24 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Inverse time characteristics

ææ i öp ö
(top - B × k ) × ç ç ÷ - C ÷ = A×k
è è in > ø ø
EQUATION1190 V1 EN-US (Equation 118)

where:
top is the operating time of the protection

The time elapsed to the moment of trip is reached when the integral fulfils according to
equation 119, in addition to the constant time delay:

t
ææ i öp ö
ò è in > ø ÷ × dt ³ A × k
ç ç ÷ - C
0 è ø
EQUATION1191 V1 EN-US (Equation 119)

For the numerical protection the sum below must fulfil the equation for trip.

æ æ i( j ) ö p
n ö
Dt × å ç ç ÷ - C ÷ ³ A× k
j =1 è è in > ø ø
EQUATION1192 V1 EN-US (Equation 120)

where:
j=1 is the first protection execution cycle when a fault has been detected,
that is, when

i
>1
in >
EQUATION1193 V1 EN-US

Dt is the time interval between two consecutive executions of the

protection algorithm,
n is the number of the execution of the algorithm when the trip time
equation is fulfilled, that is, when a trip is given and
i (j) is the fault current at time j

For inverse time operation, the inverse time characteristic is selectable. Both the IEC and
ANSI/IEEE standardized inverse time characteristics are supported.

For the IEC curves there is also a setting of the minimum time-lag of operation, see figure 483.

882
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 24
Inverse time characteristics

Operate
time

tMin

Current
IMin
IEC05000133-3-en.vsd
IEC05000133 V2 EN-US

Figure 483: Minimum time-lag operation for the IEC curves

In order to fully comply with IEC curves definition setting parameter tMin shall be set to the
value which is equal to the operating time of the selected IEC inverse time curve for measured
current of twenty times the set current start value. Note that the operating time value is
dependent on the selected setting value for time multiplier k.

In addition to the ANSI and IEC standardized characteristics, there are also two additional
inverse curves available; the RI curve and the RD curve.

The RI inverse time curve emulates the characteristic of the electromechanical ASEA relay RI.
The curve is described by equation 121:

æ ö
ç k ÷
t[ s ] = ç
in > ÷
ç 0.339 - 0.235 × ÷
è i ø
EQUATION1194 V1 EN-US (Equation 121)

where:
in> is the set start current for step n
k is set time multiplier for step n
i is the measured current

The RD inverse curve gives a logarithmic delay, as used in the Combiflex protection RXIDG. The
curve enables a high degree of selectivity required for sensitive residual earth-fault current
protection, with ability to detect high-resistive earth faults. The curve is described by
equation 122:

883
Technical manual
Section 24 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Inverse time characteristics

æ i ö
t[ s ] = 5.8 - 1.35 × ln ç ÷
è k × in > ø
EQUATION1195 V1 EN-US (Equation 122)

where:
in> is the set start current for step n,
k is set time multiplier for step n and
i is the measured current

If the curve type programmable is chosen, the user can make a tailor made inverse time curve
according to the general equation 123.

æ ö
ç A
÷
t[ s ] = ç + B ÷×k
ç æ i öp ÷
çç ÷ -C ÷
è è in > ø ø
EQUATION1196 V1 EN-US (Equation 123)

Also the reset time of the delayed function can be controlled. There is the possibility to choose
between three different reset time-lags.

• Instantaneous Reset
• IEC Reset
• ANSI Reset.

If instantaneous reset is chosen the timer will be reset directly when the current drops below
the set start current level minus the hysteresis.

If IEC reset is chosen the timer will be reset after a set constant time when the current drops
below the set start current level minus the hysteresis.

If ANSI reset time is chosen the reset time will be dependent of the current after fault
clearance (when the current drops below the start current level minus the hysteresis). The
timer will reset according to equation 124.

æ ö
ç tr ÷
t [s] = ç ÷×k
çæ i ö ÷
2

çç ÷ -1 ÷
è è in > ø ø
EQUATION1197 V2 EN-US (Equation 124)

where:
The set value tr is the reset time in case of zero current after fault clearance.

The possibility of choice of reset characteristics is to some extent dependent of the choice of
time delay characteristic.

884
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 24
Inverse time characteristics

For the definite time delay characteristics the possible reset time settings are instantaneous
and IEC constant time reset.

For ANSI inverse time delay characteristics all three types of reset time characteristics are
available; instantaneous, IEC constant time reset and ANSI current dependent reset time.

For IEC inverse time delay characteristics the possible delay time settings are instantaneous
and IEC set constant time reset).

For the programmable inverse time delay characteristics all three types of reset time
characteristics are available; instantaneous, IEC constant time reset and ANSI current
dependent reset time. If the current dependent type is used settings pr, tr and cr must be
given, see equation 125:

æ ö
ç tr ÷
t [s] = ç ÷×k
çæ i ö ÷
pr

çç ÷ - cr ÷
è è in > ø ø
EQUATION1198 V2 EN-US (Equation 125)

For RI and RD inverse time delay characteristics the possible delay time settings are
instantaneous and IEC constant time reset.
GUID-F7AA2194-4D1C-4475-8853-C7D064912614 v4

When inverse time overcurrent characteristic is selected, the operate time of

the stage will be the sum of the inverse time delay and the set definite time
delay. Thus, if only the inverse time delay is required, it is important to set the
definite time delay for that stage to zero.

885
Technical manual
Section 24 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Inverse time characteristics

24.3 Inverse characteristics IP15797-1 v2

M12388-1 v23

Table 818: ANSI Inverse time characteristics

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operating characteristic: 0.05 ≤ k ≤ 999.00 ANSI/IEEE C37.112 ,
1.5 x Iset ≤ I ≤ 20 x Iset ±2.0% or ±40 ms
whichever is greater
æ A ö
t =ç P + B÷×k
è (
ç I -1 ÷
ø )
EQUATION1249-SMALL V3 EN-US

Reset characteristic:

tr
t = ×k
(I 2
-1)
EQUATION1250-SMALL V1 EN-US

I = Imeasured/Iset

ANSI Extremely Inverse A=28.2, B=0.1217, P=2.0 , tr=29.1

ANSI Very inverse A=19.61, B=0.491, P=2.0 , tr=21.6
ANSI Normal Inverse A=0.0086, B=0.0185, P=0.02, tr=0.46
ANSI Moderately Inverse A=0.0515, B=0.1140, P=0.02, tr=4.85
ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse A=64.07, B=0.250, P=2.0, tr=30
ANSI Long Time Very Inverse A=28.55, B=0.712, P=2.0, tr=13.46
ANSI Long Time Inverse A=0.086, B=0.185, P=0.02, tr=4.6

Table 819: ANSI Inverse time characteristics for Line differential protection
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operating characteristic: 0.05 ≤ k ≤ 1.10 ANSI/IEEE C37.112 ,
±5.0% or ±40 ms
whichever is greater
æ A ö
t =ç P + B÷×k
è (
ç I -1 ÷
ø )
EQUATION1249-SMALL V3 EN-US

Reset characteristic:

tr
t = ×k
(I 2
-1)
EQUATION1250-SMALL V1 EN-US

I = Imeasured/Iset

ANSI Extremely Inverse A=28.2, B=0.1217, P=2.0 , tr=29.1

ANSI Very inverse A=19.61, B=0.491, P=2.0 , tr=21.6
ANSI Normal Inverse A=0.0086, B=0.0185, P=0.02, tr=0.46
ANSI Moderately Inverse A=0.0515, B=0.1140, P=0.02, tr=4.85
ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse A=64.07, B=0.250, P=2.0, tr=30
ANSI Long Time Very Inverse A=28.55, B=0.712, P=2.0, tr=13.46
ANSI Long Time Inverse A=0.086, B=0.185, P=0.02, tr=4.6

886
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 24
Inverse time characteristics

Table 820: IEC Inverse time characteristics

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operating characteristic: 0.05 ≤ k ≤ 999.00 IEC 60255-151, ±2.0%
1.5 x Iset ≤ I ≤ 20 x Iset or ±40 ms whichever
æ A ö is greater
t = ç P ÷×k
ç ( I - 1) ÷
è ø
EQUATION1251-SMALL V1 EN-US

I = Imeasured/Iset

IEC Normal Inverse A=0.14, P=0.02

IEC Very inverse A=13.5, P=1.0
IEC Inverse A=0.14, P=0.02
IEC Extremely inverse A=80.0, P=2.0
IEC Short time inverse A=0.05, P=0.04
IEC Long time inverse A=120, P=1.0
Programmable characteristic k = (0.05-999) in steps of 0.01
Operate characteristic: A=(0.005-200.000) in steps of 0.001
B=(0.00-20.00) in steps of 0.01
æ A ö C=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
t = ç P + B÷ × k P=(0.005-3.000) in steps of 0.001
ç (I - C ) ÷ TR=(0.005-100.000) in steps of 0.001
è ø CR=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
EQUATION1370-SMALL V1 EN-US
PR=(0.005-3.000) in steps of 0.001
Reset characteristic:

TR
t = ×k
(I PR
- CR )
EQUATION1253-SMALL V1 EN-US

I = Imeasured/Iset

The parameter setting Characteristn = Reserved (where, n = 1 - 4) shall not be

used, since this parameter setting is for future use and not implemented yet.

887
Technical manual
Section 24 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Inverse time characteristics

Table 821: IEC Inverse time characteristics for Line differential protection
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operating characteristic: 0.05 ≤ k ≤ 1.10 IEC 60255-151, ±5.0%
or ±40 ms whichever
æ A ö is greater
t = ç P ÷×k
ç ( I - 1) ÷
è ø
EQUATION1251-SMALL V1 EN-US

I = Imeasured/Iset

IEC Normal Inverse A=0.14, P=0.02

IEC Very inverse A=13.5, P=1.0
IEC Inverse A=0.14, P=0.02
IEC Extremely inverse A=80.0, P=2.0
IEC Short time inverse A=0.05, P=0.04
IEC Long time inverse A=120, P=1.0
Programmable characteristic k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01
Operate characteristic: A=(0.005-200.000) in steps of 0.001
B=(0.00-20.00) in steps of 0.01
æ A ö C=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
t = ç P + B÷ × k P=(0.005-3.000) in steps of 0.001
ç (I - C ) ÷ TR=(0.005-100.000) in steps of 0.001
è ø CR=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
EQUATION1370-SMALL V1 EN-US
PR=(0.005-3.000) in steps of 0.001
Reset characteristic:

TR
t = ×k
(I PR
- CR )
EQUATION1253-SMALL V1 EN-US

I = Imeasured/Iset

Table 822: RI and RD type inverse time characteristics

Function Range or value Accuracy
RI type inverse characteristic 0.05 ≤ k ≤ 999.00 IEC 60255-151, ±2.0%
1.5 x Iset ≤ I ≤ 20 x Iset or ±40 ms whichever
1 is greater
t = ×k
0.236
0.339 -
I
EQUATION1137-SMALL V1 EN-US

I = Imeasured/Iset

RD type logarithmic inverse

characteristic

æ Iö
t = 5.8 - ç 1.35 × In ÷
è kø
EQUATION1138-SMALL V1 EN-US

I = Imeasured/Iset

888
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 24
Inverse time characteristics

Table 823: RI and RD type inverse time characteristics for Line differential protection
Function Range or value Accuracy
RI type inverse characteristic 0.05 ≤ k ≤ 1.10 IEC 60255-151, ±5.0%
or ±40 ms whichever
1 is greater
t = ×k
0.236
0.339 -
I
EQUATION1137-SMALL V1 EN-US

I = Imeasured/Iset

RD type logarithmic inverse

characteristic

æ I ö
t = 5.8 - ç 1.35 × In ÷
è k ø
EQUATION1138-SMALL V1 EN-US

I = Imeasured/Iset

GUID-19F8E187-4ED0-48C3-92F6-0D9EAA2B39BB v4

Table 824: ANSI Inverse time characteristics for Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operating characteristic: 0.05 ≤ k ≤ 2.00 ANSI/IEEE C37.112 ,
1.5 x Iset ≤ I ≤ 20 x Iset ±5.0% or ±160 ms
whichever is greater
æ A ö
t =ç P + B÷×k
è (
ç I -1 ÷
ø )
EQUATION1249-SMALL V3 EN-US

Reset characteristic:

tr
t = ×k
(I 2
-1 )
EQUATION1250-SMALL V1 EN-US

I = Imeasured/Iset

ANSI Extremely Inverse A=28.2, B=0.1217, P=2.0 , tr=29.1

ANSI Very inverse A=19.61, B=0.491, P=2.0 , tr=21.6
ANSI Normal Inverse A=0.0086, B=0.0185, P=0.02, tr=0.46
ANSI Moderately Inverse A=0.0515, B=0.1140, P=0.02, tr=4.85
ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse A=64.07, B=0.250, P=2.0, tr=30
ANSI Long Time Very Inverse A=28.55, B=0.712, P=2.0, tr=13.46
ANSI Long Time Inverse A=0.086, B=0.185, P=0.02, tr=4.6

889
Technical manual
Section 24 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Inverse time characteristics

Table 825: IEC Inverse time characteristics for Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operating characteristic: 0.05 ≤ k ≤ 2.00 IEC 60255-151, ±5.0%
1.5 x Iset ≤ I ≤ 20 x Iset or ±160 ms whichever
æ A ö is greater
t = ç P ÷×k
ç ( I - 1) ÷
è ø
EQUATION1251-SMALL V1 EN-US

I = Imeasured/Iset

IEC Normal Inverse A=0.14, P=0.02

IEC Very inverse A=13.5, P=1.0
IEC Inverse A=0.14, P=0.02
IEC Extremely inverse A=80.0, P=2.0
IEC Short time inverse A=0.05, P=0.04
IEC Long time inverse A=120, P=1.0
Programmable characteristic k = (0.05-2.00) in steps of 0.01
Operate characteristic: A=(0.005-200.000) in steps of 0.001
B=(0.00-20.00) in steps of 0.01
æ A ö C=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
t = ç P + B÷ × k P=(0.005-3.000) in steps of 0.001
ç (I - C ) ÷ TR=(0.005-100.000) in steps of 0.001
è ø CR=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
EQUATION1370-SMALL V1 EN-US
PR=(0.005-3.000) in steps of 0.001
Reset characteristic:

TR
t = ×k
(I PR
- CR )
EQUATION1253-SMALL V1 EN-US

I = Imeasured/Iset

The parameter setting TimeChar = Reserved shall not be used, since this
parameter setting is for future use and not implemented yet.

Table 826: RI and RD type inverse time characteristics for Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power
protection
Function Range or value Accuracy
RI type inverse characteristic 0.05 ≤ k ≤ 2.00 IEC 60255-151, ±5.0%
1.5 x Iset ≤ I ≤ 20 x Iset or ±160 ms whichever
1 is greater
t = ×k
0.236
0.339 -
I
EQUATION1137-SMALL V1 EN-US

I = Imeasured/Iset

RD type logarithmic inverse

characteristic

æ I ö
t = 5.8 - ç 1.35 × In ÷
è k ø
EQUATION1138-SMALL V1 EN-US

I = Imeasured/Iset

890
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 24
Inverse time characteristics

GUID-2AE8C92E-5DA8-487F-927D-8E553EE29240 v2

Table 827: ANSI Inverse time characteristics for Voltage restrained time overcurrent protection
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operating characteristic: 0.05 ≤ k ≤ 999.00 ANSI/IEEE C37.112 , ±
5.0% or ±40 ms
whichever is greater
æ A ö
t =ç P + B÷×k
è (
ç I -1 ÷
ø )
EQUATION1249-SMALL V3 EN-US

Reset characteristic:

tr
t = ×k
(I 2
-1 )
EQUATION1250-SMALL V1 EN-US

I = Imeasured/Iset

ANSI Extremely Inverse A=28.2, B=0.1217, P=2.0 , tr=29.1

ANSI Very inverse A=19.61, B=0.491, P=2.0 , tr=21.6
ANSI Normal Inverse A=0.0086, B=0.0185, P=0.02, tr=0.46
ANSI Moderately Inverse A=0.0515, B=0.1140, P=0.02, tr=4.85
ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse A=64.07, B=0.250, P=2.0, tr=30
ANSI Long Time Very Inverse A=28.55, B=0.712, P=2.0, tr=13.46
ANSI Long Time Inverse A=0.086, B=0.185, P=0.02, tr=4.6

Table 828: IEC Inverse time characteristics for Voltage restrained time overcurrent protection
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operating characteristic: 0.05 ≤ k ≤ 999.00 IEC 60255-151, ±5.0%
or ±40 ms whichever
æ A ö is greater
t = ç P ÷×k
ç ( I - 1) ÷
è ø
EQUATION1251-SMALL V1 EN-US

I = Imeasured/Iset

IEC Normal Inverse A=0.14, P=0.02

IEC Very inverse A=13.5, P=1.0
IEC Inverse A=0.14, P=0.02
IEC Extremely inverse A=80.0, P=2.0
IEC Short time inverse A=0.05, P=0.04
IEC Long time inverse A=120, P=1.0

891
Technical manual
Section 24 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Inverse time characteristics

SEMOD116978-2 v10

Table 829: Inverse time characteristics for overvoltage protection

Function Range or value Accuracy
Type A curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01 ±5.0% or ±45 ms
whichever is greater
k
t =
æU -U >ö
ç ÷
è U> ø
EQUATION1436-SMALL V1 EN-US

U> = Uset
U = Umeasured

Type B curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01

k  480
t 2.0
 0.035
 U  Un  
 32   0.5 
 Un  

IECEQUATION2423 V2 EN-US

Type C curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01

k × 480
t= 3.0
+ 0.035
æ U - Un > ö
ç 32 × - 0.5 ÷
è U> ø
IECEQUATION2421 V1 EN-US

Programmable curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01

A = (0.005-200.000) in steps of
k×A 0.001
t = +D B = (0.50-100.00) in steps of 0.01
P
æB × U -U > ö C = (0.0-1.0) in steps of 0.1
ç -C÷
D = (0.000-60.000) in steps of
è U > ø
EQUATION1439-SMALL V1 EN-US
0.001
P = (0.000-3.000) in steps of 0.001

892
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 24
Inverse time characteristics

Table 830: Inverse time characteristics for undervoltage protection

Function Range or value Accuracy
Type A curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01 ±5.0% or ±45 ms
whichever is greater
k
t =
æ U < -U ö
ç ÷
è U< ø
EQUATION1431-SMALL V1 EN-US

U< = Uset
U = Umeasured

Type B curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01

k × 480
t = + 0.055
2.0
æ 32 × U < -U - 0.5 ö
ç ÷
è U < ø
EQUATION1432-SMALL V1 EN-US

U< = Uset
U = Umeasured

Programmable curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01

A = (0.005-200.000) in steps of
é ù 0.001
ê ú B = (0.50-100.00) in steps of 0.01
k×A C = (0.0-1.0) in steps of 0.1
t =ê ú+D
ê æ U < -U P
ú D = (0.000-60.000) in steps of
ö
êçB × -C÷ ú 0.001
ëè U < ø û P = (0.000-3.000) in steps of
EQUATION1433-SMALL V1 EN-US
0.001
U< = Uset
U = Umeasured

893
Technical manual
Section 24 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Inverse time characteristics

Table 831: Inverse time characteristics for residual overvoltage protection

Function Range or value Accuracy
Type A curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps ±5.0% or ±45 ms whichever is
of 0.01 greater
k
t =
æU -U >ö
ç ÷
è U > ø
EQUATION1436-SMALL V1 EN-US

U> = Uset
U = Umeasured

Type B curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps

of 0.01
k ⋅ 480
t = + 0.035
2.0
 32 ⋅ U − U > − 0.5 
 
 U > 
EQUATION1437-SMALL V2 EN-US

Type C curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps

of 0.01
k ⋅ 480
t = + 0.035
3.0
 32 ⋅ U − U > − 0.5 
 
 U > 
EQUATION1438-SMALL V2 EN-US

Programmable curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps

of 0.01
k×A A = (0.005-200.000) in
t = +D steps of 0.001
P
æB × U - U > ö B = (0.50-100.00) in
ç -C÷ steps of 0.01
è U > ø
EQUATION1439-SMALL V1 EN-US
C = (0.0-1.0) in steps of
0.1
D = (0.000-60.000) in
steps of 0.001
P = (0.000-3.000) in
steps of 0.001

894
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 24
Inverse time characteristics

SEMOD118114-4 v4

A070750 V2 EN-US

Figure 484: ANSI Extremely inverse time characteristics

895
Technical manual
Section 24 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Inverse time characteristics

A070751 V2 EN-US

Figure 485: ANSI Very inverse time characteristics

896
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 24
Inverse time characteristics

A070752 V2 EN-US

Figure 486: ANSI Normal inverse time characteristics

897
Technical manual
Section 24 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Inverse time characteristics

A070753 V2 EN-US

Figure 487: ANSI Moderately inverse time characteristics

898
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 24
Inverse time characteristics

A070817 V2 EN-US

Figure 488: ANSI Long time extremely inverse time characteristics

899
Technical manual
Section 24 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Inverse time characteristics

A070818 V2 EN-US

Figure 489: ANSI Long time very inverse time characteristics

900
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 24
Inverse time characteristics

A070819 V2 EN-US

Figure 490: ANSI Long time inverse time characteristics

901
Technical manual
Section 24 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Inverse time characteristics

A070820 V2 EN-US

Figure 491: IEC Normal inverse time characteristics

902
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 24
Inverse time characteristics

A070821 V2 EN-US

Figure 492: IEC Very inverse time characteristics

903
Technical manual
Section 24 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Inverse time characteristics

A070822 V2 EN-US

Figure 493: IEC Inverse time characteristics

904
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 24
Inverse time characteristics

A070823 V2 EN-US

Figure 494: IEC Extremely inverse time characteristics

905
Technical manual
Section 24 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Inverse time characteristics

A070824 V2 EN-US

Figure 495: IEC Short time inverse time characteristics

906
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 24
Inverse time characteristics

A070825 V2 EN-US

Figure 496: IEC Long time inverse time characteristics

907
Technical manual
Section 24 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Inverse time characteristics

A070826 V2 EN-US

Figure 497: RI-type inverse time characteristics

908
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 24
Inverse time characteristics

A070827 V2 EN-US

Figure 498: RD-type inverse time characteristics

909
Technical manual
Section 24 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Inverse time characteristics

GUID-ACF4044C-052E-4CBD-8247-C6ABE3796FA6 V1 EN-US

Figure 499: Inverse curve A characteristic of overvoltage protection

910
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 24
Inverse time characteristics

GUID-F5E0E1C2-48C8-4DC7-A84B-174544C09142 V1 EN-US

Figure 500: Inverse curve B characteristic of overvoltage protection

911
Technical manual
Section 24 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Inverse time characteristics

GUID-A9898DB7-90A3-47F2-AEF9-45FF148CB679 V1 EN-US

Figure 501: Inverse curve C characteristic of overvoltage protection

912
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 24
Inverse time characteristics

GUID-35F40C3B-B483-40E6-9767-69C1536E3CBC V1 EN-US

Figure 502: Inverse curve A characteristic of undervoltage protection

913
Technical manual
Section 24 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Inverse time characteristics

GUID-B55D0F5F-9265-4D9A-A7C0-E274AA3A6BB1 V1 EN-US

Figure 503: Inverse curve B characteristic of undervoltage protection

914
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 25
Glossary

Section 25 Glossary M14893-1 v15

AC Alternating current
ACC Actual channel
ACT Application configuration tool within PCM600
A/D converter Analog-to-digital converter
ADBS Amplitude deadband supervision
ADM Analog digital conversion module, with time synchronization
AI Analog input
ANSI American National Standards Institute
AR Autoreclosing
ASCT Auxiliary summation current transformer
ASD Adaptive signal detection
ASDU Application service data unit
AWG American Wire Gauge standard
BBP Busbar protection
BFOC/2,5 Bayonet fiber optic connector
BFP Breaker failure protection
BI Binary input
BIM Binary input module
BOM Binary output module
BOS Binary outputs status
BR External bistable relay
BS British Standards
BSR Binary signal transfer function, receiver blocks
BST Binary signal transfer function, transmit blocks
C37.94 IEEE/ANSI protocol used when sending binary signals between IEDs
CAN Controller Area Network. ISO standard (ISO 11898) for serial
communication
CB Circuit breaker
CBM Combined backplane module
CCITT Consultative Committee for International Telegraph and Telephony. A
United Nations-sponsored standards body within the International
Telecommunications Union.
CCM CAN carrier module
CCVT Capacitive Coupled Voltage Transformer
Class C Protection Current Transformer class as per IEEE/ ANSI
CMPPS Combined megapulses per second
CMT Communication Management tool in PCM600

915
Technical manual
Section 25 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Glossary

CO cycle Close-open cycle

Codirectional Way of transmitting G.703 over a balanced line. Involves two twisted
pairs making it possible to transmit information in both directions
COM Command
COMTRADE Standard Common Format for Transient Data Exchange format for
Disturbance recorder according to IEEE/ANSI C37.111, 1999 / IEC
60255-24
Contra-directional Way of transmitting G.703 over a balanced line. Involves four twisted
pairs, two of which are used for transmitting data in both directions
and two for transmitting clock signals
COT Cause of transmission
CPU Central processing unit
CR Carrier receive
CRC Cyclic redundancy check
CROB Control relay output block
CS Carrier send
CT Current transformer
CU Communication unit
CVT or CCVT Capacitive voltage transformer
DAR Delayed autoreclosing
DARPA Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency (The US developer of the
TCP/IP protocol etc.)
DBDL Dead bus dead line
DBLL Dead bus live line
DC Direct current
DFC Data flow control
DFT Discrete Fourier transform
DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
DIP-switch Small switch mounted on a printed circuit board
DI Digital input
DLLB Dead line live bus
DNP Distributed Network Protocol as per IEEE Std 1815-2012
DR Disturbance recorder
DRAM Dynamic random access memory
DRH Disturbance report handler
DSP Digital signal processor
DTT Direct transfer trip scheme
EHV network Extra high voltage network
EIA Electronic Industries Association
EMC Electromagnetic compatibility
EMF Electromotive force
EMI Electromagnetic interference

916
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 25
Glossary

EnFP End fault protection

EPA Enhanced performance architecture
ESD Electrostatic discharge
F-SMA Type of optical fiber connector
FAN Fault number
FCB Flow control bit; Frame count bit
FOX 20 Modular 20 channel telecommunication system for speech, data and
protection signals
FOX 512/515 Access multiplexer
FOX 6Plus Compact time-division multiplexer for the transmission of up to seven
duplex channels of digital data over optical fibers
FTP File Transfer Protocol
FUN Function type
G.703 Electrical and functional description for digital lines used by local
telephone companies. Can be transported over balanced and
unbalanced lines
GCM Communication interface module with carrier of GPS receiver module
GDE Graphical display editor within PCM600
GI General interrogation command
GIS Gas-insulated switchgear
GOOSE Generic object-oriented substation event
GPS Global positioning system
GSAL Generic security application
GSE Generic substation event
HDLC protocol High-level data link control, protocol based on the HDLC standard
HFBR connector type Plastic fiber connector
HMI Human-machine interface
HSAR High speed autoreclosing
HV High-voltage
HVDC High-voltage direct current
IDBS Integrating deadband supervision
IEC International Electrical Committee
IEC 60044-6 IEC Standard, Instrument transformers – Part 6: Requirements for
protective current transformers for transient performance
IEC 60870-5-103 Communication standard for protection equipment. A serial master/
slave protocol for point-to-point communication
IEC 61850 Substation automation communication standard
IEC 61850–8–1 Communication protocol standard
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IEEE 802.12 A network technology standard that provides 100 Mbits/s on twisted-
pair or optical fiber cable
IEEE P1386.1 PCI Mezzanine Card (PMC) standard for local bus modules. References
the CMC (IEEE P1386, also known as Common Mezzanine Card)

917
Technical manual
Section 25 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Glossary

standard for the mechanics and the PCI specifications from the PCI SIG
(Special Interest Group) for the electrical EMF (Electromotive force).
IEEE 1686 Standard for Substation Intelligent Electronic Devices (IEDs) Cyber
Security Capabilities
IED Intelligent electronic device
I-GIS Intelligent gas-insulated switchgear
IOM Binary input/output module
Instance When several occurrences of the same function are available in the IED,
they are referred to as instances of that function. One instance of a
function is identical to another of the same kind but has a different
number in the IED user interfaces. The word "instance" is sometimes
defined as an item of information that is representative of a type. In
the same way an instance of a function in the IED is representative of a
type of function.
IP 1. Internet protocol. The network layer for the TCP/IP protocol suite
widely used on Ethernet networks. IP is a connectionless, best-effort
packet-switching protocol. It provides packet routing, fragmentation
and reassembly through the data link layer.
2. Ingression protection, according to IEC 60529
IP 20 Ingression protection, according to IEC 60529, level 20
IP 40 Ingression protection, according to IEC 60529, level 40
IP 54 Ingression protection, according to IEC 60529, level 54
IRF Internal failure signal
IRIG-B: InterRange Instrumentation Group Time code format B, standard 200
ITU International Telecommunications Union
LAN Local area network
LIB 520 High-voltage software module
LCD Liquid crystal display
LDCM Line differential communication module
LDD Local detection device
LED Light-emitting diode
LNT LON network tool
LON Local operating network
MCB Miniature circuit breaker
MCM Mezzanine carrier module
MPM Main processing module
MVAL Value of measurement
MVB Multifunction vehicle bus. Standardized serial bus originally developed
for use in trains.
NCC National Control Centre
NOF Number of grid faults
NUM Numerical module
OCO cycle Open-close-open cycle
OCP Overcurrent protection
OEM Optical Ethernet module

918
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 25
Glossary

OLTC On-load tap changer

OTEV Disturbance data recording initiated by other event than start/pick-up
OV Overvoltage
Overreach A term used to describe how the relay behaves during a fault condition.
For example, a distance relay is overreaching when the impedance
presented to it is smaller than the apparent impedance to the fault
applied to the balance point, that is, the set reach. The relay “sees” the
fault but perhaps it should not have seen it.
PCI Peripheral component interconnect, a local data bus
PCM Pulse code modulation
PCM600 Protection and control IED manager
PC-MIP Mezzanine card standard
PMC PCI Mezzanine card
POR Permissive overreach
POTT Permissive overreach transfer trip
Process bus Bus or LAN used at the process level, that is, in near proximity to the
measured and/or controlled components
PSM Power supply module
PST Parameter setting tool within PCM600
PT ratio Potential transformer or voltage transformer ratio
PUTT Permissive underreach transfer trip
RASC Synchrocheck relay, COMBIFLEX
RCA Relay characteristic angle
RISC Reduced instruction set computer
RMS value Root mean square value
RS422 A balanced serial interface for the transmission of digital data in point-
to-point connections
RS485 Serial link according to EIA standard RS485
RTC Real-time clock
RTU Remote terminal unit
SA Substation Automation
SBO Select-before-operate
SC Switch or push button to close
SCL Short circuit location
SCS Station control system
SCADA Supervision, control and data acquisition
SCT System configuration tool according to standard IEC 61850
SDU Service data unit
SLM Serial communication module.
SMA connector Subminiature version A, A threaded connector with constant
impedance.
SMT Signal matrix tool within PCM600
SMS Station monitoring system

919
Technical manual
Section 25 1MRK 505 364-UEN B
Glossary

SNTP Simple network time protocol – is used to synchronize computer clocks

on local area networks. This reduces the requirement to have accurate
hardware clocks in every embedded system in a network. Each
embedded node can instead synchronize with a remote clock,
providing the required accuracy.
SOF Status of fault
SPA Strömberg Protection Acquisition (SPA), a serial master/slave protocol
for point-to-point and ring communication.
SRY Switch for CB ready condition
ST Switch or push button to trip
Starpoint Neutral point of transformer or generator
SVC Static VAr compensation
TC Trip coil
TCS Trip circuit supervision
TCP Transmission control protocol. The most common transport layer
protocol used on Ethernet and the Internet.
TCP/IP Transmission control protocol over Internet Protocol. The de facto
standard Ethernet protocols incorporated into 4.2BSD Unix. TCP/IP
was developed by DARPA for Internet working and encompasses both
network layer and transport layer protocols. While TCP and IP specify
two protocols at specific protocol layers, TCP/IP is often used to refer
to the entire US Department of Defense protocol suite based upon
these, including Telnet, FTP, UDP and RDP.
TEF Time delayed earth-fault protection function
TLS Transport Layer Security
TM Transmit (disturbance data)
TNC connector Threaded Neill-Concelman, a threaded constant impedance version of a
BNC connector
TP Trip (recorded fault)
TPZ, TPY, TPX, TPS Current transformer class according to IEC
TRM Transformer Module. This module transforms currents and voltages
taken from the process into levels suitable for further signal
processing.
TYP Type identification
UMT User management tool
Underreach A term used to describe how the relay behaves during a fault condition.
For example, a distance relay is underreaching when the impedance
presented to it is greater than the apparent impedance to the fault
applied to the balance point, that is, the set reach. The relay does not
“see” the fault but perhaps it should have seen it. See also Overreach.
UTC Coordinated Universal Time. A coordinated time scale, maintained by
the Bureau International des Poids et Mesures (BIPM), which forms the
basis of a coordinated dissemination of standard frequencies and time
signals. UTC is derived from International Atomic Time (TAI) by the
addition of a whole number of "leap seconds" to synchronize it with
Universal Time 1 (UT1), thus allowing for the eccentricity of the Earth's
orbit, the rotational axis tilt (23.5 degrees), but still showing the Earth's
irregular rotation, on which UT1 is based. The Coordinated Universal
Time is expressed using a 24-hour clock, and uses the Gregorian
calendar. It is used for aeroplane and ship navigation, where it is also

920
Technical manual
1MRK 505 364-UEN B Section 25
Glossary

sometimes known by the military name, "Zulu time." "Zulu" in the

phonetic alphabet stands for "Z", which stands for longitude zero.
UV Undervoltage
WEI Weak end infeed logic
VT Voltage transformer
3IO Three times zero-sequence current.Often referred to as the residual or
the earth-fault current
3UO Three times the zero sequence voltage. Often referred to as the
residual voltage or the neutral point voltage

921
Technical manual
922
923
ABB AB
Substation Automation Products
SE-721 59 Västerås, Sweden
Phone +46 (0) 21 32 50 00
Scan this QR code to visit our website
www.abb.com/protection-control
1MRK 505 364-UEN

© Copyright 2016 ABB.

All rights reserved.